April 1, 2019 Amendment/GSP Update Package · April 1, 2019 Amendment and GSP Official Update...

April 1, 2019 Amendment and GSP Official Update Package The following contains the Amendments & GSPs that consist of the April 1, 2019 Update Package. Only the changed documents are included in this package and any unchanged sections from the last update are not included. To view all Amendments and GSPs, please visit our website: www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/SpecificationsAmendmentsGSPs The package is set up with three parts. The first part is an itemized list of the file names and a brief description of the change. The second part is the Amendments with a memo detailing the changes. The third part is the GSPs with a memo detailing the changes. Please use the PDF bookmarks to navigate around this update package electronically. If you choose to print this package, we suggest printing double sided to save paper and it is formatted to start new sub-sections on the right hand page.

Please note that this is the last scheduled update package – the next planned update will be the release of the 2020 Standard Specifications book in September. For questions, comments, or concerns, please email us at [email protected].

The Standard Specifications book is going electronic!

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/NR/rdonlyres/D670ADBB-92D3-4E53-9D50-8893366E11DD/0/ElectronicStandardSpecificationsImplementation.pdf

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

Changes that occurred for the last quarterly update package (April 1, 2019)

Posted: April 1, 2019

Update Corresponding Indexes

File GSP/Amendment Date of Change Revision/Deletion/Rename/New

1-07.AP1 Amendment 4/1/2019 Revised

2-01.AP2 Amendment 4/1/2019 New
















1-07.5.OPT1(C).FR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 New

1-07.5.OPT1(H).GR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Renamed to 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).GR1

1-07.5.OPT1(V).GR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted

1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).FR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised/Renamed to 1-07.5.OPT1(B).FR1

1-07.5(5).OPT1(G).FR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Renamed to 1-07.5.OPT1(A).FR1

1-07.5(6).OPT1(A).FR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted

1-10.1.OPT2.FR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised/Renamed to 1-10.1.OPT2.GR1

1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).OPT1.GR1 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised

2-01.3(2).INST1.GR2 GSP Instruction 4/1/2019 Deleted

2-01.3(2).OPT1.GR2 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted

2-09.3(3)B.OPT2.FR2 GSP Option 4/1/2019 New

6-01.5.OPT1.FB6 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised

6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6 BSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted


6-09.3(1)H.INST1.GR6 GSP Instruction 4/1/2019 Deleted

6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6 BSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted

6-09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6 BSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted

6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6 BSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted








6-09.5.INST1.GR6 GSP Instruction 4/1/2019 Deleted



8-01.1.INST1.GR8 GSP Instruction 4/1/2019 New

8-01.1.OPT1.GR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 New





8-01.3(2)C.INST1.GR8 GSP Instruction 4/1/2019 Deleted

8-01.3(2)C.OPT1.FR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Deleted

8-01.4(4).GR8 GSP Heading 4/1/2019 New

8-01.4(4).INST1.GR8 GSP Instruction 4/1/2019 New

8-01.4(4).OPT1.GR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 New

8-01.5(4).GR8 GSP Heading 4/1/2019 New

8-01.5(4).INST1.GR8 GSP Instruction 4/1/2019 New

8-01.5(4).OPT1.FR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 New

8-11.1.OPT2.GR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised

8-11.2.OPT4.GR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised

8-11.3.OPT4.FR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised

8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT5.GR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised

8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT6.GR8 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised


STDPLANS.GR9 GSP Option 4/1/2019 Revised

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

Amendments to the 2018 Standard Specifications Effective April 1, 2019

April 1, 2019 Page 1 of 3 GDM:rah

Please note: New Amendments to the 2018 Standard Specifications are described below. Amendments to the Standard Specifications take precedence over the Standard Specifications in accordance with Section 1-04.2. The following is a brief description of the latest amendments, with an explanation of why the change was made. The actual amendment should be reviewed in depth to become completely knowledgeable of the full extent of the amendment. These amendments are available at the following location: http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/SpecificationsAmendmentsGSPs.htm INTRODUCTION N/A DIVISION 1 – General Requirements 1-07.16(2)A Wetland and Sensitive Area Protection This amendment revises the term environmentally sensitive area to read sensitive area. Sensitive Area is now defined in the Standard Specifications. DIVISION 2 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment 2-01.2(3) Disposal Method No. 3 – Chipping This amendment revises the term environmentally sensitive area to read sensitive area. Sensitive Area is now defined in the Standard Specifications. 2-03.3(14)F Displacement of Unsuitable Foundation Materials This amendment vacates this section, as the language is now outdated. 2-09.3(3)B Excavation Using Open Pits – Extra Excavation These amendments update this section so that slopes between 4 feet and 20 feet that have soil types and slope geometries defined in WAC 296-155 part N do not require a design by an engineer, unless required by the WAC. With these updates, Type 2 Working Drawings are acceptable, except as otherwise required in the WAC, in which case Type 2E Working Drawings would be required. A new GSP in this section (included in this update package) allows for designers to implement the more stringent engineering requirements into projects where it is necessary. DIVISION 3 – Acceptance of Aggregate N/A DIVISION 4 – Ballast and Crushed Surfacing N/A DIVISION 5 – Surface Treatments and Pavements 5-02.3(5) Application of Aggregates



This amendment revises the term environmentally sensitive area to read sensitive area. Sensitive Area is now defined in the Standard Specifications. 5-04.3(3)A Mixing Plant This amendment requires mechanical samplers to be approved by the Engineer. 5-04.3(10)A HMA Compaction – General Compaction Requirements The revisions to this section update requirements for rollers on bridge decks. 5-05.2 Materials This amendment removes the reference to metakaolin. DIVISION 6 – Structures 6-02.2 Materials This amendment removes the reference to metakaolin. 6-02.3(2) Proportioning Materials This amendment removes the reference to metakaolin. 6-18.2 Materials This amendment removes the reference to metakaolin. DIVISION 7 – Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers, Water Mains and Conduits N/A DIVISION 8 – Miscellaneous Construction 8-01 (Multiple Sections) These amendments add definitions, move the remaining requirements dealing with permanent work into the new rewrite of Section 8-02 and updates the requirement for environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids. 8-02 (Total Replacement) This is a total rewrite of Section 8-02 to only include permanent roadside restoration work and update the requirements to current standards. There are significant modifications to Topsoil requirements, area Preparation and Soil Amendment requirements. DIVISION 9 – Materials 9-20.3(3) Grout Type 3 for Unconfined Bearing Pad Applications The amendment to this section updates the section title to Grout Type 3 for Unconfined Applications. 9-23.12 Natural Pozzolan This amendment removes the reference to metakaolin.



9-23.13 Blended Supplementary Cementitious Material This amendment removes the reference to metakaolin. 9-28.2 Manufacturer’s Identification and Date The update to this section requires that the Contract number is added to the information on the back of signs.

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

CODE TITLE

Index - Amendments EAMEND.docx January 7April 1, 2019 Page 1

1 INTRO.AP1 Introduction 2

(January 2, 2018) 3 Include In All Projects. 4

5 1-01.AP1 Definitions and Terms 6

(August 6, 2018) 7 Include In All Projects. 8

9 1-02.AP1 Bid Procedures and Conditions 10

(October 30, 2018) 11 Include In All Projects. 12

13 1-03.AP1 Award and Execution of Contract 14


17 1-05.AP1 Control of Work 18


21 1-06.AP1 Control of Material 22


25 1-07.AP1 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public 26

(August 6, 2018April 1, 2019) 27 Include In All Projects. 28

29 1-08.AP1 Prosecution and Progress 30


33 1-09.AP1 Measurement and Payment 34


37 2-01.AP2 Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup 38

(April 1, 2019) 39 Include In All Projects. 40

41 2-02.AP2 Removal of Structures and Obstructions 42


45 2-03.AP2 Roadway Excavation and Embankment 46

(April 1, 2019 47 Include In All Projects. 48

49 2-09.AP2 Structure Excavation 50


53 3-01.AP3 Production from Quarry and Pit Sites 54

(April 2, 2018) 55

CODE TITLE


Include In All Projects. 1 2 4-04.AP4 Ballast and Crushed Surfacing 3


6 5-01.AP5 Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation 7


10 5-02.AP5 Bituminous Surface Treatment 11


14 5-04.AP5 Hot Mix Asphalt 15

(January 7April 1, 2019) 16 Include In All Projects. 17

18 5-05.AP5 Cement Concrete Pavement 19


22 6-01.AP6 General Requirements for Structures 23


26 6-02.AP6 Concrete Structures 27


30 6-03.AP6 Steel Structures 31


34 6-05.AP6 Piling 35


38 6-07.AP6 Painting 39


42 6-08.AP6 Bituminous Surfacing on Structure Decks 43


46 6-09.AP6 Modified Concrete Overlays 47


50 6-10.AP6 Concrete Barrier 51


54 6-11.AP6 Reinforced Concrete Walls 55

CODE TITLE



3 6-12.AP6 Noise Barrier Walls 4


7 6-13.AP6 Structural Earth Walls 8


11 6-14.AP6 Geosynthetic Retaining Walls 12


15 6-15.AP6 Soil Nail Walls 16


19 6-16.AP6 Soldier Pile and Soldier Pile Tieback Walls 20


23 6-18.AP6 Shotcrete Facing 24

(January 2, 2018April 1, 2019) 25 Include In All Projects. 26

27 6-19.AP6 Shafts 28


31 7-02.AP7 Culverts 32


35 7-05.AP7 Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells 36


39 7-08.AP7 General Pipe Installation Requirements 40


43 8-01.AP8 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control 44


47 8-02.AP8 Roadside Restoration 48

(January 2, 2018April 1, 2019) 49 Include In All Projects. 50

51 8-04.AP8 Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways 52


55

CODE TITLE


8-06.AP8 Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances 1 (April 2, 2018) 2 Include In All Projects. 3

4 8-07.AP8 Precast Traffic Curb 5


8 8-09.AP8 Raised Pavement Markers 9


12 8-11.AP8 Guardrail 13

(August 6, 2018April 1, 2019) 14 Include In All Projects. 15

16 8-14.AP8 Cement Concrete Sidewalks 17


20 8-16.AP8 Concrete Slope Protection 21


24 8-17.AP8 Impact Attenuator Systems 25


28 8-20.AP8 Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation 29

Systems, and Electrical 30 (August 6, 2018) 31 Include In All Projects. 32

33 8-21.AP8 Permanent Signing 34


37 8-22.AP8 Pavement Marking 38


41 9-00.AP9 Definitions and Tests 42


45 9-02.AP9 Bituminous Materials 46


49 9-03.AP9 Aggregates 50


53 9-04.AP9 Joint and Crack Sealing Materials 54

(January 7, 2019) 55

CODE TITLE


Include In All Projects. 1 2 9-05.AP9 Drainage Structures and Culverts 3


6 9-06.AP9 Structural Steel and Related Materials 7


10 9-07.AP9 Reinforcing Steel 11


14 9-08.AP9 Paints and Related Materials 15


18 9-13.AP9 Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and 19

Scour Protection and Rock Walls 20 (April 2, 2018) 21 Include In All Projects. 22

23 9-14.AP9 Erosion Control and Roadside Planting 24


27 9-16.AP9 Fence and Guardrail 28


31 9-18.AP9 Precast Traffic Curb 32


35 9-20.AP9 Concrete Patching Material, Grout, and Mortar 36


39 9-21.AP9 Raised Pavement Markers (RPM) 40


43 9-23.AP9 Concrete Curing Materials and Admixtures 44


47 9-26.AP9 Epoxy Resins 48


51 9-28.AP9 Signing Materials and Fabrication 52


55

CODE TITLE


9-29.AP9 Illumination, Signal, Electrical 1 (January 7April 1, 2019) 2 Include In All Projects. 3

4 9-33.AP9 Construction Geosynthetic 5


8 9-34.AP9 Pavement Marking Material 9

(January 7, 2019) 10 Include In All Projects. 11 12

Amendments to the 2018 Standard Specifications Section 1-07 April 1, 2019 Page 1

Section 1-07, Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public 1 August 6, 2018April 1, 2019 2

1-07.5 Environmental Regulations 3 This section is supplemented with the following new subsections: 4 5

1-07.5(5) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers 6 When temporary fills are permitted, the Contractor shall remove fills in their entirety and 7 the affected areas returned to pre-construction elevations. 8 9 If a U.S. Army Corps of Engineers permit is noted in Section 1-07.6 of the Special 10 Provisions, the Contractor shall retain a copy of the permit or the verification letter (in 11 the case of a Nationwide Permit) on the worksite for the life of the Contract. The 12 Contractor shall provide copies of the permit or verification letter to all subcontractors 13 involved with the authorized work prior to their commencement of any work in waters of 14 the U.S. 15 16 1-07.5(6) U.S. Fish/Wildlife Services and National Marine Fisheries Service 17 The Contracting Agency will provide fish exclusion and handling services if the Work 18 dictates. However, if the Contractor discovers any fish stranded by the project and a 19 Contracting Agency biologist is not available, they shall immediately release the fish into 20 a flowing stream or open water. 21

22 1-07.5(1) General 23 The first sentence is deleted and replaced with the following: 24 25

No Work shall occur within areas under the jurisdiction of resource agencies unless 26 authorized in the Contract. 27

28 The third paragraph is deleted. 29 30 1-07.5(2) State Department of Fish and Wildlife 31 This section is revised to read: 32 33

In doing the Work, the Contractor shall: 34 35

1. Not degrade water in a way that would harm fish, wildlife, or their habitat. 36 37 2. Not place materials below or remove them from the ordinary high water line 38

except as may be specified in the Contract. 39 40 3. Not allow equipment to enter waters of the State except as specified in  the 41

 Contract. 42 43 4. Revegetate in accordance with the Plans, unless the Special Provisions permit 44

otherwise. 45 46 5. Prevent any fish-threatening silt buildup on the bed or bottom of any body of  47

water. 48 49 6. Ensure continuous stream flow downstream of the Work area. 50 51


7. Dispose of any project debris by removal, burning, or placement above high-1 water flows. 2

3 8. Immediately notify the Engineer and stop all work causing impacts, if at any 4

time, as a result of project activities, fish are observed in distress or a fish kill 5 occurs. 6

7 If the Work in (1) through (3) above differs little from what the Contract requires, the 8 Contracting Agency will measure and pay for it at unit Contract prices. But if Contract 9 items do not cover those areas, the Contracting Agency will pay pursuant to Section 1-10 09.4. Work in (4) through (8) above shall be incidental to Contract pay items. 11

12 1-07.5(3) State Department of Ecology 13 This section is revised to read: 14 15

In doing the Work, the Contractor shall: 16 17

1. Comply with Washington State Water Quality Standards. 18 19 2. Perform Work in such a manner that all materials and substances not 20

specifically identified in the Contract documents to be placed in the water do 21 not enter waters of the State, including wetlands. These include, but are not 22 limited to, petroleum products, hydraulic fluid, fresh concrete, concrete 23 wastewater, process wastewater, slurry materials and waste from shaft drilling, 24 sediments, sediment-laden water, chemicals, paint, solvents, or other toxic or 25 deleterious materials. 26

27 3. Use equipment that is free of external petroleum-based products. 28 29 4. Remove accumulations of soil and debris from drive mechanisms (wheels, 30

tracks, tires) and undercarriage of equipment prior to using equipment below 31 the ordinary high water line. 32

33 5. Clean loose dirt and debris from all materials placed below the ordinary high 34

water line. No materials shall be placed below the ordinary high water line 35 without the Engineer’s concurrence. 36

37 6. When a violation of the Construction Stormwater General Permit (CSWGP) 38

occurs, immediately notify the Engineer and fill out WSDOT Form 422-011, 39 Contractor ECAP Report, and submit the form to the Engineer within 48 hours 40 of the violation. 41

42 7. Once Physical Completion has been given, prepare a Notice of Termination 43

(Ecology Form ECY 020-87) and submit the Notice of Termination 44 electronically to the Engineer in a PDF format a minimum of 7 calendar days 45 prior to submitting the Notice of Termination to Ecology. 46

47 8. Transfer the CSWGP coverage to the Contracting Agency when Physical 48

Completion has been given and the Engineer has determined that the project 49 site is not stabilized from erosion. 50

51


9. Submit copies of all correspondence with Ecology electronically to the 1 Engineer in a PDF format within four calendar days. 2

3 1-07.5(4) Air Quality 4 This section is revised to read: 5 6

The Contractor shall comply with all regional clean air authority and/or State 7 Department of Ecology rules and regulations. 8 9 The air quality permit process may include additional State Environment Policy Act 10 (SEPA) requirements. Contractors shall contact the appropriate regional air pollution 11 control authority well in advance of beginning Work. 12 13 When the Work includes demolition or renovation of any existing facility or structure that 14 contains Asbestos Containing Material (ACM) and/or Presumed Asbestos-Containing 15 Material (PACM), the Contractor shall comply with the National Emission Standards for 16 Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP). 17 18 Any requirements included in Federal and State regulations regarding air quality that 19 applies to the “owner or operator” shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 20

21 1-07.7(1) General 22 The first sentence of the third paragraph is revised to read: 23 24

When the Contractor moves equipment or materials on or over Structures, culverts or 25 pipes, the Contractor may operate equipment with only the load-limit restrictions in 26 Section 1-07.7(2). 27

28 The first sentence of the last paragraph is revised to read: 29 30

Unit prices shall cover all costs for operating over Structures, culverts and pipes. 31 32 1-07.9(1) General 33 The last sentence of the sixth paragraph is revised to read: 34 35

Generally, the Contractor initiates the request by preparing standard form 1444 Request 36 for Authorization of Additional Classification and Rate, available at 37 https://www.dol.gov/whd/recovery/dbsurvey/conformance.htm, and submitting it to the 38 Engineer for further action. 39

40 1-07.9(2) Posting Notices 41 The second sentence of the first paragraph (up until the colon) is revised to read: 42 43

The Contractor shall ensure the most current edition of the following are posted: 44 45 In items 1 through 10, tThe revision dates are deleted from all items in the numbered list. 46 47 The following new items are inserted after item number 1: 48 49

2. Mandatory Supplement to EEOC P/E-1 published by US Department of Labor. 50 Post for projects with federal-aid funding. 51

52


3. Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision published by US Department of 1 Labor. Post for projects with federal-aid funding. 2

3 Item number 2 through 12 are renumbered to 4 through 14, respectively. 4 5 1-07.11(2) Contractual Requirements 6 In this section, “creed” is revised to read “religion”. 7 8 Item numbers 1 through 9 are revised to read 2 through 10, respectively. 9 10 After the preceding Amendment is applied, the following new item number 1 is inserted: 11 12

1. The Contractor shall maintain a Work site that is free of harassment, humiliation, 13 fear, hostility and intimidation at all times. Behaviors that violate this requirement 14 include but are not limited to: 15

16 a. Persistent conduct that is offensive and unwelcome. 17 18 b. Conduct that is considered to be hazing. 19 20 c. Jokes about race, gender, or sexuality that are offensive. 21 22 d. Unwelcome, unwanted, rude or offensive conduct or advances of a sexual 23

nature which interferes with a person’s ability to perform their job or creates an 24 intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment. 25

26 e. Language or conduct that is offensive, threatening, intimidating or hostile 27

based on race, gender, or sexual orientation. 28 29 f. Repeating rumors about individuals in the Work Site that are considered to be 30

harassing or harmful to the individual’s reputation. 31 32 1-07.11(5) Sanctions 33 This section is supplemented with the following: 34 35

Immediately upon the Engineer’s request, the Contractor shall remove from the Work 36 site any employee engaging in behaviors that promote harassment, humiliation, fear or 37 intimidation including but not limited to those described in these specifications. 38

39 1-07.11(6) Incorporation of Provisions 40 The first sentence is revised to read: 41 42

The Contractor shall include the provisions of Section 1-07.11(2) Contractual 43 Requirements (1) through (5) and the Section 1-07.11(5) Sanctions in every subcontract 44 including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. 45

46 1-07.15(1) Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasures Plan 47 The last sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 48 49

An SPCC Plan template and guidance information is available at 50 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/environment/technical/disciplines/hazardous-materials/spill-51 prevent-report. 52


1 1-07.16(2)A Wetland and Sensitive Area Protection 2 The first sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 3 4

Existing wetland and other sensitive areas, where shown in the Plans or designated by 5 the Engineer, shall be saved and protected through the life of the Contract. 6

7 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance 8 Item number 1 is supplemented with the following new sentence: 9 10

This policy shall be kept in force from the execution date of the Contract until the 11 Physical Completion Date. 12

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 2-01, Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup 1 April 1, 2019 2

2-01.2(3) Disposal Method No. 3 – Chipping 3 Item number 2 of the first paragraph is revised to read: 4 5

2. Chips shall be disposed outside of sensitive areas, and in areas that aren’t in 6 conflict with permanent Work. 7

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 2-03, Roadway Excavation and Embankment 1 April 1, 2019 2

2-03.3(14)F Displacement of Unsuitable Foundation Materials 3 This section, including title, is revised to read: 4 5

2-03.3(14)F Vacant 6

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 2-09, Structure Excavation 1 April 21, 20182019 2

2-09.2 Materials 3 In the first paragraph, the references to “Portland Cement” and “Aggregates for Portland 4 Cement Concrete” are revised to read: 5 6

Cement 9-01 7 Fine Aggregate for Concrete 9-03.1(2) 8

9 2-09.3(3)B Excavation Using Open Pits – Extra Excavation 10 The last two paragraphs are deleted and replaced with the following: 11 12

The excavation height (Ht) shall be calculated within a vertical plane as the difference 13 between the lowest elevation in the excavation and the highest elevation of the ground 14 surface immediately adjacent to the excavation. Pavement thickness and other surface 15 treatments existing at the time of the excavation shall be included in the height 16 calculation. 17 18 Submittals and Design Requirements 19 Excavations 4-feet and less in height do not require design and submittals. The 20 Contractor shall provide a safe work environment and shall execute the work in a 21 manner that does not damage adjacent pavements, utilities, or structures. If the 22 Engineer determines the Contractor’s work may potentially affect adjacent traffic, 23 pavements, utilities, or structures, the Engineer may request a Type 1 Working Drawing 24 from the Contractor. The Contractor shall explain in the Type 1 Working Drawing how 25 the Engineer’s concerns will be addressed, why infrastructure will not be damaged by 26 the work, and how worker safety will be preserved. 27 28 For excavations that have soil types and slope geometries defined in WAC 296-155 part 29 N and are between 4-feet and 20-feet in height, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 30 Working Drawings. Required submittal elements include, at a minimum, the following: 31 32

1. A plan view showing the limits of the excavation and its relationship to traffic, 33 structures, utilities and other pertinent project elements. If the stability of the 34 excavation requires no-load zones or equipment setback distances, those shall 35 be shown on the plan view. 36

37 2. A typical or controlling cross section showing the proposed excavation, original 38

ground line, and locations of traffic, existing structures, utilities, site 39 constraints, surcharge loads, or other conditions that could affect the stability 40 of the slope. If the stability of the excavation requires no-load zones or 41 equipment setback distances, those shall be shown in cross section. 42

43 3. A summary clearly describing subsurface conditions, soil type for WAC 296-44

155 part N, and groundwater conditions, sequencing considerations, and 45 governing assumptions. 46

47 Where WAC 296-155 part N requires an engineer’s design, the Contractor shall submit 48 Type 2E Working Drawings. Required submittal elements include, at a minimum, the 49 three items above and the following additional items: 50

51


4. Supporting calculations for the design of the excavation, the soil and material 1 properties selected for design, and the justification for the selection for those 2 properties, in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-3 03. 4

5 5. Safety factors, or load and resistance factors used, and justification for their 6

selection, in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-7 03, and referenced AASHTO design manuals. 8

9 6. A monitoring plan to evaluate the excavation performance throughout its 10

design life. 11 12 7. Any supplemental subsurface explorations made by the Contractor to meet the 13

requirements for geotechnical design of excavation slopes, in accordance with 14 the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03. 15

16 2-09.3(3)D Shoring and Cofferdams 17 The first sentence of the sixth paragraph is revised to read: 18 19

Structural shoring and cofferdams shall be designed for conditions stated in this Section 20 using methods shown in Division I Section 5 of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for 21 Highway Bridges Seventeenth Edition – 2002 for allowable stress design, or the 22 AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications for load and resistance factor design. 23


Section 5-02, Bituminous Surface Treatment 1 April 1, 2019 2

5-02.3(5) Application of Aggregates 3 The first sentence of the eleventh paragraph is revised to read: 4 5

The Contractor shall use a pickup broom in all curbed areas, on all bridges, within city 6 limits, within sensitive areas, and where shown in the Plans both before the application 7 of emulsified asphalt and during the final brooming operation. 8

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 5-04, Hot Mix Asphalt 1 January 7April 1, 2019 2

5-04.1 Description 3 The last sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 4 5

The manufacture of HMA may include additives or processes that reduce the optimum 6 mixing temperature (Warm Mix Asphalt) or serve as a compaction aid in accordance 7 with these Specifications. 8

9 5-04.2 Materials 10 The reference to “Warm Mix Asphalt Additive” is revised to read “HMA Additive”. 11 12 5-04.2(1) How to Get an HMA Mix Design on the QPL 13 The last bullet in the first paragraph is revised to read: 14 15

• Do not include HMA additives that reduce the optimum mixing temperature or serve 16 as a compaction aid when developing a mix design or submitting a mix design for 17 QPL evaluation. The use of HMA additives is not part of the process for obtaining 18 approval for listing a mix design on the QPL. Refer to Section 5-04.2(2)B. 19

20 In the table, “WSDOT Standard Practice QC-8” is revised to read “WSDOT Standard 21 Practice QC-8 located in the WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01”. 22 23 5-04.2(1)C Mix Design Resubmittal for QPL Approval 24 Item number 3 of the first paragraph is revised to read: 25 26

3. Changes in modifiers used in the asphalt binder. 27 28 5-04.2(2)B Using Warm Mix Asphalt Processes 29 This section, including title, is revised to read: 30 31

5-04.2(2)B Using HMA Additives 32 The Contractor may, at the Contractor’s discretion, elect to use additives that reduce the 33 optimum mixing temperature or serve as a compaction aid for producing HMA. Additives 34 include organic additives, chemical additives and foaming processes. The use of 35 Additives is subject to the following: 36 37

• Do not use additives that reduce the mixing temperature in accordance with 38 Section 5-04.3(6) in the production of High RAP/Any RAS mixtures. 39

40 • Before using additives, obtain the Engineer’s approval using WSDOT Form 41

350-076 to describe the proposed additive and process. 42 43

5-04.3(3)A Mixing Plant 44 In iItem number 5 of the first paragraph, “WSDOT T 168” is revised to read “FOP for 45 AASHTO T 168”. is revised to read: 46 47

5. Provide HMA sampling equipment that complies with FOP for AASHTO T 168: 48 49

• Use a mechanical sampling device accepted by the Engineer, or 50


1 • Platforms or devices to enable sampling from the truck transport without 2

entering the truck transport for sampling HMA. 3 4 5-04.3(4) Preparation of Existing Paved Surfaces 5 The first sentence of the fourth paragraph is revised to read: 6 7

Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, use cationic emulsified asphalt CSS-1, CSS-8 1h, or Performance Graded (PG) asphalt for tack coat. 9

10 5-04.3(6) Mixing 11 The first paragraph is revised to read: 12 13

The asphalt supplier shall introduce recycling agent and anti-stripping additive, in the 14 amount designated on the QPL for the mix design, into the asphalt binder prior to 15 shipment to the asphalt mixing plant. 16 17

The seventh paragraph is revised to read: 18 19 Upon discharge from the mixer, ensure that the temperature of the HMA does not 20 exceed the optimum mixing temperature shown on the accepted Mix Design Report by 21 more than 25°F, or as allowed by the Engineer. When an additive is included in the 22 manufacture of HMA, do not heat the additive (at any stage of production including in 23 binder storage tanks) to a temperature higher than the maximum recommended by the 24 manufacturer of the additive. 25

26 5-04.3(7) Spreading and Finishing 27 The last row of the table is revised to read: 28 29

3⁄8 inch 0.25 feet 0.30 feet 30

5-04.3(8) Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA 31 The following new paragraph is inserted after the first paragraph: 32

33 The Contracting Agency’s combined aggregate bulk specific gravity (Gsb) blend as 34 shown on the HMA Mix Design will be used for VMA calculations until the Contractor 35 submits a written request for a Gsb test. The new Gsb will be used in the VMA 36 calculations for HMA from the date the Engineer receives the written request for a Gsb 37 retest. The Contractor may request aggregate specific gravity (Gsb) testing be 38 performed by the Contracting Agency twice per project. The Gsb blend of the combined 39 stockpiles will be used to calculate voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) of any HMA 40 produced after the new Gsb is determined. 41

42 5-04.3(9)A1 Test Section – When Required, When to Stop 43 The following new row is inserted after the second row in Table 9: 44 45

VMA Minimum PFi of 0.95 based on the criteria in Section 5-04.3(9)B42

None4

46


5-04.3(9)A2 Test Section – Evaluating the HMA Mixture in a Test Section 1 In Table 9a, the test property “Gradation, Asphalt Binder, and Va” is revised to read 2 “Gradation, Asphalt Binder, VMA, and Va” 3 4 In Table 9a, the first column of the third row is revised to read: 5 6

Aggregates: Sand Equivalent

Uncompacted Void Content Fracture

7 5-04.3(9)B3 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Acceptance Testing 8 In Table 11, “Va” is revised to read “VMA and Va” 9 10 5-04.3(9)B5 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Composite Pay Factors (CPF) 11 The following new row is inserted above the last row in Table 12: 12 13

Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)

2

14 5-04.3(9)B7 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Retests 15 The second to last sentence is revised to read: 16 17

The sample will be tested for a complete gradation analysis, asphalt binder content, 18 VMA and Va, and the results of the retest will be used for the acceptance of the HMA 19 mixture in place of the original mixture sublot sample test results. 20

21 5-04.3(10)A HMA Compaction – General Compaction Requirements 22 The last paragraph is revised to read: 23 24

On bridge decks and on roadway approaches within five feet of a bridge/back of 25 pavement seat, rollers shall not be operated in a vibratory mode, defined as a mode in 26 which the drum vibrates vertically. However, unless otherwise noted on the plans, 27 rollers may be operated in an oscillatory mode, defined as a mode in which the drum 28 vibrates in the horizontal direction only. 29

30 5-04.3(10)C1 HMA Compaction Statistical Evaluation – Lots and Sublots 31 The bulleted item in the fourth paragraph is revised to read: 32 33

• For a compaction lot in progress with a compaction CPF less than 0.75 using an 34 LSL = 91.5, a new compaction lot will begin at the Contractor’s request after the 35 Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be 36 produced. See also Section 5-04.3(11)F. 37

38 5-04.3(10)C2 HMA Compaction Statistical Evaluation – Acceptance Testing 39 In the table, “WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 355” is revised to read “FOP for AASHTO T 355”. 40 41 5-04.3(10)C3 HMA Statistical Compaction – Price Adjustments 42 In the first paragraph, “WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 355” is revised to read “FOP for 43 AASHTO T 355”. 44 45


The first sentence in the second paragraph is revised to read: 1 2

For each HMA compaction lot (that is accepted by Statistical Evaluation) which does not 3 meet the criteria in the preceding paragraph, the compaction lot shall be evaluated in 4 accordance with Section 1-06.2(2)D5 to determine the appropriate Composite Pay 5 Factor (CPF). 6

7 The last two paragraphs are revised to read: 8 9

Determine the Compaction Price Adjustment (CPA) from the table below, selecting the 10 equation for CPA that corresponds to the value of CPF determined above. 11 12

Calculating HMA Compaction Price Adjustment (CPA) Value of CPF Equation for Calculating CPA

When CPF > 1.00 CPA = [1.00 x (CPF – 1.00)] x Q x UP

When CPF = 1.00 CPA = $0 When CPF < 1.0 CPA = [0.60 x (CPF – 1.00)] x Q x

UP 13

Where 14 CPA = Compaction Price Adjustment for the compaction lot ($) 15 CPF = Composite Pay Factor for the compaction lot (maximum is 1.05) 16 Q = Quantity in the compaction lot (tons) 17 UP = Unit price of the HMA in the compaction lot ($/ton) 18

19 5-04.3(10)C4 HMA Statistical Compaction – Requests for Retesting 20 The first sentence is revised to read: 21 22

For a compaction sublot that has been tested with a nuclear density gauge that did not 23 meet the minimum of 91.5 percent of the theoretical maximum density in a compaction 24 lot with a CPF below 1.00 and thus subject to a price reduction or rejection, the 25 Contractor may request that a core, taken at the same location as the nuclear density 26 test, be used for determination of the relative density of the compaction sublot. 27

28 5-04.3(13) Surface Smoothness 29 The second to last paragraph is revised to read: 30 31

When concrete pavement is to be placed on HMA, the surface tolerance of the HMA 32 shall be such that no surface elevation lies above the Plan grade minus the specified 33 Plan depth of concrete pavement. Prior to placing the concrete pavement, bring any 34 such irregularities to the required tolerance by grinding or other means allowed by the 35 Engineer. 36

37 5-04.5 Payment 38 The paragraph following the Bid item “Crack Sealing-LF”, per linear foot is revised to read: 39 40

The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Crack Sealing-LF” shall be full payment for all 41 costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(4)A. 42


Section 5-05, Cement Concrete Pavement 1 January 7April 1, 2019 2

5-05.1 Description 3 In the first paragraph, “portland cement concrete” is revised to read “cement concrete”. 4 5 5-05.2 Materials 6 In the first paragraph, the reference to “Portland Cement” is revised to read: 7 8

Cement 9-01 9 10 In the first paragraph, the section reference for Concrete Patching Material is revised to read 11 “9-20.1”. 12 13 The second paragraph is revised to read: 14 15

Cementitious materials are considered to be the following: portland cement, blended 16 hydraulic cement, fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag and microsilica fume. 17

18 5-05.3(1) Concrete Mix Design for Paving 19 The table title in item number 4 is revised to read Concrete Batch Weights. 20 21 In item 4a, “Portland Cement” is revised to read “Cement”. 22 23 5-05.3(3)E Smoothness Testing Equipment 24 This section is revised to read: 25 26

Inertial profilers shall meet all requirements of AASHTO M 328 and be certified in 27 accordance with AASHTO R 56 within the preceding 12 months. 28 29 The inertial profiler operator shall be certified as required by AASHTO R 56 within three 30 years preceding profile measurement. 31 32 Equipment or operator certification by other states or a profiler certification facility will be 33 accepted provided the certification meets the requirements of AASHTO R 56. 34 Documentation verifying certification by another state shall be submitted to the Engineer 35 a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to profile measurement. Equipment certification 36 documentation shall include the information required by part 8.5 and 8.6 of AASHTO R 37 56. Operator documentation shall include a statement from the certifying state that 38 indicates the operator is certified to operate the inertial profiler to be used on the project. 39 The decision whether another state’s certification meets the requirements of AASHTO R 40 56 shall be vested entirely in the Engineer. 41

42 5-05.3(4) Measuring and Batching Materials 43 Item number 2 is revised to read: 44 45

2. Batching Materials – On all projects requiring more than 2,500 cubic yards of 46 concrete for paving, the batching plant shall be equipped to proportion aggregates 47 and cement by weight by means of automatic and interlocked proportioning devices 48 of accepted type. 49

50


5-05.3(4)A Acceptance of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1 This section’s title is revised to read: 2 3

Acceptance of Portland Cement or Blended Hydraulic Cement Concrete Pavement 4 5 The first sentence is revised to read: 6 7

Acceptance of portland cement or blended hydraulic cement concrete pavement shall 8 be as provided under statistical or nonstatistical acceptance. 9

10 5-05.3(7) Placing, Spreading, and Compacting Concrete 11 This section’s content is deleted. 12 13 5-05.3(10) Tie Bars and Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bars 14 The first sentence of the last paragraph is revised to read: 15 16

The tie bar holes shall be clean before grouting. 17 18 5-05.3(12) Surface Smoothness 19 This section is revised to read: 20 21

Pavement surface smoothness for this project will include International Roughness 22 Index (IRI) testing. The Contractor shall perform IRI testing on each through lane, 23 climbing lane, and passing lane, greater than 0.25 mile in length and these lanes will be 24 subject to incentive/disincentive adjustments. Ride quality will be evaluated using the 25 Mean Roughness Index (MRI) calculated by averaging the IRI data for the left and right 26 wheel path within the section. 27 28 Ramps, shoulders and tapers will not be included in MRI testing for pavement 29 smoothness and will not be subject to incentive adjustments. All Work is subject to 30 parallel and transverse 10-foot straightedge requirements, corrective work and 31 disincentive adjustments. 32 33 Operate the inertial profiler in accordance with AASHTO R 57. Collect two longitudinal 34 traces, one in each wheel path. Collect profile data after completion of all concrete 35 paving on the project in a continuous pass including areas excluded from pay 36 adjustments. Provide notice to the Engineer a minimum of seven calendar days prior to 37 testing. 38 39 Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor’s testing, the Engineer may perform 40 verification testing. If the verification testing shows a difference in MRI greater than the 41 percentages shown in Table 2 of AASHTO R 54 the following resolution process will be 42 followed: 43 44

1. The profiles, equipment and procedures will be evaluated to determine the 45 cause of the difference. 46

47 2. If the cause of the discrepancy cannot be resolved the pavement shall be 48

retested with both profilers at a mutually agreed time. The two profilers will 49 test the section within 30 minutes of each other. If the retest shows a 50 difference in MRI equal or greater than the percentages shown in Table 2 of 51


AASHTO R 54 the Engineer’s test results will be used to establish pay 1 adjustments. 2

3 Surface smoothness of travel lanes not subject to MRI testing will be measured with a 4 10-foot straightedge no later than 5:00 p.m. of the day following the placing of the 5 concrete. The completed surface of the wearing course shall not vary more than ⅛ inch 6 from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface parallel to the 7 centerline. 8 9 Smoothness perpendicular to the centerline will be measured with a 10-foot 10 straightedge across all lanes with the same cross slope, including shoulders when 11 composed of cement concrete pavement. The overlapping 10-foot straightedge 12 measurement shall be discontinued at a point 6 inches from the most extreme outside 13 edge of the finished cement concrete pavement. The completed surface of the wearing 14 course shall not vary more than ¼ inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge 15 placed on the surface perpendicular to the centerline. Any deviations in excess of the 16 above tolerances shall be corrected. 17 18 The Contractor shall evaluate profiles for acceptance, incentive payments, disincentive 19 payments, or corrective action using the current version of ProVAL and provide the 20 results including the profile data in unfiltered electronic Engineering Research Division 21 (ERD) file format to the Engineer within 2 calendar days of completing testing each 22 section of pavement. If the profile data files are created using an export option in the 23 manufacturer’s software where filter settings can be specified, use the filter settings that 24 were used to create data files for certification. Analyze the entire profile. Exclude any 25 areas specifically identified in the Contract. Exclude from the analysis the first 100 feet 26 after the start of the paving operations and last 100 feet prior to the end of the paving 27 operation, the first 100 feet on either side of bridge Structures and bridge approach 28 slab. Report the MRI results in inches per mile for each 52.8 foot section and horizontal 29 distance measurements in project stationing to the nearest foot. Include pay 30 adjustments in the results. The Engineer will verify the analysis. 31 32 Corrective work for pavement smoothness may be taken by the Contractor prior to MRI 33 testing. After completion of the MRI testing the Contractor shall measure the 34 smoothness of each 52.8-foot section with an MRI greater than 125 inches per mile with 35 a 10-foot straightedge within 14 calendar days or as allowed by the Engineer. The 36 Contractor shall identify all locations that require corrective work and provide the 37 straight edge measurements at each location that exceeds the allowable limit to the 38 Engineer. If all measurements in a 52.8-foot section comply with smoothness 39 requirements, the Contractor shall provide the maximum measurement to the Engineer 40 and a statement that corrective work is not required. Unless allowed by the Engineer, 41 corrective work shall be taken by the Contractor for pavement identified by the 42 Contractor or Engineer that does not meet the following requirements: 43 44

1. The completed surface shall be of uniform texture, smooth, uniform as to 45 crown and grade, and free from defects of all kinds. 46

47 2. The completed surface shall not vary more than ⅛ inch from the lower edge of 48

a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface parallel to the centerline. 49 50 3. The completed surface shall vary not more than ¼ inch in 10 feet from the rate 51

of transverse slope shown in the Plans. 52


1 All corrective work shall be completed at no additional expense, including traffic control, 2 to the Contracting Agency. Corrective work shall not begin until the concrete has 3 reached its design strength unless allowed by the Engineer. Pavement shall be repaired 4 by one or more of the following methods: 5 6

1. Diamond grinding; repairs shall not reduce pavement thickness by more than 7 ¼ inch less than the thickness shown in the Plans. When required by the 8 Engineer, the Contractor shall verify the thickness of the concrete pavement by 9 coring. Thickness reduction due to corrective work will not be included in 10 thickness measurements for calculating the Thickness Deficiency in Section 5-11 05.5(1)A. 12

13 2. Removal and replacement of the cement concrete pavement. 14 15 3. By other method allowed by the Engineer. 16

17 For repairs following MRI testing the repaired area shall be checked by the Contractor 18 with a 10-foot straightedge to ensure it no longer requires corrective work. With 19 concurrence of the Engineer an inertial profiler may be used in place of the 10-foot 20 straight edge. 21 22 If correction of the roadway as listed above either will not or does not produce 23 satisfactory results as to smoothness or serviceability the Engineer may accept the 24 completed pavement and a credit will be calculated in accordance with Section 5-05.5. 25 The credit will be in addition to the price adjustment for MRI. Under these 26 circumstances, the decision whether to accept the completed pavement or to require 27 corrective work as described above shall be vested entirely in the Engineer. 28

29 5-05.3(22) Repair of Defective Pavement Slabs 30 The last sentence of the fourth paragraph is revised to read: 31 32

All sandblasting residue shall be removed. 33 34 5-05.4 Measurement 35 Item number 3 of the second paragraph is revised to read: 36 37

3. The depth shall be determined in accordance with Section 5-05.5(1). The depth 38 utilized to calculate the volume shall not exceed the Plan depth plus 0.04 feet. 39

40 The third paragraph is revised to read: 41 42

The volume of cement concrete pavement in each thickness lot shall equal the 43 measured length × width × thickness measurement. 44

45 The last paragraph is revised to read: 46 47

The calculation for cement concrete compliance adjustment is the volume of concrete 48 represented by the CPF and the Thickness deficiency adjustment. 49

50


5-05.5 Payment 1 The paragraph following the Bid item “Cement Conc. Pavement”, per cubic yard is 2 supplemented with the following: 3 4

All costs associated with performing the magnetic pulse induction thickness testing shall 5 be included in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Cement Conc. Pavement”. 6

7 The Bid item “Ride Smoothness Compliance Adjustment”, by calculation, and the paragraph 8 following this bid item are revised to read: 9 10

“Ride Smoothness Compliance Adjustment”, by calculation. 11 12 Smoothness Compliance Adjustments will be based on the requirements in Section 5-13 05.3(12) and the following calculations: 14 15

1. Final MRI acceptance and incentive/disincentive payments for pavement 16 smoothness will be calculated as the average of the ten 52.8-foot sections in 17 each 528 feet in accordance with the price adjustment schedule. 18

19 a. For sections of a lane that are a minimum of 52.8 feet and less than 528 20

feet, the price adjustment will be calculated using the average of the 52.8 21 foot MRI values and the price adjustment prorated for the length of the 22 section. 23

24 b. MRI values per 52.8-feet that were measured prior to corrective work will 25

be included in the 528 foot price adjustment for sections with corrective 26 work. 27

28 2. In addition to the price adjustment for MRI a smoothness compliance 29

adjustment will be calculated in the sum of minus $1000.00 for each and every 30 section of single traffic lane 52.8 feet in length in that does not meet the 10-31 foot straight edge requirements in Section 5-05.3(12) after corrective Work. 32 33

Price Adjustment Schedule MRI for each 528 ft.

section Pay Adjustment

Schedule in. / mi. $ / 0.10 mi.

< 30 2400 30 2400 31 2320 32 2240 33 2160 34 2080 35 2000 36 1920 37 1840 38 1760 39 1680 40 1600 41 1520 42 1440


43 1360 44 1280 45 1200 46 1120 47 1040 48 960 49 880 50 800 51 720 52 640 53 560 54 480 55 400 56 320 57 240 58 160 59 80 60 0 61 0 62 0 63 0 64 0 65 0 66 0 67 0 68 0 69 0 70 0 71 0 72 0 73 0 74 0 75 0 76 -80 77 -160 78 -240 79 -320 80 -400 81 -480 82 -560 83 -640 84 -720 85 -800 86 -880 87 -960 88 -1040 89 -1120 90 -1200 91 -1280 92 -1360


93 -1440 94 -1520 95 -1600 96 -1680 97 -1760 98 -1840 99 -1920

100 -2000 101 -2080 102 -2160 103 -2240 104 -2320 105 -2400 106 -2480 107 -2560 108 -2640 109 -2720 110 -2800 111 -2880 112 -2960 113 -3040 114 -3120 115 -3200 116 -3280 117 -3360 118 -3440 119 -3520 120 -3600 121 -3680 122 -3760 123 -3840 124 -3920 ≥125 -4000

1 The bid item “Portland Cement Concrete Compliance Adjustment”, by calculation, and the 2 paragraph following this bid item are revised to read: 3 4

“Cement Concrete Compliance Adjustment”, by calculation. 5 6 Payment for “Cement Concrete Compliance Adjustment” will be calculated by 7 multiplying the unit Contract price for the cement concrete pavement, times the volume 8 for adjustment, times the percent of adjustment determined from the calculated CPF 9 and the Deficiency Adjustment listed in Section 5-05.5(1)A. 10

11 5-05.5(1) Pavement Thickness 12 This section is revised to read: 13 14

Cement concrete pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the thickness 15 requirements in the Plans and Specifications. Tolerances allowed for Subgrade 16 construction and other provisions, which may affect thickness, shall not be construed to 17 modify such thickness requirements. 18


1 Thickness measurements in each lane paved shall comply with the following: 2 3

Thickness Testing of Cement Concrete Pavement Thickness Lot Size 15 panels maximum

Thickness test location determined by Engineer will select testing locations in accordance with WSDOT TM 716 method B.

Sample method AASHTO T 359

Sample preparation performed by Contractor provides, places, and secures disks in the presence of the Engineer1

Measurement method AASHTO T 359 Thickness measurement performed by Contractor, in the presence of the Engineer2 1Reflectors shall be located at within 0.5 feet of the center of the panel. The Contractor shall supply a sufficient number of 300 mm-diameter round reflectors meeting the requirements of AASHTO T 359 to accomplish the required testing. 2The Contractor shall provide all equipment and materials needed to perform the testing.

4 Thickness measurements shall be rounded to the nearest 0.01 foot. 5 6 Each thickness test location where the pavement thickness is deficient by more than 7 0.04 foot, shall be subject to price reduction or corrective action as shown in Table 2. 8 9

Table 2 Thickness Deficiency

0.04’ < Thickness Deficiency ≤ 0.06’ 10 0.06’ < Thickness deficiency ≤ 0.08’ 25

Thickness deficiency > 0.08’ Remove and replace the panels or the panels may be accepted with no payment at the discretion of the Engineer.

10 The price reduction shall be computed by multiplying the percent price reduction in 11 Table 2 by the unit Contract price by the volume of pavement represented by the 12 thickness test lot. 13 14 Additional cores may be taken by the Contractor to determine the limits of an area that 15 has a thickness deficiency greater than 0.04 feet. Cores shall be taken at the 16 approximate center of the panel. Only the panels within the limits of the deficiency area 17 as determined by the cores will be subject to a price reduction or corrective action. The 18 cores shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer and delivered to the Engineer for 19 measurement. All costs for the additional cores including filling the core holes with 20 patching material meeting the requirements of Section 9-20 will be the responsibility of 21 the Contractor. 22

23 5-05.5(1)A Thickness Deficiency of 0.05 Foot or Less 24 This section, including title, is revised to read: 25 26

5-05.5(1)A Vacant 27 28 5-05.5(1)B Thickness Deficiency of More Than 0.05 Foot 29 This section, including title, is revised to read: 30 31


5-05.5(1)B Vacant 1

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 6-02, Concrete Structures 1 January 7April 1, 2019 2

6-02.1 Description 3 The first sentence is revised to read: 4 5

This Work consists of the construction of all Structures (and their parts) made of 6 portland cement or blended hydraulic cement concrete with or without reinforcement, 7 including bridge approach slabs. 8

9 6-02.2 Materials 10 In the first paragraph, the references to “Portland Cement” and “Aggregates for Portland 11 Cement Concrete” are revised to read: 12 13

Cement 9-01 14 Aggregates for Concrete 9-03.1 15

16 The reference to metakaolin is deleted. 17 18 6-02.3(2) Proportioning Materials 19 The second paragraph is revised to read: 20 21

Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall use Type I or II portland cement or 22 blended hydraulic cement in all concrete as defined in Section 9-01.2(1). 23

24 The last sentence of the fifth paragraph is revised to read: 25 26

With the Engineer’s written concurrence, microsilica fume may be used in all 27 classifications of Class 4000, Class 3000, and commercial concrete and is limited to a 28 maximum of 10 percent of the cementitious material. 29

30 6-02.3(2)A Contractor Mix Design 31 The last sentence of the last paragraph is revised to read: 32 33

For all other concrete, air content shall be a minimum of 4.5 percent and a maximum of 34 7.5 percent for all concrete placed above the finished ground line unless noted 35 otherwise. 36

37 6-02.3(2)A1 Contractor Mix Design for Concrete Class 4000D 38 Item number 5 of the first paragraph is deleted. 39 40 Item number 6 of the first paragraph (after the preceding Amendment is applied) is 41 renumbered to 5. 42 43 6-02.3(2)B Commercial Concrete 44 The second paragraph is revised to read: 45 46

Where concrete Class 3000 is specified for items such as, culvert headwalls, plugging 47 culverts, concrete pipe collars, pipe anchors, monument cases, Type PPB, PS, I, FB 48 and RM signal standards, pedestals, cabinet bases, guardrail anchors, fence post 49 footings, sidewalks, concrete curbs, curbs and gutters, and gutters, the Contractor may 50


use commercial concrete. If commercial concrete is used for sidewalks, concrete curbs, 1 curbs and gutters, and gutters, it shall have a minimum cementitious material content of 2 564 pounds per cubic yard of concrete, shall be air entrained, and the tolerances of 3 Section 6-02.3(5)C shall apply. 4

5 6-02.3(4) Ready-Mix Concrete 6 The first sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 7 8

All concrete, except lean concrete, shall be batched in a prequalified manual, semi-9 automatic, or automatic plant as described in Section 6-02.3(4)A. 10

11 6-02.3(4)D Temperature and Time For Placement 12 The following is inserted after the first sentence of the first paragraph: 13 14

The upper temperature limit for placement for Class 4000D concrete may be increased 15 to a maximum of 80°F if allowed by the Engineer. 16

17 6-02.3(5)C Conformance to Mix Design 18 Item number 1 of the second paragraph is revised to read: 19 20

1. Cement weight plus 5 percent or minus 1 percent of that specified in the 21 mix design. 22

23 6-02.3(6)A1 Hot Weather Protection 24 The first paragraph is revised to read: 25 26

The Contractor shall provide concrete within the specified temperature limits. Cooling of 27 the coarse aggregate piles by sprinkling with water is permitted provided the moisture 28 content is monitored, the mixing water is adjusted for the free water in the aggregate 29 and the coarse aggregate is removed from at least 1 foot above the bottom of the pile. 30 Sprinkling of fine aggregate piles with water is not allowed. Refrigerating mixing water or 31 replacing all or part of the mixing water with crushed ice is permitted, provided the ice is 32 completely melted by placing time. 33

34 The second sentence of the second paragraph is revised to read: 35 36

These surfaces include forms, reinforcing steel, steel beam flanges, and any others that 37 touch the concrete. 38

39 6-02.3(7) Vacant 40 This section, including title, is revised to read: 41 42

6-02.3(7) Tolerances 43 Unless noted otherwise, concrete construction tolerances shall be in accordance with 44 this section. Tolerances in this section do not apply to cement concrete pavement. 45 46 Horizontal deviation of roadway crown points, cross-slope break points, and curb, 47 barrier or railing edges from alignment or work line: ±1.0 inch 48 49 Deviation from plane: ±0.5 inch in 10 feet 50 51 Deviation from plane for roadway surfaces: ±0.25 inch in 10 feet 52


1 Deviation from plumb or specified batter: ±0.5 inch in 10 feet, but not to exceed a total 2 of ±1.5 inches 3 4 Vertical deviation from profile grade for roadway surfaces: ±1 inch 5 6 Vertical deviation of top surfaces (except roadway surfaces): ±0.75 inch 7 8 Thickness of bridge decks and other structural slabs not at grade: ±0.25 inch 9 10 Length, width and thickness of elements such as columns, beams, crossbeams, 11 diaphragms, corbels, piers, abutments and walls, including dimensions to construction 12 joints in initial placements: +0.5 inch, -0.25 inch 13 14 Length, width and thickness of spread footing foundations: +2 inches, -0.5 inch 15 16 Horizontal location of the as-placed edge of spread footing foundations: The greater of 17 ±2% of the horizontal dimension of the foundation perpendicular to the edge and ±0.5 18 inch. However, the tolerance shall not exceed ±2 inches. 19 20 Location of opening, insert or embedded item at concrete surface: ±0.5 inch 21 22 Cross-sectional dimensions of opening: ±0.5 inch 23 24 Bridge deck, bridge approach slab, and bridge traffic barrier expansion joint gaps with a 25 specified temperature range, measured at a stable temperature: ±0.25 inch 26 27 Horizontal deviation of centerline of bearing pad, oak block or other bearing assembly: 28 ±0.125 inch 29 30 Horizontal deviation of centerline of supported element from centerline of bearing pad, 31 oak block or other bearing assembly ±0.25 inch 32 33 Vertical deviation of top of bearing pad, oak block or other bearing assembly: ±0.125 34 inch 35

36 6-02.3(10)C Finishing Equipment 37 The first paragraph is revised to read: 38 39

The finishing machine shall be self-propelled and be capable of forward and reverse 40 movement under positive control. The finishing machine shall be equipped with augers 41 and a rotating cylindrical single or double drum screed. The finishing machine shall 42 have the necessary adjustments to produce the required cross section, line, and grade. 43 The finishing machine shall be capable of raising the screeds, augers, and any other 44 parts of the finishing mechanical operation to clear the screeded surface, and returning 45 to the specified grade under positive control. Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, 46 a finishing machine manufacturer technical representative shall be on site to assist the 47 first use of the machine on the Contract. 48

49 The first sentence of the second paragraph is revised to read: 50 51


For bridge deck widening of 20 feet or less, and for bridge approach slabs, or where 1 jobsite conditions do not allow the use of the conventional configuration finishing 2 machines, or modified conventional machines as described above; the Contractor may 3 submit a Type 2 Working Drawing proposing the use of a hand-operated motorized 4 power screed such as a “Texas” or “Bunyan” screed. 5

6 6-02.3(10)D4 Monitoring Bridge Deck Concrete Temperature After Placement 7 This section, including title, is revised to read: 8 9

6-02.3(10)D4 Vacant 10 11 6-02.3(10)D5 Bridge Deck Concrete Finishing and Texturing 12 In the third subparagraph of the first paragraph, the last sentence is revised to read: 13 14

The Contractor shall texture the bridge deck surface to within 3-inches minimum and 15 24-inches maximum of the edge of concrete at expansion joints, within 1-foot minimum 16 and 2-feet maximum of the curb line, and within 3-inches minimum and 9-inches 17 maximum of the perimeter of bridge drain assemblies. 18

19 6-02.3(10)F Bridge Approach Slab Orientation and Anchors 20 The second to last paragraph is revised to read: 21 22

The compression seal shall be a 2½ inch wide gland and shall conform to Section 9-23 04.1(4). 24

25 The last paragraph is deleted. 26 27 6-02.3(13)A Strip Seal Expansion Joint System 28 In item number 3 of the third paragraph, “Federal Standard 595” is revised to read “SAE 29 AMS Standard 595”. 30 31 6-02.3(13)B Compression Seal Expansion Joint System 32 The first paragraph is revised to read: 33 34

Compression seal glands shall conform to Section 9-04.1(4) and be sized as shown in 35 the Plans. 36

37 6-02.3(14)C Pigmented Sealer for Concrete Surfaces 38 This section is supplemented with the following new paragraph: 39 40

Pigmented Sealer Materials shall be a product listed in the current WSDOT Qualified 41 Products List (QPL). If the pigmented sealer material is not listed in the current WSDOT 42 QPL, a sample shall be submitted to the State Materials Laboratory in Tumwater for 43 evaluation and acceptance in accordance with Section 9-08.3. 44

45 6-02.3(20) Grout for Anchor Bolts and Bridge Bearings 46 The second, third and fourth paragraphs are revised to read: 47 48

Grout shall be a workable mix with a viscosity that is suitable for the intended 49 application. Grout shall not be placed outside of the manufacturer recommended range 50 of thickness. The Contractor shall receive concurrence from the Engineer before using 51 the grout. 52


1 Field grout cubes and cylinders shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with 2 Section 9-20.3 when requested by the Engineer, but not less than once per bridge pier 3 or once per day. 4 5 Before placing grout, the substrate on which it is to be placed shall be prepared as 6 recommended by the manufacturer to ensure proper bonding. The grout shall be cured 7 as recommended by the manufacturer. The grout may be loaded when a minimum of 8 4,000 psi compressive strength is attained. 9

10 The fifth paragraph is deleted. 11 12 6-02.3(23) Opening to Traffic 13 This section is supplemented with the following new paragraph: 14 15

After curing bridge approach slabs in accordance with Section 6-02.3(11), the 16 bridge approach slabs may be opened to traffic when a minimum compressive strength 17 of 2,500 psi is achieved. 18

19 6-02.3(24)C Placing and Fastening 20 This section is revised to read: 21 22

The Contractor shall position reinforcing steel as the Plans require and shall ensure that 23 the steel is set within specified tolerances. Adjustments to reinforcing details outside of 24 specified tolerances to avoid interferences and for other purposes are acceptable when 25 approved by the Engineer. 26 27 When spacing between bars is 1 foot or more, they shall be tied at all intersections. 28 When spacing is less than 1 foot, every other intersection shall be tied. If the Plans 29 require bundled bars, they shall be tied together with wires at least every 6 feet. All 30 epoxy-coated bars in the top mat of the bridge deck shall be tied at all intersections, 31 however they may be tied at alternate intersections when spacing is less than 1 foot in 32 each direction and they are supported by continuous supports meeting all other 33 requirements of supports for epoxy-coated bars. Other epoxy-coated bars shall also be 34 tied at all intersections, but shall be tied at alternate intersections when spacing is less 35 than 1 foot in each direction. Wire used for tying epoxy-coated reinforcing steel shall be 36 plastic coated. Tack welding is not permitted on reinforcing steel. 37 38 Abrupt bends in the steel are permitted only when one steel member bends around 39 another. Vertical stirrups shall pass around main reinforcement or be firmly attached to 40 it. 41 42 For slip-formed concrete, the reinforcing steel bars shall be tied at all intersections and 43 cross braced to keep the cage from moving during concrete placement. Cross bracing 44 shall be with additional reinforcing steel. Cross bracing shall be placed both 45 longitudinally and transversely. 46 47 After reinforcing steel bars are placed in a traffic or pedestrian barrier and prior to slip-48 form concrete placement, the Contractor shall check clearances and reinforcing steel 49 bar placement. This check shall be accomplished by using a template or by operating 50 the slip-form machine over the entire length of the traffic or pedestrian barrier. All 51


clearance and reinforcing steel bar placement deficiencies shall be corrected by the 1 Contractor before slip-form concrete placement. 2

3 Precast concrete supports (or other accepted devices) shall be used to maintain the 4 concrete coverage required by the Plans. The precast concrete supports shall: 5

6 1. Have a bearing surface measuring not greater than 2 inches in either dimension, 7

and 8 9 2. Have a compressive strength equal to or greater than that of the concrete in which 10

they are embedded. 11 12

In slabs, each precast concrete support shall have either: (1) a grooved top that will hold 13 the reinforcing bar in place, or (2) an embedded wire that protrudes and is tied to the 14 reinforcing steel. If this wire is used around epoxy-coated bars, it shall be coated with 15 plastic. 16

17 Precast concrete supports may be accepted based on a Manufacturer’s Certificate of 18 Compliance. 19

20 In lieu of precast concrete supports, the Contractor may use metal or all-plastic supports 21 to hold uncoated bars. Any surface of a metal support that will not be covered by at 22 least ½ inch of concrete shall be one of the following: 23 24

1. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in keeping with AASHTO M232 Class D; 25 26 2. Coated with plastic firmly bonded to the metal. This plastic shall be at least 27

3⁄32 inch thick where it touches the form and shall not react chemically with the 28 concrete when tested in the State Materials Laboratory. The plastic shall not 29 shatter or crack at or above -5°F and shall not deform enough to expose the 30 metal at or below 200°F; or 31

32 3. Stainless steel that meet the requirements of ASTM A493, Type 302. Stainless 33

steel chair supports are not required to be galvanized or plastic coated. 34 35

In lieu of precast concrete supports, epoxy-coated reinforcing bars may be supported by 36 one of the following: 37 38

1. Metal supports coated entirely with a dielectric material such as epoxy or 39 plastic, 40

41 2. Other epoxy-coated reinforcing bars, or 42 43 3. All-plastic supports. 44

45 Damaged coatings on metal bar supports shall be repaired prior to placing concrete. 46 47 All-plastic supports shall be lightweight, non-porous, and chemically inert in concrete. 48 All-plastic supports shall have rounded seatings, shall not deform under load during 49 normal temperatures, and shall not shatter or crack under impact loading in cold 50 weather. All-plastic supports shall be placed at spacings greater than 1 foot along the 51 bar and shall have at least 25 percent of their gross place area perforated to 52


compensate for the difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion between plastic 1 and concrete. The shape and configuration of all-plastic supports shall permit complete 2 concrete consolidation in and around the support. 3 4 A “mat” is two adjacent and perpendicular layers of reinforcing steel. In bridge decks, 5 top and bottom mats shall be supported adequately enough to hold both in their proper 6 positions. If bar supports directly support, or are directly supported on No. 4 bars, they 7 shall be spaced at not more than 3-foot intervals (or not more than 4-foot intervals for 8 bars No. 5 and larger). Wire ties to girder stirrups shall not be considered as supports. 9 To provide a rigid mat, the Contractor shall add other supports and tie wires to the top 10 mat as needed. 11 12 Unless noted otherwise, the minimum concrete cover for main reinforcing bars shall be: 13 14

3 inches to a concrete surface deposited against earth without intervening forms. 15 16 2½ inches to the top surface of a concrete bridge deck or bridge approach slab. 17 18 2 inches to a concrete surface when not specified otherwise in this section or in the 19 Contract documents. 20 21 1½ inches to a concrete barrier or curb surface. 22

23 Except for top cover in bridge decks and bridge approach slabs, minimum concrete 24 cover to ties and stirrups may be reduced by ½ inch but shall not be less than 1 inch. 25 Minimum concrete cover shall also be provided to the outermost part of mechanical 26 splices and headed steel reinforcing bars. 27 28 Reinforcing steel bar location, concrete cover and clearance shall not vary more than 29 the following tolerances from what is specified in the Contract documents: 30 31

Reinforcing bar location for members 12 inches or less in thickness: ±0.25 inch 32 33 Reinforcing bar location for members greater than 12 inches in thickness: ±0.375 34 inch 35 36 Reinforcing bar location for bars placed at equal spacing within a plane: the greater 37 of either ±1 inch or ±1 bar diameter within the plane. The total number of bars shall 38 not be fewer than that specified. 39 40 The clearance between reinforcement shall not be less than the greater of the bar 41 diameter or 1 inch for unbundled bars. For bundled bars, the clearance between 42 bundles shall not be less than the greater of 1 inch or a bar diameter derived from 43 the equivalent total area of all bars in the bundle. 44 45 Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars: ±1 inch 46 47 Embedded length of bars and length of bar lap splices: 48 49

No. 3 through No. 11: -1 inch 50 51 No. 14 through No. 18: -2 inches 52


1 Concrete cover measured perpendicular to concrete surface (except for the top 2 surface of bridge decks, bridge approach slabs and other roadway surfaces): ±0.25 3 inch 4 5 Concrete cover measured perpendicular to concrete surface for the top surface of 6 bridge decks, bridge approach slabs and other roadway surfaces: +0.25 inch, -0 7 inch 8

9 Before placing any concrete, the Contractor shall: 10 11

1. Clean all mortar from reinforcement, and 12 13 2. Obtain the Engineer’s permission to place concrete after the Engineer has 14

inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel. (Any concrete placed without 15 the Engineer’s permission shall be rejected and removed.) 16

17 6-02.3(25)H Finishing 18 The last paragraph is revised to read: 19 20

The Contractor may repair defects in prestressed concrete girders in accordance with 21 Section 6-01.16. 22

23 6-02.3(25)I Fabrication Tolerances 24 Item number 12 of the first paragraph is revised to read: 25 26

12. Stirrup Projection from Top of Girder: 27 28

Wide flange thin deck and slab girders: ½ inch 29 30 All other girders: ¾ inch 31

32 6-02.3(27) Concrete for Precast Units 33 The last sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 34 35

Type III portland cement or blended hydraulic cement is permitted to be used in precast 36 concrete units. 37

38 6-02.3(28)B Casting 39 In the second paragraph, the reference to Section 6-02.3(25)B is revised to read Section 6-40 02.3(25)C. 41 42 6-02.3(28)D Contractors Control Strength 43 In the first paragraph, “WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23” is revised to read “FOP for AASHTO 44 T 23”. 45 46 6-02.3(28)E Finishing 47 This section is supplemented with the following: 48 49

The Contractor may repair defects in precast panels in accordance with Section 6-50 01.16. 51


Section 6-18, Shotcrete Facing 1 January 2, 2018April 1, 2019 2

6-18.2 Materials 3 The reference to metakaolin is deleted. 4 5 6-18.3(3) Testing 6 In the last sentence of the first paragraph, “AASHTO T 24” is revised to read “ASTM C1604”. 7 8 6-18.3(3)B Production Testing 9 In the last sentence, “AASHTO T 24” is revised to read “ASTM C1604”. 10 11 6-18.3(4) Qualifications of Contractor’s Personnel 12 In the last sentence of the second paragraph, “AASHTO T 24” is revised to read “ASTM 13 C1604”. 14

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 8-01, Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control 1 April 2, 2018April 1, 2019 2

8-01.1 Description 3 This section is revised to read: 4 5

This Work consists of furnishing, installing, maintaining, removing and disposing of best 6 management practices (BMPs), as defined in the Washington Administrative Code 7 (WAC) 173-201A, to manage erosion and water quality in accordance with these 8 Specifications and as shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer. 9 10 The Contracting Agency may have a National Pollution Discharge Elimination System 11 Construction Stormwater General Permit (CSWGP) as identified in the Contract Special 12 Provisions. The Contracting Agency may or may not transfer coverage of the CSWGP 13 to the Contractor when a CSWGP has been obtained. The Contracting Agency may not 14 have a CSWGP for the project but may have another water quality related permit as 15 identified in the Contract Special Provisions or the Contracting Agency may not have 16 water quality related permits but the project is subject to applicable laws for the Work. 17 Section 8-01 covers all of these conditions. 18

19 This section is supplemented with the following new subsection: 20 21

8-01.1(1) Definitions 22 1. pH Affected Stormwater 23 24

a. Stormwater contacting green concrete (concrete that has set/stiffen but is still 25 curing), recycled concrete, or engineered soils (as defined in the Construction 26 Stormwater General Permit (CSWGP)) as a natural process 27

28 b. pH monitoring shall be performed in accordance with the CSWGP, or Water 29

Quality Standards (WQS in accordance with WAC 173-201A (surface) or 173-30 200C (ground)) when the CSWGP does not apply 31

32 c. May be neutralized and discharged to surface waters or infiltrated 33 34

2. pH Affected Non-Stormwater 35 36

a. Conditionally authorized in accordance with CSWGP Special Condition S.1.C., 37 uncontaminated water contacting green concrete, recycled concrete, or 38 engineered soils (as defined in the CSWGP) 39

40 b. Shall not be categorized as cementitious wastewater/concrete wastewater, as 41

defined below 42 43 c. Shall be managed and treated in accordance with the CSWGP, or WQS when 44

the CSWGP does not apply 45 46 d. pH adjustment and dechlorination may be necessary, as specified in the 47

CSWGP or in accordance with WQS when the CSWGP does not apply 48 49 e. May be neutralized, treated, and discharged to surface waters in accordance 50

with the CSWGP, with the exception of water-only shaft drilling slurry. Water-51


only shaft drilling slurry may be treated, neutralized, and infiltrated but not 1 discharged to surface waters (Refer to Special Conditions S1.C. Authorized 2 Discharges and S1.d Prohibited Discharges of the CSWGP) 3

4 3. Cementitious Wastewater/Concrete Wastewater 5 6

a. Any water that comes into contact with fine cementitious particles or slurry; any 7 water used in the production, placement and/or clean-up of cementitious 8 products; any water used to cut, grind, wash, or otherwise modify cementitious 9 products 10

11 b. When any water, including stormwater, commingles with cementitious 12

wastewater/concrete wastewater, the resulting water is considered 13 cementitious wastewater/concrete wastewater and shall be managed to 14 prevent discharge to waters of the State, including ground water 15

16 c. CSWGP Examples include: water used for or resulting from concrete 17

truck/mixer/pumper/tool/chute rinsing or washing, concrete saw cutting and 18 surfacing (sawing, coring, grinding, roughening, hydro-demolition, bridge and 19 road surfacing) 20

21 d. Cannot be neutralized and discharged or infiltrated 22

23 8-01.2 Materials 24 The first paragraph is revised to read: 25 26

Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections: 27 28

Corrugated Polyethylene Drain Pipe 9-05.1(6) 29 Quarry Spalls and Permeable Ballast 9-13 30 Erosion Control and Roadside Planting 9-14 31 Construction Geotextile 9-33 32

33 The second paragraph is deleted. 34 35 8-01.3(1) General 36 This section is revised to read: 37 38

Adaptive management shall be employed throughout the duration of the project for the 39 implementation of erosion and water pollution control permit requirements for the 40 current condition of the project site. The adaptive management includes the selection 41 and utilization of BMPs, scheduling of activities, prohibiting unacceptable practices, 42 implementing maintenance procedures, and other managerial practices that when used 43 singularly or in combination, prevent or reduce the release of pollutants to waters of the 44 State. The adaptive management shall use the means and methods identified in this 45 section and means and methods identified in the Washington State Department of 46 Transportation’s Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Manual or the Washington 47 State Department of Ecology’s Stormwater Management Manuals for construction 48 stormwater. 49 50 The Contractor shall install a high visibility fence along the site preservation lines shown 51 in the Plans or as instructed by the Engineer. 52


1 Throughout the life of the project, the Contractor shall preserve and protect the 2 delineated preservation area, acting immediately to repair or restore any high visibility 3 fencing damaged or removed. 4 5 All discharges to surface waters shall comply with surface water quality standards as 6 defined in Washington Administrative Code (WAC) Chapter 173-201A. All discharges to 7 the ground groundwater shall comply with groundwater quality standards WAC Chapter 8 173-200. The Contractor shall comply with the CSWGP when the project is covered by 9 the CSWGP. 10 11 The Contractor shall comply with the CSWGP when the project is covered by the 12 CSWGP. Temporary Work, at a minimum, shall include the implementation of: 13 14

1. Sediment control measures prior to ground disturbing activities to ensure all 15 discharges from construction areas receive treatment prior to discharging from 16 the site. 17

18 2. Flow control measures to prevent erosive flows from developing. 19 20 3. Water management strategies and pollution prevention measures to prevent 21

contamination of waters that will be discharged to surface waters or the 22 ground. 23

24 4. Erosion control measures to stabilize erodible earth not being worked. 25 26 5. Maintenance of BMPs to ensure continued compliant performance. 27 28 6. Immediate corrective action if evidence suggests construction activity is not in 29

compliance. Evidence includes sampling data, olfactory or visual evidence 30 such as the presence of suspended sediment, turbidity, discoloration, or oil 31 sheen in discharges. 32

33 To the degree possible, the Contractor shall coordinate this temporary Work with 34 permanent drainage and erosion control roadside restoration Work the Contract 35 requires. 36 37 Clearing, grubbing, excavation, borrow, or fill within the Right of Way shall never expose 38 more erodible earth than as listed below: 39 40

Western Washington (West of the Cascade

Mountain Crest)

Eastern Washington (East of the Cascade

Mountain Crest) May 1 through September 30

17 Acres April 1 through

October 31 17 Acres

October 1 through April

30 5 Acres

November 1 through March

31 5 Acres

41 The Engineer may increase or decrease the limits based on project conditions. 42 43


Erodible earth is defined as any surface where soils, grindings, or other materials may 1 be capable of being displaced and transported by rain, wind, or surface water runoff. 2 3 Erodible earth not being worked, whether at final grade or not, shall be covered within 4 the specified time period (see the table below), using BMPs for erosion control. 5 6

Western Washington (West of the Cascade

Mountain Crest)

Eastern Washington (East of the Cascade

Mountain Crest) October 1

through April 30

2 days maximum

October 1 through June

30

5 days maximum

May 1 to September 30

7 days maximum

November 1 through March

31

10 days maximum

7 When applicable, the Contractor shall be responsible for all Work required for 8 compliance with the CSWGP including annual permit fees. 9 10 If the Engineer, under Section 1-08.6, orders the Work suspended, the Contractor shall 11 continue to comply with this division during the suspension. 12 13 Nothing in this Section shall relieve the Contractor from complying with other Contract 14 requirements. 15

16 8-01.3(1)A Submittals 17 This section’s content is deleted. 18 19 This section is supplemented with the following new subsection: 20 21

8-01.3(1)A1 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Plan 22 A Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control (TESC) pPlans consists of a narrative 23 section and plan sheets that meets the Washington State Department of Ecology’s 24 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) requirement in the CSWGP. For 25 projects that do not require a CSWGP but have the potential to discharge to surface 26 waters of the state, an abbreviated TESC plan shall be used, which may consist of a 27 narrative and/or plan sheets and shall demonstrate compliance with applicable codes, 28 ordinances and regulations, including the water quality standards for surface waters; 29 Chapter 173-201A of the Washington Administrative Code (WAC) and water quality 30 standards for groundwaters in accordance with Chapter 173-200 WAC. Abbreviated 31 TESC plans are not required to include plan sheets and are used on small projects that 32 disturb soil and have the potential to discharge but are not covered by the CSWGP. The 33 contract uses the term “TESC plan” to describe both TESC plans and abbreviated 34 TESC plans. When the Contracting Agency has developed a TESC plan for a Contract, 35 the narrative is included in the appendix to the Special Provisions and the TESC plan 36 sheets, when required, are included in the Contract Plans. The Contracting Agency 37 TESC plan will not include off-site areas used to directly support construction activity. 38 39 The Contractor shall either adopt the TESC Plan in the Contract or develop a new 40 TESC Plan. If the Contractor adopts the Contracting Agency TESC Plan in scenarios in 41 which the CSWGP is transferred to the Contractor, the Contractor shall modify the 42 TESC Plan to meet match the Contractor’s schedule, method of construction, and to 43


include off-site all areas that will be used to directly support construction activity such as 1 equipment staging yards, material storage areas, or borrow areas. Contractor TESC 2 Plans shall include all high visibility fence delineation shown on the Contracting Agency 3 Contract in the Plans. All TESC Plans shall meet the requirements of the current edition 4 of the WSDOT Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Manual M 3109 and be 5 adaptively managed as needed throughout construction based on site inspections and 6 discharge samples required sampling to maintain compliance with the CSWGP, or WQS 7 when no CSWGP applies. The Contractor shall develop a schedule for implementation 8 of the TESC work and incorporate it into the Contractor’s progress schedule. 9 10 The Contractor shall submit their TESC Plan (either the adopted plan or new plan) and 11 implementation schedule as Type 2 Working Drawings. At the request of the Engineer, 12 updated TESC Plans shall be submitted as Type 1 Working Drawings. 13

14 8-01.3(1)B Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Lead 15 This section is revised to read: 16 17

The Contractor shall identify the ESC Lead at the preconstruction discussions and in the 18 TESC Plan. The ESC Lead shall have, for the life of the Contract, a current Certificate 19 of Training in Construction Site Erosion and Sediment Control from a course approved 20 by the Washington State Department of Ecology. The ESC Lead must be onsite or on 21 call at all times throughout construction. The ESC Lead shall be listed on the 22 Emergency Contact List required under Section 1-05.13(1). 23 24 The ESC Lead shall implement the TESC Plan. Implementation shall include, but is not 25 limited to: 26 27

1. Installing, adaptively managing, and maintaining temporary erosion and 28 sediment control BMPs to assure continued performance of their intended 29 function. Damaged or inadequate BMPs shall be corrected immediately. 30

31 2. Updating the TESC Plan to reflect current field conditions. 32 33 3. Discharge sampling and submitting Discharge Monitoring Reports (DMRs) to 34

the Washington State Department of Ecology in accordance with the CSWGP. 35 36 4. Develop and maintain the Site Log Book as defined in the CSWGP. When the 37

Site Log Book or portion thereof is electronically developed, the electronic 38 documentation must be accessible onsite. As a part of the Site Log Book, the 39 Contractor shall develop and maintain a tracking table to show that identified 40 TESC compliance issues are fully resolved within 10 calendar days. The table 41 shall include the date an issue was identified, a description of how it was 42 resolved, and the date the issue was fully resolved. 43

44 The ESC Lead shall also inspect all areas disturbed by construction activities, all on-site 45 erosion and sediment control BMPs, and all stormwater discharge points at least once 46 every calendar week and within 24-hours of runoff events in which stormwater 47 discharges from the site. Inspections of temporarily stabilized, inactive sites may be 48 reduced to once every calendar month. The Washington State Department of Ecology’s 49 Erosion and Sediment Control Site Inspection Form, located at 50 https://ecology.wa.gov/Regulations-Permits/Permits-certifications/Stormwater-general-51 permits/Construction-stormwater-permit, shall be completed for each inspection and a 52


copy shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than the end of the next working day 1 following the inspection. 2

3 8-01.3(1)C Water Management 4 This section is supplemented with the following new subsections: 5 6

8-01.3(1)C5 Water Management for In-Water Work Below Ordinary High Water 7 Mark (OHWM) 8 Work over surface waters of the state (defined in WAC 173-201A-010) or below the 9 OHWM (defined in RCW 90.58.030) must shall comply with water quality standards for 10 surface waters of the State of Washington. 11 12 8-01.3(1)C6 Environmentally Acceptable Hydraulic Fluid 13 All equipment containing hydraulic fluid that extends from a bridge deck over surface 14 waters of the state or below the OHWM, shall be equipped with an environmentally 15 acceptable biodegradable hydraulic fluid. The fluid shall meet specific requirements for 16 biodegradability, aquatic toxicity, and bioaccumulation in accordance with the United 17 States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) publication EPA800-R-11-002. 18 Acceptance shall be in accordance with Section 1-06.3, Manufacturer’s Certification of 19 Compliance. The fluid shall achieve either a Pw1 Environmental Persistence 20 Classification stated in ASTM D6046 (≥60% biodegradation in 28 days) or equivalent 21 standard. Alternatively, hydraulic fluid that meets International Organization for 22 Standardization (ISO 15380), the European Union Ecolabel, or equivalent certification 23 will also be accepted. 24 25 The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of a manufacturer 26 catalog cut of the hydraulic fluid used. 27 28 The designation of environmentally acceptable biodegradable hydraulic fluid does not 29 mean fluid spills are acceptable. The Contractor shall respond to spills to land or water 30 in accordance with the Contract, the associated SPCC Plan, and all applicable local, 31 state, and federal regulations. 32 33 8-01.3(1)C7 Turbidity Curtain 34 All Work for the turbidity curtain shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s 35 recommendations for the site conditions. Removal procedures shall be developed and 36 used to minimize silt release and disturbance of silt. The Contractor shall submit a Type 37 2 Working Drawing, detailing product information, installation and removal procedures, 38 equipment and workforce needs, maintenance plans, and emergency 39 repair/replacement plans. 40 41 Turbidity curtain materials, installation, and maintenance shall be sufficient to comply 42 with water quality standards. 43 44 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 10 days in advance of removing the turbidity 45 curtain. All components of the turbidity curtain shall be removed from the project. 46

47 8-01.3(1)C1 Disposal of Dewatering Water 48 This section is revised to read: 49 50

When uncontaminated groundwater is encountered in an excavation on a project it may 51 be infiltrated within vegetated areas of the right of way not designated as Sensitive 52


Areas or incorporated into an existing stormwater conveyance system at a rate that will 1 not cause erosion or flooding in any receiving surface water. 2 3 Alternatively, the Contractor may pursue independent disposal and treatment 4 alternatives that do not use the stormwater conveyance system provided it is in 5 compliance with the applicable WACs and permits. 6

7 8-01.3(1)C2 Process Wastewater 8 This section is revised to read: 9 10

Wastewater generated on-site as a byproduct of a construction process shall not be 11 discharged to surface waters of the State. Some sources of process wastewater may be 12 infiltrated in accordance with the CSWGP. with concurrence from the Engineer. Some 13 sources of process wastewater may be disposed via independent disposal and 14 treatment alternatives in compliance with the applicable WACs and permits. 15

16 8-01.3(1)C3 Shaft Drilling Slurry Wastewater 17 This section is revised to read: 18 19

Wastewater generated on-site during shaft drilling activity shall be managed and 20 disposed of in accordance with the requirements below. No shaft drilling slurry 21 wastewater shall be discharged to surface waters of the State. Neither the sediment nor 22 liquid portions of the shaft drilling slurry wastewater shall be contaminated, as 23 detectable by visible or olfactory indication (e.g., chemical sheen or smell). 24 25

1. Water-only shaft drilling slurry or water slurry with accepted flocculants may be 26 infiltrated on-site. Flocculants used shall meet the requirements of Section 9-27 14.5(1) or shall be chitosan products listed as General Use Level Designation 28 (GULD) on the Washington State Department of Ecology’s stormwater 29 treatment technologies webpage for construction treatment. Infiltration is 30 permitted if the following requirements are met: 31

32 a. Wastewater shall have a pH of 6.5 – 8.5 prior to discharge. 33 34 b. The amount of flocculant added to the slurry shall be kept to the minimum 35

needed to adequately settle out solids. The flocculant shall be thoroughly 36 mixed into the slurry. 37

38 c. The slurry removed from the shaft shall be contained in a leak proof cell or 39

tank for a minimum of 3 hours. 40 41 d. The infiltration rate shall be reduced if needed to prevent wastewater from 42

leaving the infiltration location. The infiltration site shall be monitored 43 regularly during infiltration activity. All wastewater discharged to the 44 ground shall fully infiltrate and discharges shall stop before the end of 45 each work day. 46

47 e. Drilling spoils and settled sediments remaining in the containment cell or 48

tank shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 6-19.3(4)F. 49 50 f. Infiltration locations shall be in upland areas at least 150 feet away from 51

surface waters, wells, on-site sewage systems, aquifer sensitive recharge 52


areas, sole source aquifers, well head protection areas, and shall be 1 marked on the plan sheets before the infiltration activity begins. 2

3 g. Prior to infiltration, the Contractor shall submit a Shaft Drilling Slurry 4

Wastewater Management and Infiltration Plan as a Type 2 Working 5 Drawing. This Plan shall be kept on-site, adapted if needed to meet the 6 construction requirements, and updated to reflect what is being done in 7 the field. The Working Drawing shall include, at a minimum, the following 8 information: 9

10 i. Plan sheet showing the proposed infiltration location and all surface 11

waters, wells, on-site sewage systems, aquifer-sensitive recharge 12 areas, sole source aquifers, and well-head protection areas within 13 150 feet. 14

15 ii. The proposed elevation of soil surface receiving the wastewater for 16

infiltration and the anticipated phreatic surface (i.e., saturated soil). 17 18 iii. The source of the water used to produce the slurry. 19 20 iv. The estimated total volume of wastewater to be infiltrated. 21 22 v. The accepted flocculant to be used (if any). 23 24 vi. The controls or methods used to prevent surface wastewater runoff 25

from leaving the infiltration location. 26 27 vii. The strategy for removing slurry wastewater from the shaft and 28

containing the slurry wastewater once it has been removed from the 29 shaft. 30

31 viii. The strategy for monitoring infiltration activity and adapting methods 32

to ensure compliance. 33 34 ix. A contingency plan that can be implemented immediately if it 35

becomes evident that the controls in place or methods being used are 36 not adequate. 37

38 x. The strategy for cleaning up the infiltration location after the infiltration 39

activity is done. Cleanup shall include stabilizing any loose sediment 40 on the surface within the infiltration area generated as a byproduct of 41 suspended solids in the infiltrated wastewater or soil disturbance 42 associated with BMP placement and removal. 43

44 2. Shaft drilling mineral slurry, synthetic slurry, or slurry with polymer additives 45

not allowed for infiltration shall be contained and disposed of by the Contractor 46 at an accepted disposal facility in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C. Spoils 47 that have come into contact with mineral slurry shall be disposed of in 48 accordance with Section 6-19.3(4)F. 49

50 8-01.3(1)C4 Management of Off-Site Water 51 This section is revised to read: 52


1 Prior to clearing and grubbing, the Contractor shall intercept all sources of off-site 2 surface water and overland flow that will run-on to the project. Off-site surface water 3 run-on shall be diverted through or around the project in a way that does not introduce 4 construction related pollution. It shall be diverted to its preconstruction discharge 5 location in a manner that does not increase preconstruction flow rate and velocity and 6 protects contiguous properties and waterways from erosion. The Contractor shall submit 7 a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the method for performing this Work. 8

9 8-01.3(1)E Detention/Retention Pond Construction 10 This section is revised to read: 11 12

Whether pPermanent or temporary, ponds shall be constructed before beginning other 13 grading and excavation Work in the area that drains into that pond. Detention/retention 14 ponds may be constructed concurrently with grading and excavation when allowed by 15 the Engineer. Temporary conveyances shall be installed concurrently with grading in 16 accordance with the TESC Plan so that newly graded areas drain to the pond as they 17 are exposed. 18

19 8-01.3(2) Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching 20 This section’s title is revised to read: 21 22

8-01.3(2) Temporary Seeding and Mulching 23 24 8-01.3(2)A Preparation for Application 25 This section is revised to read: 26 27

A cleated roller, crawler tractor, or similar equipment, which forms longitudinal 28 depressions at least 2 inches deep shall be used for compaction and preparation of the 29 surface to be seeded. The entire area shall be uniformly covered with longitudinal 30 depressions formed perpendicular to the natural flow of water on the slope. The soil 31 shall be conditioned with sufficient water so the longitudinal depressions remain in the 32 soil surface until completion of the seeding. 33

34 8-01.3(2)A1 Seeding 35 This section is deleted in its entirety. 36 37 8-01.3(2)A2 Temporary Seeding 38 This section is deleted in its entirety. 39 40 8-01.3(2)B Seeding and Fertilizing 41 This section, including title, is revised to read: 42 43

8-01.3(2)B Temporary Seeding 44 Temporary grass seed shall be a commercially prepared mix, made up of low growing 45 grass species that will grow without irrigation at the project location, and accepted by 46 the Engineer. The application rate shall be two pounds per 1000 square feet. 47 48 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 24 hours in advance of any 49 seeding operation and shall not begin the Work until areas prepared or designated for 50 seeding have been accepted. Following the Engineer’s acceptance, seeding of the 51 accepted slopes shall begin immediately. 52


1 Temporary seeding may be sown at any time allowed by the Engineer. Temporary 2 seeding shall be sown by one of the following methods: 3 4

1. A hydro seeder that utilizes water as the carrying agent, and maintains 5 continuous agitation through paddle blades. It shall have an operating capacity 6 sufficient to agitate, suspend, and mix into a homogeneous slurry the specified 7 amount of seed and water or other material. Distribution and discharge lines 8 shall be large enough to prevent stoppage and shall be equipped with a set of 9 hydraulic discharge spray nozzles that will provide a uniform distribution of the 10 slurry. 11

12 2. Blower equipment with an adjustable disseminating device capable of 13

maintaining a constant, measured rate of material discharge that will ensure an 14 even distribution of seed at the rates specified. 15

16 3. Power-drawn drills or seeders. 17 18 4. Areas in which the above methods are impractical may be seeded by hand 19

methods. 20 21 When seeding by hand, the seed shall be incorporated into the top ¼ inch of soil by 22 hand raking or other method that is allowed by the Engineer. 23 24 Seed applied using a hydroseeder shall have a tracer added to visibly aid uniform 25 application. This tracer shall not be harmful to plant, aquatic, or animal life. If Short-26 Term Mulch is used as a tracer, the application rate shall not exceed 250 pounds 27 per acre. 28 29 Seed and fertilizer may be applied in one application provided that the fertilizer is placed 30 in the hydroseeder tank no more than 1 hour prior to application. 31

32 8-01.3(2)D Mulching 33 This section, including title, is revised to read: 34 35

8-01.3(2)D Temporary Mulching 36 Temporary mulch shall be straw, wood strand, or HECP mulch and shall be used for the 37 purpose of erosion control by protecting bare soil surface from particle displacement. 38 Mulch shall not be applied below the anticipated water level of ditch slopes, pond 39 bottoms, and stream banks. HECP mulch shall not be used within the Ordinary High 40 Water Mark. Non-HECP mulches applied below the anticipated water level shall be 41 removed or anchored down so that it cannot move or float, at no additional expense to 42 the Contracting Agency. 43 44 Straw or wood strand mulch shall be applied at a rate to achieve at least 95 percent 45 visual blockage of the soil surface. 46 47 Short Term Mulch shall be hydraulically applied at the rate of 2500 pounds per acre and 48 may be applied in one lift. 49 50 Moderate Term Mulch and Long Term Mulch shall be hydraulically applied at the rate of 51 3500 pounds per acre with no more than 2000 pounds applied in any single lift. 52


1 Mulch sprayed on signs or sign Structures shall be removed the same day. 2 3 Areas not accessible by mulching equipment shall be mulched by accepted 4 hand methods. 5

6 8-01.3(2)F Dates for Application of Final Seed, Fertilizer, and Mulch 7 This section is deleted in its entirety. 8 In the table, the second column heading is revised to read: 9 10

Eastern Washington1 11 (East of the Cascade Mountain Crest) 12

13 Footnote 1 in the table is revised to read: 14 15

Seeding may be allowed outside these dates when allowed or directed by the Engineer. 16 17 8-01.3(2)G Protection and Care of Seeded Areas 18 This section is deleted in its entirety. 19 20 8-01.3(2)H Inspection 21 This section is deleted in its entirety. 22 23 8-01.3(2)I Mowing 24 This section is deleted in its entirety. 25 26 8-01.3(3) Placing Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket 27 This section’s title is revised to read: 28 29

8-01.3(3) Placing Erosion Control Blanket 30 31 The first sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 32 33

Erosion Control Blankets are used as an erosion prevention device and to enhance the 34 establishment of vegetation. 35

36 The second paragraph is revised to read: 37 38

When used to enhance the establishment of seeded areas, seeding and fertilizing shall 39 be done prior to blanket installation. 40

41 8-01.3(4) Placing Compost Blanket 42 This section is revised to read: 43 44

Compost blankets are used for erosion control. Compost blanket shall be only be placed 45 on ground surfaces that are steeper than 3-foot horizontal and 1-foot vertical though 46 steeper slopes shall be broken by wattles or compost socks placed according to the 47 Standard Plans. Compost shall be placed to a depth of 3 inches over bare soil. An 48 organic tackifier shall be placed over the entire composted area when dry or windy 49 conditions are present or expected. The tackifier shall be applied immediately after the 50 application of compost to prevent compost from leaving the composted area. 51 52


Medium compost shall be used for the compost blanket. Compost may serve the 1 purpose of soil amendment as specified in Section 8-02.3(6). 2

3 8-01.3(5) Plastic Covering 4 The first sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 5 6

Erosion Control – Plastic coverings used to temporarily cover stockpiled materials, 7 slopes or bare soils shall be installed and maintained in a way that prevents water from 8 intruding under the plastic and prevents the plastic cover from being damaged by wind. 9 Plastic coverings shall be placed with at least a 12-inch overlap of all seams and be a 10 minimum of 6 mils thick. Soil stabilization and energy dissipation BMPs shall be used to 11 minimize the erosive energy flows coming off sloped areas of plastic (e.g., toe of slope). 12 When feasible, the Contractor shall prevent clean runoff from plastic from hitting bare 13 soil. Flows from plastic shall be directed to stabilized outlet areas. 14

15 8-01.3(7) Stabilized Construction Entrance 16 The first paragraph is revised to read: 17 18

Temporary stabilized construction entrance shall be constructed in accordance with the 19 Standard Plans, prior to construction vehicles entering the roadway from locations that 20 generate sediment track out on the roadway. Material used for stabilized construction 21 entrance shall be free of extraneous materials that may cause or contribute to track out. 22

23 8-01.3(8) Street Cleaning 24 This section is revised to read: 25 26

Self-propelled pickup street sweepers shall be used to remove and collect dirt and other 27 debris from the Roadway. The street sweeper shall effectively collect these materials 28 and prevent them from being washed or blown off the Roadway or into waters of the 29 State. Street sweepers shall not generate fugitive dust and shall be designed and 30 operated in compliance with applicable air quality standards. Material collected by the 31 street sweeper shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C. 32 33 When allowed by the Engineer, power broom sweepers may be used in non-34 environmentally sensitive areas. The broom sweeper shall sweep dirt and other debris 35 from the roadway into the work area. The swept material shall be prevented from 36 entering or washing into waters of the State. 37 38 Street washing with water will require the concurrence of the Engineer. 39

40 8-01.3(12) Compost Socks 41 The first two sentences of the first paragraph are revised to read: 42 43

Compost socks are used to disperse flow and sediment. Compost socks shall be 44 installed as soon as construction will allow but before flow conditions create erosive 45 flows or discharges from the site. Compost socks shall be installed prior to any mulching 46 or compost placement. 47

48 8-01.3(13) Temporary Curb 49 The second to last two sentences of the second paragraph is are revised to read: 50 51


Temporary curbs shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height. Temporary curb shall be 1 installed so that ponding does not occur in the adjacent roadway. 2

3 8-01.3(14) Temporary Pipe Slope Drain 4 The third and fourth paragraphs are revised to read: 5 6

The pipe fittings shall be water tight and the pipe secured to the slope with metal posts, 7 wood stakes, or sand bags., or as allowed by the Engineer. 8 9 The water shall be discharged to a stabilized conveyance, sediment trap, stormwater 10 pond, rock splash pad, or vegetated strip, in a manner to prevent erosion and maintain 11 water quality compliance. 12

13 The last paragraph is deleted. 14 15 8-01.3(15) Maintenance 16 This section is revised to read: 17 18

Erosion and sediment control BMPs shall be maintained or adaptively managed as 19 required by the CSWGP until the Engineer determines they are no longer needed. 20 When deficiencies in functional performance are identified, the deficiencies shall be 21 rectified immediately. 22 23 The BMPs shall be inspected on the schedule outlined in Section 8-01.3(1)B for 24 damage and sediment deposits. Damage to or undercutting of BMPs shall be repaired 25 immediately. 26 27 In areas where the Contractor’s activities have compromised the erosion control 28 functions of the existing grasses, the Contractor shall overseed at no additional cost to 29 the Contracting Agency. 30 31 The quarry spalls of construction entrances shall be refreshed, replaced, or screened to 32 maintain voids between the spalls for collecting mud and dirt. 33 34 Unless otherwise specified, when the depth of accumulated sediment and 35 debris reaches approximately ⅓ the height of the BMP the deposits shall be removed. 36 Debris or contaminated sediment shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 2-37 03.3(7)C. Clean sediments may be stabilized on-site using BMPs as allowed by the 38 Engineer. 39

40 8-01.3(16) Removal 41 This section is revised to read: 42 43

The Contractor shall remove all temporary BMPs, all associated hardware and 44 associated accumulated sediment deposition from the project limits prior to Physical 45 Completion unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. When the temporary BMP 46 materials are made of natural plant fibers unaltered by synthetic materials the Engineer 47 may allow leaving the BMP in place. 48 49 The Contractor shall remove BMPs and associated hardware in a way that minimizes 50 soil disturbance. The Contractor shall permanently stabilize all bare and disturbed soil 51 after removal of BMPs. If the installation and use of the erosion control BMPs have 52


compacted or otherwise rendered the soil inhospitable to plant growth, such as 1 construction entrances, the Contractor shall take measures to rehabilitate the soil to 2 facilitate plant growth. This may include, but is not limited to, ripping the soil, 3 incorporating soil amendments, or seeding with the specified seed. 4 5 At the request of the Contractor and at the sole discretion of the Engineer the CSWGP 6 may be transferred back to the Contracting Agency. Approval of the Transfer of 7 Coverage request will require the following: 8 9

1. All other Work required for Contract Completion has been completed. 10 11 2. All Work required for compliance with the CSWGP has been completed to the 12

maximum extent possible. This includes removal of BMPs that are no longer 13 needed and the site has undergone all Stabilization identified for meeting the 14 requirements of Final Stabilization in the CSWGP. 15

16 3. An Equitable Adjustment change order for the cost of Work that has not been 17

completed by the Contractor. 18 19 4. Submittal of the Washington State Department of Ecology Transfer of 20

Coverage form (Ecology form ECY 020-87a) to the Engineer. 21 22 If the Engineer approves the transfer of coverage back to the Contracting Agency, the 23 requirement in Section 1-07.5(3) for the Contractor’s submittal of the Notice of 24 Termination form to the Washington State Department of Ecology will not apply. 25

26 8-01.4 Measurement 27 This section’s content is deleted and replaced with the following new subsections: 28 29

8-01.4(1) Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items) 30 When the Bid Proposal contains the item “Erosion Control and Water Pollution 31 Prevention” there will be no measurement of unit or force account items for Work 32 defined in Section 8-01 except as described in Sections 8-01.4(3) and 8-01.4(4). Also, 33 except as described in Section 8-01.4(3), all of Sections 8-01.4(2) and 8-01.5(2) are 34 deleted. 35 36 8-01.4(2) Item Bids 37 When the Proposal does not contain the items “Erosion Control and Water Pollution 38 Prevention”, Section 8-01.4(1) and 8-01.5(1) are deleted and the Bid Proposal will 39 contain some or all of the following items measured as noted. 40 41

ESC lead will be measured per day for each day that an inspection is made and a 42 report is filed. 43 44 Biodegradable eErosion control blanket and plastic covering will be measured by 45 the square yard along the ground slope line of surface area covered and accepted. 46 47 Turbidity curtains will be measured by the linear foot along the ground line of the 48 installed curtain. 49 50


Check dams will be measured per linear foot one time only along the ground line of 1 the completed check dam. No additional measurement will be made for check 2 dams that are required to be rehabilitated or replaced due to wear. 3 4 Stabilized construction entrances will be measured by the square yard by ground 5 slope measurement for each entrance constructed. 6 7 Tire wash facilities will be measured per each for each tire wash installed. 8 9 Street cleaning will be measured by the hour for the actual time spent cleaning 10 pavement, refilling with water, dumping and transport to and from cleaning 11 locations within the project limits, as authorized by the Engineer. Time to mobilize 12 the equipment to or from the project limits on which street cleaning is required will 13 not be measured. 14 15 Inlet protections will be measured per each for each initial installation at a 16 drainage structure. 17 18 Silt fence, gravel filter, compost berms, and wood chip berms will be measured by 19 the linear foot along the ground line of the completed barrier. 20 21 Wattles and compost socks will be measured by the linear foot. 22 23 Temporary curbs will be measured by the linear foot along the ground line of the 24 completed installation. 25 26 Temporary pipe slope drains will be measured by the linear foot along the flow line 27 of the pipe. 28 29 Coir logs will be measured by the linear foot along the ground line of the completed 30 installation. 31 32 Outlet protections will be measured per each initial installation at an outlet location. 33 34 Temporary seeding, temporary mulching, and Ttackifiers will be measured by the 35 acre by ground slope measurement. 36 37 Compost blanket will be measured by the square yard by ground slope surface 38 area covered and accepted. 39

40 8-01.4(3) Reinstating Unit Items with Lump Sum Erosion Control and Water 41 Pollution Prevention 42 The Contract Provisions may establish the project as lump sum, in accordance with 43 Section 8-01.4(1) and also include one or more of the items included above in Section 44 8-01.4(2). When that occurs, the corresponding measurement provision in Section 8-45 01.4(2) is not deleted and the Work under that item will be measured as specified. 46 47 8-01.4(4) Items not included with Lump Sum Erosion Control and Water Pollution 48 Prevention 49 Compost blanket will be measured by the square yard by ground slope surface area 50 covered and accepted. 51 52


Mulching Temporary mulch will be measured by the acre by ground slope surface area 1 covered and accepted. 2 3 Seeding, fertilizing, liming, mulching, and mowing, will be measured by the acre by 4 ground slope measurement. 5 6 Seeding and fertilizing by hand will be measured by the square yard by ground slope 7 measurement. No adjustment in area size will be made for the vegetation free zone 8 around each plant. 9 10 Fencing High visibility fence will be measured by the linear foot along the ground line of 11 the completed fence. 12

13 8-01.5 Payment 14 This section’s content is deleted and replaced with the following new subsections: 15 16

8-01.5(1) Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items) 17 Payment will be made for the following Bid item when it is included in the Proposal: 18 19

“Erosion Control and Water Pollution Prevention”, lump sum. 20 21 The lump sum Contract price for “Erosion Control and Water Pollution Prevention” 22 shall be full pay to perform the Work as described in Section 8-01 except for costs 23 compensated by Bid Proposal items inserted through Contract Provisions as 24 described in Section 8-01.4(2). Progress payments for the lump sum item “Erosion 25 Control and Water Pollution Prevention” will be made as follows: 26 27

1. The Contracting Agency will pay 15 percent of the bid amount for the 28 initial set up for the item. Initial set up includes the following: 29

30 a. Acceptance of the TESC Plan provided by the Contracting Agency or 31

submittal of a new TESC Plan, 32 33 b. Submittal of a schedule for the installation of the BMPs, and 34 35 c. Identifying water quality sampling locations. 36

37 2. 70 percent of the bid amount will be paid in accordance with Section 1-38

09.9. 39 40 3. Once the project is physically complete and copies of the all reports 41

submitted to the Washington State Department of Ecology have been 42 submitted to the Engineer, and, if applicable, transference of the CSWGP 43 back to the Contracting Agency is complete, the remaining 15 percent of 44 the bid amount shall be paid in accordance with Section 1-09.9. 45

46 8-01.5(2) Item Bids 47 “ESC Lead”, per day. 48 49 “Turbidity Curtain”, per linear foot. 50 51 “Biodegradable “Erosion Control Blanket”, per square yard. 52


1 “Plastic Covering”, per square yard. 2 3 “Check Dam”, per linear foot. 4 5 “Inlet Protection”, per each. 6 7 “Gravel Filter Berm”, per linear foot. 8 9 “Stabilized Construction Entrance”, per square yard. 10 11 “Street Cleaning”, per hour. 12 13 “Silt Fence”, per linear foot. 14 15 “Wood Chip Berm”, per linear foot. 16 17 “Compost Berm”, per linear foot. 18 19 “Wattle”, per linear foot. 20 21 “Compost Sock”, per linear foot. 22 23 “Coir Log”, per linear foot. 24 25 “Temporary Curb”, per linear foot. 26 27 “Temporary Pipe Slope Drain”, per linear foot. 28 29 “Temporary Seeding”, per acre. 30 31 “Temporary Mulching”, per acre. 32 33 “Compost Blanket”, per square yard. 34 35 “Outlet Protection”, per each. 36 37 “Tackifier”, per acre. 38 39 “Erosion/Water Pollution Control”, by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6. 40 41 Maintenance and removal of erosion and water pollution control devices including 42 removal and disposal of sediment, stabilization and rehabilitation of soil disturbed 43 by these activities, and any additional Work deemed necessary by the Engineer to 44 control erosion and water pollution will be paid by force account in accordance with 45 Section 1-09.6. 46 47 To provide a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an 48 amount in the Proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total Bid. 49 50


8-01.5(3) Reinstating Unit Items with Lump Sum Erosion Control and Water 1 Pollution Prevention 2 The Contract may establish the project as lump sum, in accordance with Section 8-3 01.4(1) and also reinstate the measurement of one or more of the items described in 4 Section 8-01.4(2), except for Erosion/Water Pollution Control, by force account. When 5 that occurs, the corresponding payment provision in Section 8-01.5(2) is not deleted 6 and the Work under that item will be paid as specified. 7 8 8-01.5(4) Items not included with Lump Sum Erosion Control and Water Pollution 9 Prevention 10 Payment will be made for each of the following Bid items when they are it is included in 11 the Proposal: 12 13

“Compost Blanket”, per square yard. 14 15 “Mulching”, per acre 16 17 “Mulching with PAM”, per acre 18 19 “Mulching with Short-Term Mulch”, per acre. 20 21 “Mulching with Moderate-Term Mulch”, per acre. 22 23 “Mulching with Long-Term Mulch”, per acre. 24 25 “Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching”, per acre. 26 27 “Seeding and Fertilizing”, per acre. 28 29 “Seeding and Fertilizing by Hand”, per square yard. 30 31 “Second Application of Fertilizer”, per acre. 32 33 “Liming”, per acre. 34 35 “Mowing”, per acre. 36 37 “Seeding and Mulching”, per acre. 38 39 “High Visibility Fence”, per linear foot. 40


Section 8-02, Roadside Restoration 1 January 2, 2018April 1, 2019 2

This section, including all subsections, is revised to read: 3 4

8-02.1 Description 5 This Work consists of preserving, maintaining, establishing and augmenting vegetation 6 on the roadsides and within mitigation or sundry site areas. It includes vegetation 7 preservation, weed and pest control, furnishing and placing topsoil, compost, and soil 8 amendments, and furnishing and planting seed, sod and plants of all forms and 9 container types. It includes performing plant establishment activities and soil 10 bioengineering. Work shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications and 11 as shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer. 12 13 Trees, whips, shrubs, ground covers, cuttings, live stakes, live poles, live branches, 14 rhizomes, tubers, rootstock, and seedlings will hereinafter be referred to collectively as 15 “plants” or “plant material”. Grass, wildflowers, and other plant materials installed in 16 seed form will hereinafter be referred to collectively as “seed”. 17 18 8-02.2 Materials 19 The reference to the material “Soil” is revised to read “Topsoil”. 20 Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections: 21 22

Erosion Control and Roadside Planting 9-14 23 Water 9-25.2 24 25

Botanical identification and nomenclature of plant materials shall be based on 26 descriptions by Hitchcock and Cronquist in “Flora of the Pacific Northwest”. Botanical 27 identification and nomenclature of plant material not found in "Flora" shall be based on 28 Bailey in “Hortus Third” or superseding editions and amendments or as referenced in 29 the Plans. 30 31 8-02.3 Construction Requirements 32

8-02.3(1) Responsibility During Construction 33 The Contractor shall prepare, install, and ensure adequate and proper care of all 34 roadside seeded, planted, and lawn areas on the project until all plant 35 establishment periods required by the Contract are complete or until Physical 36 Completion of the project, whichever is last. 37 38 Adequate and proper care shall include, but is not limited to, keeping all plant 39 material in a healthy, growing condition by watering, pruning, and other actions 40 deemed necessary for plant health. This Work shall include keeping the project 41 area free from insect infestation, weeds or unwanted vegetation, litter, and other 42 debris along with retaining the finished grades and mulch in a neat uniform 43 condition. 44 45 Existing desirable vegetation shall be saved and protected unless removal is 46 required by the Contract or allowed by the Engineer. 47 48 The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for the maintenance and appearance 49 of the roadside restoration. 50 51


8-02.3(2) Work Plans 1 Three Work Plan submittals exist under this Section: 2 3

1. Roadside Work Plan: This plan is required when Work will disturb the 4 roadside beyond 20 feet from the pavement or where trees or native 5 vegetation will be removed, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working 6 Drawing. 7

8 2. Weed and Pest Control Plan: This plan is required when the proposal 9

contains the item "Weed and Pest Control," and prior to application of any 10 chemicals or weed control activities, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 11 Working Drawing. 12

13 3. Plant Establishment Plan: This plan is required when the proposal 14

contains the item "PSIPE__", and prior to completion of Initial Planting, the 15 Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing. 16

17 8-02.3(2)A Roadside Work Plan 18 The Roadside Work Plan shall define the expected impacts to the roadside 19 and restoration resulting from Work necessary to meet all Contract 20 requirements. The Contractor shall define how the roadside restoration Work 21 included in the Contract will be phased and coordinated with project Work such 22 as earthwork, staging, access, erosion and water pollution control, irrigation, 23 etc. The Roadside Work Plan shall include the following: 24 25

1. Limiting impacts to roadsides: 26 27

a. Limits of Work including locations of staging or parking. 28 29 b. Means and methods for vegetation protection (in accordance 30

with Section 1-07.16(2)). 31 32 c. Locations outside of clearing limits where vegetation shall be 33

removed to provide access routes or other needs to accomplish 34 the Work. 35

36 d. Plans for removal, preservation and stockpile of topsoil or other 37

native materials, if outside of clearing and grubbing limits and 38 within the project limits. 39

40 2. Roadside Restoration: 41 42

a. Plan for propagation and procurement of plants, ground 43 preparation for planting, and installation of plants. 44

45 b. Means and methods to limit soil compaction where seeding and 46

planting are to occur, such as steel plates, hog fuel access 47 roads, wood mats for sensitive areas (including removal) and 48 decompaction for unavoidable impacts. 49

50 c. Plan and timing to incorporate or remove erosion control items. 51

52


3. Lawn Installation: 1 2

a. Schedule for lawn installation work. 3 4 b. Establishment and maintenance of lawns. 5

6 8-02.3(2)B Weed and Pest Control Plan 7 The Weed and Pest Control Plan shall describe all weed and pest control 8 needs for the project. 9 10 The plan shall be prepared and signed by a licensed Commercial Pest Control 11 Operator or Consultant. The plan for control of weeds and pests on the 12 Contract in accordance with Section 8-02.3(3) shall include the following: 13 14

1. Names of plan preparer and pesticide operators, including contact 15 information. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer evidence that 16 all operators are licensed with appropriate endorsements, and that 17 the pesticide used is registered for use by the Washington State 18 Department of Agriculture. 19

20 2. Means and methods of weed control, including mechanical and/or 21

chemical. 22 23 3. Schedule for weed control including re-entry times for pesticide 24

application by pesticide type. 25 26 4. Proposed pesticide use in accordance with Section 8-02.3(3)A: 27

name, application rate, and Safety Data Sheets of all proposed 28 pesticides. Include a copy of the current product label for each 29 pesticide to be used. 30

31 5. Plan to ensure worker safety until pesticide re-entry periods are met. 32

33 8-02.3(2)C Plant Establishment Plan 34 The Plant Establishment Plan shall describe activities necessary to ensure 35 continued health and vigor of planted and seeded areas in accordance with the 36 requirements of Sections 8-02.3(12) and 8-02.3(13). Should the plan become 37 unworkable at any time during the first-year plant establishment, the 38 Contractor shall submit a revised plan prior to proceeding with further Work. 39 The Plant Establishment Plan shall include: 40 41

1. Proposed scheduling of joint inspection meetings, activities, 42 materials, equipment to be utilized for the first-year plant 43 establishment. 44

45 2. Proposed adaptive management activities to ensure successful 46

establishment of seeded, sodded, and planted areas. 47 48 3. A contact person. 49 50 4. Management of the irrigation system, when applicable. 51

52


8-02.3(3) Weed and Pest Control 1 The Contractor shall control weed and pest species within the project limits using 2 integrated pest management principles consisting of mechanical, biological, and 3 chemical controls that are outlined in the Weed and Pest Control Plan or as 4 designated by the Engineer. Controlling weeds consists of killing and removing 5 weeds by chemical, mechanical, and hand methods. 6 7

8-02.3(3)A Chemical Pesticides 8 Chemical pesticides include, but are not restricted to, any substance or mixture 9 of substances intended for preventing, destroying, repelling or mitigating any 10 pest, including but not limited to, insecticides, herbicides, fungicides, 11 adjuvants, and additives, including plant regulators, defoliants and desiccants. 12 The Contractor shall apply chemical pesticides in accordance with the label 13 recommendations, the Washington State Department of Ecology, local 14 sensitive area ordinances, and Washington State Department of Agriculture 15 laws and regulations. Only those pesticides listed in the table Herbicides 16 Approved for Use on WSDOT Rights of Way and accepted as part of the 17 Weed and Pest Control Plan or by written authorization from the Engineer may 18 be used (www.wsdot.wa.gov/maintenance/roadside/herbicide_use.htm). 19 20 The applicator shall be licensed by the State of Washington as a Commercial 21 Applicator or Commercial Operator, with additional endorsements as required 22 by the Special Provisions or the proposed weed control plan. All chemical 23 pesticides shall be delivered to the job site in the original containers, or if pre-24 mixed off-site, a certification of the components and formulation from the 25 supplier is required. The licensed applicator or operator shall complete 26 WSDOT Form 540-509, Commercial Pesticide Application Record, each day 27 the pesticide is applied and furnish a copy to the Engineer by the following 28 business day. 29 30 The Contractor shall ensure confinement of the chemicals within the 31 designated areas. The use of spray chemical pesticides shall require the use 32 of anti-drift and activating agents and a spray pattern indicator unless 33 otherwise allowed by the Engineer. 34 35 The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for rendering any area 36 unsatisfactory for planting by reason of chemical application. Damage to 37 adjacent areas, either on or off the Highway Right of Way, shall be repaired to 38 the satisfaction of the Engineer or the property owner at no additional cost to 39 the Contracting Agency. 40 41 8-02.3(3)B Planting and Lawn Area Weed Control 42 Planting and lawn area weed control consists of controlling weeds and pests in 43 planted and lawn areas shown in the Plans. This Work is included in the bid 44 items for planting and lawn installation. 45 46 All planting and lawn areas shall be prepared so that they are weed and debris 47 free at the time of planting and until completion of the project. The planting 48 areas shall include the entire ground surface, regardless of cover, areas 49 around plants, and those areas shown in the Plans. 50 51


Within planting or lawn areas, all species that are not shown in the Plans are 1 unwanted and shall be controlled unless specifically allowed by the Engineer 2 to remain. 3 4 Grass growing within the mulch ring of a plant, including grass applied in 5 accordance with Sections 8-01.3(2)A1, 8-02.3(9) or 8-02.3(10), shall be 6 considered a weed and shall be controlled on the project in accordance with 7 the weed and pest control plan. 8 9 All applications of post-emergent herbicides shall be made while green and 10 growing tissue is present. Residual herbicides shall not be used where 11 rhizomatous species or perennial species are indicated. 12 13 Should unwanted vegetation reach the flowering and seed stage in violation of 14 these Specifications, the Contractor shall physically remove and bag the seed 15 heads prior to seed dispersion. All physically removed vegetation and seed 16 heads shall be disposed of off-site at no cost to the Contracting Agency. 17 18 8-02.3(3)C Project Area Weed and Pest Control 19 The Contractor shall control weeds not otherwise covered in accordance with 20 Section 8-02.3(3)B, in all areas within the project limits, including erosion 21 control seeding areas and vegetation preservation areas, as designated by the 22 Engineer. 23 24 When the Bid Item “Project Area Weed and Pest Control” is included in the 25 Contract, the Contractor shall also control all weeds specified as noxious by 26 the Washington State Department of Agriculture, the local Weed District, or the 27 County Noxious Weed Control Board outside of planting areas within the 28 project limits. 29 30

8-02.3(4) Topsoil 31 Topsoil shall not be worked or placed when the ground or topsoil is frozen, or 32 excessively wet. 33 34 The Contractor shall protect topsoil stockpiled for project use to prevent erosion 35 and weed growth. Weed growth on topsoil stockpile sites shall be immediately 36 eliminated in accordance with the accepted Weed and Pest Control Plan and 37 Section 8-02.3(3)C. 38 39 The subsoil where topsoil is to be placed shall be tilled to a depth of 1 foot or as 40 specified in the Special Provisions or the Plans. Topsoil of the type specified shall 41 be evenly spread over the specified areas to the depth shown in the Plans or as 42 otherwise ordered by the Engineer. Topsoil depths greater than 6 inches shall be 43 placed in lifts no more than 6 inches in depth. The first lift of topsoil shall be 44 incorporated with sub-soil to a depth of 8 inches and subsequent lifts placed and 45 lightly tamped between lifts. After the topsoil has been spread, all large clods, hard 46 lumps, and rocks 2 inches in diameter and larger, and litter shall be raked up, 47 removed, and disposed. 48 49


8-02.3(4)A Topsoil Type A 1 Topsoil Type A shall be as specified in the Special Provisions. The Contractor 2 shall submit a certification by the supplier that the contents of the Topsoil meet 3 the requirements in the Special Provisions. 4 5 8-02.3(4)B Topsoil Type B 6 Topsoil Type B shall be naturally occurring topsoil taken from within the project 7 limits and shall meet the requirements of Section 9-14.1(2). Topsoil Type B 8 shall be taken from areas shown in the Plans to the designated depth and 9 stockpiled at locations that will not interfere with the construction of the project, 10 and outside of sensitive areas, as allowed by the Engineer. A minimum of two 11 weeks prior to excavation of Topsoil Type B, the Contractor shall pre-treat the 12 vegetation on the designated Topsoil Type B areas according to the Weed and 13 Pest Control Plan. Areas beyond the slope stakes shall be disturbed as little as 14 possible in the above operations and under no circumstances shall Topsoil 15 Type B be stockpiled within 10 feet of any existing tree or vegetation area 16 designated to be saved and protected. The Contractor shall protect topsoil 17 stockpile from weed infestation. 18 19 The Contractor shall set aside sufficient material to satisfy the needs of the 20 project. 21 22 Upon completion of topsoil placement, the Contractor shall dispose of 23 remaining stockpiled Topsoil Type B not required for use on the project at no 24 additional expense to the Contracting Agency in accordance with Section 2-25 03.3(7)C. 26 27 Should a shortage of Topsoil Type B occur, and the Contractor has wasted or 28 otherwise disposed of topsoil material, the Contractor shall furnish Topsoil 29 Type A or C at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. 30 31 8-02.3(4)C Topsoil Type C 32 Topsoil Type C shall be naturally occurring topsoil obtained from a source 33 provided by the Contractor outside of the Contracting Agency-owned Right of 34 Way. Topsoil Type C shall meet the requirements of Sections 8-02.3(4)B and 35 9-14.1(3). The Contractor shall not begin removal of Topsoil Type C from the 36 proposed source until the material has been allowed for use by the Engineer. 37 38

8-02.3(5) Roadside Seeding, Lawn and Planting Area Preparation 39 This Work includes preparing worked areas for the installation of all types of 40 permanent erosion control planting. Work shall be conducted so the flow lines in 41 drainage channels are maintained. Material displaced by the Contractor’s 42 operations that interferes with drainage shall be removed from the channel and 43 disposed of as allowed by the Engineer. 44 45

8-02.3(5)A Seeding Area Preparation 46 The Contractor shall prepare roadside seeding areas as follows: 47 48

1. Remove all excess material, debris, stumps, and rocks greater than 3 49 inches in diameter from areas to be seeded. Dispose of removed 50 materials offsite. 51

52


2. Prepare roadside seeding area to a weed free and bare condition. 1 2 3. Bring area to uniform grade and install topsoil, soil amendments, or 3

compost as specified. Any slopes 3(H) to 1(V) or steeper shall not be 4 tilled unless otherwise specified. 5

6 4. Compact to provide a reasonably firm but friable seedbed; tractor 7

walk to uniformly cover the surface with longitudinal depressions at 8 least 2 inches deep formed perpendicular to the natural flow of water 9 on the slope. Condition the soil with sufficient water so the 10 longitudinal depressions remain in the soil surface until completion of 11 the seeding. 12

13 5. Seed and mulch within 2 days of preparation. 14

15 8-02.3(5)B Lawn Area Preparation 16 The Contractor shall prepare lawn areas as follows: 17 18

1. Prepare lawn area to a weed free and bare condition in accordance 19 with Section 8-02.3(3)B. 20

21 2. Remove excess material, stumps, wood or rocks over 3 inches in 22

diameter and remove from site. 23 24 3. Bring area to uniform grade and install topsoil or soil amendments in 25

accordance with Section 8-02.3(4) and 8-02.3(6). 26 27 4. Till to an 8-inch depth, rake to a smooth even grade without low areas 28

that trap water, and compact with a 50-pound roller. The finished 29 grade of the soil shall be 1 inch below the top of all curbs, junction 30 and valve boxes, walks, driveways, and other Structures. 31

32 5. Seed or sod the area within two days of preparation. 33

34 8-02.3(5)C Planting Area Preparation 35 The Contractor shall prepare planting areas as follows: 36 37

1. Prepare planting area to a weed free and bare condition in 38 accordance with Section 8-02.3(3)B. 39

40 2. Decompact soil to a depth of 18 inches where construction activities 41

have taken place or where native soils are compacted. 42 43 3. Return soil to uniform grade even with surrounding areas, leaving no 44

holes or mounds over 3 inches in depth or height. 45 46 4. Remove excess material, stumps, wood or rocks over 3 inches in 47

diameter and remove from site. 48 49 5. Apply compost or other amendments as indicated in the plans and in 50

accordance with Section 8-02.3(6). 51 52


6. Cultivate amendments to a depth of 12 inches to provide a 1 reasonably firm but friable planting area. Do not till any slopes 3(H) to 2 1(V) or steeper. 3

4 7. Return soil to a uniform finished grade, 1 inch, or the specified depth 5

of mulch plus 1 inch, below walks, curbs, junction and valve boxes, 6 catch basins, and driveways, unless otherwise specified. 7

8 8. Begin planting and mulching the area within two days of final 9

preparation. 10 11

8-02.3(6) Soil Amendments 12 The Contractor shall place soil amendments of the type, quality, and quantities 13 specified where shown in the Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions. Areas 14 receiving soil amendments shall be bare soil or vegetation free prior to application. 15 All soil amendments shall be installed as shown in the Plans within 30 calendar 16 days after delivery to the project site. 17 18

8-02.3(6)A Compost 19 Compost used for soil amendments shall be Fine Compost unless otherwise 20 designated in the Plans. When compost blanket is used for temporary erosion 21 control, the compost blanket may be incorporated into the soil immediately 22 prior to planting when used as compost soil amendment. The area shall be 23 prepared in accordance with Section 8-02.3(5) prior to placing compost. 24 25 8-02.3(6)B Fertilizers 26 The Contractor shall apply fertilizer in the form, mixture, and rate specified in 27 the Special Provisions or as directed by the Engineer. Application procedures 28 shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations unless 29 otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. 30 31 The Contractor shall submit a guaranteed fertilizer analysis label for the 32 selected product a minimum of one week prior to application for acceptance. 33 Following the Engineer’s acceptance, fertilizing of the accepted ground or 34 vegetated surfaces shall begin immediately. 35 36 In seeding and lawn areas to be fertilized, the fertilizer shall be applied 37 concurrently with the seed. When fertilizer is hydraulically applied, the fertilizer 38 shall be suitable for application with seeding as specified in Section 8-39 02.3(9)C. If hydroseeding, the fertilizer shall be placed in the hydroseeder tank 40 no more than 1 hour prior to application. 41 42 Fertilizers for planting areas shall be applied concurrently with compost and 43 applied prior to incorporation, unless tablet form fertilizer is specified. Where 44 tablet form fertilizer is specified, fertilizer shall be applied concurrently with 45 plant installation. 46 47 Fertilizer sprayed on signs or sign structures shall be removed the same day. 48 49 Areas not accessible by fertilizing equipment shall be fertilized by allowed 50 hand methods. 51 52


Second Application: A second application of fertilizer shall be applied as 1 specified in the Special Provisions at the locations designated in the Plans. 2 The fertilizer shall be applied during the months of March, April, or May of the 3 following year after the initial seeding, planting, or lawn installation. The 4 fertilizer shall be dry granular pellets or pearls and applied in accordance with 5 the manufacturer’s recommendations or as specified in the Special Provisions. 6 7

8-02.3(7) Layout of Planting, Lawn and Seeding Areas 8 The Contractor shall lay out and prepare planting and lawn areas and receive the 9 Engineer’s acceptance of layout and preparation prior to any installation activities. 10 The Contractor shall stake the location of all trees larger than 1-inch caliper and the 11 perimeter of all planting areas for acceptance by the Engineer prior to any 12 installation activities. 13 14 The Contractor shall locate all trees to be planted in mowable grass areas a 15 minimum of 10 feet from the edge of planting areas, other trees, fence lines, and 16 bottom of ditches unless otherwise specified. 17 18 Tree locations shown in the Plans shall be considered approximate unless shown 19 with stationing and offset distance. In irrigated areas, trees shall be located so their 20 trunk is a minimum of ⅓ of the spray radius away from the nearest sprinkler head. 21 22 Unless otherwise shown, planting areas located adjacent to Roadways shall begin 23 6 feet from the edge of shoulder on roadway fills and begin 5 feet up on the back 24 slope from the bottom on roadway cut sections. Plants within planting areas shall 25 be located such that mature branching pattern will not block sight distance, signs, 26 or other traffic-related devices. No trees shall be placed where the mature canopy 27 will grow to within 10 feet of existing power lines. Where roadside ditches are 28 present, planting areas shall begin 5 feet from the centerline of the ditch unless 29 shown otherwise in the Plans. 30 31 8-02.3(8) Planting 32

8-02.3(8)A Dates and Conditions for Planting 33 No plant material shall be planted until it has been inspected and accepted for 34 planting by the Engineer. Rejected material shall be removed from the project 35 site immediately. All plants for the project or a sufficient quantity to plant 1-acre 36 of the site, whichever is less, shall be received on site prior to the Engineer 37 beginning inspection of the plants. 38 39 Under no circumstances will planting be permitted during unsuitable soil or 40 weather conditions as determined by the Engineer. Unsuitable conditions may 41 include frozen soil, freezing weather, saturated soil, standing water, high 42 winds, heavy rains, and high water levels. The ground shall be moist at the 43 time of planting. All planting shall be accomplished during the following 44 periods: 45 46

1. Non-Irrigated Plant Material 47 Western Washington (West of the Cascade Mountain Crest) – 48 October 1 to March 1. 49 Eastern Washington (East of the Cascade Mountain Crest) – October 50 1 to November 15. 51

52


2. Irrigated Plant Material 1 2 In irrigated areas, plant material shall not be installed until the irrigation 3 system is fully operational and accepted by the Engineer. Trees and 4 shrubs may be planted in irrigated areas during the non-irrigated planting 5 window before the irrigation system is functional with the written 6 concurrence of the Engineer only if the irrigation system is guaranteed to 7 be operational prior to the end of the non-irrigated planting window. 8

9 8-02.3(8)B Plant Installation 10 The Contractor shall handle plant material in the following manner: 11 12

1. Root systems shall be kept covered and damp at all times. Plant 13 material shall be kept in containers until the time of planting. 14

15 2. Roots shall not be bunched, curled, twisted, or unreasonably bent 16

when placed in the planting hole. Bare root plant material shall be 17 dormant at the time of harvesting and planting. The root systems of 18 all bare root plant material shall be dipped in a slurry immediately 19 prior to planting. 20

21 3. Plant material supplied in wrapped balls shall not be removed from 22

the wrapping until the time of planting at the planting location. The 23 root system of balled plant material shall be moist at the time of 24 planting. Root balls shall be loosened prior to planting. All burlap, 25 baskets, string, wire and other such materials shall be removed from 26 the hole when planting balled plants. 27

28 4. Plant cutting material shall be dormant at the time of cutting and 29

planting. All cuttings shall be installed immediately if buds begin to 30 swell. 31

32 5. Plants shall be placed with the crown at the finished grade. In their 33

final position, plants shall have their top true root (not adventitious 34 root) no more than 1 inch below the soil surface, no matter where that 35 root was located in the original root ball or container. The backfill 36 material, including container and root ball soil, shall be thoroughly 37 watered on the same day that planting occurs regardless of season. 38

39 When installing plants, the Contractor shall dig planting holes three times the 40 diameter of the container or root ball size. Any glazed surface of the planting 41 hole shall be roughened prior to planting. 42 43 8-02.3(8)C Pruning, Staking, Guying, and Wrapping 44 Plants shall be pruned at the time of planting, only to remove minor broken or 45 damaged twigs, branches or roots. Pruning shall be performed with a sharp 46 tool and shall be done in such a manner as to retain or to encourage natural 47 growth characteristics of the plants. All other pruning shall be performed only 48 after the plants have been in the ground at least 1 year and when plants are 49 dormant. 50 51


Trees shall only be staked when so noted in the Plans. Each tree shall be 1 staked or guyed before completion of the backfilling in accordance with the 2 details shown in the Plans. 3 4 Trees shall be wrapped when so noted in the Plans. 5 6

8-02.3(9) Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching 7 For all seed, the Contractor shall furnish the following documentation to the 8 Engineer: 9 10

1. The state or provincial seed dealer license and endorsements. 11 12 2. Copies of Washington State Department of Agriculture (WSDA) test 13

results on each lot of seed. Test results shall be within six months prior to 14 the date of application. 15

16 8-02.3(9)A Dates for Application of Seed 17 Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall apply seed for 18 permanent erosion control during the following periods: 19 20

Western Washington1 (West of the Cascade Mountain

Crest)

Eastern Washington (East of the Cascade Mountain

Crest) March 1 through May 15

September 1 through October 1 October 1 through November 15

1Seeding may be allowed outside these dates when allowed by the Engineer.

21 All roadway excavation and embankment ground surfaces that are completed 22 to final grades shall be prepared and seeded during the first available seeding 23 window. When environmental conditions are not conducive to satisfactory 24 results, the Engineer may suspend the seeding Work until such time that the 25 desired results are likely to be obtained. If seeding is suspended, temporary 26 erosion control methods according to Section 8-01 shall be used to protect the 27 bare soil until seeding conditions improve. 28 29 8-02.3(9)B Seeding and Fertilizing 30 The Contractor shall prepare the seeding area in accordance with Section 8-31 02.3(5)A and apply seed at the rate and mix specified in the Special 32 Provisions. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer within 5 days in advance 33 of any seeding operation and shall not begin the Work until areas prepared or 34 designated for seeding have been accepted. Following the Engineer’s 35 acceptance, seeding of the accepted ground surfaces shall begin immediately. 36 37 Seeding shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is frozen, 38 or excessively wet. 39 40 When seeding by hand, the seed shall be incorporated into the top ¼ inch of 41 soil by hand raking or other method that is allowed by the Engineer. 42 43 Seed applied as a separate operation using a hydroseeder shall have a tracer 44 added to visibly aid uniform application. The tracer shall be HECP Short-Term 45


Mulch applied at a rate of 200 to 250 pounds per acre and the tracer shall carry 1 the measured specified seeding rate. 2 3 8-02.3(9)C Seeding with Fertilizers and Mulches 4 When the Proposal includes any variation of seeding, fertilizing, and without 5 mulching, the seed and fertilizer shall be applied in one application followed by 6 mulching. West of the Cascade Mountains, seed, fertilizer, and mulch may be 7 completely applied in one application. East of the Cascades, seeding, 8 fertilizing, and mulching shall not be applied as a single application unless 9 allowed by the Engineer in writing prior to application. The fertilizing and 10 mulching shall meet the requirements of Sections 8-02.3(6) and 8-02.3(11). 11 12 8-02.3(9)D Inspection 13 Seeded areas will be inspected upon completion of seeding, fertilizing, and 14 mulching. The Work in any area will not be measured for payment until a 15 uniform distribution of the materials is accomplished at the specified rate. 16 Areas that have not received a uniform application of seed, fertilizer, and 17 mulch at the specified rate, as determined by the Engineer, shall be re-seeded, 18 re-fertilized, or re-mulched prior to payment for seeding within a designated 19 area. 20 21 8-02.3(9)E Protection and Care of Seeded Areas 22 The Contractor shall install and establish a stable and weed free stand of 23 grass as specified within all designated permanent seeding areas. A stable 24 stand of grass shall meet the following requirements: 25 26

1. A dense and uniform canopy cover, 70% for Western Washington 27 and 50% for Eastern Washington, of specified species covers all 28 seeded areas after 3 months of active growth following germination 29 during the growing season. Canopy cover is defined as the cover of 30 living and vigorous grass blades, leaves, and shoots of specified 31 species. Volunteer species, weeds, woody plants, or other 32 undesirable vegetation shall not factor into the canopy cover. Growth 33 and establishment may require supplemental irrigation to meet cover 34 requirements. 35

36 2. Stand health is evident by vigorously growing planted species having 37

a uniform rich-green appearance and with no dead patches or major 38 gaps of growth. A stand of grass that displays rusting, wilting, stunted 39 growth, disease, yellowing or browning of leaves, or bare patches 40 does not meet the stand health requirement. 41

42 3. The Contractor shall establish a stable stand of grass free of all 43

weeds, non-specified grasses, and other undesirable vegetation. 44 Weed control shall be in accordance with the Weed and Pest Control 45 Plan and occur on a monthly basis during the establishment period 46 and through the life of the Contract. 47

48 4. Remove all trash, rocks, construction debris, and other obstructions 49

that may be detrimental to the continued establishment of future 50 seeding. 51

52


In addition to the requirements of Section 1-07.13(1), restoration of eroded 1 areas including clean up, removal, and proper disposal of eroded material, 2 filling and raking of eroded areas with Topsoil Type A or fine compost, and re-3 application of the specified seed, fertilizer, and mulch shall occur at no 4 additional cost to the Contracting Agency. 5

6 8-02.3(10) Lawn Installation 7

8-02.3(10)A Dates and Conditions for Lawn Installation 8 In irrigated areas, lawn installation shall not begin until the irrigation system 9 is fully operational. 10 11 Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, seeded lawn installation shall be 12 performed during the following time periods at the location shown: 13 14

Western Washington (West of the Cascade Mountain

Crest)

Eastern Washington (East of the Cascade Mountain

Crest) March 1 through May 15

September 1 through October 1 October 1 through November 15

When irrigation system is operational March 1 through October 1

When irrigation system is operational March 1 through November 1

15 8-02.3(10)B Lawn Seeding and Sodding 16 The Contractor shall prepare the lawn area in accordance with Section 8-17 02.3(5) and apply seed at the mix and rate of application as specified in the 18 Special Provisions. 19 20 The Contractor shall have the option of sodding in lieu of seeding for lawn 21 installation at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. Seeding in lieu 22 of sodding will not be allowed. 23 24 Seed placed by hand shall be raked into the soil. Following raking, the seeded 25 soil shall be rolled with a smooth 50-pound roller. Sod strips shall be placed 26 within 48 hours of being cut. Placement shall be without voids and have the 27 end joints staggered. Following placement, the sod shall be rolled with a 28 smooth roller to establish contact with the soil. 29 30 Barriers shall be erected, with warning signs where necessary, to preclude 31 pedestrian traffic access to the newly placed lawn during the establishment 32 period. 33 34 8-02.3(10)C Lawn Establishment 35 Lawn establishment shall consist of caring for all new lawn areas within the 36 limits of the project. 37 38 The lawn establishment period shall begin immediately after the lawn seeding 39 or sodding has been accepted by the Engineer and shall extend to the end of 40 four mowings or 20 working days whichever is longer. The mowings shall be 41 done in accordance with Section 8-02.3(10)D. 42 43 During the lawn establishment period, the Contractor shall ensure the 44 continuing healthy growth of the turf. This care shall include keeping the 45


project in a presentable condition including, but not limited to, removal of litter, 1 mowing, trimming, removal of grass clippings, edging, fertilization, insecticide 2 and fungicide applications, weed control, watering, repairing the irrigation 3 system, and repair and reseeding all damaged areas. 4 5 Temporary barriers shall be removed only when directed by the Engineer. 6 7 All Work performed under lawn establishment shall comply with established 8 turf management practices. 9 10 Acceptance of lawn planting as specified will be based on a uniform stand of 11 grass and a uniform grade at the time of final inspection. The Contractor shall 12 recultivate, re-grade, reseed, and refertilize areas that are bare or have a poor 13 stand of grass or not having a uniform grade through any cause before final 14 inspection at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. 15 16 8-02.3(10)D Lawn Mowing 17 Lawn mowing shall begin immediately after the lawn establishment period has 18 been accepted by the Engineer and shall extend to the end of the Contract or 19 the first-year plant establishment, whichever is last. 20 21 The Contractor shall accomplish the following minimum requirements: 22 23

1. Mow, trim, and edge as often as conditions dictate, at a minimum, 24 once per week between April and September. Maximum height of 25 lawn shall not exceed 3 inches. The cutting height shall be 2 inches. 26 Cuttings, trimmings, and edgings shall be disposed of off the project 27 site. When the Engineer allows the use of a mulching mower, 28 trimmings may be left in place. 29

30 2. Water as often as conditions dictate depending on weather and soil 31

conditions. 32 33 3. Provide fertilizer, weed control, water, and other measures as 34

necessary to establish and maintain a healthy stand of grass. 35 36

8-02.3(11) Mulch 37 Mulches associated with seeding and planting shall be of the type specified in the 38 Special Provisions or as indicated in the Plans. The Contractor shall evenly apply 39 mulch at the rates indicated in the Plans. Mulches shall not be placed below the 40 anticipated water level of ditch slopes, pond bank slopes, and stream banks, or in 41 areas of standing or flowing water. 42 43

8-02.3(11)A Mulch for Seeding Areas 44 The Contractor shall furnish and evenly apply Hydraulically Applied Erosion 45 Control Product (HECP) Long Term Mulch at the rates indicated and in 46 accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications unless otherwise specified. 47 48 HECP Long Term Mulch shall be hydraulically applied at the rate of 3500 49 pounds per acre with no more than 2000 pounds applied in any single lift. 50 HECP mulch shall not be used within the Ordinary High Water Mark. 51 52


Mulch sprayed on signs or sign Structures shall be removed the same day. 1 2 Areas not accessible by mulching equipment shall be mulched by accepted 3 hand methods. 4 5 HECP Long Term Mulch may be applied with seed and fertilizer west of the 6 summit of the Cascade Range. East of the summit of the Cascade Range, 7 seed and fertilizer shall be applied in a single application followed by the 8 application of mulch. 9 10 8-02.3(11)B Bark or Woodchip Mulch 11 The Contractor shall apply bark or wood chip mulch of the type and depth 12 specified where shown in the Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions. 13 14 The Contractor shall complete final grading and placement/incorporation of soil 15 amendments within the planting area prior to placement of mulch. Areas 16 receiving bark mulch shall be bare soil or vegetation free before application, 17 except where trees and other plants are specifically identified in the Plans or 18 designated by the Engineer to be saved and protected. 19 20 Bark or wood chip mulch shall be placed to a uniform non-compacted depth of 21 3 inches over all planting areas unless otherwise specified. Mulch shall be 22 feathered to the base of the plant and 1 inch below the top of junction and 23 valve boxes, curbs, and pavement edges. 24 25 Any contamination of the mulch due to the Contractor’s operations shall be 26 corrected to its former condition at no additional cost to the Contracting 27 Agency. Mulch placed to a thickness greater than specified shall be at no 28 additional cost to the Contracting Agency. 29 30 The Contractor shall keep plant material crowns, runners, and branches free of 31 mulch at all times. 32 33 8-02.3(11)C Bark or Woodchip Mulch Rings 34 The Contractor shall apply mulch rings around plants installed within existing 35 vegetation areas or within seeded areas as shown in the Plans. Bark or wood 36 chip mulch rings shall be applied to the surface of vegetation free amended 37 soil in the isolated plant locations where shown in the Plans or as specified in 38 the Special Provisions. Bark or wood chip mulch shall be placed to a uniform 39 non-compacted depth of 3 inches to a radius of 2 feet around all plants within 40 interplanted plant locations. 41 42

8-02.3(12) Completion of Initial Planting 43 Upon completion of the initial planting within a designated area, the Engineer will 44 make an inspection of all planting areas. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in 45 writing, of any replacements or corrective action necessary to meet the plant 46 installation requirements. The Contractor shall replace all plants and associated 47 materials rejected or missing and correct unsatisfactory conditions. 48 49 Completion of the initial planting within a designated area includes the following 50 conditions: 51 52


1. 100 percent of each of the plant material categories are installed as 1 shown in the Plans. 2

3 2. Planting Area is cleaned up. 4 5 3. Repairs are completed, including but not limited to, full operation of the 6

irrigation system. 7 8 4. Mulch coverage is complete. 9 10 5. All weeds are controlled. 11

12 8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment 13 Plant establishment consists of caring for all plants and  planting areas within the 14 project limits. The provisions of Sections 1-07.13(2) and 1-07.13(3) do not apply to 15 this Section. 16 17 When the Proposal includes the bid item PSIPE____ (Plant Selection Including 18 Plant Establishment), that bid item includes one year of plant establishment Work. 19 The first year of plant establishment shall begin immediately upon written 20 notification from the Engineer of the completion of initial planting for the project. 21 The first-year plant establishment period shall be a minimum of one calendar year. 22 The one calendar year shall be extended an amount equal to any periods where 23 the Contractor does not comply with the plant establishment requirements and 24 plan. 25 26 During the first-year plant establishment period, the Contractor shall perform all 27 Work necessary to ensure the resumption and continued growth of the transplanted 28 material. This Work shall include, but is not limited to, applying water, removing 29 foreign, dead, or rejected plant material, maintaining all planting areas in a weed-30 free condition, and replacing all unsatisfactory plant material planted under the 31 Contract. If plants are stolen or damaged by the acts of others, the Contracting 32 Agency will pay invoice cost only for the replacement plants with no mark-up and 33 the Contractor will be responsible for the labor to install the replacement plants. 34 Other weed control within the project limits but outside of planting, lawn, or seeding 35 areas shall be as specified in Section 8-02.3(3)C. 36 37 During the first year of plant establishment, the Contractor shall meet monthly or at 38 an agreed upon schedule with the Engineer for the purpose of joint inspection of 39 the planting material. The Contractor shall correct all unsatisfactory conditions 40 identified by the Engineer within a 10-day period immediately following the 41 inspection. If plant replacement is required, the Contractor shall, within the 10-day 42 period, submit a plan and schedule for the plant procurement and replacement to 43 occur during the planting period as designated in Section 8-02.3(8). At the end of 44 the plant establishment period, plants that do not show normal growth shall be 45 replaced and all staking and guying that remain on the project shall be removed 46 unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. 47 48 All automatic irrigation systems shall be operated fully automatic during the plant 49 establishment period and until final acceptance of the Contract. Payment for water 50 used to water in plants, or hand watering of plant material or lawn areas unless 51


otherwise specified, is the responsibility of the Contractor during the first-year plant 1 establishment period. 2 3 Subsequent year plant establishment periods shall begin immediately at the 4 completion of the preceding year’s plant establishment period. Each subsequent 5 plant establishment period shall be one full calendar year in duration. 6 7 During the plant establishment period(s) after the first year plant establishment, the 8 Work necessary for the continued healthy and vigorous growth of all plants material 9 shall be performed as directed by the Engineer. 10 11 Payment for water used to water plants during the subsequent year(s) of plant 12 establishment will be paid under the plant establishment item. 13 14 8-02.3(14) Plant Replacement 15 The Contractor shall be responsible for growing or arrange to provide sufficient 16 plants for replacement of all plant material rejected through first-year plant 17 establishment. All replacement plant material shall be inspected and accepted by 18 the Engineer prior to installation. All rejected plant material shall be replaced with 19 acceptable plants meeting the specifications and installed according to the 20 requirements of this Section at dates allowed by the Engineer. 21 22 All replacement plants shall be of the same species as the plants they replace and 23 meet the requirements of Section 9-14.8 unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. 24 Plants may vary in size reflecting one season of growth should the Contractor elect 25 to hold plant material under nursery conditions for an additional year to serve as 26 replacement plants. Replacement plant material larger than specified in the Plans 27 shall meet the applicable section requirements of the ASNS for container class, ball 28 size, spread, and branching characteristics. 29 30 8-02.3(15) Bioengineering 31 Bioengineering consists of using plant materials for the purpose of streambank or 32 earthen slope construction and surface stabilization. This Work may include 33 installing woody plant cuttings in various forms as well as part of streambank or 34 earthen slope construction. 35 36

8-02.3(15)A Fascines 37 Live fascines shall be constructed of live and dead cuttings bundled together 38 with a diameter of 8 to 18 inches. Live cuttings shall be the species shown in 39 the Plans. Dead branches may be cuttings from any woody, non-invasive plant 40 native to the project area. Dead branches may be placed within the live fascine 41 and on the side exposed to the air. Live branches shall be placed in contact 42 with the soil along their entire length. Each live fascine must contain a 43 minimum of eight live branches. Dead branches shall constitute no more than 44 40 percent of the total fascine content. 45 46 The total length of each live fascine shall be a minimum of 5 feet. Branches 47 shall be bundled into log-like forms and bound with biodegradable twine 48 spaced at 1-foot intervals along the entire length of the live fascine. Live 49 fascines shall be installed horizontally in a trench whose depth shall be ½ the 50 diameter of the live fascine. Secure the live fascine with live stakes 3 feet in 51 length and ¾ inch in diameter placed at 18-inch intervals. A minimum of three 52


live stakes shall be used per fascine. The live stakes shall be driven through 1 the live fascine vertically into the slope. The ends of live fascines shall be 2 woven together so that no gap remains between the two sections of the 3 live fascine. 4 5 Prior to being covered with soil, the fascine shall be thoroughly watered. Once 6 the fascine is covered with 6 inches of soil, the soil covering the fascine shall 7 be thoroughly watered. 8 9 When used to remedy erosion areas, live fascines shall extend a minimum of 10 two feet beyond the visible area of erosion and soil disturbance. The locations 11 for live fascines and live stake rows shall be identified in the field for review 12 and acceptance by the Engineer. The Engineer may require adjustment of 13 fascine locations prior to installation in order to best accomplish the intended 14 functions. 15 16 Plant replacement during plant establishment for “PSIPE Live Fascine” will be 17 required for any section void of live shoots for a length of 3 feet or more. 18 Replacement shall consist of installing live stakes, spaced 1 foot apart above 19 the fascine within the area void of live shoots. Live stakes shall be of the same 20 species as the live fascine and shall have a minimum length of 3 feet and a 21 minimum diameter of ¾ inch. The requirements of Section 8-02.3(8) apply to 22 PSIPE Live Fascine. 23 24 8-02.3(15)B Brush Mattress 25 Live brush mattress shall be constructed of live branch cuttings, live poles, jute 26 rope and topsoil. The live cuttings and live poles shall be from the plant 27 species designated in the Plans. Live branch cuttings shall be placed with the 28 cut ends oriented down slope as shown in the Plans. Cuttings shall overlap 29 from side to side and from top to bottom as each layer is constructed. The live 30 branches in each succeeding upper layer shall overlap the adjacent lower 31 layer by a minimum of 6 inches. A maximum of 20 percent of the branches 32 may be dead branches, but the live branches shall be distributed evenly to 33 provide even rooting and growth over the entire area of the brush mattress. 34 35 The Contractor shall anchor the live brush mattress to the slope using stakes 36 and jute rope as shown in the Plans. Initially, the stakes shall be installed to 37 protrude above the live brush mattress. The Contractor shall attach the jute 38 rope to the stakes and tighten the rope by tamping the stakes further into the 39 bank, pulling the live brush mattress tight against the soil surface. The 40 Contractor shall cover the live brush mattress with sufficient stockpiled topsoil 41 to ensure good soil contact with the live plant material. 42 43 Plant replacement during plant establishment for “PSIPE Live Brush Mattress” 44 will be required for any section void of live shoots for an area of 25 square feet 45 or more. Replacement shall consist of installing live stakes, spaced 3 feet 46 apart in a triangular pattern within the area void of live shoots. Live stakes 47 shall be of the same species as the live brush mattress and shall have a 48 minimum length of 3 feet and a minimum diameter of ¾ inch. The 49 requirements of Section 8-02.3(8) apply to PSIPE Brush Mattress. 50 51


8-02.3(15)C Brush Layer 1 Brush layers shall be constructed of live branch cuttings, randomly mixed, from 2 the plant species listed under the brush layer heading in the Plans. The 3 number of branches required will vary depending on the average branch 4 diameter and layer thickness. 5 6 Brush layers shall be placed in a trench dug at a 45 degree incline into the 7 slope or stream bank. Two-thirds to three-fourths of the length of the live 8 branches shall be buried. Soil shall be firmly tamped in place. Succeeding 9 layers shall be spaced as detailed in the Plans. Brush layer placed in stream 10 banks shall be angled downstream. 11 12 Brush layers may include plant establishment when designated as PSIPE 13 Brush Layer. Plant replacement for PSIPE Brush Layer will be required for 14 each section void of live shoots for a continuous distance of 3 feet or more. 15 The requirements of Section 8-02.3(8) apply to PSIPE Brush Layer. 16 17

8-02.3(16) Roadside Maintenance Under Construction 18 When the Contract includes the item, Roadside Maintenance Under Construction, 19 this Work includes roadside mowing and ditch maintenance, and noxious weed 20 control outside of planting areas according to Section 8-02.3(3)C. 21

22 8-02.3(16)A Roadside Mowing 23 The Contractor shall mow designated roadside grass areas to the limits 24 designated by the Engineer. Roadside mowing is limited to slopes not steeper 25 than 3(H) to 1(V). 26 27 The Contractor shall mow according to the following requirements: 28 29

1. Trim around traffic equipment, structures, planting areas, or other 30 features extending above ground preceding or simultaneously with 31 each mowing. 32

33 2. Maintain grass between 4 and 12 inches in height. 34 35 3. Operate mowing equipment with suitable guards to prevent throwing 36

rocks or debris onto the traveled way or off of the Contracting Agency 37 property. Power driven equipment shall not cause ruts, deformation, 38 and compaction of the vegetated soil. 39

40 4. Removing clippings is required on the traveled way, shoulders, 41

walkways, or Structures. 42 43 5. Restore soil rutting to a smooth and even grade at the direction of the 44

Engineer. 45 46 8-02.3(16)B Ditch Maintenance 47 The Contractor shall maintain drainage for the duration of the Contract 48 according to the following requirements: 49 50

1. Maintain flow lines in drainage channels and roadside ditches. 51 52


2. Cutting or trimming vegetation within drainage channels to maintain 1 positive flow. 2

3 3. Remove dirt and debris from inside of culverts or any drainage area 4

where runoff has allowed accumulations and re-seed for erosion 5 control. 6

7 4. Restore channels to previous operational condition. 8 9

8-02.4 Measurement 10 Topsoil, bark or woodchip mulch and soil amendments will be measured by the acre or 11 the square yard along the grade and slope of the area covered immediately after 12 placement. Weed control pre-treatment of topsoil areas, excavation, and stockpiling are 13 included in the bid item “Topsoil Type ___. 14 15 Bark or woodchip mulch rings will be measured per each. 16 17 Compost will be measured by the acre or the square yard along the grade and slope of 18 the area covered immediately after application. 19 20 Seeding, fertilizing, and mulching will be measured by the acre or the square yard by 21 ground slope measurement or through the use of design data. 22 23 Seeding and fertilizing by hand will be measured by the square yard. No adjustment in 24 area size will be made for the vegetation free zone around each plant. 25 26 Seeded lawn, sod installation, and lawn mowing will be measured along the ground 27 slope and computed in square yards of actual lawn completed, established, and 28 accepted. 29 30 Plant selection will be measured per each. 31 32 PSIPE __ (Plant Selection Including Plant Establishment) will be measured per each. 33 34 Live Pole will be measured per each. 35 36 Live Stake Row will be measured by the linear foot along the ground slope line. 37 38 The pay quantities for plant materials will be determined by count of the number of 39 satisfactory plants in each category accepted by the Engineer. 40 41 Fascine and PSIPE live fascine will be measured by the linear foot along the ground 42 slope line. 43 44 Brush mattress and PSIPE live brush mattress will be measured by the surface square 45 yard along the ground slope line. 46 47 Brush layer and PSIPE brush layer will be measured by the linear foot along the ground 48 slope line. 49 50 Water will be measured in accordance with Section 2-07.4. Measurement will be made 51 of only that water hauled in tank trucks or similar equipment. 52


1 8-02.5 Payment 2 Payment will be made for each of the following listed Bid items that are included in the 3 Proposal: 4 5

“Project Area Weed and Pest Control” will be paid in accordance with Section 1-6 09.6. 7 For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting 8 Agency entered an amount for “Project Area Weed and Pest Control” in the 9 Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor. Payment under this 10 item will be made only when the Work is not already covered by other items. 11 12 “Topsoil Type ____”, per acre. 13 The unit Contract price per acre for “Topsoil Type ____” shall be full payment for all 14 costs for the specified Work. 15 16 “Fine Compost ”, per acre or per square yard. 17 “Medium Compost”, per acre or per square yard. 18 “Coarse Compost”, per acre or per square yard. 19 The unit Contract price per acre for “Fine Compost”, “Medium Compost” or “Coarse 20 Compost” shall be full pay for furnishing and spreading the compost onto the 21 existing soil. 22 23 “Soil Amendment”, per acre. 24 The unit Contract price per acre for “Soil Amendment” shall be full pay for 25 furnishing and incorporating the soil amendment into the existing soil. 26 27 “Plant Selection ___”, per each. 28 The unit Contract price for “Plant Selection ___”, per each shall be full pay for all 29 Work to perform the work as specified within the planting area prior to planting for 30 weed control, planting area preparation and installation of plants with initial 31 watering. 32 33 As the plants that do not include plant establishment are obtained, propagated, and 34 grown, partial payments will be made as follows: 35 36

Payment of 15 percent of the unit Contract price per each when the plant 37 materials have been contracted, propagated, and are growing under nursery 38 conditions. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with certification that the 39 plant material has been procured or contracted for delivery to the project for 40 planting within the time limits of the project. The certification shall state the 41 location, quantity, and size of all material. 42 43 Payment will be increased to 100 percent of the unit Contract price per each 44 for contracted plant material at the completion of the initial planting. 45 46 All partial payments shall be limited to the actual number of healthy vigorous 47 plants that meet the stage requirements, limited to plan quantity. Previous 48 partial payments made for materials rejected or missing will be deducted from 49 future payments due the Contractor. 50

51 “PSIPE ___”, per each. 52


The unit Contract price for “PSIPE ___”, per each, shall be full pay for all Work 1 necessary to perform as specified within the planting area for weed control and 2 planting area preparation, planting, cleanup, and water necessary to complete 3 planting operations as specified to the end of first year plant establishment. 4 5 As the plants that include plant establishment are obtained, propagated, and 6 grown, partial payments will be made as follows after inspection by the Engineer: 7 8

Payment of 5 percent of the unit Contract price, per each, when the plant 9 materials have been contracted, propagated, and are growing under nursery 10 conditions. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with certification that the 11 plant material has been procured or contracted for delivery to the project for 12 planting within the time limits of the project. The certification shall state the 13 location, quantity, and size of all material. 14 15 Payment will be increased to 15 percent of the unit Contract price, per each, 16 upon completion of the initial weed control and planting area preparation Work. 17 18 Payment will be increased to 60 percent of the unit Contract price per each for 19 the contracted plant material in a designated unit area when planted. 20 21 Payment will be increased to 70 percent of the unit Contract price per each for 22 contracted plant material at the completion of the initial planting. 23 24 Payment will be increased to the appropriate percentage upon reaching the 25 following plant establishment milestones: 26

27 June 30th 80 percent 28 29 September 30th 90 percent 30 31 Completion of first-year plant establishment or after all 100 percent 32 replacement plants have been installed, whichever is 33 later. 34

35 Plant establishment milestones are achieved when planting areas meet 36 conditions described in Section 8-02.3(13). 37

38 “Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching”, per acre. 39 40 “Seeding and Fertilizing”, per acre or per square yard. 41 42 “Seeding and Fertilizing by Hand”, per square yard. 43 44 “Second Application of Fertilizer”, per acre. 45 46 “Seeding and Mulching”, per acre. 47 48 “Seeded Lawn Installation”, per square yard. 49 “Sod Installation”, per square yard. 50 “Lawn Mowing”, per square yard. 51


The unit Contract price per square yard for “Seeded Lawn Installation” or “Sod 1 Installation” shall be full pay for all costs necessary to prepare the area, plant or 2 sod the lawn, erect barriers, control weeds, and establish lawn areas and for 3 furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to complete the 4 Work as specified and shall be paid in the following sequence for healthy, vigorous 5 lawn: 6

7 Completion of Lawn Planting 60 percent of individual areas 8 9 Mid Lawn Establishment (after two mowings) 85 percent of individual areas 10 11 Completion of Lawn Establishment 100 percent of individual areas 12 (after four mowings) 13

14 “Plant Establishment Year ____” will be paid in accordance with Section 1-09.6. 15 For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting 16 Agency entered an amount for “Plant Establishment - ___ Year” in the Proposal to 17 become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor. 18 19 “Live Pole”, per each. 20 21 “Live Stake Row”, per linear foot. 22 23 “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch”, per acre. 24 25 “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch Rings”, per each. 26 The unit Contract price per acre for “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch” shall be full pay for 27 furnishing and spreading the mulch onto the existing soil. 28 29 “Fascine” and “PSIPE Live Fascine”, per linear foot. 30 “Brush Mattress” and “PSIPE Live Brush Mattress”, per square yard. 31 “Brush Layer” and “PSIPE Brush Layer”, per linear foot. 32 When PSIPE is included with Fascine, Brush Mattress, or Brush Layer, the 33 payment schedule for PSIPE ____ will apply. 34 35 “Roadside Maintenance under Construction” will be paid in accordance with 36 Section 1-09.6. 37 For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting 38 Agency has entered an amount for “Roadside Maintenance Under Construction” in 39 the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor. 40 41 “Water”, per M Gal. 42

The following new paragraph is inserted following the Bid item “Plant Selection ___”, per 43 each: 44 45

The unit Contract price for “Plant Selection ___”, per each shall be full pay for all 46 Work to perform the work as specified within the planting area prior to planting for 47 weed control, planting area preparation and installation of plants with initial 48 watering. 49

50 The paragraph following the Bid item “PSIPE ___”, per each is revised to read: 51 52


The unit Contract price for “PSIPE ___”, per each, shall be full pay for all Work to 1 perform the work as specified within the planting area for weed control and planting 2 area preparation, planting, cleanup, and water necessary to complete planting 3 operations as specified to the end of first year plant establishment. 4


Section 8-09, Raised Pavement Markers 1 April 1, 2019 2

8-09.5 Payment 3 The last paragraph is revised to read: 4 5

The unit Contract price per hundred for “Raised Pavement Marker Type 1”, “Raised 6 Pavement Marker Type 2”, “Raised Pavement Marker Type 3______ In.”, and 7 “Recessed Pavement Marker” shall be full pay for furnishing and installing the markers 8 in accordance with these Specifications. 9

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 8-11, Guardrail 1 August 6, 2018April 1, 2019 2

8-11.3(1)A Erection of Posts 3 The first sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read: 4 5

Posts shall be set to the true line and grade of the Highway after the grade is in place 6 and compaction is completed. 7

8 8-11.3(1)C Terminal and Anchor Installation 9 The first paragraph is revised to read: 10 11

All excavation and backfilling required for installation of anchors shall be performed in 12 accordance with Section 2-09, except that the costs thereof shall be included in the unit 13 Contract price for the anchor installed. 14

15 The first sentence of the second to last paragraph is revised to read: 16 17

Assembly and installation of Beam Guardrail Non-flared Terminals for Type 31 guardrail 18 shall be supervised at all times by a manufacturer’s representative, or an installer who 19 has been trained and certified by the manufacturer. 20

21 The last paragraph is revised to read: 22 23

Beam Guardrail Non-flared Terminals for Type 31 guardrail shall meet the crash test 24 and evaluation criteria in the Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH). 25 26

8-11.4 Measurement 27 The third paragraph is revised to read: 28 29

Measurement of beam guardrail _____ terminal will be per each for the 30 completed terminal. 31

32 The fourth paragraph is revised to read: 33 34

Measurement of beam guardrail Type 31 buried terminal Type 2 will be per linear foot 35 for the completed terminal. 36

37 The sixth paragraph is revised to read: 38 39

Measurement of beam guardrail anchor Type 10 will be per each for the completed 40 anchor, including the attachment of the anchor to the guardrail. 41

42 8-11.5 Payment 43 The Bid item “Beam Guardrail Anchor Type ___”, per each is revised to read “Beam 44 Guardrail Anchor Type 10”, per each. 45 46 The Bid item “Beam Guardrail Buried Terminal Type 1”, per each is deleted from this 47 section. 48 49 The Bid item “Beam Guardrail Buried Terminal Type 2”, per linear foot and the following 50 paragraph are revised to read: 51


1 “Beam Guardrail Type 31 Buried Terminal Type 2”, per linear foot. 2 3 The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Beam Guardrail Type 31 Buried Terminal 4 Type 2” shall be full payment for all costs to obtain and provide materials and perform 5 the Work as described in Section 8-11.3(1)C. 6


Section 9-20, Concrete Patching Material, Grout, and Mortar 1 January 7April 1, 2019 2

9-20.1 Patching Material 3 This section, including title, is revised to read: 4 5

9-20.1 Patching Material for Cement Concrete Pavement 6 Concrete patching material shall be prepackaged mortar extended with aggregate. The 7 amount of aggregate for extension shall conform to the manufacturer’s 8 recommendation. 9 10 Patching mortar and patching mortar extended with aggregate shall contain 11 cementitious material and conform to Sections 9-20.1(1) and 9-20.1(2). The 12 Manufacturer shall use the services of a laboratory that has an equipment calibration 13 verification system and a technician training and evaluation process in accordance with 14 AASHTO R 18 to perform all tests specified in Section 9-20.1. 15 16

9-20.1(1) Patching Mortar 17 Patching mortar shall conform to the following requirements: 18 19

Compressive Strength ASTM Test Method Specification at 3 hours C 39 Minimum 3,000 psi at 24 hours C 39 Minimum 5,000 psi Length Change at 28 days C 157 0.15 percent maximum Total Chloride Ion Content C 1218 1 lb/yd3 maximum Bond Strength at 24 hours C 882 (As modified by C

928, Section 9.5) Minimum 1,000 psi

Scaling Resistance (at 25 cycles of freezing and thawing)

C 672 (As modified by C 928, Section 9.4)

1 lb/ft2 maximum

20 9-20.1(2) Patching Mortar Extended with Aggregate 21 Patching mortar extended with aggregate shall meet the following requirements: 22 23

Compressive Strength ASTM Test Method Specification at 3 hours C 39 Minimum 3,000 psi at 24 hours C 39 Minimum 5,000 psi Length Change at 28 days C 157 0.15 percent maximum Bond Strength at 24 hours C 882 (As modified by

ASTM C928, Section 9.5) Minimum 1,000 psi

Scaling Resistance (at 25 cycles of freezing and thawing)

C 672 2 Maximum Visual Rating

Freeze thaw C 666 Maximum expansion 0.10% Minimum durability 90.0%

24


9-20.1(3) Aggregate 1 Aggregate used to extend the patching mortar shall conform to Section 9-03.1(4) 2 and be AASHTO Grading No. 8. A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance shall 3 be submitted showing the aggregate source and the gradation. Mitigation for Alkali 4 Silica Reaction (ASR) will not be required for the extender aggregate used for 5 concrete patching material. 6 7 9-20.1(4) Water 8 Water shall meet the requirements of Section 9-25.1. The quantity of water shall be 9 within the limits recommended by the repair material manufacturer. 10

11 9-20.2 Specifications 12 This section, including title, is revised to read: 13 14

9-20.2 Patching Material for Concrete Structure Repair 15 Concrete patching material shall be a prepackaged mixture of portland or blended 16 hydraulic cement, aggregate, and admixtures. Fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace 17 slag and microsilica fume may be used. The concrete patching material may be 18 shrinkage compensated. The concrete patching material shall also meet the following 19 requirements: 20 21

• Compressive strength of 6000 psi or higher at 28 days in accordance with 22 AASHTO T 22 (ASTM C 39), unless noted otherwise 23

24 • Bond strength of 250 psi or higher at 28 days or less in accordance with ASTM 25

C 1583 or ICRI 210.3R 26 27 • Shrinkage shall be 0.05 percent (500 microstrain) or lower at 28 days in 28

accordance with AASHTO T 160 (ASTM C 157) as modified by ICRI 320.3R 29 30 • Permeability shall be 2,000 coulombs or lower at 28 days in accordance with 31

AASHTO T 277 (ASTM C 1202) 32 33 • Freeze-thaw resistance shall have a durability factor of 90 percent or higher 34

after a minimum of 300 cycles in accordance with AASHTO T 161 Procedure A 35 (ASTM C 666) 36

37 • Soluble chloride ion limits in Section 6-02.3(2) shall be satisfied 38

39 9-20.2(1) Patching Mortar 40 This section, including title, is deleted in its entirety. 41 42 9-20.2(2) Patching Mortar Extended with Aggregate 43 This section, including title, is deleted in its entirety. 44 45 9-20.3(3) Grout Type 3 for Unconfined Bearing Pad Applications 46 This section’s title is revised to read: 47 48

Grout Type 3 for Unconfined Applications 49 50 This section is revised to read: 51 52


Grout Type 3 shall be a prepackaged material that does not include expansive 1 admixtures meeting the following requirements: 2 3

• Compressive strength shall be 4000 psi or higher at 28 days in accordance 4 with AASHTO T 22 (ASTM C 39) for grout extended with coarse aggregate or 5 AASHTO T 106 (ASTM C109) otherwise. 6

7 • Bond strength shall meet one of the following: 8 9

◦ 250 psi or higher at 28 days or less in accordance with ASTM C1583. 10 11 ◦ 2000 psi or higher at 28 days or less in accordance with ASTM C882. The 12

following modification to ASTM C882 is acceptable: use Type 3 Grout in 13 lieu of epoxy resin base bonding system and freshly mixed portland-14 cement mortar in the procedure for testing Type II and V systems. 15

16 • Drying shrinkage shall be 0.08 percent (800 microstrain) or lower at 28 days in 17

accordance with AASHTO T 160 (ASTM C157). The following modification to 18 AASHTO T 160 is acceptable: use a standard specimen size of 3 x 3 x 11-¼ 19 inches. 20

21 9-20.5 Bridge Deck Repair Material 22 Item number 3 of the first paragraph is revised to read: 23 24

3. Permeability of less than 2,000 coulombs at 28-days or more in accordance with 25 AASHTO T 277. 26

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 9-23, Concrete Curing Materials and Admixtures 1 April 1, 2019 2

9-23.12 Natural Pozzolan 3 This section is revised to read: 4 5

Natural Pozzolans shall be ground Pumice and shall conform to the requirements of 6 AASHTO M295 Class N, including supplementary optional chemical requirements as 7 set forth in Table 2. 8

9 9-23.13 Blended Supplementary Cementitious Material 10 The second sentence is revised to read: 11 12

Blended SCMs shall be limited to binary or ternary blends of fly ash, ground granulated 13 blast furnace slag and microsilica fume. 14

15 The second to last sentence is deleted. 16

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


Section 9-28, Signing Materials and Fabrication 1 April 21, 20182019 2

9-28.2 Manufacturer’s Identification and Date 3 The second sentence is revised to read: 4 5

In addition, the width and height dimension, in inches, the Contract number, and the 6 number of the sign as it appears in the Plans shall be placed using 3-inch series C black 7 letters on the back of destination, distance, and large special signs. 8

9 9-28.10 Vacant 10 This section, including title, is revised to read: 11 12

9-28.10 Digital Printing 13 Transparent and opaque durable inks used in digital printed sign messages shall be as 14 recommended by the manufacturer. When properly applied, digital printed colors shall 15 have a warranty life of the base retroreflective sign sheeting. Digital applied colors shall 16 present a smooth surface, free from foreign material, and all messages and borders 17 shall be clear and sharp. Digital printed signs shall conform to 70% of the retroreflective 18 minimum values established for its type and color. Digitally printed signs shall meet the 19 daytime color and luminance, and nighttime color requirements of ASTM D 4956. No 20 variations in color or overlapping of colors will be permitted. Digital printed permanent 21 traffic signs shall have an integrated engineered match component clear protective 22 overlay recommended by the sheeting manufacturer applied to the entire face of the 23 sign. On Temporary construction/maintenance signs printed with black ink only, the 24 protective overlay film is optional, as long as the finished sign has a warranty of a 25 minimum of three years from sign sheeting manufacturer. 26 27 All digital printed traffic control signs shall be an integrated engineered match 28 component system. The integrated engineered match component system shall consist 29 of retroreflective sheeting, durable ink(s), and clear overlay film all from the same 30 manufacturer applied to aluminum substrate conforming to Section 9-28.8. 31 32 The sign fabricator shall use an approved integrated engineered match component 33 system as listed on the Qualified Products List (QPL). Each approved digital printer 34 shall only use the compatible retroreflective sign sheeting manufacturer’s engineered 35 match component system products. 36 37 Each retroreflective sign sheeting manufacturer/integrated engineered match 38 component system listed on the QPL shall certify a department approved sign fabricator 39 is approved to operate their compatible digital printer. The sign fabricator shall re-certify 40 annually with the retroreflective sign manufacturer to ensure their digital printer is still 41 meeting manufacturer’s specifications for traffic control signs. Documentation of each 42 re-certification shall be submitted to the QPL Engineer annually. 43

44 9-28.11 Hardware 45 The last paragraph is revised to read: 46 47

All steel parts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111. Steel bolts and 48 related connecting hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM F 2329. 49

50


9-28.14(2) Steel Structures and Posts 1 The first sentence of the third paragraph is revised to read: 2 3

Anchor rods for sign bridge and cantilever sign structure foundations shall conform to 4 Section 9-06.5(4), including Supplemental Requirement S4 tested at -20°F. 5

6 In the second sentence of the fourth paragraph, “AASHTO M232” is revised to read “ASTM 7 F 2329”. 8 9 The first sentence of the fifth paragraph is revised to read: 10 11

Except as otherwise noted, steel used for sign structures and posts shall have a 12 controlled silicon content of either 0.00 to 0.06 percent or 0.15 to 0.25 percent. 13

14 The last sentence of the last paragraph is revised to read: 15 16

If such modifications are contemplated, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working 17 Drawing of the proposed modifications. 18


Section 9-29, Illumination, Signal, Electrical 1 January 7April 1, 2019 2

9-29.1 Conduit, Innerduct, and Outerduct 3 This section is supplemented with the following new subsections: 4 5

9-29.1(10) Pull Tape 6 Pull tape shall be pre-lubricated polyester pulling tape. The pull tape shall have a 7 minimum width of ½-inch and a minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds. Pull tape may 8 have measurement marks. 9

10 9-29.1(11) Foam Conduit Sealant 11 Foam conduit sealant shall be self-expanding waterproof foam designed to prevent both 12 water and pest intrusion. The foam shall be designed for use in and around electrical 13 equipment, including both insulated and bare conductors. 14

15 9-29.2(1) Junction Boxes 16 The first paragraph is revised to read: 17 18

For the purposes of this Specification concrete is defined as portland cement or blended 19 hydraulic cement concrete and non-concrete is all others. 20

21 9-29.2(1)A2 Non-Concrete Junction Boxes 22 The first paragraph is revised to read: 23 24

Material for the non-concrete junction boxes shall be of a quality that will provide for a 25 similar life expectancy as portland cement or blended hydraulic cement concrete in a 26 direct burial application. 27

28 9-29.2(2)A Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes 29 In the table in the last paragraph, the fourth, fifth and sixth rows are revised to read: 30 31

Slip Resistant Lid ASTM A36 steel Frame ASTM A36 steel Slip Resistant Frame ASTM A36 steel

32 9-29.3(2)A1 Single Conductor Current Carrying 33 This second sentence is revised to read: 34 35

Insulation shall be XLP (cross-linked polyethylene) or EPR (Ethylene Propylene 36 Rubber), Type USE (Underground Service Entrance) or USE-2, and rated for 600-volts 37 or higher. 38

39 9-29.6 Light and Signal Standards 40 In the first sentence of the third paragraph, “AASHTO M232” is revised to read “ASTM F 41 2329”. 42 43 Item number 2 of the last paragraph is revised to read: 44 45


2. The steel light and signal standard fabricator’s shop drawing submittal, including 1 supporting design calculations, submitted as a Type 2E Working Drawing in 2 accordance with Section 8-20.2(1) and the Special Provisions. 3

4 9-29.6(1) Steel Light and Signal Standards 5 In the second paragraph, “AASHTO M232” is revised to read “ASTM F 2329”. 6 7 The first sentence of the last paragraph is revised to read: 8 9

Steel used for light and signal standards shall have a controlled silicon content of either 10 0.00 to 0.06 percent or 0.15 to 0.25 percent. 11

12 9-29.6(5) Foundation Hardware 13 In the last paragraph, “AASHTO M232” is revised to read “ASTM F 2329”. 14 15 9-29.10(1) Conventional Roadway Luminaires 16 This section is revised to read: 17 18

All conventional roadway luminaires shall meet 3G vibration requirements as described 19 in ANSI C136.31. 20 21 All luminaires shall have housings fabricated from aluminum. The housing shall be 22 painted flat gray, SAE AMS Standard 595 color chip No. 26280, unless otherwise 23 specified in the Contract. Painted housings shall withstand a 1,000 hour salt spray test 24 as specified in ASTM B117. 25 26 Each housing shall include a four bolt slip-fitter mount capable of accepting a nominal 2” 27 tenon and adjustable within +/- 5 degrees of the axis of the tenon. The clamping 28 bracket(s) and the cap screws shall not bottom out on the housing bosses when 29 adjusted within the +/- 5 degree range. No part of the slipfitter mounting brackets on the 30 luminaires shall develop a permanent set in excess of 0.2 inch when the cap screws 31 used for mounting are tightened to a torque of 32 foot-pounds. Each luminaire shall 32 include leveling reference points for both transverse and longitudinal adjustment. 33 34 All luminaires shall include shorting caps when shipped. The caps shall be removed and 35 provided to the Contracting Agency when an alternate control device is required to be 36 installed in the photocell socket. House side shields shall be included when required by 37 the Contract. Order codes shall be modified to the minimum extent necessary to include 38 the option for house side shields. 39

40 This section is supplemented with the following new subsections: 41 42

9-29.10(1)A High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Conventional Roadway Luminaires 43 HPS conventional roadway luminaires shall meet the following requirements: 44 45

1. General shape shall be “cobrahead” style, with flat glass lens and full cutoff 46 optics. 47

48 2. Light pattern distribution shall be IES Type III. 49 50


3. The reflector of all luminaires shall be of a snap-in design or secured with 1 screws. The reflector shall be polished aluminum or prismatic borosilicate 2 glass. 3

4 4. Flat lenses shall be formed from heat resistant, high-impact, molded 5

borosilicate or tempered glass. 6 7 5. The lens shall be mounted in a doorframe assembly, which shall be hinged to 8

the luminaire and secured in the closed position to the luminaire by means of 9 an automatic latch. The lens and doorframe assembly, when closed, shall 10 exert pressure against a gasket seat. The lens shall not allow any light output 11 above 90 degrees nadir. Gaskets shall be composed of material capable of 12 withstanding the temperatures involved and shall be securely held in place. 13

14 6. The ballast shall be mounted on a separate exterior door, which shall be 15

hinged to the luminaire and secured in the closed position to the luminaire 16 housing by means of an automatic type of latch (a combination hex/slot 17 stainless steel screw fastener may supplement the automatic-type latch). 18

19 7. Each luminaire shall be capable of accepting a 150, 200, 250, 310, or 400 watt 20

lamp complete and associated ballast. Lamps shall mount horizontally. 21 22 9-29.10(1)B Light Emitting Diode (LED) Conventional Roadway Luminaires 23 LED Conventional Roadway Luminaires are divided into classes based on their 24 equivalent High Pressure Sodium (HPS) luminaires. Current classes are 200W, 250W, 25 310W, and 400W. LED luminaires are required to be pre-approved in order to verify 26 their photometric output. To be considered for pre-approval, LED luminaires must meet 27 the requirements of this section. 28 29 LED luminaires shall include a removable access door, with tool-less entry, for access 30 to electronic components and the terminal block. The access door shall be removable, 31 but include positive retention such that it can hang freely without disconnecting from the 32 luminaire housing. LED drivers may be mounted either to the interior of the luminaire 33 housing or to the removable door itself. 34 35 LED drivers shall be removable for user replacement. All internal modular components 36 shall be connected by means of mechanical plug and socket type quick disconnects. 37 Wire nuts may not be used for any purpose. All external electrical connections to the 38 luminaire shall be made through the terminal block. 39 40 LED luminaires shall include a 7-pin NEMA photocell receptacle. The LED driver(s) 41 shall be dimmable from ten volts to zero volts. LED output shall have a Correlated Color 42 Temperature (CCT) of 4000K nominal (4000-4300K) and a Color Rendering Index (CRI) 43 of 70 or greater. LED output shall be a minimum of 85% at 75,000 hours at 25 degrees 44 Celsius. 45 46 LED luminaires shall be available for 120V, 240V, and 480V supply voltages. Voltages 47 refer to the supply voltages to the luminaires present in the field. LED power usage shall 48 not exceed the following maximum values for the applicable wattage class: 49 50

Class Max. Wattage 200W 110W


250W 165W 310W 210W 400W 275W

1 Only one brand of LED conventional roadway luminaire may be used on a Contract. 2 They do not necessarily have to be the same brand as any high-mast, underdeck, or 3 wall-mount luminaires when those types of luminaires are specified in the Contract. 4 LED luminaires shall include a standard 10 year manufacturer warranty. 5 6 The list of pre-approved LED Conventional Roadway Luminaires is available at 7 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Design/Traffic/ledluminaires.htm. 8

9 9-29.10(2) Decorative Luminaires 10 This section, including title, is revised to read: 11 12

9-29.10(2) Vacant 13 14 9-29.12 Electrical Splice Materials 15 This section is supplemented with the following new subsections: 16 17

9-29.12(3) Splice Enclosures 18 9-29.12(3)A Heat Shrink Splice Enclosure 19 Heat shrink splice enclosures shall be medium or heavy wall cross-linked 20 polyolefin, meeting the requirements of AMS-DTL-23053/15, with thermoplastic 21 adhesive sealant. Heat shrink splices used for “wye” connections require rubber 22 electrical mastic tape. 23 24 9-29.12(3)B Molded Splice Enclosure 25 Molded splice enclosures shall use epoxy resin in a clear rigid plastic mold. The 26 material used shall be compatible with the insulation material of the insulated 27 conductor or cable. The component materials of the resin insulation shall be 28 packaged ready for convenient mixing without removing from the package. 29 30

9-29.12(4) Re-Enterable Splice Enclosure 31 Re-enterable splice enclosures shall use either dielectric grease or a flexible resin 32 contained in a two-piece plastic mold. The mold shall either snap together or use 33 stainless steel hose clamps. 34 35 9-29.12(5) Vinyl Electrical Tape for Splices 36 Vinyl electrical tape in splicing applications shall meet the requirements of MIL-I-37 24391C. 38

39 9-29.12(1) Illumination Circuit Splices 40 This section is revised to read: 41 42

Underground illumination circuit splices shall be solderless crimped connections 43 capable of securely joining the wires, both mechanically and electrically, as defined in 44 Section 8-20.3(8). Aerial illumination splices shall be solderless crimp connectors or 45 split bolt vice-type connectors. 46

47 9-29.12(1)A Heat Shrink Splice Enclosure 48 This section is deleted in its entirety. 49


1 9-29.12(1)B Molded Splice Enclosure 2 This section is deleted in its entirety. 3 4 9-29.12(2) Traffic Signal Splice Material 5 This section is revised to read: 6 7

Induction loop splices and magnetometer splices shall use an uninsulated barrel-type 8 crimped connector capable of being soldered. 9

10 9-29.13(10)D Cabinets for Type 170E and 2070 Controllers 11 The first sentence of item number 4 is revised to read: 12 13

A disposable paper filter element with dimensions of 12” × 16” × 1” shall be provided in 14 lieu of a metal filter. 15

16 Item number 6 is revised to read: 17 18

6. LED light strips shall be provided for cabinet lighting, powered from the Equipment 19 breaker on the Power Distribution Assembly. Each LED light strip shall be 20 approximately 12 inches long, have a minimum output of 320 lumens, and have a 21 color temperature of 4100K (cool white) or higher. There shall be three light strips 22 for each rack within the cabinet. Lighting shall be ceiling mounted – rack mounted 23 lighting is not permitted. Light strips shall be installed in the locations shown in the 24 Standard Plans. Lighting shall not interfere with the proper operation of any other 25 ceiling mounted equipment. All lighting fixtures above a rack shall energize 26 automatically when either door to that respective rack is opened. Each door switch 27 shall be labeled “Light”. 28


7. Rack mounted equipment shall be as shown in the Standard Plans. The cabinet 32 shall use PDA #2LX and Output File #1LX. Where an Auxiliary Output File is 33 required, Output File #2LX shall also be included. 34

35 This section is supplemented with the following new item: 36 37

9. The PCB connectors for Field Terminal Blocks FT1 through FT6 on Output Files 38 #1LX and #2LX shall be capable of accepting minimum 14 AWG field wiring, have 39 a pitch of 5.08 mm, and use screw flange type locking to secure the plug and 40 socket connection. The sockets on the Field Terminal Panel shall be secured to the 41 panel such that unplugging a connector will not result in the socket moving or 42 separating from the panel. 43

44 9-29.13(11) Cabinets for Type 170E and 2070 ControllersTraffic Data 45 Accumulator and Ramp Meters 46 Item number 2 is revised to read: 47 48

2. Rack mounted equipment shall be as shown in the Standard Plans. 49 50 Item number 3 is revised to read: 51 52


3. PDA #3LX shall be furnished with three Model 200 Load Switches installed. PDA 1 #3LX shall be modified to include a second Model 430 transfer relay, mounted on 2 the rear of the PDA and wired as shown in the Standard Plans. 3

4 9-29.13(12) ITS Cabinet 5 This section’s title is revised to read: 6 7

Type 331L ITS Cabinet 8 9 The first paragraph (excluding the numbered list) is revised to read: 10 11

Basic ITS cabinets shall be Model 331L Cabinets, unless otherwise specified in the 12 Contract. Type 331L Cabinets shall be constructed in accordance with the TEES, with 13 the following modifications: 14

15 Item number 6 of the first paragraph is revised to read: 16 17

6. LED light strips shall be provided for cabinet lighting, powered from the Equipment 18 breaker on the Power Distribution Assembly. Each LED light strip shall be 19 approximately 12 inches long, have a minimum output of 320 lumens, and have a 20 color temperature of 4100K (cool white) or higher. There shall be three light strips 21 for each rack within the cabinet. Lighting shall be ceiling mounted – rack mounted 22 lighting is not permitted. Light strips shall be installed in the locations shown in the 23 Standard Plans. Lighting shall not interfere with the proper operation of any other 24 ceiling mounted equipment. All lighting fixtures above a rack shall energize 25 automatically when either door to that respective rack is opened. Each door switch 26 shall be labeled “Light”. 27

28 9-29.16(2)E Painting Signal Heads 29 In the first sentence, “Federal Standard 595” is revised to read “SAE AMS Standard 595”. 30 31 9-29.17 Signal Head Mounting Brackets and Fittings 32 In the first paragraph, item number 2 under Stainless Steel is revised to read: 33 34

2. Bands or cables for Type N mount. 35 36 9-29.20 Pedestrian Signals 37 In item 2C of the second paragraph, “Federal Standard 595” is revised to read “SAE AMS 38 Standard 595”. 39 40 9-29.24 Service Cabinets 41 The third sentence of item number 6 is revised to read: 42 43

The dead front cover shall have cutouts for the entire breaker array, with blank covers 44 where no circuit breakers are installed. 45


8. Lighting contactors shall meet the requirements of Section 9-29.24(2). 49 50 The last sentence of item number 10 is revised to read: 51 52


Dead front panels shall prevent access to any exposed, live components, and shall 1 cover all equipment except for circuit breakers (including blank covers), the photocell 2 test/bypass switch, and the GFCI receptacle. 3

4 9-29.24(2) Electrical Circuit Breakers and Contactors 5 This section is revised to read: 6 7

All circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type, with the RMS-symmetrical interrupting capacity 8 described in this Section. Circuit breakers for 120/240/277 volt circuits shall be rated at 9 240 or 277 volts, as applicable, with an interrupting capacity of not less than 10,000 10 amperes. Circuit breakers for 480 volt circuits shall be rated at 480 volts, and shall have 11 an interrupting capacity of not less than 14,000 amperes. 12 13 Lighting contactors shall be rated for tungsten or ballasted (such as sodium vapor, 14 mercury vapor, metal halide, and fluorescent) lamp loads. Contactors for 120/240/277 15 volt circuits shall be rated at 240 volts maximum line to line voltage, or 277 volts 16 maximum line to neutral voltage, as applicable. Contactors for 480 volt circuits shall be 17 rated at 480 volt maximum line to line voltage. 18

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

Revisions to General Special Provisions Effective April 1, 2019

April 1, 2019 GDM:rah

1 of 3

Please note: New revisions to WSDOT General Special Provisions are described below. Previous GSPs that are not revised in this package are still in effect. Special Provisions take precedence over the Standard Specifications in accordance with Section 1-04.2. The following list is a brief description of the latest revisions, with an explanation of why each change was made. The actual provisions should be reviewed in depth to become completely knowledgeable of the full extent of the revisions. These provisions are available at the following location: http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/SpecificationsAmendmentsGSPs.htm INTRODUCTION N/A DIVISION 1 – General Requirements 1-07.5.OPT1(C).FR1 This is a new GSP, intended to replace the deleted 1-07.5(6).OPT1(A).FR1. There are at least three sources of commitments that require setbacks of work activities from sensitive areas (e.g. waters of the state, wetlands, unique upland features). The sources include HPA, Programmatic Biological Assessment Minimization Measures (or Individual BA), and local shoreline conditions. 1-07.5.OPT1(H).GR1 – Renamed to 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).FR1 This GSP is renamed to a new section and mostly unchanged, except to revise “concrete pours” to read “cast concrete”. Deleted: 1-07.5.OPT1(V).GR1 This GSP is deleted as part of this update package. The language predates our current policy of transferring the CSWGP, so it is no longer necessary. 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).FR1 – Revised and renamed to 1-07.5.OPT1(B).FR1 This GSP was renamed and also revises the term environmentally sensitive area to read sensitive area. Sensitive Area is now defined in the Standard Specifications. 1-07.5(5).OPT1(G).FR1 – Renamed to 1-07.5.OPT1(A).FR1 There were no changes in content to this GSP as this update only renames the file, therefore the last revised date is retained. Deleted: 1-07.5(6).OPT1(A).FR1 This GSP is deleted as part of this update package. The issue of certain work from sensitive areas is not unique to just USFWS/NMFS, so a new GSP was created to supplement the appropriate section of the Standard Specifications (1-07.5.OPT1(C).FR1) in order to accommodate other sources of similar setbacks. 1-10.1.OPT2.FR1 The revisions to this GSP specify the law enforcement agency as Washington State Patrol, and adds language regarding arrangements for WSP personnel to participate in



2 of 3

the Contractor’s traffic control activities. The fill-in was deleted as part of these revisions, so the filename is also revised to 1-10.1.OPT2.GR1. 1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).OPT1.GR1 The revision to this GSP directs the Contractor to the approved traffic control plan for additional requirements for the speed limit sign. DIVISION 2 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment 2-01.3(2).INST1.GR2 & 2-01.3(2).OPT1.GR2 This GSP is deleted as part of this update package. 2-09.3(3)B.OPT2.FR2 This new GSP enables the Contracting Agency to require a more stringent design process for temporary excavation slopes that are located beneath structures, critical facilities, or where recommended by the Geotechnical Office. DIVISION 3 – Acceptance of Aggregate N/A DIVISION 4 – Ballast and Crushed Surfacing N/A DIVISION 5 - Surface Treatments And Pavements N/A DIVISION 6 – Structures 6-01.5.OPT1.FB6 These revisions update the term environmentally sensitive area to read sensitive area. Sensitive Area is now defined in the Standard Specifications. Deleted: 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.INST1.GR6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.INST1.GR6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6 These BSPs are deleted as they are no longer supported by the proprietary supplier and therefore outdated for use. DIVISION 7 – Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers, Water Mains and Conduits N/A DIVISION 8 - Miscellaneous Construction



3 of 3

8-01.1.INST1.GR8, 8-01.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.2.INST1.GR8, 8-01.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.3.INST1.GR8, 8-01.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.4(4).GR8, 8-01.4(4).INST1.GR8, 8-01.4(4).OPT1.GR8, 8-01.5(4).GR8, 8-01.5(4).INST1.GR8, 8-01.5(4).OPT1.GR8 These new GSPs enable designers to add contract requirements for Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs). Deleted: 8-01.3(2)C.INST1.GR8, 8-01.3(2)C.OPT1.GR8 This GSP (and its associated instructional file) are deleted as it is outdated. 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8 These revisions to this GSP update all references of “weathering agent” to “reactive coloring agent”. 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8 These revisions to this GSP update all references of “weathering agent” to “reactive coloring agent”. 8-11.3.OPT4.FR8 These revisions to this GSP update all references of “weathering agent” to “reactive coloring agent”. 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT5.GR8 The revisions to these GSPs update pre-approved drawing references. 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT6.GR8 The revisions to these GSPs update pre-approved drawing references. DIVISION 9 – Materials STDPLANS.GR9 The revisions to this GSP allows the option of a 3/4" inch or 13/16” hole in the steel post for the bolt that attached the blockout to the steel post, and an option of a 1/4" or 13/16” hole in the steel post for the anti-rotation nail. ***INTERIM UPDATES*** (Changes between January 2019 and April 2019 Official Update Packages) 1-07.9(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-07.9(1).OPT2.FR1, 1-07.9(1).OPT5.FR1, 1-07.9(1).OPT6.FR1 These GSPs became effective on January 9, 2019 and are already in production. Therefore, they do not appear in this package with track changes. These GSPs are included in this memo for tracking purposes. These revisions were necessary to update the federal wage rate modification number from WA180001 to WA190001. 1-07.11.OPT7.GR1 – Deleted This GSP was deleted on January 4, 2019 and has already been removed from production. Therefore, it does not appear in this package with track changes. This GSP is included in this memo for tracking purposes.

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

Index – General Special Provisions Division 1 EGSP1.docx January 9April 1, 2019 Page 1

INTRO.GR1 Special Provisions 1 (January 2, 2018) 2 All Projects 3

4 DIVISION1.GR1 General Requirements 5 6 DESWORK.GR1 Description of Work 7 8

DESWORK1.FR1 (Description of Work) 9 (March 13, 1995) 10 Use in all projects except those involving only painting of metal 11 bridges. 12 (1 fill-in) 13

14 DESWORK2.FB1 (Description of Work - Bridge Painting) 15

(August 3, 2015) 16 Use in projects involving only the painting of metal bridges. 17 (3 fill-ins) 18

19 1-02.GR1 Bid Procedures and Conditions 20 21

1-02.1.GR1 Prequalification of Bidders 22 23

1-02.1.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02.1, including title, is deleted and replaced 24 with the following) 25 Must use one preceding any of the following: 26 27

1-02.1.OPT1.GR1 (Vacant) 28 (April 2, 2018) 29 Use in projects where the work will occur outside the 30 highway right of way. 31 Requires approval of HQ Contract Ad and Award Manager. 32

33 1-02.4.GR1 Examination of Plans, Specifications and Site of Work 34

35 1-02.4(2).GR1 Subsurface Information 36 37

1-02.4(2).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02.4(2) is supplemented with the following) 38 Must use once preceding any of the following: 39

40 1-02.4(2).OPT1.FR1 (January 2, 2012) 41

Use in projects for which soils investigations have been 42 made. The first fill-in identifies the site (web address or 43 physical address) where the information is located. The 44 second fill-in lists the items available for the prospective 45 bidder’s review. This should include the Test Boring 46 Legend and the Logs of Test Boring that are included in 47 the project, listed by hole number. Other geotechnical 48 resources such as reports and memoranda (including 49 title, author, and date), test pit data and other 50 subsurface investigation data can also be listed here. 51 (2 fill-ins) 52

53 1-02.6.GR1 Preparation of Proposal 54

55


1-02.6.INST2.GR1 (The fourth paragraph is replaced with the following) 1 Must use one preceding any of the following: 2 3

1-02.6.OPT1.GR1 (Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) 4 Documentation) 5 (June 1, 2017) 6 Use in projects with Federal Transit Administration (FTA) 7 funding, or where FTA is the lead funding agency, that 8 require the use of the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 9 (DBE) Condition of Award (COA) Participation Goal 10 Requirement. 11 Must use with 1-02.9.OPT2.GR1, 1-02.13.OPT1.GR1 and 12 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1. 13

14 1-02.6.OPT10.GR1 (Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) 15

Documentation) 16 (June 1, 2017) 17 Use in projects that require the use of the Underutilized 18 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) Condition of 19 Award (COA) Participation Goal Requirement. 20 Must use with 1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 and 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1. 21 22

1-02.6.OPT15.GR1 (Subcontractor list not required with bid) 23 (The fifth and sixth paragraphs of Section 1-02.6 are deleted) 24 (August 2, 2004) 25 Use in all projects with estimated cost of $1,000,000 or less. 26 27

1-02.6.INST3.GR1 (Section 1-02.6 is supplemented with the following) 28 Must use once preceding any of the following: 29

30 1-02.6.OPT20.FR1 (Alternative Bids) 31

(April 2, 2018) 32 Use in projects when the proposal is to contain alternate 33 items for bidding. Fill-ins consist of a brief description of the 34 portion of the project or of the work that would be subject to 35 alternative bidding. Repeat the "Alternative" paragraphs if 36 the project consists of more than two alternatives. 37 (4 or more fill-ins) 38

39 1-02.6.OPT21.FR1 (Cumulative Alternate Bidding) 40

(August 3, 2015) 41 Use in contracts when the award process is modified to 42 include cumulative Alternates. The region shall determine 43 and notify the Ad and Award office of the Funds Available. 44 The bid items shall be segregated into a Base Bid and 45 Alternates as appropriate. Fill-ins consist of a brief 46 description of the portion of the project or of the work that is 47 included in the noted Alternates. The specification 48 language may be adjusted to suit the number of Alternates. 49

50 Use of this GSP requires the approval of the HQ Ad and 51 Award Manager and HQ Assistant State Design Engineer. 52 When requesting approval, provide documentation of funds 53 available, and that Approvals consistent with Design 54


Manual Chapter 300 exist for the Base project and each 1 potential combination of Base plus Alternates. 2 (1 or more fill-ins) 3

4 1-02.6.OPT22.FR1 (Progress Schedule) 5

(January 7, 2019) 6 Use in all projects unless a Type A Schedule (simple bar 7 chart) is requested. This request should come to the 8 Design Project Engineer from the Construction Project 9 Engineer and be the result of discussion between the 10 Design Project Engineer and the Construction Project 11 Engineer concerning the level of schedule complexity 12 required to administer the contract. Must also use 1-13 02.6.OPT23.FR1 and 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 when a Type C 14 Progress Schedule is specified. 15 16 Fill-in #1 and fill-in #3 is the minimum bid amount. Any 17 amount over $100,000 requires HQ Construction Office 18 approval. For the following engineers estimates, use the 19 corresponding minimum bid amount: 20 21

Engineers Estimate Minimum Bid 22 Type B Type C 23

$1 to $5 mil $5,000 $10,000 24 $5 mil to $15 mil $10,000 $20,000 25 $15 mil to $20 mil $15,000 $30,000 26 $20 mil to $30 mil $25,000 $50,000 27 $30 mil to $50 mil $35,000 $75,000 28 Over $50 million $50,000 $100,000 29 30 Fill-in #2 is the schedule Type, either “B” or “C.” Use of a 31 Type C schedule requires prior approval from HQ 32 Construction Administration and the Region Construction 33 Manager. 34

35 1-02.6.OPT23.FR1 (Schedule Updates) 36

(January 7, 2019) 37 Use in projects that specify a Type C Progress Schedule. 38 Must also use 1-02.6.OPT22.FR1 and 1-39 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1. 40 (2 fill-ins) 41 Fill-in #1 and fill-in #2 is the minimum bid amount. 42 43

1-02.9.GR1 Delivery of Proposal 44 45

1-02.9.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02.9 is supplemented with the following) 46 Must use once preceding any of the following: 47 48

1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 (April 3, 2018) 49 Use in projects that require the use of the Underutilized 50 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) Condition of 51 Award (COA) Participation Goal Requirement. 52 Must use with 1-02.6.OPT10.GR1 and 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1. 53

54


1-02.9.INST2.GR1 (The first paragraph of Section 1-02.9 is replaced with the 1 following) 2 Must use once preceding any of the following: 3 4

1-02.9.OPT2.GR1 (June 1, 2017) 5 Use in projects with Federal Transit Administration (FTA) 6 funding, or where FTA is the lead funding agency, that 7 require the use of the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 8 (DBE) Condition of Award (COA) Participation Goal 9 Requirement. 10 Must use with 1-02.6.OPT1.GR1, 1-02.13.OPT1.GR1 and 11 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1. 12

13 1-02.9.OPT3.GR1 (April 2, 2018) 14

Use in Connecting Washington projects where Section 15 502/602 applies and the project has an upset price. 16 17

1-02.12.GR1 Public Opening of Proposal 18 19


22 1-02.12.OPT1.FR1 (Date of Opening Bids) 23

(August 3, 2015) 24 Do not use in projects scheduled for Region bid openings. 25 Use in all projects scheduled for bid openings in Olympia. 26 (1 fill-in) 27 Bid opening is held on Wednesday, except in the event of 28 holidays. Should a holiday be observed on the Monday 29 prior to bid opening, bid opening will be held on Thursday 30 of that same week. Contact the HQ Contract Ad & Award 31 Office if additional guidance is necessary. 32 33

1-02.13.GR1 Irregular Proposals 34 35

1-02.13.INST1.GR1 (In item number 1 of Section 1-02.13, sub-items f, g, and h 36 are revised to read) 37 Must use once preceding any of the following: 38

39 1-02.13.OPT1.GR1 (June 1, 2017) 40

Use in projects with Federal Transit Administration (FTA) 41 funding, or where FTA is the lead funding agency. 42

43 1-02.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02 is supplemented with the following) 44

Must use once preceding any of the following: 45 46

1-02.OPT1.GR1 (Protest Procedures) 47 (April 5, 2004) 48 Include in all contracts with Federal Transit Administration 49 (FTA) funding. Typically only applies to Ferry System and 50 Sound Transit projects. 51

52 1-03.GR1 Award and Execution Of Contract 53

54 1-03.2.GR1 Award of Contract 55


1 1-03.2.INST1.GR1 (The first sentence of Section 1-03.2 is revised to read) 2


1-03.2.OPT1.GR1 (Rapid Award of Contract) 5 (April 7, 2008) 6 Use only in projects when the Regional Administrator has 7 declared an emergency, and the nature of the emergency 8 requires a rapid award and execution of the contract. 9 Requires approval of HQ Contract Ad and Award Manager. 10

1-03.3.GR1 Execution of Contract 11 12


15 1-03.3.OPT1.GR1 (Execution of Contract) 16

(August 5, 2013) 17 Use in projects selected by the Region when it is desired to 18 have Escrow Bid Documentation established for the 19 project. The project must be of significant size and duration 20 to extend over multiple construction seasons. 21 22 Requires Region to set up banking facility for document 23 storage prior to advertisements. 24 25

1-03.3.INST2.GR1 (The first paragraph of Section 1-03.3 is supplemented with 26 the following) 27 Must use once preceding any of the following: 28

29 1-03.3.OPT3.GR1 (January 4, 2016) 30

Use in the Connecting Washington projects listed at 31 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/ProjectDev/C32 onnectingWashington.pdf. 33 34

1-04.GR1 Scope of the Work 35 36

1-04.5.GR1 Procedure and Protest by the Contractor 37 38


41 1-04.5.OPT1.GR1 (Partnering) 42

(April 2, 2018) 43 Use in all projects with an Engineer’s estimate of $5 million 44 or greater, and/or Contracts exceeding 200 working days. 45 At the discretion of the Region, may be used in projects 46 with lesser cost and duration where the project complexity, 47 scope of work, or project conditions support the need to 48 host a Project Specific Partnering workshop. Deletion of 49 this item requires Region Construction Engineer approval. 50 51

1-05.GR1 Control of Work 52 53

1-05.3.GR1 Working Drawings 54 55



3 1-05.3.OPT1.GR1 (August 2, 2004) 4

Use in projects that are adjacent to or over railroad tracks 5 and involve the Burlington Northern Railroad or the Union 6 Pacific Railroad Co. Do not use in projects involving only 7 bridge painting, planing bridge decks, or bridge deck 8 overlays. If the 60-day turnaround is critical to the 9 schedule, increase the working days accordingly. 10

11 1-05.4.GR1 Conformity With and Deviations from Plans and Stakes 12

13 1-05.4.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-05.4 is supplemented with the following) 14


1-05.4.OPT1.GR1 (Contractor Surveying - Structure) 17 (August 7, 2017) 18 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to do all surveying 19 needed for bridges and walls. May be edited to retain 20 portions of surveying for WSDOT crews but editing to 21 assign additional work to the Contractor requires HQ 22 Construction Office approval. 23

24 1-05.4.OPT2.GR1 (Contractor Surveying - Roadway) 25

(August 7, 2017) 26 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to do all surveying 27 needed for roadway items. May be edited to retain portions 28 of surveying for WSDOT crews but editing to assign 29 additional work to the Contractor requires HQ Construction 30 Office approval. Must also use 2-03.4.OPT2.GR2 if 31 roadway excavation or embankment is included in the 32 project. 33

34 1-05.4.OPT3.GR1 (Licensed Surveyors) 35

(April 4, 2011) 36 Include in projects requiring the Contractor to supply 37 professional land surveyors to establish right-of-way lines 38 and other monuments. 39

40 1-05.4.OPT4.GR1 (Contractor Surveying – ADA Features) 41

(April 2, 2018) 42 Use in all projects that require any ADA work. 43 Must use with 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8, and 44 8-14.3.OPT3.GR8. 45

46 1-05.9.GR1 Equipment 47



1-05.9.OPT1.FR1 (April 7, 2008) 52 Use in eligible projects that require extensive grading if 53 adequate design files have already been created during the 54 design process. Eligible projects are those that require 55


large areas of linear grading or mass quantities of roadway 1 excavation, and are in locations where satellite signals are 2 not obstructed by natural or manmade feature (such as 3 highly mountainous areas or urban canyons). Requires 4 approval of Region Construction Manager. 5 6 Must also use 1-05.4.OPT2.GR1 (Contractor Surveying – 7 Roadway). 8 (2 fill-ins) The first fill-in describes the type of data to be 9 provided (cross sections Sta. A to B, digital terrain model, 10 etc.) and the file format of the electronic data. The second 11 fill-in is the name and address of the Project Engineer 12 administering the contract. 13

14 1-05.9.OPT2.FR1 (Class A Noxious Weeds) 15

(April 2, 2018) 16 RCW 17.10.145 requires state agencies to control Class A 17 noxious weeds. Apply this GSP if the project’s SEPA 18 checklist and/or the Region Landscape Architect determine 19 a Class A noxious weed is present in the upland. 20 Fill-in #1 will contain the name of the Class A noxious 21 weed. 22 Fill-in #2 will contain the specific instructions how to clean 23 the equipment prior to leaving the project site. 24 (2 fill-ins) 25

26 1-05.9.OPT3.FR1 (Aquatic Invasive Species) 27

(April 2, 2018) 28 The Hydraulic Project Approval requires that permit holders 29 prevent the spread of aquatic invasive species. Apply this 30 GSP if the project’s Environmental Review 31 Summary/Environmental Classification Survey determines 32 that an aquatic invasive species is present. 33 Fill-in #1 will contain the name of the Aquatic Invasive 34 Species. 35 Fill-in #2 will contain the specific instructions how to clean 36 the equipment prior to leaving the project site. 37 (2 fill-ins) 38 39

1-05.14.GR1 Cooperation With Other Contractors 40 41


44 1-05.14.OPT1.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 45

Use when it is anticipated that other projects are, or will be, 46 under construction during the life of this project within the 47 limits of this project or when access to, or through adjacent 48 projects may be necessary. 49 (1 fill-in) 50

51 1-05.14.OPT2.FR1 (Provide Access) 52

(March 13, 1995) 53


Use on structure contracts which are separate contracts 1 when other contractors are required to haul past the 2 structure being constructed. 3 (1 fill-in) 4

5 1-06.GR1 Control of Material 6

7 1-06.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-06 is supplemented with the following) 8


1-06.OPT1.GR1 Buy America 11 Must use once preceding any of the following: 12

13 1-06.OPT1(A).GR1 (Buy America) 14

(August 6, 2012) 15 May be used in any Contract at each Regions discretion. 16 Must use if any of the following apply to this Contract: 17 18

• has federal aid for construction 19 • has or is from a Project or one of several Contracts 20

from a Project that has a NEPA decision and 21 federal aid was used or anticipated to be used in 22 any of the design, right of way, utilities, or 23 construction phases of this Contract or in any other 24 Contracts 25

26 Do not use if using 1-06.OPT1(C).FR1 27 28

29 1-06.OPT1(B).FR1 (Buy America) 30

(August 6, 2012) 31 Use if using steel or iron in both permanent and temporary 32 installations AND any of the following apply to this 33 Contract: 34 35



43 Must also use 1-06.OPT1(A).GR1 44 (1 fill-in) 45

46 1-06.OPT1(C).FR1 (Buy America) 47

(August 6, 2007) 48 May be used in any Contract at each Regions discretion. 49 Must use in all projects that require the use of structural 50 steel when the use of foreign structural steel would result in 51 a cost benefit approaching 25 percent of the cost of the 52 total project AND any of the following apply to this 53 Contract: 54 55




8 If the structural steel items constitute at least 60 percent of 9 the estimated total project cost, alternate bids for domestic 10 and foreign structural steel will be required. Format for 11 alternate bid item is Item Name - Domestic Steel and Item 12 Name - Foreign Steel. 13 (6 fill-ins) ($$1$$ and $$6$$ will be the same and $$2$$ 14 and $$5$$ will be the same) 15

16 1-06.1.GR1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use 17


Must use once preceding any of the following: 20 21 1-06.1.OPT1.GR1 (April 3, 2017) 22

May be used on any project with Construction Project 23 Engineer, Region Construction Engineering Manager, or 24 Assistant Regional Administrator approval. Should be 25 considered on projects that contain large or numerous 26 electrical or ITS components. 27

28 1-07.GR1 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public 29

30 1-07.1.GR1 Laws to be Observed 31


Must use once preceding any of the following: 34 35 1-07.1.OPT1.GR1 American Recovery and Reinvestment 36

Act of 2009 (ARRA) Employment Report 37 (March 25, 2009) 38 Use in all projects that contain any amount of ARRA 39 funding. 40

41 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 Lead Health Protection Program 42

(January 5, 2004) 43 Use in projects when lead based paint on existing 44 structures and non-structural items will be disturbed 45 (1 fill-in) 46

47 1-07.1.OPT3.FR1 Confined Space 48

(April 3, 2006) 49 Must use when Contractor workers are required to enter a 50 confined space and all other projects where confined 51 spaces are known to exist. Use requires approval of the 52 Region Safety Manager. 53 54 A confined space is a space that is ALL of the following: 55


1 • Large enough and arranged so an employee could fully 2

enter the space and work. 3 • Has limited or restricted entry or exit. Examples of 4

spaces with limited or restricted entry are tanks, 5 vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, 6 excavations, and pits. 7

• Not primarily designed for human occupancy. 8 9 Examples of confined spaces include but are not limited to 10 concrete or steel box girder structures, pontoons on 11 floating bridges, existing stormwater/sewer conveyances 12 and vaults, electrical or signal hubs. 13 14 Fill-in #1: Include each known confined space that the 15 Contractor may enter to perform the work. Describe 16 identified hazards and experience with each known 17 confined space, if any. Must contact Region Safety office 18 for fill-in information. 19

20 1-07.3.GR1 Forest Protection and Merchantable Timber Requirements 21



1-07.3.OPT1.GR1 (August 2, 2004) 26 Use in projects that require work in or adjacent to National 27 Forest Reservations. 28 29 Must also use Forest Service Provisions Appendix located 30 at: 31 http://wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/ProjectDev/GSPsP32 DF/1-07.3.Appendix.pdf. Do not include this Appendix in 33 the run-list. On the Final Check sheet (Form 221-019EF) 34 under Contract Make-Up check the box Forest Service 35 Provisions. 36

37 1-07.3(2).GR1 Merchantable Timber Requirements 38

39 1-07.3(2).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-07.3(2) is supplemented 40

with the following) 41 Must use once preceding any of the following: 42

43 1-07.3(2).OPT1.GR1 (Timber Export Restrictions) 44

(April 7, 2008) 45 Use in projects that have one log truck load 46 (approximately 5,000 board feet) or more of 47 merchantable timber that is to be cut. 48

49 1-07.4.GR1 Sanitation 50

51 1-07.4(2).GR1 Health Hazards 52

53 1-07.4(2).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-07.4(2) is revised to read) 54

Must use once preceding any of the following: 55


1 1-07.4(2).OPT1.FR1 (August 7, 2017) 2

Use in all projects known to be inhabited by transients, 3 and all projects known to contain biological or physical 4 hazards such as drug paraphernalia, human 5 excrement, etc. 6 (1 fill-in) 7

8 1-07.5.GR1 Environmental Regulations 9


Must use once preceding any of the following: 12 13 1-07.5.OPT1.GR1 Environmental Commitments 14

(September 20, 2010) 15 An Environmental Commitment Meeting is expected as 16 outlined in Division 4 of the Plans Preparation Manual 17 18 Must use with 1-07.5.OPT2.GR1. Must use once preceding 19 any of the following Environmental Commitment GSPs: 20 21

1-07.5.OPT1(A).FR1 (August 4, 2014) 22 Use if the project includes a requirement for Cultural 23 Resource Monitoring. 24 (1 fill-in) 25 The fill-in can either be a station reference(s), plan 26 sheet(s), or a certain depth below an elevation control 27 point, etc. 28 29

1-07.5.OPT1(B).FR1 (April 1, 2019) 30 Use if work is authorized in environmentally sensitive 31 areas. Use the Environmental Commitment Meeting to 32 determine applicability of this provision for the project. 33 (1 fill-in - choose the largest number of days noted in 34 your permits/environmental documentation or 15 days, 35 whichever is greater.) 36 37

1-07.5.OPT1(C).FR1 (April 1, 2019) 38 Use in projects applying either Programmatic Biological 39 Assessment (or Individual BA), Hydraulic Project 40 Approval, or local shoreline conditions where setbacks 41 of certain work are required from sensitive areas like 42 waters of the state, wetlands, or unique upland 43 features. 44 (3 Fill-ins) 45 Fill-in #1 defines the contractor activity that is not 46 allowed (e.g. staging, storing material, maintaining 47 equipment, etc.) 48 Fill-in #2 defines the minimum distance between the 49 contractor activity and the sensitive area. 50 Fill-in #3 defines the sensitive area(s). 51 52

1-07.5.OPT1(H).GR1 (January 7, 2013) 53 Use with Contracting Agency owned NPDES 54 Construction Stormwater General Permits (CSWGP). 55


This GSP shall not be used on projects where CSWGP 1 administration will be transferred to the Contractor prior 2 to the start of construction. Additional planning, 3 monitoring, sampling, and reporting requirements, 4 beyond the scope of this GSP, may be required if the 5 project is issued a CSWGP that covers discharges to 6 impaired surface waters, such as those listed on the 7 303(d) list or in a Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) 8 coverage area. Use the Environmental Commitment 9 Meeting to determine applicability of this provision for 10 the project. 11 12

1-07.5.OPT1(V).GR1 (August 3, 2009) 13 Use if the project is using the Construction Stormwater 14 General Permit. Use the Environmental Commitment 15 Meeting to determine applicability of this provision for 16 the project. 17

18 1-07.5.OPT2.GR1 Payment 19

(August 3, 2009) 20 Must use with 1-07.5.OPT1.GR1. 21

22 1-07.5(2).GR1 State Department of Fish And Wildlife 23

24 1-07.5(2).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-07.5(2) is supplemented with the following) 25


1-07.5(2).OPT1.GR1 Hydraulic Project Approval 28 (April 2, 2018) 29 An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 30 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 31 projects to determine the applicability of these 32 requirements. 33 34 Must use with 1-07.5(2).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 35 preceding any of the following Hydraulic Project 36 Approval GSPs: 37

38 1-07.5(2).OPT1(A).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 39

Use in projects with an HPA and a “fish window.” 40 Fill-in #1 is the start date of the fish window. 41 Fill-in #2 is the end date. 42 Consider setting the work completion date one 43 day less than permitted end date. This ensures 44 WSDOT has time to remove the nets, which is 45 technically in-water work. 46 (2 fill-ins) 47

48 1-07.5(2).OPT2.GR1 Payment 49

(April 2, 2018) 50 Must use with 1-07.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 51

52 1-07.5(3).GR1 State Department of Ecology 53




1-07.5(3).OPT1.GR1 Water Quality and Resource Protection 3 (April 2, 2018) 4 An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 5 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 6 projects to determine the applicability of these 7 requirements. 8 9 Must use with 1-07.5(3).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 10 preceding any of the following Hydraulic Project 11 Approval GSPs: 12

13 1-07.5(3).OPT1(A).FR1 (August 3, 2009) 14

Use in projects having permitted work within 15 waters of the United States and a mixing zone is 16 allowed by the Washington State Department of 17 Ecology. 18 (1 fill-in) 19 Fill in No. $$1$$ choose a distance in feet based 20 on either 173-201A of the Washington 21 Administrative Code or the project specific 401 22 Water Quality Certification from the Washington 23 State Department of Ecology. 24

25 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).GR1 (January 7, 2013) 26

Use with Contracting Agency owned NPDES 27 Construction Stormwater General Permits 28 (CSWGP). This GSP shall not be used on 29 projects where CSWGP administration will be 30 transferred to the Contractor prior to the start of 31 construction. Additional planning, monitoring, 32 sampling, and reporting requirements, beyond the 33 scope of this GSP, may be required if the project 34 is issued a CSWGP that covers discharges to 35 impaired surface waters, such as those listed on 36 the 303(d) list or in a Total Maximum Daily Load 37 (TMDL) coverage area. Use the Environmental 38 Commitment Meeting to determine applicability of 39 this provision for the project. 40

41 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).FR1 (January 7, 2019) 42

Use if work is authorized in environmentally 43 sensitive areas. Use the Environmental 44 Commitment Meeting to determine applicability of 45 this provision for the project. 46 (1 fill-in - choose the largest number of days 47 noted in your permits/environmental 48 documentation or 15 days, whichever is greater.) 49

50 1-07.5(3).OPT2.GR1 Payment 51


54 1-07.5(5).GR1 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers 55




1-07.5(5).OPT1.GR1 U.S. Army Corps Nationwide Permit 5 (April 2, 2018) 6 An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 7 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 8 projects to determine the applicability of these 9 requirements. 10 11 Must use with 1-07.5(5).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 12 preceding any of the following Hydraulic Project 13 Approval GSPs: 14

15 1-07.5(5).OPT1(A).GR1 (February 25, 2013) 16

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army 17 Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit. 18

19 1-07.5(5).OPT1(B).FR1 (February 25, 2013) 20

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army 21 Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit No. 33. 22 The permit provides for temporary fills for up to 23 six months (180 days). The designer must 24 evaluate the length of time needed for temporary 25 fills. Any duration in excess of six months must 26 have received a waiver by the U.S. Army Corps of 27 Engineers. Use the Environmental Commitment 28 Meeting to determine applicability of this provision 29 for the project. 30 (2-fill-ins) 31 Fill-in No. $$1$$ defines the location of temporary 32 fill(s). 33 Fill-in No. $$2$$ is number of calendar days of 34 the temporary fill(s) are permitted to be placed. 35

36 1-07.5(5).OPT1(C).GR1 (February 25, 2013) 37

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army 38 Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit No. 3, 13, 39 14, or 33. 40

41 1-07.5(5).OPT1(D).GR1 (August 3, 2009) 42

Use if permits authorize heavy equipment 43 operation in wetlands or mudflats. 44

45 1-07.5(5).OPT1(E).GR1 (February 25, 2013) 46

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army 47 Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit. Check to 48 see if the Hydraulic Project Approval includes a 49 condition to remove temporary fills. 50

51 1-07.5(5).OPT1(F).GR1 (August 3, 2009) 52

Use if the project involves disposing of creosoted 53 materials. 54

55


1-07.5(5).OPT1(G).FR1 (August 4, 2014) 1 Use if the project includes a requirement for 2 Cultural Resource Monitoring. 3 (1 fill-in) 4 The fill-in can either be a station reference(s), 5 plan sheet(s), or a certain depth below an 6 elevation control point, etc. 7

8 1-07.5(5).OPT2.GR1 Payment 9


12 1-07.5(6).GR1 U.S. Fish/Wildlife Services and National Marine Fisheries 13

Service 14 15


18 1-07.5(6).OPT1.GR1 (April 2, 2018) 19

An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 20 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 21 projects to determine the applicability of these 22 requirements. 23 24 Must use with 1-07.5(6).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 25 preceding any of the following GSPs: 26

27 1-07.5(6).OPT1(A).FR1 (August 3, 2009) 28

Use if the Contractor will stage equipment or 29 material on site. Use the Environmental 30 Commitment Meeting to determine applicability of 31 this provision for the project. 32 (1 fill-in) 33

34 1-07.5(6).OPT1(B).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 35

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 36 Assessment Minimization Measure #8, where 37 work will be performed between October 1 and 38 June 1. If this GSP is used, please ensure that 39 the Plans indicate where the 100 year floodplain 40 is. 41 Do not use for Emergency Projects. 42

43 1-07.5(6).OPT1(C).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 44

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 45 Assessment Minimization Measure #15. 46 Fill-in #1 is the maximum number of days. Work 47 with the Region Environmental Coordinator. 48 (1 fill-in) 49

50 1-07.5(6).OPT1(D).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 51

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 52 Assessment Minimization Measure #27. 53

54 1-07.5(6).OPT1(E).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 55



3 1-07.5(6).OPT1(F).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 4


7 1-07.5(6).OPT1(G).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 8

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 9 Assessment Minimization Measure #73. 10 11 This GSP should pertain only to non-bridge 12 projects (i.e. culverts) because treated wood 13 containment for bridges is covered by Section 2-14 02.3(2)A1 of the Standard Specifications. 15

16 1-07.5(6).OPT1(H).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 17

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 18 Assessment Minimization Measure #74. 19 Fill-in #1 is the maximum decibel level. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22 1-07.5(6).OPT1(I).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 23

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 24 Assessment Minimization Measure #76. 25 Fill-in #1 is the waterbody name that has ESA 26 listed species. 27 (1 fill-in) 28

29 1-07.5(6).OPT1(J).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 30

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 31 Assessment Minimization Measure #82. 32 Fill-in #1 is the Washington city nearest to the 33 project location. 34 (1 fill-in) 35

36 1-07.5(6).OPT1(K).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 37


43 1-07.5(6).OPT1(L).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 44


50 1-07.5(6).OPT1(M).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 51

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 52 Assessment Minimization Measure #85. 53 Fill-in #1 is the Washington city nearest to the 54 project location. 55


1 1-07.5(6).OPT1(N).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 2

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 3 Assessment Minimization Measure #86. 4 Fill-in #1 is the Washington city nearest to the 5 project location. 6

7 1-07.5(6).OPT1(O).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 8


11 1-07.5(6).OPT1(P).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 12

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 13 Assessment Minimization Measure #93. 14 Fill-in #1 is the type of visual or noisy work that is 15 not allowed. 16 Fill-in #2 is the Washington city nearest to the 17 project location. 18 (2 fill-ins) 19

20 1-07.5(6).OPT2.GR1 Payment 21


24 1-07.6.GR1 Permits and Licenses 25



1-07.6.OPT1.FR1 Permits and Licenses 30 (January 2, 2018) 31 An Environmental Commitment Meeting is expected as 32 outlined in Division 4 of the Plans Preparation Manual. 33 34 *This GSP requires editing the data located in the permit 35 table located at: 36 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/projectdev/En37 vironmentalDocumentation/1-07.6.OPT2.FR1_Table.doc, 38 copying and pasting the revised table inside this fill-in area. 39 This needs to be edited prior to insertion and final printing 40 to delete all permits that are not required for the project and 41 insert additional permits not part of the original table. All 42 permits will be attached as an Appendix. Include the 43 Department of Ecology permit coverage letter with the 44 CSWGP. If using a Nationwide Permit, attach the most 45 recent U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit 46 Verification Letter, conditions, and permit drawings. 47 48 (1 fill-in) 49 50

1-07.6.OPT3.GB1 United States Coast Guard 51 Must use once preceding any of the following: 52

53 1-07.6.OPT3(A).FB1 (January 2, 2018) 54


Use in projects over navigable waters when the Coast 1 Guard is involved. 2 (2 fill-ins) 3 4

1-07.6.OPT3(B).GB1 United States Coast Guard 5 (April 2, 2012) 6 Use in all projects involving bridge work, including 7 painting, in or near the navigable portion of a waterway 8 when 1-07.6.OPT3(A).FB1 is not used. 9

10 1-07.7.GR1 Load Limits 11



1-07.7.OPT1.GR1 (March 13, 1995) 16 Use in projects where all existing roadways are subject to 17 major reconstruction or are to be abandoned or replaced 18 under this project. 19

20 1-07.7.OPT2.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 21

Use in projects where some, but not all, of the existing 22 roadways are subject to major reconstruction, or are to be 23 abandoned or replaced under this project. 24 (1 fill-in) 25

26 1-07.7.OPT3.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 27

Use when WSDOT provides a materials source and roads 28 other than State highways are designated as the haul 29 route. 30 (4 fill-ins) 31

32 1-07.7.OPT4.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 33

Use with 1-07.7.OPT3.FR1 when the agreement 34 stipulates additional requirements. 35 (1 fill-in) 36

37 1-07.7.OPT5.GR1 (March 13, 1995) 38

Use in all projects where WSDOT provides a source of 39 materials for part or all required materials. 40 41

1-07.7.OPT6.GR1 (March 13, 1995) 42 Use in projects when no source of materials is provided. 43 44

1-07.9.GR1 Wages 45 46

1-07.9(1).GR1 General 47 48


51 1-07.9(1).OPT1.GR1 (January 9, 2019) 52

Use in all Federal Aid projects consisting of highway 53 construction and/or landscaping. 54 55


For the selection and application of multiple wage 1 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 2 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 3 at: 4 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-5 131.pdf. 6 7

1-07.9(1).OPT2.FR1 (January 9, 2019) 8 Use in Federal Aid projects consisting of both highway 9 and building construction. 10 (1 fill-in) 11 12 For the selection and application of multiple wage 13 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 14 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 15 at: 16 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-17 131.pdf. 18

19 1-07.9(1).OPT3.FR1 (May 11, 2010) 20

Use in Federal Aid projects consisting of only building 21 construction. 22 (1 fill-in) 23 24 For the selection and application of multiple wage 25 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 26 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 27 at: 28 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-29 131.pdf. 30

31 1-07.9(1).OPT4.GR1 Application of Wage Rates For The 32

Occupation Of Landscape Construction 33 (April 2, 2007) 34 Use in Federal Aid projects that include wage rates for 35 the occupation Landscape Construction. This would be 36 projects with seeding and fertilizing, or landscape work. 37 38

1-07.9(1).OPT5.FR1 (January 9, 2019) 39 Use in all Federal Aid project consisting of both 40 highway and heavy construction. 41 (1 fill-in) 42 43 For the selection and application of multiple wage 44 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 45 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 46 at: 47 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-48 131.pdf. 49 50

1-07.9(1).OPT6.FR1 (January 9, 2019) 51 Use in all Federal Aid projects consisting of highway, 52 heavy, and building construction. 53 (2 fill-ins) 54

55


For the selection and application of multiple wage 1 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 2 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 3 at: 4 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-5 131.pdf. 6 7

1-07.9(3).GR1 Apprentices 8 9


12 1-07.9(3).OPT1.GR1 Apprentice Utilization 13

(January 2, 2018) 14 Use only on projects advertised by the Washington 15 State Department of Transportation. Use in projects 16 with an Engineer’s estimate of $3 million and greater. 17 18

1-07.11.GR1 Requirements for Nondiscrimination 19 20


23 1-07.11.OPT1.GR1 Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure 24

Equal Employment Opportunity 25 (April 2, 2018) 26 Use in Federal Aid projects exceeding $10,000 in contract 27 cost. 28

29 1-07.11.OPT2.GR1 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) 30

Participation 31 (April 3, 2018) 32 REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING TO "No DBE Goals" 33 Use on all Federal Aid projects unless 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1 34 is used. The “No DBE Goals” is to be furnished or verified 35 by the Office of Equal Opportunity. 36 Must use with 1-07.11.OPT6.GR1 37

38 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business 39

Enterprise (UDBE) Participation. 40 (April 3, 2018) 41 Requires a CONDITION-OF-AWARD GOAL 42 Use in selected Federal Aid projects with UDBE Condition 43 of Award (COA) goals. The final COA UDBE Goal is to be 44 furnished or verified by the Office of Equal Opportunity. 45 Use of Underutilized Disadvantaged Business 46 Enterprise Utilization Certification (DOT Form 272 47 056U) and use of Underutilized Disadvantaged 48 Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Document 49 (DOT Form 422-031U) is required in the proposal. 50 Must use with 1-02.6.OPT10.GR1 and 1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 51 (1 fill-in) The fill-in shall be one of the following formats: 52 53 ___ percent (___%) of the contract total; or 54 ___ dollars for COA UDBE goals 55


Do not use in projects with Federal Transit Administration 1 (FTA) funding, or where FTA is the lead funding agency 2 (use 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1 instead). 3 Do not use with 1-07.11.OPT6.GR1 or 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1. 4 s 5

1-07.11.OPT4.FR1 Special Training Provisions 6 (April 3, 2017) 7 Use in all Federal Aid projects with more than 50 working 8 days that contain Training (Obtain Training Decision & Fill-9 in from OEO office). 10 (1 fill-in) 11 12 Note: Fill-in is Total Hours. 13 14

1-07.11.OPT5.GR1 Voluntary Minority, Small, Veteran and Women's Business 15 Enterprise (MSVWBE) Participation 16 (January 7, 2019) 17 Use in all State funded (100%) projects with an estimated 18 cost of $250,000 or more. 19 20

1-07.11.OPT6.GR1 Small Business Enterprise (SBE) 21 “Voluntary Goal” Participation 22 (June 1, 2017) 23 This provision requires participation in the Small Business 24 Enterprise program and must be used on all Federal Aid 25 projects that require the Disadvantaged Business 26 Enterprise (DBE) “No Goal”. 27 Do not use with 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1. 28 Must use with 1-07.11.OPT2.GR1 29

30 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1 Disadvantaged Business 31

Enterprise (DBE) Condition of Award Participation. 32 (June 1, 2017) 33 Requires a CONDITION-OF-AWARD GOAL 34 Use in projects with Federal Transit Administration (FTA) 35 funding, or where FTA is the lead funding agency, and the 36 project contains DBE Condition of Award (COA) goals. The 37 final COA DBE Goal is to be furnished or verified by the 38 Office of Equal Opportunity. 39 Use of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 40 Certification (DOT Form 272 056) and use of 41 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written 42 Confirmation Document (DOT Form 422-031) is required 43 in the proposal. 44 Must use with 1-02.6.OPT1.GR1, 1-02.9.OPT2.GR1 and 1-45 02.13.OPT1.GR1. 46 (1 fill-in) The fill-in shall be one of the following formats: 47 48 ___ percent (___%) of the contract total for COA DBE 49 goals; or 50 ___ dollars for COA DBE goals 51 Do not use with 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1 or 1-07.11.OPT6.GR1. 52

53 1-07.12.GR1 Federal Agency Inspection 54

55



3 1-07.12.OPT1.GR1 (January 25, 2016) 4

Use in all Federal Aid projects. 5 6

1-07.12.OPT2.FR1 Indian Preference And Tribal Ordinances 7 (August 1, 2011) 8 Use in projects with any portion of the project on an Indian 9 reservation. 10 (3 fill-ins) ($$1$$ is the Tribe or Reservation; $$2$$ is the 11 Group(s) as shown on the Summary of Quantities where 12 Work is performed on Tribal Lands, $$3$$ is the Tribal 13 representative, telephone and address.) 14

15 1-07.13.GR1 Contractor's Responsibility for Work 16

17 1-07.13(4).GR1 Repair of Damage 18



1-07.13(4).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 23 At the Region's discretion, include in projects when the 24 use of "Reimbursement for Third Party Damage" is 25 NOT desired and the Region wants to set up another 26 method of reimbursement for third party damages. 27

28 1-07.16.GR1 Protection and Restoration of Property 29 30

1-07.16(2).GR1 Vegetation Protection and Restoration 31 32


35 1-07.16(2).OPT1.GR1 (August 2, 2010) 36

Use in projects to specify preservation of existing 37 desirable vegetation. 38

39 1-07.16(4).GR1 Archaeological and Historical Objects 40



1-07.16(4).OPT1.GR1 (December 6, 2004) 45 Use in projects when reconnaissance studies indicate 46 that there is the probability of finding cultural remains 47 within the project limits which will require monitoring the 48 project area during clearing, grubbing or excavation 49 operations. Requires a pay item. 50

51 1-07.17.GR1 Utilities and Similar Facilities 52




1 1-07.17.OPT1.FR1 (April 2, 2007) 2

Use in projects where there are utilities within the R/W that 3 will not be adjusted, replaced or constructed by the utility 4 owner or its contractor during the prosecution of the work. 5 (1 fill-in) 6

7 (May use with 1-07.17.OPT2.FR1 if utilities other than 8 those described in this provision will be adjusted, replaced 9 or constructed by the utility owner during the prosecution of 10 the work.) 11

12 1-07.17.OPT2.FR1 (April 2, 2007) 13

Use in projects where there are utilities within the R/W and 14 those utilities will be adjusted, relocated or replaced by the 15 utility owner or its contractor during the performance of the 16 contract, or when the utility owner or its contractor will 17 construct new utilities within the R/W during the 18 performance of the contract. 19 20 (3 fill-ins) ($$1$$ is a description and location of the work 21 the each utility owner or its contractor will complete, and 22 the duration of that work or anticipated date of completion 23 by each utility or its contractor. $$2$$ is the name of the 24 utility company or companies, contact person, address, 25 telephone number and e-mail address or other contact 26 information as required to enable the Contractor to identify 27 and contact each utility performing work during the life of 28 the contract. $$3$$ is a description of any additional 29 requirements that the contractor must perform in order to 30 coordinate with the utility owner or its contractor, such as 31 advance notifications to be provided to the utility for staged 32 work. 33 34 (Use with 1-07.17.OPT1.FR1 if other utilities exist within 35 the R/W that will not be adjusted, relocated or replaced by 36 the utility owner.) 37

38 1-07.18.GR1 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance 39 40

1-07.18.INST1.GR1 (Item No. 1 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 41 is revised to read) 42 Must use once preceding any of the following: 43

44 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 Owners and Contractors Protective Insurance 45

(January 3, 2011) 46 Use in projects when the Engineer's estimate is in excess 47 of $10 million or in projects under $10 million when in the 48 Engineer's judgment the project involves higher than 49 normal risk(s). The project office should contact the Risk 50 Management & Legal Services Division, Administrative 51 Risk Manager (360) 704-6360 to discuss the project's risks. 52 The Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as 53 to the need to require the additional insurance, and if so, 54 will provide the fill in amount. This GSP should not be used 55


if the fill-in amounts match the values listed in the Standard 1 Specifications. 2 (1 fill-in) 3

4 1-07.18.OPT2.GR1 Reduced Insurance Requirement 5

(January 5, 2004) 6 Use in all projects when the Engineer's estimate is $500,000 7 or less. 8 Do not use with 1-07.18.INST1.GR1 because this GSP 9 deletes Item number 1 in the first paragraph of Section 1-10 07.18. 11 Must use with 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1. 12

13 1-07.18.INST2.GR1 (Item No. 2 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 14

is revised to read) 15 Must use once preceding any of the following: 16

17 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1 Reduced Insurance Requirement 18

(January 3, 2011) 19 Use in all projects when the Engineer's estimate is 20 $500,000 or less. 21 Must use with 1-07.18.OPT2.GR1. 22 23

1-07.18.OPT7.FR1 Commercial General Liability (CGL) 24 (April 1, 2013) 25 Use in projects when the Engineer's estimate is in excess 26 of $10 million or in projects under $10 million when in the 27 Engineer's judgment the project involves higher than 28 normal risk(s). The project office should contact the Risk 29 Management & Legal Services Division, Administrative 30 Risk Manager (360) 704-6360 to discuss the project's risks. 31 The Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as 32 to the need to require the additional insurance, and if so, 33 will provide the fill in amounts. This GSP should not be 34 used if the fill-in amounts match the values listed in the 35 Standard Specifications. 36 (2 fill-ins) 37 38


41 1-07.18.OPT11.GR1 Builders Risk Insurance 42

(January 3, 2011) 43 Use in projects when in the Engineer's judgment the 44 project facilities themselves may be exposed to significant 45 damage. The Project Office should contact the 46 Administrative Risk Manager, at the Risk Management & 47 Legal Services Division to discuss any high risk 48 components of the project regarding damage to 49 departmental owned/rented facilities or assets. The 50 Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as to 51 the need to require the additional insurance. 52 CAUTION: Using this provision will result in significantly 53 higher project costs. 54 55


1-07.18.OPT14.FR1 Pollution Liability Insurance 1 (January 7, 2013) 2 Use in all projects where in the Engineer’s judgment the 3 Work involves remediation of Environmental hazards, the 4 Contractor shall obtain Contractor’s Pollution Liability 5 Insurance. The Project Office should contact the 6 Administrative Risk Manager, at the Risk Management & 7 Legal Services Division, to discuss the Projects 8 Environmental risks to determine if Contractor’s Pollution 9 Liability Insurance (CPL) is needed. The Administrative 10 Risk Manager will advise the region as to the need to 11 require the additional insurance, and if so, provide the fill in 12 amount. 13 (1 fill in) 14 15

1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 Relations With Railroad 16 (April 1, 2013) 17 Use in projects when a railroad is involved in the contract. 18 (5 fill-ins) ($$1$$ is list of railroad companies involved in 19 contract; $$2$$ is amount of advance notice contractor is 20 required to provide the Railroad prior to working adjacent to 21 tracks; $$3$$ is name, address and telephone of the 22 railroad contact person; $$4$$ is a list of work to be 23 performed by the Railroad, other than flagging, as specified 24 in the Railroad agreement; and $$5$$ is the Appendix 25 number that lists the Right of Entry Agreement. 26 27 The design office shall contact the Environmental & 28 Engineering Program Design Office, Railroad Liaison 29 Engineer (360) 705-7271 for the fill in information. 30

31 1-07.18.OPT17.GR1 Auto And Workers Compensation Insurance -BNSF 32

(August 7, 2006) 33 Use with 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 when BNSF is involved in 34 the contract. Must include Contractor’s Right of Entry and 35 BNSF’s Contractor Requirements as appendices. Contact 36 the Environmental & Engineering Program Design Office, 37 Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-7271 for appendices. 38

39 1-07.18.OPT18.GR1 Auto And Workers Compensation Insurance -UPRR 40

(August 7, 2006) 41 Use with 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 when UPRR is involved in 42 the contract. Must include Contractor’s Right of Entry and 43 UPRR Contractor Requirements as appendices. Contact 44 the Environmental & Engineering Program Design Office, 45 Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-7271 for appendices. 46

47 1-07.23.GR1 Public Convenience and Safety 48

49 1-07.23(1).GR1 Construction Under Traffic 50



1-07.23(1).OPT1.FB1 (Traffic Restrictions) 55


(March 13, 1995) 1 Use in bridge painting projects. 2 (1 fill-in) 3

4 1-07.23(1).OPT2.GR1 (Work Zone Clear Zone) 5

(January 2, 2012) 6 Use in all projects that require traffic control unless the 7 conditions described in Design Manual Chapter 1010 8 warrant a more restrictive special provision. 9

10 1-07.23(1).OPT4.GR1 (Temporary Access Breaks) 11

(December 6, 2004) 12 Use to allow temporary access to the traveled way at 13 locations other than those defined in Standard 14 Specifications 1-07.23(1). Consider for use on all 15 limited access facilities, and on non-interstate limited 16 access. 17 18 Requires Region Approval for all projects. Requires 19 FHWA Approval for use on limited access interstate 20 facilities (allow 30 days minimum for approval). 21 Requires Headquarters State Design Engineer 22 approval for use on non-interstate limited access 23 facilities. Region Project Development shall insure that 24 site conditions meet the criteria contained in the 25 provision. Region Construction and Traffic Offices 26 should concur with projects selected for use. Contact 27 Headquarters Design, Access and Hearings Engineer 28 for guidance. 29

30 1-07.23(1).OPT5.FR1 (Lane Closure Restrictions) 31

(January 5, 2015) 32 Use in projects that prohibit lane closures prior to a 33 holiday, and where traffic volumes require that lane 34 closures are restricted. 35 (3 Fill-ins) Fill-in #1 describes the specific facility or 36 location and the hours that closures are allowed. 37 Fill-ins #2 and #3 designate the period of time over a 38 holiday weekend when closures will not be allowed. 39 40

1-07.23(1).OPT6.GR1 (Accommodating Oversized Loads through the Work 41 Zone) 42

(April 14, 2014) 43 Use in projects on the following routes: 44 45 I-5, I-405, I-90, I-82, I-182, SR 18, SR 167 and 46 US 395 (Tri-Cities to Spokane) 47 If there is the potential for the travelled way to be 48 reduced to less than 16 feet 49 50 The designer is authorized to modify this specification 51 as necessary to coordinate with the rest of the contract 52 provisions that may contradict, provided the intent of 53 the GSP is maintained. The intent being; provide a 54 clear width of at least 16 feet to accommodate a wide 55


load, provide windows of time to accommodate a wide 1 load (if possible) and/or provide notice as described. 2 Changes in this specification should be coordinated 3 with Commercial Vehicle Services. 4 5 This specification requires that the Engineer must 6 approve any proposed reduction of the travelled way to 7 a single lane with a clear width of less than 16 feet for 8 duration of 4 calendar days or more. 9

10 1-07.24.GR1 Rights of Way 11



1-07.24.OPT1.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 16 Use in projects when it is possible that the right of way will 17 not be fully acquired at the time of award. 18 (2 fill-ins) 19

20 1-08.GR1 Prosecution and Progress 21

22 1-08.1.GR1 Subcontracting 23



1-08.1.OPT1.GR1 (Subcontracting) 28 (October 12, 1998) 29 Use in all Federal Aid projects. 30

31 1-08.1.OPT2.FR1 Specialty Items 32

(March 13, 1995) 33 Use in projects when unusual work will likely have to be 34 subcontracted. Obtain concurrence from Pre-contract 35 Administration. 36 (1 fill-in) 37

38 1-08.1.OPT3.GR1 Qualifications Of Building Contractor 39

(March 13, 1995) 40 Use in road construction projects that also include building 41 construction. 42 43

1-08.3.GR1 Progress Schedule 44 45 1-08.3(1).GR1 General Requirements 46

47 1-08.3(1).INST1.GR1 (The first sentence of Section 1-08.3(1) is revised to read) 48


1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1 (August 7, 2006) 51 Include in complex or high impact projects as described 52 for GSP 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 at the discretion of the 53 Region Construction Manager. Use requires the 54 approval of the HQ Construction Office. 55


Must include with 1-08.3(2).GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1, 1 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-2 08.3(5).OPT1.GR1. 3

4 1-08.3(2).GR1 Progress Schedule Types 5



1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1 (August 1, 2011) 10 Include in complex or high impact projects as described 11 for GSP 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 at the discretion of the 12 Region Construction Manager. Use requires the 13 approval of the HQ Construction Office. 14 Must include with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 15 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 16 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1. 17


Must use once preceding any of the following: 20 21 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 (Type C Progress Schedule) 22

(August 1, 2016) 23 Include in complex or high impact projects under the 24 following conditions: 25 26 The Engineers Estimate exceeds $15 million or Time 27 for Completion exceeds 180 working days, and when 28 the project includes some or all of the following 29 characteristics: multiple traffic shifts and staged 30 construction is required; complete closure of ramps, 31 surface streets, or interstate is required; designated 32 detour routes require inter-agency agreements; state 33 supplied materials and resources require significant 34 advanced coordination; utility relocation by others is 35 dependent on staged construction; significant impacts 36 to businesses and communities require regular public 37 information reports; commitments to funding partners 38 (not legislative) for specific completion timeframes are 39 documented to exist. 40

41 Use requires concurrence of the Region Construction 42 Manager and the approval of the HQ Construction 43 Office. Must include with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 44 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 45 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT1 .GR1. 46

47 1-08.3(3).GR1 Schedule Updates 48



1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1 (January 2, 2012) 53 Include in complex or high impact projects as described 54 for GSP 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 at the discretion of the 55


Region Construction Manager. Use requires the 1 approval of the HQ Construction Office. 2 Must include with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 3 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1, 4 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1. 5

6 1-08.3(4).GR1 Measurement 7



1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1 (August 5, 2013) 12 Include in complex or high impact projects as described 13 for GSP 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 at the discretion of the 14 Region Construction Manager. Use requires the 15 approval of the HQ Construction Office. Must include 16 with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-17 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 18 1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1. 19

20 1-08.3(5).GR1 Payment 21



1-08.3(5).OPT1.FR1 (January 7, 2019) 26 Include in complex or high impact projects as described 27 for GSP 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 at the discretion of the 28 Region Construction Manager. Use requires the 29 approval of the HQ Construction Office. Must include 30 with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-31 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 32 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1. 33 34

1-08.3(5).OPT2.FR1 (January 7, 2019) 35 Use in projects that have a Type B or Type C minimum 36 bid schedule. 37 (4 fill-ins) 38 Fill-in #1 is the schedule type. 39 Fill-in #2 is the minimum bid amount. 40 Fill-in #3 is the schedule type. 41 Fill-in #4 is the schedule type. 42 43

1-08.4.GR1 Prosecution of Work 44 45

1-08.4.INST1.GR1 (The first sentence of Section 1-08.4 is revised to read) 46 Must use once preceding any of the following: 47

48 1-08.4.OPT1.FR1 (Establish starting date for roadway operations) 49

(August 3, 2015) 50 Must also use 1-08.5.OPT9.FR1. 51 At the discretion of the Region Administrator, use in short 52 term projects when a delayed start is desirable to allow the 53 Contractor some latitude in scheduling the work. 54


Recommendation by the Region Construction Office is 1 advised. 2 (1 fill-in) 3

4 1-08.4.OPT2.GR1 (Variable start: State controls start) 5

(August 7, 2006) 6 Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 7 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 8 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the 9 contract the date of that event or happening is not known. 10 Region Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is 11 required to use this provision. Must include 1-12 08.5.OPT1.FR1 and 1-08.5.OPT7.FR1. 13

14 1-08.4.OPT3.FR1 (Fixed start: State controls start) 15

(August 7, 2006) 16 Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 17 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 18 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the 19 contract the date of that event or happening is known. 20 Region Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is 21 required to use this provision. Must include 1-22 08.5.OPT2.FR1 and 1-08.5.OPT7.FR1. 23 (1 fill-in) 24

25 1-08.5.GR1 Time for Completion 26 27

1-08.5.INST1.GR1 (The third paragraph of Section 1-08.5 is revised to read) 28 Must use once preceding any of the following: 29

30 1-08.5.OPT1.FR1 (Variable start: State controls start) 31

(August 7, 2006) 32 Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 33 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 34 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the 35 contract the date of that event or happening is not known. 36 Region Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is 37 required to use this provision. Must include 38 1-08.4.OPT2.GR1 and 1-08.5.OPT7.FR1. 39 (2 fill-ins) Fill-ins are contract start times. 40 41

1-08.5.OPT2.FR1 (Fixed start: State controls start) 42 (August 7, 2006) 43 Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 44 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 45 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the 46 contract the date of that event or happening is known. 47 Region Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is 48 required to use this provision. Must include 49 1-08.4.OPT3.FR1 and 1-08.5.OPT7.FR1. 50 (1 fill-in) Fill-in is contract start time. 51




1-08.5.OPT7.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 1 (March 13, 1995) 2 Use in all projects not requiring one of the following "TIME 3 FOR COMPLETION" GSP's. 4 (1 fill-in) 5

6 1-08.5.OPT8.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 7

(March 13, 1995) 8 Must also use 1-08.9.OPT1.FR1. 9 Use in projects requiring an interim or temporary controller 10 for early use of a signal system and where an intermediate 11 physical completion time is required. 12 (2 fill-ins) 13

14 1-08.5.OPT9.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 15

(December 4, 2006) 16 Must also use 1-08.4.OPT1.FR1. 17 (2 fill-ins) 18 Fill-in #2 is the same as fill-in #1 for 1-08.4.OPT1.FR1. 19 20

1-08.5.OPT10.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 21 (March 13, 1995) 22 Use in projects with signal work and the Contracting 23 Agency furnishes the signal control equipment. 24 (1 fill-in) 25

26 1-08.5.OPT11.FR1 Incentive For Early Completion 27

(August 4, 2003) 28 Use in projects requiring an incentive for early completion. 29 Prior approval from the State Construction office is required 30 for the use of this GSP. 31 (4 fill-ins) 32 $$1$$, $$2$$ and $$4$$ are substantial or physical, $$3$$ 33 is dollar value established by the Region, must be justified 34 by road user costs. 35

36 1-08.6.GR1 Suspension of Work 37



1-08.6.OPT1.FR1 (Procurement Suspension) 42 (January 3, 2017) 43 Requires approval of HQ Construction. Use in projects 44 requiring materials that have long lead times for 45 procurement or fabrication, or proprietary/specialized 46 materials, HMA Mix Design evaluation, and procurement of 47 the materials or HMA Design evaluation is a controlling 48 factor in the time for completion. Not recommended if 49 material procurement or mix design approval are not critical 50 path items. Use 1-08.6.OPT2.FR1 instead, if project does 51 not include HMA paving. 52 53 Fill-in #1 identifies materials that are critical for timely 54 completion and require fabrication or long lead times for 55


procurement. Examples of critical materials may include: 1 Hot Mix Asphalt, landscaping (cultivated) items, permanent 2 signing, steel guardrail posts, ITS equipment, modular 3 expansion joints, bridge railing, hydraulic/electrical 4 rehabilitation components, bridge girders, steel jackets for 5 seismic retrofits, castings, single-source drain pipe, signal 6 controllers, light standards, or signal standards. 7 8 Fill-in #2 limits the duration of the suspension for 9 acquisition of critical materials. The duration of the 10 suspension should be appropriate for the work being 11 performed, and will vary according to the type of materials 12 required. 13 14 The use of a short duration may be impossible to achieve 15 or may raise the cost of the project. 16 (2 fill-ins) 17 18

1-08.6.OPT2.FR1 (Procurement Suspension 19 (January 2, 2018) 20 Use in projects requiring materials that have long lead 21 times for procurement or fabrication, or 22 proprietary/specialized materials, and procurement of the 23 materials is a controlling factor in the time for completion. 24 (1 fill-in) 25

26 1-08.9.GR1 Liquidated Damages 27



1-08.9.OPT1.FR1 (Failure to complete temporary signal system) 32 (March 13, 1995) 33 Must also use 1-08.5.OPT8.FR1. 34 Use in projects requiring an interim or temporary controller 35 for early use of a signal system and where an intermediate 36 physical completion time is required. The Region must 37 determine the appropriate liquidated damages based on 38 road user costs. 39 (1 fill-in) 40 41

1-08.9.OPT2.FR1 (Interim Completion Liquidated Damages) 42 (April 6, 2009) 43 Use in projects where an interim completion time is desired 44 (such as the completion of a stage of work, lane closure, or 45 ITS disruption), and the Region determines that user costs 46 for failure to complete the specified portion of work, as 47 calculated by the Transportation Data Office, are significant 48 enough to warrant liquidated damages. Determination of 49 the liquidated damage amount must adhere to Chapter 50 700.01 of the Plans Prep Manual. 51 (6 fill-ins) $$1$$ describes the work to be completed; 52 $$2$$ is the user cost; $$3$$ and $$4$$ is the unit of time 53 (minutes, hours or days); $$5$$ is the smallest increment 54


of time that will be measured; and $$6$$ is the contract 1 provision that specifies the completion time. 2 3

1-09.GR1 Measurement and Payment 4 5

1-09.2.GR1 Weighing Equipment 6 7

1-09.2(1).GR1 General Requirements for Weighing Equipment 8 9

1-09.2(1).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.2(1) is revised to read as follows) 10 Must use once preceding any of the following: 11

12 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1 (January 3, 2011) 13

If the Region chooses the General Special for 14 Contractor Weighing can be inserted. This provision 15 requires the Contractor to supply a scale operator. But 16 it goes much further. If this provision is used, the entire 17 weighing operation becomes an end product 18 specification. The Contractor weighs the trucks and 19 issues the tickets without oversight of the scale, the 20 operator or the operation while it’s going on. The 21 oversight occurs after the truck leaves the scale, when 22 the inspector will randomly select loads and send them 23 to an independent scale. Variations between the ticket 24 and the check weights will result in pay adjustments. 25 Must include 26 1-09.2(1).OPT7.FR1 or 1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1. Must 27 also use 1-09.2(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-28 09.2(4).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(5).OPT1.GR1 and 1-29 09.2(6).OPT1.GR1. 30



1-09.2(1).OPT7.FR1 (Designated Scale) 35 (August 6, 2001) 36 The location and quality of the check scale become 37 important. It will be up to the Region to find an 38 independent scale and arrange for its use (including an 39 agreement to pay fees). This selection will have to be 40 made jointly with the Construction PE, taking into 41 account convenience and haul time to get to the scale. 42 The decision is communicated to bidders through a 43 second GSP designating a scale location. Fill-in is 44 scale location. Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1 if 1-45 09.2(1).OPT8.GR1 isn’t used. 46 (1 fill-in). 47 48

1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1 (Installed Scale) 49 (January 3, 2011) 50 If the Region desires to use Contractor weighing and 51 cannot find a convenient scale, then an alternate to the 52 designated scale has been prepared. The GSP for 53 installed scale directs the Contractor to provide and 54 install the check scale at a designated location. This 55


provision contains a lump sum pay item for the work. 1 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1 if 1-2 09.2(1).OPT7.FR1 is not used. 3

4 1-09.2(2).GR1 Specific Requirements for Batching and Hopper Scales 5

6 1-09.2(2).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 7

This GSP deletes Section 1-09.2(2). 8 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 9

10 1-09.2(3).GR1 Specific Requirements for Platform Scales 11 12

1-09.2(3).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 13 This GSP deletes Section 1-09.2(3). 14 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 15

16 1-09.2(4).GR1 Specific Requirements for Belt Conveyor Scales 17 18

1-09.2(4).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 19 This GSP deletes Section 1-09.2(3). 20 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 21

1-09.2(5).GR1 Measurement 22 23


26 1-09.2(5).OPT1.GR1 (January 3, 2011) 27

Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 28 29

1-09.2(6).GR1 Payment 30 31


34 1-09.2(6).OPT1.GR1 (January 3, 2011) 35

Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 36 37


40 1-09.2(6).OPT7.GR1 (Installed Scale) 41

(August 7, 2017) 42 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1. 43 44

1-09.3.GR1 Scope of Payment 45 46


49 1-09.3.OPT1.FR1 Fuel Cost Adjustment 50

(August 1, 2017) 51 Use requires Region Construction Manager Approval and 52 concurrence from HQ Construction Administration. At the 53 Region’s discretion, use in projects with more than 200 54 working days that include any of the bid items that are 55


eligible for adjustment. Include an estimated amount for the 1 bid item “Fuel Cost Adjustment” in the Engineers Estimate. 2 Only the items described below are eligible for adjustment. 3 4 (2 or more fill-ins) Fill-ins are the bid items that are eligible 5 for adjustment, and fuel usage factors for those bid items. 6 7 To determine which Bid Items are eligible for Adjustment: 8 If the bid proposal contains items that fit the description of 9 the items listed below, then those bid items are eligible for 10 adjustment. 11 12

Eligible Bid Item Fuel Usage Factor 13 ____ Excavation Incl. Haul, per cubic yard 0.29 14 gal/cy 15 ____ Excavation Incl. Haul – 16 Area ____ per cubic yard 0.29 gal/cy 17 ____ Borrow Incl. Haul, per cubic yard 0.25 gal/cy 18 ____ Borrow Incl. Haul, per ton 0.17 gal/ton 19 Structure Excavation Class ___ 20 Incl. Haul, per cubic yard 0.25 gal/cy 21 Shoring or Extra Excavation Class A _____, 22 lump sum 0.04 gal/dollar 23 Crushed Surfacing ____, per ton 0.70 gal/ton 24 Crushed Surfacing ____, per cubic yard 1.02 gal/cy 25 Processing and Finishing, per mile 270 gal/mile 26 Agg. From Stockpile for BST, per cubic yard 27

0.61 gal/cy 28 Furnishing and Placing Crushed ____, 29 per cubic yard 1.02 gal/cy 30 HMA Cl. ____ PG ____, per ton 0.90 gal/ton 31 HMA for ____, per ton 0.90 gal/ton 32 Commercial HMA, per ton 0.90 gal/ton 33 Cement Concrete Pavement, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 34 Cement Concrete Pavement - 35 Including Dowels, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 36 Concrete Class ____, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 37 Commercial Concrete, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 38 Superstructure ____, lump sum 0.02 gal/dollar 39 St. Reinf. Bar, per pound 0.02 gal/Lb 40 Epoxy-Coated St. Reinf. Bar, per pound 0.02 gal/Lb 41 42 Determine the Engineers Estimate for the bid item 43 “Fuel Cost Adjustment”: 44 45 Base Fuel Cost and Estimated Monthly Fuel Cost: 46 47 Obtain the most current Monthly fuel price from the 48 U.S. Energy Information Administration website. The 49 website location and directions are as follows: 50 51

http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/ 52 On the web page, click on the West Coast less 53

California, listed under the heading U.S On-54


Highway Diesel Fuel Prices*(dollar per 1 gallon) at the lower end of the web page. 2

In the pull down box labeled Period pull down 3 Monthly 4

Click on the fuel price history found under the 5 column heading View History for the line 6 Diesel (On-Highway) – All Types. 7

8 Multiply the Base Fuel Cost by the appropriate Contract 9 Duration Factor (below) to determine the Estimated 10 Monthly Fuel Cost. 11 12 Contract Duration Contract Duration Factor

200 Working days to 1 year 1.12

1 to 2 years 1.25

2 to 3 years 1.37

3 to 4 years 1.49

4 to 5 years 1.62

13 Estimate the amount of the Adjustment: 14 Use the formulas below. 15 16 Adjustment = (Est. Monthly Fuel Cost – (1.10 x Base 17 Fuel Cost)) x Q 18 19 Where Q = ((Fuel Usage Factor) x (Total Quantity of 20 each Eligible Bid Item)) for all Eligible Bid Items. 21 22 Sample Calculation: 23 My project is 300 working days. It contains 10,000 tons 24 of HMA Cl. 1/2” PG 70-22, and 500 tons of CSBC. 25 26 HMA Cl. 1/2” PG 70-22 is Eligible for Adjustment. 27 Crushed Surfacing Base Course is Eligible for 28 Adjustment. 29 30 From U.S. Energy Information Administration website : 31 most recent Monthly Fuel Price = 3.06 dollars per 32 gallon. This monthly price becomes the Base Fuel 33 Cost. 34 35 Therefore: 36 Base Fuel Cost = 3.06 dollars/gal 37 Est. Monthly Fuel Cost = Base Fuel Cost x Contract 38 Duration Factor 39 Est. Monthly Fuel Cost = 3.06 x 1.25 = 3.825 dollars/gal 40 41 Q = (0.70 gal/ton x 500 tons) + (0.90gal/ton x 10,000 42 tons) 43 Q = 9,350 gal 44 45 Adjustment = (3.82 dollars/gal – (1.10 x 3.06 46 dollars/gal)) x 9,350 gal 47 48 Adjustment = $4,291.65= $4,300 49


1 1-09.3.OPT2.FR1 Steel Cost Adjustments 2

(August 6, 2018) 3 Use in all projects that use quantities of steel in excess of 4 50,000 pounds, including non-proprietary walls, pedestrian 5 bridges and vehicular bridges. 6 7 Fill-in #1 is the initial cost basis of steel and should use a 8 value of $0.40/lb. Any deviation from the default value of 9 $0.40/lb requires approval of the HQ Construction Office. 10 11 Fill-in #2 is a list of the bid items that are eligible for steel 12 cost adjustment. This can include bid items that are entirely 13 composed of steel (e.g., Steel Reinforcing Bar for Bridge) 14 and can also include lump sum items that use significant 15 quantities of steel (e.g., Superstructure, Lump Sum). 16 Contact the HQ Strategic Analysis and Estimating Unit for 17 assistance preparing the Engineer’s Estimate for the bid 18 item "Steel Cost Adjustment." 19 (2 fill-ins) 20 21

1-09.8.GR1 Payment for Material On Hand 22 23

1-09.8.INST1.GR1 (The last paragraph of Section 1-09.8 is revised to read) 24 Must use once preceding any of the following: 25

26 1-09.8.OPT1.GR1 (August 3, 2009) 27

Use in projects that are over $2 million and have more than 28 120 working days. 29 30

1-09.9.GR1 Payments 31 32


35 1-09.9.OPT1.FB1 (March 13, 1995) 36

Use when items are designated for payment by proposal 37 quantity. Must be used only for retaining walls and bridge 38 substructure items for steel reinforcing bars, epoxy-coated 39 steel reinforcing bars, and concrete, except for shafts and 40 seals. 41 (1 fill-in) 42 43

1-09.9(1).GR1 Retainage 44 45

1-09.9(1).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.9(1) including title is deleted and replaced 46 with the following) 47 Must use once preceding any of the following: 48 49

1-09.9(1).OPT1.GR1 (Vacant) 50 (June 27, 2011) 51 Use in all Federal Aid projects. 52

53 1-09.11.GR1 Disputes and Claims 54 55


1-09.11.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.11 is revised to read) 1 Must use once preceding any of the following: 2 3

1-09.11.OPT1.GR1 (August 2, 2010) 4 Establishes a Disputes Review Board (DRB) at Contract 5 Execution time Use in all projects with an Engineer’s 6 Estimate of $10 million and greater. At Region request and 7 with HQ Construction Office approval, may be used in 8 projects with lesser cost where the project complexity, 9 scope of work, or project conditions cause the formation of 10 a DRB at contract execution to be desired..Must use with 11 1-09.11(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.11(1)A.OPT1.GR1 and GR1, 12 0911(1)B.OPT1.GR1. 13

14 1-09.11(1).GR1 Disputes Review Board 15 16

1-09.11(1).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.11(1) is deleted and 17 replaced with the following) 18 Must use once preceding any of the following: 19

20 1-09.11(1).OPT1.GR1 (August 2, 2010) 21

Establishes a Disputes Review Board (DRB) at 22 Contract Execution time. Use in all projects with an 23 Engineer’s Estimate of $10 million and greater. At 24 Region request and with HQ Construction Office 25 approval, may be used in projects with lesser cost 26 where the project complexity, scope of work, or project 27 conditions cause the formation of a DRB at contract 28 execution to be desired.. Must use with 1-29 09.11(1)A.OPT1.GR1 and 1-09.11(1)B.OPT1.GR1. 30 Must also use Scope of Work Appendix located at: 31 http://wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/ProjectDev/GS32 PsPDF/1-09.11(1).Appendix.pdf 33

34 1-09.11(1)A.GR1 Disputes Review Board Membership 35 36

1-09.11(1)A.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.11(1)A is deleted and 37 replaced with the following) 38 Must use once preceding any of the following: 39

40 1-09.11(1)A.OPT1.GR1 (April 4, 2011) 41

Establishes a Disputes Review Board (DRB) at 42 Contract Execution time. Use in all projects with 43 an Engineer’s Estimate of $10 million and greater. 44 At Region request and with HQ Construction 45 Office approval, may be used in projects with 46 lesser cost where the project complexity, scope of 47 work, or project conditions cause the formation of 48 a DRB at contract execution to be desired.. Must 49 use with 1-09.11(1).OPT1.GR1 and 1-50 09.11(1)B.OPT1.GR1. 51 52

1-09.11(1)B.GR1 Disputes Review Board Procedures 53 54 1-09.11(1)B.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.11(1)B is deleted and 55


replaced with the following) 1 Must use once preceding any of the following: 2

3 1-09.11(1)B.OPT1.GR1 (Disputes Review Board Procedures) 4

(August 2, 2010) 5 Establishes a Disputes Review Board (DRB) at 6 Contract Execution time. Use in all projects with 7 an Engineer’s Estimate of $10 million and greater. 8 At Region request and with HQ Construction 9 Office approval, may be used in projects with 10 lesser cost where the project complexity, scope of 11 work, or project conditions cause the formation of 12 a DRB at contract execution to be desired.. Must 13 use with 1-09.11(1).OPT1.GR1 and 1-14 09.11(1)A.OPT1.GR1. 15

16 1-10.GR1 Temporary Traffic Control 17

18 1-10.1.GR1 General 19 20


23 1-10.1.OPT1.FR1 (Agency-Provided Traffic Control Resources) 24

(April 1, 2013) 25 Use on projects where the Region will be providing some 26 labor, equipment or material resource to the Contractor. 27 Typically will include signs, posts, pilot car drivers, WSP 28 officers, etc. The decision to provide resources and the use 29 of this provision requires the approval of the Region 30 Construction Manager. 31

32 The first fill-in is a detailed list of the resources to be 33 provided. Include a description of the item, the quantity (if 34 appropriate), its location and any special instructions to the 35 Contractor for acquiring the item. Include a reference to the 36 description of work provision where the resource is to be 37 applied. The second fill-in is the number of working days 38 you want the Contractor to notify the Engineer before each 39 duration of use of the resources. 40

41 If the fill-in list includes providing any law enforcement 42 organization for traffic control duties, must also use 43 1-10.1.OPT2.FR1. 44 (2 fill-ins) 45

46 1-10.1.OPT2.FR1 (Agency-Provided Arranged Law Enforcement) 47

(August 2, 2004April 1, 2019) 48 Use in projects where the Region has decided to provide 49 arrange for law enforcement Washington State Patrol 50 personnel to participate in the Contractor’s traffic control 51 activities. 52 53 Fill-in is a list of the specific duties of the law enforcement 54 personnel. 55


Must use with 1-10.1.OPT1.FR1. 1 (1 fill-in) 2

3 1-10.1(1).GR1 Materials 4



1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 9 (April 7, 2014) 10 Use in projects utilizing the Automated Flagger 11 Assistance Devices. Use of this provision requires the 12 approval of the Region Construction Manager or 13 designee. 14 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-15 10.4(2).OPT2.GR1, and 1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 16 17

1-10.2.GR1 Traffic Control Management 18 19

1-10.2(1).GR1 General 20 21


24 1-10.2(1).OPT1.GR1 (Acceptable TCS Training) 25

(January 3, 2017) 26 Include in all projects that include the bid item Traffic 27 Control Supervisor, or include the bid item Project 28 Temporary Traffic Control. 29

30 1-10.2(1).OPT2.GR1 (Traffic Control Supervisor) 31

(January 5, 2015) 32 May be used on projects with temporary traffic control 33 where a greater experience level is desired for the 34 primary Traffic Control Supervisor. Typical projects 35 where use of the GSP would be considered may have 36 complex traffic control plans, increased risk of worker 37 safety, or impacts to the public. 38

39 1-10.3.GR1 Traffic Control Labor, Procedures and Devices 40

41 1-10.3(3).GR1 Traffic Control Devices 42



1-10.3(3).OPT1.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 47 (April 7, 2014) 48 Use in projects to include the Automated Flagger 49 Assistance Devices (AFAD). Use of this provision 50 requires the approval of the Region Construction 51 Manager or designee. 52 Must use with 1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-53 10.4(2).OPT2.GR1, and 1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 54

55


1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 1 (January 2, 2018) 2 Consider use on freeway projects when traffic will be 3 reduced to a single lane with temporary traffic control 4 and workers will be present in close proximity behind 5 channelization devices. Consider a regulatory speed 6 limit reduction when the single lane of traffic will be 7 shifted onto the shoulder away from the work area. The 8 Region Traffic Engineer will need to approve the speed 9 limit reduction. 10 Must use with 1-10.3(3)(9-35).OPT1.GR1, 1-11 10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1, and 1-12 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 13

14 1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).GR1 (Section 9-35.8 is revised to read) 15


1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).OPT1.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 18 (April 21, 20182019) 19 Use on projects that will be utilizing Radar Speed 20 Display Signs. The Region Traffic Engineer will need to 21 approve the speed limit reduction. 22 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-23 10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1, and 1-24 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 25

26 1-10.4.GR1 Measurement 27

One of these three GSPs must be included in every project with 28 traffic control: 1-10.4(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-29 10.4(3).OPT1.FR1. 30

31 1-10.4(1).GR1 Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items) 32 33


36 1-10.4(1).OPT1.GR1 (Total Project Lump Sum Payment) 37

(August 2, 2004) 38 Use on projects where there will be only one item for all 39 temporary traffic control in the bid proposal. Lump sum 40 traffic control requires the establishment of a lump sum 41 item and the deletion of all other standard temporary 42 traffic control items. 43

44 This method of payment may be used any project with 45 the approval of the Region Construction Manager or 46 designee. It is not recommended for projects with 47 traffic control costs that are difficult to determine as the 48 bidder must have a reasonable opportunity to predict 49 the necessary temporary traffic control measures and 50 prepare a responsible estimate. 51 52 Do not use with 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1 or 53 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1. 54

55


1-10.4(2).GR1 Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals 1 2


5 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1 (Standard Items) 6

(August 2, 2004) 7 Use on projects that will be utilizing the Traffic Control 8 Bid items referenced in the provisions. While there may 9 be lump sum Bid items within that list, this is not a total-10 project lump sum bid. 11 12 Do not use with 1-10.4(1).OPT1.GR1 or 13 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1. 14 15

1-10.4(2).OPT2.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 16 (April 7, 2014) 17 Use on projects that will be utilizing Automated Flagger 18 Assistance Devices. Use of this provision requires the 19 approval of the Region Construction Manager or 20 designee. 21 Must use with 1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-22 10.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 23 24

1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 25 (January 2, 2018) 26 Use on projects that will be utilizing Radar Speed 27 Display Signs. The Region Traffic Engineer will need to 28 approve the speed limit reduction. 29 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-10.3(3)(9-30 35).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1, and 1-31 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 32

33 1-10.4(2).INST2.GR1 (The sixth bullet of the third paragraph in Section 1-10.4(2) 34

is revised to read) 35 Must use once preceding any of the following: 36

37 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Sign) 38

(January 2, 2018) 39 Use on projects that will be utilizing Radar Speed 40 Display Signs. The Region Traffic Engineer will need to 41 approve the speed limit reduction. 42 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-10.3(3)(9-43 35).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, and 1-44 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 45

46 1-10.4(3).GR1 Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control 47 48


51 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1 (Project Lump Sum) 52

(August 2, 2004) 53 Use on projects that will be total project lump sum 54 except that some other traffic control Bid items will be 55


utilized on the project. Use of this provision requires the 1 approval of the Region Construction Manager or 2 designee. 3

4 This method of payment might be applied to a job that 5 would be total project lump sum except that some part 6 of the work is not readily predictable. The need for 7 Flaggers might be unclear or there could be an 8 indeterminate future need for public information utilizing 9 Portable Changeable Message Signs. 10 11 The fill-in for this provision is a list of the traffic control 12 Bid items that are included according to Sections 1-13 10.4(3) and 1-10.5(3). Do not use with 1-14 10.4(1).OPT1.GR1 or 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1. 15 (1 fill-in) 16

17 1-10.5.GR1 Payment 18

19 1-10.5(2).GR1 Item Bids with Lump Sum for Incidentals 20



1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 25 (April 7, 2014) 26 Use in projects utilizing Automated Flagger Assistance 27 Devices. Use of this provision requires the approval of 28 the Region Construction Manager or designee. 29 Must use with 1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-30 10.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 1-10.4(2).OPT2.GR1. 31

32 1-10.5(2).OPT2.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 33

(January 2, 2018) 34 Use in projects utilizing Radar Speed Display Signs. 35 The Region Traffic Engineer will need to approve the 36 speed limit reduction. 37 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-10.3(3)(9-38 35).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, and 1-39 10.4(2).OPT4.GR1. 40 41

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

General Special Provisions Division 1-07 Page 1 April 1, 2019

1-07.GR1 1

Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public 2 3 1-07.1.GR1 4

Laws to be Observed 5 6 1-07.1.INST1.GR1 7 Section 1-07.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-07.1.OPT1.GR1 10

(March 25, 2009) 11 American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA) Employment Report 12 The Contractor shall submit monthly reports of the number of employees actively 13 working on this project for the Contractor and all Subcontractors of every tier. The 14 reports shall include all employees actively working on this project at the jobsite, in the 15 project office, in the home office, or teleworking from a home or other alternative office 16 location; and all engineering personnel, inspectors, sampling and testing technicians, 17 and lab technicians actively performing work directly in support of this project (excluding 18 suppliers) during the reporting month. 19 20 The report shall be prepared using Form FHWA-1589 and submitted monthly to the 21 Engineer. The initial report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 30-days of 22 execution. Subsequent reports shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than 10-days 23 after the end of each report month. 24 25 Failure by the Contractor to submit ARRA Employment Reports for the Contractor and 26 all Subcontractors of every tier shall be reason for withholding all progress payments 27 until reports are received. The cost of preparing and submitting ARRA Employment 28 Reports is incidental to the Contract. The Contractor shall include all related costs in the 29 unit Bid prices of the Contract. 30

31 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 32

(January 5, 2004) 33 Lead Health Protection Program 34 Structural and non-structural materials located at the project site *** $$1$$ *** contain 35 lead-based products. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and health 36 of all on-site workers and compliant with Washington Administrative Code (WAC 296-37 155-176). The Contractors Lead Health Protection Program shall be sent to the 38 Contracting Agency at least 2 weeks prior to the Contractor beginning work involving 39 exposure to lead contamination. The Contractor shall communicate with the Engineer to 40 ensure a coordinated effort for providing and maintaining a safe worksite for both the 41 Contracting Agency’s and Contractor’s workers. 42 43 Construction Requirements 44 The Contractor shall be responsible for the containment measures required to provide 45 and maintain a safe and healthful jobsite for the duration of the project in accordance 46 with all applicable laws and this Special Provision. 47 48 Payment 49 All costs to comply with this Special Provision for the Lead Health Protection laws and 50 regulations are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in related items 51 of work. 52


1 1-07.1.OPT3.FR1 2

(April 3, 2006) 3 Confined Space 4 Confined spaces are known to exist at the following locations: 5

6 *** $$1$$ *** 7

8 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and health of all on-site workers 9 and compliant with Washington Administrative Code (WAC 296-809). 10 11 The Contractor shall prepare and implement a confined space program for each of the 12 confined spaces identified above. The Contractors Confined Space program shall be 13 sent to the Contracting Agency at least 30 days prior to the Contractor beginning work 14 in or adjacent to the confined space. No work shall be performed in or adjacent to the 15 confined space until the plan is submitted to the Engineer as required. The Contractor 16 shall communicate with the Engineer to ensure a coordinated effort for providing and 17 maintaining a safe worksite for both the Contracting Agency’s and Contractor’s workers 18 when working in or near a confined space. 19 20 All costs to prepare and implement the confined space program shall be included in the 21 bid prices for the various items associated with the confined space work. 22

23 1-07.3.GR1 24

Forest Protection and Merchantable Timber Requirements 25 26 1-07.3.INST1.GR1 27 Section 1-07.3 is supplemented with the following: 28 29 1-07.3.OPT1.GR1 30

(August 2, 2004) 31 The Forest Service Provisions, included in the Appendix to these Special Provisions, 32 are made a part of this contract. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 33 these Forest Service provisions at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. 34

35 1-07.3(2).GR1 36

Merchantable Timber Requirements 37 38 1-07.3(2).INST1.GR1 39

Section 1-07.3(2) is supplemented with the following: 40 41 1-07.3(2).OPT1.GR1 42

(April 7, 2008) 43 This project contains merchantable timber. 44

45 Export Restrictions - DOT Form 410-100, Purchaser Certification for Export 46 Restricted Timber, will be included when the contract is sent to the Contractor for 47 execution. The form shall be completed and signed by the Contractor. The 48 Contractor shall send the original signed form and one copy of the signed form 49 directly to the Washington State Department of Revenue at the address on the 50 form. The Contractor shall send one signed copy along with the other documents 51 required by Section 1-03.3 to the Contracting Agency with the executed contract. 52


1 State Tax Requirements - It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to pay to the 2 State Department of Revenue all taxes on harvested timber. 3

4 1-07.4.GR1 5

Sanitation 6 7 1-07.4(2).GR1 8

Health Hazards 9 10 1-07.4(2).INST1.GR1 11

Section 1-07.4(2) is revised to read: 12 13 1-07.4(2).OPT1.FR1 14

(August 7, 2017) 15 This project site is known to be occupied by transients and therefore contains 16 biological hazards and associated physical hazards. These may include, but not be 17 limited to violent and dangerous individuals, hypodermic needles, garbage, broken 18 glass, human and animal excrement, drug paraphernalia, and other hazards. 19 20 The Contractor shall take precautions and perform any necessary Work required to 21 provide and maintain a safe and healthful jobsite for all workers and the public for 22 the duration of the project in accordance with all applicable laws and contract 23 requirements. 24 25 The Contractor shall ensure that the public, including persons who may be non-26 English speaking or those who may not be able to recognize potential safety and 27 health hazards within the project area, are not harmed by the Contractors activities. 28 29 Nothing required by this Specification shall operate as a waiver of the Contractor’s 30 responsibility for taking all steps necessary to ensure the safety of the public under 31 Section 1-07.23 or responsibility for liability and damages under Section 1-07.14 or 32 for any other responsibility under the Contract or as may be required by law. 33 34

Health and Safety Plan 35 The Contractor shall prepare a written Health and Safety Plan. The plan shall 36 be prepared under the supervision of a certified industrial hygienist and shall 37 incorporate all required County, State, and Federal health and safety 38 provisions. The plan shall include requirements of the Federal Occupational 39 Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), all amendments, and all other 40 applicable health regulations. 41 42 Preparation of the Health and Safety Plan shall include an initial site 43 assessment by the industrial hygienist. The plan shall break initial cleanup of 44 the project into identifiable construction areas. The plan shall be submitted to 45 the Engineer prior to commencing cleanup Work. At least one copy of the plan 46 shall be posted at the work site while cleanup Work is in progress. The 47 industrial hygienist shall perform one or more follow-up site assessments as 48 needed to approve the site following completion of the initial site cleanup. 49 50


Public Notification 1 The Contractor shall furnish and install the “No Trespassing” signs shown in 2 the Plans at locations staked by the Engineer at least 72 hours prior to 3 performing site cleanup or any potentially hazardous Work (such as clearing or 4 operating equipment). 5 6 At the same time that “No Trespassing” signs are posted, provide written 7 notification of the following to the Engineer and to the chief law enforcement 8 officer of the local governmental entity where the Work will occur: 9 10

1. The precise location of each area that is posted “No Trespassing”; 11 12 2. The date and time that each site was posted “No Trespassing”; 13 14 3. The date, time, description and duration of the Work to be performed 15

at each site. 16 17

At least 72 hours prior to performing site cleanup in Work areas containing 18 encampments (such as tents, makeshift dwellings, sleeping sites, or 19 accumulations of personal property that are not refuse), the Contractor shall 20 post a notification at each encampment area. Each notice shall: 21

22 1. Be weather resistant, and written in both English and Spanish. 23 24 2. Be affixed to each dwelling or post mounted within 10-feet of each 25

encampment; 26 27 3. State the Prime Contractor’s company name as the entity that 28

performed the cleanup as required by the Washington State 29 Department of Transportation; 30

31 4. Provide the date that the notice is posted; 32 33 5. Provide date(s) and time(s) that cleanup will occur; 34 35 6. Provide the telephone number, business hours and physical address 36

of the location where stored personal property may be claimed. 37 38 7. State that personal property will be stored for 70-days from the date 39

of removal, and if unclaimed within that time, will be disposed of. 40 41

At the same time that notifications are posted at encampment areas, provide 42 written notification of the schedule to perform site cleanup to the Engineer and 43 to the following advocacy groups: 44 45

***$$1$$*** 46 47 Acceptance of signs and notifications will be based on visual inspection that 48 the sign and notifications meet these requirements. 49 50


Site Cleanup of Biological and Physical Hazards 1 An initial cleanup of the site, including all preparatory work required to make 2 the worksite sanitary and safe in accordance with applicable laws and with the 3 Contract, shall be completed to remove all individuals, encampments, and 4 personal property from areas signed “No Trespassing”, and to address all 5 biological and associated physical hazards present on the project. Necessary 6 worker training, on and off site preparations, and personal protective 7 equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to complete this Work. If 8 aggressive or violent individuals are encountered, the Contractor shall notify 9 the local law enforcement agency to assist them in clearing the Work area. 10

11 Site cleanup of individual areas identified in the Health and Safety Plan shall 12 be performed no more than 30 days in advance of performing other Work in 13 each area. 14 15 The refuse generated by the site cleanup shall become the property of the 16 Contractor and shall be removed from the project. Personal property shall be 17 handled as required by this Specification and applicable laws. 18 19 Removal, Storage and Return of Personal Property 20 Personal property may include radios, audio and video equipment, sleeping 21 bags, tents, stoves and cooking utensils, lanterns, flashlights, bed rolls, tarps, 22 foam, canvas, mats, blankets, pillows, medication, personal papers, 23 photographs, books and other reading materials, luggage, backpacks or other 24 storage containers, clothing, towels, shoes, toiletries and cosmetics, clocks 25 and watches, and eye glasses. Personal property does not include building 26 materials such as wood products, metal, or rigid plastic. 27 28 Personal property items that are not refuse, contaminated, illegal or hazardous 29 shall be removed from the Work area and stored at a location near the project 30 site for return to the property owner. Items shall be placed in large transparent 31 plastic bags and stored in a manner that protects them from adverse weather 32 and theft. Reasonable efforts shall be made to place all items from each 33 encampment into a separate bag. Each bag shall be labeled with an inventory 34 to include a brief description of the contents, a description of the location that it 35 was removed from, and the date that it was removed from the Work area. The 36 Contractor shall not open closed items of personal property unless, in its 37 determination, it is necessary to do so to protect public safety. 38 39 The Contractor shall retain the property for 70-days. 40 41 If the name and contact information of the owner of a personal property item is 42 identified on that item, then for a period of not less than 10-days after removing 43 the property from the Work area, the Contractor shall attempt to notify the 44 apparent owner of the property and make arrangements for the owner to claim 45 the property. 46 47 The Contractor shall release the property to any individual who claims 48 ownership provided they are able to establish ownership by identifying the 49 property and its approximate location. The Contractor shall maintain a record 50 of all property that is claimed. The record shall include a description of the 51 property, the date claimed, and the name of the claimant. 52


1 If personal property is not claimed within 70-days of removal from the 2 encampment, then the property shall become the property of the Contractor 3 and shall be removed from the project. 4 5 Site Preservation 6 The Contractor shall preserve the site after initial cleanup of biological and 7 physical hazards. 8 9 On a daily basis and prior to performing any Work in areas where pedestrians 10 or encampments may be present, the Contractor shall verify that the Work 11 area is cleared of all persons not associated with the project. Individuals may 12 seek shelter in dumpsters, equipment, under blankets, or other places hidden 13 from view. Individuals may be disabled, or under the influence of alcohol or 14 drugs and it should not be assumed that loud construction noise will wake 15 them. 16 17 If the worksite becomes unsanitary or unsafe due to new encampments or new 18 biological and associated physical hazards after initial cleanup is completed, 19 then the Contractor shall perform additional site assessment, additional 20 notification and additional cleanup. 21 22 The Engineer may authorize additional site preservation measures. The 23 nature and frequency of these measures will be as agreed to by the Engineer. 24 Additional site preservation measures may include the use of fencing, lighting, 25 or security, provided it is approved in advance by the Engineer. Work 26 performed without Engineer authorization will not be eligible for payment. 27

28 Measurement 29 No trespassing signs will be measured per each. 30 31 Payment 32 Payment will be made for the following bid items when they are included in the 33 proposal: 34 35

“No Trespassing Sign”, per each. 36 The unit contract price per each “No Trespassing Sign” shall be full payment 37 for all Work required to furnish, install, maintain and remove the signs. 38 39 “Health and Safety Plan”, lump sum. 40

The lump sum unit contract price for “Health and Safety Plan” shall be full 41 payment for all Work associated with the preparation and implementation of 42 the Health and Safety Plan including the initial and follow up assessment(s) for 43 initial site cleanup, worker training and personal protective equipment, and 44 providing required notifications. 45 46 "FA-Site Cleanup of Bio. And Physical Hazards”, by force account as provided 47 in Section 1-09.6. 48 49 Removal and disposal of biological and physical hazards; removal of 50 individuals and encampments; removal, storage, and return of personal 51


property; disposal of unclaimed personal property; additional site assessment, 1 notifications, worker training and personal protective equipment required after 2 the initial site cleanup is completed; and site preservation Work authorized by 3 the Engineer will be paid for by force account in accordance with Section 1-4 09.6. 5 6 For the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders, the 7 Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item “FA-Site Cleanup of 8 Bio. And Physical Hazards” in the bid proposal to become a part of the total bid 9 by the Contractor. 10

11 1-07.5.GR1 12

Environmental Regulations 13 14 1-07.5.INST1.GR1 15 Section 1-07.5 is supplemented with the following: 16 17 1-07.5.OPT1.GR1 18

(September 20, 2010) 19 Environmental Commitments 20 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 21 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the various 22 documents referenced in the Special Provision Permits and Licenses. Throughout the 23 work, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: 24

25 1-07.5.OPT1(A).GR1 26

(August 4, 2014) 27 The Contractor shall submit a written notification to the Engineer no later than 10 28 calendar days prior to beginning any ground disturbing activities *** $$1$$ ***. The 29 Contractor shall not commence any such ground disturbing activities until the 30 monitor is present. 31

32 1-07.5.OPT1(B).GR1 33

(January 7April 1, 2019) 34 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of *** $$1$$ *** calendar days 35 prior to commencing any work in environmentally sensitive areas, mitigation areas, 36 and wetland buffers. Installation of construction fencing is excluded from this notice 37 requirement. 38

39 1-07.5.OPT1(C).GR1 40

(April 1, 2019) 41 No *** $$1$$ *** is allowed within *** $$2$$ *** feet of *** $$3$$ ***. 42

43 1-07.5.OPT1(H).GR1 44

(January 7, 2013) 45 Stormwater, dewatering water, or other authorized non-stormwater discharges that 46 has come into contact with pH modifying substances such as concrete rubble, 47 concrete pours or amended soils, need to be maintained between 6.5 – 8.5 48 standard units (su). If pH exceeds 8.5 su, the Contractor shall immediately 49 discontinue work and initiate treatment to prevent discharges outside the 50 acceptable range from occurring. All neutralization methods used shall be in 51 accordance with the permit. Work may resume once treatment has been 52


implemented and pH of the stormwater or authorized non-stormwater discharge is 1 between 6.5 - 8.5 su or it can be demonstrated that high pH waters will not 2 discharge to surface waters. 3 4 Stormwater, dewatering water, and other authorized non-stormwater discharges 5 are monitored weekly for compliance with the turbidity benchmark (25 6 nephelometric turbidity units (ntu)) and the phone reporting trigger value (250 ntu) 7 by the Contracting Agency. When the turbidity benchmark is breached, the best 8 management practices (BMPs) installed on-site are not working adequately and 9 need to be adapted, maintained or more BMPs shall be installed. When the 10 turbidity phone reporting trigger value is breached, immediate action is required in 11 order to lower the turbidity to <25 ntu or to eliminate the discharge. Daily follow-up 12 discharge samples will be collected at all locations where a discharge of 250 ntu or 13 higher was collected unless the discharge was stopped or eliminated. 14

15 1-07.5.OPT1(V).GR1 16

(August 3, 2009) 17 The intentional bypass of stormwater from all or any portion of a stormwater 18 treatment system is prohibited without the approval of the Engineer. 19

20 1-07.5.OPT2.GR1 21

(August 3, 2009) 22 Payment 23 All costs to comply with this special provision for the environmental commitments and 24 requirements are incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. 25 The Contractor shall include all related costs in the associated bid prices of the contract. 26

27 1-07.5(2).GR1 28

State Departments of Fish And Wildlife 29 30 1-07.5(2).INST1.GR1 31


(April 2, 2018) 35 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 36 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the 37 Washington State Department of Fish and Wildlife. Throughout the work, the 38 Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: 39

40 1-07.5(2).OPT1(A).FR1 41

(April 2, 2018) 42 The Contractor may begin Work below the Ordinary High Water Line on *** 43 $$1$$ *** and must complete all the Work by *** $$2$$ ***. 44

45 1-07.5(2).OPT2.GR1 46

(April 2, 2018) 47 All costs to comply with this special provision are incidental to the Contract and are 48 the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall include all related costs in 49 the associated bid prices of the Contract. 50

51


1-07.5(3).INST1.GR1 1 Section 1-07.5(3) is supplemented with the following: 2

3 1-07.5(3).OPT1.GR1 4

(April 2, 2018) 5 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 6 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the 7 Washington State Department of Ecology. Throughout the work, the Contractor 8 shall comply with the following requirements: 9

10 1-07.5(3).OPT1(A).FR1 11

(August 3, 2009) 12 A mixing zone is established within which the turbidity standard is waived 13 during actual in-water work. The mixing zone is established to only temporarily 14 allow exceeding the turbidity criteria (such as a few hours or days) and is not 15 authorization to exceed the turbidity standard for the entire duration of the 16 construction. The mixing zone shall not exceed *** $$1$$ *** feet downstream 17 from the construction area. 18

19 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).FR1 20

(January 7, 2019) 21 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of *** $$1$$ *** calendar 22 days prior to commencing any work in environmentally sensitive areas, 23 mitigation areas, and wetland buffers. Installation of construction fencing is 24 excluded from this notice requirement. 25

26 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).FR1 27

(January 7, 2013April 1, 2019) 28 Stormwater, dewatering water, or other authorized non-stormwater discharges 29 that has come into contact with pH modifying substances such as concrete 30 rubble, cast concrete pours or amended soils, need to be maintained between 31 6.5 – 8.5 standard units (su). If pH exceeds 8.5 su, the Contractor shall 32 immediately discontinue work and initiate treatment to prevent discharges 33 outside the acceptable range from occurring. All neutralization methods used 34 shall be in accordance with the permit. Work may resume once treatment has 35 been implemented and pH of the stormwater or authorized non-stormwater 36 discharge is between 6.5 - 8.5 su or it can be demonstrated that high pH 37 waters will not discharge to surface waters. 38 39 Stormwater, dewatering water, and other authorized non-stormwater 40 discharges are monitored weekly for compliance with the turbidity benchmark 41 (25 nephelometric turbidity units (ntu)) and the phone reporting trigger value 42 (250 ntu) by the Contracting Agency. When the turbidity benchmark is 43 breached, the best management practices (BMPs) installed on-site are not 44 working adequately and need to be adapted, maintained or more BMPs shall 45 be installed. When the turbidity phone reporting trigger value is breached, 46 immediate action is required in order to lower the turbidity to <25 ntu or to 47 eliminate the discharge. Daily follow-up discharge samples will be collected at 48 all locations where a discharge of 250 ntu or higher was collected unless the 49 discharge was stopped or eliminated. 50

51


1-07.5(5).GR1 1 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers 2

3 1-07.5(5).INST1.GR1 4


(April 2, 2018) 8 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 9 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the U.S. Army 10 Corps of Engineers. Throughout the work, the Contractor shall comply with the 11 following requirements: 12

13 1-07.5(5).OPT1(A).GR1 14

(February 25, 2013) 15 The Contractor shall retain a copy of the most recent U.S. Army Corps of 16 Engineers Nationwide Permit Verification Letter, conditions, and permit 17 drawings on the worksite for the life of the Contract (See Special Provision 18 titled Permits and Licenses). The Contractor shall provide copies of the items 19 above listed to all Sub-Contractors involved with the authorized work prior to 20 their commencement of any work. 21

22 1-07.5(5).OPT1(B).FR1 23

(February 25, 2013) 24 Temporary fills at *** $$1$$ *** must be removed within *** $$2$$ *** calendar 25 days of beginning placement of these fills. This time period may be extended 26 with approval from the Engineer. Requests to extend must be received a 27 minimum of 45 days prior to the expiration of number of days listed above, 28 since the extension is subject to concurrence by the U.S. Army Corps of 29 Engineers. 30

31 1-07.5(5).OPT1(C).GR1 32

(February 25, 2013) 33 Temporary structures and dewatering of areas under the jurisdiction of the 34 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers must maintain normal downstream flows and 35 prevent upstream and downstream flooding to the maximum extent 36 practicable. 37

38 1-07.5(5).OPT1(D).GR1 39

(August 3, 2009) 40 Heavy equipment working in wetlands or mudflats must be placed on mats or 41 other measures taken to minimize soil disturbance as approved by the 42 Engineer. 43

44 1-07.5(5).OPT1(E).GR1 45

(February 25, 2013) 46 Any temporary fills placed must be removed in their entirety and the affected 47 areas returned to their pre-construction elevation. 48

49 1-07.5(5).OPT1(F).GR1 50

(August 3, 2009) 51


The Contractor shall dispose of all creosoted timber, creosote piling and 1 associated debris as shown in the Plans in accordance with current federal, 2 state, and local regulations and provisions, and following Best Management 3 Practices. Disposal shall be made in a landfill which meets the liner and 4 leachate standards of the Minimum Functional Standards, Chapter 173-304 5 WAC. The Contractor shall provide receipts from the disposal facility to the 6 Engineer. If the material is transported to a transfer station, the Contractor 7 shall obtain documentation indicating that final disposal will comply with the 8 standards referenced above. 9

10 1-07.5(5).OPT1(G).FR1 11

(August 4, 2014) 12 The Contractor shall submit a written notification to the Engineer no later than 13 10 calendar days prior to beginning any ground disturbing activities *** $$1$$ 14 ***. The Contractor shall not commence any such ground disturbing activities 15 until the monitor is present. 16

17 1-07.5(5).OPT2.GR1 18

(April 2, 2018) 19 All costs to comply with this special provision are incidental to the Contract and are 20 the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall include all related costs in 21 the associated bid prices of the Contract. 22

23 1-07.5(6).GR1 24

U.S. Fish/Wildlife Services and National Marine Fisheries Service 25 26 1-07.5(6).INST1.GR1 27


(April 2, 2018) 31 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 32 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the U.S. 33 Fish/Wildlife Services and the National Marine Fisheries Service. Throughout the 34 work, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: 35

36 1-07.5(6).OPT1(A).FR1 37

(August 3, 2009) 38 No Contractor staging areas will be allowed within *** $$1$$ *** feet of any 39 waters of the State including wetlands. 40

41 1-07.5(6).OPT1(B).GR1 42

(April 2, 2018) 43 The Contractor shall place temporary storage piles of erosive materials outside 44 the 100-year floodplain during the rainy season (October 1 through June 1). 45 Material that will be used within 12 hours of deposition is exempt from this 46 requirement. The Contractor shall employ best management practices to 47 prevent sediment delivery to waterbodies, wetlands, or conveyances that drain 48 to such features. 49

50 1-07.5(6).OPT1(C).FR1 51

(April 2, 2018) 52


The Contractor shall not allow temporary floating work platforms to run 1 aground. Anchors and chains shall never contact fish spawning areas in 2 freshwater or eelgrass, kelp, macro algae, or intertidal wetlands as indicated in 3 the Plans. Shading eelgrass, kelp, or macro algae beds by work platforms 4 shall not exceed *** $$1$$ *** days. 5

6 1-07.5(6).OPT1(D).GR1 7

(April 2, 2018) 8 The Contractor shall provide concrete truck chute cleanout areas to contain 9 fresh concrete and wash water. The Contractor shall dispose of the waste 10 material at a facility permitted to take such waste. 11

12 1-07.5(6).OPT1(E).GR1 13

(April 2, 2018) 14 The Contractor shall not use creosote-treated wood below the Ordinary High 15 Water Mark. 16

17 1-07.5(6).OPT1(F).GR1 18

(April 2, 2018) 19 The Contractor shall remove piles by directly pulling, using vibratory devices, 20 or by cutting the piles below ground level to minimize localized turbidity. If use 21 of a clamshell bucket is necessary due to pile breakage, turbidity curtains will 22 be employed by the Contractor. 23

24 1-07.5(6).OPT1(G).GR1 25

(April 2, 2018) 26 The Contractor shall remove piles and place them directly into a receptacle 27 that prevents sediment or other material from entering waters of the state. 28

29 1-07.5(6).OPT1(H).FR1 30

(April 2, 2018) 31 Contracting Agency staff will monitor sound pressure during in-water pile 32 driving of steel piles, including H-piles, and sheet piles. Results that exceed *** 33 $$1$$ *** will require the Contractor to adjust work methods or employ 34 additional best practices to safely proceed. 35

36 1-07.5(6).OPT1(I).FR1 37

(April 2, 2018) 38 The Contractor shall direct temporary lights for night work away from *** $$1$$ 39 ***. 40

41 1-07.5(6).OPT1(J).FR1 42

(April 2, 2018) 43 The Contractor shall conduct night Work only during the period from 2 hours 44 after sunset to 2 hours before sunrise. Setting up and taking down traffic 45 control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the following website, 46 using the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 47 48

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 49 50 1-07.5(6).OPT1(K).FR1 51

(April 2, 2018) 52


The Contractor shall conduct night Work only during the period from 1 hour 1 after sunset to 1 hour before sunrise. Setting up and taking down traffic control 2 are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the following website, using 3 the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 4 5

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 6 7 1-07.5(6).OPT1(L).FR1 8

(April 2, 2018) 9 The Contractor must cease Work 2 hours before sunrise. Setting up and taking 10 down traffic control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the 11 following website, using the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise times: 12 13

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 14 15 1-07.5(6).OPT1(M).FR1 16

(April 2, 2018) 17 When night and day time Work is required, the Contractor shall not perform 18 Work from 1 hour before sunrise to 2 hours after sunrise and no Work from 2 19 hours before sunset to 1 hour after sunset. Setting up and taking down traffic 20 control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the following website, 21 using the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 22 23

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 24 25 1-07.5(6).OPT1(N).FR1 26

(April 2, 2018) 27 When night and day time Work is required, the Contractor shall not perform 28 Work from 1 hour before sunrise to 2 hours after sunrise. Setting up and taking 29 down traffic control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the 30 following website, using the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 31 32

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 33 34 1-07.5(6).OPT1(O).GR1 35

(April 2, 2018) 36 The Contractor shall develop a Type 2 Working Drawing to ensure that trash 37 and food waste is collected daily and contained in secured garbage 38 receptacles. 39

40 1-07.5(6).OPT1(P).FR1 41

(April 2, 2018) 42 Between April 1 and September 22, the Contractor *** $$1$$ *** are restricted 43 between two hours after sunrise and two hours before sunset. Setting up and 44 taking down traffic control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the 45 following website, using the City of *** $$2$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 46 47

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 48 49 1-07.6.GR1 50

Permits and Licenses 51 52


1-07.6.INST1.GR1 1 Section 1-07.6 is supplemented with the following: 2 3 1-07.6.OPT1.FR1 4

(January 2, 2018) 5 The Contracting Agency has obtained the below-listed permit(s) for this project. A copy 6 of the permit(s) is attached as an appendix for informational purposes. Copies of these 7 permits, including a copy of the Transfer of Coverage form, when applicable, are 8 required to be onsite at all times. 9 10 Contact with the permitting agencies, concerning the below-listed permit(s), shall be 11 made through the Engineer with the exception of when the Construction Stormwater 12 General Permit coverage is transferred to the Contractor, direct communication with the 13 Department of Ecology is allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining 14 Ecology’s approval for any Work requiring additional approvals (e.g. Request for 15 Chemical Treatment Form). The Contractor shall obtain additional permits as 16 necessary. All costs to obtain and comply with additional permits shall be included in the 17 applicable Bid items for the Work involved. 18 19 *** $$1$$ *** 20

21 1-07.6.OPT3.GB1 22

United States Coast Guard 23 24 1-07.6.OPT3(A).FB1 25

(January 2, 2018) 26 The Contracting Agency has obtained a United States Coast Guard Bridge Permit *** 27 $$1$$ *** for this project. 28 29 The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove all temporary navigation 30 lights, signs, signals, and any other warning devices required by the Coast Guard and 31 as required for public safety on all falsework, cofferdams, or other temporary structure in 32 the waterway. 33 34 The Contractor shall comply with all Coast Guard requirements inclusive of the following 35 Bridge Permit conditions: 36 37

1. The construction of falsework, cofferdams or other obstructions, if required, 38 shall be in accordance with plans submitted to and approved by the 39 Commander, 13th Coast Guard District, prior to construction of the bridge. All 40 work shall be so conducted that the free navigation of the waterway is not 41 unreasonably interfered with and the present navigable depths are not 42 impaired. Timely notice of any and all events that may affect navigation shall 43 be given to the District Commander during construction of the bridge. The 44 channel or channels through the structure shall be promptly cleared of all 45 obstructions placed therein or caused by the construction of the bridge to the 46 satisfaction of the District Commander, when in the District Commander's 47 judgment the construction work has reached a point where such action should 48 be taken, but in no case later than 90 calendar days after the bridge has been 49 opened to traffic. 50

51 2. *** $$2$$ *** 52


1 The Contractor shall notify the Coast Guard in writing, with a copy to the Engineer, of 2 the work start date at least seven calendar days before beginning any site work and 3 shall at that time designate the Contractor's authorized representative, and work phone 4 number, for coordination on matters that relate to Coast Guard approvals and 5 requirements. 6 7 The Contractor's applications for required Coast Guard construction approvals for this 8 project shall include, but not be limited to, cofferdams, falsework, temporary navigation 9 lighting, work bridges, and other obstructions. These applications shall be submitted to 10 the Coast Guard by the Contractor, with a copy to the Engineer, a minimum of 30 11 calendar days in advance of the scheduled work. A schedule of when the work is to be 12 performed and when the obstructions are to be permanently removed shall be a part of 13 the Contractor's application. 14 15 The Contractor shall provide the Coast Guard and the Engineer with prompt verbal 16 notice, followed by written notice, of any subsequent changes to this proposed 17 schedule. 18 19 A copy of all Coast Guard approvals shall be provided to the Engineer upon receipt but 20 not later than prior to beginning work on the items of work involved. 21 22 By the 20th of each month, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a schedule of the 23 work expected to be performed in the next two months. The Engineer will transmit this 24 information through the Bridge and Structures Office to the Coast Guard so that 25 interested users of the waterway can be notified. 26 27 The Coast Guard contact is: 28 29

Bridge Administrator 30 Thirteenth Coast Guard District 31 915 Second Avenue Suite 3510 32 Seattle, WA 98174-1067 33 Telephone: (206) 220-7282 34 35

All costs in connection with furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing temporary 36 navigation lights, signs, signals, or other warning devices shall be included in the 37 contract prices for the items of work involved. 38 39 All costs incurred in obtaining the required Coast Guard approvals and in complying 40 with all requirements specified herein shall be included in the contract prices for the 41 items of work involved. 42 43 All costs in connection with delays in the construction caused by the Contractor's failure 44 to obtain the necessary Coast Guard approvals shall be at the Contractor's expense. 45

46 1-07.6.OPT3(B).GB1 47

(April 2, 2012) 48 The Contractor shall comply with all United States Coast Guard requirements. 49 50


The Contractor shall contact the Coast Guard at least 30 calendar days in advance of 1 all work in or near the navigable portion of the waterway and request that a Local Notice 2 to Mariners be issued for the waterway at this site. 3 4 The Contractor shall contact the Coast Guard for requirements related to the mooring of 5 barges, placement of log booms, and all other equipment that could be a hazard to 6 waterway users. 7 8 Provisions shall be made for the removal, on 2 hours notice, of all equipment that would 9 block or partially block, the navigable portion of the waterway. 10 11 The Coast Guard contact is: 12 13

Bridge Administrator 14 Thirteenth Coast Guard District 15 915 Second Avenue Suite 3510 16 Seattle, WA 98174-1067 17 Telephone: (206) 220-7282 18 19

All costs incurred in contacting the Coast Guard and in complying with all the 20 requirements specified herein shall be included in the contract prices for the items of 21 work involved. 22 23 All costs in connection with delays in the construction caused by the Contractor's failure 24 to contact the Coast Guard shall be at the Contractor's expense. 25

26 1-07.7.GR1 27

Load Limits 28 29 1-07.7.INST1.GR1 30 Section 1-07.7 is supplemented with the following: 31 32 1-07.7.OPT1.GR1 33

(March 13, 1995) 34 Except for the load limit restrictions specified in Section 1-07.7(2), the Contractor may 35 operate vehicles which exceed the legal gross weight limitations without special permits 36 or payment of additional fees provided such vehicles are employed in the construction 37 and within the limits of this project. 38 39 Subparagraph 1 of the second paragraph of Section 1-07.7(1) is deleted. 40

41 1-07.7.OPT2.FR1 42

(March 13, 1995) 43 Except for the load limit restrictions specified in Section 1-07.7(2), and as outlined 44 below, the Contractor may operate vehicles which exceed the legal gross weight 45 limitations without special permits or payment of additional fees provided such vehicles 46 are employed in the construction and within the limits of this project. 47 48 Subparagraph 1 of the second paragraph of Section 1-07.7(1) is deleted. 49 50 The Contractor shall not operate vehicles which exceed the maximum gross weight 51 provided by law within the following areas of this project: 52


1 *** $$1$$ *** 2

3 1-07.7.OPT3.FR1 4

(March 13, 1995) 5 The State has made arrangements with *** $$1$$ *** for the Contractor's use of the *** 6 $$2$$ *** shown in the Plans as a haul route for materials coming from *** $$3$$ *** 7 Site *** $$4$$ *** and used on this project. The Contractor shall comply with all existing 8 legal restrictions. 9 10 If the Contractor selects different haul routes than those designated, the Contractor 11 shall, at the Contractor's expense, make all arrangements for the use of the haul routes. 12

13 1-07.7.OPT4.FR1 14

(March 13, 1995) 15 The Contractor shall also comply with the further restrictions imposed by the owner of 16 the roads as follows: 17 18

*** $$1$$ *** 19 20 1-07.7.OPT5.GR1 21

(March 13, 1995) 22 Whenever the Contractor obtains materials from a source other than that provided by 23 the Contracting Agency, or provides a source for materials not designated to come from 24 a source provided by the State and the location of the source necessitates hauling on 25 other than State Highways, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, make all 26 arrangements for the use of the haul routes. 27

28 1-07.7.OPT6.GR1 29

(March 13, 1995) 30 If the sources of materials provided by the Contractor necessitates hauling over roads 31 other than State Highways, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, make all 32 arrangements for the use of the haul routes. 33

34 1-07.9.GR1 35

Wages 36 37 1-07.9(1).GR1 38

General 39 40 1-07.9(1).INST1.GR1 41


(January 9, 2019) 45 The Federal wage rates incorporated in this contract have been established by the 46 Secretary of Labor under United States Department of Labor General Decision No. 47 WA190001. 48 49 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 50 activities associated with this contract. 51

52


1-07.9(1).OPT2.FR1 1 (January 9, 2019) 2 The Federal wage rates for Highway Construction incorporated in this contract 3 have been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department 4 of Labor General Decision No. WA190001. These rates are applicable to highway 5 construction. 6 7 The Federal wage rates for Building Construction incorporated in this contract have 8 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 9 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to building 10 construction. 11 12 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 13 activities associated with this contract. 14

15 1-07.9(1).OPT3.FR1 16

(May 11, 2010) 17 The Federal wage rates for Building Construction incorporated in this contract have 18 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 19 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to building 20 construction. 21 22 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 23 activities associated with this contract. 24

25 1-07.9(1).OPT4.GR1 26

(April 2, 2007) 27 Application of Wage Rates for the Occupation of Landscape Construction 28 State prevailing wage rates for public works contracts are included in this contract 29 and show a separate listing for the occupation: 30 31

Landscape Construction, which includes several different occupation 32 descriptions such as: Irrigation and Landscape Plumbers, Irrigation and 33 Landscape Power Equipment Operators, and Landscaping or Planting 34 Laborers. 35 36

In addition, federal wage rates that are included in this contract may also include 37 occupation descriptions in Federal Occupational groups for work also specifically 38 identified with landscaping such as: 39 40

Laborers with the occupation description, Landscaping or Planting, or 41 42 Power Equipment Operators with the occupation description, Mulch Seeding 43 Operator. 44 45

If Federal wage rates include one or more rates specified as applicable to 46 landscaping work, then Federal wage rates for all occupation descriptions, specific 47 or general, must be considered and compared with corresponding State wage 48 rates. The higher wage rate, either State or Federal, becomes the minimum wage 49 rate for the work performed in that occupation. 50 51


Contractors are responsible for determining the appropriate crafts necessary to 1 perform the contract work. If a classification considered necessary for performance 2 of the work is missing from the Federal Wage Determination applicable to the 3 contract, the Contractor shall initiate a request for approval of a proposed wage and 4 benefit rate. The Contractor shall prepare and submit Standard Form 1444, 5 Request for Authorization of Additional Classification and Wage Rate available at 6 http://www.wdol.gov/docs/sf1444.pdf, and submit the completed form to the 7 Engineer’s office. The presence of a classification wage on the Washington State 8 Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts does not exempt the use of 9 form 1444 for the purpose of determining a federal classification wage rate. 10

11 1-07.9(1).OPT5.FR1 12

(January 9, 2019) 13 The Federal wage rates for Highway Construction incorporated in this contract 14 have been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department 15 of Labor General Decision No. WA190001. These rates are applicable to highway 16 construction. 17 18 The Federal wage rates for Heavy Construction incorporated in this contract have 19 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 20 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to heavy 21 construction. 22 23 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 24 activities associated with this contract. 25

26 1-07.9(1).OPT6.FR1 27

(January 9, 2019) 28 The Federal wage rates for Highway Construction incorporated in this contract 29 have been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department 30 of Labor General Decision No. WA190001. These rates are applicable to highway 31 construction. 32 33 The Federal wage rates for Heavy Construction incorporated in this contract have 34 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 35 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to heavy 36 construction. 37 38 The Federal wage rates for Building Construction incorporated in this contract have 39 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 40 Labor General Decision No. *** $$2$$ ***. These rates are applicable to building 41 construction 42 43 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 44 activities associated with this contract. 45

46 1-07.9(3).GR1 47

Apprentices 48 49 1-07.9(3).INST1.GR1 50

Section 1-07.9(3) is supplemented with the following: 51 52


1-07.9(3).OPT1.GR1 1 (January 2, 2018) 2 Apprentice Utilization 3 This Contract includes an Apprentice Utilization Requirement. No less than 15 4 percent of project Labor Hours shall be performed by Apprentices. 5 6 Definitions 7 For the purposes of this specification the following definitions apply: 8 9

1. Apprentice is a person enrolled in a State-approved Apprenticeship 10 Training Program. 11

12 2. Apprentice Utilization Requirement is the Apprentice labor hours 13

expressed as a percentage of the project Labor Hours. 14 15 3. Good Faith Effort (GFE) is used if the Contractor doesn’t meet the 16

Apprentice Utilization Requirement. It describes the Contractor’s efforts to 17 meet the Apprentice Utilization Requirement including but not necessarily 18 limited to the specific steps as described elsewhere in this specification. 19

20 4. Labor Hours are the total hours performed by all workers receiving an 21

hourly wage who are directly employed upon the project including hours 22 performed by workers employed by the Contractor and all Subcontractors. 23 Labor Hours do not include hours performed by foremen, superintendents, 24 owners, and workers who are not subject to prevailing wage requirements. 25

26 5. State-approved Apprenticeship Training Program is an apprenticeship 27

training program approved by the Washington State Apprenticeship 28 Council. 29

30 Electronic Reporting 31 The Contractor shall use the application available at 32 https://RemoteApps.wsdot.wa.gov/Construction/Training/Apprenticeship/ to submit 33 the “Apprentice Utilization Plan”, “Statement of Apprentice/Journeyman 34 Participation” and to submit “Good Faith Effort” documentation. After execution of 35 the Contract, the Contractor shall send an e-mail to [email protected] 36 containing the following information: the first and last name, e-mail address, title 37 and phone number of the person that will be submitting the above documents for 38 their company. The e-mail shall include the WSDOT contract number they will be 39 reporting on. After receipt of this information by WSDOT, the Contractor will receive 40 an e-mail containing their username and password for the application and a link to 41 the application. Reporting instructions are available in the application. 42 43 Apprentice Utilization Plan 44 The Contractor shall submit an “Apprentice Utilization Plan” by filling out the 45 Apprentice Utilization Plan template in the electronic reporting application within 30 46 calendar days of execution, demonstrating how and when they intend to achieve 47 the Apprentice Utilization Requirement. The Plan shall be in sufficient detail for the 48 Engineer to track the Contractor’s progress in meeting the utilization requirements 49 and be updated and resubmitted as the Work progresses or when ordered by the 50 Engineer. 51 52

https://remoteapps.wsdot.wa.gov/Construction/Training/Apprenticeship/

mailto:[email protected]


If the Contractor is unable to demonstrate ability to meet the Apprentice Utilization 1 Requirement in their Apprentice Utilization Plan, they must submit GFE 2 documentation to the Engineer for review and comment with their Apprentice 3 Utilization Plan. The GFE shall be sent to the Engineer and also uploaded into the 4 electronic reporting application. The Contractor shall actively seek out opportunities 5 to meet the Apprentice Utilization Requirement during the construction Work. 6 7 Reporting 8 The Contractor shall submit a “Statement of Apprentice /Journeyman Participation” 9 on a monthly basis. The report shall be submitted to the Engineer by the last day of 10 the subsequent month, until the Physical Completion Date. The data reported shall 11 include the Contractor and all Subcontractors. At the Contractor’s request, the 12 Engineer may suspend this reporting requirement during periods of minimal or no 13 applicable work activities on the project. 14 15 Contacts 16 The Contractor may obtain information on State-approved Apprenticeship Training 17 Programs by contacting the Department of Labor and Industries at: 18 19

Specialty Compliance And Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P.O. Box 20 44530, Olympia, WA 98504-4530 or by phone at (360) 902-5320. 21

22 Compliance 23 In the event that the Contractor is unable to achieve the Apprentice Utilization 24 Requirement, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer GFE documentation for 25 review and approval. The GFE documentation shall be sent to the Engineer and 26 also uploaded into the electronic reporting application. The GFE documentation 27 shall be submitted after Substantial Completion but no later than 30 days after 28 Physical Completion. If GFE documentation was previously submitted as part of the 29 Apprentice Utilization Plan, it shall be updated and resubmitted after Substantial 30 Completion but no later than 30 days after Physical Completion. 31 32 If the Contractor fails to submit GFE documentation or if the Engineer does not 33 approve the GFE, the Contractor will be subject to disciplinary actions as allowed 34 under WAC 468-16-180. 35 36 Good Faith Efforts 37 The GFE shall describe in detail why the Contractor is not or was not able to attain 38 the Apprentice Utilization Requirement. The GFE documentation shall address one 39 or more of the following areas: 40 41

1. Correspondence on solicitation of Apprentices from a State-approved 42 Apprenticeship Training Program(s), and the response from the solicited 43 State-Approved Apprenticeship Training Program(s) when there is a lack 44 of availability of Apprentices. 45

46 2. Provide documentation that shows Contract requirements for TERO, 47

Special Training or Disadvantage Business Enterprise requirements affect 48 the ability to obtain Apprentice Labor Hours on the Contract. 49

50 3. Provide documentation demonstrating what efforts the Contractor has 51

taken to require Subcontractors to solicit and employ Apprentices. 52


Documentation could be posters placed on site, emphasis in subcontracts 1 about employing Apprentices, letters, memos or other correspondence 2 from Contractor to Subcontractor that put an emphasis on employing 3 Apprentices. 4

5 Contractors may receive a GFE credit for graduated Apprentice hours through the 6 end of the calendar year for all projects worked on as long as the Apprentice 7 remains continuously employed with the same Contractor they were working for 8 when they graduated. If an Apprentice graduates during employment on a project 9 of significant duration, they may be counted towards a GFE credit for up to one 10 year after their graduation or until the end of the project (whichever comes first). 11 Determination of whether or not Contract requirements were met in good faith will 12 be made by subtracting the hours from the journeyman total reported hours for the 13 project and adding them to the apprentice hour total. If the new utilization 14 percentage meets the Contract requirement, the Contractor will be reported as 15 meeting the requirement in good faith. 16 17 Payment 18 All costs incurred by the Contractor for complying with this specification shall be 19 included in the Contract prices for the Bid items of Work involved. 20

21 1-07.11.GR1 22

Requirements for Nondiscrimination 23 24 1-07.11.INST1.GR1 25 Section 1-07.11 is supplemented with the following: 26 27 1-07.11.OPT1.GR1 28

(April 2, 2018) 29 Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive 30 Order 11246) 31 32 1. The Contractor's attention is called to the Equal Opportunity Clause and the 33

Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract 34 Specifications set forth herein. 35

36 2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation set by the Office of 37

Federal Contract Compliance Programs, expressed in percentage terms for the 38 Contractor's aggregate work force in each construction craft and in each trade on 39 all construction work in the covered area, are as follows: 40

41 Women - Statewide 42

43 Timetable Goal 44

45 Until further notice 6.9% 46 Minorities - by Standard Metropolitan Statistical Area (SMSA) 47 48


Spokane, WA: 1 SMSA Counties: 2

Spokane, WA 2.8 3 WA Spokane. 4

Non-SMSA Counties 3.0 5 WA Adams; WA Asotin; WA Columbia; WA Ferry; WA Garfield; WA 6 Lincoln, WA Pend Oreille; WA Stevens; WA Whitman. 7

8 Richland, WA 9

SMSA Counties: 10 Richland Kennewick, WA 5.4 11

WA Benton; WA Franklin. 12 Non-SMSA Counties 3.6 13

WA Walla Walla. 14 15 Yakima, WA: 16

SMSA Counties: 17 Yakima, WA 9.7 18

WA Yakima. 19 Non-SMSA Counties 7.2 20

WA Chelan; WA Douglas; WA Grant; WA Kittitas; WA Okanogan. 21 22 Seattle, WA: 23

SMSA Counties: 24 Seattle Everett, WA 7.2 25

WA King; WA Snohomish. 26 Tacoma, WA 6.2 27

WA Pierce. 28 Non-SMSA Counties 6.1 29

WA Clallam; WA Grays Harbor; WA Island; WA Jefferson; WA Kitsap; 30 WA Lewis; WA Mason; WA Pacific; WA San Juan; WA Skagit; WA 31 Thurston; WA Whatcom. 32

33 Portland, OR: 34

SMSA Counties: 35 Portland, OR-WA 4.5 36

WA Clark. 37 Non-SMSA Counties 3.8 38

WA Cowlitz; WA Klickitat; WA Skamania; WA Wahkiakum. 39 40 These goals are applicable to each nonexempt Contractor’s total on-site 41 construction workforce, regardless of whether or not part of that workforce is 42 performing work on a Federal, or federally assisted project, contract, or subcontract 43 until further notice. Compliance with these goals and time tables is enforced by the 44 Office of Federal Contract compliance Programs. 45 46 The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 47 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity 48 Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set 49 forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority 50 and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the 51 length of the contract, in each construction craft and in each trade, and the 52


Contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on 1 each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from 2 Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting 3 the Contractor's goal shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and 4 the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured 5 against the total work hours performed. 6

7 3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Office of Federal Contract 8

Compliance Programs (OFCCP) within 10 working days of award of any 9 construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 or more that are Federally funded, at 10 any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The 11 notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the 12 Subcontractor; employer identification number of the Subcontractor; estimated 13 dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting and completion dates of the 14 subcontract; and the geographical area in which the contract is to be performed. 15 The notification shall be sent to: 16

17 U.S. Department of Labor 18 Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs Pacific Region 19 Attn: Regional Director 20 San Francisco Federal Building 21 90 – 7th Street, Suite 18-300 22 San Francisco, CA 94103(415) 625-7800 Phone 23 (415) 625-7799 Fax 24

25 Additional information may be found at the U.S. Department of Labor website: 26 https://www.dol.gov/ofccp/regs/compliance/preaward/cnstnote.htm 27

28 4. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the 29

Covered Area is as designated herein. 30 31 Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications 32 (Executive Order 11246) 33 34 1. As used in these specifications: 35 36

a. Covered Area means the geographical area described in the solicitation 37 from which this contract resulted; 38

39 b. Director means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance 40

Programs, United States Department of Labor, or any person to whom the 41 Director delegates authority; 42

43 c. Employer Identification Number means the Federal Social Security 44

number used on the Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U. S. 45 Treasury Department Form 941; 46

47 d. Minority includes: 48 49

(1) Black, a person having origins in any of the Black Racial Groups 50 of Africa. 51

52

https://www.dol.gov/ofccp/regs/compliance/preaward/cnstnote.htm


(2) Hispanic, a fluent Spanish speaking, Spanish surnamed person 1 of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central American, South 2 American, or other Spanish origin. 3

4 (3) Asian or Pacific Islander, a person having origins in any of the 5

original peoples of the Pacific rim or the Pacific Islands, the 6 Hawaiian Islands and Samoa. 7

8 (4) American Indian or Alaskan Native, a person having origins in 9

any of the original peoples of North America, and who maintain 10 cultural identification through tribal affiliation or community 11 recognition. 12

13 2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion 14

of the work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each 15 subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these specifications and the 16 Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and 17 which is set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted. 18

19 3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan 20

approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually 21 or through an association, its affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan 22 area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for 23 those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be able 24 to demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such 25 Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating in an approved 26 Plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, 27 and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in 28 which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other Contractors 29 or Subcontractors toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered 30 Contractor's or Subcontractor's failure to take good faith effort to achieve the Plan 31 goals and timetables. 32

33 4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in 34

paragraphs 7a through 7p of this Special Provision. The goals set forth in the 35 solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the 36 total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the 37 Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in 38 which it has employees in the covered area. Covered construction contractors 39 performing construction work in geographical areas where they do not have a 40 Federal or federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and 41 female goals established for the geographical area where the work is being 42 performed. The Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in 43 meeting its goals in each craft during the period specified. 44

45 5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a 46

union with whom the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer 47 either minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor's obligations under these 48 specifications, Executive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated pursuant 49 thereto. 50

51


6. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted 1 in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the 2 Contractor during the training period, and the Contractor must have made a 3 commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their 4 training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be 5 trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. 6

7 7. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment 8

opportunity. The evaluation of the Contractor's compliance with these 9 specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its 10 action. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement 11 affirmative action steps at least as extensive as the following: 12

13 a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, 14

intimidation, and coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the 15 Contractor's employees are assigned to work. The Contractor, where 16 possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The 17 Contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and 18 other on-site supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the 19 Contractor's obligation to maintain such a working environment, with 20 specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or 21 in such facilities. 22

23 b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment 24

sources, provide written notification to minority and female recruitment 25 sources and to community organizations when the Contractor or its unions 26 have employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the 27 organizations' responses. 28

29 c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of 30

each minority and female off-the-street applicant and minority or female 31 referral from a union, a recruitment source or community organization and 32 of what action was taken with respect to each such individual. If such 33 individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred 34 back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed by the 35 Contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefor, 36 along with whatever additional actions the Contractor may have taken. 37

38 d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or 39

unions with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement 40 has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or woman sent by the 41 Contractor, or when the Contractor has other information that the union 42 referral process has impeded the Contractor's efforts to meet its 43 obligations. 44

45 e. Develop on-the-job training opportunity and/or participate in training 46

programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, 47 including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs 48 relevant to the Contractor's employment needs, especially those programs 49 funded or approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. The Contractor 50 shall provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled under 7b 51 above. 52


1 f. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy 2

to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in 3 assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in 4 any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in 5 the company newspaper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the 6 policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female 7 employees at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy 8 on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where 9 construction work is performed. 10

11 g. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative 12

action obligations under these specifications with all employees having 13 any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination or other 14 employment decisions including specific review of these items with on-site 15 supervisory personnel such as Superintendents, General Foremen, etc., 16 prior to the initiation of construction work at any job site. A written record 17 shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these 18 meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of 19 the subject matter. 20

21 h. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any 22

advertising in the news media, specifically including minority and female 23 news media, and providing written notification to and discussing the 24 Contractor's EEO policy with other Contractors and Subcontractors with 25 whom the Contractor does or anticipates doing business. 26

27 i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written to minority, female and 28

community organizations, to schools with minority and female students 29 and to minority and female recruitment and training organizations serving 30 the Contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than 31 one month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for 32 apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the Contractor 33 shall send written notification to organizations such as the above, 34 describing the openings, screening procedures, and tests to be used in 35 the selection process. 36

37 j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other 38

minority persons and women and where reasonable, provide after school, 39 summer and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on 40 the site and in other areas of a Contractor's work force. 41

42 k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an 43

obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3. 44 45 l. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation of all minority and 46

female personnel for promotional opportunities and encourage these 47 employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., 48 such opportunities. 49

50 m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and 51

other personnel practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by 52


continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to 1 ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor's obligations under these 2 specifications are being carried out. 3

4 n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except 5

that separate or single-user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall 6 be provided to assure privacy between the sexes. 7

8 o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for 9

subcontracts from minority and female construction contractors and 10 suppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female 11 contractor associations and other business associations. 12

13 p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors' adherence to and 14

performance under the Contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action 15 obligations. 16

17 8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in 18

fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action obligations (7a through 7p). The 19 efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor-union, contractor-community, or 20 other similar group of which the Contractor is a member and participant, may be 21 asserted as fulfilling any one or more of the obligations under 7a through 7p of this 22 Special Provision provided that the Contractor actively participates in the group, 23 makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the 24 employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensure that the concrete 25 benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor's minority and female work-26 force participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and 27 timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrate the 28 effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the Contractor. The obligation to 29 comply, however, is the Contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an 30 obligation shall not be a defense for the Contractor's noncompliance. 31

32 9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been 33

established. The Contractor, however, is required to provide equal employment 34 opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and 35 female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently, the 36 Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is 37 employed in substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the 38 Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally, the Contractor may be in 39 violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is 40 underutilized). 41

42 10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action 43

standards to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, 44 or national origin. 45

46 11. The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any person or firm 47

debarred from Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246. 48 49 12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these 50

specifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspensions, 51 terminations and cancellations of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or 52


ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing 1 regulations by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any 2 Contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation 3 of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended. 4

5 13. The Contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall 6

implement specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those 7 standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of this Special Provision, so as to achieve 8 maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the 9 Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the 10 implementing regulations, or these specifications, the Director shall proceed in 11 accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8. 12

13 14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment 14

related activity to ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried out, to 15 submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the 16 government and to keep records. Records shall at least include, for each 17 employee, their name, address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union 18 affiliation if any, employee identification number when assigned, social security 19 number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), 20 dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of 21 pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained 22 in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that 23 existing records satisfy this requirement, the Contractors will not be required to 24 maintain separate records. 25

26 15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of 27

other laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the 28 application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those 29 under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development 30 Block Grant Program). 31

32 16. Additional assistance for Federal Construction Contractors on contracts 33

administered by Washington State Department of Transportation or by Local 34 Agencies may be found at: 35

36 Washington State Dept. of Transportation 37 Office of Equal Opportunity 38 PO Box 47314 39 310 Maple Park Ave. SE 40 Olympia WA 41 98504-7314 42 Ph: 360-705-7090 43 Fax: 360-705-6801 44 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity/default.htm 45

46 1-07.11.OPT2.GR1 47

(April 3, 2018) 48 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Participation 49 The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and 50 USDOT’s official interpretations (i.e., Questions & Answers) apply to this Contract. As 51 such, the requirements of this Contract are to make affirmative efforts to solicit DBEs, 52


provide information on who submitted a Bid or quote and to report DBE participation 1 monthly as described elsewhere in these Contract Provisions. No preference will be 2 included in the evaluation of Bids/Proposals, no minimum level of DBE participation 3 shall be required as a Condition of Award and Bids/Proposals may not be rejected or 4 considered non-responsive on that basis. 5 6

DBE Abbreviations and Definitions 7 Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 8 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in 9 the procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or 10 supplies required for the performance of the Contract, or, persons/companies 11 who arrange or expedite transactions. 12 13 Certified Business Description – Specific descriptions of work the DBE is 14 certified to perform, as identified in the Certified Firm Directory, under the 15 Vendor Information page. 16 17 Certified Firm Directory – A database of all Minority, Women, and 18 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises. The on-line Directory is available to 19 Contractors for their use in identifying and soliciting interest from DBE firms. 20 The database is located under the Firm Certification section of the Diversity 21 Management and Compliance System web page at: 22 https://omwbe.diversitycompliance.com. 23 24 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 25 49 CFR 26.55(c)(1) defines commercially useful function as: “A DBE performs 26 a commercially useful function when it is responsible for execution of the work 27 of the contract and is carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, 28 managing, and supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially 29 useful function, the DBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials 30 and supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality 31 and quantity, ordering the material, and installing (where applicable) and 32 paying for the material itself. To determine whether a DBE is performing a 33 commercially useful function, you must evaluate the amount of work 34 subcontracted, industry practices, whether the amount the firm is to be paid 35 under the contract is commensurate with the work it is actually performing and 36 the DBE credit claimed for its performance of the work, and other relevant 37 factors.” 38 39 Contract – For this Special Provision only, this definition supplements Section 40 1-01.3. 49 CFR 26.5 defines contract as: “… a legally binding relationship 41 obligating a seller to furnish supplies or services (including, but not limited to, 42 construction and professional services) and the buyer to pay for them. For 43 purposes of this part, a lease is considered to be a contract.” 44 45 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – A business firm certified by the 46 Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises, as 47 meeting the criteria outlined in 49 CFR 26 regarding DBE certification. A 48 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) firm is a subset of 49 DBE. 50 51


Force Account Work – Work measured and paid in accordance with Section 1 1-09.6. 2 3 Manufacturer (DBE) – A DBE firm that operates or maintains a factory or 4 establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, 5 or equipment required under the Contract. A DBE Manufacturer shall produce 6 finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or purchase and 7 substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable for construction 8 use before reselling them. 9 10 Regular Dealer (DBE) – A DBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, 11 warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required 12 for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold 13 to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Regular Dealer, the DBE 14 firm must be an established regular business that engages in as its principal 15 business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products in 16 question. A Regular Dealer in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and 17 petroleum products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it 18 both owns and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any 19 supplementing of regular dealers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-20 term formal lease agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, 21 packagers, manufacturers’ representatives, or other persons who arrange or 22 expedite transactions shall not be regarded as Regular Dealers within the 23 meaning of this definition. 24

25 DBE Goals 26 No DBE goals have been assigned as part of this Contract. 27 28 Affirmative Efforts to Solicit DBE Participation 29 The Contractor shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, sex, national 30 origin, age, or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including 31 procurement of materials and leases of equipment. DBE firms shall have an equal 32 opportunity to compete for subcontracts in which the Contractor enters into 33 pursuant to this Contract. 34 35 Contractors are encouraged to: 36

37 1. Advertise opportunities for Subcontractors or suppliers in a timely and 38

reasonably designed manner to provide notice of the opportunity to DBEs 39 capable of performing the Work. All advertisements should include a 40 Contract Provision encouraging participation by DBE firms. This may be 41 accomplished through general advertisements (e.g. newspapers, journals, 42 etc.) or by soliciting Bids/Proposals directly from DBEs. 43

44 2. Establish delivery schedules that encourage participation by DBEs and 45

other small businesses. 46 47 3. Participate with a DBE as a joint venture. 48 49


DBE Eligibility/Selection of DBEs for Reporting Purposes Only 1 Contractor may take credit for DBEs utilized on this Contract only if the firm is 2 certified for the Work being performed, and the firm performs a commercially useful 3 function (CUF). 4 5 Absent a mandatory goal, all DBE participation that is attained on this project will 6 be considered as “race neutral” participation and shall be reported as such. 7 8 Crediting DBE Participation 9 All DBE Subcontractors shall be certified before the subcontract on which they are 10 participating is executed. 11 12 Be advised that although a firm is listed in the directory, there are cases where the 13 listed firm is in a temporary suspension status. The Contractor shall review the 14 OMWBE Suspended DBE Firms list. A DBE firm that is included on this list may 15 not enter into new contracts that count towards participation. 16 17 DBE participation is only credited upon payment to the DBE. 18 19 The following are some definitions of what may be counted as DBE participation. 20 21

DBE Prime Contractor 22 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 23 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE Prime Contractor 24 performs with its own forces and is certified to perform. 25 26 DBE Subcontractor 27 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract 28 equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE performs 29 with its own forces. The value of work performed by the DBE includes the cost 30 of supplies and materials purchased by the DBE and equipment leased by the 31 DBE, for its work on the contract. Supplies, materials or equipment obtained by 32 a DBE that are not utilized or incorporated in the contract work by the DBE will 33 not be eligible for DBE credit. 34 35 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 36 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to 37 DBE subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited. 38 39 DBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease includes 40 the operator. The DBE is expected to operate the equipment used in the 41 performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. Situations 42 where equipment is leased and used by the DBE, but payment is deducted 43 from the Contractor’s payment to the DBE is not allowed. 44 45 If a DBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another firm, the 46 value of the subcontracted Work may be credited only if the DBE’s Lower-Tier 47 Subcontractor is also a DBE. Work subcontracted to a non-DBE shall not be 48 credited. 49 50 Count expenditures toward race/gender-neutral participation only if the DBE is 51 performing a CUF on the contract. 52


1 DBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 2 There must be a subcontract agreement that complies with 49 CFR Part 26 3 and fully describes the distinct elements of Work committed to be performed 4 by the DBE. The subcontract agreement shall incorporate requirements of the 5 primary Contract. Subcontract agreements of all tiers, including lease 6 agreements shall be readily available at the project site for the Engineer 7 review. 8 9 DBE Service Provider 10 The value of fees or commissions charged by a DBE Broker, a DBE behaving 11 in a manner of a Broker, or another service provider for providing a bona fide 12 service, such as professional, technical, consultant, managerial services, or for 13 providing bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of the 14 contract will only be credited as DBE participation, if the fee/commission is 15 determined by the Contracting Agency to be reasonable and the firm has 16 performed a CUF. 17 18 Temporary Traffic Control 19 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of only “Flagging”, the DBE firm 20 must provide a Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) and flagger, which are under 21 the direct control of the DBE. The DBE firm shall also provide all flagging 22 equipment (e.g. paddles, hard hats, and vests). 23 24 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of “Traffic Control Services”, the 25 DBE firm must provide a TCS, flaggers, and traffic control items (e.g., cones, 26 barrels, signs, etc.) and be in total control of all items in implementing the 27 traffic control for the project. In addition, if the DBE firm utilizes the 28 Contractor’s equipment, such as Transportable Attenuators and Portable 29 Changeable Message Signs (PCMS) no DBE credit can be taken for supplying 30 and operating the items. 31 32 Trucking 33 DBE trucking firm participation may only be credited as DBE participation for 34 the value of the hauling services, not for the materials being hauled unless the 35 trucking firm is also certified as a supplier. In situations where the DBE’s work 36 is priced per ton, the value of the hauling service must be calculated 37 separately from the value of the materials in order to determine DBE credit for 38 hauling. 39 40 The DBE trucking firm must own and operate at least one licensed, insured 41 and operational truck on the contract. The truck must be of the type that is 42 necessary to perform the hauling duties required under the contract. The DBE 43 receives credit for the value of the transportation services it provides on the 44 Contract using trucks it owns or leases, licenses, insures, and operates with 45 drivers it employs. 46 47 The DBE may lease additional trucks from another DBE firm. The Work that a 48 DBE trucking firm performs with trucks it leases from other certified DBE 49 trucking firms qualify for 100% DBE credit 50 51


The trucking Work subcontracted to any non-DBE trucking firm will not receive 1 credit for Work done on the project. The DBE may lease trucks from a non-2 DBE truck leasing company, but can only receive credit as DBE participation if 3 the DBE uses its own employees as drivers. 4 5 DBE credit for a truck broker is limited to the fee/commission that the DBE 6 receives for arranging transportation services. 7 8 Truck registration and lease agreements shall be readily available at the 9 project site for the Engineer review. 10 11 DBE Manufacturer and DBE Regular Dealer 12 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the manufactured product obtained 13 from a DBE Manufacturer can count as DBE participation. 14 15 Sixty percent (60%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased from a DBE 16 Regular Dealer may be credited as DBE participation. If the role of the DBE 17 Regular Dealer is determined to be that of a pass-through, then no DBE credit 18 will be given for its services. If the role of the DBE Regular Dealer is 19 determined to be that of a Broker, then DBE credit shall be limited to the fee or 20 commission it receives for its services. Regular Dealer status and the amount 21 of credit is determined on a Contract-by-Contract basis. 22 23 Regular Dealer DBE firms must be approved before being used on a project. 24 The WSDOT Approved Regular Dealer list published on WSDOT’s Office of 25 Equal Opportunity (OEO) web site must include the specific project for which 26 approval is being requested. The Regular Dealer must submit the Regular 27 Dealer Status Request form a minimum of five days prior to being utilized on 28 the specific project. 29 30 Purchase of materials or supplies from a DBE which is neither a manufacturer 31 nor a regular dealer, (i.e. Broker) only the fees or commissions charged for 32 assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or 33 transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on a 34 job site, can count as DBE participation provided the fees are not excessive as 35 compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services. Documentation 36 will be required to support the fee/commission charged by the DBE. The cost 37 of the materials and supplies themselves cannot be counted toward as DBE 38 participation. 39 40 Note: Requests to be listed as a Regular Dealer will only be processed if the 41

requesting firm is a material supplier certified by the Office of Minority 42 and Women’s Business Enterprises in a NAICS code that falls within 43 the 42XXXX NAICS Wholesale code section. 44

45 Procedures Between Award and Execution 46 After Award and prior to Execution, the Contractor shall provide the additional 47 information described below. Failure to comply shall result in the forfeiture of the 48 Bidder’s Proposal bond or deposit. 49

50


1. A list of all firms who submitted a bid or quote in attempt to participate in 1 this project whether they were successful or not. Include the business 2 name and mailing address. 3

4 Note: The firms identified by the Contractor may be contacted by the 5

Contracting Agency to solicit general information as follows: 6 age of the firm and average of its gross annual receipts over 7 the past three-years. 8

9 Procedures After Execution 10

Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 11 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work 12 performed by a DBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment 13 must be commensurate with the work actually performed by the DBE. This 14 applies to all DBEs performing Work on a project, whether or not the DBEs are 15 COA, if the Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. The 16 Engineer will conduct CUF reviews to ascertain whether DBEs are performing 17 a CUF. A DBE performs a CUF when it is carrying out its responsibilities of its 18 contract by actually performing, managing, and supervising the Work involved. 19 The DBE must be responsible for negotiating price; determining quality and 20 quantity; ordering the material, installing (where applicable); and paying for the 21 material itself. If a DBE does not perform “all” of these functions on a furnish-22 and-install contract, it has not performed a CUF and the cost of materials 23 cannot be counted toward UDBE COA Goal. Leasing of equipment from a 24 leasing company is allowed. However, leasing/purchasing equipment from the 25 Contractor is not allowed. Lease agreements shall be readily available for 26 review by the Engineer. 27 28 In order for a DBE traffic control company to be considered to be performing a 29 CUF, the DBE must be in control of its work inclusive of supervision. The DBE 30 shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who is directly involved in the 31 management and supervision of the traffic control employees and services. 32 33 The DBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 34 participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which the funds are 35 passed in order to obtain the appearance of DBE participation. 36 37 The following are some of the factors that the Engineer will use in determining 38 whether a DBE trucking company is performing a CUF: 39 40

• The DBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision of 41 the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on the 42 Contract. The owner demonstrates business related knowledge, 43 shows up on site and is determined to be actively running the 44 business. 45

46 • The DBE shall with its own workforce, operate at least one fully 47

licensed, insured, and operational truck used on the Contract. The 48 drivers of the trucks owned and leased by the DBE must be 49 exclusively employed by the DBE and reflected on the DBE’s payroll. 50

51


• Lease agreements for trucks shall indicate that the DBE has 1 exclusive use of and control over the truck(s). This does not preclude 2 the leased truck from working for others provided it is with the 3 consent of the DBE and the lease provides the DBE absolute priority 4 for use of the leased truck. 5

6 • Leased trucks shall display the name and identification number of the 7

DBE. 8 9 Joint Checking 10 A joint check is a check between a Subcontractor and the Contractor to the 11 supplier of materials/supplies. The check is issued by the Contractor as payer 12 to the Subcontractor and the material supplier jointly for items to be 13 incorporated into the project. The DBE must release the check to the supplier, 14 while the Contractor acts solely as the guarantor. 15 16 A joint check agreement must be approved by the Engineer and requested by 17 the DBE involved using the DBE Joint Check Request Form (form # 272-053) 18 prior to its use. The form must accompany the DBE Joint Check Agreement 19 between the parties involved, including the conditions of the arrangement and 20 expected use of the joint checks. 21 22 The approval to use joint checks and the use will be closely monitored by the 23 Engineer. To receive DBE credit for performing a CUF with respect to 24 obtaining materials and supplies, a DBE must “be responsible for negotiating 25 price, determining quality and quantity, ordering the material and installing and 26 paying for the material itself.” The Contractor shall submit DBE Joint Check 27 Request Form for the Engineer approval prior to using a joint check. 28 29 Material costs paid by the Contractor directly to the material supplier is not 30 allowed. If proper procedures are not followed or the Engineer determines that 31 the arrangement results in lack of independence for the DBE involved, no DBE 32 credit will be given for the DBE’s participation as it relates to the material cost. 33 34 Prompt Payment 35 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-36 08.1. Prompt Payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 37 return of retainage. 38 39 Reporting 40 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize 41 DBEs to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that 42 will enable the Engineer to verify DBE participation throughout the life of the 43 project. 44 45 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 46 this Contract. 47 48 Decertification 49 When a DBE is “decertified” from the DBE program during the course of the 50 Contract, the participation of that DBE shall continue to count as DBE 51 participation as long as the subcontract with the DBE was executed prior to the 52


decertification notice. The Contractor is obligated to substitute when a DBE 1 does not have an executed subcontract agreement at the time of 2 decertification. 3 4 Consequences of Non-Compliance 5 Each contract with a Contractor (and each subcontract the Contractor signs 6 with a Subcontractor) must include the following assurance clause: 7 8 The Contractor, subrecipient, or Subcontractor shall not discriminate on the 9 basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. 10 The Contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in 11 the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the 12 Contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, 13 which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as the 14 recipient deems appropriate, which may include, but is not limited to: 15

16 (1) Withholding monthly progress payments; 17 18 (2) Assessing sanctions; 19 20 (3) Liquidated damages; and/or 21 22 (4) Disqualifying the Contractor from future bidding as non-responsible. 23 24

Payment 25 Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this 26 Specification and any other associated DBE requirements is included in 27 payment for the associated Contract items of Work, except otherwise provided 28 in the Specifications. 29

30 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1 31

(April 3, 2018) 32 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Participation 33 The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and 34 USDOT’s official interpretations (i.e., Questions & Answers) apply to this Contract. 35 Demonstrating compliance with these Specifications is a Condition of Award (COA) of 36 this Contract. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Specification may result in 37 your Bid being found to be nonresponsive resulting in rejection or other sanctions as 38 provided by Contract. 39 40

DBE Abbreviations and Definitions 41 Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 42 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in 43 the procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or 44 supplies required for the performance of the Contract; or, persons/companies 45 who arrange or expedite transactions. 46 47 Certified Business Description – Specific descriptions of work the DBE is 48 certified to perform, as identified in the Certified Firm Directory, under the 49 Vendor Information page. 50 51


Certified Firm Directory – A database of all Minority, Women, and 1 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises, including those identified as a UDBE, 2 currently certified by Washington State. The on-line Directory is available to 3 Contractors for their use in identifying and soliciting interest from DBE firms. 4 The database is located under the Firm Certification section of the Diversity 5 Management and Compliance System web page at: 6 https://omwbe.diversitycompliance.com. 7 8 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) – 49 CFR 26.55(c)(1) defines 9 commercially useful function as: “A DBE performs a commercially useful 10 function when it is responsible for execution of the work of the contract and is 11 carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, managing, and 12 supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially useful function, the 13 DBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials and supplies used on 14 the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and quantity, ordering 15 the material, and installing (where applicable) and paying for the material itself. 16 To determine whether a DBE is performing a commercially useful function, you 17 must evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry practices, whether 18 the amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is commensurate with the 19 work it is actually performing and the DBE credit claimed for its performance of 20 the work, and other relevant factors.” 21 22 Contract – For this Special Provision only, this definition supplements Section 23 1-01.3. 49 CFR 26.5 defines contract as: “… a legally binding relationship 24 obligating a seller to furnish supplies or services (including, but not limited to, 25 construction and professional services) and the buyer to pay for them. For 26 purposes of this part, a lease is considered to be a contract.” 27 28 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – A business firm certified by the 29 Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises, as 30 meeting the criteria outlined in 49 CFR 26 regarding DBE certification. A 31 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) firm is a subset of 32 DBE. 33 34 Force Account Work – Work measured and paid in accordance with Section 35 1-09.6. 36 37 Good Faith Efforts – Efforts to achieve the UDBE COA Goal or other 38 requirements of this part which, by their scope, intensity, and appropriateness 39 to the objective, can reasonably be expected to fulfill the program requirement. 40 41 Manufacturer (DBE) – A DBE firm that operates or maintains a factory or 42 establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, 43 or equipment required under the Contract. A DBE Manufacturer shall produce 44 finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or purchase and 45 substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable for construction 46 use before reselling them. 47 48 Regular Dealer (DBE) – A DBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, 49 warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required 50 for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold 51 to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Regular Dealer, the DBE 52


firm must be an established regular business that engages in as its principal 1 business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products in 2 question. A Regular Dealer in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and 3 petroleum products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it 4 both owns and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any 5 supplementing of regular dealers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-6 term formal lease agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, 7 packagers, manufacturers’ representatives, or other persons who arrange or 8 expedite transactions shall not be regarded as Regular Dealers within the 9 meaning of this definition. 10 11 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) – A DBE Firm 12 that is underutilized based on WSDOT’s Disparity Study. All UDBEs are DBEs. 13 14 UDBE Commitment – The dollar amount the Contractor indicates they will be 15 subcontracting to be applied towards the UDBE Condition of Award Goal as 16 shown on the UDBE Utilization Certification Form for each UDBE 17 Subcontractor. This UDBE Commitment amount will be incorporated into the 18 Contract and shall be considered a Contract requirement. Any changes to the 19 UDBE Commitment require the Engineer’s approval. 20 21 UDBE Condition of Award (COA) Goal – An assigned numerical amount 22 specified as a percentage of the Contract. Initially, this is the minimum amount 23 that the Bidder must commit to by submission of the Utilization Certification 24 Form and/or by Good Faith Effort (GFE). This is also the minimum required 25 amount of UDBE participation specified as a percentage of the final Contract 26 amount inclusive of all change orders. 27 28

UDBE COA Goal 29 The Contracting Agency has established a UDBE COA Goal for this Contract in the 30 amount of: *** $$1$$ *** 31 32 DBE Eligibility/Selection of DBEs 33 In order to determine the distinct element(s) of work for which a DBE is certified, 34 Contractors should refer to the Certified Business Description. The Contractor shall 35 not use NAICS codes on the UDBE Utilization Certification. 36 37 Crediting DBE Participation 38 Subcontractors proposed as COA must be certified prior to the due date for bids on 39 the Contract. All non-COA DBE Subcontractors shall be certified before the 40 subcontract on which they are participating is executed. 41 42 Be advised that although a firm is listed in the Certified Firm Directory, there are 43 cases where the listed firm is in a temporary suspension status. The Contractor 44 shall review the OMWBE Suspended DBE Firms list. A DBE firm that is included 45 on this list may not enter into new contracts that count towards participation. 46 47 DBE participation is only credited upon payment to the DBE. 48 49 The following are some definitions of what may be counted as DBE participation. 50 51


DBE Prime Contractor 1 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 2 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE Prime Contractor 3 performs with its own forces and is certified to perform. 4 5 DBE Subcontractor 6 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract that 7 is equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE 8 performs with its own forces. The value of work performed by the DBE 9 includes the cost of supplies and materials purchased by the DBE and 10 equipment leased by the DBE, for its work on the contract. Supplies, materials 11 or equipment obtained by a DBE that are not utilized or incorporated in the 12 contract work by the DBE will not be eligible for DBE credit. 13 14 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 15 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to 16 DBE subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited. 17 18 DBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease includes 19 the operator. The DBE is expected to operate the equipment used in the 20 performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. Situations 21 where equipment is leased and used by the DBE, but payment is deducted 22 from the Contractor’s payment to the DBE is not allowed. 23 24 When the subcontractor is part of a UDBE Commitment, the following apply: 25 26

1. If a UDBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another 27 firm, the value of the subcontracted Work may be counted toward the 28 UDBE COA Goal only if the Lower-Tier Subcontractor is also a UDBE. 29 30

2. Work subcontracted to a Lower-Tier Subcontractor that is a DBE, but 31 not a UDBE, may be counted as DBE race-neutral participation but not 32 counted toward the UDBE COA Goal. 33 34

3. Work subcontracted to a non-DBE does not count towards the UDBE 35 COA Goal nor DBE participation. 36

37 DBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 38 There must be a subcontract agreement that complies with 49 CFR Part 26 39 and fully describes the distinct elements of Work committed to be performed 40 by the DBE. The subcontract agreement shall incorporate requirements of the 41 primary Contract. Subcontract agreements of all tiers, including lease 42 agreements shall be readily available at the project site for the Engineer’s 43 review. 44 45 DBE Service Provider 46 The value of fees or commissions charged by a DBE Broker, a DBE behaving 47 in a manner of a Broker, or another service provider for providing a bona fide 48 service, such as professional, technical, consultant, managerial services, or for 49 providing bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of the 50 contract will only be credited as DBE participation, if the fee/commission is 51


determined by the Contracting Agency to be reasonable and the firm has 1 performed a CUF. 2 3 Force Account Work 4 When the Contractor elects to utilize force account Work to meet the UDBE 5 COA Goal, as demonstrated by listing this force account Work on the UDBE 6 Utilization Certification Form, for the purposes of meeting UDBE COA Goal, 7 only 50% of the Proposal amount shall be credited toward the Contractors 8 Commitment to meet the UDBE COA Goal. 9 10 One hundred percent of the actual amounts paid to the DBE for the force 11 account Work shall be credited towards UDBE COA Goal or DBE participation. 12 13 Temporary Traffic Control 14 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of only “Flagging”, the DBE firm 15 must provide a Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) and flagger, which are under 16 the direct control of the DBE. The DBE firm shall also provide all flagging 17 equipment (e.g. paddles, hard hats, and vests). 18 19 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of “Traffic Control Services”, the 20 DBE firm must provide a TCS, flaggers, and traffic control items (e.g., cones, 21 barrels, signs, etc.) and be in total control of all items in implementing the 22 traffic control for the project. In addition, if the DBE firm utilizes the 23 Contractor’s equipment, such as Transportable Attenuators and Portable 24 Changeable Message Signs (PCMS) no DBE credit can be taken for supplying 25 and operating the items. 26 27 Trucking 28 DBE trucking firm participation may only be credited as DBE participation for 29 the value of the hauling services, not for the materials being hauled unless the 30 trucking firm is also certified as a supplier. In situations where the DBE’s work 31 is priced per ton, the value of the hauling service must be calculated 32 separately from the value of the materials in order to determine DBE credit for 33 hauling 34 35 The DBE trucking firm must own and operate at least one licensed, insured 36 and operational truck on the contract. The truck must be of the type that is 37 necessary to perform the hauling duties required under the contract. The DBE 38 receives credit for the value of the transportation services it provides on the 39 Contract using trucks it owns or leases, licenses, insures, and operates with 40 drivers it employs. 41 42 The DBE may lease additional trucks from another DBE firm. 43 44 The trucking Work subcontracted to any non-DBE trucking firm will not receive 45 credit for Work done on the project. The DBE may lease trucks from a non-46 DBE truck leasing company, but can only receive credit towards DBE 47 participation if the DBE uses its own employees as drivers. 48 49 DBE credit for a truck broker is limited to the fee/commission that the DBE 50 receives for arranging transportation services. 51 52


Truck registration and lease agreements shall be readily available at the 1 project site for the Engineer review. 2 3 When Trucking is a UDBE Commitment, the following apply: 4 5

1. If the trucking firm is a UDBE, participation may count towards the 6 UDBE COA Goal. 7

8 2. The Work that a UDBE trucking firm performs with trucks it leases 9

from other certified UDBE trucking firms qualify for 100% credit 10 towards the UDBE COA Goal. 11

12 3. The UDBE may lease trucks from a non-UDBE truck leasing 13

company, but can only receive credit towards UDBE participation if 14 the UDBE uses its own employees as drivers. 15

16 DBE Manufacturer and DBE Regular Dealer 17 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the manufactured product obtained 18 from a DBE manufacturer can count as DBE participation. If the DBE 19 manufacturer is a UDBE, participation may count towards the UDBE COA 20 Goal. 21 22 Sixty percent (60%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased from a DBE 23 Regular Dealer may be credited as DBE Participation. If the role of the DBE 24 Regular Dealer is determined to be that of a pass-through, then no DBE credit 25 will be given for its services. If the role of the DBE Regular Dealer is 26 determined to be that of a Broker, then DBE credit shall be limited to the fee or 27 commission it receives for its services. Regular Dealer status and the amount 28 of credit is determined on a Contract-by-Contract basis. If the DBE regular 29 dealer is a UDBE, participation may count towards the UDBE COA Goal. 30 31 Regular Dealer DBE firms, including UDBEs must be approved before being 32 used on a project. The WSDOT Approved Regular Dealer list published on 33 WSDOT’s Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO) web site must include the 34 specific project for which approval is being requested. For purposes of the 35 UDBE COA Goal participation, the Regular Dealer must submit the Regular 36 Dealer Status Request form a minimum of five days prior to bid opening. 37 38 Purchase of materials or supplies from a DBE which is neither a manufacturer 39 nor a regular dealer, (i.e. Broker) only the fees or commissions charged for 40 assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or 41 transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on a 42 job site, can count as DBE participation provided the fees are not excessive as 43 compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services. Documentation 44 will be required to support the fee/commission charged by the DBE. The cost 45 of the materials and supplies themselves cannot be counted toward as DBE 46 participation. 47 48 Note: Requests to be listed as a Regular Dealer will only be processed if the 49



1 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 2 The requirements of this section apply to projects with a UDBE COA Goal. To be 3 eligible for award of the Contract, the Bidder shall properly complete and submit an 4 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) Utilization Certification 5 with the Bidder’s sealed Bid Proposal, as specified in Section 1-02.9 Delivery of 6 Proposal. The Bidder’s UDBE Utilization Certification must clearly demonstrate how 7 the Bidder intends to meet the UDBE COA Goal. A UDBE Utilization Certification 8 (WSDOT Form 272-056U) is included in the Proposal package for this purpose as 9 well as instructions on how to properly fill out the form. 10 11 The Bidder is advised that the items listed below when listed in the Utilization 12 Certification must have their amounts reduced to the percentages shown and those 13 reduced amounts will be the amount applied towards meeting the UDBE COA 14 Goal. 15 16

• Force account at 50% 17 • Regular dealer at 60% 18

19 In the event of arithmetic errors in completing the UDBE Utilization Certification, the 20 amount listed to be applied towards the UDBE COA Goal for each UDBE shall 21 govern and the UDBE total amount shall be adjusted accordingly. 22 23 Note: The Contracting Agency shall consider as non-responsive and shall 24

reject any Bid Proposal submitted that does not contain a UDBE 25 Utilization Certification Form that accurately demonstrates how the 26 Bidder intends to meet the UDBE COA Goal. 27

28 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation 29 Document(s) 30 The requirements of this section apply to projects with a UDBE COA Goal. The 31 Bidder shall submit an Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) 32 Written Confirmation Document (completed and signed by the UDBE) for each 33 UDBE firm listed in the Bidder’s completed UDBE Utilization Certification submitted 34 with the Bid. Failure to do so will result in the associated participation being 35 disallowed, which may cause the Bid to be determined to be nonresponsive 36 resulting in Bid rejection. 37 38 The Confirmation Documents provide confirmation from the UDBEs that they are 39 participating in the Contract as provided in the Contractor’s Commitment. The 40 Confirmation Documents must be consistent with the Utilization Certification. 41 42 A UDBE Written Confirmation Document (WSDOT Form 422-031U) is included in 43 the Proposal package for this purpose. 44 45 The form(s) shall be received as specified in the special provisions for Section 1-46 02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 47 48 It is prohibited for the Bidder to require a UDBE to submit a Written Confirmation 49 Document with any part of the form left blank. Should the Contracting Agency 50 determine that an incomplete Written Confirmation Document was signed by a 51


UDBE, the validity of the document comes into question. The associated UDBE 1 participation may not receive credit. 2 3 Selection of Successful Bidder/Good Faith Efforts (GFE) 4 The requirements of this section apply to projects with a UDBE COA Goal. The 5 successful Bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest 6 responsive Bid, which demonstrates a good faith effort to achieve the UDBE COA 7 Goal. The Contracting Agency, at any time during the selection process, may 8 request a breakdown of the bid items and amounts that are counted towards the 9 overall contract goal for any of the UDBEs listed on the UDBE Utilization 10 Certification. 11 12 Achieving the UDBE COA Goal may be accomplished in one of two ways: 13 14

1. By meeting the UDBE COA Goal 15 Submission of the UDBE Utilization Certification and supporting UDBE 16 Written Confirmation Document(s) showing the Bidder has obtained 17 enough UDBE participation to meet or exceed the UDBE COA Goal. 18

19 2. By documentation that the Bidder made adequate GFE to meet the UDBE 20

COA Goal 21 The Bidder may demonstrate a GFE in whole or part through GFE 22 documentation ONLY IN THE EVENT a Bidder’s efforts to solicit sufficient 23 UDBE participation have been unsuccessful. The Bidder must supply GFE 24 documentation in addition to the UDBE Utilization Certification, and 25 supporting UDBE Written Confirmation Document(s). 26

27 Note: In the case where a Bidder is awarded the contract based on 28

demonstrating adequate GFE, the advertised UDBE COA Goal will not 29 be reduced. The Bidder shall demonstrate a GFE during the life of the 30 Contract to attain the advertised UDBE COA Goal. 31

32 GFE documentation shall be submitted as specified in Section 1-02.9. 33 34 The Contracting Agency will review the GFE documentation and will determine if 35 the Bidder made an adequate good faith effort. 36 37 Good Faith Effort (GFE) Documentation 38 GFE is evaluated when: 39 40

1. Determining award of a Contract that has COA goal, 41 42 2. When a COA UDBE is terminated and substitution is required, and 43 44 3. Prior to Physical Completion when determining whether the Contractor 45

has satisfied its UDBE commitments. 46 47 49 CFR Part 26, Appendix A is intended as general guidance and does not, in 48 itself, demonstrate adequate good faith efforts. The following is a list of types of 49 actions, which would be considered as part of the Bidder’s GFE to achieve UDBE 50 participation. It is not intended to be a mandatory checklist, nor is it intended to be 51


exclusive or exhaustive. Other factors or types of efforts may be relevant in 1 appropriate cases. 2 3

1. Soliciting through all reasonable and available means (e.g. attendance at 4 pre-bid meetings, advertising and/or written notices) the interest of all 5 certified UDBEs who have the capability to perform the Work of the 6 Contract. The Bidder must solicit this interest within sufficient time to allow 7 the UDBEs to respond to the solicitation. The Bidder must determine with 8 certainty if the UDBEs are interested by taking appropriate steps to follow 9 up initial solicitations. 10

11 2. Selecting portions of the Work to be performed by UDBEs in order to 12

increase the likelihood that the UDBE COA Goal will be achieved. This 13 includes, where appropriate, breaking out contract Work items into 14 economically feasible units to facilitate UDBE participation, even when the 15 Contractor might otherwise prefer to perform these Work items with its 16 own forces. 17

18 3. Providing interested UDBEs with adequate information about the Plans, 19

Specifications, and requirements of the Contract in a timely manner to 20 assist them in responding to a solicitation. 21 22 a. Negotiating in good faith with interested UDBEs. It is the Bidder’s 23

responsibility to make a portion of the Work available to UDBE 24 subcontractors and suppliers and to select those portions of the Work 25 or material needs consistent with the available UDBE subcontractors 26 and suppliers, so as to facilitate UDBE participation. Evidence of such 27 negotiation includes the names, addresses, and telephone numbers 28 of UDBEs that were considered; a description of the information 29 provided regarding the Plans and Specifications for the Work 30 selected for subcontracting; and evidence as to why additional 31 agreements could not be reached for UDBEs to perform the Work. 32

33 b. A Bidder using good business judgment would consider a number of 34

factors in negotiating with subcontractors, including DBE 35 subcontractors, and would take a firm’s price and capabilities as well 36 as the UDBE COA Goal into consideration. However, the fact that 37 there may be some additional costs involved in finding and using 38 UDBEs is not in itself sufficient reason for a Bidder’s failure to meet 39 the UDBE COA Goal, as long as such costs are reasonable. Also, the 40 ability or desire of a Contractor to perform the Work of a Contract with 41 its own organization does not relieve the Bidder of the responsibility 42 to make Good Faith Efforts. Contractors are not, however, required to 43 accept higher quotes from UDBEs if the price difference is excessive 44 or unreasonable. 45

46 4. Not rejecting UDBEs as being unqualified without sound reasons based 47

on a thorough investigation of their capabilities. The Contractor’s standing 48 within its industry, membership in specific groups, organizations, or 49 associations and political or social affiliations (for example union vs. non-50 union employee status) are not legitimate causes for the rejection or non-51 solicitation of bids in the Contractor’s efforts to meet the UDBE COA Goal. 52


1 5. Making efforts to assist interested UDBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of 2

credit, or insurance as required by the recipient or Contractor. 3 4 6. Making efforts to assist interested UDBEs in obtaining necessary 5

equipment, supplies, materials, or related assistance or services. 6 7 7. Effectively using the services of available minority/women community 8

organizations; minority/women contractors’ groups; local, State, and 9 Federal minority/women business assistance offices; and other 10 organizations as allowed on a case-by-case basis to provide assistance in 11 the recruitment and placement of UDBEs. 12

13 8. Documentation of GFE must include copies of each UDBE and non-DBE 14

subcontractor quotes submitted to the Bidder when a non-DBE 15 subcontractor is selected over a UDBE for Work on the Contract. (ref. 16 updated DBE regulations – 26.53(b)(2)(vi) & App. A) 17

18 Administrative Reconsideration of GFE Documentation 19 A Bidder has the right to request reconsideration if the GFE documentation 20 submitted with their Bid was determined to be inadequate. 21 22

• The Bidder must request within 48 hours of notification of being 23 nonresponsive or forfeit the right to reconsideration. 24

25 • The reconsideration decision on the adequacy of the Bidder’s GFE 26

documentation shall be made by an official who did not take part in the 27 original determination. 28

29 • Only original GFE documentation submitted as a supplement to the Bid 30

shall be considered. The Bidder shall not introduce new documentation at 31 the reconsideration hearing. 32

33 • The Bidder shall have the opportunity to meet in person with the official for 34

the purpose of setting forth the Bidder’s position as to why the GFE 35 documentation demonstrates a sufficient effort. 36

37 • The reconsideration official shall provide the Bidder with a written decision 38

on reconsideration within five working days of the hearing explaining the 39 basis for their finding. 40

41 Procedures between Award and Execution 42 After Award and prior to Execution, the Contractor shall provide the additional 43 information described below. Failure to comply shall result in the forfeiture of the 44 Bidder’s Proposal bond or deposit. 45 46

1. A UDBE Bid Item Breakdown is required which shall contain the following 47 information for all UDBEs as shown on the UDBE Utilization Certification: 48

49 a. Correct business name, federal employee identification number (if 50

available), and mailing address. 51 52


b. List of all Bid items assigned to each UDBE with a clear description of 1 Work to be performed for each Bid item and the dollar value of the 2 Work to be performed by the UDBE. 3

4 c. Description of partial items (if any) to be sublet to each UDBE 5

specifying the Work committed under each item to be performed and 6 including the dollar value of the UDBE portion. 7

8 d. Total amounts shown for each UDBE shall match the amount shown 9

on the UDBE Utilization Certification. A UDBE Bid Item Breakdown 10 that does not conform to the UDBE Utilization Certification or that 11 demonstrates a different amount of UDBE participation than that 12 included in the UDBE Utilization Certification will be returned for 13 correction. 14

15 2. A list of all firms who submitted a bid or quote in attempt to participate in 16

this project whether they were successful or not. Include the business 17 name and mailing address. 18

19 Note: The firms identified by the Contractor may be contacted by the 20

Contracting Agency to solicit general information as follows: age of the 21 firm and average of its gross annual receipts over the past three-22 years. 23

24 Procedures after Execution 25

Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 26 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work 27 performed by a DBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment 28 must be commensurate with the work actually performed by the DBE. This 29 applies to all DBEs performing Work on a project, whether or not the DBEs are 30 COA, if the Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. The 31 Engineer will conduct CUF reviews to ascertain whether DBEs are performing 32 a CUF. A DBE performs a CUF when it is carrying out its responsibilities of its 33 contract by actually performing, managing, and supervising the Work involved. 34 The DBE must be responsible for negotiating price; determining quality and 35 quantity; ordering the material, installing (where applicable); and paying for the 36 material itself. If a DBE does not perform “all” of these functions on a furnish-37 and-install contract, it has not performed a CUF and the cost of materials 38 cannot be counted toward UDBE COA Goal. Leasing of equipment from a 39 leasing company is allowed. However, leasing/purchasing equipment from the 40 Contractor is not allowed. Lease agreements shall be readily available for 41 review by the Engineer. 42 43 In order for a DBE traffic control company to be considered to be performing a 44 CUF, the DBE must be in control of its work inclusive of supervision. The DBE 45 shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who is directly involved in the 46 management and supervision of the traffic control employees and services. 47 48 The DBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 49 participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which the funds are 50 passed in order to obtain the appearance of DBE participation. 51 52


The following are some of the factors that the Engineer will use in determining 1 whether a DBE trucking company is performing a CUF: 2 3

• The DBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision of 4 the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on the 5 contract. The owner demonstrates business related knowledge, 6 shows up on site and is determined to be actively running the 7 business. 8



14 • Lease agreements for trucks shall indicate that the DBE has 15

exclusive use of and control over the truck(s). This does not preclude 16 the leased truck from working for others provided it is with the 17 consent of the DBE and the lease provides the DBE absolute priority 18 for use of the leased truck. 19


DBE. 22 23 UDBE Utilization Plan 24 The UDBE Bid Item Breakdown is the initial plan for Bid Item work committed 25 to UDBE firms. At any time between Execution and Physical Completion, if the 26 Contractor identifies a change in the plan, an update to the Bid Item 27 Breakdown shall be submitted to the Engineer within 7 calendar days of the 28 proposed change for review and acceptance. Plan updates shall not make 29 changes to the Commitment or the UDBE Utilization Certification. 30 31 Joint Checking 32 A joint check is a check between a Subcontractor and the Contractor to the 33 supplier of materials/supplies. The check is issued by the Contractor as payer 34 to the Subcontractor and the material supplier jointly for items to be 35 incorporated into the project. The DBE must release the check to the supplier, 36 while the Contractor acts solely as the guarantor. 37 38 A joint check agreement must be approved by the Engineer and requested by 39 the DBE involved using the DBE Joint Check Request Form (form # 272-053) 40 prior to its use. The form must accompany the DBE Joint Check Agreement 41 between the parties involved, including the conditions of the arrangement and 42 expected use of the joint checks. 43 44 The approval to use joint checks and the use will be closely monitored by the 45 Engineer. To receive DBE credit for performing a CUF with respect to 46 obtaining materials and supplies, a DBE must “be responsible for negotiating 47 price, determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, installing and 48 paying for the material itself.” The Contractor shall submit DBE Joint Check 49 Request Form for the Engineer approval prior to using a joint check. 50 51


Material costs paid by the Contractor directly to the material supplier are not 1 allowed. If proper procedures are not followed or the Engineer determines that 2 the arrangement results in lack of independence for the DBE involved, no DBE 3 credit will be given for the DBE’s participation as it relates to the material cost. 4 5 Prompt Payment 6 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-7 08.1. Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 8 return of retainage. 9 10 Reporting 11 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize 12 DBEs to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that 13 will enable the Engineer to verify DBE participation throughout the life of the 14 project. 15 16 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 17 this contract. 18

19 Changes in COA Work Committed to UDBE 20 The Contractor shall utilize the COA UDBEs to perform the work and supply the 21 materials for which each is committed unless approved by the Engineer. The 22 Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for work or material completed by 23 the Contractor or subcontractors that was committed to be completed by the COA 24 UDBEs. 25 26

Owner Initiated Changes 27 Where the Engineer makes changes that result in changes to Work that was 28 committed to a COA UDBE. The Contractor may be directed to substitute for 29 the Work in such instances. 30 31 Contractor Initiated Changes 32 The Contractor cannot reduce the amount of work committed to a COA UDBE 33 without good cause. Reducing UDBE Commitment is viewed as partial UDBE 34 termination, and therefore subject to the termination procedures below. 35 36 Original Quantity Underruns 37 In the event that Work committed to a UDBE firm as part of the COA 38 underruns the original planned quantities the Contractor may be required to 39 substitute other remaining Work to another UDBE. 40 41 Contractor Proposed DBE Substitutions 42 Requests to substitute a COA UDBE must be for good cause (see UDBE 43 termination process below), and requires prior written approval of the 44 Engineer. After receiving a termination with good cause approval, the 45 Contractor may only replace a UDBE with another certified UDBE. When any 46 changes between Contract Award and Execution result in a substitution of 47 COA UDBE, the substitute UDBE shall be certified prior to the bid opening on 48 the Contract. 49 50


UDBE Termination 1 Termination of a COA UDBE (or an approved substitute UDBE) is only allowed 2 in whole or in part with prior written approval of the Engineer. If the Contractor 3 terminates a COA UDBE without the written approval of the Engineer, the 4 Contractor shall not be entitled to credit towards the UDBE COA Goal for any 5 payment for work or material performed/supplied by the COA UDBE. In 6 addition, sanctions may apply as described elsewhere in this specification. 7 8 The Contractor must have good cause to terminate a COA UDBE. 9 10 Good cause typically includes situations where the UDBE Subcontractor is 11 unable or unwilling to perform the work of its subcontract. Good cause may 12 exist if: 13 14

• The UDBE fails or refuses to execute a written contract. 15 16 • The UDBE fails or refuses to perform the Work of its subcontract in a 17

way consistent with normal industry standards. 18 19 • The UDBE fails or refuses to meet the Contractor’s reasonable 20

nondiscriminatory bond requirements. 21 22 • The UDBE becomes bankrupt, insolvent, or exhibits credit 23

unworthiness. 24 25 • The UDBE is ineligible to work on public works projects because of 26

suspension and debarment proceedings pursuant to federal law or 27 applicable State law. 28

29 • The UDBE voluntarily withdraws from the project, and provides 30

written notice of its withdrawal. 31 32 • The UDBE’s work is deemed unsatisfactory by the Engineer and not 33

in compliance with the Contract. 34 35 • The UDBE’s owner dies or becomes disabled with the result that the 36

UDBE is unable to complete its Work on the Contract. 37 38 Good cause does not exist if: 39 40 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA UDBE so that the 41

Contractor can self-perform the Work. 42 43 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA UDBE so the Contractor 44

can substitute another DBE contractor or non-DBE contractor after 45 Contract Award. 46

47 • The failure or refusal of the COA UDBE to perform its Work on the 48

subcontract results from the bad faith or discriminatory action of the 49 Contractor (e.g., the failure of the Contractor to make timely 50 payments or the unnecessary placing of obstacles in the path of the 51 UDBE’s Work). 52


1 Prior to requesting termination, the Contractor shall give notice in writing to the 2 UDBE with a copy to the Engineer of its intent to request to terminate UDBE 3 Work and the reasons for doing so. The UDBE shall have five (5) days to 4 respond to the Contractor’s notice. The UDBE’s response shall either support 5 the termination or advise the Engineer and the Contractor of the reasons it 6 objects to the termination of its subcontract. 7 8 When a COA UDBE is terminated, or fails to complete its work on the Contract 9 for any reason, the Contractor shall substitute with another UDBE or provide 10 documentation of GFE. A plan to achieve the COA UDBE Commitment shall 11 be submitted to the Engineer within 2 days of the approval of termination or the 12 Contract shall be suspended until such time the substitution plan is submitted. 13 14 Decertification 15 When a DBE is “decertified” from the DBE program during the course of the 16 Contract, the participation of that DBE shall continue to count as DBE 17 participation as long as the subcontract with the DBE was executed prior to the 18 decertification notice. The Contractor is obligated to substitute when a DBE 19 does not have an executed subcontract agreement at the time of 20 decertification. 21 22

Consequences of Non-Compliance 23 Breach of Contract 24 Each contract with a Contractor (and each subcontract the Contractor signs 25 with a Subcontractor) must include the following assurance clause: 26 27 The Contractor, subrecipient, or Subcontractor shall not discriminate on the 28 basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. 29 The Contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in 30 the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the 31 Contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this 32 Contract, which may result in the termination of this Contract or such other 33 remedy as the recipient deems appropriate, which may include, but is not 34 limited to: 35 36

(1) Withholding monthly progress payments; 37 38 (2) Assessing sanctions; 39 40 (3) Liquidated damages; and/or 41 42 (4) Disqualifying the Contractor from future bidding as non-responsible. 43

44 Notice 45 If the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Consultant, Regular Dealer, or service 46 provider is deemed to be in non-compliance, the Contractor will be informed in 47 writing, by certified mail by the Engineer that sanctions will be imposed for 48 failure to meet the UDBE COA Commitment and/or submit documentation of 49 good faith efforts. The notice will state the specific sanctions to be imposed 50 which may include impacting a Contractor or other entity’s ability to participate 51 in future contracts. 52


1 Sanctions 2 If it is determined that the Contractor’s failure to meet all or part of the UDBE COA 3 Commitment is due to the Contractor’s inadequate good faith efforts throughout the 4 life of the Contract, including failure to submit timely, required Good Faith Efforts 5 information and documentation, the Contractor may be required to pay DBE penalty 6 equal to the amount of the unmet Commitment, in addition to the sanctions outlined 7 in Section 1-07.11(5). 8 9 Payment 10 Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this 11 Specification and any other associated DBE requirements is included in payment 12 for the associated Contract items of Work, except otherwise provided in the 13 Specifications. 14

15 1-07.11.OPT4.FR1 16

(April 3, 2017) 17 Special Training Provisions 18

General Requirements 19 The Contractor’s equal employment opportunity, affirmative action program shall 20 include the requirements set forth below. The Contractor shall provide on-the-job 21 training aimed at developing trainees to journeyman status in the trades involved. 22 The number of training hours shall be *** $$1$$ ***. Trainees shall not be assigned 23 less than 400 hours. The Contractor may elect to accomplish training as part of the 24 work of a subcontractor, however, the Prime Contractor shall retain the 25 responsibility for complying with these Special Provisions. The Contractor shall 26 also ensure that this training provision is made applicable to any subcontract that 27 includes training. 28 29 Trainee Approval 30 The Federal government requires Contracting Agencies to include these training 31 provisions as a condition attached to the receipt of Federal highway funding. The 32 Federal government has determined that the training and promotion of members of 33 certain minority groups and women is a primary objective of this training provision. 34 The Contractor shall make every effort to enroll minority groups and women 35 trainees to the extent such persons are available within a reasonable recruitment 36 area. This training provision is not intended and shall not be used to discriminate 37 against any applicant for training, whether that person is a minority, woman or 38 otherwise. A non-minority male trainee or apprentice may be approved provided 39 the following requirements are met: 40

41 1. The Contractor is otherwise in compliance with the contract’s Equal 42

Employment Opportunity and On-the-Job Training requirements and 43 provides documentation of the efforts taken to fill the specific training 44 position with either minorities or females 45

46 2. or, if not otherwise in compliance, furnishes evidence of his/her systematic 47

and direct recruitment efforts in regard to the position in question and in 48 promoting the enrollment and/or employment of minorities and females in 49 the craft which the proposed trainee is to be trained 50

51


3. and the Contractor has made a good faith effort towards recruiting of 1 minorities and women. As a minimum this good faith effort shall consist of 2 the following: 3

4

Distribution of written notices of available employment 5 opportunities with the Contractor and enrollment opportunities 6 with its unions. Distribution should include but not be limited to; 7 minority and female recruitment sources and minority and female 8 community organizations; 9

10

Records documenting the Contractor’s efforts and the outcome of 11 those efforts, to employ minority and female applicants and/or 12 refer them to unions; 13

14

Records reflecting the Contractor’s efforts in participating in 15 developing minority and female on-the-job training opportunities, 16 including upgrading programs and apprenticeship opportunities; 17

18

Distribution of written notices to unions and training programs 19 disseminating the Contractor’s EEO policy and requesting 20 cooperation in achieving EEO and OJT obligations. 21

22 No employee shall be employed as a trainee in any classification in which the 23 employee has successfully completed a training course leading to journeyman 24 status or in which the employee has been employed as a journeyman. The 25 Contractor’s records shall document the methods for determining the trainee’s 26 status and findings in each case. When feasible, 25 percent of apprentices or 27 trainees in each occupation shall be in their first year of apprenticeship or training. 28 29 For the purpose of this specification, acceptable training programs are those 30 employing trainees/apprentices registered with the following: 31

32 1. Washington State Department of Labor & Industries — State 33

Apprenticeship Training Council (SATC) approved apprenticeship 34 agreement: 35

36 a. Pursuant to RCW 49.04.060, an apprenticeship agreement shall 37

be; 38 39

i. an individual written agreement between an employer 40 and apprentice 41

ii. a written agreement between (an employer or an 42 association of employers) and an organization of 43 employees describing conditions of employment for 44 apprentices 45

iii. a written statement describing conditions of 46 employment for apprentices in a plant where there is no 47 bona fide employee organization. 48

49 All such agreements shall conform to the basic standards and other 50 provisions of RCW Chapter 49. 51

52


2. Apprentices must be registered with U.S. Department of Labor — 1 Apprenticeship Training, Employer, and Labor Services (ATELS) approved 2 program. 3

4 Or 5 6

3. Trainees participating in a non-ATELS/SATC program, which has been 7 approved by the contracting agency for the specific project. 8

9 4. For assistance in locating trainee candidates, the Contractor may call 10

WSDOT's OJT Support Services Technical Advisor at (360) 704-6314. 11 12

Obligation to Provide Information 13 Upon starting a new trainee, the Contractor shall furnish the trainee a copy of the 14 approved program the Contractor will follow in providing the training. Upon 15 completion of the training, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Agency with 16 a certification showing the type and length of training satisfactorily completed by 17 each trainee. 18

19 Training Program Approval 20 The Training Program shall meet the following requirements: 21

22 1. The Training Program (DOT Form 272-049) must be submitted to the 23

Engineer for approval prior to commencing contract work and shall be 24 resubmitted when modifications to the program occur. 25

26 2. The minimum length and type of training for each classification will be as 27

established in the training program as approved by the Contracting 28 Agency. 29

30 3. The Training Program shall contain the trades proposed for training, the 31

number of trainees, the hours assigned to the trade and the estimated 32 beginning work date for each trainee. 33

34 4. Unless otherwise specified, Training Programs will be approved if the 35

proposed number of training hours equals the training hours required by 36 contract and the trainees are not assigned less than 400 hours each. 37

38 5. After approval of the training program, information concerning each 39

individual trainee and good faith effort documentation shall be submitted 40 on (DOT Form 272-050.) 41

42 6. In King County, laborer trainees or apprentices will not be approved on 43

contracts containing less than 2000 training hours as specified in this 44 Section. In King County, no more than twenty percent (20%) of hours 45 proposed for trainees or apprentices shall be in the laborer classification 46 when the contract contains 2000 or more hours of training as specified in 47 this Section. Trainees shall not be assigned less than 400 hours. 48

49 7. Flagging programs will not be approved. Other programs that include 50

flagging training will only be approved if the flagging portion is limited to an 51 orientation of not more than 20 hours. 52


1 8. It is the intention of these provisions that training is to be provided in the 2

construction crafts rather than clerk-typists or secretarial-type positions. 3 Training is permissible in lower level management positions such as office 4 engineers, estimators, timekeepers, etc., where the training is oriented 5 toward construction applications. Some off-site training is permissible as 6 long as the training is an integral part of an approved training program. 7

8 9. It is normally expected that a trainee will begin training on the project as 9

soon as feasible after start of work, utilizing the skill involved and remain 10 on the project as long as training opportunities exist in the work 11 classification or upon completion of the training program. It is not required 12 that all trainees be on board for the entire length of the contract. The 13 number trained shall be determined on the basis of the total number 14 enrolled on the contract for a significant period. 15

16 10. Wage Progressions: Trainees will be paid at least the applicable ratios or 17

wage progressions shown in the apprenticeship standards published by 18 the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. In the event 19 that no training program has been established by the Department of Labor 20 and Industries, the trainee shall be paid in accordance with the provisions 21 of RCW 39.12.021 which reads as follows: 22

23 Apprentice workmen employed upon public works projects for whom 24 an apprenticeship agreement has been registered and approved with 25 the State Apprenticeship Council pursuant to RCW 49.04, must be 26 paid at least the prevailing hourly rate for an apprentice of that trade. 27 Any workman for whom an apprenticeship agreement has not been 28 registered and approved by the State Apprenticeship Council shall be 29 considered to be a fully qualified journeyman, and, therefore, shall be 30 paid at the prevailing hourly rate for journeymen. 31

32 Compliance 33 In the event that the Contractor is unable to accomplish the required training hours 34 but can demonstrate a good faith effort to meet the requirements as specified, then 35 the Contracting Agency will adjust the training goals accordingly. 36

37 Requirements for Non ATELS/SATC Approved Training Programs 38 Contractors who are not affiliated with a program approved by ATELS or SATC 39 may have their training program approved provided that the program is submitted 40 for approval on DOT Form 272-049, and the following standards are addressed and 41 incorporated in the Contractor’s program: 42

43

The program establishes minimum qualifications for persons entering the 44 training program. 45

46

The program shall outline the work processes in which the trainee will 47 receive supervised work experience and training on-the-job and the 48 allocation of the approximate time to be spent in each major process. The 49 program shall include the method for recording and reporting the training 50 completed shall be stated. 51

52


The program shall include a numeric ratio of trainees to journeymen 1 consistent with proper supervision, training, safety, and continuity of 2 employment. The ratio language shall be specific and clear as to 3 application in terms of job site and workforce during normal operations 4 (normally considered to fall between 1:10 and 1:4). 5

6

The terms of training shall be stated in hours. The number of hours 7 required for completion to journeyman status shall be comparable to the 8 apprenticeship hours established for that craft by the SATC. The following 9 are examples of programs that are currently approved: 10

11 CRAFT HOURS 12 Laborer 4,000 13 Ironworker 6,000 14 Carpenter 5,200-8,000 15 Construction Electrician 8,000 16 Operating Engineer 6,000-8,000 17 Cement Mason 5,400 18 Teamster 2,100 19

20

The method to be used for recording and reporting the training completed 21 shall be stated. 22

23 Measurement 24 The Contractor may request that the total number of “training” hours for the contract 25 be increased subject to approval by the Contracting Agency. This reimbursement 26 will be made even though the Contractor receives additional training program funds 27 from other sources, provided such other sources do not prohibit other 28 reimbursement. Reimbursement to the Contractor for off-site training as indicated 29 previously may only be made when the Contractor does one or more of the 30 following and the trainees are concurrently employed on a Federal-aid project: 31

32

contributes to the cost of the training, 33

provides the instruction to the trainee, 34

pays the trainee’s wages during the off- site training period. 35 36

Reimbursement will be made upon receipt of a certified invoice that shows the 37 related payroll number, the name of trainee, total hours trained under the program, 38 previously paid hours under the contract, hours due this estimate, and dollar 39 amount due this estimate. The certified invoice shall show a statement indicating 40 the Contractor’s effort to enroll minorities and women when a new enrollment 41 occurs. If a trainee is participating in a SATC/ATELS approved apprenticeship 42 program, a copy of the certificate showing apprenticeship registration must 43 accompany the first invoice on which the individual appears. Reimbursement for 44 training occurring prior to approval of the training program will be allowed if the 45 Contractor verbally notifies the Engineer of this occurrence at the time the 46 apprentice/trainee commences work. A trainee/apprentice, regardless of craft, 47 must have worked on the contract for at least 20 hours to be eligible for 48 reimbursement. 49

50


Payment 1 The Contractor will be reimbursed under the item “Training” per hour for each hour 2 of training for each employee. 3

4 1-07.11.OPT5.GR1 5

(January 7, 2019) 6 Voluntary Minority, Small, Veteran and Women's Business Enterprise (MSVWBE) 7 Participation 8

General Statement 9 The participation of minority, small, veteran, and women business enterprises 10 (MSVWBE) is an important strategic objective for the State of Washington. 11 Voluntary goals for minority, small, veteran and women business enterprises are 12 included in this Contract. The Contractor is encouraged to utilize MSVWBEs in 13 accordance with these Specifications, RCW 39.19 and Executive Order 13-01 14 (issued by the Governor of Washington on May 10, 2013). 15 16 The goals are voluntary; efforts to provide MSVWBEs maximum practicable 17 opportunities are encouraged. 18 19 Non-Discrimination 20 Contractors shall not create barriers to open and fair opportunities for all 21 businesses, including MSVWBEs, to participate in the Work on this Contract. This 22 includes the opportunity to compete for subcontracts as sources of supplies, 23 equipment, construction or services. 24 25 The Contractor shall make Voluntary MSVWBE Participation a part of all 26 subcontracts and agreements entered into as a result of this Contract. 27 28 Voluntary MSVWBE Participation Goals 29 Goals for voluntary MSVWBE participation have been established as a percentage 30 of Contractor’s total Bid amount. 31 32 The Contracting Agency has established the following voluntary goals: 33 34

Minority 10% 35 Small 5% 36 Veteran 5% 37 Women 6% 38

39 Amounts paid to an MSVWBE will be credited to every voluntary goal in which they 40 are eligible. In other words, participation may be credited for participation in more 41 than one category. If the Contractor is a MSVWBE, their Work will be credited to 42 the voluntary goals in which they are eligible. 43 44 MSVWBE Abbreviations and Definitions 45

Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 46 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in 47 the procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or 48 supplies required for the performance of the Contract; or, persons/companies 49 who arrange or expedite transactions. 50 51 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 52


A MSVWBE performs a commercially useful function when it is responsible for 1 execution of the work of the contract and is carrying out its responsibilities by 2 actually performing, managing, and supervising the work involved. To perform 3 a commercially useful function, the MSVWBE must also be responsible, with 4 respect to materials and supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, 5 determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, and installing (where 6 applicable) and paying for the material itself. 7 8 The MSVWBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 9 participant in a transaction, contract, or Project through which the funds are 10 passed in order to obtain the appearance of MSVWBE participation. 11 12 Manufacturer (MSVWBE) – A MSVWBE firm that operates or maintains a 13 factory or establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, 14 articles, or equipment required under the Contract. A MSVWBE Manufacturer 15 shall produce finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or 16 purchase and substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable 17 for construction use before reselling them. 18 19 Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) – A minority owned business meeting 20 the requirements of RCW 39.19 and WAC 326-20 and certified by the 21 Washington State Office of Minority & Women’s Business Enterprises. 22 23 Pass Through – When the MSVWBE firm participates as an extra participant 24 in a transaction, through which funds are passed in order to give the 25 appearance of participation by the MSVWBE firm and count toward the 26 voluntary goal. 27 28 Small Business – A business meeting the Washington State requirements for 29 a “Small business”, “Minibusiness” or “Microbusiness as defined in RCW 30 39.26.010 and included on the WSDOT Office of Equal Opportunity list of 31 Small Businesses at 32 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity/bddirectory.htm 33 34 Supplier (MSVWBE) – A MSVWBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a 35 store, warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies 36 required for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and 37 regularly sold to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Supplier, 38 the MSVWBE firm must be an established business that engages in as its 39 principal business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products 40 in question. A Supplier in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and 41 petroleum products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it 42 both owns and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any 43 supplementing of suppliers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-term 44 formal lease agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, packagers, 45 manufacturers’ representatives, or other persons who arrange or expedite 46 transactions shall not be regarded as Suppliers within the meaning of this 47 definition. 48 49 Veteran Business – A veteran owned business meeting the requirements of 50 RCW 43.60A.010 and included on the WSDOT Office of Equal Opportunity list 51


of Veteran Businesses at 1 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity/bddirectory.htm 2 3 Women Business Enterprise (WBE) – A women owned business meeting 4 the requirements of RCW 39.19 and WAC 326-20 and certified by the 5 Washington State Office of Minority & Women’s Business Enterprises. 6

7 Crediting MSVWBE Participation 8 Subcontractors proposed as counting toward the MSVWBE goal must be certified 9 and be performing a CUF during the execution of the Work. 10 11 MSVWBE participation cannot be counted toward the Contractor’s MSVWBE 12 Voluntary Goal until the amount being counted has actually been paid to the 13 MSVWBE. 14 15 The following are some examples of what may be counted as MSVWBE 16 participation: 17 18

MSVWBE Prime Contractor 19 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 20 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the MSVWBE Prime 21 Contractor performs with its own forces and is credited to perform. 22 23 MSVWBE Subcontractor 24 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract that 25 is equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the MSVWBE 26 performs with its own forces. The value of work performed by the MSVWBE 27 includes the cost of supplies and materials purchased by the MSVWBE and 28 equipment leased by the MSVWBE, for its work on the Contract. Supplies, 29 materials or equipment obtained by a MSVWBE that are not utilized or 30 incorporated in the Contract work by the MSVWBE will not be eligible for 31 MSVWBE credit unless the MSVWBE is certified as a supplier or equipment 32 leasing company. 33 34 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 35 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to 36 MSVWBE subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited toward the 37 MSVWBE Voluntary Goals. 38 39 MSVWBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease 40 includes the operator. The MSVWBE is expected to operate the equipment 41 used in the performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. 42 43 If a MSVWBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another firm, 44 the value of the subcontracted Work may be counted toward the MSVWBE 45 Voluntary Goal only if the MSVWBE’s Lower-Tier Subcontractor is also a 46 MSVWBE. 47 48 MSVWBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 49 There must be a subcontract agreement that fully describes the distinct 50 elements of Work committed to be performed by the MSVWBE. The 51 subcontract agreement shall incorporate requirements of the Contract. 52


Subcontract agreements of all tiers, including lease agreements, shall be 1 readily available at the Project site for the Engineer’s review. 2 3 MSVWBE Service Provider 4 When a MSVWBE participates as a service provider or consultant and 5 provides a bona fide services such as professional, technical, consultant, or 6 managerial services, 100 percent of the total cost counts toward the MSVWBE 7 Voluntary Goal if the firm performs a CUF. 8 9 MSVWBE Broker 10 When a MSVWBE participates as a broker (i.e. arranging a transaction or 11 service but does not provide a work product or enhancement), only the dollar 12 value of the fee or commission charged or 20 percent of the total dollar value 13 of expenditures by the MSVWBE (whichever is greater) counts toward the 14 MSVWBE Voluntary Goal if the firm performs a CUF. 15 16 Trucking 17 A MSVWBE trucking firm’s participation will be credited to MSVWBE Voluntary 18 Goal if the MSVWBE trucking firm has one leased or owned truck working on 19 the project and the MSVWBE trucking firm performs a CUF. MSVWBE 20 trucking companies may lease trucks from other MSVWBE firms and non-21 MSVWBE firms and count this work toward the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 22 23 A MSVWBE trucking firm that is also a supplier or manufacturer of the 24 materials or goods being transported can count 100 percent of the dollar value 25 toward the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. For an MSVWBE that is not a supplier or 26 manufacturer, only the fee charged to deliver the goods or materials can be 27 counted toward the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 28 29 MSVWBE Manufacturer and MSVWBE Supplier 30 If materials or supplies are obtained from a MSVWBE Manufacturer, one 31 hundred percent (100%) of the cost of materials or supplies can count toward 32 the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 33 34 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased 35 from a MSVWBE Supplier may be credited toward meeting the MSVWBE 36 Voluntary Goal. If the role of the MSVWBE Supplier is determined to be that of 37 a pass-through, then no MSVWBE credit will be given for its services. If the 38 role of the MSVWBE Supplier is determined to be that of a Broker, then 39 MSVWBE credit shall be limited to the fee or commission it receives for its 40 services. 41 42

Procedures after Execution 43 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 44 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work 45 performed by a MSVWBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment 46 must be commensurate with the work actually performed by the MSVWBE, if 47 the Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. If a MSVWBE 48 does not perform “all” of its responsibilities on a contract, it has not performed 49 a CUF and their Work cannot be counted toward MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 50 51


To determine whether an MSVWBE is performing a CUF, the Contractor shall 1 evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry practices, whether the 2 amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is commensurate with the 3 work it is actually performing and the MSVWBE credit claimed for its 4 performance of the work, and other relevant factors. 5 6

Leasing of Equipment 7 Leasing of equipment from a leasing company is allowed. However, 8 leasing/purchasing equipment from the Contractor is not allowed. Lease 9 agreements shall be readily available for review by the Engineer. 10 11 Traffic Control 12 In order for a MSVWBE traffic control company to be considered to be 13 performing a CUF, the MSVWBE must be in control of its work inclusive of 14 supervision. The MSVWBE shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who 15 is directly involved in the management and supervision of the traffic 16 control employees and services. 17

18 Joint Checks 19 Joint checks will only be allowed for the purpose of purchasing supplies and 20 materials. The MSVWBE Subcontractor must submit a request to the Engineer 21 and receive approval from the Engineer prior to using a joint check to pay for 22 supplies and materials. Supplies and materials purchased with an approved 23 joint check shall count toward the voluntary goals. 24 25 Joint checks that did not receive prior approval from the Engineer or used for 26 purposes other than the purchase of supplies and materials shall not count 27 towards the voluntary goals. 28 29 Prompt Payment 30 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-31 08.1. Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 32 return of retainage. 33 34 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 35 this contract. 36 37 Removal from MSVWBE Program 38 When a MSVWBE is “removed” from the MSVWBE program during the course 39 of the Contract, the participation of that MSVWBE shall continue to count 40 towards the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal as long as the subcontract with the 41 MSVWBE was executed prior to the removal notice. 42

43 MSVWBE Participation Plan 44 A MSVWBE Participation Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the start 45 of Work on the project. The plan is submitted for the Contracting Agency’s 46 information. The plan shall include the information identified in the guidelines at 47 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/EqualOpportunity/MSVWBE.htm. 48 49 Approval of the plan is not required; however, an incomplete plan will be returned 50 for correction and resubmittal. An updated MSVWBE Participation Plan will be 51 submitted for Review and Comment annually on the date the original Participation 52


Plan was submitted. The Contractor shall provide a 30 Calendar Day review period 1 for WSDOT Review and Comment on all MSVWBE Participation Plan submittals. 2 3 MSVWBE Reporting 4 The Contractor shall report payments to all firms that were used as Subcontractors, 5 lower tier Subcontractors, manufactures, regular dealers, or service providers on 6 the Contract Work each month between Execution of the Contract and when the 7 Contract final estimate is processed, using the application available at 8 https://wsdot.diversitycompliance.com. The monthly report is due 20 Calendar Days 9 following the end of the month, whether payments were made or work occurred. 10 11 The monthly report shall include payments to all businesses regardless of their 12 listing on the MSVWBE Inclusion Plan. If the Contractor is a MSVWBE, the 13 amounts paid by WSDOT for Work performed by the certified Contractor shall also 14 be reported. 15 16 After Execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall send an email to 17 [email protected] containing the following information: the first and last name, 18 email address, title, and phone number of the person who will be submitting the 19 above reports for their company. The email shall include the WSDOT contract 20 number they will be reporting on. After receipt of this information by WSDOT, the 21 Contractor will receive an email providing information about their assignment. 22 Training and instructions are available in the application. 23 24 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with this 25 contract. 26 27 MSVWBE Payment 28 All costs for implementation of the requirements for Voluntary MSVWBE 29 Participation shall be included in the associated items of Contract Work. 30

31 1-07.11.OPT6.GR1 32

(June 1, 2017) 33 Small Business Enterprise Participation 34 The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) Program is an element of the Disadvantaged 35 Business Enterprise (DBE) Program in accordance with the requirements of 49 CFR 36 Part 26.39. As such, the requirements of this contract establish affirmative efforts to 37 utilize SBE certified firms on construction projects. No preference will be included in the 38 evaluation of Bids/Proposals. No minimum level of SBE participation shall be required 39 as a Condition of Award and Bids/Proposals may not be rejected or considered non-40 responsive on that basis. 41 42

Voluntary SBE Goals 43 A voluntary goal amount of ten percent of the Contract bid amount is established. 44 45 The goal is voluntary, but achievement of the goal is encouraged. No preference 46 will be included in the evaluation of bids/proposals. Bidders may contact the 47 Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (OMWBE) 48 at 360-664-9750 or visit www.omwbe.wa.gov to obtain information on certified SBE 49 firms. 50 51


Required SBE Participation Plan 1 The Contractor shall submit a SBE Participation Plan prior to commencing contract 2 work. Although the goal is voluntary, the outreach efforts to provide SBE maximum 3 practicable opportunities are not. 4 5 For SBE Participation Plan Drafting Guidelines, please visit: 6 7

www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity. 8 9

Prompt Payment 10 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-08.1. 11 Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as return of 12 retainage. 13 14 Required SBE Reporting 15 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize DBEs 16 to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that will enable 17 the Engineer to verify DBE participation throughout the life of the project. 18 19 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with this 20 contract. 21 22 Definitions 23 Regardless of race or gender, a SBE is one certified by OMWBE as such, where 24 the firm’s: 25 26

Three year averaged gross receipts are less than $22.41 million dollars, 27 with smaller industry standards applicable 28 29

Is at least 51% owned and controlled by an individual or individuals with a 30 personal net worth less than $1.32 million dollars 31 32

A Micro Small Business Enterprise is a firm certified as an SBE with 33 average gross receipts for three years less than one million dollars 34

35 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1 36

(June 1, 2017) 37 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Participation 38 The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and 39 USDOT’s official interpretations (i.e., Questions & Answers) apply to this Contract. 40 Demonstrating compliance with these Specifications is a Condition of Award (COA) of 41 this Contract. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Specification may result in 42 your Bid being found to be nonresponsive resulting in rejection or other sanctions as 43 provided by Contract. 44 45

DBE Abbreviations and Definitions 46 Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 47 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in 48 the procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or 49 supplies required for the performance of the Contract; or, persons/companies 50 who arrange or expedite transactions. 51 52

http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity


Certified Business Description – Specific descriptions of work the DBE is 1 certified to perform, as identified in the Certified Firm Directory, under the 2 Vendor Information page. 3 4 Certified Firm Directory – A database of all Minority, Women, and 5 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises currently certified by Washington State. 6 The on-line Directory is available to Contractors for their use in identifying and 7 soliciting interest from DBE firms. The database is located under the Firm 8 Certification section of the Diversity Management and Compliance System 9 web page (https://wsdot.diversitycompliance.com). 10 11 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 12 49 CFR 26.55(c)(1) defines commercially useful function as: “A DBE performs 13 a commercially useful function when it is responsible for execution of the work 14 of the contract and is carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, 15 managing, and supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially 16 useful function, the DBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials 17 and supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality 18 and quantity, ordering the material, and installing (where applicable) and 19 paying for the material itself. To determine whether a DBE is performing a 20 commercially useful function, you must evaluate the amount of work 21 subcontracted, industry practices, whether the amount the firm is to be paid 22 under the contract is commensurate with the work it is actually performing and 23 the DBE credit claimed for its performance of the work, and other relevant 24 factors.” 25 26 Contract – For this provision only, this definition supplements Section 1-01.3. 27 49 CFR 26.5 defines contract as: “… a legally binding relationship obligating a 28 seller to furnish supplies or services (including, but not limited to, construction 29 and professional services) and the buyer to pay for them. For purposes of this 30 part, a lease is considered to be a contract.” 31 32 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – A business firm certified by the 33 Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises, as 34 meeting the criteria outlined in 49 CFR 26 regarding DBE certification. 35 36 DBE Commitment – The dollar amount the Contractor indicates they will be 37 subcontracting to be applied towards the DBE Condition of Award Goal as 38 shown on the DBE Utilization Certification Form for each DBE Subcontractor. 39 This DBE Commitment amount will be incorporated into the Contract and shall 40 be considered a Contract requirement. Any changes to the DBE Commitment 41 shall require Engineer’s approval. 42 43 DBE Condition of Award (COA) Goal – An assigned numerical percentage of 44 the Bid amount of the Contract. This is the minimum amount that the Bidder 45 must commit to by submission of the Utilization Certification Form and/or by 46 Good Faith Effort (GFE). The DBE COA Goal will also be applied to change 47 orders associated with this Contract. 48 49 Force Account Work – Work measured and paid in accordance with Section 50 1-09.6. 51 52


Good Faith Efforts – Efforts to achieve the DBE COA Goal or other 1 requirements of this part which, by their scope, intensity, and appropriateness 2 to the objective, can reasonably be expected to fulfill the program requirement. 3 4 Manufacturer (DBE) – A DBE firm that operates or maintains a factory or 5 establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, 6 or equipment required under the Contract. A DBE Manufacturer shall produce 7 finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or purchase and 8 substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable for construction 9 use before reselling them. 10 11 Regular Dealer (DBE) – A DBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, 12 warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required 13 for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold 14 to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Regular Dealer, the DBE 15 firm must be an established regular business that engages in as its principal 16 business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products in 17 question. A Regular Dealer in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and 18 petroleum products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it 19 both owns and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any 20 supplementing of regular dealers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-21 term formal lease agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, 22 packagers, manufacturers’ representatives, or other persons who arrange or 23 expedite transactions shall not be regarded as Regular Dealers within the 24 meaning of this definition. 25 26

DBE COA Goal 27 The Contracting Agency has established a COA Contract Goal in the amount of: *** 28 $$1$$ *** 29 30 DBE Eligibility/Selection of DBEs 31 In order to determine the distinct element(s) of work for which a DBE is certified, 32 Contractors should refer to the Certified Business Description. The Contractor shall 33 not use NAICS codes on the DBE Utilization Certification. 34 35 Crediting DBE Participation 36 Subcontractors proposed as COA must be certified prior to the due date for bids on 37 the Contract. All non-COA DBE Subcontractors shall be certified before the 38 subcontract on which they are participating is executed. 39 40 Be advised that although a firm is listed in the Certified Firm Directory, there are 41 cases where the listed firm is in a temporary suspension status. The Contractor 42 shall review the OMWBE Suspended DBE Firms list. A DBE firm that is included 43 on this list may not enter into new contracts that count towards participation. 44 DBE participation cannot be counted toward the Contractor’s contract goal until the 45 amount being counted has actually been paid to the DBE including return of 46 retainage. 47 48 In all cases the DBE must be certified in advance for the work being considered 49 and performing a CUF during the execution of the Work. The following are some 50 examples of what may be counted as DBE participation. 51 52


DBE Prime Contractor 1 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 2 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE Prime Contractor 3 performs with its own forces and is credited to perform. 4 5 DBE Subcontractor 6 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract that 7 is equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE 8 performs with its own forces. The value of work performed by the DBE 9 includes the cost of supplies and materials purchased by the DBE and 10 equipment leased by the DBE, for its work on the contract. Supplies, materials 11 or equipment obtained by a DBE that are not utilized or incorporated in the 12 contract work by the DBE will not be eligible for DBE credit unless the DBE is 13 certified as a supplier or equipment leasing company. 14 15 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 16 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to 17 DBE subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited. 18 19 DBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease includes 20 the operator. The DBE is expected to operate the equipment used in the 21 performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. Situations 22 where equipment is leased and used by the DBE, but payment is deducted 23 from the Contractor’s payment to the DBE is not allowed. 24 25 If a DBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another firm, the 26 value of the subcontracted Work may be counted toward the DBE COA Goal 27 only if the DBE’s Lower-Tier Subcontractor is also a DBE. Work subcontracted 28 to a non-DBE does not count towards the DBE COA Goal. 29 30 DBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 31 There must be a subcontract agreement that complies with 49 CFR Part 26 32 and fully describes the distinct elements of Work committed to be performed 33 by the DBE. The subcontract agreement shall incorporate requirements of the 34 primary Contract. Subcontract agreements of all tiers, including lease 35 agreements shall be readily available at the project site for the Engineer’s 36 review. 37 38 DBE Service Provider 39 The value of fees or commissions charged by a DBE Broker, a DBE behaving 40 in a manner of a Broker, or another service provider for providing a bona fide 41 service, such as professional, technical, consultant, managerial services, or for 42 providing bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of the 43 contract will only be credited towards meeting the DBE COA Goal if the 44 fee/commission is determined by the Contracting Agency to be reasonable and 45 the firm has performed a CUF. Documentation will be required to support the 46 fee/commission charged by the DBE. 47 48 Force Account Work 49 When the Contractor elects to utilize force account Work to meet the DBE 50 COA Goal, as demonstrated by listing this force account Work on the DBE 51 Utilization Certification Form, for the purposes of meeting DBE COA Goal, only 52


50% of the Proposal amount shall be credited toward the Contractors 1 Commitment to meet the DBE COA Goal. 2 3 One hundred percent of the actual amounts paid to the DBE for the force 4 account Work shall be credited towards DBE COA Goal or DBE participation. 5 6 Temporary Traffic Control 7 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of only “Flagging”, the DBE firm 8 must provide a Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) and flagger, which are under 9 the direct control of the DBE. The DBE firm shall also provide all flagging 10 equipment (e.g. paddles, hard hats, and vests). 11 12 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of “Traffic Control Services”, the 13 DBE firm must provide a TCS, flaggers, and traffic control items (e.g., cones, 14 barrels, signs, etc.) and be in total control of all items in implementing the 15 traffic control for the project. In addition if the DBE firm utilizes the Contractor’s 16 equipment, such as Transportable Attenuators and Portable Changeable 17 Message Signs (PCMS) no DBE credit can be taken for supplying and 18 operating the items. 19 20 Trucking 21 DBE trucking firm participation may only be credited to the DBE COA Goal for 22 the value of the hauling services, not for the materials being hauled unless the 23 trucking firm is also certified as a supplier. In situations where the DBE’s work 24 is priced per ton, the value of the hauling service must be calculated 25 separately from the value of the materials in order to determine DBE credit for 26 hauling. 27 28 The DBE trucking firm must own and operate at least one licensed, insured 29 and operational truck on the contract. The truck must be of the type that is 30 necessary to perform the hauling duties required under the contract. The DBE 31 receives credit for the value of the transportation services it provides on the 32 Contract using trucks it owns or leases, licenses, insures, and operates with 33 drivers it employs. 34 35 The DBE may lease additional trucks from another DBE firm. 36 37 The trucking Work subcontracted to any non-DBE trucking firm will not receive 38 credit for Work done on the project. The DBE may lease trucks from a non-39 DBE truck leasing company, but can only receive credit towards DBE 40 participation if the DBE uses its own employees as drivers. 41 42 DBE credit for a truck broker is limited to the fee/commission that the DBE 43 receives for arranging transportation services. 44 45 Truck registration and lease agreements shall be readily available at the 46 project site for the Engineer review. 47 48 DBE Manufacturer and DBE Regular Dealer 49 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the manufactured product obtained 50 from a DBE manufacturer may count toward the DBE COA Goal. The DBE 51 Manufacturer shall be certified as such by OMWBE. 52


1 Sixty percent (60%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased from a DBE 2 Regular Dealer may be credited toward meeting the DBE COA Goal. If the 3 role of the DBE Regular Dealer is determined to be that of a pass-through, 4 then no DBE credit will be given for its services. If the role of the DBE Regular 5 Dealer is determined to be that of a Broker, then DBE credit shall be limited to 6 the fee or commission it receives for its services. Regular Dealer status and 7 the amount of credit is determined on a Contract-by-Contract basis. 8 9 Regular Dealer DBE firms must be approved before being used on a project. 10 The WSDOT Approved Regular Dealer list published on WSDOT’s Office of 11 Equal Opportunity (OEO) web site must include the specific project for which 12 approval is being requested. For purposes of the DBE COA Goal participation, 13 the Regular Dealer must submit the Regular Dealer Status Request form a 14 minimum of five days prior to bid opening. 15 16 Purchase of materials or supplies from a DBE which is neither a manufacturer 17 nor a regular dealer, (i.e. Broker) only the fees or commissions charged for 18 assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or 19 transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on a 20 job site, can count toward DBE COA Goal, provided the fees are not excessive 21 as compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services. Documentation 22 will be required to support the fee/commission charged by the DBE. The cost 23 of the materials and supplies themselves cannot be counted toward DBE COA 24 Goal. 25 26 Note: Requests to be listed as a Regular Dealer will only be processed if the 27


31 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 32 To be eligible for award of the Contract, the Bidder shall properly complete and 33 submit a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification with the 34 Bidder’s sealed Bid Proposal, as specified in Section 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 35 The Bidder’s Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification must 36 clearly demonstrate how the Bidder intends to meet the DBE COA Goal. A 37 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification (WSDOT Form 272-38 056) is included in your Proposal package for this purpose as well as instructions 39 on how to properly fill out the form. 40 41 The Bidder is advised that the items listed below when listed in the Utilization 42 Certification must have their amounts reduced to the percentages shown and those 43 reduced amounts will be the amount applied towards meeting the DBE COA Goal. 44 45

• Force account at 50% 46 • Regular dealer at 60% 47

48 In the event of arithmetic errors in completing the Disadvantaged Business 49 Enterprise Utilization Certification the amount listed to be applied towards the DBE 50 COA Goal for each DBE shall govern and the DBE total amount shall be adjusted 51 accordingly. 52


1 Note: The Contracting Agency shall consider as non-responsive and shall 2

reject any Bid Proposal submitted that does not contain a 3 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification Form that 4 accurately demonstrates how the Bidder intends to meet the DBE 5 COA Goal. 6

7 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Document(s) 8 The Bidder shall submit a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation 9 Document (completed and signed by the DBE) for each DBE firm listed in the 10 Bidder’s completed Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification 11 submitted with the Bid. Failure to do so will result in the associated participation 12 being disallowed, which may cause the Bid to be determined to be nonresponsive 13 resulting in Bid rejection. 14 15 The Confirmation Documents provide confirmation from the DBEs that they are 16 participating in the Contract as provided in the Contractor’s Commitment. The 17 Confirmation Documents must be consistent with the Utilization Certification. 18 19 A Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Document (form No. 20 422-031) is included in your Proposal package for this purpose. 21 22 The form(s) shall be received as specified in the special provisions for Section 1-23 02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 24 25 It is prohibited for the Bidder to require a DBE to submit a Written Confirmation 26 Document with any part of the form left blank. Should the Contracting Agency 27 determine that an incomplete Written Confirmation Document was signed by a 28 DBE, the validity of the document comes into question. The associated DBE 29 participation may not receive credit. 30 31 Selection of Successful Bidder/Good Faith Efforts (GFE) 32 The successful Bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest 33 responsive Bid, which demonstrates a good faith effort to achieve the DBE COA 34 Goal. The Contracting Agency, at any time during the selection process, may 35 request a breakdown of the bid items and amounts that are counted towards the 36 overall contract goal for any of the DBEs listed on the DBE Utilization Certification. 37 38 Achieving the DBE COA Goal may be accomplished in one of two ways: 39 40

1. By meeting the DBE COA Goal 41 Submission of the DBE Utilization Certification and supporting DBE 42 Written Confirmation Document(s) showing the Bidder has obtained 43 enough DBE participation to meet or exceed the DBE COA Goal. 44

45 2. By documentation that the Bidder made adequate GFE to meet the DBE 46

COA Goal 47 The Bidder may demonstrate a GFE in whole or part through GFE 48 documentation ONLY IN THE EVENT a Bidder’s efforts to solicit sufficient 49 DBE participation have been unsuccessful. The Bidder must supply GFE 50 documentation in addition to the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 51


Utilization Certification, and supporting Disadvantaged Business 1 Enterprise (DBE) Written Confirmation Document(s). 2

3 Note: In the case where the Bidder was awarded the contract based on 4

demonstrating adequate GFE the advertised DBE COA Goal will not 5 be reduced. The Bidder shall demonstrate a GFE during the life of the 6 Contract to attain the advertised DBE COA Goal. 7

8 GFE documentation shall be received, as specified in the special provisions for 9 Section 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 10 11 The Contracting Agency will review the GFE documentation and will determine if 12 the Bidder made an adequate good faith effort. 13 14 Good Faith Effort (GFE) Documentation 15 GFE is evaluated when: 16 17

1. Determining award of a Contract that has COA goal, 18 19 2. When a COA DBE is terminated and substitution is required, and 20 21 3. Prior to Physical Completion when determining whether the Contractor 22

has satisfied its DBE commitments. 23 24 49 CFR Part 26, Appendix A is intended as general guidance and does not, in 25 itself, demonstrate adequate good faith efforts. The following is a list of types of 26 actions, which would be considered as part of the Bidder’s GFE to achieve DBE 27 participation. It is not intended to be a mandatory checklist, nor is it intended to be 28 exclusive or exhaustive. Other factors or types of efforts may be relevant in 29 appropriate cases. 30 31

1. Soliciting through all reasonable and available means (e.g. attendance at 32 pre-bid meetings, advertising and/or written notices) the interest of all 33 certified DBEs who have the capability to perform the Work of the 34 Contract. The Bidder must solicit this interest within sufficient time to allow 35 the DBEs to respond to the solicitation. The Bidder must determine with 36 certainty if the DBEs are interested by taking appropriate steps to follow 37 up initial solicitations. 38

39 2. Selecting portions of the Work to be performed by DBEs in order to 40

increase the likelihood that the DBE COA Goal will be achieved. This 41 includes, where appropriate, breaking out contract Work items into 42 economically feasible units to facilitate DBE participation, even when the 43 Contractor might otherwise prefer to perform these Work items with its 44 own forces. 45

46 3. Providing interested DBEs with adequate information about the Plans, 47

Specifications, and requirements of the Contract in a timely manner to 48 assist them in responding to a solicitation. 49 50 a. Negotiating in good faith with interested DBEs. It is the Bidder’s 51

responsibility to make a portion of the Work available to DBE 52


subcontractors and suppliers and to select those portions of the Work 1 or material needs consistent with the available DBE subcontractors 2 and suppliers, so as to facilitate DBE participation. Evidence of such 3 negotiation includes the names, addresses, and telephone numbers 4 of DBEs that were considered; a description of the information 5 provided regarding the Plans and Specifications for the Work 6 selected for subcontracting; and evidence as to why additional 7 agreements could not be reached for DBEs to perform the Work. 8

9 b. A Bidder using good business judgment would consider a number of 10

factors in negotiating with subcontractors, including DBE 11 subcontractors, and would take a firm’s price and capabilities as well 12 as the DBE COA Goal into consideration. However, the fact that there 13 may be some additional costs involved in finding and using DBEs is 14 not in itself sufficient reason for a Bidder’s failure to meet the DBE 15 COA Goal, as long as such costs are reasonable. Also, the ability or 16 desire of a Contractor to perform the Work of a Contract with its own 17 organization does not relieve the Bidder of the responsibility to make 18 Good Faith Efforts. Contractors are not, however, required to accept 19 higher quotes from DBEs if the price difference is excessive or 20 unreasonable. 21

22 4. Not rejecting DBEs as being unqualified without sound reasons based on 23

a thorough investigation of their capabilities. The Contractor’s standing 24 within its industry, membership in specific groups, organizations, or 25 associations and political or social affiliations (for example union vs. non-26 union employee status) are not legitimate causes for the rejection or non-27 solicitation of bids in the Contractor’s efforts to meet the DBE COA Goal. 28

29 5. Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of 30

credit, or insurance as required by the recipient or Contractor. 31 32 6. Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining necessary 33

equipment, supplies, materials, or related assistance or services. 34 35 7. Effectively using the services of available minority/women community 36

organizations; minority/women contractors’ groups; local, State, and 37 Federal minority/women business assistance offices; and other 38 organizations as allowed on a case-by-case basis to provide assistance in 39 the recruitment and placement of DBEs. 40

41 8. Documentation of GFE must include copies of each DBE and non-DBE 42

subcontractor quotes submitted to the Bidder when a non-DBE 43 subcontractor is selected over a DBE for Work on the Contract. (ref. 44 updated DBE regulations – 26.53(b)(2)(vi) & App. A) 45

46 Administrative Reconsideration of GFE Documentation 47 Any Bidder has the right to reconsideration but only for the purpose of reassessing 48 the GFE documentation that was originally submitted with their Bid, and determined 49 to be inadequate. 50 51


• The Bidder must request within 48 hours of notification of being 1 nonresponsive or forfeit the right to reconsideration. 2

3 • The reconsideration decision on the adequacy of the Bidder’s GFE 4

documentation shall be made by an official who did not take part in the 5 original determination. 6

7 • Only original GFE documentation submitted as a supplement to the Bid 8

shall be considered. The Bidder shall not introduce new documentation at 9 the reconsideration hearing. 10

11 • The Bidder shall have the opportunity to meet in person with the official for 12

the purpose of setting forth the Bidder’s position as to why the GFE 13 documentation demonstrates a sufficient effort. 14

15 • The reconsideration official shall provide the Bidder with a written decision 16

on reconsideration within five working days of the hearing explaining the 17 basis for their finding. 18

19 Procedures between Award and Execution 20 After Award and prior to Execution, the Contractor shall provide the additional 21 information described below. Failure to comply shall result in the forfeiture of the 22 Bidder’s Proposal bond or deposit. 23 24

1. A DBE Bid Item Breakdown is required which shall contain the following 25 information for all DBEs as shown on the Disadvantaged Business 26 Enterprise Utilization Certification: 27

28 a. Correct business name, federal employee identification number (if 29

available), and mailing address. 30 31 b. List of all Bid items assigned to each DBE with a clear description of 32

Work to be performed for each Bid item and the dollar value of the 33 Work to be performed by the DBE. 34

35 c. Description of partial items (if any) to be sublet to each DBE 36

specifying the Work committed under each item to be performed and 37 including the dollar value of the DBE portion. 38

39 d. Total amounts shown for each DBE shall match the amount shown 40

on the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification. A 41 DBE Bid Item Breakdown that does not conform to the 42 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification or that 43 demonstrates a different amount of DBE participation than that 44 included in the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 45 Certification will be returned for correction. 46

47 2. A list of all firms who submitted a bid or quote in attempt to participate in 48

this project whether they were successful or not. Include the business 49 name and mailing address. 50

51


Note: The firms identified by the Contractor may be contacted by the 1 Contracting Agency to solicit general information as follows: age of the 2 firm and average of its gross annual receipts over the past three-3 years. 4

5 Procedures after Execution 6

Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 7 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work 8 performed by a DBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment 9 must be commensurate with the work actually performed by the DBE. This 10 applies to all DBEs performing Work on a project, whether or not the DBEs are 11 COA, if the Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. The 12 Engineer will conduct CUF reviews to ascertain whether DBEs are performing 13 a CUF. A DBE performs a CUF when it is carrying out its responsibilities of its 14 contract by actually performing, managing, and supervising the Work involved. 15 The DBE must be responsible for negotiating price; determining quality and 16 quantity; ordering the material, installing (where applicable); and paying for the 17 material itself. If a DBE does not perform “all” of these functions on a furnish-18 and-install contract, it has not performed a CUF and the cost of materials 19 cannot be counted toward DBE COA Goal. Leasing of equipment from a 20 leasing company is allowed. However, leasing/purchasing equipment from the 21 Contractor is not allowed. Lease agreements shall be readily available for 22 review by the Engineer. 23 24 In order for a DBE traffic control company to be considered to be performing a 25 CUF, the DBE must be in control of its work inclusive of supervision. The DBE 26 shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who is directly involved in the 27 management and supervision of the traffic control employees and services. 28 29 The DBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 30 participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which the funds are 31 passed in order to obtain the appearance of DBE participation. 32 33 The following are some of the factors that the Engineer will use in determining 34 whether a DBE trucking company is performing a CUF: 35 36

• The DBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision of 37 the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on the 38 contract. The owner demonstrates business related knowledge, 39 shows up on site and is determined to be actively running the 40 business. 41



47 • Lease agreements for trucks shall indicate that the DBE has 48

exclusive use of and control over the truck(s). This does not preclude 49 the leased truck from working for others provided it is with the 50 consent of the DBE and the lease provides the DBE absolute priority 51 for use of the leased truck. 52



DBE. 3 4 DBE Utilization Plan 5 The DBE Bid Item Breakdown is the initial plan for Bid Item work committed to 6 DBE firms. When a Contractor identifies a change in the plan, an update shall 7 be submitted within 7 calendar days between Execution and Physical 8 Completion. Plan updates shall not make changes to the Commitment or the 9 DBE Utilization Certification. 10 11 Joint Checking 12 A joint check is a check between a Subcontractor and the Contractor to the 13 supplier of materials/supplies. The check is issued by the Contractor as payer 14 to the Subcontractor and the material supplier jointly for items to be 15 incorporated into the project. The DBE must release the check to the supplier, 16 while the Contractor acts solely as the guarantor. 17 18 A joint check agreement must be approved by the Engineer and requested by 19 the DBE involved using the DBE Joint Check Request Form (form # 272-053) 20 prior to its use. The form must accompany the DBE Joint Check Agreement 21 between the parties involved, including the conditions of the arrangement and 22 expected use of the joint checks. 23 24 The approval to use joint checks and the use will be closely monitored by the 25 Engineer. To receive DBE credit for performing a CUF with respect to 26 obtaining materials and supplies, a DBE must “be responsible for negotiating 27 price, determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, installing and 28 paying for the material itself.” The Contractor shall submit DBE Joint Check 29 Request Form for the Engineer approval prior to using a joint check. 30 31 Material costs paid by the Contractor directly to the material supplier are not 32 allowed. If proper procedures are not followed or the Engineer determines that 33 the arrangement results in lack of independence for the DBE involved, no DBE 34 credit will be given for the DBE’s participation as it relates to the material cost. 35 36 Prompt Payment 37 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-38 08.1. Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 39 return of retainage. 40 41 Reporting 42 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize 43 DBEs to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that 44 will enable the Engineer to verify DBE participation throughout the life of the 45 project. 46 47 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 48 this contract. 49

50


Changes in COA Work Committed to DBE 1 The Contractor shall utilize the COA DBEs to perform the work and supply the 2 materials for which each is committed unless a change is approved by the 3 Engineer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for work or material 4 completed by the Contractor or subcontractors that was committed to be completed 5 by the COA DBEs. 6 7

Owner Initiated Changes 8 Where the Engineer makes changes that result in changes to Work that was 9 committed to a COA DBE. The Contractor may be directed to substitute for the 10 Work in such instances. 11 12 Contractor Initiated Changes 13 The Contractor cannot reduce the amount of work committed to a COA DBE 14 without good cause. Reducing DBE Commitment is viewed as partial DBE 15 termination, and therefore subject to the termination procedures below. 16 17 Original Quantity Underruns 18 In the event that Work committed to a DBE firm as part of the COA underruns 19 the original planned quantities the Contractor may be required to substitute the 20 remaining applicable Work to another DBE. 21 22 Contractor Proposed DBE Substitutions 23 Requests to substitute a COA DBE must be for good cause (see DBE 24 termination process below), and requires prior written approval of the 25 Engineer. After receiving a termination with good cause approval, the 26 Contractor may only replace a DBE with another certified DBE. When any 27 changes between Contract Award and Execution result in a substitution of 28 COA DBE, the substitute DBE shall be certified prior to the bid opening on the 29 Contract. 30 31 DBE Termination 32 Termination of a COA DBE (or an approved substitute DBE) is only allowed in 33 whole or in part with prior written approval of the Engineer. If the Contractor 34 terminates a COA DBE without the written approval of the Engineer, the 35 Contractor shall not be entitled to credit towards the DBE COA Goal for any 36 payment for work or material performed/supplied by the COA DBE. In addition 37 sanctions may apply as described elsewhere in this specification. 38 39 The Contractor must have good cause to terminate a COA DBE. 40 41 Good cause typically includes situations where the DBE Subcontractor is 42 unable or unwilling to perform the work of its subcontract. Good cause may 43 exist if: 44 45

• The DBE fails or refuses to execute a written contract. 46 47 • The DBE fails or refuses to perform the Work of its subcontract in a 48

way consistent with normal industry standards. 49 50 • The DBE fails or refuses to meet the Contractor’s reasonable 51

nondiscriminatory bond requirements. 52


1 • The DBE becomes bankrupt, insolvent, or exhibits credit 2

unworthiness. 3 4 • The DBE is ineligible to work on public works projects because of 5

suspension and debarment proceedings pursuant to federal law or 6 applicable State law. 7

8 • The DBE voluntarily withdraws from the project, and provides written 9

notice of its withdrawal. 10 11 • The DBE’s work is deemed unsatisfactory by the Engineer and not in 12

compliance with the Contract. 13 14 • The DBE’s owner dies or becomes disabled with the result that the 15

DBE is unable to complete its Work on the Contract. 16 17 Good cause does not exist if: 18 19 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA DBE so that the Contractor 20

can self-perform the Work. 21 22 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA DBE so the Contractor can 23

substitute another DBE contractor or non-DBE contractor after 24 Contract Award. 25

26 • The failure or refusal of the COA DBE to perform its Work on the 27

subcontract results from the bad faith or discriminatory action of the 28 Contractor (e.g., the failure of the Contractor to make timely 29 payments or the unnecessary placing of obstacles in the path of the 30 DBE’s Work). 31

32 Prior to requesting termination, the Contractor shall give notice in writing to the 33 DBE with a copy to the Engineer of its intent to request to terminate DBE Work 34 and the reasons for doing so. The DBE shall have five (5) days to respond to 35 the Contractor’s notice. The DBE’s response shall either support the 36 termination or advise the Engineer and the Contractor of the reasons it objects 37 to the termination of its subcontract. 38 39 When a COA DBE is terminated, or fails to complete its work on the Contract 40 for any reason, the Contractor shall substitute with another DBE or provide 41 documentation of GFE. A plan to achieve the COA DBE Commitment shall be 42 submitted to the Engineer within 2 days of the approval of termination or the 43 Contract shall be suspended until such time the substitution plan is submitted. 44 45 Decertification 46 When a DBE is “decertified” from the DBE program during the course of the 47 Contract, the participation of that DBE shall continue to count towards the DBE 48 COA Goal as long as the subcontract with the DBE was executed prior to the 49 decertification notice. The Contractor is obligated to substitute when a DBE 50 does not have an executed subcontract agreement at the time of 51 decertification. 52


1 Consequences of Non-Compliance 2

Breach of Contract 3 Each contract with a Contractor (and each subcontract the Contractor signs 4 with a Subcontractor) must include the following assurance clause: 5 6 The Contractor, subrecipient, or Subcontractor shall not discriminate on the 7 basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. 8 The Contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in 9 the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the 10 Contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this 11 Contract, which may result in the termination of this Contract or such other 12 remedy as the recipient deems appropriate, which may include, but is not 13 limited to: 14 15

(1) Withholding monthly progress payments; 16 17 (2) Assessing sanctions; 18 19 (3) Liquidated damages; and/or 20 21 (4) Disqualifying the Contractor from future bidding as non-responsible. 22

23 Notice 24 If the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Consultant, Regular Dealer, or service 25 provider is deemed to be in non-compliance, the Contractor will be informed in 26 writing, by certified mail by the Engineer that sanctions will be imposed for 27 failure to meet the DBE COA Commitment and/or submit documentation of 28 good faith efforts. The notice will state the specific sanctions to be imposed 29 which may include impacting a Contractor or other entity’s ability to participate 30 in future contracts. 31

32 Sanctions 33 If it is determined that the Contractor’s failure to meet all or part of the DBE COA 34 Commitment is due to the Contractor’s inadequate good faith efforts throughout the 35 life of the Contract, including failure to submit timely, required Good Faith Efforts 36 information and documentation, the Contractor may be required to pay DBE penalty 37 equal to the amount of the unmet Commitment, in addition to the sanctions outlined 38 in Section 1-07.11(5). 39 40 Payment 41 Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this 42 Specification and any other associated DBE requirements is included in payment 43 for the associated Contract items of Work, except otherwise provided in the 44 Specifications. 45

46 1-07.12.GR1 47

Federal Agency Inspection 48 49 1-07.12.INST1.GR1 50 Section 1-07.12 is supplemented with the following: 51 52


1-07.12.OPT1.GR1 1 (January 25, 2016) 2 Required Federal Aid Provisions 3 The Required Contract Provisions Federal Aid Construction Contracts (FHWA 1273) 4 Revised May 1, 2012 and the amendments thereto supersede any conflicting provisions 5 of the Standard Specifications and are made a part of this Contract; provided, however, 6 that if any of the provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, are less restrictive than 7 Washington State Law, then the Washington State Law shall prevail. 8 9 The provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, included in this Contract require that the 10 Contractor insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in each Subcontract, 11 together with the wage rates which are part of the FHWA 1273, as amended. Also, a 12 clause shall be included in each Subcontract requiring the Subcontractors to insert the 13 FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in any lower tier Subcontracts, together with the 14 wage rates. The Contractor shall also ensure that this section, REQUIRED FEDERAL 15 AID PROVISIONS, is inserted in each Subcontract for Subcontractors and lower tier 16 Subcontractors. For this purpose, upon request to the Engineer, the Contractor will be 17 provided with extra copies of the FHWA 1273, the amendments thereto, the applicable 18 wage rates, and this Special Provision. 19

20 1-07.12.OPT2.FR1 21

(August 1, 2011) 22 Indian Preference and Tribal Ordinances 23 This project is located on the *** $$1$$ ***. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to 24 contact the person and/or office listed in this special provision to determine whether any 25 tribal laws or taxes apply. If the tribal laws and taxes do apply, the Contractor shall 26 comply with them in accordance with Section 1-07.1. For informational purposes only, 27 the Work on this project that falls within Tribal Lands is shown on the Summary of 28 Quantities in Group(s) *** $$2$$ ***. 29 30 Tribal Employment Rights Ordinances (TEROs), may utilize a variety of tools to 31 encourage Indian employment. These tools may include, but are not limited to, TERO 32 fees, Indian hiring preference, Indian-owned business subcontracting preference and/or 33 an Indian training requirement. Other requirements may be a Tribal business license, a 34 required compliance plan and/or employee registration requirements. Every tribe is 35 different and each may be willing to work cooperatively with the Contractor to develop a 36 strategy that works for both parties. For specific details, the Contractor should contact 37 *** $$3$$ ***. 38 39 The state recognizes the sovereign authority of the tribe and supports the tribe's efforts 40 to enforce its rightful and legal ordinances and expects the Contractor to comply and 41 cooperate with the tribe. The costs related to such compliance shall be borne solely by 42 the Contractor, who is advised to contact the tribal representative listed above, prior to 43 submitting a bid, to assess the impact of compliance on the project. 44 45 Although Indian preference cannot be compelled or mandated by the Contracting 46 Agency, there is no limitation whereby voluntary Contractor or Subcontractor initiated 47 preferences are given, if otherwise lawful. 41 CFR 60-1.5(a)7 provides as follows: 48

49 Work on or near Indian reservations --- It shall not be a violation of the equal 50 opportunity clause for a construction or non-construction Contractor to extend a 51 publicly announced preference in employment to Indians living on or near an Indian 52


reservation in connection with employment opportunities on or near an Indian 1 reservation. The use of the word near would include all that area where a person 2 seeking employment could reasonably be expected to commute to and from in the 3 course of a work day. Contractors or Subcontractors extending such a preference 4 shall not, however, discriminate among Indians on the basis of religion, sex, or 5 tribal affiliation, and the use of such a preference shall not excuse a Contractor 6 from complying with the other requirements as contained in the August 25, 1981 7 Department of Labor, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, 8 Government Contractors Affirmative Actions Requirements. 9

10 1-07.13.GR1 11

Contractor's Responsibility for Work 12 13 1-07.13(4).GR1 14

Repair of Damage 15 16 1-07.13(4).INST1.GR1 17

Section 1-07.13(4) is revised to read: 18 19 1-07.13(4).OPT1.GR1 20

(August 6, 2001) 21 The Contractor shall promptly repair all damage to either temporary or permanent 22 work as directed by the Engineer. For damage qualifying for relief under Sections 23 1-07.13(1), 1-07.13(2) or 1-07.13(3), payment will be made in accordance with 24 Section 1-04.4. Payment will be limited to repair of damaged work only. No 25 payment will be made for delay or disruption of work. 26

27 1-07.16.GR1 28

Protection and Restoration of Property 29 30 1-07.16(2).GR1 31

Vegetation Protection and Restoration 32 33 1-07.16(2).INST1.GR1 34


(August 2, 2010) 38 Vegetation and soil protection zones for trees shall extend out from the trunk to a 39 distance of 1 foot radius for each inch of trunk diameter at breast height. 40 41 Vegetation and soil protection zones for shrubs shall extend out from the stems at 42 ground level to twice the radius of the shrub. 43 44 Vegetation and soil protection zones for herbaceous vegetation shall extend to 45 encompass the diameter of the plant as measured from the outer edge of the plant. 46

47 1-07.16(4).GR1 48

Archaeological and Historical Objects 49 50 1-07.16(4).INST1.GR1 51

Section 1-07.16(4) is supplemented with the following: 52


1 1-07.16(4).OPT1.GR1 2

(December 6, 2004) 3 The project area potentially contains archaeological or historical objects that may 4 have significance from a historical or scientific standpoint. To protect these objects 5 from damage or destruction, the Contracting Agency, at its discretion and expense, 6 may monitor the Contractor’s operations, conduct various site testing and perform 7 recovery and removal of such objects when necessary. 8 9 The Contractor may be required to conduct its operations in a manner that will 10 accommodate such activities, including the reserving of portions of the work area 11 for site testing, exploratory operations and recovery and removal of such objects as 12 directed by the Engineer. If such activities are performed by consultants retained 13 by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall provide them adequate access to 14 the project site. 15 16 Added work necessary to uncover, fence, dewater, or otherwise protect or assist in 17 such testing, exploratory operations and salvaging of the objects as ordered by the 18 Engineer shall be paid by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6. If the 19 discovery and salvaging activities require the Engineer to suspend the Contractor’s 20 work, any adjustment in time will be determined by the Engineer pursuant to 21 Section 1-08.8. 22 23 To provide a common basis for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an 24 amount for the item “Archaeological and Historical Salvage” in the Proposal to 25 become a part of the total bid by the Contractor. 26

27 1-07.17.GR1 28

Utilities and Similar Facilities 29 30 1-07.17.INST1.GR1 31 Section 1-07.17 is supplemented with the following: 32 33 1-07.17.OPT1.FR1 34

(April 2, 2007) 35 Locations and dimensions shown in the Plans for existing facilities are in accordance 36 with available information obtained without uncovering, measuring, or other verification. 37 38 The following addresses and telephone numbers of utility companies known or 39 suspected of having facilities within the project limits are supplied for the Contractor's 40 convenience: 41 42

*** $$1$$ *** 43 44 1-07.17.OPT2.FR1 45

(April 2, 2007) 46 Locations and dimensions shown in the Plans for existing facilities are in accordance 47 with available information obtained without uncovering, measuring, or other verification. 48 49 Public and private utilities, or their Contractors, will furnish all work necessary to adjust, 50 relocate, replace, or construct their facilities unless otherwise provided for in the Plans 51 or these Special Provisions. Such adjustment, relocation, replacement, or construction 52


will be done during the prosecution of the work for this project. It is anticipated that 1 utility adjustment, relocation, replacement or construction within the project limits will be 2 completed as follows: 3 4

*** $$1$$ *** 5 6 The Contractor shall attend a mandatory utility preconstruction meeting with the 7 Engineer, all affected Subcontractors, and all utility owners and their Contractors prior to 8 beginning onsite work. 9 10 The following addresses and telephone numbers of utility companies or their 11 Contractors that will be adjusting, relocating, replacing or constructing utilities within the 12 project limits are supplied for the Contractor's use: 13 14

*** $$2$$ *** 15 16 *** $$3$$ *** 17

18 1-07.18.GR1 19

Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance 20 21 1-07.18.INST1.GR1 22 Item No. 1 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 is revised to read: 23 24 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 25

(January 3, 2011) 26 1. Owners and Contractors Protective (OCP) Insurance providing bodily injury and 27

property damage liability coverage, with limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and 28 per project in the aggregate for each policy period, written on Insurance Services 29 Office (ISO) form CG0009 1204, together with Washington State Department of 30 Transportation amendatory endorsement CG 2908 1195, specifying the Contracting 31 Agency, the State, the Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Department 32 and all officers and employees of the State as named insured. 33

34 1-07.18.OPT2.GR1 35 (January 5, 2004) 36 Item number 1 in the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 is deleted. 37 38 1-07.18.INST2.GR1 39 Item No. 2 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 is revised to read: 40 41 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1 42

(January 3, 2011) 43 2. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance written under ISO Form CG0001 or 44

its equivalent with minimum limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence and in the 45 aggregate for each one year policy period. Products and completed operations 46 coverage shall be provided for a period of three years following Substantial 47 Completion of the work. 48

49 1-07.18.OPT7.FR1 50

(April 1, 2013) 51


2. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance written under ISO Form CG0001 or 1 its equivalent, with minimum limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and in the 2 aggregate for each 1-year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of 3 primary, umbrella, or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not 4 less than *** $$2$$ *** per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and 5 completed operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following 6 Substantial Completion of the Work. 7

8 1-07.18.INST4.GR1 9 Section 1-07.18 is supplemented with the following: 10 11 1-07.18.OPT11.GR1 12

(January 3, 2011) 13 Builder's Risk Insurance 14 Builder's Risk Insurance providing Broad Perils (All Risk) coverage upon any work at the 15 site, to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the Contractor, its 16 Subcontractors of every tier, and the State of Washington as named insured on the 17 policy. Coverage shall be included for all materials and supplies to be incorporated into 18 the work at the jobsite, while in transit to the jobsite, or while stored away from the 19 jobsite. 20

21 1-07.18.OPT14.FR1 22

(January 7, 2013) 23 The Contractor shall obtain Contractor’s Pollution Liability Insurance (CPL) with 24 minimum “per project” limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and in the aggregate for 25 claims, including investigation, defense, or settlement costs and expenses for bodily 26 injury and property damage (including natural resources damages and loss of use of 27 tangible property that has not been physically injured) arising out of: 28

29 a. Pollution conditions caused or made worse by the Contractor’s performance of 30

the Work, including clean-up costs for a newly caused condition or a historical 31 condition that is made worse; and; 32

33 b. The vicarious liability of Subcontractors of any tier. 34

35 The Contractor shall be Named Insured and the Contracting Agency, the State, the 36 Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Department, all officers and employees 37 of the State, and their respective members, directors, officers, employees, agents, and 38 consultants (collectively the “Additional Insureds”) shall be included as Additional 39 Insureds, or, as appropriate, a Named Insured, under this policy and coverage. 40

41 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 42

(April 1, 2013) 43 Relations With Railroad 44 Railroad Company, as used in the following specifications, shall be the railroad 45 company or companies, or railway company or companies specified in these Special 46 Provisions. The following provisions, though referring to a single Railroad Company, 47 shall be applicable to each of the following railroad companies or railway companies: 48 49

*** $$1$$ *** 50 51


Protection of Railroad Property 1 The Contractor shall exercise care in all operations and shall, at the Contractor's 2 expense, protect the property of the Railroad Company and the Company’s 3 appurtenances, property in its custody, or persons lawfully upon its right of way, 4 from damage, destruction, interference or injury caused by the Contractor’s 5 operations. The Contractor shall prosecute the work to not interfere with the 6 Railroad Company or its appurtenances, or any of the Railroad Company's trains or 7 facilities, and shall complete the work to a condition that shall not interfere with or 8 menace the integrity or safe and successful operations of the Railroad Company or 9 its appurtenances, or any of the Railroad Company's trains or facilities. 10

11 The Contractor shall not transport equipment, machinery, or materials across the 12 Railroad Company's tracks, except at a public crossing, without the written consent 13 of the Railroad Company. 14 15 The Contractor shall keep the right of way and ditches of the Railroad Company 16 open and clean from any deposits or debris resulting from its operations. The 17 Contractor shall be responsible for the cost to clean and restore ballast of the 18 Railroad Company which is disturbed or becomes fouled with dirt or materials when 19 such deposits or damage result from the Contractor’s operations, except as 20 provided elsewhere. 21

22 The Contractor's work shall be conducted in such a manner that there will be a 23 minimum of interference with the operation of railroad traffic. The Railroad 24 Company will specify what periods will be allowed the Contractor for executing any 25 part of the work in which the Railroad Company's tracks will be obstructed or made 26 unsafe for operation of railroad traffic. 27

28 In the event that an emergency occurs in connection with the work specified, the 29 Railroad Company reserves the right to do any and all work that may be necessary 30 to maintain railroad traffic. If the emergency is caused by the Contractor, the 31 Contractor shall pay the Railroad Company for the cost of such emergency work. 32

33 Protective services to protect the Railroad Company's facilities, property, and 34 movement of its trains or engines, including railroad flagging and other devices, 35 may be required by the Railroad Company as a result of the Contractor's 36 operations. 37 38 The nature and extent of protective services, personnel and other measures 39 required will in all cases be determined by the Railroad Company. Nothing in these 40 specifications will limit the Railroad Company's right to determine and assign the 41 number of personnel, the classes of personnel for protective services, nor other 42 protective measures it deems necessary. 43 When, in the opinion of the Railroad Company, the services of flaggers or 44 inspectors are necessary for the protection of the Railroad Company's facilities by 45 reason of the Contractor's operations, the Railroad Company will furnish such 46 flaggers or inspectors as may be required. The Contractor shall notify the Railroad 47 Company a minimum of *** $$2$$ *** in advance of whenever the Contractor is 48 about to perform work within Railroad Company property or within 25 feet of the 49 tracks to enable the Railroad Company to provide flagging or other protective 50 services. 51 52


The Railroad Company’s contact is: 1 2 *** $$3$$ *** 3

4 No act of the Railroad Company in supervising or approving any work shall reduce 5 or in any way affect the liability of the Contractor for damages, expense, or cost 6 which may result to the Railroad Company from the construction of this Contract. 7

8 Unless otherwise provided, all personnel assigned by the Railroad Company, other 9 than those engaged in performing work by the Railroad Company as listed under 10 Construction Work by Railroad Company, will be considered protective personnel. 11 12 In general, the Railroad Company will furnish protective services whenever any of 13 the Contractor's operations take place within or near railroad right of way and, in 14 the opinion of the Railroad Company's representative, could endanger railroad 15 facilities or create a hazard to railroad operations. 16 17 The Railroad Company’s policy for assignment of railroad flaggers requires that the 18 flagging position is established for fixed work days and times. Any railroad flagging 19 performed outside of these parameters may be subject to overtime costs. The 20 Contractor shall verify with the Railroad Company what categories of railroad 21 flagging constitute overtime work, and obtain prior authorization from the Engineer 22 before coordinating with the Railroad Company for flagging requiring overtime 23 payments. 24 25 The Contractor shall submit to the Railroad Company and the Engineer, in writing, 26 an itinerary of work within the Railroad Company’s right of way or otherwise 27 requiring a Railroad Company flagger for the following week. If such work spans 28 multiple weeks, the itinerary shall be provided in advance of each work week. 29 30

There will be no cost to the Contractor for the railroad protective services, unless: 31 32

Such services result from the Contractor’s failure to comply with the terms 33 and conditions of its contract with the Contracting Agency or with its 34 Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreements with the Railroad Company. 35 36

The Contractor fails to obtain authorization from the Engineer prior to 37 coordinating with the Railroad Company for any flagging requiring overtime 38 payments. 39 40

The Contractor arranges for assignment of a railroad flagger and alters 41 Project work so that a flagger is no longer needed, and adequate advance 42 notice is not provided to the Railroad Company of such change in the need 43 for a flagger (i.e. causing the Railroad Company to dispatch a flagger 44 billable to the Project when one is not required). 45

46 Construction Work by Railroad Company 47 The work by the Railroad Company as described below will be performed by the 48 Railroad Company with its own forces at no cost to the Contractor: 49 50

*** $$4$$ *** 51 52


All work which is performed by the Railroad Company at the Contractor's request 1 and which is for the Contractor's benefit or convenience shall be at the Contractor's 2 expense and the Contractor shall reimburse the Railroad Company for all costs for 3 such work. 4 5 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Railroad Company and so conduct 6 operations that the necessary reconstruction of its facilities and the removal of 7 existing facilities can be accomplished without interruption of service. 8

9 Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement 10

No work shall be commenced within the Railroad Company’s Property until the 11 Contractor has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed 12 Contractor’s Right-of-Entry Agreement from the Railroad Company, and has 13 obtained all of the insurance required by the Railroad Company as specified 14 therein. All work within the Railroad Company’s right of way or within 25 feet 15 of a public railroad grade crossing shall be in accordance with Railroad’s 16 Contractor Requirements and the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement (See 17 Appendix *** $$5$$ ***). 18

19 The Contractor, it subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 20 maintain in force all insurance required by Railroad until the completion date of the 21 contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 22 23 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to 24 the railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to 25 the Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue all or part of the 26 insurance specified above. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that 27 area is complete, the Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if 28 for any reason the Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area 29 (including being ordered to do so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be 30 reinstated by the Contractor before the work is started. If the insurance must be 31 reinstated because of the Contractor's operations or failure of the Contractor to 32 perform all the contract requirements, the costs shall be the responsibility of the 33 Contractor. If the insurance must be reinstated because of changes to the contract, 34 the costs will be considered in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 35

36 1-07.18.OPT17.GR1 37

(August 7, 2006) 38 Contractor’s Right of Entry and Insurance Requirements - BNSF 39 No work shall commence within BNSF Railway Company (BNSF) right of way until the 40 Contractor has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed 41 Contractor’s Right-of-Entry Agreement from BNSF, and has obtained all of the 42 insurance required by the Railroad. All work within BNSF’s right of way shall be in 43 accordance with BNSF’s Contractor Requirements and the Contractor’s Right of Entry 44 Agreement (See Appendices). 45 46 The Contractor, its Subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 47 maintain in force all insurance required by BNSF until the completion date of the 48 contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 49 50 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to the 51 Railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to the 52


Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue the insurance required by 1 BNSF. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that area is complete, the 2 Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if for any reason the 3 Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area (including being ordered to do 4 so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be reinstated by the Contractor before the work 5 is started. If the insurance must be reinstated because of the Contractor’s activities or 6 failure of the Contractor to perform all the contract requirements, the costs shall be the 7 responsibility of the Contractor. If the insurance must be reinstated because of changes 8 to the contract, the costs will be considered in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 9

10 1-07.18.OPT18.GR1 11

(August 7, 2006) 12 Contractor’s Right of Entry and Insurance Requirements - UPRR 13 No work shall commence within Union Pacific Railroad right of way until the Contractor 14 has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed Contractor’s Right-of-15 Entry Agreement from Union Pacific Railroad, and has obtained all of the insurance 16 required by the Railroad. All work within Union Pacific Railroad’s right of way shall be in 17 accordance with the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement (See Appendixes). 18 19 The Contractor, its Subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 20 maintain in force all insurance required by Union Pacific Railroad until the completion 21 date of the contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 22 23 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to the 24 railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to the 25 Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue the insurance required by Union 26 Pacific Railroad. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that area is complete, 27 the Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if for any reason the 28 Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area (including being ordered to do 29 so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be reinstated by the Contractor before the work 30 is started. If the insurance must be reinstated because of the Contractors activities or 31 failure of the Contractor to perform all the contract requirements, the costs shall be the 32 responsibility of the Contractor. If the insurance must be reinstated because of changes 33 to the contract, the costs will be considered in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 34

35 1-07.23.GR1 36

Public Convenience and Safety 37 38 1-07.23(1).GR1 39

Construction Under Traffic 40 41 1-07.23(1).INST1.GR1 42

Section 1-07.23(1) is supplemented with the following: 43 44 1-07.23(1).OPT1.FB1 45

(March 13, 1995) 46 During the hours that cleaning and painting operations are actually in progress, 47 traffic may be restricted as follows: 48 49

*** $$1$$ *** 50 51


Whenever the Contractor's operations require lane reductions restricting the flow of 1 traffic on multiple lanes in the same direction, the Contractor shall furnish, maintain, 2 and operate a sequential arrow sign, for each lane closure, as specified in the 3 Special Provision SEQUENTIAL ARROW SIGN. 4 5 If the Engineer determines that such lane restrictions are causing traffic congestion, 6 the Contractor shall open all lanes to traffic until the congestion is eliminated. 7 8 For movable span structures, the Contractor's operations shall be arranged to 9 permit the opening of the moveable span whenever required by marine traffic. 10 11 Bridge sidewalks shall be kept clear and open to maintain safe pedestrian traffic. 12

13 1-07.23(1).OPT2.GR1 14

(January 2, 2012) 15 Work Zone Clear Zone 16 The Work Zone Clear Zone (WZCZ) applies during working and nonworking 17 hours. The WZCZ applies only to temporary roadside objects introduced by the 18 Contractor’s operations and does not apply to preexisting conditions or 19 permanent Work. Those work operations that are actively in progress shall be 20 in accordance with adopted and approved Traffic Control Plans, and other 21 contract requirements. 22 23 During nonworking hours equipment or materials shall not be within the WZCZ 24 unless they are protected by permanent guardrail or temporary concrete 25 barrier. The use of temporary concrete barrier shall be permitted only if the 26 Engineer approves the installation and location. 27 28 During actual hours of work, unless protected as described above, only 29 materials absolutely necessary to construction shall be within the WZCZ and 30 only construction vehicles absolutely necessary to construction shall be 31 allowed within the WZCZ or allowed to stop or park on the shoulder of the 32 roadway. 33 34 The Contractor's nonessential vehicles and employees private vehicles shall 35 not be permitted to park within the WZCZ at any time unless protected as 36 described above. 37 38 Deviation from the above requirements shall not occur unless the Contractor 39 has requested the deviation in writing and the Engineer has provided written 40 approval. 41 42 Minimum WZCZ distances are measured from the edge of traveled way and 43 will be determined as follows: 44

45


Regulatory Posted Speed

Distance From Traveled Way

(Feet)

35 mph or less 10 *

40 mph 15

45 to 55 mph 20

60 mph or greater 30 * or 2-feet beyond the outside edge of sidewalk 1 2 Minimum Work Zone Clear Zone Distance 3

4 1-07.23(1).OPT4.GR1 5

(December 6, 2004) 6 The portion of Section 1-07.16(1) that prohibits the merging of construction vehicles 7 with public traffic from an access gained through adjacent properties is rescinded, 8 provided the Contractor’s submittal is approved as required below. 9

10 Access for Construction 11 The Contractor may enter and leave the traveled way, auxiliary lanes or 12 shoulders at approved locations other than established legal movements. To 13 obtain approval of such an access location, the Contractor shall submit a 14 request to the Engineer. The Contractor’s request shall be submitted to the 15 Engineer at least 30 calendar days prior to the time the use of the access will 16 be required. This submittal shall include a vicinity map indicating the interstate 17 stationing at the centerline of the access, distances from the end of ramp 18 tapers of existing interchanges and a traffic control plan conforming with the 19 requirements specified in Section 1-10.2(2). The access shall meet the 20 following requirements: 21

22

Access to and from the worksite adjacent to a multi-lane facility will 23 only be allowed to and from a closed lane. 24

25

The merging point of construction vehicles and public traffic shall 26 provide a Decision Sight Distance for the traveling public of 1,640 ft in 27 urban areas and 1,360 ft in rural areas. 28

29

In urban areas the access shall not be located within 3,280 ft of the 30 end of a ramp taper, or the centerline of a road approach. In rural 31 areas the access shall not be located within 2,720 ft of the end of a 32 ramp taper or the centerline of a road approach. 33

34

Median crossings within 1.5 miles of the access point shall not be 35 used in conjunction with the access. 36

37

No new median crossings shall be created for use in conjunction 38 within 1.5 miles of the access point. 39

40

Short-duration shoulder stops in the construction zone, utilizing light 41 vehicles properly equipped with warning flashers, will be allowed 42 without a lane closure. 43

44


When in use the access location shall have traffic control in place as 1 per Section 1-10. Unauthorized use of the access from adjacent 2 property is to be prohibited by the use of signing and/or flaggers as 3 conditions warrant. 4

5

The continuity of the existing drainage system shall be maintained 6 through the access site. 7

8

Air borne particulates created as a result of using the access shall be 9 effectively controlled. 10

11

The access location shall not adversely affect wetlands or other 12 sensitive areas. 13

14 At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall restore the area of the access 15 site to its original, pre-contract, condition. Any damage to the traveled way, 16 shoulders, auxiliary lanes, side slopes or other items caused by the access shall be 17 repaired. All work to comply with this provision or to build, maintain, provide 18 erosion control, control airborne particulates, ensure that drainage continues 19 through the access site, provide traffic control when necessary, remove the 20 temporary access and restore the surrounding area when no longer required for 21 use are the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall include all related 22 costs in the bid prices of the contract. 23

24 1-07.23(1).OPT5.FR1 25

(January 5, 2015) 26 Lane closures are subject to the following restrictions: 27 28

*** $$1$$ *** 29 30 If the Engineer determines the permitted closure hours adversely affect traffic, the 31 Engineer may adjust the hours accordingly. The Engineer will notify the Contractor 32 in writing of any change in the closure hours. 33 34 Lane closures are not allowed on any of the following: 35 36

1. A holiday, 37 38 2. A holiday weekend; holidays that occur on Friday, Saturday, Sunday or 39

Monday are considered a holiday weekend. A holiday weekend includes 40 Saturday, Sunday, and the holiday. 41

42 3. After *** $$2$$ *** on the day prior to a holiday or holiday weekend, and 43

44 4. Before *** $$3$$ *** on the day after the holiday or holiday weekend. 45

46 1-07.23(1).OPT6.GR1 47

(April 14, 2014) 48 Physical reductions of the width of thru travelling lanes are subject to the following 49 restrictions: 50 51


The Contractor shall not reduce the travelled way to a single lane with a clear 1 width of less than 16 feet for a duration that exceeds 4 calendar days without 2 prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a request for a 3 width reduction that exceeds 4 calendar days to the Engineer no later than 30 4 calendar days prior to the start of the proposed width reduction. At a minimum, 5 this request shall include: 6 7

1. Schedule showing the planned beginning date and end date of the 8 width reduction. 9

2. Plans showing the limits and cross-sections showing the clear 10 distance provided during the width reduction. 11

3. Details of available detour routes. 12 4. Plan to provide temporary windows of a minimum 16 foot width 13

periodically during the width reduction, where possible. 14 15

The Engineer will reply, in writing, to the request within 7 calendar days. The 16 Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer if there are any changes to 17 the schedule for the width reduction. 18

19 1-07.24.GR1 20

Rights of Way 21 22 1-07.24.INST1.GR1 23 Section 1-07.24 is supplemented with the following: 24 25 1-07.24.OPT1.FR1 26

(March 13, 1995) 27 The Contracting Agency has not completed the acquisition of title to the following 28 described property: 29 30

*** $$1$$ *** 31 32

The Contractor shall not perform any work within these limits until ordered to do so by 33 the Engineer. The Contracting Agency has estimated that the above described property 34 will be available *** $$2$$ ***. 35


1-10.GR1 1

Temporary Traffic Control 2 3 1-10.1.GR1 4

General 5 6 1-10.1.INST1.GR1 7 Section 1-10.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-10.1.OPT1.FR1 10

(April 1, 2013) 11 The Contracting Agency will provide the following labor, equipment and/or materials 12 resources to the Contractor for use on the project. 13 14

*** $$1$$ *** 15 16 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when each resource is to be utilized and shall 17 provide a minimum of *** $$2$$ *** working days advance notice to allow any 18 necessary arrangements to be made. 19

20 1-10.1.OPT2.FR1GR1 21

(August 2, 2004April 1, 2019) 22 The Contracting Agency has arranged for the following uniformed law enforcement 23 agency to provide personnel and equipment to participate in the Contractor’s traffic 24 control activities:. As stated in the last paragraph of Section 1-10.1(2), the responsibility 25 for all traffic control shall remain with the Contractor. Uniformed law enforcement 26 personnel may be utilized to perform the following traffic control tasks: 27

28 *** $$1$$ ***Washington State Patrol 29

30 With acceptance of the Engineer, the Contractor may utilize an alternative law 31 enforcement agency to perform the work identified in the Contract. It shall be the 32 Contractor’s responsibility to secure the services of the alternative law enforcement 33 agency including the costs to arrange for the service. Any increase in costs for the work 34 of the alternative law enforcement agency over the costs for the Contracting Agency 35 provided law enforcement agency shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 36 37 In accordance with Section 1-10.1(2), the responsibility for all traffic control shall remain 38 with the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the 39 uniformed law enforcement personnel where their participation is either required or 40 allowed. There shall be no entitlement for any impacts for any reason as a result of 41 uniformed law enforcement personnel. 42 43 Uniformed law enforcement personnel may be utilized to perform the following traffic 44 control task and those shown in the Plans: 45 46

1. Passive enforcement during setup/takedown of work zone traffic control. 47 48 2. Active/roving speed enforcement within construction work limits. 49

50 Uniformed law enforcement personnel may be used with prior acceptance from the 51 Engineer, provided the Contractor submits a Type 3 Working Drawing requesting use of 52


uniform law enforcement personnel. The request shall identify the date(s), time(s), 1 contract work that will be being performed and the traffic control task which the uniform 2 law enforcement personnel will be performing. For requests in addition to the initial 60 3 hour use of uniformed law enforcement personnel, the request shall include that the 4 costs of the added work that will be shared by the Contractor and Contracting Agency. 5 6 This resource is provided at no additional cost to the Contractor for the initial 60 hours 7 and includes all costs (e.g., law enforcement personnel labor, vehicle miles, etc.). 8 Additional hours of uniformed law enforcement personnel may be utilized by Contractor 9 and the cost for these hours will be shared by the Contracting Agency and the 10 Contractor. The Contractor’s share of the cost for additional hours will be one-half of 11 the amount billed by the law enforcement agency. The hourly rate for Washington State 12 Patrol may range from $125-$175 per hour. 13 14 Where uniformed law enforcement personnel are required in the Plans or Specifications 15 the hours for this work will be included in the initial hours provided regardless of when 16 the actual work occurs. All costs for cancelled work due to unsuitable weather will be 17 shared by the Contracting Agency and the Contractor. The Contractor’s share of the 18 cost for cancelled work will be one-half of the amount billed by the law enforcement 19 agency regardless of when the actual work occurs. All costs for cancelled work for any 20 other reason shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor. 21 22 This resource is provided at no additional cost to the Contractor. The value of this 23 resource is assumed to shall be reflected in the Contractor’s bid for Traffic Control. 24 Additional agreement or price adjustment between the Contractor and the Contracting 25 Agency for this resource shall not be necessary. The Contractor’s share of costs for 26 additional hours of uniformed law enforcement personnel shall be deducted from 27 monies due or that may become due to the Contractor. 28

29 1-10.1(1).GR1 30

Materials 31 32 1-10.1(1).INST1.GR1 33


(April 7, 2014) 37 Automated Flagger Assistance Devices 38 Automated Flagger Assistance Devices (AFADs) shall meet the requirements of the 39 MUTCD. 40

41 1-10.2.GR1 42

Traffic Control Management 43 44 1-10.2(1).GR1 45

General 46 47 1-10.2(1).INST1.GR1 48


(January 3, 2017) 52


Only training with WSDOT TCS card and WSDOT training curriculum is recognized 1 in the State of Washington. The Traffic Control Supervisor shall be certified by one 2 of the following: 3 4

The Northwest Laborers-Employers Training Trust 5 27055 Ohio Ave. 6 Kingston, WA 98346 7 (360) 297-3035 8 9 Evergreen Safety Council 10 12545 135th Ave. NE 11 Kirkland, WA 98034-8709 12 1-800-521-0778 13 14 The American Traffic Safety Services Association 15 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite 100 16 Fredericksburg, Virginia 22406-1022 17 Training Dept. Toll Free (877) 642-4637 18 Phone: (540) 368-1701 19

20 1-10.2(1).OPT2.GR1 21

(January 5, 2015) 22 The primary TCS shall have a minimum of 500 hours of experience providing traffic 23 control as a TCS or traffic control labor on multilane highways with a speed limit of 24 55 mph or greater. The Contractor shall submit a certification of the TCS’s 25 experience with the TCS designation. Documentation of experience shall be 26 available upon request by the Engineer. 27

28 1-10.3.GR1 29

Traffic Control Labor, Procedures and Devices 30 31 1-10.3(3).GR1 32

Traffic Control Devices 33 34 1-10.3(3).INST1.GR1 35


(April 7, 2014) 39 Automated Flagger Assistance Devices 40 Where shown on an approved traffic control plan, the Contractor shall provide, 41 operate and maintain AFADs. 42 43 An AFAD is a self-contained, portable traffic control system that enable a flagger to 44 be positioned out of the lane of traffic and is used to control road users through 45 temporary traffic control zones for short-term lane closures, on two-lane highways. 46 The Contractor shall submit the manufacturers’ specifications for each AFAD to the 47 Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to use. A manufacturers’ representative 48 shall be required to demonstrate the capabilities of each device prior to its use and 49 provide training to the certified flaggers that will be operating the device. Each 50 AFAD shall require a flagger near enough to the device to see the device and 51 remotely operate it. Only a qualified flagger who has been trained on the operation 52


of the AFAD shall operate the AFAD. The flagger operating the AFAD shall not 1 leave the device unattended at any time while the AFAD is being used to control 2 traffic. 3 4 An AFAD shall only be used in situations where there is only one lane of 5 approaching traffic in the direction to be controlled. When used at night, the AFAD 6 location shall be illuminated in accordance with Section 1-10.3(1)A. 7 8 During the setup and take down operation of the work area, the AFAD display shall 9 be set to a yellow flash mode when the signal heads are deployed into normal 10 operating position. 11 12 If repairs are required the Contractor shall respond immediately and provide flagger 13 traffic control and the unit shall be either repaired or replaced with a backup unit 14 within 48 hours. 15 16 The Engineer may order adjustments to the location as needed based on traffic and 17 field conditions. 18

19 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1 20

(January 2, 2018) 21 Radar Speed Display Sign 22 Where shown on an approved traffic control plan or where ordered by the Engineer, 23 the Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain radar speed display signs 24 (RSDS). A RSDS shall be placed with a minimum of 4 ft. of lateral clearance to 25 edge of a travelled lane and be delineated by channelization devices. The 26 Contractor shall remove the RSDS from the clear zone when not in use unless 27 protected by barrier or guardrail. 28

29 1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).GR1 30

Vacant 31 Section 9-35.8 is revised to read: 32

33 1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).OPT1.GR1 34

(April 21, 20182019) 35 Radar Speed Display Sign 36 Radar Speed Display Signs (RSDS) shall consist of a fully self-contained see-37 through trailer with power supply and an LED speed indicator display with a one-38 direction radar. Above or below the display shall be the message “YOUR SPEED” 39 or “YOUR SPEED IS” in letters of 5 to 8 inches in height. The lowest portion of the 40 display shall be high enough to be visible over concrete barriers or safety drums 41 and a standard 36”x48” black on white speed limit sign (R2-1) as shown on the 42 approved traffic control plan shall be mounted above the speed display. 43 44 The radar speed measurement shall provide a minimum detection distance of 1000 45 ft. and have an accuracy of +/ - 1 mile per hour. The radar shall be mounted so 46 detection will function when located behind concrete barrier or drums. 47 48 The numeric speed display range shall be 0 to 99 MPH with numerals of 18 inches 49 in height minimum, amber in color with a black background with automatic dimming 50 for nighttime operations. 51 52


The speed indicator display shall be equipped with a violation alert that flashes the 1 displayed detected speed when the work zone posted speed limit is exceeded. The 2 speed indicator shall have a maximum speed cutoff. Detected speeds more than 25 3 MPH over the posted speed shall not be displayed and speeds under 25 MPH shall 4 not be displayed. 5 6 The unit shall have traffic data collection capabilities. Traffic data shall be collected 7 and transmitted to the Engineer upon request. 8

9 1-10.4.GR1 10

Measurement 11 12 1-10.4(1).GR1 13

Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items) 14 15 1-10.4(1).INST1.GR1 16


(August 2, 2004) 20 The proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control”, lump sum. The 21 provisions of Section 1-10.4(1) shall apply. 22

23 1-10.4(2).GR1 24

Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals 25 26 1-10.4(2).INST1.GR1 27


(August 2, 2004) 31 The bid proposal does not contain the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control,” 32 lump sum. The provisions of Section 1-10.4(2) shall apply. 33

34 1-10.4(2).OPT2.GR1 35

(April 7, 2014) 36 “Automated Flagger Assistance Device” will be measured per each one time only 37 for each automated flagger assistance device used on the project. The final pay 38 quantity shall be the maximum number of such devices in place at any one time as 39 approved by the Engineer. 40

41 1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1 42

(January 2, 2018) 43 “Radar Speed Display Sign” will be measured by the hour for the time that each 44 sign is operating as shown on an approved Traffic Control Plan. 45

46 1-10.4(2).INST2.GR1 47

The sixth bullet of the third paragraph in Section 1-10.4(2) is revised to read: 48 49 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1 50

(January 2, 2018) 51


• Relocation of Portable Changeable Message Signs or Radar Speed Display 1 Signs within the project limits. 2

3 1-10.4(3).GR1 4

Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control 5 6 1-10.4(3).INST1.GR1 7

Section 1-10.4(3) is supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1 10

(August 2, 2004) 11 The bid proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control,” lump sum 12 and the additional temporary traffic control items listed below. The provisions of 13 Section 1-10.4(1), Section 1-10.4(3), and Section 1-10.5(3) shall apply. 14

15 *** $$1$$ *** 16

17 1-10.5.GR1 18

Payment 19 20 1-10.5(2).GR1 21

Item Bids with Lump Sum for Incidentals 22 23 1-10.5(2).INST1.GR1 24


(April 7, 2014) 28 “Automated Flagger Assistance Device”, per each. 29 The unit Contract price per each for “Automated Flagger Assistance Device”, when 30 applied to the number of units measured for this item in accordance with Section 1-31 10.4(2), shall be full pay to provide, maintain and remove the AFAD as described 32 including transporting, installing and resetting the devices. 33 34 All costs associated with operating Automated Flagger Assistance Devices shall be 35 included in the unit Contract price per hour for “Flaggers”. 36

37 1-10.5(2).OPT2.GR1 38

(January 2, 2018) 39 “Radar Speed Display Sign”, per hour. 40 The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for this item 41 in accordance with Section 1-10.4(2), shall be full compensation for all costs 42 incurred by the Contractor in performing the Work for procuring all radar speed 43 display signs required for the project and for transporting these signs to and from 44 the project. 45

Index - General Special Provisions Division 2 EGSP2.docx April 21, 20182019 Page 1

DIVISION2.GR2 Earthwork 1 2 2-01.GR2 Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup 3 4

2-01.1.GR2 Description 5 6 2-01.1.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-01.1 is supplemented with the following) 7


2-01.1.OPT1.FR2 (Clearing and Grubbing) 10 (March 13, 1995) 11 Use when the payment for clearing and grubbing is either 12 lump sum or included in other work. 13 (1 fill-in) (Fill-in describes the longitudinal and lateral limits 14 of clearing and grubbing) 15 16

2-01.3.GR2 Construction Requirements 17 18

2-01.3(1).GR2 Clearing 19 20

2-01.3(1).INST1.GR2 (Item number 1 of Section 2-01.3(1) is revised to read) 21 Must use once preceding any of the following: 22

23 2-01.3(1).OPT1.GR2 (April 2, 2018) 24


27 2-01.3(2).GR2 Grubbing 28



2-01.3(2).OPT1.GR2 (April 2, 2018) 33 Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 34 Assessment Minimization Measure #12. 35

36 2-01.3(4).GR2 Roadside Cleanup 37



2-01.3(4).OPT1.FR2 (Roadside Cleanup) 42 (January 5, 1998) 43 Use if additional work is required under the item 44 "Roadside Cleanup". 45 (fill-ins) 46 47

2-01.5.GR2 Payment 48 49 2-01.5.INST1.GR2 (The first and second paragraphs of Section 2-01.5 50

are revised to read) 51 Must use once preceding any of the following: 52

53


2-01.5.OPT1.FR2 (Clearing and Grubbing) 1 (August 7, 2017) 2 Must be used with 2-01.1.OPT1.FR2 when the payment 3 for clearing and grubbing is included in other work. 4 (1 fill-in) 5

6 2-02.GR2 Removal of Structures and Obstructions 7 8

2-02.1.GR2 Description 9 10


13 2-02.1.OPT1.GR2 (Removal of Misc. Traffic Items) 14

(March 13, 1995) 15 Must also use 2-02.3.OPT2.FR2 and 2-02.5.OPT8.GR2 16 Use in projects requiring the removal of minor quantities of 17 miscellaneous traffic items such as traffic islands, traffic 18 curb, lane markers, plastic traffic buttons, guide posts, etc. 19 when there is no pay item for Removal of Structures and 20 Obstructions and the cost of removing each type of item is 21 under $10,000. 22

23 2-02.1.OPT2.FR2 (Asbestos Handling and Removal) 24

(March 13, 1995) 25 Must also use 2-02.3.OPT5.GR2 and 2-02.5.OPT11.GR2. 26 Use in projects when asbestos removal is required. 27 (1 fill-in) 28

29 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2 (Removing Portions of Existing Box Culvert) 30

(March 13, 1995) 31 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing 32 box culverts prior to extending or widening the structure. 33 Include with 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-34 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, 6-35 02.5.OPT5.GB6, and 2-02.5.OPT12.GR2. 36

37 2-02.1.OPT4.GR2 (Asbestos Handling and Removal) 38

(September 30, 1996) 39 Must also use 2-02.3.OPT4.GR2 and 2-02.5.OPT14.GR2. 40 Use in projects when there is a reason to suspect 41 asbestos may be encountered. 42

43 2-02.3.GR2 Construction Requirements 44



2-02.3.OPT1.FR2 (Removal of Obstructions) 49 (February 17, 1998) 50 Use except when the combined cost of all obstruction 51 removal is $5,000 or less and payment is to be included in 52 other payment items. 53


1 Removal of obstructions that are readily measurable and 2 for which the cost of removal is $5,000 or less per 3 obstruction may be included in this pay item. 4 5 Removal of obstructions that are not readily measurable, 6 such as foundations, may be included in this item 7 regardless of the removal cost. 8 9 List all items and approximate quantities to be removed 10 under "Removal of Structure and Obstruction". 11 (1 fill-in) 12

13 2-02.3.OPT2.FR2 (Removing Miscellaneous Traffic Items) 14

(March 13, 1995) 15 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT1.GR2. 16

17 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 (Removal and Disposal of Hazardous Material) 18

(August 1, 2005) 19 Must also use 2-02.4.OPT1.GR2 and 2-02.5.OPT7.GR2. 20 Use only for subsurface removal of known or suspected 21 hazardous or contaminated material. Fill-in is for type of 22 material, depth of contamination in soil, and depth of 23 contamination in water. Fill-in information is to be provided 24 by the Region Environmental Staff. 25 (1 fill-in) 26

27 2-02.3.OPT4.GR2 (Asbestos Handling and Disposal) 28

(September 30, 1996) 29 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT4.GR2. 30

31 2-02.3.OPT5.GR2 (Asbestos Handling and Disposal) 32

(September 30, 1996) 33 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT2.FR2. 34

35 2-02.3.OPT6.FB2 (Salvage of Removed Structure Items) 36

(June 26, 2000) 37 Use when removal items are to remain the property of the 38 Contracting Agency. The first fill-in specifies the salvaged 39 items. The second fill-in specifies the name and address 40 (street address or highway milepost) of the material 41 storage site. Include with either 42 2-02.3(2).OPT1.FB2, 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2, or 2-43 02.3(2).OPT3.FB2, and 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2 44 . 45 (2 fill-ins) 46

47 2-02.3(2).GB2 Removal of Bridges, Box Culverts, and other Drainage 48

Structures 49 50

2-02.3(2).INST1.GB2 (Section 2-02.3(2) is supplemented with the following) 51 Must use once preceding any of the following: 52

53


2-02.3(2).OPT1.FB2 (Removing Existing Bridge) 1 (June 26, 2000) 2 Use in projects requiring the removal of existing 3 bridge(s) in one stage. The first fill-in specifies the 4 bridge(s). The second fill-in specifies where traffic is 5 directed (onto the detour route or bridge, onto the new 6 bridge, etc.). Include with 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2. 7 Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge being 8 removed has steel members with lead paint. 9 (2 fill-ins) 10

11 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2 (Removing Existing Bridge) 12

(June 26, 2000) 13 Use in projects requiring the removal of existing 14 bridge(s) in two or more stages. The fill-in specifies the 15 bridge(s). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge 16 being removed has steel members with lead paint. 17 (1 fill-in) 18

19 2-02.3(2).OPT3.FB2 (Removing Portion of Existing Bridge) 20

(June 26, 2000) 21 Use in projects requiring the removal of portions of 22 existing bridge(s). The first fill-in specifies the 23 bridge(s). The second fill-in specifies the portions 24 being removed. Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the 25 bridge being partially removed has steel members with 26 lead paint. 27 (2 fill-ins) 28

29 2-02.3(2).OPT4.GB2 (Plans of Existing Bridge) 30

(June 26, 2000) 31 Use in projects requiring the removal of existing 32 bridge(s) or of portions of bridge(s) when plans of the 33 existing bridge(s) are available. Include with either 2-34 02.3(2).OPT1.FB2, 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2, or 2-35 02.3(2).OPT3.FB2, and 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2, . 36

37 2-02.3(2).OPT7.FB2 (Removal in Water) 38

(June 26, 2000) 39 Use in projects requiring the removal of existing 40 bridge(s) when removal involves piers within the 41 wetted perimeter of a stream, lake or bay. The first fill-42 in specifies the bridge(s). The second and fourth fill-ins 43 specify the body of water. The third fill-in specifies the 44 elevation of the removal level. Include with either 2-45 02.3(2).OPT1.FB2, 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2, or 2-46 02.3(2).OPT3.FB2, and 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2. 47

48 2-02.3(2).OPT10.GB2 (Use of Explosives) 49


2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2 (Structure Removal By Explosives) 52 (January 2, 2018) 53


Use in projects requiring removal of existing 1 bridges only if explosives may be used. The fill-in 2 specifies the bridge where the use of explosives 3 is permitted for removal operations. Include with 4 2-02.3(2).OPT1.FB2. Include with 1-5 07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge involved has steel 6 members with lead paint. 7 (1 fill-in) 8

9 2-02.3(2).OPT11.GB2 (Requirements for Closing Bridge Prior to Removal) 10

(January 2, 2018) 11 Use in projects requiring removal of existing bridges 12 when it is necessary to close the bridge to traffic in 13 order to complete removal as soon as possible. 14 Include with 2-02.3(2).OPT1.FB2, and 2-15 02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2. Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 16 if the bridge involved has steel members with lead 17 paint. 18 19

2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2 (Removing Portions of Existing Box Culvert) 20 (June 26, 2000) 21 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing 22 box culverts prior to extending or widening the 23 structure. Include with 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2, 6-24 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-25 02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, and 6-02.5.OPT5.GB6, and 26 either 2-02.5.OPT12.GR2 or 2-02.5.OPT15.GR2. 27

28 2-02.3(3).GR2 Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters 29



2-02.3(3).OPT1.FR2 (September 8, 1997) 34 Include in projects when removal of pavement is 35 outside the limits of roadway excavation, and the 36 removal is to be paid by the square yard. 37 Must also use 2-02.4.OPT2.GR2 and 2-38 02.5.OPT13.FR2. 39 (2 fill-ins) 40




2-02.4.OPT1.GR2 (Removal and Disposal of Hazardous Material) 47 (December 4, 2006) 48 Must include with 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 and 49 2-02.5.OPT7.GR2. 50

51 2-02.4.OPT2.GR2 (Pavement Removal) 52

(September 8, 1997) 53


Must include with 2-02.3(3).OPT1.FR2.. 1 2

2-02.4.OPT3.GR2 (Sidewalk Removal) 3 (October 25, 1999) 4 Include in projects when removal of sidewalk is outside the 5 limits of roadway excavation, and the removal is to be paid 6 by the square yard. 7 Must include with 2-02.5.OPT16.FR2. 8

9 2-02.4.OPT4.GR2 (Curb Removal) 10

(September 8, 1997) 11 Include in projects when removal of curb is outside the 12 limits of roadway excavation, and the removal is to be paid 13 by the linear foot. 14 Must include with 2-02.5.OPT17.FR2. 15

16 2-02.5.GR2 Payment 17

18 2-02.5.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-02.5 is revised by the following) 19


2-02.5.OPT1.FR2 (Removal of structures and obstructions included in other 22 work) 23 (August 1, 2017) 24 (1 fill-in) 25



2-02.5.OPT7.GR2 (Removal and Disposal of Hazardous Material) 30 (December 4, 2006) 31 Must include with 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 and 32 2-02.4.OPT1.GR2. 33

34 2-02.5.OPT8.GR2 (Removing Miscellaneous Traffic Items) 35

(September 30, 1996) 36 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT1.GR2. 37

38 2-02.5.OPT11.GR2 (Removal and Disposal of Asbestos Material) 39

(September 30, 1996) 40 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT2.FR2. 41

42 2-02.5.OPT12.GR2 (Removing Portion of Conc. Box Culvert) 43

(June 26, 2000) 44 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing 45 box culverts prior to extending or widening the structure. 46 Include with 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2, 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-47 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-48 02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, and 6-02.5.OPT5.GB6. 49

50 2-02.5.OPT13.FR2 (Pavement Removal) 51

(September 30, 1996) 52 Must include with 2-02.3(3).OPT1.FR2. 53


(1 fill-in) 1 2

2-02.5.OPT14.GR2 (Asbestos removal as changed condition) 3 (September 30, 1996) 4 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT4.GR2. 5

6 2-02.5.OPT15.GR2 (Removal of portions of box culvert) 7

(June 26, 2000) 8 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing 9 box culverts prior to extending or widening the structure. 10 Include with 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2, 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-11 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-12 02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, and 6-02.5.OPT5.GB6. 13

14 2-02.5.OPT16.FR2 (Sidewalk Removal) 15

(November 3, 1999) 16 Must include with 2-02.4.OPT3.GR2 17 (1 fill-in) 18

19 2-02.5.OPT17.FR2 (Removal of portions of Curb) 20

(September 8, 1997) 21 Must include with 2-02.4.OPT4.GR2. 22 (1 fill-in) 23

24 2-03.GR2 Roadway Excavation and Embankment 25 26


2-03.3(2).GR2 Rock Cuts 29 30

2-03.3(2).INST1.GR2 (Section 2-03.3(2) is supplemented with the following) 31 Must use once preceding any of the following: 32 33

2-03.3(2).OPT1.GR2 (Rock Slope Scaling and Removal and Disposal 34 of Rock Slope Scaling Debris) 35 (April 5, 2010) 36 Use in projects with rock slope scaling. Include with 2-37 03.4.OPT4.GR2 and 2-03.5.OPT3.GR2. 38

39 2-03.3(7).GR2 Disposal of Surplus Material 40



2-03.3(7).OPT1.FR2 (Contracting Agency furnished waste site) 45 (March 13, 1995) 46 Use in projects with Contracting Agency provided 47 waste sites. 48 (1 fill-in) 49 50

2-03.3(7).OPT2.FR2 (Waste material by embankment widening) 51 (March 13, 1995) 52


Use in projects where the Contracting Agency 1 specifies embankments to be widened. 2 (2 fill-ins) 3

4 2-03.3(7).OPT3.GR2 (Contracting Agency provided sites are not mandatory) 5

(March 13, 1995) 6 Use, when applicable, with 2-03.3(7).OPT1.FR2 7 or 2-03.3(7).OPT2.FR2. 8 9

2-03.3(7).OPT4.GR2 (Contracting Agency provided sites are 10 not of sufficient size) 11 (March 13, 1995) 12 Use, when applicable, with 2-03.3(7).OPT1.FR2 13 or 2-03.3(7).OPT2.FR2. 14 15

2-03.3(14).GR2 Embankment Construction 16 17

2-03.3(14)C.GR2 Compacting Earth Embankments 18 19

2-03.3(14)C.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-03.3(14)C is supplemented 20 with the following) 21 Must use once preceding any of the following: 22

23 2-03.3(14)C.OPT1.GR2 (March 13, 1995) 24

Use in projects when no payment for 25 embankment compaction (Method A) is included. 26

27 2-03.3(14)I.GB2 Embankments At Bridge And Trestle Ends. 28

29 2-03.3(14)I.INST1.GB2 (Section 2-03.3(14)I is supplemented 30

with the following) 31 Must use once preceding any of the following: 32 33

2-03.3(14)I.OPT1.FB2 (March 13, 1995) 34 Use in projects when the bridge approach 35 embankments must be constructed before the 36 end piers. 37 (2 fill-ins) 38




2-03.4.OPT1.GR2 (Embankment In Place) 45 (March 13, 1995) 46 Must also include 2-03.5.OPT1.GR2. 47 Use in projects that require embankment widening for 48 beam guardrail and no other grading pay items are 49 included in the contract to construct the widening. 50

51 2-03.4.OPT2.GR2 (Measurement of roadway excavation and embankment) 52

(March 13, 1995) 53


Must include with 1-05.4.OPT2.GR1, Contractor surveying 1 - roadway. May be used without Contractor surveying. 2

3 2-03.4.OPT3.GR2 (Measurement of roadway excavation and embankment) 4

(March 13, 1995) 5 Use in minor grading projects when the original cross-6 sections are satisfactory for construction payment. 7

8 2-03.4.OPT4.GR2 (Rock Slope Scaling and Rock 9

Slope Scaling Debris Removal Including Haul) 10 (April 5, 2010) 11 Use in projects with rock slope scaling. Include with 12 2-03.3(2).OPT1.GR2 and 2-03.5.OPT3.GR2. 13

14 2-03.5.GR2 Payment 15



2-03.5.OPT1.GR2 (Embankment In Place) 20 (September 30, 1996) 21 Must include with 2-03.4.OPT1.GR2. 22

23 2-03.5.OPT2.FR2 (Preparation of waste sites) 24

(March 13, 1995) 25 Use in projects when the preparation of waste sites is 26 included in other work. 27 (1 fill-in) 28 29

2-03.5.OPT3.GR2 (Rock Slope Scaling and Rock Slope Scaling 30 Debris Removal Including Haul) 31 (April 5, 2010) 32 Use in projects with rock slope scaling. Include with 2-33 03.3(2).OPT1.GR2 and 2-03.4.OPT4.GR2. 34

35 2-06.GR2 Subgrade Preparation 36 37


2-06.3(1).GR2 Subgrade For Surfacing 40 41 2-06.3(1).INST1.GR2 (Section 2-06.3(1) is supplemented with the following) 42


2-06.3(1).OPT1.GR2 (Subgrade trimmer required) 45 (March 13, 1995) 46 Use in projects where a treated base or pavement will 47 be placed directly on the subgrade. 48 The project should include a bid item for "Gravel 49 Borrow Including Haul" or "Borrow Excavation 50 Including Haul" to ensure that sufficient fine material is 51 available for trimming. 52 53


2-06.3(1).OPT2.GR2 (Subgrade trimmer not required) 1 (March 13, 1995) 2 Use in grading-only projects where a treated base is 3 planned for construction on a future project. 4 The project should include a bid item for "Gravel 5 Borrow Including Haul" or "Borrow Excavation Including 6 Haul" to ensure that sufficient fine material is available 7 for trimming. The position of the future treated base is 8 to shown on the plans. 9

10 2-09.GR2 Structure Excavation 11 12

2-09.3.GR2 Construction Requirements 13 14 2-09.3(1).GR2 General Requirements 15

16 2-09.3(1)C.GR2 Removal Of Unstable Base Material 17 18

2-09.3(1)C.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-09.3(1)C is supplemented 19 with the following) 20 Must use once preceding any of the following: 21

22 2-09.3(1)C.OPT1.FB2 (Soils that tend to liquify) 23

(March 13, 1995) 24 Use in bridge projects in where soil in the bottom 25 of footing excavation will tend to liquify. 26 (1 fill-in) 27

28 2-09.3(1)C.OPT2.GB2 (Removal of unsatisfactory foundation material) 29

(January 3, 2006) 30 Must also use 2-09.5.OPT1.GB2. 31 Use in bridge projects where the removal of 32 unsatisfactory material under spread footings 33 may be required even though the soils report 34 does not require removal. 35

36 2-09.3(3).GR2 Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, 37

Class A 38 39

2-09.3(3)B.GR2 Excavation Using Open Pits – Extra 40 Excavation 41

42 2-09.3(3)B.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-09.3(3)B is supplemented 43

with the following) 44 Must use once preceding any of the following: 45

46 2-09.3(3)B.OPT1.FB2 (Extra Excavation and Open Pit 47

Excavation Not Allowed) 48 (April 3, 2017) 49 Use in projects where extra excavation and 50 open pit excavation is not allowed at specific 51 locations. The fill-in specifies the location(s) 52 where extra excavation and open pit 53 excavation is not allowed. 54


(1 fill-in) 1 2

2-09.3(3)B.OPT2.FR2 (Extra Excavation and Open Pit Excavation) 3 (April 1, 2019) 4 Use in projects where temporary excavation 5 slopes are located beneath structures, critical 6 facilities, or where recommended by the 7 Geotechnical Office. The fill-in specifies the 8 location(s) where extra excavation and open 9 pit excavation is allowed. 10 (1 fill-in) 11

12 2-09.3(3)D.GR2 Shoring And Cofferdams 13 14

2-09.3(3)D.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-09.3(3)D is supplemented with the 15 following) 16 Must use once preceding any of the following: 17

18 2-09.3(3)D.OPT1.GB2 (Protecting existing pavement) 19

(March 13, 1995) 20 Use in projects when bridges are over or 21 adjacent to existing highways. 22

23 2-09.3(3)D.OPT2.GB2 (Protecting RR tracks) 24

(August 2, 2010) 25 Use in projects when bridges are over or 26 adjacent to existing railroad tracks. 27

28 2-09.3(3)D.OPT3.FB2 (March 13, 1995) 29

Use with 2-09.3(3)D.OPT2.GB2 when 30 construction is required near railroad tracks, or 31 structures which require extensive shoring. 32 (3 fill-ins) 33


36 2-09.4.INST1.GR2 (The subsection Lower Limits of Section 2-09.4 is 37

supplemented with the following) 38 Must use once preceding any of the following: 39

40 2-09.4.OPT1.GB2 (January 4, 2010) 41

(Additional structure excavation under girders 42 at end piers) 43 Use in projects where excavation is required outside of 44 normal structure excavation limits for end pier footings. 45

46 2-09.5.GR2 Payment 47



2-09.5.OPT1.GB2 (Lean concrete for backfilling) 52 (March 13, 1995) 53


1 2-12.GR2 Construction Geosynthetic 2 3



2-12.1.OPT1.GR2 Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope 9 (November 17, 1997) 10 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 11 Slope design should be performed by the Olympia Service 12 Center Materials Laboratory or a geotechnical consultant. 13 Use details from DETAILS.CEL Library; D225, D229, 14 D230, and D230A or D230B. 15

16 2-12.2.GR2 Materials 17

18 2-12.2(9-03.14).GR2 (Borrow) 19

(Section 9-03.14 is supplemented with the following) 20 Must use once preceding any of the following: 21

22 2-12.2(9-03.14).OPT1.FR2 (Borrow for Geosynthetic Reinforced Slopes) 23

(November 17, 1997) 24 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 25 slopes. 26 (1 fill-in) 27

28 2-12.2(9-07.9).GR2 (Cold Drawn Wire) 29


32 2-12.2(9-07.9).OPT1.GR2 (Cold Drawn Wire) 33

(November 17, 1997) 34 Use in projects where welded wire faced geosynthetic 35 reinforced slopes are specified. 36

37 2-12.2(9-33.2(2)).GR2 (Geosynthetic Properties for Retaining Walls and 38

Reinforced Slopes) 39 (Section 9-33.2(2) is supplemented with the following) 40 Must use once preceding any of the following: 41

42 2-12.2(9-33.2(2)).OPT1.FR2 (Geosynthetic Properties for Reinforced 43

Slopes) 44 (January 2, 2012) 45 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 46 slopes. The slope class must be identified in fill-in 6 47 based on the following: Class 1 is typically reinforced 48 slopes which support bridge abutments, buildings, 49 critical utilities, or other facilities which the 50 consequences of poor performance or failure would be 51 severe. In general, slopes greater than 30 feet in 52


height. Class 2 is all reinforced slopes not categorized 1 as Class 1. 2 (6 fill-ins) 3

4 2-12.2(9-33.2(2)).OPT2.GR2 (Geosynthetic Properties for Turf 5

Reinforcement Mat) 6 (April 5, 2004) 7 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 8 with a turf reinforcement mat facing are specified. 9

10 2-12.2(9-33.4(1)).GR2 (Source Approval) 11

(Section 9-33.4(1) is supplemented with the following) 12 Must use once preceding any of the following: 13

14 2-12.2(9-33.4(1)).OPT1.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 15

Primary Reinforcement 16 (April 5, 2004) 17 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 18 slopes. 19


Secondary Reinforcement 22 (April 5, 2004) 23 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 24 with secondary reinforcement are specified. 25 26

2-12.2(9-33.4(1)).OPT3.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 27 Turf Reinforcement Mat 28 (November 17, 1997) 29 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 30 with turf reinforcement mat facing are specified. 31

32 2-12.2(9-33.4(3)).GR2 (Acceptance Samples) 33


36 2-12.2(9-33.4(3)).OPT1.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced) 37

Slope Primary Reinforcement 38 (November 17, 1997) 39 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 40 slopes. 41


Secondary Reinforcement 44 (April 5, 2004) 45 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 46 with secondary reinforcement are specified. 47 48

49 2-12.2(9-33.4(3)).OPT3.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope Turf) 50

Reinforcement Mat 51 (November 17, 1997) 52


Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 1 with turf reinforcement mat facing are specified. 2

3 2-12.2(9-33.4(4)).GR2 (Acceptance by Certificate of Compliance) 4


7 2-12.2(9-33.4(4)).OPT1.GR2 (Reinforced Slope) 8

(November 17, 1997) 9 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 10 slopes. 11


14 2-12.3.INST1.GR2 (Supplemental Instructions) 15


18 2-12.3.OPT1.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope Construction 19

Requirements) 20 (November 17, 1997) 21 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 22 Slope facing options which include vegetative cover 23 should only be used at sites where the average annual 24 precipitation is 20 inches or more. 25

26 2-12.3.OPT2.FR2 (Turf Reinforced Mat Facing Construction) 27

(August 2, 2010) 28 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes 29 with turf reinforcement mat facing. In general, use for 30 slopes no steeper than 1.2H:1V. 31 (2 fill-ins) 32

33 2-12.3.OPT3.GR2 (Geosynthetic Wrapped Slope Facing Construction) 34

(November 17, 1997) 35 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes 36 with geosynthetic wrapped facing. Because of planting 37 requirements, do not use this option for sites where the 38 elevation is over 1500 feet. In general, use for slopes no 39 steeper than 1H:1V. 40

41 2-12.3.OPT4.GR2 (Welded Wire Facing Construction) 42

(November 17, 1997) 43 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes 44 with welded wire facing. In general, use for slopes no 45 steeper than 1H:2V. 46

47 2-12.3.OPT5.GR2 (Installing Guardrail Posts in Geosynthetic) 48

Reinforced Slopes 49 (November 17, 1997) 50 Use in projects requiring guardrail on geosynthetic 51 reinforced slopes. 52

53


2-12.4.GR2 Measurement 1 2 2-12.4.INST1.GR2 (Supplemental Instructions) 3


6 2-12.4.OPT1.FR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 7

(January 5, 1998) 8 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 9 (1 fill-in) 10

11 2-12.5.GR2 Payment 12

13 2-12.5.INST1.GR2 (Supplemental Instructions) 14


17 2-12.5.OPT1.FR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 18

(November 17, 1997) 19 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


2-01.GR2 1

Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup 2 3 2-01.1.GR2 4

Description 5 6 2-01.1.INST1.GR2 7 Section 2-01.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 2-01.1.OPT1.FR2 10

(March 13, 1995) 11 Clearing and grubbing on this project shall be performed within the following limits: 12 13

*** $$1$$ *** 14 15 2-01.3.GR2 16

Construction Requirements 17 18 2-01.3(1).GR2 19

Clearing 20 21 2-01.3(1).INST1.GR2 22

Item number 1 of Section 2-01.3(1) is revised to read: 23 24 2-01.3(1).OPT1.GR2 25

(April 2, 2018) 26 1. Trees identified for removal shall be felled into the Contracting Agency right of 27

way or areas that will be cleared of vegetation. 28 29 2-01.3(2).GR2 30

Grubbing 31 32 2-01.3(2).INST1.GR2 33


(April 2, 2018) 37 Grub vegetation only from areas undergoing permanent impact as indicated in the 38 Plans. No grubbing is allowed in areas identified in the Plans for temporary 39 impacts. 40

41 2-01.3(4).GR2 42

Roadside Cleanup 43 44 2-01.3(4).INST1.GR2 45


(January 5, 1998) 49 *** $$1$$ *** 50

51


2-01.5.GR2 1

Payment 2 3 2-01.5.INST1.GR2 4 The first and second paragraphs of Section 2-01.5 are revised to read: 5 6 2-01.5.OPT1.FR2 7

(August 7, 2017) 8 Payment will be made for the following bid items when they are included in the 9 proposal: 10

11 All costs for clearing and grubbing on this project shall be included in the *** $$1$$ 12 ***. 13


2-09.GR2 1

Structure Excavation 2 3 2-09.3.GR2 4


General Requirements 8 9 2-09.3(1)C.GR2 10

Removal of Unstable Base Material 11 12 2-09.3(1)C.INST1.GR2 13

Section 2-09.3(1)C is supplemented with the following: 14 15 2-09.3(1)C.OPT1.FB2 16

(March 13, 1995) 17 If the soil in the footing excavation *** $$1$$ *** tends to liquify before 18 placement of the concrete footing, the Contractor shall excavate below the 19 plan grade a maximum of 1 foot, as determined by the Engineer, and backfill 20 with gravel backfill for foundations. 21

22 2-09.3(1)C.OPT2.GB2 23

(January 3, 2006) 24 If unsatisfactory foundation material, as determined by the Engineer, is 25 encountered for placing bridge footings, the foundation material shall be 26 excavated below the footing, and the unsatisfactory material replaced with 27 gravel backfill for foundation Class A, or lean concrete, except, when the 28 maximum design soil pressure is greater than five tons per square foot, lean 29 concrete only shall be used for replacing the unsatisfactory material. 30 31 Lean concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 6-02. 32 33 The unsatisfactory material shall be removed to a maximum of 3 feet below the 34 bottom of the footing elevation, unless the Engineer directs the Contractor to 35 excavate deeper. Excavations greater than 3 feet below the bottom of the 36 footing may require redesign of the footings and columns, for which the 37 Engineer will furnish revised plans. 38

39 2-09.3(3).GR2 40

Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, Class A 41 42 2-09.3(3)B.GR2 43

Excavation Using Open Pits – Extra Excavation 44 45 2-09.3(3)B.INST1.GR2 46

Section 2-09.3(3)B is supplemented with the following: 47 48 2-09.3(3)B.OPT1.FB2 49

(April 3, 2017) 50 Extra excavation and open pit excavation, as defined in this section, will not be 51 allowed at the following location(s): 52


1 *** $$1$$ *** 2

3 Shoring for the excavation sites specified above shall be Structural Shoring in 4 accordance with Section 2-09.3(3)D. The Contractor shall submit Type 3E 5 Working Drawings consisting of shoring plans in accordance with Section 2-6 09.3(3)D. 7

8 2-09.3(3)B.OPT2.FR2 9

(April 1, 2019) 10 The Contracting Agency has identified the following areas where the 11 Contractor may dig open pits or perform extra excavation without shoring or 12 cofferdams provided slope stability is evaluated using limit equilibrium 13 methods: 14 15

*** $$1$$ *** 16 17 Submittals and Design Requirements 18 At the locations identified above, the temporary excavation slopes shall be 19 designed by an engineer or engineering geologist licensed in Washington 20 State. The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings for the areas 21 identified above. The Type 2E Working Drawings may address each site 22 individually, as groups, or in entirety. The design shall use limit equilibrium 23 slope stability methods and software and shall be completed in conformance 24 with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03. The design shall be 25 based on site specific conditions and shall include a stability assessment of 26 interim or intermediate stages if they are used and shall include all applicable 27 surcharge loads including those from construction equipment or stock piled 28 materials. Required submittal elements include, at a minimum, the following: 29 30

1. A plan view showing the limits of the excavation and its relationship to 31 traffic, Structures, utilities and other pertinent project elements. If the 32 stability of the excavation requires no-load zones or equipment 33 setback distances, those shall be shown on the plan view. 34

35 2. A typical or controlling cross section showing the proposed 36

excavation, original ground line, and locations of traffic, existing 37 Structures, utilities, site constraints, surcharge loads, or other 38 conditions that could affect the stability of the slope. If the stability of 39 the excavation requires no-load zones or equipment setback 40 distances, those shall be shown in cross section. 41

42 3. A summary clearly describing subsurface conditions and groundwater 43

conditions, sequencing considerations, and governing assumptions. 44 45 4. Supporting calculations for the design of the excavation, the soil and 46

material properties selected for design, and the justification for the 47 selection for those properties, in accordance with the WSDOT 48 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03. 49

50


5. Safety factors, or load and resistance factors used, and justification 1 for their selection, in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical 2 Design Manual M 46-03, and referenced AASHTO design manuals. 3

4 6. A monitoring plan to evaluate the excavation performance throughout 5

its design life. 6 7 7. Any supplemental subsurface explorations made by the Contractor to 8

meet the requirements for geotechnical design of excavation slopes, 9 in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-10 03. 11

12 2-09.3(3)D.GR2 13

Shoring And Cofferdams 14 15 2-09.3(3)D.INST1.GR2 16

Section 2-09.3(3)D is supplemented with the following: 17 18 2-09.3(3)D.OPT1.GB2 19

(March 13, 1995) 20 The Contractor shall protect the existing pavement from damage due to the 21 Contractor's operations and shall shore all excavation adjacent to the existing 22 pavement. 23

24 2-09.3(3)D.OPT2.GB2 25

(August 2, 2010) 26 The Contractor shall protect the existing track and facilities of the Railroad 27 Company from damage due to the Contractor's operations, and shall shore all 28 excavation adjacent to the existing railroad track. Shoring shall be steel sheet 29 piling designed for a Cooper E-80 loading according to the American Railway 30 Engineering and Maintenance Association (AREMA) Manual For Railway 31 Engineering. Damage to the railroad track or railroad facilities, due to the 32 Contractor's operations, will be repaired by the Railroad at the Contractor's 33 expense. 34

35 2-09.3(3)D.OPT3.FB2 36

(March 13, 1995) 37 Because of the nearness of the work to the existing *** $$1$$, *** the 38 Contractor shall protect the *** $$2$$ *** during the *** $$3$$ ***. 39

40 2-09.4.GR2 41

Measurement 42 43 2-09.4.INST1.GR2 44 The subsection Lower Limits of Section 2-09.4 is supplemented with the following: 45 46 2-09.4.OPT1.GB2 47

(January 4, 2010) 48 Under girders, at end pier embankments, the lower limit will follow a line parallel to the 49 bottom of the girders and three feet below them. 50

51


2-09.5.GR2 1

Payment 2 3 2-09.5.INST1.GR2 4 Section 2-09.5 is supplemented with the following: 5 6 2-09.5.OPT1.GB2 7

(March 13, 1995) 8 When lean concrete is used to backfill voids left by the removal of unsatisfactory 9 foundation material, as determined by the Engineer, payment for this work shall be by 10 force account as provided in Section 1-09.6. 11 12 To provide a common basis for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has estimated the 13 amount of force account for "Force Account Lean Concrete" and has entered the 14 amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total bid by the Contractor. 15

Index - General Special Provisions Division 6 EGSP6.docx January 7April 1, 2019 Page 1

DIVISION6.GR6 Structures 1 2

6-01.GR6 General Requirements For Structures 3 4

6-01.5.GR6 Work Access and Temporary Structures 5 6

6-01.5.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-01.5 is re-titled and revised to read:) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 6-01.5.OPT1.FB6 (Work Access) 10

(April 61, 20152019) 11 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to construct work 12 access to perform structure removal and construction, 13 including work trestle construction for work within or above 14 an environmentally sensitive area as required by resource 15 agency environmental permits and restrictions. The fill-in 16 specifies the name of the environmentally sensitive area 17 or waterway. Include with 6-01.5.OPT1(B).GB6. 18 Must use once preceding any of the following: 19 (1 fill-in) 20

21 6-01.5.OPT1(A).FB6 (Waterway Clearance Requirements) 22

(April 6, 2015) 23 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to construct 24 the work access structure to conform to navigation 25 clearance requirements of the USCG. The first fill-in 26 specifies the minimum horizontal clearance required 27 for the channel span. The second fill-in specifies the 28 minimum elevation required for the bottom of the work 29 access structure superstructure. Include with 6-30 01.5.OPT1.FB6 and 6-01.5.OPT1(B).GB6. 31 (2 fill-ins) 32

33 6-01.5.OPT1(B).GB6 (Payment) 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to construct 36 work access to perform structure removal and 37 construction, including work trestle construction for 38 work within or above an environmentally sensitive area 39 as required by resource agency environmental permits 40 and restrictions. Include with 6-01.5.OPT1.FB6. 41

42 6-01.5.OPT2.FB6 (Temporary Bridge) 43

(August 6, 2018) 44 Use in projects requiring construction of a temporary 45 bridge. The first fill-in specifies the minimum overall length 46 of the temporary bridge, and can also be used to specify 47 requirements for number of spans and lengths of specific 48 spans, if necessary. The second fill-in specifies the 49 minimum roadway width required between barriers or 50 railings. The third fill-in specifies the minimum vertical 51 clearance dimension to the roadway, body of water, or 52 surface, specified in the fourth fill-in. If the length, width or 53


vertical clearance of the temporary bridge is shown in the 1 plans, the specific geometric requirement item text in the 2 specification can be deleted (or if all are shown in the 3 plans, the entire geometric requirements paragraph can 4 be deleted). 5 (4 fill-ins) 6 7

6-01.7.GR6 Navigable Streams 8 9 6-01.7.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-01.7 is supplemented with the following) 10


6-01.7.OPT1.FB6 (Navigation Lighting System) 13 (August 7, 2017) 14 Use in projects requiring installation of a navigation 15 lighting system. The fill-in specifies the Bridge Number. 16 Include with either 1-07.6.OPT3.FB1 or 1-17 07.6.OPT4.GB1. 18 (1 fill-in) 19

20 6-01.7.OPT2.FB6 (Temporary Navigation Lights) 21

(June 26, 2000) 22 Use in projects requiring installation of temporary 23 navigation lights. The fill-in specifies the bid item name. 24 Include with either 1-07.6.OPT3(A).FB1 or 1-25 07.6.OPT3(B).GB1. 26 (1 fill-in) 27 28

6-02.GR6 Concrete Structures 29 30

6-02.2.GR6 Materials 31 32 6-02.2.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.2 is supplemented with the following) 33


6-02.2.OPT1.GR6 (Resin Bonded Anchors) 36 (April 1, 2013) 37 Include in projects requiring resin bonded anchors for 38 attaching and anchoring items to concrete structures. Must 39 also include 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6. 40

41 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6 (Epoxy Bonding Agent For Surfaces And For Steel 42

Reinforcing Bar Dowels) 43 (December 2, 2002) 44 Use in projects when epoxy resin is required for setting 45 steel reinforcing bars into holes drilled into concrete. 46 Include with 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6 and 6-47 02.5.OPT9.FB6. 48

49 6-02.2.OPT3.GB6 (Epoxy Mortar) 50

(December 2, 2002) 51 Use in projects which require the use of epoxy mortar. 52 Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT2.GB6 and 6-53


02.5.OPT1.GB6 when coating existing bridge deck 1 surfaces. 2

3 6-02.2.OPT4.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 4

(August 3, 2015) 5 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 6 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-7 02.3.OPT1.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT49.GB6. 8

9 6-02.2.OPT5.GB6 (Exposed Aggregate Finish) 10

(August 3, 2015) 11 Use in projects requiring exposed aggregate finish of 12 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(5)A.OPT1.GB6, 6-13 02.3(14).OPT1.GB6, 6-02.2.OPT6.GB6 and 6-14 02.3(14).OPT3.GB6. 15

16 6-02.2.OPT6.GB6 (Clear Sealer for Exposed Aggregate Finish) 17

(April 2, 2007) 18 Use in projects with an exposed aggregate finish. Include 19 with 6-02.2.OPT5.GB6, 6-02.3(5)A.OPT1.GB6, 6-20 02.3(14).OPT1.GB6, and 6-02.3(14).OPT3.GB6. 21

22 6-02.2.OPT7.GB6 (Fractured Basalt Finish) 23

(August 3, 2015) 24 Use in projects requiring fractured basalt finish of concrete 25 surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT5.GB6. 26

27 6-02.2.OPT8.GB6 (Fractured Fin Finish) 28

(August 3, 2015) 29 Use in projects requiring fractured fin finish of concrete 30 surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT6.GB6. 31

32 6-02.2.OPT9.GB6 (Fractured Granite Finish) 33

(August 3, 2015) 34 Use in projects requiring fractured granite finish of 35 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT7.GB6. 36

37 6-02.2.OPT10.GB6 (Variable Depth Random Board Finish and ¾ 38

Inch Random Board Finish) 39 (August 3, 2015) 40 Use in projects requiring use of elastomeric, ABS, or 41 plastic form liners to produce random board finish of 42 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT8.GB6. 43

44 6-02.2.OPT11.GB6 (Ribbed Finish) 45

(August 3, 2015) 46 Use in projects requiring ribbed finish of concrete 47 surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT10.GB6. 48

49 6-02.2.OPT12.GB6 (Striated Finish) 50

(August 3, 2015) 51 Use in projects requiring striated finish of concrete 52 surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT11.GB6. 53


1 6-02.2.OPT13.GB6 (Ashlar Stone Finish) 2

(August 3, 2015) 3 Use in projects requiring ashlar stone finish of concrete 4 surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT12.GB6. 5

6 6-02.2.OPT14.GB6 (Block Finish) 7

(August 3, 2015) 8 Use in projects requiring block finish of concrete surfaces. 9 Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT13.GB6. 10

11 6-02.2.OPT15.GB6 (Split Face Finish) 12

(August 3, 2015) 13 Use in projects requiring split face finish of concrete 14 surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT14.GB6. 15

16 6-02.2.OPT16.GB6 (River Rock Finish) 17

(August 3, 2015) 18 Use in projects requiring use of river rock finish of 19 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT15.GB6. 20

21 6-02.2.OPT17.GB6 (Cascadian Stone Finish) 22

(August 3, 2015) 23 Use in projects requiring cascadian stone finish of 24 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.3(14).OPT16.GB6. 25

26 6-02.2.OPT22.GB6 (Modular Expansion Joint System) 27

(April 3, 2017) 28 Include in projects requiring a modular expansion joint 29 system. Coordination with the Bridge and Structures Office 30 Bearing and Expansion Joint Specialist is required. 31 Include with 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Must use with 6-32 02.3(13).OPT3.FB6, 6-02.4.OPT3.FB6, and 6-33 02.5.OPT28.GB6. 34

35 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6 (Rapid Cure Silicone Sealant) 36

(April 6, 2015) 37 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant is used 38 for expansion joint modification. Include with 6-39 02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6, either 6-02.3(13).OPT7(I).GB6 or 40 6-02.3(13).OPT7(J).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-41 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable expansion joint 42 modification GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-43 02.3(13). 44 45

6-02.2.OPT27.GB6 (Polyester Concrete) 46 (April 6, 2015) 47 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 48 Include with 6-02.3.OPT9.GB6. 49

50 6-02.2.OPT28.GB6 (Elastomeric Concrete) 51

(April 6, 2015) 52


Use in projects where elastomeric concrete is required. 1 Include with 6-02.3.OPT10.GB6. 2 3

6-02.2.OPT38.BSP.GB6 (High-Load Elastomeric Bearing Pad Assembly) 4 (******) 5 Use in projects with high-load elastomeric bearing pads. 6 Include with 6-02.3(19)A.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-7 02.4.OPT19.BSP.GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT44.BSP.GB6. 8

6-02.2.OPT46.GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 9 Must use once preceding any of the following: 10

11 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6 (June 26, 2000) 12

Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 13 supports include concrete inserts. Include with 6-14 02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, and either 6-15 02.5.OPT9.FB6 or 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6. 16

17 6-02.2.OPT46(B).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 18

(April 30, 2001) 19 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 20 supports include steel rods, bars, and plates. Include 21 with 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, and 22 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6, and either 6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6, 23 or 6-02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT93.GB6. 24 25

6-02.2.OPT46(C).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 26 (August 3, 2015) 27 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 28 supports include transverse braces. Include with 6-29 02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.2.OPT46(B).GB6, 6-30 02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6, and 31 either 6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6, or 6-02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 32 and 6-02.5.OPT93.GB6. 33 34

6-02.2.OPT46(D).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 35 (June 26, 2000) 36 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 37 supports include pipe rolls or pipe saddles. Include 38 with 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 and other applicable bridge 39 supported utility material and construction requirement 40 GSP’s. 41 42

6-02.2.OPT46(E).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 43 (April 30, 2001) 44 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities in 45 concrete box girder bridges when the utilities are 46 supported on anchor blocks on the bottom slab. 47 Include with 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 and other applicable 48 bridge supported utility material and construction 49 requirement GSP’s. 50 51

6-02.2.OPT47.GB6 (Bridge Grate Inlet) 52 (August 6, 2018) 53


Use in projects with bridge grate inlets. Include with 6-1 02.4.OPT25.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT50.GB6. 2

3 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6 (Bridge Drain Risers) 4

(April 30, 2001) 5 Use in projects requiring the raising of bridge drains prior 6 to asphalt or modified concrete overlay work on bridge 7 decks. Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6. Also include 8 with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 if the bridge deck is overlaid 9 with membrane waterproofing and ACP. Include with 6-10 02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the work is included in the cost of the 11 membrane waterproofing or modified concrete overlay. 12 Include with 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT51.GB6 if 13 the unit contract bid item “Modify Bridge Drain” is used to 14 pay for the work. 15

16 6-02.2.OPT55.GB6 (Permeon Treatment) 17

(August 3, 2015) 18 Use in projects where aesthetic surface aging of specific 19 concrete surfaces is required. Include with 6-20 02.3(14).OPT25.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT47.GB6, and 6-21 02.5.OPT75.GB6. 22

23 6-02.2.OPT57.BSP.GB6 (Compression Molded Pad) 24

(******) 25 Use in projects with post-tensioned concrete box girders 26 where compression molded pads are placed at the base of 27 the end diaphragm (See Bridge Design Manual Figure 28 9.3.1-5). 29

30 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 31

(April 6, 2015) 32 Use in projects with core drilled bridge deck drains. 33 Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6, and either 6-34 02.4.OPT32.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT58.GB6, or 6-35 02.5.OPT59.FB6. 36

37 6-02.2.OPT60.GB6 (Seismic Retrofit Materials) 38

(April 6, 2015) 39 Use in projects with seismic retrofit construction. 40 Must use once preceding any of the following: 41

42 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6 (Steel and PVC Pipe) 43

(April 6, 2015) 44 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work when steel 45 and/or PVC pipe are used as materials. Include with 6-46 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all 47 other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 48 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 49 50

6-02.2.OPT60(C).GB6 (Structural Steel and Steel Fastening 51 Hardware) 52 (April 6, 2015) 53


Use in projects with seismic retrofit work when 1 structural steel and steel fastening hardware are used 2 as materials. Include with 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-3 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all applicable other seismic 4 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-5 02.3. 6 7

6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6 (High-Strength Steel Rods) 8 (April 6, 2015) 9 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work requiring the 10 installation of longitudinal seismic restrainer 11 assemblies. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(L).GB6, 6-12 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all 13 other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 14 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 15 16

6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6 (Column Jacketing Materials) 17 (April 6, 2015) 18 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work when column 19 jacketing is required. Include with 6-20 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-21 02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-22 02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-23 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-24 02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication field 25 measuring requirements for specific existing bridge 26 columns are waived. 27 28

6-02.2.OPT61.BSP.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 29 (******) 30 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete stay-31 in-place panels. Include with 6-32 02.3(28)A.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-33 02.3(28)B.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-34 02.3(28)E.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-35 02.3(28)F.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-36 02.3(28)G.OPT6.BSP.GB6 and 6-37 02.3(28)I.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 38




6-02.3.OPT1.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 45 (August 3, 2015) 46 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 47 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-48 02.2.OPT4.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT24.GB6, and 6-49 02.5.OPT49.GB6. 50

51 6-02.3.OPT2.GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 52



1 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 2

(August 3, 2015) 3 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 4 supports include concrete inserts. Include with 6-5 02.2.OPT46.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, and either 6-6 02.5.OPT9.FB6 or 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6. 7 8

6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 9 (June 26, 2000) 10 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 11 Contractor furnishes and installs the supports and the 12 utility pipe or conduit pipe. Include with 6-13 02.5.OPT92.FB6 and other applicable bridge 14 supported utility material GSP’s. Include with 6-15 02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-16 02.4.OPT1.FB6, and either 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6 or 6-17 02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the supports include concrete 18 inserts. 19 20

6-02.3.OPT2(C).FB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 21 (June 26, 2000) 22 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 23 Utility Company furnishes, or furnishes and installs, 24 some of the supports and pipe for the utilities. The first 25 fill-in specifies the items to be furnished and installed 26 by the Utility Company. The second and third fill-ins 27 specify the items to be installed by the Contractor 28 which are furnished by either the Utility Company or 29 the Contractor. Include with 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 and 6-30 02.5.OPT93.GB6, and other applicable bridge 31 supported utility material GSP’s. Include with 6-32 02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-33 02.4.OPT1.FB6, and either 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6 or 6-34 02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the supports include concrete 35 inserts. 36 (3 fill-ins) 37

38 6-02.3.OPT8.GB6 (Seismic Retrofit) 39

Must use once preceding one of the following: 40 41

6-02.3.OPT8(A).GB6 (Plans of Existing Bridge) 42 (April 6, 2015) 43 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work when plans of 44 the existing bridge are available. Include with 6-45 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all 46 other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 47 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 48 49

6-02.3.OPT8(B).GB6 (Seismic Retrofit Demolition Plan) 50 (April 6, 2015) 51 Use in seismic retrofit projects where removal of 52 portions of existing concrete and steel reinforcing bars, 53


or cleaning and preparing of existing concrete surfaces 1 is required. Include with 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6, 6-2 02.3.OPT8(H).GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all 3 other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 4 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 5

6 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6 (Column Jacket Installation Plan) 7

(April 6, 2015) 8 Use in projects with column jacketing of existing 9 bridges. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-10 02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-11 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-12 02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include 13 with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication 14 field measuring requirements for specific existing 15 bridge columns are waived. 16

17 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6 (Column Jacket Shop Drawings) 18

(April 6, 2015) 19 Use in projects with column jacketing of existing 20 bridges. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-21 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-22 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-23 02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 24 Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-25 fabrication field measuring requirements for 26 specific existing bridge columns are waived. 27 28

6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6 (Field Measuring Existing Bridge Columns) 29 (April 6, 2015) 30 Use in projects where field measuring of existing 31 bridge columns is required. Include with 6-32 02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-33 02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-34 02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-35 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-36 02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication field 37 measuring requirements for specific existing bridge 38 columns are waived. 39

40 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 (Field Measuring Waiver for Specific 41

Existing Bridge Columns) 42 (April 6, 2015) 43 Use in projects where the requirement of pre-44 fabrication field measuring of specific existing bridge 45 columns is waived. The fill-in specifies the bridge(s) 46 and pier(s) where the column receiving the waiver is 47 located. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-48 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-49 02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-50 02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-51 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 52 (1 fill-in) 53


1 6-02.3.OPT8(G).FB6 (Field Measuring for Seismic 2

Retrofit Components) 3 (April 6, 2015) 4 Use in projects where field measuring of existing 5 bridge members is required for seismic retrofit 6 components. The first fill-in specifies the bridge(s) 7 where the field measuring work is required. The 8 second fill-in specifies the members or components to 9 be measured. Include with 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-10 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other applicable seismic 11 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-12 02.3. 13 (2-fill-ins) 14

15 6-02.3.OPT8(H).GB6 (Removing Portions of Existing Concrete) 16

(April 6, 2015) 17 Use in seismic retrofit projects where removal of 18 portions of existing concrete and steel reinforcing bars, 19 or cleaning and preparing of existing concrete surfaces 20 is required. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(B).GB6, 6-21 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all 22 other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 23 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 24

25 6-02.3.OPT8(J).GB6 (Drilling Holes and Setting Steel 26

Reinf. Bars, and Placing Concrete) 27 (April 6, 2015) 28 Use in seismic retrofit projects requiring the 29 construction of catcher blocks, girder stops, and other 30 concrete appendages. Include with 6-31 02.3.OPT8(B).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(H).GB6, 6-32 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6, and 6-33 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other applicable seismic 34 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-35 02.3. 36

37 6-02.3.OPT8(K).GB6 (Installing and Tensioning High-Strength 38

Steel Bar Reinforcement) 39 (April 6, 2015) 40 Use in seismic retrofit projects requiring the 41 installation, stressing, and grouting of high-strength 42 steel bar reinforcement. Include with 6-43 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all 44 other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 45 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 46

47 6-02.3.OPT8(L).GB6 (Longitudinal Seismic Restrainers) 48

(April 6, 2015) 49 Use in seismic retrofit projects requiring the installation 50 of longitudinal seismic restrainer assemblies. Include 51 with 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6, 6-52 02.2.OPT60(C).BSP.GB6, 6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6, 6-53


02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, either 6-02.4.OPT43.GB6 and 6-1 02.5.OPT71.GB6, or 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-2 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other applicable seismic 3 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-4 02.3. 5

6 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6 (Column Jacketing) 7

(April 6, 2015) 8 Use in projects with column jacketing of existing 9 bridges. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-10 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-11 02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-12 02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include 13 with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication 14 field measuring requirements for specific existing 15 bridge columns are waived. 16

17 6-02.3.OPT9.GB6 (Polyester Concrete) 18

(January 7, 2019) 19 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 20 Include with 6-02.2.OPT27.GB6. 21

22 6-02.3.OPT10.GB6 (Elastomeric Concrete) 23

(January 7, 2019) 24 Use in projects where elastomeric concrete is required. 25 Include with 6-02.2.OPT28.GB6. 26

27 6-02.3(2).GR6 Proportioning Materials 28

29 6-02.3(2).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(2) is supplemented with the 30

following) 31 Must use once preceding any of the following: 32 33

6-02.3(2).OPT1.GB6 (Expansion Joint Header Concrete) 34 (April 6, 2015) 35 Use in projects with expansion joint modifications 36 where the headers for the modified joints are made of 37 a high early strength concrete mix. Include with 6-38 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-39 02.3(13).OPT7(H).GB6, , or 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-40 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable expansion 41 joint modification GSPs supplementing Sections 6-42 02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 43

44 6-02.3(5).GR6 Acceptance of Concrete 45

46 6-02.3(5)A.GR6 General 47

48 6-02.3(5)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(5)A is supplemented with the 49

following) 50 Must use once preceding any of the following: 51

52 6-02.3(5)A.OPT1.GB6 (Concrete Class EA) 53


(June 26, 2000) 1 Use in projects requiring concrete members with 2 exposed aggregate finish. Include with 6-3 02.2.OPT5.GB6, 6-02.3(14).OPT1.GB6, 6-4 02.2.OPT6.GB6 and 6-02.3(14).OPT3.GB6. 5

6 6-02.3(6).GR6 Placing Concrete 7

8 6-02.3(6)B.GR6 Placing Concrete in Foundation Seals 9 10

6-02.3(6)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(6)B is supplemented with the 11 following) 12 Must use once preceding any of the following: 13 14

6-02.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6 (Concrete Seals) 15 (June 26, 2000) 16 Use in projects where there is the possibility of 17 seals being omitted during construction, in which 18 case the footing is to be lowered to bottom of 19 seal. 20 21

6-02.3(6)B.OPT2.GB6 (Concrete Seals) 22 (June 26, 2000) 23 Use in projects where there is the possibility of 24 seals being omitted during construction, in which 25 case the footing is not to be lowered. 26

27 6-02.3(10).GR6 Bridge Decks and Bridge Approach Slabs 28 29

6-02.3(10)D.GR6 Concrete Placement, Finishing, and Texturing 30 31

6-02.3(10)D.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(10)D is supplemented with 32 the following) 33 Must use once preceding any of the following: 34

35 6-02.3(10)D.OPT1.GB6 (Repairing Slab Left Exposed After 36

Removing Existing Curb or Sidewalk) 37 (August 4, 2008) 38 Use in projects when existing curbs or sidewalks 39 are to be removed and the portion of the slab 40 under the curb or sidewalk that is to remain 41 exposed will be within two feet from the traffic 42 lane. 43

44 6-02.3(10)D.OPT2.GB6 (Repairing Slab Left Exposed After 45

Removing 46 Existing Curb or Railbase) 47 (August 4, 2008) 48 Use in projects when existing curbs or railbases 49 are to be removed and the portion of the slab 50 under the curb or railbase that is to remain 51 exposed will be more than two feet from the 52


traffic lane. Include with 6-02.2.OPT3.GB6 and 1 6-02.5.OPT1.GB6. 2

3 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6 (Bridge Drain Risers) 4

(August 3, 2015) 5 Use in projects requiring the raising of bridge 6 drains prior to asphalt or modified concrete 7 overlay work on bridge decks. Include with 6-8 02.2.OPT48.GB6. Include with 6-9 02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 if the bridge deck is 10 overlaid with membrane waterproofing and ACP. 11 Include with 6-02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the work is 12 included in the cost of the membrane 13 waterproofing or modified concrete overlay. 14 Include with 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 and 6-15 02.5.OPT51.GB6 if the unit contract bid item 16 “Modify Bridge Drain” is used to pay for the work. 17 Must use once preceding any of the following: 18

19 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3(A).GB6 (Bridge Drain Risers) 20

(August 4, 2008) 21 Use in projects requiring the raising of 22 bridge drains prior to membrane 23 waterproofing and asphalt overlay work. 24 Include with 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6 and 6-25 02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6. Include with 6-26 02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the work is included in 27 the cost of the membrane waterproofing. 28 Include with 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 and 6-29 02.5.OPT51.GB6 if the unit contract bid 30 item “Modify Bridge Drain” is used to pay 31 for the work. 32

33 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 (Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 34

(August 3, 2015) 35 Use in projects requiring plugging of bridge 36 drains. Include with 6-02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the 37 work is included in the cost of the membrane 38 waterproofing or modified concrete overlay. 39 Include with 6-02.4.OPT27.GB6 and 6-40 02.5.OPT52.GB6 if the unit contract bid item 41 “Plugging Existing Bridge Drain” is used to pay 42 for the work. 43

44 6-02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 45

(April 6, 2015) 46 Use in projects with core drilled bridge deck 47 drains. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6, and 48 either 6-02.4.OPT32.GB6 and 6-49 02.5.OPT58.GB6, or 6-02.5.OPT59.FB6. 50

51 6-02.3(10)F.GR6 Bridge Approach Slab Orientation and Anchors 52

53


6-02.3(10)F.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(10)F is supplemented with 1 the following) 2 Must use once preceding any of the following: 3 4

6-02.3(10)F.OPT2.GB6 (Construct pavement end of approach 5 slabs parallel to pavement seat) 6 (August 4, 2008) 7 Use in projects when the pavement ends of all 8 approach slabs are constructed parallel to the 9 pavement seat. 10

11 6-02.3(10)F.OPT3.FB6 (Construct pavement end of approach 12

slabs both 13 normal to the roadway centerline and parallel to 14 pavement seat) 15 (August 4, 2008) 16 Use in projects when the pavement ends of the 17 approach slabs are constructed both normal to 18 the roadway centerline and parallel to the 19 pavement seat. 20 (2 fill-ins) 21

22 6-02.3(13).GR6 Expansion Joints 23



6-02.3(13).OPT3.FB6 (Modular Expansion Joint System) 29 (August 6, 2018) 30 Include in projects requiring a modular expansion joint 31 system. The fill-in specifies the percentage of the 32 amplified vertical load range to be used for the 33 horizontal load range for fatigue design. The fill-in 34 value shall be 20 percent except as otherwise 35 specified. The fill-in value shall be 50 percent for all 36 modular expansion joint systems installed at locations 37 subject to significant braking and acceleration forces 38 or to particularly large movement ranges. Coordination 39 with the Bridge and Structures Office Bearing and 40 Expansion Joint Specialist is required. Include with 6-41 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Must use with 6-42 02.4.OPT3.FB6, 6-02.2.OPT22.GB6, and 6-43 02.5.OPT28.GB6. 44 (1 fill-in) 45

46 6-02.3(13).OPT7.GB6 Expansion Joint Modification 47

48 6-02.3(13).OPT7(A).GB6 (Plans of Existing Expansion Joint) 49

(April 6, 2015) 50 Use in projects with expansion joint modification 51 when plans of the existing joint are available. 52 Include with 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-53


02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all applicable expansion 1 joint modification GSPs supplementing Sections 2 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 3

4 6-02.3(13).OPT7(B).GB6 (Expansion Joint Demolition Plan) 5

(April 6, 2015) 6 Use in projects where removal of portions of the 7 existing bridge expansion joint assembly, and/or 8 adjacent concrete and steel reinforcing bars, is 9 required. Include with 6-02.3(13).OPT7(E).FB6, 10 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and 11 all other applicable expansion joint modification 12 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-13 02.3(13). 14

15 6-02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6 (Joint Preparation and Installation 16

Procedure) 17 (April 6, 2015) 18 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant 19 is used for expansion joint modification. Include 20 with 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6, either 6-21 02.3(13).OPT7(I).GB6 or 6-22 02.3(13).OPT7(J).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-23 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 24 expansion joint modification GSPs 25 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 26

27 6-02.3(13).OPT7(D).FB6 (Field Measuring Existing Expansion 28

Joint) 29 (April 6, 2015) 30 Use in projects where field measuring of the 31 existing expansion joint is required. The fill-in 32 specifies the bridge(s) included in the field 33 measuring requirement. Include with 6-34 02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all 35 other applicable expansion joint modification 36 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-37 02.3(13). 38 (1 fill-in) 39 40

6-02.3(13).OPT7(E).FB6 (Removing Portions of Existing Bridge 41 Expansion Joints) 42 (April 6, 2015) 43 Use in projects where removal of portions of the 44 existing bridge expansion joint assembly, and/or 45 adjacent concrete and steel reinforcing bars, is 46 required. The fill-in specified the bridge(s) where 47 the expansion joint removal work is required. 48 Include with 6-02.3(13).OPT7(B).GB6, 6-49 02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all 50 other applicable expansion joint modification 51 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-52 02.3(13). 53


(1-fill-in) 1 2

6-02.3(13).OPT7(F).GB6 (Drilling Holes and Setting St. Reinf. Bars) 3 (April 6, 2015) 4 Use in projects with expansion joint modification 5 where drilling holes and setting steel reinforcing 6 bar dowels are required. Include with 6-7 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-8 02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all 9 other applicable expansion joint modification 10 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-11 02.3(13). 12 13

6-02.3(13).OPT7(G).GB6 (Placing Polyester Concrete or 14 Elastomeric Concrete Headers) 15 (April 6, 2015) 16 Use in projects when the headers for modified 17 bridge expansion joints are made of either 18 polyester concrete or elastomeric concrete. 19 Include with either 6-02.2.OPT27.GB6 and 6-20 02.3.OPT9.GB6, or 6-02.2.OPT28.GB6 and 6-21 02.3.OPT10.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-22 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 23 expansion joint modification GSPs 24 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 25 26

6-02.3(13).OPT7(H).GB6 (Placing Concrete Headers) 27 (April 6, 2015) 28 Use in projects where the headers for modified 29 bridge expansion joints are made of concrete. 30 Include with 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-31 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.3(13).OPT7(F).GB6, 32 6-02.3(2).OPT1.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-33 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 34 expansion joint modification GSPs 35 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 36 37

6-02.3(13).OPT7(I).GB6 (Placing Expansion Joint Sealant) 38 (April 6, 2015) 39 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant 40 is used for modified bridge expansion joints with 41 concrete or polymer concrete or polyester 42 concrete or elastomeric concrete headers. 43 Include with 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6, 6-44 02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 45 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 46 expansion joint modification GSPs 47 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 48 49

6-02.3(13).OPT7(J).GB6 (Placing Expansion Joint Sealant) 50 (April 6, 2015) 51 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant 52 is used for modified bridge expansion joints with 53 modified concrete overlay headers. To be used 54


only for bridges with low ADT, and only with the 1 approval of the Bridge and Structures Office 2 Bearing and Expansion Joint Specialist. Include 3 with 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6, 6-4 02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 5 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 6 expansion joint modification GSPs 7 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13) 8 and the pertinent modified concrete overlay 9 GSP’s. 10 11

6-02.3(14).GR6 Finishing Concrete Surfaces 12 13

6-02.3(14).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(14) is supplemented with the 14 following) 15 Must use once preceding any of the following: 16

17 6-02.3(14).OPT1.GB6 (Exposed Aggregate Finish) 18

(August 3, 2015) 19 Use in projects requiring exposed aggregate finish of 20 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT5.GB6, 6-21 02.3(5)A.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.2.OPT6.GB6 and 6-22 02.3(14).OPT3.GB6. 23 24

6-02.3(14).OPT2.GB6 (Containment) 25 (June 26, 2000) 26 Use in projects requiring exposed aggregate finish of 27 concrete surfaces over water. Include with 6-28 02.2.OPT5.GB6, 6-02.3(5)A.OPT1.GB6, 6-29 02.3(14).OPT1.GB6, 6-02.2.OPT6.GB6 and 6-30 02.3(14).OPT3.GB6. 31 32

6-02.3(14).OPT3.GB6 (Applying Clear Sealer) 33 (August 3, 2015) 34 Use in projects with an exposed aggregate finish. 35 Include with 6-02.2.OPT5.GB6, 6-02.2.OPT6.GB6, 6-36 02.3(5)A.OPT1.GB6, and 6-02.3(14).OPT1.GB6. 37 38

6-02.3(14).OPT5.GB6 (Fractured Basalt Finish) 39 (April 7, 2008) 40 Use in projects requiring fractured basalt finish of 41 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT7.GB6. 42 43

6-02.3(14).OPT6.GB6 (Fractured Fin Finish) 44 (June 26, 2000) 45 Use in projects requiring fractured fin finish of concrete 46 surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT8.GB6. 47 48

6-02.3(14).OPT7.GB6 (Fractured Granite Finish) 49 (June 26, 2000) 50 Use in projects requiring fractured granite finish of 51 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT9.GB6. 52 53


6-02.3(14).OPT8.GB6 (Variable Depth Random Board Finish and 1 3/4 Inch 2 Random Board Finish) 3 (April 7, 2008) 4 Use in projects requiring use of elastomeric, ABS, or 5 plastic form liners to produce random board finish of 6 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT10.GB6. 7 8

6-02.3(14).OPT9.GB6 (Random Board Finish) 9 (August 3, 2015) 10 Use in projects requiring use of wooden forms 11 conforming to Section 6-02.3(17)J to produce random 12 board finish of concrete surfaces. 13 14

6-02.3(14).OPT10.GB6 (Ribbed Finish) 15 (August 6, 2007) 16 Use in projects requiring ribbed finish of concrete 17 surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT11.GB6. 18 19

6-02.3(14).OPT11.GB6 (Striated Finish) 20 (August 6, 2007) 21 Use in projects requiring striated finish of concrete 22 surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT12.GB6. 23 24

6-02.3(14).OPT12.GB6 (Ashlar Stone Finish) 25 (August 6, 2007) 26 Use in projects requiring ashlar stone finish of 27 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT13.GB6. 28 29

6-02.3(14).OPT13.GB6 (Block Finish) 30 (August 6, 2007) 31 Use in projects requiring block finish of concrete 32 surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT14.GB6. 33 34

6-02.3(14).OPT14.GB6 (Split Face Finish) 35 (April 7, 2008) 36 Use in projects requiring split face finish of concrete 37 surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT15.GB6. 38 39

6-02.3(14).OPT15.GB6 (River Rock Finish) 40 (April 7, 2008) 41 Use in projects requiring river rock finish of concrete 42 surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT16.GB6. 43 44

6-02.3(14).OPT16.GB6 (Cascadian Stone Finish) 45 (April 5, 2010) 46 Use in projects requiring cascadian stone finish of 47 concrete surfaces. Include with 6-02.2.OPT17.GB6. 48 49

6-02.3(14).OPT25.GB6 (Permeon Treatment) 50 (January 2, 2018) 51 Use in projects where aesthetic surface aging of 52 specific concrete surfaces is required. Include with 6-53


02.2.OPT55.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT47.GB6, and 6-1 02.5.OPT75.GB6. 2 3

6-02.3(14)C.GR6 Pigmented Sealer for Concrete Surfaces 4 5

6-02.3(14)C.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(14)C is supplemented with 6 the following) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 6-02.3(14)C.OPT1.GB6 (Washington Gray Pigmented Sealer) 10

(April 6, 2009) 11 Use in projects requiring application of 12 pigmented sealer to concrete surfaces, with 13 Washington Gray being the sole color. 14

15 6-02.3(14)C.OPT2.GB6 (Mt. St. Helens Gray Pigmented Sealer) 16

(April 6, 2009) 17 Use in projects requiring application of 18 pigmented sealer to concrete surfaces, with Mt. 19 St. Helens Gray being the sole color. 20

21 6-02.3(14)C.OPT3.GB6 (Mt. Baker Gray Pigmented Sealer) 22

(April 6, 2009) 23 Use in projects requiring application of 24 pigmented sealer to concrete surfaces, with Mt. 25 Baker Gray being the sole color. 26 27

6-02.3(14)C.OPT4.GB6 (Cascade Green Pigmented Sealer) 28 (April 6, 2009) 29 Use in projects requiring application of 30 pigmented sealer to concrete surfaces, with 31 Cascade Green being the sole color. 32 33

6-02.3(14)C.OPT5.FB6 (Multiple Color Pigmented Sealer) 34 (April 6, 2009) 35 Use in projects requiring application of 36 pigmented sealer to concrete surfaces, with two 37 or more colors specified. Each fill-in pair is to be 38 used to specify the structural features receiving a 39 specific color of pigmented sealer. 40 (2 fill-ins) 41 42

6-02.3(17).GR6 Falsework and Formwork 43 44

6-02.3(17)C.GR6 Falsework and Formwork at Special Locations 45 46

6-02.3(17)C.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(17)C is supplemented with 47 the following) 48 Must use once preceding any of the following: 49

50 6-02.3(17)C.OPT1.GB6 (Falsework Adjacent to or over 51

Railroad Tracks) 52 (June 26, 2000) 53


Use in bridge projects requiring falsework 1 adjacent to or over railroad tracks. 2

3 6-02.3(17)K.GR6 Concrete Forms on Steel Spans 4

5 6-02.3(17)K.INST1.GR6 (The first paragraph of Section 6-02.3(17)K is 6

revised to read as follows) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 6-02.3(17)K.OPT1.GB6 (Stay-in-place Metal forms for 10

Steel Box Girders) 11 (August 3, 2015) 12 Use in projects with steel box girder bridges 13 when stay-in-place metal forms are allowed by 14 the Bridge and Structures Office Steel Specialist. 15 Include with 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, 6-16 02.5.OPT26.FB6, 6-03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-17 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, and 18 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6. 19

20 6-02.3(18).GR6 Placing Anchor Bolts 21

22 6-02.3(18).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(18) is supplemented with the . 23


26 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6 (January 3, 2011) 27

Include in projects requiring resin bonded anchors for 28 attaching and anchoring items to concrete structures. 29 Must also include 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6. 30

31 6-02.3(19).GR6 Bridge Bearings 32

33 6-02.3(19)A.GR6 Elastomeric Bearing Pads 34

35 6-02.3(19)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(19)A is supplemented with 36

the following) 37 Must use once preceding any of the following: 38

39 6-02.3(19)A.OPT1.BSP.GB6 (High-Load Elastomeric Bearing Pad 40

Assembly) 41 (******) 42 Use in projects with high-load elastomeric 43 bearing pad assemblies. Include with 6-44 02.2.OPT38.BSP.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT19.BSP.GB6, 45 and 6-02.5.OPT44.BSP.GB6. 46

47 6-02.3(19)B.GR6 Bridge Bearing Assemblies 48

49 6-02.3(19)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(19)B is supplemented with 50

The following) 51 Must use once preceding any of the following: 52

53


6-02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6 (Fabric Pad Bearing) 1 (August 3, 2015) 2 Use in projects requiring fabric pad bearings. 3 Include with 6-02.4.OPT13.FB6, 6-4 02.5.OPT38.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 5

6 6-02.3(19)B.OPT6.GB6 (Transverse Stop Bearing) 7

(April 6, 2015) 8 Use in projects with fabric pad transverse stop 9 bearing assemblies. Include with 6-10 02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT18.GB6, 6-11 02.5.OPT43.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 12 13

6-02.3(19)B.OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Disc Bearing) 14 (******) 15 Use in projects with disc bearing assemblies. 16 Include with 6-02.4.OPT13.FB6, 6-17 02.5.OPT38.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 18

19 6-02.3(19)B.OPT9.BSP.GB6 (Spherical Bearing) 20

(******) 21 Use in projects with spherical bearing 22 assemblies. Include with 6-02.4.OPT13.FB6, 6-23 02.5.OPT38.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 24

25 6-02.3(20).GR6 Grout for Anchor Bolts and Bridge Bearings 26



31 6-02.3(20).OPT1.FB6 (Grout) 32

(June 26, 2000) 33 Use in projects requiring grout for structural 34 applications such as grout pads for beams and girders, 35 bridge bearing plates, post base plates, (does not 36 include cantilever sign structures) etc. The fill-in 37 specifies the locations where the grout is required. 38 (1 fill-in) 39

40 6-02.3(24).GR6 Reinforcement 41

42 6-02.3(24)C.GR6 Placing and Fastening 43

44 6-02.3(24)C.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(24)C is supplemented with 45


48 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6 (Drilling Holes for, and Setting, Steel 49

Reinforcing Bar Dowels) 50 (January 7, 2019) 51 Use in projects where holes are drilled into 52 existing concrete and steel reinforcing bar 53


dowels are set with epoxy resin. Include with 6-1 02.2.OPT2.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6. Include 2 the above with 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2, 2-3 02.3(2).OPT8.GB2, 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-4 02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, and either 2-5 02.5.OPT7.GR2 or 2-02.5.OPT10.GR2 when 6 extending a conc. box culvert. 7

8 6-02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6 (Drilling Holes for, and Setting, Dowels for 9

Conc. Box Culvert Extension) 10 (June 26, 2000) 11 Use in projects requiring the extension of an 12 existing conc. box culvert. Include with 2-13 02.1.OPT3.GR2, 2-02.3(2).OPT8.GB2, 2-14 02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-15 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6, and 16 either 2-02.5.OPT7.GR2 or 2-02.5.OPT10.GR2. 17

18 6-02.3(24)D.GR6 Splicing 19

20 6-02.3(24)D.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(24)D is supplemented with 21


24 6-02.3(24)D.OPT1.GB6 (Splicing of Hoop Reinforcement for 25

Columns and Shafts) 26 (April 6, 2015) 27 Use in projects using steel reinforcing bar hoops 28 for columns and shafts. Include with 6-29 02.3(24)E.OPT2.GB6. 30 31

6-02.3(24)E.GR6 Welding Reinforcing Steel 32 33

6-02.3(24)E.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(24)E is supplemented with 34 the following) 35 Must use once preceding any of the following: 36

37 6-02.3(24)E.OPT2.GB6 (Welded Splice Requirements for Hoop 38

Reinforcement) 39 (April 6, 2015) 40 Use in projects using steel reinforcing bar hoops 41 for columns and shafts. Include with 6-42 02.3(24)D.OPT1.GB6. 43

44 6-02.3(26).GR6 Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete 45

46 6-02.3(26).INST1.GR6 (The third paragraph of Section 6-02.3(26) is 47

revised to 48 read as follows) 49 Must use once preceding any of the following: 50

51 6-02.3(26).OPT1.GB6 (Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete) 52

(January 4, 2010) 53


Use in projects with segmental post-tensioned 1 structures. Check with the Region Construction 2 Engineer to see if testing equipment is available. 3

4 6-02.3(28).GR6 Precast Concrete Panels 5

6 6-02.3(28)A.GR6 Shop Drawings 7 8

6-02.3(28)A.INST2.GR6 (The list included in the third paragraph of 9 Section 6-02.3(28)A is supplemented with the 10 following) 11 Must use once preceding any of the following: 12 13

6-02.3(28)A.OPT6.BSP.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 14 (******) 15 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 16 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-17 02.2.OPT61.BSP.GB6, 6-18 02.3(28)B.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-19 02.3(28)E.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-20 02.3(28)F.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-21 02.3(28)G.OPT6.BSP.GB6 and 6-22 02.3(28)I.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 23 24

6-02.3(28)B.GR6 Casting 25 26

6-02.3(28)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(28)B is supplemented with 27 the following) 28 Must use once preceding any of the following: 29

30 6-02.3(28)B.OPT6.BSP.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 31

(******) 32 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 33 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-34 02.2.OPT61.BSP.GB6, 6-35 02.3(28)A.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-36 02.3(28)E.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-37 02.3(28)F.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-38 02.3(28)G.OPT6.BSP.GB6 and 6-39 02.3(28)I.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 40 41

6-02.3(28)E.GR6 Finishing 42 43

6-02.3(28)E.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(28)E is supplemented with 44 the following) 45 Must use once preceding any of the following: 46

47 6-02.3(28)E.OPT6.BSP.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 48

(******) 49 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 50 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-51 02.2.OPT61.BSP.GB6, 6-52 02.3(28)A.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-53


02.3(28)B.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-1 02.3(28)F.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-2 02.3(28)G.OPT6.BSP.GB6 and 6-3 02.3(28)I.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 4

5 6-02.3(28)F.GR6 Tolerances 6 7

6-02.3(28)F.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(28)F is supplemented with the 8 following) 9 Must use once preceding any of the following: 10

11 6-02.3(28)F.OPT1.BSP.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 12

(******) 13 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 14 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-15 02.2.OPT61.BSP.GB6, 6-16 02.3(28)A.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-17 02.3(28)B.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-18 02.3(28)E.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-19 02.3(28)G.OPT6.BSP.GB6 and 6-20 02.3(28)I.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 21

22 6-02.3(28)G.GR6 Handling and Storage 23

24 6-02.3(28)G.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(28)G is supplemented with 25


28 6-02.3(28)G.OPT6.BSP.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 29

(******) 30 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 31 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-32 02.2.OPT61.BSP.GB6, 6-33 02.3(28)A.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-34 02.3(28)B.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-35 02.3(28)E.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-36 02.3(28)F.OPT1.BSP.GB6 and 6-37 02.3(28)I.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 38

39 6-02.3(28)I.GR6 Erection 40

41 6-02.3(28)I.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(28)I is supplemented with the 42


45 6-02.3(28)I.OPT6.BSP.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 46

(******) 47 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 48 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-49 02.2.OPT61.BSP.GB6, 6-50 02.3(28)A.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-51 02.3(28)B.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-52 02.3(28)E.OPT6.BSP.GB6, 6-53


02.3(28)F.OPT1.BSP.GB6 and 6-1 02.3(28)G.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 2 3

6-02.4.GR6 Measurement 4 5 6-02.4.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.4 is supplemented with the following) 6


6-02.4.OPT1.FB6 (Summary of Quantities for Superstructure 9 and Bridge Deck) 10 (August 2, 2010) 11 Use in bridge construction projects with lump sum items 12 for superstructure or bridge deck. The first and third fill-in 13 specify the appropriate bid item name (“Superstructure - 14 _____” or “Bridge Deck - _____”). The second fill-in 15 itemizes the approximate quantities included. Include with 16 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6 for superstructure, and with 6-17 02.5.OPT26.FB6 for bridge deck. 18 (3 fill-ins) 19

20 6-02.4.OPT3.FB6 (Modular Expansion Joint System) 21

(August 2, 2010) 22 Include in projects requiring a modular expansion joint 23 system. The fill-in in is to itemize the quantities of work 24 and materials included in the lump sum item. Coordination 25 with the Bridge and Structures Office Bearing and 26 Expansion Joint Specialist is required. Include with 6-27 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Must use with 6-02.2.OPT22.GB6, 28 6-02.3(13).OPT3.FB6, and 6-02.5.OPT28.GB6. 29 (1 fill-in) 30

31 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 (Expansion Joint Modification) 32

(April 6, 2015) 33 Use in projects with lump sum item for expansion joint 34 modification. The fill-in specifies the approximate 35 quantities included. Include with 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6 and 36 all applicable expansion joint modification GSPs 37 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 38 (1 fill-in) 39

40 6-02.4.OPT13.FB6 (Bridge Bearing Assembly) 41

(June 26, 2000) 42 Use in projects with bridge bearing assemblies. The fill-in 43 specifies the type of bridge bearing assembly. Include with 44 6-02.5.OPT38.GB6. Include with 6-02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6, 45 and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6 for fabric pad bearings. 46 (1 fill-in) 47

48 6-02.4.OPT18.GB6 (Transverse Stop Bearing) 49

(April 6, 2015) 50 Use in projects with fabric pad transverse stop bearing 51 assemblies. Include with 6-02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-52


02.3(19)B.OPT6.GB6, 6-02.5.OPT43.GB6, and 6-1 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 2

3 6-02.4.OPT19.BSP.GB6 (High-Load Elastomeric Bearing Pad) 4

(******) 5 Use in projects with high-load elastomeric bearing pad 6 assemblies. Include with 6-02.2.OPT38.BSP.GB6, 6-7 02.3(19)A.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT44.BSP.GB6. 8 9

6-02.4.OPT24.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 10 (August 6, 2012) 11 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 12 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-13 02.2.OPT4.GB6, 6-02.3.OPT1.GB6, and 6-14 02.5.OPT49.GB6. 15

16 6-02.4.OPT25.GB6 (Bridge Grate Inlet) 17

(June 26, 2000) 18 Use in projects with bridge grate inlets. Include with 6-19 02.2.OPT47.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT50.GB6. 20 21

6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 (Modifying Bridge Drain) 22 (June 26, 2000) 23 Use in projects where modifying bridge drains is a stand-24 alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6, 6-25 02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT51.GB6 with 26 modified concrete overlay projects. Include the above with 27 6-02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 with membrane waterproofing and 28 ACP overlay projects. 29 30

6-02.4.OPT27.GB6 (Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 31 (June 26, 2000) 32 Use in projects where plugging existing bridge drains is a 33 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 34 and 6-02.5.OPT52.GB6. 35 36

6-02.4.OPT32.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 37 (April 6, 2015) 38 Use in projects where core drilled bridge deck drain is a 39 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6, 6-40 02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT58.GB6. 41 42

6-02.4.OPT43.GB6 (Longitudinal Seismic Restrainer) 43 (April 6, 2015) 44 Use in projects where longitudinal seismic restrainer is a 45 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6, 46 6-02.2.OPT60(C).GB6, 6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6, 6-47 02.3.OPT8(L).GB6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-48 02.5.OPT71.GB6 and all other applicable seismic retrofit 49 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 50

51 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 (Seismic Retrofit) 52

(April 6, 2015) 53


Use in projects with a lump sum item for seismic retrofit. 1 The fill-in specifies the approximate quantities included. 2 Include with 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6 and all other applicable 3 seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 4 6-02.3. 5 (1 fill-in) 6

7 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6 (Column Jacketing) 8

(April 6, 2015) 9 Use in projects with a lump sum item for column jacketing. 10 The fill-in specifies the approximate quantities included. 11 Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 12 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-13 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-14 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 15 when the pre-fabrication field measuring requirements for 16 specific existing bridge columns are waived. 17 (1 fill-in) 18

19 6-02.4.OPT47.GB6 (Permeon Treatment) 20

(April 6, 2015) 21 Use in projects where aesthetic surface aging of specific 22 concrete surfaces is required. Include with 6-23 02.2.OPT55.GB6, 6-02.3(14).OPT25.GB6, and 6-24 02.5.OPT75.GB6. 25

26 6-02.5.GR6 Payment 27 28

6-02.5.INST1.GR6 (The first bid item under Section 6-02.5 is supplemented with 29 the following) 30 Must use once preceding any of the following: 31

32 6-02.5.OPT1.GB6 (Coating Surfaces with Epoxy Mortar) 33

(June 26, 2000) 34 Use in projects requiring coating of concrete surfaces with 35 epoxy mortar. Include with 6-02.2.OPT3.GB6 and 6-36 02.3(10)D.OPT2.GB6. 37 38

6-02.5.INST2.GR6 (The third bid item under Section 6-02.5 is supplemented 39 with the following) 40 Must use once preceding any of the following: 41

42 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6 (Superstructure) 43

(June 26, 2000) 44 Use in bridge projects with lump sum items for 45 superstructure when payment for certain features is to be 46 included in the superstructure item. The fill-in specifies 47 work items included in the bid item. Include with 6-48 02.4.OPT1.FB6. 49 (1 fill-in) 50

51 6-02.5.INST3.GR6 (The fifth and sixth bid items under Section 6-02.5 are 52

supplemented with the following) 53



6-02.5.OPT20.GB6 (Epoxy-coated St. Reinf. Bar for Bridge) 3 (April 6, 2015) 4 Use in projects with small amounts of epoxy-coated steel 5 reinforcing bar in bridge substructure which is included in 6 the quantity for “St. Reinf. Bar for Bridge” in lieu of a 7 separate stand-alone bid item. 8



6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 (Bridge Deck) 13 (August 2, 2010) 14 Use in steel bridge construction projects with lump sum 15 items for bridge deck. The fill-in specifies work items 16 included in the bid item. Include with 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6. 17 (1 fill-in) 18 19

6-02.5.OPT28.GB6 (Modular Expansion Joint System) 20 (August 2, 2010) 21 Include in projects requiring a modular expansion joint 22 system. Coordination with the Bridge and Structures Office 23 Bearing and Expansion Joint Specialist is required. 24 Include with 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Must use with 6-25 02.2.OPT22.GB6, 6-02.3(13).OPT3.FB6, and 6-26 02.4.OPT3.FB6. 27 28

6-02.5.OPT33.GB6 (Expansion Joint Modification) 29 (April 6, 2015) 30 Use in projects where expansion joint modification is a 31 lump sum item. Include with 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and all 32 applicable expansion joint modification GSPs 33 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 34

35 6-02.5.OPT38.GB6 (Bridge Bearing Assembly) 36

(June 26, 2000) 37 Use in projects with bridge bearing assemblies. Include 38 with 6-02.4.OPT13.FB6. Include with 6-39 02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6 and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6 for fabric 40 pad bearings. 41 42

6-02.5.OPT43.GB6 (Transverse Stop Bearing) 43 (April 6, 2015) 44 Use in projects with fabric pad transverse stop bearing 45 assemblies. Include with 6-02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-46 02.3(19)B.OPT6.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT18.GB6, and 6-47 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 48 49

6-02.5.OPT44.BSP.GB6 (High-Load Elastomeric Bearing Pad) 50 (******) 51


Use in projects with high-load elastomeric bearing pad 1 assemblies. Include with 6-02.2.OPT38.BSP.GB6, 6-2 02.3(19)A.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 6-02.4.OPT19.BSP.GB6. 3 4

6-02.5.OPT49.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 5 (August 1, 2011) 6 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 7 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-8 02.2.OPT4.GB6, 6-02.3.OPT1.GB6, and 6-9 02.4.OPT24.GB6. 10 11

6-02.5.OPT50.GB6 (Bridge Grate Inlet) 12 (June 26, 2000) 13 Use in projects with bridge grate inlets. Include with 6-14 02.2.OPT47.GB6 and 6-02.4.OPT25.GB6. 15 16

6-02.5.OPT51.GB6 (Modify Bridge Drain) 17 (June 26, 2000) 18 Use in projects where modifying bridge drains is a stand-19 alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6, 6-20 02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6, and 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 with 21 modified concrete overlay projects. Include the above with 22 6-02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 with membrane waterproofing and 23 ACP overlay projects. 24 25

6-02.5.OPT52.GB6 (Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 26 (June 26, 2000) 27 Use in projects where plugging existing bridge drains is a 28 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 29 and 6-02.4.OPT27.GB6. 30 31

6-02.5.OPT53.FB6 (Modifying or Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 32 (June 26, 2000) 33 Use in projects where payment for modifying or plugging 34 existing bridge drains is included under either “Membrane 35 Waterproofing (Deck Seal)” or “Finishing and Curing 36 Modified Conc. Overlay”. The first fill-in specifies whether 37 the work is modifying or plugging existing bridge drains. 38 The second fill-in specifies appropriate pay item for the 39 work. Include with 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6, and 6-40 02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6 for modifying bridge drains with 41 modified concrete overlay projects. Include the above with 42 6-02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 for modifying bridge drains with 43 membrane waterproofing and ACP overlay projects. 44 Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 for plugging existing 45 bridge drains. 46 (2 fill-ins) 47 48

6-02.5.OPT58.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 49 (April 6, 2015) 50 Use in projects where core drilled bridge deck drain is a 51 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6, 6-52 02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6, and 6-02.4.OPT32.GB6. 53 54


6-02.5.OPT59.FB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Use in projects where core drilled bridge deck drain is 3 included in a separate bid item. The fill-in specifies the bid 4 item including this work. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6 5 and 6-02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6. 6 (1 fill-in) 7 8

6-02.5.OPT71.GB6 (Longitudinal Seismic Restrainer) 9 (April 6, 2015) 10 Use in projects where longitudinal seismic restrainer is a 11 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6, 12 6-02.2.OPT60(C).GB6, 6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6, 6-13 02.3.OPT8(L).GB6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-14 02.4.OPT43.GB6 and all applicable seismic retrofit GSPs 15 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 16

17 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6 (Seismic Retrofit) 18

(April 6, 2015) 19 Use in projects with seismic retrofit of bridges. Include with 20 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and all applicable seismic retrofit 21 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 22

23 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6 (Column Jacketing) 24

(April 6, 2015) 25 Use in projects with column jacketing of bridges. Include 26 with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-27 02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-28 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, and 6-29 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 30 when the pre-fabrication field measuring requirements for 31 specific existing bridge columns are waived. 32 33

6-02.5.OPT75.GB6 (Permeon Treatment) 34 (April 6, 2015) 35 Use in projects where aesthetic surface aging of specific 36 concrete surfaces is required. Include with 6-37 02.2.OPT55.GB6, 6-02.3(14).OPT25.GB6, and 38 02419A.GB6. 39

40 6-02.5.OPT91.FB6 (Bridge and Structures Minor Items) 41

(June 26, 2000) 42 Use in projects with bridges and other structures when 43 there are minor items that are incidental to a lump sum or 44 a unit price bid item. The first fill-in specifies the minor 45 items. The second fill-in specifies the appropriate pay 46 item(s) for the minor items. 47 (2 fill-ins) 48 49

6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 50 (June 26, 2000) 51 Use in projects requiring installation of bridge supported 52 utilities. The first fill-in specifies the type of utility. The 53


second fill-in specifies the bridge(s). The third fill-in 1 specifies the work performed by the Contractor (furnishing 2 materials, installing materials, coordination with utility, 3 etc.), excluding furnishing and installing inserts. The fourth 4 fill-in specifies the pay item. Include with 6-5 02.3.OPT2(B).GB6, with appropriate bridge supported 6 utility material GSP’s, if all materials and work are supplied 7 and performed by the Contractor. Include with 6-8 02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT93.GB6 if a utility 9 company is supplying and performing a portion of the 10 utility materials and work. Include with 6-11 02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-12 02.4.OPT1.FB6, and either 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6 or 6-13 02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the supports include concrete 14 inserts. 15 (4 fill-ins) 16 17

6-02.5.OPT93.GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 18 (June 26, 2000) 19 Use in projects requiring installation of bridge supported 20 utilities where a utility company is supplying and 21 performing a portion of the utility materials and work. 22 Include with 6-02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6, 23 and appropriate bridge supported utility material GSP’s. 24 Include with 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 25 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, and either 6-02.5.OPT9.FB6 or 6-26 02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the supports include concrete 27 inserts. 28

29 6-03.GR6 Steel Structures 30




6-03.3.OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Pin Bearing) 37 (******) 38 Use in projects with pin bearing assemblies. Include with 39 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-03.3(37).OPT1.GB6, 6-40 03.4.OPT6.GB6, and 6-03.5.OPT12.GB6. 41

42 6-03.3(7).GR6 Shop Plans 43

44 6-03.3(7)A.GR6 Erection Methods 45

46 6-03.3(7)A.INST1.GR6 (The list in the second paragraph of Section 47

6-03.3(7)A is supplemented with the following) 48 Must use once preceding any of the following: 49

50 6-03.3(7)A.OPT1.GB6 (Erection by Girder Launching) 51

(April 6, 2015) 52


Use in projects where girder launching may be 1 used as an erection method. 2

3 6-03.3(7)A.OPT2.GB6 (Hand-held Drilling and Reaming) 4

(April 6, 2015) 5 Use in projects where drilling and reaming 6 operations with hand-held devices is permissible. 7 Include with 6-03.3(27)B.OPT1.FB6. 8 (1 fill-in) 9

10 6-03.3(25).GR6 Welding and Repair Welding 11



16 6-03.3(25).OPT2.GB6 (Narrow Gap Improved-Electroslag Welding 17

(NGI-ESW) Procedure) 18 (April 6, 2015) 19 Use in projects with steel plate girder bridges and box 20 girder bridges primarily with Grades 50 and 50W steel. 21 Accompanying details are required in the Plans for 22 NGI-ESW test joint configurations for WPS 23 qualification and charpy v-notch test specimens. 24

25 6-03.3(27).GR6 High Strength Bolt Holes 26

27 6-03.3(27)B.GR6 Reamed and Drilled Holes 28

29 6-03.3(27)B.INST1.GR6 (The second sentence of the first paragraph 30

of Section 6-03.3(27)B is revised to read) 31 Must use once preceding any of the following: 32

33 6-03.3(27)B.OPT1.FB6 (Hand-held Drilling and Reaming) 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Use in projects where drilling and reaming 36 operations with hand-held devices is permissible. 37 The first fill-in specifies the members and items 38 being drilled and reamed, and the second fill-in 39 specifies the bridge(s) where the work is being 40 done. Include with 6-03.3(7)A.OPT2.GB6. 41 (2 fill-ins) 42

43 6-03.3(28).GR6 Shop Assembly 44

45 6-03.3(28)A.GR6 Method of Shop Assembly 46



51 6-03.3(28)A.OPT1.GB6 (Progressive Transverse Shop Assembly) 52

(August 5, 2013) 53


Use in projects with new steel girder bridges that 1 have curved or skewed geometry, with the 2 concurrence of the Bridge and Structures Office 3 Steel Specialist. Include with 6-4 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-5 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-6 03.5.OPT1.GB6. 7

8 6-03.3(28)B.GR6 Check of Shop Assembly 9



14 6-03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6 (Check of Shop Assembly) 15

(August 3, 2015) 16 Use in projects with new steel bridges. Include 17 with 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-18 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-19 03.5.OPT1.GB6. 20

21 6-03.3(30).GR6 Painting 22



27 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6 (Color of Finish Coat) 28

(August 3, 2009) 29 Use in projects with new steel bridges and steel 30 members to cover paint color requirements by 31 specifying the Federal Standard 595B Color Number, 32 or the color name if no number. Include with 6-33 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, 6-34 03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6. 35 36 Also include in projects with new minor steel items 37 such as steel expansion joints (6-02.3(13).OPT3.FB6, 38 6-02.4.OPT3.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT28.GB6, and 6-39 02.2.OPT22.GB6) and bearings (6-40 02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6). 41 (1 fill-in) 42

43 6-03.3(30).OPT6.FB6 (Painting Galvanized Seismic Retrofit 44

Components) 45 (April 6, 2015) 46 Use in seismic retrofit projects where galvanized steel 47 components are attached to painted members of 48 existing steel bridges to cover paint color 49 requirements. The first fill-in specifies the galvanized 50 components to be painted. The second fill-in specifies 51 the Federal Standard 595B Color Number, or the color 52 name if no number. 53 (2 fill-ins) 54


1 6-03.3(37).GR6 Setting Steel Bridge Bearings 2

3 6-03.3(37).INST1.GR6 (Supplemental Instructions) 4


6-03.3(37).OPT1.GB6 (Pin Bearing) 7 (April 6, 2015) 8 Use in projects with pin bearing assemblies. Include 9 with 6-03.3.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-10 03.4.OPT6.GB6, and 6-03.5.OPT12.GB6. 11 12

6-03.3(38).GR6 Placing Superstructure 13 14


17 6-03.3(38).OPT1.GB6 (Concrete Protection) 18

(August 3, 2015) 19 Use within projects with bridges having weathering 20 steel superstructure members which remain unpainted 21 at completion of construction, and which are above 22 concrete surfaces which require protection from 23 staining while the steel members develop their 24 weathered protective surface. Include with 6-25 03.5.OPT7.FB6. 26

27 6-03.3(39).GR6 Swinging the Span 28

29 6-03.3(39).INST1.GR6 (Supplemental Instructions) 30


6-03.3(39).OPT1.GB6 (Girder Camber Field Measurements) 33 (June 26, 2000) 34 Use in projects with new steel bridges. Include with 6-35 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-36 03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6. 37




6-03.4.OPT1.FB6 (Structural Low Alloy Quantities) 44 (August 6, 2007) 45 Use in projects with new steel bridges. Include with 6-46 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, and 6-47 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6. Include with 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6 when 48 the steel girder includes a pipe railing. 49 (2 fill-ins) 50

51 6-03.4.OPT6.GB6 (Pin Bearing) 52

(April 6, 2015) 53


Use in projects with pin bearing assemblies. Include with 1 6-03.3.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-2 03.3(37).OPT1.GB6, and 6-03.5.OPT12.GB6. 3

4 6-03.5.GR6 Payment 5

6 6-03.5.INST1.GR6 (The second bid item under Section 6-03.5 is 7


10 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6 (Payment for Steel Girder Railing) 11

(August 6, 2007) 12 Use in projects with new steel bridges when the steel 13 girder includes a pipe railing. Include with 6-14 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-15 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, and 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6. 16



6-03.5.OPT7.FB6 (Payment for Concrete Protection) 21 (June 26, 2000) 22 Use in projects with bridges having weathering steel 23 members which remain unpainted at the completion of 24 construction, and which are above concrete surfaces 25 which require protection from staining while the steel 26 members develop their weathered protective surface. 27 Include with 6-03.3(38).OPT1.GB6. 28 (1 fill-in) 29 30

6-03.5.OPT12.GB6 (Pin Bearing) 31 (April 6, 2015) 32 Use in projects with pin bearing assemblies. Include with 33 6-03.3.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-34 03.3(37).OPT1.GB6, and 6-03.4.OPT6.GB6. 35

36 6-04.GR6 Timber Structures 37


40 6-04.3(1).GR6 Storing and Handling Material 41 42


45 6-04.3(1).OPT1.GB6 (Fire Prevention) 46

(March 6, 2000) 47 Use in all timber bridge construction and timber deck 48 replacement projects. Include with 6-04.5.OPT1.FB6. 49

50 6-04.3(1).OPT2.GB6 (Top Flange Treatment) 51

(January 2, 2018) 52


Include in timber redecking projects. Include with 6-1 04.3(1).OPT1.GB6, 6-04.5.OPT1.FB6, and 6-2 04.5.OPT2.FB6. 3 4

6-04.5.GR6 Payment 5 6


9 6-04.5.OPT1.FB6 (Fire Protection) 10

(March 6, 2000) 11 Use in all timber bridge construction and timber deck 12 replacement projects. Include with 6-04.3(1).OPT1.GB6. 13 (1 fill-in) 14

15 6-04.5.OPT2.FB6 (Top Flange Treatment) 16

(March 6, 2000) 17 Use in timber deck replacement projects. Include with 6-18 04.3(1).OPT1.GB6, 6-04.3(1).OPT2.GB6, and 6-19 04.5.OPT1.FB6. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22 6-05.GR6 Piling 23 24

6-05.2.GR6 Materials 25 26

6-05.2.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-05.2 is supplemented with the following) 27 Must use once preceding any of the following: 28 29

6-05.2.OPT1.GB6 Micropiles 30 (April 6, 2015) 31 Use in projects where micropiles are required. Include with 32 6-05.3.OPT1.FB6, 6-05.4.OPT6.GB6, and 6-33 05.5.OPT6.GB6. 34




6-05.3.OPT1.FB6 Micropiles 41 (April 6, 2015) 42 Use in projects where micropiles are required. The first 43 fill-in specifies the top elevation of the micropile bond 44 zone. The second fill-in specified the permanent casting 45 minimum tip elevations. The third fill-in specifies the 46 location(s) of micropile verification tests. Include with 6-47 05.2.OPT1.FB6, 6-05.4.OPT6.GB6, and 6-48 05.5.OPT6.GB6. 49 (Three fill-ins) 50

51 6-05.3(5).GR6 Manufacture of Steel Piles 52




3 6-05.3(5).OPT1.GB6 (Furnishing St. Piling) 4

(April 6, 2015) 5 Use in projects with steel piling where the piling 6 consists of hollow steel pipe that may or may not be 7 filled with concrete and steel reinforcing bars for a 8 portion of its length. Include with 6-05.3(6).OPT1.GB6 9 10

6-05.3(6).GR6 Splicing Steel Casings and Steel Piles 11 12


16 6-05.3(6).OPT1.GB6 (Furnishing St. Piling) 17

(April 6, 2015) 18 Use in projects with steel piling where the piling 19 consists of hollow steel pipe that may or may not be 20 filled with concrete and steel reinforcing bars for a 21 portion of its length. Include with 6-05.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 22

23 6-05.3(10).GR6 Test Piles 24



29 6-05.3(10).OPT1.FB6 (Furnishing and Driving Test Piles) 30

(March 6, 2000) 31 Include in projects having test piles, as recommended 32 by the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The 33 first, third, and fourth fill-ins specify the pile type (cast-34 in-place conc., steel, timber, etc.). The second fill-in 35 specifies the general location (bridge and pier). 36 (4 fill-ins) 37

38 6-05.3(11).GR6 Driving Piles 39

40 6-05.3(11)D.GR6 Achieving Minimum Tip Elevation and 41

Bearing 42 43


47 6-05.3(11)D.OPT2.GB6 (Vibration From Pile Driving) 48

(August 3, 2015) 49 Include in projects where minimizing vibration 50 from driving piles is critical, as recommended by 51 the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. 52 53


6-05.3(11)D.OPT3.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 1 (August 3, 2015) 2 Include in projects where preboring of piles is 3 required to prevent downdrag from settlement, as 4 recommended by the Materials Laboratory 5 Geotechnical Branch. The first fill-in specifies the 6 pile type (cast-in-place conc., steel, timber, etc.). 7 The second fill-in specifies the general location 8 (bridge and pier). The third fill-in specifies the 9 bottom elevation of the preboring. Include with 6-10 05.4.OPT1.FB6 and 6-05.5.OPT1.FB6. 11 (3 fill-ins) 12 13

6-05.3(11)D.OPT4.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 14 (August 3, 2015) 15 Include in projects where preboring of piles is 16 required, as recommended by the Materials 17 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The first fill-in 18 specifies the pile type (cast-in-place conc., steel, 19 timber, etc.). The second fill-in specifies the 20 general location (bridge and pier). The third fill-in 21 specifies the bottom elevation of the preboring. 22 Include with 6-05.4.OPT1.FB6 and 6-23 05.5.OPT1.FB6. 24 (3 fill-ins) 25

26 6-05.3(11)D.OPT9.FB6 (Overdriving) 27

(April 6, 2015) 28 Include in projects where overdriving of piles is 29 anticipated in order to reach the minimum tip 30 elevation, as recommended by the Materials 31 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The first fill-in 32 specifies the general location(s) (bridge and pier) 33 of the anticipated pile overdriving. The second 34 fill-in specifies the approximate magnitude of 35 expected overdriving. 36 (2 fill-ins) 37




6-05.4.OPT1.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 44 (March 6, 2000) 45 Use in projects where preboring of piles is required, as 46 recommended by the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical 47 Branch. The fill-in specifies the pile type (cast-in-place 48 conc., steel, timber, etc.). Include with 6-49 05.3(11)D.OPT3.FB6 or 6-05.3(11)D.OPT4.FB6, and 6-50 05.5.OPT1.FB6. 51 (1 fill-in) 52

53 6-05.4.OPT6.GB6 Micropiles 54


(April 6, 2015) 1 Use in projects where micropiles are required. Include 2 with 6-05.2.OPT1.FB6, 6-05.3.OPT1.FB6, and 6-3 05.5.OPT6.GB6. 4




6-05.5.OPT1.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 11 (March 6, 2000) 12 Use in projects where preboring of piles is required, as 13 recommended by the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical 14 Branch. Both fill-ins specify the pile type (cast-in-place 15 conc., steel, timber, etc.). Include with 6-16 05.3(11)D.OPT3.FB6 or 6-05.3(11)D.OPT4.FB6, and 6-17 05.4.OPT1.FB6. 18 (2 fill-ins) 19

20 6-05.5.OPT6.GB6 Micropiles 21

(April 6, 2015) 22 Use in projects where micropiles are required. Include 23 with 6-05.2.OPT1.FB6, 6-05.3.OPT1.FB6, and 6-24 05.4.OPT6.GB6. 25

26 6-06.GR6 Bridge Railings 27




6-06.2.OPT1.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 34 (January 5, 2004) 35 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link 36 Fence. Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-37 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, and 6-06.3(2).OPT1.GB6. Also 38 include 6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 if the work is included as part of 39 a separate bid item such as “Superstructure - ___”, or 40 “Roadway Deck - ___”. 41 42

6-06.2.OPT2.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 43 (March 6, 2000) 44 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence 45 where the posts are set into blockouts with epoxy resin. 46 Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-47 06.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-06.3(2).OPT2.GB6. Also include 6-48 06.5.OPT1.FB6 if the work is included as part of a 49 separate bid item such as “Superstructure - ___”, or 50 “Roadway Deck - ___”. 51

52 6-06.2.OPT7.GB6 (Tamper Proof Nuts for steel Bridge Railing 53


Type BP) 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Use in projects where steel Bridge Railing Type BP is 3 used. 4

5 6-06.2.OPT8.FB6 (Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence and Bridge 6

Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence) 7 (April 6, 2015) 8 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence or 9 Bridge Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence. The fill-in specifies 10 the Federal Standard 595 Color Number, or the color 11 name if no number. 12 Include with 6-06.3(2).OPT7.GB6. 13 (1 fill-in) 14


17 6-06.3(2).GR6 Metal Railings 18 19

6-06.3(2).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-06.3(2) is supplemented with the 20 following) 21 Must use once preceding any of the following: 22 23

6-06.3(2).OPT1.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 24 (March 6, 2000) 25 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link 26 Fence where the posts are fastened into position with 27 anchor bolts or resin bonded anchors. Include with 6-28 02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, and 6-29 06.2.OPT1.GB6. Also include 6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 if the 30 work is included as part of a separate bid item such as 31 “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. 32

33 6-06.3(2).OPT2.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 34

(March 6, 2000) 35 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link 36 Fence where the posts are set into blockouts with 37 epoxy resin. Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-38 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-06.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-39 06.2.OPT2.GB6. Also include 6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 if the 40 work is included as part of a separate bid item such as 41 “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. 42

43 6-06.3(2).OPT7.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence and 44

Bridge Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence) 45 (April 6, 2015) 46 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence 47 or Bridge Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence. Include 48 with 6-06.2.OPT8.FB6. 49 50

6-06.5.GR6 Payment 51 52 6-06.5.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-06.5 is supplemented with the following) 53



6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 (Bridge Railing) 3 (March 6, 2000) 4 Use in projects with bridge railing where the work is 5 included as part of a separate bid item such as 6 “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. The first 7 fill-in specifies the bridge railing type. The second fill-in 8 specifies the bid item name. 9 (2 fill-ins) 10

11 6-07.GR6 Painting 12

13 6-07.1.GR6 Description 14



6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 (Scope of Work) 19 (August 3, 2009) 20 Include in projects with cleaning and painting of existing 21 steel bridge(s). Use to define limits of cleaning and 22 painting by using the second fill-in to specify surfaces that 23 are not to be painted (light fixtures, utilities, bridge 24 attachments, etc.). Include with 6-07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 25 and/or 6-07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 as appropriate for the 26 surface preparation requirements. Include with 27 DESWORK2.FB1 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. Include 28 with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the existing bridge(s) contain lead 29 paint. Include with 1-07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the bridge(s) cross 30 a navigable waterway. 31 (2 fill-ins) 32

33 6-07.1.OPT2.FB6 (Scope of Work) 34

(August 3, 2009) 35 Include in projects with cleaning and painting of existing 36 timber bridge(s). Use to define limits of cleaning and 37 painting by using the second fill-in to specify the surfaces 38 to be painted (railing, rail posts, wheelguards, etc.). 39 Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the existing bridge(s) 40 contain lead paint. Project specific Special Provisions 41 supplementing Section 6-07.3(13) may be required to 42 specify specific primer and top coat paint requirements. 43 (2 fill-ins) 44

45 6-07.3.GR6 Construction Requirements 46 47

6-07.3(10).GR6 Painting Existing Steel Structures 48 49


53


6-07.3(10).OPT1.FB6 (Utility Conduits) 1 (August 3, 2009) 2 Include only when utility conduits are attached to the 3 existing bridge(s) being painted. Fill-in to read "shall or 4 "shall not". Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-5 07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 6 (1 fill-in) 7

8 6-07.3(10).OPT2.GB6 (Light Fixtures) 9

(August 3, 2009) 10 Include only when light fixtures are attached to existing 11 bridge(s) being painted. Include with 12 DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-13 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 14 15

6-07.3(10).OPT3.GB6 (Railroad Facilities) 16 (August 3, 2009) 17 Include when paint could spill or drip on railroad right-18 of-way. Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-19 07.1.OPT1.FB6, 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1, either 20 07183.GR1 or 1-07.18.OPT3.GR1, and 6-21 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 22 23

6-07.3(10).OPT4.GB6 (Cleaning Grid Deck) 24 (August 3, 2015) 25 Use with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6, 6-26 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6, and 6-07.3(10)N.OPT1.GB6 if 27 the bridge has a grid roadway deck or steel grid 28 catwalks which require cleaning and painting. 29

30 6-07.3(10)A.GR6 Containment 31



36 6-07.3(10)A.OPT1.GB6 (Protection of Existing Structure) 37

(August 3, 2009) 38 Use only when the bridge has mechanical 39 equipment to protect such as a draw bridge. 40 Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-41 07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 42

43 6-07.3(10)A.OPT2.FB6 (Containment System) 44

(January 2, 2018) 45 Use when a paint removal containment system 46 must be removed from a bridge when winds at 47 the site exceed a wind speed/gust threshold. 48 Fill-in #1 specifies the bridge(s) that have wind 49 speed/gust thresholds. 50 Fill-in #2 specifies the wind speed/gust threshold. 51 (2 fill-ins) 52

53


6-07.3(10)D.GR6 Surface Preparation Prior to Overcoat Painting 1 2


6 6-07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 (Surfaces Requiring Overcoat Painting 7

Surface Preparation) 8 (April 6, 2015) 9 Use in bridge painting projects with bridges and 10 bridge members requiring surface preparation for 11 overcoat painting. Include with 12 DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-13 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-14 07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 if the bridge(s) also have 15 bridge members requiring full paint removal. 16 Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the existing 17 bridge(s) contain lead paint. Include with 1-18 07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the bridge(s) cross a 19 navigable waterway. The first fill-in specifies the 20 bridge(s) requiring overcoat painting surface 21 preparation. The second fill-in specifies the 22 bridge members requiring overcoat painting 23 surface preparation. 24 (2 fill-ins) 25

26 6-07.3(10)E.GR6 Surface Preparation – Full Paint Removal 27

28 6-07.3(10)E.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)E is supplemented with 29

the following) 30 Use once preceding any of the following: 31 32

6-07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 (Surfaces Requiring Full Paint Removal 33 Surface) 34 Preparation) 35 (April 5, 2010) 36 Use in bridge painting projects with bridges and 37 bridge members requiring surface preparation for 38 full paint removal. Include with 39 DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-40 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-41 07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 if the bridge(s) also have 42 bridge members requiring overcoat painting. 43 Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the existing 44 bridge(s) contain lead paint. Include with 1-45 07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the bridge(s) cross a 46 navigable waterway. The first fill-in specifies the 47 bridge(s) requiring full paint removal surface 48 preparation. The second fill-in specifies the 49 bridge members requiring full paint removal 50 surface preparation. 51 (2 fill-ins) 52

53


6-07.3(10)I.GR6 Paint Color 1 2

6-07.3(10)I.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)I is supplemented with the 3 following) 4 Must use once preceding any of the following: 5

6 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6 (Color of Top Coat) 7

(August 3, 2009) 8 Use in projects with existing steel bridges and 9 bridge members to cover paint color 10 requirements by specifying the Federal Standard 11 595 Color Number, or the color name if no 12 number. Use with DESWORK2.FB1, and 6-13 07.1.OPT1.FB6. . Include with 6-14 07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 and/or 6-15 07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 as appropriate for the 16 surface preparation requirements. Include with 1-17 07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the existing bridge(s) contain 18 lead paint. Include with 1-07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the 19 bridge(s) cross a navigable waterway. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22 6-07.3(10)N.GR6 Field Coating Application Methods 23

24 6-07.3(10)N.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)N is supplemented with 25


28 6-07.3(10)N.OPT1.GB6 (Painting Grid Deck) 29

(August 3, 2009) 30 Use with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6, 31 6-07.3(10).OPT4.GB6 and 6-32 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6 if the bridge has a grid 33 roadway deck or steel grid catwalks which 34 require painting. 35

36 6-07.3(11).GR6 Painting or Powder Coating of Galvanized Surfaces 37



42 6-07.3(11).OPT1.FB6 (Coating Color) 43

(August 3, 2009) 44 Use in projects requiring coating of galvanized 45 surfaces with either paint or powder coating. The fill-in 46 specifies the Federal Standard 595 color number, or 47 the color name if no number. 48 (1 fill-in) 49

50 6-08.GR6 Bituminous Surfacing on Structure Decks 51




Must use once preceding the following: 3 4

6-08.3.OPT1.FB6 (Surfacing Removal and Paving Equipment Load and 5 Spacing Restrictions) 6 (January 2, 2018) 7 Use in bridge deck paving projects where specific bridges 8 are subject to surfacing removal and paving equipment 9 load and spacing restrictions as shown and specified in 10 the Plans. The fill-in specifies the Bridge Number(s) of the 11 bridge(s) affected by these restrictions. 12 (1-fill-in) 13

14 6-08.3(2).GR6 Contractor Survey for Grade-Controlled Structure Decks 15



20 6-08.3(2).OPT1.FB6 (Contractor Structure Survey Not Applicable) 21

(January 3, 2017) 22 Use in projects where the Contracting Agency 23 performs the Structure survey for Grade Controlled 24 Structure Decks, and the Contract Plans were 25 adjusted for Final Grade Profile and Adjusted Removal 26 Depth as needed. The fill-in specifies the Bridge 27 number(s) where the Contracting Agency is performing 28 the survey. 29 (1 fill-in) 30

31 6-08.3(5).GR6 Full Depth Removal of Bituminous Pavement from 32

Bridge Decks 33 34


38 6-08.3(5).OPT1.FB6 (Rotary milling/planing equipment prohibited) 39

(January 2, 2018) 40 Use in bridge deck paving projects where equipment 41 used to perform full depth removal of existing surfacing 42 from specific Grade Controlled bridges is restricted to 43 exclude rotary milling/planing equipment. Bridges in 44 this category are generally identified in the Bridge 45 Condition Report (BCR) prepared for the project by the 46 Bridge Asset Management unit of the Bridge and 47 Structures Office and provided to the Region Design 48 PE Offices as part of the site data at the beginning of 49 the project design phase. The fill-in specifies the 50 Bridge Number(s) of the bridges affected by these 51 restrictions. 52 (1 fill-in) 53


1 6-08.3(5).OPT2.FB6 (Rotary milling/planing equipment restricted to upper 2

layer of existing surfacing) 3 (January 2, 2018) 4 Use in bridge deck paving projects where equipment 5 used to perform full depth removal of existing surfacing 6 from specific Grade Controlled bridges is restricted to 7 allow rotary milling/planing equipment for the upper 8 layer 0.10-feet above the bridge deck. Existing 9 surfacing thicknesses at these bridges shall be 0.20-10 feet minimum. The fill-in specifies the Bridge 11 Number(s) of the bridges affected by these restrictions. 12 (1 fill-in) 13

14 6-09.GR6 Modified Concrete Overlays 15 16



21 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6 (Special Materials For Rapid Set Latex Modified 22

Concrete) 23 (******) 24 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete is 25 required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 6-26 09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-27 09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-28 09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-29 09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-30 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-31 09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-32 09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 33

34 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Materials For Polyester Concrete) 35

(******) 36 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 37 Include with 6-09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-44 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-45 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6 and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 48


51 6-09.3(1).GR6 Equipment 52

53



4 6-09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Mobile Mixer for Polyester Concrete) 5

(******) 6 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 7 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-9 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 10 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 11 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 13 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 14 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-15 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 16 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6 and 6-19 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 20

21 6-09.3(1)H.GR1 Mobile Mixer for Latex Modified Concrete 22 23

6-09.3(1)H.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-09.3(1)H is supplemented with the 24 following) 25 Must use once preceding any of the following: 26

27 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Mobile Mixer Capacity for Rapid Set 28

Latex 29 Modified Concrete) 30 (******) 31 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified 32 concrete is required. Include with either 6-33 09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. 34 Include with 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-36 09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 44 and 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 45

46 6-09.3(2).GR6 Submittals 47



52 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Submittals for Polyester Concrete) 53


(******) 1 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 2 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-4 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 5 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 8 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 9 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-10 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 11 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-13 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-14 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 15

16 6-09.3(3).GR6 Concrete Overlay Mixes 17



6-09.3(3).OPT1.GB6 (FMC, LMC, and MMC) 23 (January 7, 2002) 24 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where all 25 three concrete overlay mixes are allowed. Include with 26 either 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 or 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 27

28 6-09.3(3).OPT2.GB6 (FMC or LMC Only) 29

(January 7, 2002) 30 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only 31 fly ash modified concrete or latex modified concrete 32 overlay mixes are allowed. Include with either 6-33 09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 or 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 34

35 6-09.3(3).OPT3.GB6 (LMC Only) 36

(January 7, 2002) 37 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only 38 latex modified concrete overlay mixes are allowed. 39 Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 or 6-40 09.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 41

42 6-09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete) 43

(******) 44 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete 45 is required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 46 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-47 09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-48 09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 49 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 50 6-09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 52


6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 1 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 2

3 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete) 4

(******) 5 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 6 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 9 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 10 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 12 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 13 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 15 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-18 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 19

20 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6 (Deck Repair Concrete for Polyester 21

Concrete Overlays) 22 (******) 23 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 24 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-25 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-26 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-27 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-28 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-29 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 30 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 31 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-32 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 33 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-34 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-36 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 37 38

6-09.3(4).GR6 Storing and Handling 39 40


44 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Storing and Handling of Polyester 45

Concrete Materials) 46 (******) 47 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 48 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-49 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 51 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 52 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-53


09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 1 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 2 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 4 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-5 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-7 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 8

9 6-09.3(5).GR6 Scarifying Concrete Surface 10



15 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 (Rotary Mill, Hydro-Demolisher, or Shot 16

Blaster) 17 (January 7, 2002) 18 Include in modified concrete overlay projects where all 19 three types of scarifying machines are allowed. Include 20 with either 6-09.3(3).OPT1.GB6, 6-21 09.3(3).OPT2.GB6, or 6-09.3(3).OPT3.GB6. 22

23 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 (Hydro-Demolisher or Shot Blaster Only) 24

(January 7, 2002) 25 Include in modified concrete overlay projects where 26 only hydro-demolisher or shot blaster scarifying 27 machines are allowed. Include with either 6-28 09.3(3).OPT1.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT2.GB6, or 6-29 09.3(3).OPT3.GB6. 30

31 6-09.3(5).OPT7.GB6 (Hydro-Demolisher Only) 32

(April 6, 2015) 33 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only 34 hydro-demolisher scarifying machines are allowed. 35

36 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Shot Blaster Only) 37

(******) 38 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only 39 shot blaster scarifying machines are allowed. Required 40 for all polyester concrete overlay projects. 41

42 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6 (Scarification Depth for Polyester 43

Concrete Overlay) 44 (******) 45 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 46 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-48 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 49 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 50 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 52 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 53


6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 2 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-4 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-5 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 6

7 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6 (Epoxy-coated St. Reinf. Bars for Bridge 8

Deck 9 Repair) 10 (******) 11 Use in projects where epoxy-coated steel reinforcing 12 bars are required for bridge deck repair. Required for 13 all polyester concrete overlay projects. 14 15

6-09.3(6).GR6 Further Deck Preparation 16 17

6-09.3(6)B.GR6 Deck Repair Preparation 18 19

6-09.3(6)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-09.3(6)B is supplemented with the 20 following) 21 Must use once preceding any of the following: 22

23 6-09.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6 (Forms For Full Depth Deck Repair) 24

(April 6, 2015) 25 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where 26 the anticipated depth required for bridge deck 27 repair following scarification of concrete surface 28 may be full depth of the bridge deck. Include with 29 6-09.5.OPT11.GB6. 30

31 6-09.3(6)C.GR6 Placing Deck Repair Concrete 32

33 6-09.3(6)C.INST1.GR6 (Supplemental Instructions) 34


6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Patching Concrete For Rapid Set Latex 37 Modified Concrete) 38 (******) 39 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified 40 concrete is required. Include with either 6-41 09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. 42 Include with 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-44 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-45 09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-48 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-49 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 52 and 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 53


1 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Placing Patching Concrete For Polyester 2

Concrete Overlay) 3 (******) 4 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 5 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-9 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-10 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-13 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-15 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-19 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-20 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-21 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 23 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-24 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 25

26 6-09.3(8).GR6 Quality Assurance 27



32 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Overlay) 33

(******) 34 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete 35 is required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 36 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-37 09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 39 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 40 6-09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 42 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 43 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 44

45 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Trial 46

Overlay) 47 (******) 48 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete 49 is required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 50 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-51 09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-52 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 53


6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 1 6-09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-2 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 3 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 4 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 5

6 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6 (Quality Assurance For Polyester 7

Concrete Overlay) 8 (******) 9 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 10 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 13 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 14 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-15 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 17 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 19 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-20 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 21 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 23

24 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Trial Overlay) 25

(******) 26 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 27 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-28 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-29 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 30 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 31 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-32 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-33 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 34 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 36 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 38 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 40

41 6-09.3(9).GR6 Mixing Concrete for Concrete Overlay 42



47 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete) 48

(******) 49 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete 50 is required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 51 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-52 09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-53


09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 1 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 2 6-09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 4 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 5 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 6

7 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Mixing Polyester Concrete) 8

(******) 9 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 10 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 13 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 14 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-15 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 17 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 19 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-20 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 21 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 23

24 6-09.3(10).GR6 Overlay Profile and Screed Rails 25



30 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Overlay Thickness) 31

(******) 32 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 33 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-34 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 36 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 37 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 40 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 41 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 43 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 44 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 45 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 46

47 6-09.3(11).GR6 Placing Concrete Overlay 48



53


6-09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Placing Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete 1 Overlay) 2 (******) 3 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete 4 is required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 5 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-6 09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 8 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 9 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-10 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 11 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 12 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 13

14 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Placing Polyester Concrete Overlay) 15


31 6-09.3(12).GR6 Finishing Concrete Overlay 32



37 6-09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Overlay) 38

(******) 39 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete 40 is required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 41 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-42 09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 44 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 45 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 47 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 48 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 49

50 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Finishing Polyester Concrete Overlay) 51

(******) 52


Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 1 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-2 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 4 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 5 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 8 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 9 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-10 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 11 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 12 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 13 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 14

15 6-09.3(13).GR6 Curing Concrete Overlay 16



21 6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Special Curing Requirements For Rapid Set 22

Latex Modified Concrete) 23 (******) 24 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete 25 is required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 26 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-27 09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-28 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 29 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 30 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-31 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 32 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 33 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 34

35 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Curing Polyester Concrete) 36


52 6-09.3(14).GR6 Checking For Bond 53




6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Checking Polyester Concrete For Bond) 5 (******) 6 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 7 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-9 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 10 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 11 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-13 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 14 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 15 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 17 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 18 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 19 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 20 21

6-09.3(14).OPT2.GB6 (Responsibility for Repair of Unbonded Modified 22 Concrete Overlay) 23 (January 2, 2018) 24 Use in projects where responsibility for the cost of 25 repairing unbonded modified concrete overlay is 26 assigned to the Contractor. 27




6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete) 34 (******) 35 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete is 36 required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 6-37 09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 38 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 6-43 09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 44

45 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Overlay) 46

(******) 47 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 48 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-49 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-52 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-53


09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-2 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-4 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-5 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 6


9 6-09.5.INST1.GR6 (The second bid item under Section 6-09.5 is 10


13 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete) 14

(******) 15 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified concrete is 16 required. Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 6-17 09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. Include with 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 18 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-19 09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-20 09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-21 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, and 6-23 09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6. 24



6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6 (Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Trial 29 Overlay) 30 (******) 31 Use in projects where rapid set latex modified 32 concrete is required. Include with either 6-33 09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 or 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6. 34 Include with 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-36 09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(9).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(11).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(12).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6, 44 and 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6. 45

46 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Trial Overlay) 47

(******) 48 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 49 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-52


09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-2 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-4 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-5 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-9 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-10 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-13 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 15 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-16 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 17

18 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Force Account Grinding Polyester 19

Conc. Overlay) 20 (******) 21 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 22 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-23 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-24 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-25 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-26 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-27 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-28 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-29 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-30 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-31 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-32 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-33 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-34 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-36 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 40 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6 and 6-41 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 42 43

6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Overlay) 44 (******) 45 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 46 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-48 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-49 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-51


09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-2 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-4 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-5 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-9 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-10 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 13 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, and 6-14 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6. 15 16

6-09.5.OPT11.GB6 (Forms For Full Depth Deck Repair) 17 (April 6, 2015) 18 Use in projects where the anticipated depth 19 required for bridge deck repair following 20 scarification of concrete surface may be full depth 21 of the bridge deck. Include with 6-22 09.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6. 23 24

6-10.GR6 Concrete Barrier 25 26


6-10.3(6).GR6 Placing Concrete Barrier 29 30


34 6-10.3(6).OPT1.GR6 (Use Permanent Barrier as Temporary) 35

(March 13, 1995) 36 Use in projects when permanent barrier may be used 37 as temporary barrier. 38

39 6-10.5.GR6 Payment 40



6-10.5.OPT1.GR6 (Temporary barrier delineators) 45 (August 1, 2016) 46 Use in projects that require temporary barrier to be placed 47 adjacent to a travelled lane. 48

49 6-10.5.OPT2.FB6 (Bridge Concrete Barrier) 50

(March 6, 2000) 51


Use in projects with concrete barrier on bridges only 1 where the barrier is included as part of a separate bid item 2 such as “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. 3 The first fill-in specifies the barrier type (traffic barrier, 4 traffic-pedestrian barrier, pedestrian barrier, etc.). The 5 second fill-in specifies the bid item name. 6 (2 fill-ins) 7

8 6-12.GR6 Noise Barrier Walls 9




6-12.2.OPT1.GB6 (Precast Concrete Noise Barrier Walls) 16 (August 3, 2015) 17 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of precast concrete 18 panels. Include with 6-12.3(6).OPT1.FB6 and all other 19 applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 20

21 6-12.2.OPT2.FB6 (Masonry Noise Barrier Walls) 22

(August 3, 2015) 23 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of masonry block 24 panels. The fill-in describes the surface texture and color 25 requirements for the field, cap, accent, and other CMU 26 blocks used for the masonry wall. Include with 6-27 12.3(7).OPT1.GB6 and all other applicable noise 28 barrier wall GSP’s. 29 (1 fill-in) 30


33 6-12.3(1).GR6 Submittals 34 35


39 6-12.3(1).OPT1.GB6 (Noise Barrier Wall Existing Groundline Field 40

Survey) 41 (August 3, 2015) 42 Use in noise barrier wall projects where the Contractor 43 is required to perform and submit a field survey of the 44 existing noise barrier wall alignment. Include with 1-45 05.4.OPT1.GR1, 6-12.5.OPT1.GB6, and all other 46 applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 47 48

6-12.3(6).GR6 Precast Concrete Panel Fabrication and Erection 49 50



1 6-12.3(6).OPT1.FB6 (Precast Concrete Panel Surface 2

Finish Requirements) 3 (April 5, 2004) 4 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of precast 5 concrete panels. The fill-ins specify the type or name 6 of the formed finish on the traffic side and on the 7 residential side of the precast concrete panels. Include 8 with 6-12.2.OPT1.GB6 and all other applicable 9 noise barrier wall GSP’s. 10 (2 fill-ins) 11 12

6-12.3(7).GR6 Masonry Wall Construction 13 14


18 6-12.3(7).OPT1.GB6 (Masonry Noise Barrier Wall 19

Construction Requirements) 20 (August 3, 2015) 21 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of masonry 22 block panels. Include with 6-12.2.OPT2.FB6 and all 23 other applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 24 25



6-12.5.OPT1.GB6 (Payment for Noise Barrier Wall Groundline Field 31 Survey) 32 (April 5, 2004) 33 Use in noise barrier wall projects where the Contractor is 34 required to perform and submit a field survey of the 35 existing noise barrier wall alignment. Include with 1-36 05.4.OPT1.GR1, 6-12.3(1).OPT1.GB6, and all other 37 applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 38

39 6-13.GR6 Structural Earth Walls 40




6-13.2.OPT1.GB6 (Welded Wire Faced Structural Earth Wall 47 Materials) 48 (April 1, 2013) 49 Use in projects with structural earth walls where welded 50 wire faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include 51 with 6-13.3.OPT1.GB6 and 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6. 52

53


6-13.2.OPT2.GB6 (Precast Concrete Panel Faced 1 Structural Earth Wall Materials) 2 (January 2, 2018) 3 Use in projects with structural earth walls where precast 4 concrete panel faced walls are an acceptable alternative. 5 Include with 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-6 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6. 7

8 6-13.2.OPT2(A).GB6 (Lock + Load Retaining Wall System Wall Materials) 9

(August 3, 2015) 10 Use in projects with structural earth walls only when 11 the following conditions apply: 12

1. Both precast concrete panel faced structural 13 earth walls AND precast concrete block faced 14 structural earth walls are included in the 15 project as acceptable alternatives. 16

2. Lock + Load retaining wall system shall be 17 constructed in areas where the wall will be 18 constructed above the water table. 19

Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-20 13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-13.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-21 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, 6-13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6, and 6-22 13.3(7).OPT1.GB6. 23

24 6-13.2.OPT3.GB6 (Concrete Block Faced Structural Earth Wall 25

Materials) 26 (January 2, 2018) 27 Use in projects with structural earth walls where concrete 28 block faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include 29 with 6-13.3.OPT3.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 6-30 13.3(5).OPT2.GB6. 31 32



37 6-13.3.OPT1.GB6 (Welded Wire Faced Structural Earth Wall) 38

(April 4, 2011) 39 Use in projects with structural earth walls where welded 40 wire faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include 41 with 6-13.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6. 42 43

6-13.3.OPT2.GB6 (Precast Concrete Panel Faced Structural Earth 44 Wall) 45 (January 7, 2019) 46 Use in projects with structural earth walls where precast 47 concrete panel faced walls are an acceptable alternative. 48 Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 49 6-13.3(4).OPT1.GB6. 50 51

6-13.3.OPT2(A).GB6 (Lock + Load Retaining Wall System Walls) 52 (August 3, 2015) 53


Use in projects with structural earth walls only when 1 the following conditions apply: 2



Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.2.OPT2(A).GB6, 10 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-11 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, 6-13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6, and 6-12 13.3(7).OPT1.GB6. 13

14 6-13.3.OPT3.GB6 (Concrete Block Faced Structural Earth Wall) 15

(January 2, 2018) 16 Use in projects with structural earth walls where concrete 17 block faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include 18 with 6-13.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 6-19 13.3(5).OPT2.GB6. 20 21

6-13.3(2).GR6 Submittals 22 23


27 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6 (Structural Earth Wall Geotechnical Design 28

Parameters) 29 (January 3, 2011) 30 Use in projects with structural earth walls. The first fill-31 in identifies the wall by name or number, and the 32 remaining fill-ins specify the values for various 33 geotechnical design parameters as specified in the 34 geotechnical report prepared for the project. The table 35 may be repeated as necessary for additional walls with 36 differing geotechnical design parameters. 37 (13 fill-ins) 38

39 6-13.3(4).GR6 Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete Block 40

Fabrication 41 42


46 6-13.3(4).OPT1.GB6 (Specific Fabrication Requirements for 47

Precast Concrete Panel Faced Structural Earth Walls) 48 (April 3, 2017) 49 Use in projects with structural earth walls where 50 precast concrete panel faced walls are an acceptable 51 alternative. Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-52


13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 6-1 13.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 2 3

6-13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6 (Lock + Load Retaining Wall System Walls) 4 (August 3, 2015) 5 Use in projects with structural earth walls only 6 when the following conditions apply: 7

1. Both precast concrete panel faced 8 structural earth walls AND precast 9 concrete block faced structural earth 10 walls are included in the project as 11 acceptable alternatives. 12

2. Lock + Load retaining wall system shall 13 be constructed in areas where the wall 14 will be constructed above the water table. 15

Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-16 13.2.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-17 13.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-18 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, and 6-13.3(7).OPT1.GB6. 19

20 6-13.3(5).GR6 Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete 21

Block Erection 22 23


6-13.3(5).OPT2.GB6 (Specific Erection Requirements for 27 Precast Concrete 28 Block Faced Structural Earth Walls) 29 (April 2, 2012) 30 Use in projects with structural earth walls where 31 concrete block faced walls are an acceptable 32 alternative. Include with 6-13.2.OPT3.GB6 6-33 13.3.OPT3.GB6, and 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6. 34

35 6-13.3(7).GR6 Backfill 36



41 6-13.3(7).OPT1.GB6 (Specific Backfill Requirements for Precast 42

Concrete Panel Faced Structural Earth Walls) 43 (August 3, 2015) 44 Use in projects with structural earth walls only when 45 the following conditions apply: 46




Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.2.OPT2(A).GB6, 1 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-2 13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, and 6-3 13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6 4

5 6-14.GR6 Geosynthetic Retaining Walls 6

7 6-14.2.GR6 Materials 8 9

6-14.2(9-33.2(2)).GR6 (Geosynthetic Properties For Retaining Walls 10 and Reinforced Slopes 11 (Section 9-33.2(2) is supplemented with the following) 12 Must use once preceding any of the following: 13

14 6-14.2(9-33.2(2)).OPT1.FB6 (Geosynthetic Properties For Temporary 15

Geosynthetic Retaining Walls) 16 (August 7, 2006) 17 Use in projects with temporary geosynthetic retaining 18 walls. The first fill-in identifies the wall location. The 19 second fill-in specifies the reinforcement layer vertical 20 spacing. The third fill-in specifies the dimension from the 21 top of wall to the reinforcement layer. The fourth fill-in 22 specifies the geosynthetic tensile strength. 23 (4 fill-ins) 24 25

6-15.GR6 Soil Nail Walls 26 27



32 6-15.2.OPT1.GB6 (Permanent Soil Nail Materials and Components) 33

(August 3, 2015) 34 Use in projects with soil nail retaining walls. Include with 6-35 18.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6. 36


39 6-15.3(8).GR6 Soil Nail Testing And Acceptance 40

41 6-15.3(8)A.GR6 Verification Testing 42 43

6-15.3(8)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-15.3(8)A is supplemented with the 44 following) 45 Must use once preceding any of the following: 46

47 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6 (Soil Nail Verification Test Locations) 48

(April 5, 2004) 49 Use in projects with soil nail retaining walls. The 50 fill-ins specify the soil nail verification test 51 locations and the number of successful tests 52


required at each location. Include with 6-1 15.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6. 2 (3 fill-ins) 3

4 6-17.GR6 Permanent Ground Anchors 5

6 6-17.1.GR6 Description 7 8


11 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6 (Rock Bolts and Rock Dowels) 12

(January 7, 2013) 13 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 14 with 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-15 17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-16 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 17

18 6-17.2.GR6 Materials 19 20


23 6-17.2.OPT1.GB6 (Permanent Ground Anchor Materials and 24

Components) 25 (August 3, 2015) 26 Use in projects with walls using permanent ground 27 anchors. 28

29 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6 (Rock Bolt and Rock Dowel Materials) 30

(January 7, 2013) 31 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 32 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-33 17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-34 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 35




6-17.3.OPT1.GB6 (Rock Bolt and Rock Dowel 42 Construction Requirements) 43 (January 7, 2019) 44 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 45 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-46 17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-47 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 48

49 6-17.3(8).GR6 Testing And Stressing 50


following) 53



6-17.3(8).OPT1.GB6 Rock Bolt and Rock Dowel Testing 3 (January 7, 2013) 4 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. 5 Include with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-6 17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-7 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 8

9 6-17.3(8)A.GR6 Verification Testing 10 11

6-17.3(8)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-17.3(8)A is supplemented with the 12 following) 13 Must use once preceding any of the following: 14

15 6-17.3(8)A.OPT1.GB6 (August 3, 2015) 16

Use in projects with permanent ground anchors 17 where the soil conditions require a verification 18 testing program for the permanent ground 19 anchors as recommended by the WSDOT 20 Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Services 21 Division. Include with 6-17.3(8)B.OPT1.GB6 and 22 6-17.3(8)C.OPT1.GB6. 23

24 6-17.3(8)B.GR6 Performance Testing 25 26

6-17.3(8)B.INST1.GR6 (The performance test schedule following the 27 second paragraph of Section 6-17.3(8)B is revised to 28 read) 29 Must use once preceding any of the following: 30

31 6-17.3(8)B.OPT1.GB6 (January 3, 2011) 32

Use in projects with permanent ground anchors where 33 the soil conditions require a verification testing 34 program for the permanent ground anchors, as 35 recommended by the WSDOT Materials Laboratory 36 Geotechnical Services Division. Include with 6-37 17.3(8)A.OPT1.GB6 and 6-17.3(8)C.OPT1.GB6. 38

39 6-17.3(8)C.GR6 Proof Testing 40 41

6-17.3(8)C.INST1.GR6 (The proof test schedule following the first 42 paragraph of Section 6-17.3(8)C is revised to read) 43 Must use once preceding any of the following: 44

45 6-17.3(8)C.OPT1.GB6 (January 3, 2011) 46

Use in projects with permanent ground anchors where 47 the soil conditions require a verification testing 48 program for the permanent ground anchors, as 49 recommended by the WSDOT Materials Laboratory 50 Geotechnical Services Division. Include with 6-51 17.3(8)A.OPT1.GB6 and 6-17.3(8)B.OPT1.GB6. 52

53


6-17.4.GR6 Measurement 1 2



(January 4, 2010) 7 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 8 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-9 17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, and 6-10 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 11

12 6-17.5.GR6 Payment 13 14



(January 4, 2010) 19 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 20 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-21 17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, and 6-22 17.4.OPT1.GB6. 23

24 6-18.GR6 Shotcrete Facing 25

26 6-18.2.GR6 Materials 27 28


31 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6 (Shotcrete Facing) 32

(August 1, 2005) 33 Use in projects with shotcrete facing. Include with 6-34 15.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6 for all soil nail 35 retaining wall projects. Include with 6-18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-36 18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 37 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6 for all projects with shotcrete 38 facing for rock/soil slope stabilization. 39 40

6-18.2.OPT2.GB6 (Coloration for Shotcrete Facing Finishing 41 Alternative C) 42 (August 3, 2015) 43 Use in projects with shotcrete facing where tinting of the 44 finish coating of shotcrete is required. Include with 6-45 15.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6, and 6-46 18.2.OPT1.GB6 for all soil nail retaining wall projects with 47 such requirements. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-48 18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 49 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6 for all projects with shotcrete 50 facing for rock/soil slope stabilization. 51 52

6-18.2.OPT3.GB6 (Fiber Reinforcement for Shotcrete Facing) 53


(August 3, 2015) 1 Use in projects with shotcrete facing where fiber 2 reinforcement in the shotcrete is specified. Include with 6-3 18.2.OPT1.GB6. Include with 6-18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-4 18.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-5 18.5.OPT1.GB6 for all projects with shotcrete facing for 6 rock/soil slope stabilization. 7



13 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6 (Shotcrete Facing For Rock/Soil Slope Stabilization) 14

(August 3, 2015) 15 Use in projects with shotcrete facing for rock/soil slope 16 stabilization. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-17 18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 18 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6. 19 20

6-18.4.GR6 Measurement 21 22



(April 5, 2010) 27 Use in projects with shotcrete facing for rock/soil slope 28 stabilization. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-29 18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6 30 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6. 31

32 6-18.5.GR6 Payment 33 34



(April 5, 2010) 39 Use in projects with shotcrete facing for rock/soil slope 40 stabilization. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-41 18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6 42 and 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6. 43 44

6-19.GR6 Shafts 45 46


6-19.2(9-36.2(2)).GR6 Synthetic Slurry 49 (Section 9-36.2(2) is supplemented with the following) 50 Must use once preceding any of the following: 51

52 6-19.2(9-36.2(2)).OPT1.GB6 (Fresh Water For Synthetic Slurry) 53


(January 2, 2012) 1 Use in projects with shafts constructed in salt water when 2 the geotechnical report specifies that the use of fresh 3 water for synthetic slurry is feasible and when the 4 Contracting Agency restricts the water for synthetic slurry 5 to fresh water only. Include with 6-19.4.OPT3.GB6 and 6-6 19.5.OPT2.GB6. 7


10 6-19.3(3).GR6 Shaft Excavation 11



6-19.3(3).OPT1.GB6 (Variations In Bearing Layer Elevations) 16 (January 2, 2012) 17 Use in projects where shaft embedment to a minimum 18 penetration into a bearing layer is required, and where 19 the bearing layer elevation cannot be accurately 20 specified with certainty. Include with 6-21 19.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 22

23 6-19.3(3)B.GR6 Temporary and Permanent Shaft Casing 24



29 6-19.3(3)B.OPT2.GB6 (Rotating/Oscillating Method Required) 30

(January 2, 2012) 31 Use in projects where the geotechnical report for 32 the project recommends, and the ADSC/WSDOT 33 Shaft Task Force concurs, that site conditions 34 dictate the use of the rotating/oscillating method 35 for shaft excavation. 36

37 6-19.3(3)B4.GR6 Temporary Telescoping Shaft Casing 38

39 6-19.3(3)B4.INST1.GR6 (The second paragraph of Section 6-19.3(3)B4 40

is revised to read as follows) 41 Must use once preceding any of the following: 42

43 6-19.3(3)B4.OPT1.GB6 (Temp. Telescoping Casing Not Allowed 44

At End Piers) 45 (January 2, 2012) 46 Use in projects where design conditions exist 47 where the option of temporary telescoping casing 48 for shafts at bridge end piers is not appropriate 49 for the overall design behavior of the overall 50 bridge. 51

52 6-19.3(3)I.GR6 Required Use of Slurry in Shaft Excavation 53


1 6-19.3(3)I.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(3)I is supplemented with the following) 2


6-19.3(3)I.OPT1.GB6 (Exception For Casing Sealed Against 5 Influx Of Water Into Excavation) 6 (August 3, 2015) 7 Use in projects where the geotechnical 8 conditions, as documented in the geotechnical 9 report for the project, allow the possibility of 10 performing shaft excavation in a cased hole 11 beneath the water table level without the need for 12 slurry to ensure the stability of the bottom of the 13 excavation. 14

15 6-19.3(4).GR6 Slurry Installation Requirements 16

17 6-19.3(4)A.GR6 Slurry Technical Assistance 18 19

6-19.3(4)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(4)A is supplemented 20 with the following) 21 Must use once preceding any of the following: 22 23

6-19.3(4)A.OPT1.FB6 (Slurry Manufacturer’s Representative’s 24 Presence Required At Specific Shaft Sites) 25 (January 2, 2012) 26 Use in projects where the geotechnical 27 conditions vary enough from one shaft site to 28 another to affect how the slurry is used at each 29 shaft site. The fill-in identifies the specific shaft 30 locations where the presence of the slurry 31 manufacturer’s representative is required. 32 (1 fill-in) 33

34 6-19.3(5).GR6 Assembly and Placement of Reinforcing Steel 35



6-19.3(5).OPT1.GB6 (Variations In Bearing Layer Elevations) 40 (August 1, 2016) 41 Use in projects where shaft embedment to a 42 minimum penetration into a bearing layer is 43 required, and where the bearing layer elevation 44 cannot be accurately specified with certainty. 45 Include with 6-19.3(3).OPT1.GB6. 46

47 6-19.3(6).GR6 Contractor Furnished Accessories for Nondestructive 48

QA Testing 49 50

6-19.3(6)E.GR6 Thermal Wire and Thermal Access Points (TAPs) 51 52

6-19.3(6)E.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(6)E is supplemented with 53



3 6-19.3(6)E.OPT1.GB6 (Thermal Wire and Associated Couplers) 4

(January 2, 2018) 5 Use in projects that include shaft construction 6 requiring nondestructive testing. This includes all 7 bridge foundation shafts, but may or may not 8 include other shafts such as sign bridges, 9 cantilever sign structures, signal standards, etc. 10

11 6-19.3(7).GR6 Placing Concrete 12

13 6-19.3(7)D.GR6 Requirements for Placing Concrete Underwater 14

15 6-19.3(7)D.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(7)D is supplemented with 16


19 6-19.3(7)D.OPT1.GB6 (Tremie Allowed As An Alternative To Concrete 20

Pump) 21 (January 2, 2012) 22 Use in projects where the construction site is at a 23 remote location where it may be difficult to make 24 arrangements to have a concrete pump at the 25 site. 26




6-19.4.OPT3.GB6 (Fresh Water For Synthetic Slurry) 33 (January 2, 2012) 34 Use in projects with shafts constructed in salt water when 35 the geotechnical report specifies that the use of fresh 36 water for synthetic slurry is feasible and when the 37 Contracting Agency restricts the water for synthetic slurry 38 to fresh water only. Include with 6-19.2(9-39 36.2(2)).OPT1.GB6 and 6-19.5.OPT2.GB6. 40

41 6-19.5.GR6 Payment 42



6-19.5.OPT2.GB6 (Fresh Water for Synthetic Slurry) 47 (January 2, 2012) 48 Use in projects with shafts constructed in salt water when 49 the geotechnical report specifies that the use of fresh 50 water for synthetic slurry is feasible and when the 51 Contracting Agency restricts the water for synthetic slurry 52


to fresh water only. Include with 6-19.2(9-1 36.2(2)).OPT1.GB6 and 6-19.4.OPT3.GB6. 2


6-01.GR6 1

General Requirements for Structures 2 3 6-01.5.GR6 4

Work Access and Temporary Structures 5 6 6-01.5.INST1.GR6 7 Section 6-01.5 is re-titled and revised to read: 8 9 6-01.5.OPT1.FB6 10

(April 6, 2015April 1, 2019) 11 Work Access 12 The Contractor shall construct work access to accommodate all work within the wetted 13 perimeter, or vertically above the environmentally sensitive area, of *** $$1$$ ***, as 14 shown in the plans or staked by the Engineer. The Contractor shall construct and 15 remove the work access in accordance with all environmental regulations and permits, 16 including those specified in Sections 1-07.5 and 1-07.6. 17 18

Submittals 19 The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings of the work access, except 20 that if the Contractor chooses an access alternative using a work trestle structure, 21 the Working Drawings shall be Type 2E. The Contractor shall design the work 22 access structure to withstand all applicable loads in accordance with accepted 23 design codes. The Contractor shall specify the design code(s) in the design 24 calculations and working drawings. 25 26 The Contractor shall include information with the work access submittal on the 27 construction equipment that will use the work access. The Contractor shall specify 28 the type and model of construction equipment to be used, and shall include 29 equipment catalogue cuts with capacities and geometry. The Contractor shall 30 include anticipated wheel or track loads, axle spacings, outrigger geometry and 31 reactions, crane pick angles and reach, and other equipment details. 32

33 6-01.5.OPT1(A).FB6 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Waterway Clearance Requirements 36 One span of the work access structure shall provide more than *** $$1$$ *** 37 horizontal clearance between supporting piers. The bottom of the superstructure of 38 the work access structure shall be at elevation *** $$2$$ *** or higher. All 39 waterborne debris that accumulates against the work access structure shall be 40 removed by the Contractor. 41

42 6-01.5.OPT1(B).GB6 43

(April 6, 2015) 44 Payment 45 Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-09.3 for the following bid item: 46

47 "Work Access - ___”, lump sum. 48

49


6-01.5.OPT2.FB6 1 (August 6, 2018) 2 Temporary Bridge 3 The Contractor shall design, furnish, erect, maintain, and remove a temporary bridge, 4 including substructure, in accordance with this Special Provision and the details shown 5 in the Plans unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. 6 7

Geometric Requirements 8 The temporary bridge shall conform to the following geometric requirements: 9 10

1. The temporary bridge shall be an overall minimum length of *** $$1$$ ***. 11 12 2. The minimum width on the temporary bridge between barriers or railings 13

shall be *** $$2$$ ***. 14 15 3. The temporary bridge superstructure shall provide a minimum vertical 16

clearance of *** $$3$$ *** to *** $$4$$ ***. 17 18 Design Requirements 19 The temporary bridge shall conform to the following design requirements: 20 21

1. The temporary bridge, including the barriers or railings, shall be designed 22 in accordance with the latest edition of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design 23 Specifications. Barriers or railings shall be designed to TL-2, minimum, 24 with a minimum height of 32-inches, except where the Plans require a 25 higher test level and railing height. Seismic design shall conform to 26 AASHTO LRFD Seismic Guide Specification Section 3.6. 27

28 2. The minimum vehicular live load used for design shall be 75 percent of 29

HL-93, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Plans. 30 31 3. The driving surface of the temporary bridge shall be durable, skid resistant 32

deck, with an initial skid number of at least 35 and maintaining a skid 33 number of 26 minimum, in accordance with AASHTO T 242. 34

35 4. Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 1-06.1, the materials used by 36

the Contractor to compose the temporary bridge may be salvaged steel, 37 provided that the use of such salvaged steel shall be subject to inspection 38 and approval by the Contractor’s engineer of record and acceptance by 39 the Engineer. For salvaged steel materials where the grade of steel 40 cannot be positively identified, the design stresses for the steel shall 41 conform to Section 6-02.3(17)B3. 42

43 5. In addition to the criteria specified in Item 1, the temporary bridge 44

substructure shall be designed in accordance with the WSDOT 45 Geotechnical Design Manual (M46-03). 46

47 Submittals 48 The Contractor shall submit Type 3E Working Drawings of the temporary bridge 49 including an erection plan and procedure conforming to Section 6-03.3(7)A. 50 51


If the temporary bridge is to be in place for greater than 90 calendar days, the 1 Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing consisting of a load rating 2 report prepared in accordance with the AASHTO Manual for Bridge Evaluation and 3 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual LRFD M23-50 Chapter 13. 4 5 Construction and Removal 6 The Contractor shall construct the temporary bridge in accordance with the working 7 drawings and erection plan as accepted by the Engineer, environmental permit 8 conditions specified in Section 1-07.5 as supplemented in these Special Provisions 9 and as shown in the Plans, and in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. 10 The Contractor shall maintain the temporary bridge, including the driving surface, 11 for the life of the temporary bridge in this project. 12 13 All welding, repair welding, and welding inspection, of steel components of the 14 temporary bridge shall conform to the Section 6-03.3(25) and 6-03.3(25)A 15 requirements specified for steel bridges. 16 17 After the temporary bridge is no longer needed the Contractor shall remove the 18 temporary bridge. 19 20 Payment 21 Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-09.3 for the following bid item: 22 23

“Temporary Bridge___”, lump sum. 24 25 6-01.7.GR6 26

Navigable Streams 27 28 6-01.7.INST1.GR6 29 Section 6-01.7 is supplemented with the following: 30 31 6-01.7.OPT1.FB6 32

(August 7, 2017) 33 Navigation Lighting System 34

Description 35 This work consists of furnishing and installing a complete navigation lighting 36 system, as shown in the Plans. 37 38 Materials 39 The navigation lights shall be the make and model shown in the Plans. All other 40 materials shall conform to Section 9-29. 41 42 Payment 43 Payment will be made for the following bid item when included in the Proposal: 44

45 “Navigation Lighting System ***$$1$$***”, lump sum. 46

47


6-01.7.OPT2.FB6 1 (June 26, 2000) 2 Temporary Navigation Lights 3

Description 4 This work consists of furnishing, installing, and maintaining temporary navigation 5 lights as required by the United States Coast Guard, and removing them at the 6 completion of the Contract. 7 8 Construction Requirements 9 The navigation lights shall be battery powered and shall remain the property of the 10 Contractor at the completion of the Contract unless otherwise specified. The 11 Contractor shall maintain the temporary navigation lights for the duration of the 12 Contract. 13 14 Payment 15 All costs in connection with furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing the 16 temporary navigation lights as specified, and as shown in the Plans, shall be 17 included in the *** $$1$$. *** 18

19


6-09.GR6 1

Modified Concrete Overlays 2 3 6-09.2.GR6 4

Materials 5 6 6-09.2.INST1.GR6 7 Section 6-09.2 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 6-09.2.OPT7.BSP.GB6 10

(******) 11 Special Materials for Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete 12 Cement shall be Rapid Set Cement as manufactured by CTS Cement Manufacturing 13 Company of Cypress, CA at (800) 929-3030. The material shall be of recent 14 manufacture (within the past 12 months) and shall be free of lumps. 15 16 Latex admixture shall be DOW Modifier A as manufactured by DOW Chemical 17 Company of Midland, MI at (800) 447-4369, conforming to the material properties 18 specified in Section 6-09.2 for latex admixture. 19 20 Food grade citric acid may be used as a retarder admixture. 21

22 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6 23

(******) 24 Materials for Polyester Concrete 25

Polyester Resin Binder 26 The resin shall be an unsaturated isophthalic polyester-styrene co-polymer. 27 28 Prior to adding the initiator, the resin shall conform to the following requirements: 29

30 Viscosity: 75 to 200 cps ASTM D 2196 31 (20 rpm at 77F, RVT No. 1 spindle) 32 33 Specific Gravity: 1.05 to 1.10 at 77F ASTM D 1475 34 35 Styrene Content: 45% to 50% by weight ASTM D2369 36 of polyester styrene resin 37

38 After adding the initiator, the resin shall conform to the following requirements: 39

40 Elongation: 35% minimum ASTM D 638 41 w/ thickness 0.25" ± 0.04" 42 43 Tensile Strength: 2,500 psi minimum ASTM D 638 44 w/ thickness 0.25" ± 0.04" 45 46 Conditioning 18 hours/77F/50% + 5 hours/158F ASTM D 618 47 48 Silane Coupler: 1.0% minimum (by weight of polyester-styrene resin) 49 50 The silane coupler shall be an organosilane ester, gammamethacryloxypro-51 pyltrimethoxysilane. The promoter/hardeners shall be compatible with suitable 52


methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP) and cumene hydroperoxide (CHP) 1 initiators. MEKP initiators shall be used when the surrounding concrete 2 temperatures are above 60F. A blend of initiators may be used as approved 3 by the Engineer when the surrounding concrete temperature is 50F to 60F. 4

5 Polyester resin binder will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer of a 6 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance conforming to Section 1-06.3. 7 8 High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) Resin 9 In addition to the viscosity and density properties, and the promoter/initiator system, 10 already specified in this Section, the HMWM resin for polyester concrete overlays 11 shall conform to the following requirements: 12

13 Flash Point: 180F minimum ASTM D 3278 14 15 Tack-Free Time: 400 minutes maximum California Test 551 16

17 Prior to adding initiator, the HMWM resin shall have a maximum volatile content of 18 30 percent, when tested in conformance with ASTM D 2369. 19 20 HMWM resin will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer of a 21 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance conforming to Section 1-06.3. 22 23 Aggregate 24 The aggregate shall be from a WSDOT approved pit site and shall be thoroughly 25 washed and kiln dried. 26 27 The aggregate shall conform to Section 9-03, and one of the following combined 28 aggregate gradings: 29 30

Combined Aggregate 31 32 1/2" Max. 3/8" Max. 33 Sieve Size % Passing % Passing 34 35 1/2" 100 100 36 3/8" 83-100 100 37 U.S. No. 4 65-82 62-85 38 U.S. No. 8 45-64 45-67 39 U.S. No. 16 27-48 29-50 40 U.S. No. 30 12-30 16-36 41 U.S. No. 50 6-17 5-20 42 U.S. No. 100 0-7 0-7 43 U.S. No. 200 0-3 0-3 44

45 The combined aggregate shall have a maximum of 45 percent crushed particles. 46 Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand only. 47 48 Aggregate absorption shall not exceed 1.0 percent. The moisture content of the 49 aggregate shall not exceed one half of the aggregate absorption at the time of 50 mixing with the polyester resin binder. The aggregate temperature shall be 51 between 45F and 100F at the time of mixing. 52


1 Sand for Abrasive Finish 2 The sand for abrasive finish shall conform to Section 6-09.2, and the aggregate 3 moisture content requirements specified above. 4

5 6-09.3.GR6 6


Equipment 10 11 6-09.3(1).INST1.GR6 12

Section 6-09.3(1) is supplemented with the following: 13 14 6-09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6 15

(******) 16 Mobile Mixer for Polyester Concrete 17 The mixer shall be equipped to be calibrated to automatically proportion and blend 18 all components of the specified mix on a continuous or intermittent basis as 19 required by the finishing operation, and shall discharge mixed material directly into 20 the finishing machine. 21 22 The mixer shall be equipped with a metering device that automatically measures 23 and records the aggregate volumes and the corresponding resin volumes. The 24 metering device shall have a readout display gage visible at all times, and shall be 25 capable of printing out the volumes being recorded for each material. 26 27 The aggregate and resin volumes shall be recorded at no greater than five minute 28 intervals along with the date of each recording. A printout of the recordings shall be 29 furnished to the Engineer at the end of each work shift. 30 31 The Contractor shall prevent any cleaning chemicals from reaching the polyester 32 mix during the overlay applications. 33

34 6-09.3(1)H.GR1 35

Mobile Mixer for Latex Modified Concrete 36 37 6-09.3(1)H.INST1.GR6 38

Section 6-09.3(1)H is supplemented with the following: 39 40 6-09.3(1)H.OPT1.BSP.GB6 41

(******) 42 The capacity of the mobile mixer and bulk material handling systems for rapid 43 set latex modified concrete shall be six cubic yards per hour, minimum. 44

45 6-09.3(2).GR6 46

Submittals 47 48 6-09.3(2).INST1.GR6 49



6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6 1 (******) 2 Submittals for Polyester Concrete 3 The Contractor shall submit the following items to the Engineer for approval in 4 accordance with Section 6-01.9: 5

6 1. The type of shot blasting machine selected by the Contractor for use in 7

this project to scarify concrete surfaces. 8 9 2. The method and materials used to contain, collect, and dispose of all 10

concrete debris generated by the scarifying process, including provisions 11 for protecting adjacent traffic from flying debris. 12

13 3. The qualifications of on-site supervisors, mobile mixer operators, and 14

finishing machine operators, in accordance with Section 6-09.3(8) as 15 supplemented in these Special Provisions. 16

17 4. The polyester concrete mix design in accordance with Section 6-09.3(3) 18

as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 19 20 5. Samples, as specified below, shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 21

15 working days prior to placing the polyester overlay: 22 23 a. One gallon minimum of the polyester resin binder. 24 25 b. One pint minimum of the HMWM resin. 26 27 c. 100 pounds minimum of aggregate. 28 29 d. Representative samples from each lot of prepackaged deck 30

repair material and aggregate extenders, if selected for use in 31 this project, as specified in Section 6-09.3(3) as supplemented in 32 these Special Provisions. 33

34 6. The method and materials used to contain HMWM resin and polyester 35

concrete within the deck area specified to receive the overlay. 36 37 7. Paving equipment specifications and details of the screed rail support 38

system, including details of anchoring the rails and providing rail 39 continuity. 40

41 The Contractor shall not begin scarifying operations until receiving the Engineer’s 42 approval of Items 1 and 2. The Contractor shall not begin placing polyester 43 concrete overlay until receiving the Engineer’s approval of Items 3 through 7. 44

45 6-09.3(3).GR6 46

Concrete Overlay Mixes 47 48 6-09.3(3).INST1.GR6 49



6-09.3(3).OPT1.GB6 1 (January 7, 2002) 2 The Contractor may use either fly ash modified concrete (FMC), latex modified 3 concrete (LMC), or microsilica modified concrete (MMC) for the concrete overlay. 4 The Contractor shall select one type of concrete for the overlay, provide a mix for 5 the selected concrete to the Engineer in accordance with Item 5 of Section 6-6 09.3(2), and use that type for the total concrete overlay operation. Use of a 7 combination of types will not be allowed. 8

9 6-09.3(3).OPT2.GB6 10

(January 7, 2002) 11 The Contractor may use either fly ash modified concrete (FMC), or latex modified 12 concrete (LMC) for the concrete overlay. The Contractor shall select one type of 13 concrete for the overlay, provide a mix for the selected concrete to the Engineer in 14 accordance with Item 5 of Section 6-09.3(2), and use that type for the total concrete 15 overlay operation. Use of a combination of types will not be allowed. Use of 16 microsilica modified concrete (MMC) will not be allowed. 17

18 6-09.3(3).OPT3.GB6 19

(January 7, 2002) 20 The Contractor shall use latex modified concrete (LMC) for the total concrete 21 overlay operation, and shall provide a concrete mix to the Engineer in accordance 22 with Item 5 of Section 6-09.3(2). Use of fly ash modified concrete (FMC) or 23 microsilica modified concrete (MMC) will not be allowed. 24

25 6-09.3(3).OPT8.BSP.GB6 26

(******) 27 Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete 28 The Contractor shall use rapid set latex modified concrete for the total concrete 29 overlay operation, in accordance with the following mix design. Use of latex 30 modified concrete (LMC), fly ash modified concrete (FMC) or microsilica modified 31 concrete (MMC) will not be allowed. 32 33 Rapid set latex modified concrete shall be a workable mix, uniform in composition 34 and consistency. Mix proportions per cubic yard shall be as follows: 35 36

Rapid Set Cement 658 LB. 37 DOW Modifier A Latex Admixture 208 LB. 38 Fine Aggregate 1,700 LB. 39 Coarse Aggregate 1,300 LB. 40 Water 162 LB. 41 Air 4 to 7 percent 42

43 The moisture content and water limit specifications for latex modified concrete in 44 Section 6-09.3(3)E shall also apply. 45

46 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6 47

(******) 48 Polyester Concrete 49 The Contractor shall use polyester concrete for the total concrete overlay operation. 50 Use of latex modified concrete (LMC), fly ash modified concrete (FMC) or 51 microsilica modified concrete (MMC) will not be allowed. 52


1 Polyester concrete shall consist of the following three components – polyester resin 2 binder, HMWM resin, and combined aggregate, in accordance with Section 6-09.2 3 as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The Contractor shall submit the mix 4 design for the polyester concrete to the Engineer for approval. The mix design 5 shall include a recommended initiator percentage for the expected application 6 temperature. The polyester resin binder shall be approximately 12 percent by 7 weight of the dry combined aggregate. The Contractor shall not begin the trial 8 overlay of the polyester concrete, as specified in Section 6-09.3(8) as 9 supplemented in these Special Provisions, until receiving the Engineer’s approval 10 of the polyester concrete mix design. 11

12 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6 13

(******) 14 Deck Repair Concrete for Polyester Concrete Overlays 15 Patching concrete for further deck preparation in accordance with Section 6-09.3(6) 16 shall be the polyester concrete mix used for the overlay. 17

18 6-09.3(4).GR6 19

Storing and Handling 20 21 6-09.3(4).INST1.GR6 22


(******) 26 Storing and Handling of Polyester Concrete Materials 27 All materials shall be delivered in their original containers bearing the 28 manufacturer's label, specifying date of manufacturing, batch number, trade name 29 brand, quantity, and mixing ratio. Each shipment of polyester resin binder and 30 HMWM resin shall be accompanied by a Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). 31 32 The material shall be stored to prevent damage by the elements and to ensure the 33 preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. The storage space shall be 34 kept clean and dry, and shall contain a high-low thermometer. The temperatures of 35 the storage space shall not fall below nor rise above that recommended by the 36 manufacturer. Every precaution shall be taken to avoid contact with flame. 37 38 Stored materials shall be inspected prior to their use, and shall meet the 39 requirements of these Special Provisions at the time of use. 40 41 Any material which is rejected because of failure to meet the required tests or that 42 has been damaged so as to cause rejections shall be immediately replaced at no 43 additional expense to the Contracting Agency. 44 45 Sufficient material to perform the entire polyester concrete overlay application shall 46 be in storage at the site prior to any field preparation, so that there shall be no 47 delay in procuring the materials for each day's application. 48 49 Appropriate impermeable protective garments shall be used by all workers who 50 may contact the resin or initiators to prevent skin contact. If skin contact occurs, 51


the resin or initiators shall be immediately washed off. Clothing that becomes 1 saturated with resin shall be removed immediately. 2 3 All personnel working with the polyester concrete shall be issued suitable approved 4 organic vapor respirators in addition to other appropriate protection equipment. 5

6 6-09.3(5).GR6 7

Scarifying Concrete Surface 8 9 6-09.3(5).INST1.GR6 10

Section 6-09.3(5) is supplemented with the following: 11 12 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 13

(January 7, 2002) 14 The Contractor may use either a rotary milling machine, hydro-demolition machine, 15 or shot blasting machine for scarifying concrete surfaces. The Contractor shall 16 inform the Engineer of the type of machine selected in accordance with Item 1 of 17 Section 6-09.3(2). 18

19 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 20

(January 7, 2002) 21 The Contractor may use either a hydro-demolition machine or shot blasting 22 machine for scarifying concrete surfaces. The use of a rotary milling machine will 23 not be allowed. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the type of machine 24 selected in accordance with Item 1 of Section 6-09.3(2). 25

26 6-09.3(5).OPT7.GB6 27

(April 6, 2015) 28 The Contractor shall use a hydro-demolition machine for scarifying concrete 29 surfaces. The use of a rotary milling or shot blasting machines will not be allowed. 30 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the type of machine selected in 31 accordance with Item 1 of Section 6-09.3(2). 32

33 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6 34

(******) 35 The Contractor shall use a shot blasting machine for scarifying concrete surfaces. 36 The use of a rotary milling or hydro-demolition machines will not be allowed. The 37 Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the type of machine selected in accordance 38 with Item 1 of Section 6-09.3(2). 39

40 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6 41

(******) 42 The scarification depth for all concrete decks receiving polyester concrete overlay 43 shall be 1/4 inch, and all references to scarification depth in Sections 6-09.3(5)A 44 and 6-09.3(5)B shall be revised accordingly. 45

46 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6 47

(******) 48 Steel reinforcing bars used in deck repair operations, in accordance with Sections 49 6-09.3(5)F and 6-09.3(6)B, shall be epoxy-coated in accordance with Section 6-50 02.3(24)H. 51

52


6-09.3(6).GR6 1 Further Deck Preparation 2

3 6-09.3(6)B.GR6 4

Deck Repair Preparation 5 6 6-09.3(6)B.INST1.GR6 7

Section 6-09.3(6)B is supplemented with the following: 8 9 6-09.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6 10

(April 6, 2015) 11 The Contractor shall not remove the bottom two inches of the existing concrete 12 deck, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. If the existing concrete bridge 13 deck is punctured by the removal operations, the Contractor shall form the 14 bottom surface prior to placing the patching concrete. The Contractor shall 15 submit the method and materials to be used for such forming as a Type 2E 16 Working Drawing in accordance with Section 6-02.3(16). 17

18 6-09.3(6)C.GR6 19

Placing Deck Repair Concrete 20 21 6-09.3(6)C.INST1.GR6 22

Section 6-09.3(6)C is supplemented with the following: 23 24 6-09.3(6)C.OPT1.BSP.GB6 25

(******) 26 Patching concrete for bridge decks receiving rapid set latex modified concrete 27 overlay shall be rapid set latex modified concrete only. Concrete Class M shall 28 not be used. 29

30 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6 31

(******) 32 Placing Patching Concrete For Polyester Concrete Overlay 33 Patching concrete shall be polyester concrete, as specified in Section 6-34 09.3(3) as supplemented in these Special Provisions. Concrete Class M shall 35 not be used. 36 37 Polyester concrete for deck repair shall be placed and cured in accordance 38 with Sections 6-09.3(11) and 6-09.3(13), respectively, as supplemented in 39 these Special Provisions. 40 41 All deck repair material that fails to achieve a minimum compressive strength 42 of 3,000 psi in six hours as verified by the rebound number determined in 43 accordance with ASTM C 805 shall be removed and replaced with new deck 44 repair material by the Contractor, at no additional expense to the Contracting 45 Agency. 46

47 6-09.3(8).GR6 48

Quality Assurance 49 50 6-09.3(8).INST1.GR6 51



1 6-09.3(8).OPT1.BSP.GB6 2

(******) 3 Quality assurance for all rapid set latex modified concrete work shall conform to 4 Section 6-09.3(8)B, and the following: 5

6 Rapid set latex modified concrete will not be tested for slump. 7 8 The Contractor shall make arrangements to have a qualified technical 9 representative of CTS Cement Manufacturing Company present at the bridge 10 site throughout all rapid set latex modified concrete overlay work, including 11 surface preparation, mixing, placing, screeding, and curing. The qualified 12 technical representative shall be an employee of CTS Cement Manufacturing 13 Company. 14 15 The Contractor shall submit the name, current phone number, and experience 16 qualifications of the qualified technical representative of CTS Cement 17 Manufacturing Company to the Engineer for approval, along with the other 18 submittals specified in Section 6-09.3(2). The submittal shall include a listing 19 of the rapid set latex modified concrete overlay project on which the individual 20 has served as a qualified technical representative, and shall include a 21 description of the project, the name of the project’s Owner or Contracting 22 Agency, and the name and current phone number of the project’s Owner’s or 23 Contracting Agency’s contact person. 24 25 The Contractor shall not begin rapid set latex modified concrete operations 26 until receiving the Engineer’s approval of the qualified technical representative 27 submittal. 28 29 All recommendations made by the qualified technical representative, and 30 approved by the Engineer, shall be adhered to by the Contractor. 31

32 6-09.3(8).OPT2.BSP.GB6 33

(******) 34 Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Trial Overlay 35 The Contractor shall place a trial overlay of rapid set latex modified concrete using 36 the equipment selected by the Contractor and the production mix and procedure 37 specified in Section 6-09.3 as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The 38 Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time and location of the trial overlay at 39 least seven calendar days prior to the scheduled trial overlay. 40 41 The trial overlay shall be placed on a previously cast and cured concrete pad at a 42 location selected by the Contractor. The plan area of the concrete pad shall be 12 43 feet minimum in width and 15 feet minimum in length. 44 45 The Contractor shall clean the concrete pad surface, mix, place, finish, and cure 46 the rapid set latex modified concrete overlay, and check the trial overlay for bond, 47 in accordance with Section 6-09.3 as supplemented in these Special Provisions, 48 except as otherwise noted. The Contractor need not scarify the concrete surface 49 and perform further deck preparation on the concrete pad surface provided that all 50 other conditions of Section 6-09.3(7) are satisfied. The trial overlay shall be 12 feet 51 wide, 15 feet long, and 1-1/2 inches thick. 52


1 The Contractor shall not begin construction operations at the bridge site receiving 2 the rapid set latex modified concrete overlay until receiving the Engineer’s approval 3 of the completed trial overlay. 4 5 After receiving the Engineer’s approval of the completed trial overlay, the concrete 6 pad and trial overlay shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed 7 and disposed of in accordance with Section 2-02.3. 8

9 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6 10

(******) 11 Quality Assurance For Polyester Concrete Overlay 12 The Contractor shall arrange to have the suppliers of the polyester resin binder and 13 HMWM resin furnish technical service relating to application of material and health 14 and safety training for personnel who are to handle the polyester concrete and the 15 HMWM resin prime coat. 16 17 On-site supervisors, and all personnel operating the mobile mixer and finishing 18 machines, shall have successful previous experience in mixing and placing 19 polyester concrete overlay. Documentation of project experience with polyester 20 concrete overlay shall include the name and location of the project, the Contracting 21 Agency of the project, the area quantity of overlay placed, and the name and 22 current phone number of the Contracting Agency’s contact person for the 23 referenced project. 24

25 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6 26

(******) 27 Polyester Concrete Trial Overlay 28 The Contractor shall place a trial overlay of polyester concrete using the equipment 29 selected by the Contractor and the production mix and procedure as approved by 30 the Engineer in accordance with Section 6-09.3(3). The Contractor shall notify the 31 Engineer of the time and location of the trial overlay at least seven calendar days 32 prior to the scheduled trial overlay. 33 34 The trial overlay shall be placed on a previously cast and cured concrete pad at a 35 location selected by the Contractor. The plan area of the concrete pad shall be 12 36 feet minimum in width and 15 feet minimum in length. 37 38 The Contractor shall clean the concrete pad surface, mix, place, finish, and cure 39 the polyester concrete overlay, and check the trial overlay for bond, in accordance 40 with Section 6-09.3 as supplemented in these Special Provisions, except as 41 otherwise noted. The Contractor need not scarify the concrete surface and perform 42 further deck preparation on the concrete pad surface provided that all other 43 conditions of Section 6-09.3(7) are satisfied. The trial overlay shall be 12 feet wide, 44 15 feet long, and 3/4 inches thick. 45 46 The Contractor shall perform three pull-off tests on the trial overlay in accordance 47 with American Concrete Institute 503R - Appendix A. The Contractor shall record 48 the pull-off test results and the amount of (if any) failure into the base concrete, and 49 shall provide written documentation of the test results to the Engineer. 50 51


The Contractor shall not begin placing polyester concrete overlay at the bridge 1 site(s) receiving the polyester concrete overlay until receiving the Engineer’s 2 approval of the completed trial overlay. 3 4 After receiving the Engineer’s approval of the completed trial overlay, the concrete 5 pad and trial overlay shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed 6 and disposed of in accordance with Section 2-02.3. 7

8 6-09.3(9).GR6 9

Mixing Concrete for Concrete Overlay 10 11 6-09.3(9).INST1.GR6 12


(******) 16 Mixing of concrete for rapid set latex modified concrete work shall conform to 17 Section 6-09.3(9)B, and the following: 18

19 If food grade citric acid is used as a retarder, it shall be mixed into a solution 20 with water. The solution shall not be added directly to the latex admixture. 21 The solution shall be added to a separate admixture tank for dispensing into 22 the rapid set latex modified overlay mix. 23

24 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6 25

(******) 26 Mixing Polyester Concrete 27 Polyester concrete shall be mixed in mobile mixers conforming to Section 6-09.3(1) 28 as supplemented in these Special Provisions, and in accordance with the mix 29 design approved by the Engineer. 30 31 The polyester resin binder in the polyester concrete shall be approximately 12 32 percent by weight of the dry aggregate. The Contractor shall determine the exact 33 percentage as approved by the Engineer. 34 35 The amount of peroxide initiator used shall result in a polyester concrete set time 36 between 30 and 120 minutes during placement as determined by California Test 37 551, Part 2, “Method of Test For Determination of Set Time of Concrete Overlay 38 and Patching Materials”, by Gilmore Needles. Accelerators or inhibitors may be 39 required as recommended by the polyester resin binder supplier and as approved 40 by the Engineer. 41 42 The polyester resin binder shall be initiated and thoroughly blended just prior to 43 mixing the aggregate and binder. The polyester concrete shall be thoroughly mixed 44 prior to placing. 45

46 6-09.3(10).GR6 47

Overlay Profile and Screed Rails 48 49 6-09.3(10).INST1.GR6 50



6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6 1 (******) 2 The minimum thickness of polyester concrete overlay shall be 3/4 inches, except as 3 otherwise shown in the Plans or adjusted by the Engineer. 4

5 6-09.3(11).GR6 6

Placing Concrete Overlay 7 8 6-09.3(11).INST1.GR6 9


(******) 13 Placing Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Overlay 14 Placing rapid set latex modified concrete overlay shall conform to all requirements 15 of this section, including those specific for latex modified concrete overlay, except 16 as otherwise noted. 17 18 After the lane or strip to be overlaid with rapid set latex modified concrete overlay 19 has been prepared and immediately before placing the concrete, it shall be 20 thoroughly soaked and kept continuously wet with water for a minimum period of 21 two hours prior to placement of the concrete. 22 23 The allowable temperature range of the concrete deck receiving the rapid set latex 24 modified concrete shall be between 45F and 70F. 25 26 The Contractor shall conform to the transverse bulkhead placement requirements 27 whenever rapid set latex modified concrete placement is stopped for a period of 20 28 minutes or more. Further placement is permitted only after a period of 24 hours 29 unless a gap is left in the lane or strip. 30 31 Rapid set latex modified concrete shall not be placed against the edge of an 32 adjacent lane or strip that is less than four hours old. 33

34 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6 35

(******) 36 Placing Polyester Concrete Overlay 37 Application of the HMWM prime coat and the polyester concrete overlay shall not 38 begin if rain is expected. The area receiving the prime coat shall be dry and had no 39 rain for at least 24 hours. Immediately prior to applying the prime coat, the surface 40 receiving the prime coat shall be swept clean by compressed air to remove 41 accumulated dust and any other loose material. If the surface receiving the HMWM 42 prime coat and polyester concrete has been exposed to moisture within the 43 previous 12 hours, it shall be thoroughly dried using a heat lance prior to placement 44 of the HMWM prime coat. 45 46 The concrete bridge deck surface temperature shall be between 50F and 85F when 47 the prime coat is applied. 48 49 The prepared concrete surface shall receive one coat of promoted/initiated wax-50 free HMWM resin. The promoted/initiated HMWM resin primer shall be worked into 51 the concrete in a manner to effect complete coverage of the area. A one pint 52


sample of each batch of promoted/initiated HMWM resin shall be retained and 1 submitted to the Engineer at the time of primer application to verify proper 2 catalyzation. Under no circumstances shall any resin be allowed to run into drains 3 and expansion joints, or otherwise escape the Contractor’s collection and 4 containment system. 5 6 If the HMWM primed surface becomes contaminated, the contaminated area shall 7 be cleaned by abrasive blasting and reprimed at no additional expense to the 8 Contracting Agency. 9 10 The HMWM prime coat shall cure for a minimum of 30 minutes before placing the 11 polyester concrete overlay. Placement of the polymer concrete shall not proceed 12 until the Engineer verifies that the HMWM resin was properly promoted and 13 initiated, as evidenced by the HMWM batch sample. 14 15 The polyester concrete shall be placed on the liquid or hardened HMWM prime 16 coat within two hours of placing the prime coat. Polyester concrete shall be placed 17 prior to gelling and within 15 minutes following initiation, whichever occurs first. 18 Polyester concrete that is not placed within this time shall be discarded. 19 20 If, for any reason, polyester concrete is not placed over the prime coat within the 21 two hour time limit, the Contractor shall apply a fresh coat of HMVM resin primer 22 immediately followed by an abrasive sand finish coating. The abrasive sand finish 23 shall be broadcast onto the surface to affect a uniform coverage of a minimum of 24 0.8 pounds per square yard. Prior to applying the polyester concrete overlay, the 25 surface shall be re-cleaned in accordance with Section 6-09.3(7). 26 27 Expansion joints shall be adequately isolated prior to placing the overlay as 28 approved by the Engineer. Saw cutting at bridge expansion joints will not be 29 allowed. 30 31 The surface temperature of the area receiving the polyester concrete shall be the 32 same as specified above for the HMWM prime coat. 33 34 The polyester concrete shall be consolidated to a relative compaction of not less 35 than 97 percent. 36

37 6-09.3(12).GR6 38

Finishing Concrete Overlay 39 40 6-09.3(12).INST1.GR6 41


(******) 45 Neither latex admixture nor water shall be applied to the surface of the rapid set 46 latex modified concrete overlay to assist in finishing the top surface. 47

48


6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6 1 (******) 2 Finishing Polyester Concrete Overlay 3 The finished surface of the polyester concrete overlay shall conform to Section 6-4 02.3(10). 5 6 The polyester concrete shall be struck off to the established grade and cross 7 section and consolidated to the required compaction. No further texturing and 8 grooving of the finish overlay surface will be required. Forms shall be coated with 9 suitable bond release agent to permit ready release of forms. 10 11 The polyester concrete overlay shall receive an abrasive sand finish. The sand 12 finish shall be applied immediately after overlay strike-off and before gelling occurs. 13 14 The surface texture of polyester concrete surface shall be uniform and shall have a 15 friction number of not less than 35 as determined by ASTM E 274. 16 17 After initial finishing, the polyester overlay may require grinding of rough areas as 18 determined by the Engineer. The grinding shall be done in a manner that will not 19 damage the existing bridge deck. Rotary milling machines are not allowed. 20 21 The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the 22 method and equipment for grinding the polyester overlay are adequate for the 23 intended purpose and will provide satisfactory results. The removal shall not 24 commence until the Contractor receives the Engineer’s approval of the grinding 25 equipment. 26 27 The bridge deck areas specified by the Engineer to receive grinding shall be 28 ground in a longitudinal direction. The grinding equipment shall use diamond 29 tipped saw blades mounted on a power driven, self-propelled machine that is 30 specifically designed to texture concrete surfaces. The grinding equipment shall 31 have a blade spacing to provide grooves that are between 0.10 and 0.15 inches 32 wide. The land area between the grooves shall be approximately 0.125 inches. 33 34 The Contractor shall contain, collect, and dispose of all concrete debris generated 35 by the grinding operation in accordance with Item 2 of the polyester concrete 36 submittal in Section 6-09.3(2) as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 37 38 Prior to opening the overlay area to vehicular traffic the finished overlay shall be 39 power swept to remove excess loose aggregate and abrasive sand. The 40 Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the power 41 broom equipment will not damage the finished overlay. Any damage to the finished 42 overlay caused by the power broom shall be repaired at no additional expense to 43 the Contracting Agency. 44

45 6-09.3(13).GR6 46

Curing Concrete Overlay 47 48 6-09.3(13).INST1.GR6 49



6-09.3(13).OPT1.BSP.GB6 1 (******) 2 Special Curing Requirements For Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete 3 Once in place the burlap shall be lightly fog sprayed with water. A separate layer of 4 white, reflective type polyethylene sheeting shall immediately be placed over the 5 wet burlap. The concrete shall then be wet cured by keeping the burlap wet until 6 the concrete reaches the specified minimum compressive strength for traffic load of 7 3,000 psi. Upon reaching the specified minimum compressive strength for traffic 8 load, the polyethylene sheeting shall be removed and the bridge opened to traffic. 9

10 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6 11

(******) 12 Curing Polyester Concrete 13 Traffic and equipment shall not be permitted on the polyester overlay for at least 14 four hours and until the polyester overlay has reached a minimum compressive 15 strength of 3,000 psi as verified by the rebound number determined in accordance 16 with ASTM C 805. 17 18 Areas in the polyester concrete that do not totally cure, or that fail to attain the 19 minimum compressive strength specified above, shall be removed and replaced 20 with new polyester concrete material by the Contractor, at no additional expense to 21 the Contracting Agency. 22

23 6-09.3(14).GR6 24

Checking For Bond 25 26 6-09.3(14).INST1.GR6 27


(******) 31 Checking Polyester Concrete For Bond 32 After the requirements for curing have been met, the entire overlaid surface shall 33 be sounded by the Contractor, in a manner approved by and in the presence of the 34 Engineer, to ensure total bond of the concrete to the bridge deck. Polyester 35 concrete in unbonded areas shall be removed and replaced with polyester concrete 36 by the Contractor, at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. 37 38 All cracks, except those that are significant enough to require removal as 39 determined by the Engineer, shall be thoroughly filled and sealed with HMWM 40 resin. Cracks 1/16 inch and greater in width shall receive two applications of 41 HMWM resin. Immediately following the application of HMWM resin, the wetted 42 surface shall be coated with sand for abrasive finish. 43

44 6-09.3(14).OPT2.GB6 45

(January 2, 2018) 46 For this project, after the requirements for curing have been met, the entire overlaid 47 surface shall be sounded by the Contractor, in a manner accepted by and in the 48 presence of the Engineer, to ensure total bond of the concrete to the bridge deck. 49 Concrete in unbonded areas shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with 50 the same modified concrete as used in the overlay at no additional expense to the 51 Contracting Agency. 52


1 6-09.4.GR6 2

Measurement 3 4 6-09.4.INST1.GR6 5 Section 6-09.4 is supplemented with the following: 6 7 6-09.4.OPT1.BSP.GB6 8

(******) 9 All specifications for measurement and waste of latex modified concrete shall also apply 10 to rapid set latex modified concrete. 11

12 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6 13

(******) 14 Polyester concrete overlay will be measured by the square yard of overlay surface 15 actually placed, finished, and cured. 16

17 6-09.5.GR6 18

Payment 19 20 6-09.5.INST1.GR6 21 The second bid item under Section 6-09.5 is supplemented with the following: 22 23 6-09.5.OPT1.BSP.GB6 24

(******) 25 All costs in connection with providing the services of the qualified technical 26 representative of CTS Cement Manufacturing Company shall be included in the unit 27 contract price per cubic foot for “Modified Conc. Overlay”. 28

29 6-09.5.INST2.GR6 30 Section 6-09.5 is supplemented with the following: 31 32 6-09.5.OPT6.BSP.GB6 33

(******) 34 “Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Trial Overlay”, lump sum. 35 The lump sum contract price for “Rapid Set Latex Modified Concrete Trial Overlay” shall 36 be full pay for performing the work as specified, including establishing a location for the 37 trial overlay, and construction, removal, and disposal of the concrete pad and trial 38 overlay. 39

40 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6 41

(******) 42 “Polyester Concrete Trial Overlay”, lump sum. 43 The lump sum contract price for “Polyester Concrete Trial Overlay” shall be full pay for 44 performing the work as specified, including establishing a location for the trial overlay, 45 and construction, removal, and disposal of the concrete pad and trial overlay. 46

47 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6 48

(******) 49 “Force Account Grinding Polyester Conc. Overlay”, force account. 50 Grinding polyester concrete overlay as specified will be paid by force account in 51 accordance with Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of providing a common proposal for all 52


bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item "Force Account 1 Grinding Polyester Conc. Overlay" in the bid proposal to become a part of the total bid 2 by the Contractor. 3

4 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6 5

(******) 6 “Polyester Concrete Overlay”, per square yard. 7 The unit contract price per square yard for “Polyester Concrete Overlay” shall be full pay 8 for performing the work as specified, including placing, finishing, and curing the overlay, 9 and checking for bond. 10

11 6-09.5.OPT11.GB6 12

(April 6, 2015) 13 "Force Account Forms For Full Depth Deck Repair", force account 14 Payment for "Force Account Forms For Full Depth Deck Repair" will be by force account 15 in accordance with Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of providing a common proposal to 16 all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item "Force Account 17 Forms For Full Depth Deck Repair" in the bid proposal to become a part of the total bid 18 by the Contractor. 19

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


DIVISION8.GR8 Miscellaneous Construction 1 2 8-01.GR8 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control 3

4 8-01.1.GR8 General 5



8-01.1.OPT1.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 10 (April 1, 2019) 11 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 12 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using 13 Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if 14 the soil is determined to be deficient from the results of a 15 soil organic matter test or the soil analysis and the 16 application of compost or topsoil is not possible due to 17 steepness or access. Use requires the approval of the 18 Region Landscape Architect or the HQ Region Liaison 19 Landscape Architect. 20 Must also use 8-01.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-21 01.4(4).OPT1.GR8, and 8-01.5(4).OPT1.FR8. 22 23



28 8-01.2.OPT1.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 29

(April 1, 2019) 30 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 31 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using 32 Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if 33 the soil is determined to be deficient from the results of a 34 soil organic matter test or the soil analysis and the 35 application of compost or topsoil is not possible due to 36 steepness or access. Use requires the approval of the 37 Region Landscape Architect or the HQ Region Liaison 38 Landscape Architect. 39 Must also use 8-01.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-40 01.4(4).OPT1.GR8, and 8-01.5(4).OPT1.FR8. 41

42 8-01.2(9-14.4(8)).GR8 Compost 43


46 8-01.2(9-14.4(8)).OPT1.GR8 (April 7, 2014) 47

May be used to allow biosolids compost on projects that 48 do not use compost on stormwater BMPs. Use with 49 concurrence of the Hydraulics Engineer. 50 51


8-01.3.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3 is supplemented with the following) 54



8-01.3.OPT1.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 3 (April 1, 2019) 4 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 5 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using 6 Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if 7 the soil is determined to be deficient from the results of a 8 soil organic matter test or the soil analysis and the 9 application of compost or topsoil is not possible due to 10 steepness or access. Use requires the approval of the 11 Region Landscape Architect or the HQ Region Liaison 12 Landscape Architect. 13 Must also use 8-01.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-14 01.4(4).OPT1.GR8, and 8-01.5(4).OPT1.FR8. 15

16 8-01.3(1).GR8 General 17 18

8-01.3(1).INST1.GR8 (The tenth paragraph of Section 8-01.3(1) is revised to 19 read) 20 Must use once preceding any of the following: 21

22 8-01.3(1).OPT1.GR8 (Erodible Soil Eastern Washington) 23

(January 25, 2010) 24 Use for projects east of the Cascade range in areas 25 receiving 12 inches or less annual precipitation. Do not 26 use if any portion of the project lies in areas that 27 receive more than 12 inches of annual precipitation. 28 See 29 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/Hydraulic30 s/WaMeanAnnPrecip.pdf for precipitation map. 31



8-01.3(1).OPT8.FR8 (Side Slope Treatment) 36 (April 1, 2002) 37 Use on projects where erodible soils are anticipated 38 and it is desired to have the newly exposed slopes 39 walked before final erosion control can be 40 accomplished, in accordance with recommendation 41 from environmental office. 42 (1 fill-in) 43

44 8-01.3(1)C.GR8 Water Management 45

46 8-01.3(1)C4.GR8 Management of Off-Site Water 47 48 8-01.3(1)C4.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(1)C4 is supplemented with the 49


52 8-01.3(1)C4.OPT1.FR8 (Off-site stormwater routed through or around 53


Project site) 1 (August 6, 2012) 2 Use when there are known locations where 3 stormwater enters the project site and it is 4 desired to prevent this stormwater from flowing 5 uncontrolled through the project site. 6 (1 fill-in) 7

8 8-01.3(2).GR8 Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching 9

10 8-01.3(2)B.GR8 Seeding and Fertilizing 11

12 8-01.3(2)B.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(2)B is supplemented with the 13


16 8-01.3(2)B.OPT1.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and application 17

rate of grass seed) 18 (August 4, 2014) 19 Use on projects where a common, non-native or 20 non-source-identified seed can be used. This 21 mix will generally be used within urban areas on 22 small areas of disturbance. The fill-ins for the 23 seed should be provided by the Region 24 Landscape Architect or Headquarters Roadside 25 and Site Development for regions without a 26 Landscape Architect. 27 (2 fill-ins) (Fill-ins with dollar signs only are to be 28 used as required) 29 30

8-01.3(2)B.OPT2.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and 31 application rate of grass seed) 32 (August 4, 2014) 33 Use in projects where the Region Landscape 34 Architect recommends source identified (local 35 genetics) native seed. The fill-ins should be 36 provided by the Region Landscape Architect or 37 Headquarters Roadside and Site Development 38 for regions without a Landscape Architect. 39 (3 fill-ins) (Fill-ins with dollar signs only are to be 40 used as required.) 41 42

8-01.3(2)B.OPT3.GR8 (Seeding by hand) 43 (January 3, 2006) 44 Must also use 8-01.3(2)B.OPT6.GR8. 45 Use in projects with seeding and fertilizing of less 46 than 1 acre, the use of mechanical equipment 47 would not be cost effective, or on remote projects 48 with many small areas. 49 50

8-01.3(2)B.OPT4.FR8 (One application of fertilizer) 51 (January 3, 2006) 52 Use in projects requiring only one application of 53 fertilizer. 54


(4 fill-ins) (The fill-ins for the fertilizer itself 1 should be by consulting the State Horticulturist, 2 the Region Landscape Architect, or 3 Headquarters Roadside and Site Development. 4 Fill-in $$4$$ should be 2/3 the amount of 5 nitrogen in fill-in $$1$$.) 6 7

8-01.3(2)B.OPT5.FR8 (More than one application of fertilizer) 8 (January 3, 2006) 9 Use in projects when the Region Landscape 10 Arch. recommends more than one fertilizer 11 application. 12 (7 fill-ins) (The fill-ins for the fertilizer itself should 13 be by consulting the Region Landscape 14 Architect, or Headquarters Roadside and Site 15 Development. Fill-in $$7$$ should be 2/3 the 16 amount of nitrogen in fill-in $$4$$.) 17 18

8-01.3(2)B.OPT6.GR8 (Fertilizing by hand) 19 (January 3, 2006) 20 Must include with 8-01.3(2)B.OPT3.GR8. 21 Use in projects with seeding and fertilizing of less 22 than 1 acre, the use of mechanical equipment 23 would not be cost effective, or on remote projects 24 with many small areas. 25 26

8-01.3(2)B.OPT7.FR8 (Fertilizer Application in Eastern Washington) 27 (January 3, 2006) 28 Use this GSP for projects in eastern Washington 29 where soils tests show excess potassium and 30 phosphorous and high pH. 31 32

8-01.3(2)B.OPT8.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and application 33 rate of grass seed) 34 (August 4, 2014) 35 Use in projects where the Region Landscape 36 Architect recommends native seed that is not 37 source identified. The fill-ins should be provided 38 by the Region Landscape Architect or 39 Headquarters Roadside and Site Development 40 for regions without a Landscape Architect. 41 (3 fill-ins) 42

43 8-01.3(2)C.GR8 Liming 44 45

8-01.3(2)C.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(2)C is supplemented with the 46 following) 47 Must use once preceding any of the following: 48

49 8-01.3(2)C.OPT1.FR8 (Rate of application of lime) 50

(January 3, 2006) 51 Use in projects requiring the application of lime. 52 (1 fill-in) 53

54


8-01.3(2)D.GR8 Mulching 1 2

8-01.3(2)D.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(2)D is supplemented with the 3 following) 4 Must use once preceding any of the following: 5

6 8-01.3(2)D.OPT1.FR8 (Type and rate of application of mulch) 7

(January 5, 2015) 8 Use in projects requiring the application of mulch 9 when the application rate per acre or the 10 allowable pounds in any single lift are revised 11 from the Standard Specifications. 12 (3 fill-ins) 13


16 8-01.4(4).GR8 Items not included with Lump Sum Erosion Control and 17

Water Pollution Prevention 18 19

8-01.4(4).INST1.GR8 (8-01.4(4) is supplemented with the following) 20 Must use once preceding any of the following: 21

22 8-01.4(4).OPT1.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 23

(April 1, 2019) 24 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which 25 have a lack of organic matter and little to no 26 bioactivity) using Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs). 27 Should only be used if the soil is determined to be 28 deficient from the results of a soil organic matter test or 29 the soil analysis and the application of compost or 30 topsoil is not possible due to steepness or access. Use 31 requires the approval of the Region Landscape 32 Architect or the HQ Region Liaison Landscape 33 Architect. 34 Must also use 8-01.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.2.OPT1.GR8, 35 8-01.3.OPT1.GR8, and 8-01.5(4).OPT1.FR8. 36


39 8-01.5(4).GR8 Items not included with Lump Sum Erosion Control and 40

Water Pollution Prevention 41 42

8-01.5(4).INST1.GR8 (8-01.5(4) is supplemented with the following) 43 Must use once preceding any of the following: 44

45 8-01.5(4).OPT1.FR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 46

(April 1, 2019) 47 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which 48 have a lack of organic matter and little to no 49 bioactivity) using Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs). 50 Should only be used if the soil is determined to be 51 deficient from the results of a soil organic matter test or 52 the soil analysis and the application of compost or 53 topsoil is not possible due to steepness or access. Use 54


requires the approval of the Region Landscape 1 Architect or the HQ Region Liaison Landscape 2 Architect. 3 (1 fill-in) (Fill-in #1 indicates which seed item will be 4 used in conjunction with the BSA. Consult with the 5 Region Landscape Architect to determine which 6 permanent seeding item to use.) 7 Must also use 8-01.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.2.OPT1.GR8, 8 8-01.3.OPT1.GR8, and 8-01.4(4).OPT1.GR8. 9

10 8-02.GR8 Roadside Restoration 11




8-02.1.OPT1.GR8 (Removal of Buried Man-Made Debris) 18 (August 4, 2014) 19 Use on projects that include soil amendment, and/or 20 irrigation systems, and where man-made construction 21 debris is known or suspected to exist. Requires the 22 approval of the Region Construction Manager. Must 23 include 8-02.3(5).OPT4.GR8 and 8-02.5.OPT2.GR8. 24

25 8-02.2.GR8 Materials 26 27

8-02.2.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-02.2 is supplemented with the following) 28 Must use once preceding the following: 29

30 8-02.2.OPT1.GR8 (Conservation Grade Plant Material) 31

(January 3, 2011) 32 Use in projects that include “conservation grade” plant 33 material in the plant list. Use requires approval of the 34 Region Landscape Architect or HQ Region Liaison 35 Landscape Architect. 36

37 8-02.2(9-14).GR8 (Erosion Control and Roadside Planting) 38

39 8-02.2(9-14).INST1.GR8 (Section 9-14 is supplemented with the following) 40


8-02.2(9-14).OPT1.FR8 (Weed Barrier Mats) 43 (January 3, 2011) 44 Use in projects requiring weed barrier mats. 45 (1 fill-in) Fill-in is the staple length. 46 Contact the Region Landscape Architect or HQ Region 47 Liaison Landscape Architect for fill-in information. 48

49 8-02.2(9-14.1).GR8 (Topsoil) 50

51 8-02.2(9-14.1(1)).GR8 (Topsoil Type A) 52

(Section 9-14.1(1) is supplemented with the 53 following) 54



8-02.2(9-14.1(1)).OPT1.FR8 (August 7, 2017) 3 For use on projects where Topsoil Type A 4 is needed for stormwater BMPs and for 5 plant growth and establishment. Contact 6 the Landscape Architect for fill-ins and 7 depth of application. 8 (4 fill-ins) 9

10 8-02.2(9-14.4).GR8 (Mulch and Amendments) 11

12 8-02.2(9-14.4(8)).GR8 (Compost) 13

(Section 9-14.4(8) is supplemented with the 14 following) 15 Must use once preceding any of the following: 16

17 8-02.2(9-14.4(8)).OPT1.GR8 (January 3, 2010) 18

Use when the contract has less than100 19 yards of compost, or less than 30 working 20 days and 100 yards of compost or greater. 21


24 8-02.3(4).GR8 Topsoil 25

26 8-02.3(4)A.GR8 Topsoil Type A 27



32 8-02.3(4)A.OPT1.FR8 (Topsoil Type A) 33

(August 3, 2015) 34 Must include with 8-02.2(9-14.1(1)).OPT1.FR8. 35

36 8-02.3(5).GR8 Planting Area Preparation 37



8-02.3(5).OPT1.FR8 (Application of Compost) 42 (August 5, 2013) 43 Include when no incorporation of compost is required. 44 (1 fill-in) 45

46 8-02.3(5).OPT2.FR8 (Application of Compost) 47

(August 5, 2013) 48 Include when compost is to be incorporated into the 49 soil and irrigation lines are included in the Contract. 50 (2 fill-ins) 51

52 8-02.3(5).OPT3.FR8 (Application of Compost) 53

(August 5, 2013) 54


Include when compost is to be incorporated onto the 1 soil and there are no irrigation lines included in the 2 Contract. 3 (2 fill-ins). 4 5

8-02.3(5).OPT4.GR8 (Removal of Buried Man-Made Debris) 6 (August 4, 2014) 7 Must include with 8-02.1.OPT1.GR8 and 8-8 02.5.OPT2.GR8. 9 10

8-02.3(8).GR8 Planting 11 12


15 8-02.3(8).OPT1.FR8 (February 25, 2013) 16

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army Corps 17 of Engineers Nationwide Permit. Use the 18 Environmental Commitment Meeting to determine 19 applicability of this provision for the project. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22 8-02.3(11).GR8 Bark or Wood Chip Mulch 23



8-02.3(11).OPT1.FR8 (Placement of Bark or Wood Chip Mulch) 28 (April 2, 2012) 29 Use in projects requiring bark and wood chip mulch. 30 Use requires approval of the Region Landscape 31 Architect or HQ Region Liaison Landscape Architect. 32 (1 fill-in) 33

34 8-02.3(13).GR8 Plant Establishment 35



8-02.3(13).OPT1.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 40 Use in projects with multiple year plant establishment. 41 Must include with 8-02.5.OPT1.GR8. 42




8-02.4.OPT1.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 49 Use in projects where Topsoil, Compost, Soil 50 Amendments, or Bark or Wood Chip Mulch is applied 51 around trees or shrub beds, or in areas of less than one 52 acre. Must include with 8-02.5.OPT3.GR8. 53

54





8-02.5.OPT1.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 7 Must include with 8-02.3(13).OPT1.GR8. 8

9 8-02.5.OPT2.GR8 (Removal of Buried Man-Made Debris) 10

(August 4, 2014) 11 Must include with 8-02.1.OPT1.GR8 and 8-12 02.3(5).OPT4.GR8. 13 14

8-02.5.OPT3.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 15 Use in projects where Topsoil, Compost, Soil 16 Amendments, or Bark or Wood Chip Mulch is applied 17 around trees or shrub beds, or in areas of less than one 18 acre. Must include with 8-02.4.OPT1.GR8. 19 20

8-10.GR8 Guide Posts 21 22



8-10.1.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 28 (April 1, 2002) 29 Must also use 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.3.OPT1.GR8 or 8-30 10.3.OPT2.GR8, 8-10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-31 10.5.OPT1.GR8. 32




8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 39 (August 6, 2018) 40 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.3.OPT1.GR8 or 8-41 10.3.OPT2.GR8, 8-10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-42 10.5.OPT1.GR8. 43



Must use once preceding any of the following: 48 49 8-10.3.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 50

(April 1, 2002) 51 Delineators placed 6" down from top. 52 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-53 10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-10.5.OPT1.GR8. 54


1 8-10.3.OPT2.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 2

(April 1, 2002) 3 Delineators placed on top of barrier. 4 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-5 10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-10.5.OPT1.GR8. 6




8-10.4.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 13 (April 1, 2002) 14 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-15 10.3.OPT1.GR8, or 8-10.3.OPT2.GR8, and 8-16 10.5.OPT1.GR8. 17

18 8-10.5.GR8 Payment 19



8-10.5.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 24 (April 1, 2002) 25 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-26 10.3.OPT1.GR8, or 8-10.3.OPT2.GR8, and 8-27 10.4.OPT1.GR8. 28

29 8-11.GR8 Guardrail 30



Must use once preceding any of the following: 35 36 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 3 and 4 Cable) 37

(April 6, 2009) 38 Must also use 8-11.2.OPT1.GR8 or 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8 (or 39 both), 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8, 8-40 11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8. 41

42 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 43

(January 7, 2019) 44 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for 45 Beam Guardrail. This replaces the use of Weathering Steel 46 Beam Guardrail. 47 Must also use 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT4.GR8, 8-48 11.4.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 49





8-11.2.OPT1.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 3 Cable) 3 (April 6, 2009) 4 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-5 11.4.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-6 11.5.OPT8.GR8. 7

8 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 4 Cable) 9

(August 3, 2009) 10 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-11 11.4.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-12 11.5.OPT8.GR8. 13

14 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 15

(January 2, 2018) 16 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for 17 Beam Guardrail. This replaces the use of Weathering Steel 18 Beam Guardrail. 19 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT4.GR8, 8-20 11.4.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 21

22 8-11.2(9-16.3).GR8 (Beam Guardrail) 23

24 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).GR8 (Posts and Blocks) 25

26 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).INST1.GR8 (Section 9-16.3(2) is supplemented with 27

the following) 28 Must use once preceding any of the following: 29 30

8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8 (Steel shear plates and backing plates) 31 (April 6, 2015) 32 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam guardrail 33 Type Thrie Beam using timber blockouts wedged 34 between openings in existing concrete baluster rails. 35 Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 36 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-37 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8, and 8-38 11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8. 39

40 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT2.GB8 (Grout) 41

(April 6, 2015) 42 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam guardrail 43 Type Thrie Beam using a steel post connection to the 44 existing concrete curb or railbase. Include with 6-45 02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-11.2(9-46 16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8. 47

48 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT3.GB8 (Steel Angles for Timber Blockout 49

Connection to Truss) 50 (April 6, 2015) 51 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam guardrail 52 Type Thrie Beam requiring timber blockout connection 53


to existing steel truss members. Include with 8-11.2(9-1 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8 and other appropriate GSPs 2 supplementing Sections 8-11.2 and 8-11.3(1). 3

4 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 5

(April 6, 2015) 6 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak post thrie 7 beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail Type WP Thrie 8 Beam). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-9 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-10 11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8, and 8-11 11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 12

13 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).GB8 (Hardware) 14


17 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8 (Resin bonded anchors) 18

(April 6, 2015) 19 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects requiring resin 20 bonded anchors for connection to concrete baluster 21 railing end posts, and concrete curbs and railbases. 22 Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 23 and either 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-24 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8, and 8-25 11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8, or 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT2.GB8 26 and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8. 27

28 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8 (Lag screws) 29

(April 6, 2015) 30 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects requiring 31 connections with lag screws to timber members and 32 blockouts. 33




8-11.3.OPT1.GR8 (Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Posts) 40 (August 6, 2018) 41 Must also use 8-11.4.OPT1.GR8 and 8-11.5.OPT6.GR8. 42 Use in projects requiring the construction of steel guardrail 43 posts on top of existing concrete box culverts. 44

45 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 3 and 4 Cable) 46

(April 6, 2009) 47 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT1.GR8 or 8-48 11.2.OPT2.GR8 (or both), 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8, 8-49 11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8. 50 Fill-in is the location(s) of Contracting Agency sites to 51 deliver complete sets of Additional High-Tension Cable 52 Barrier Components. 53


(1 fill-in) 1 2

8-11.3.OPT3.GR8 (Beam Guardrail Type 31 NB) 3 (August 6, 2007) 4 Use in projects that contain Type 31 NB Guardrail. 5 6

8-11.3.OPT4.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 7 (January 7, 2019) 8 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for 9 Beam Guardrail. This replaces the use of Weathering 10 Steel Beam Guardrail. 11 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-12 11.4.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 13

14 8-11.3(1).GR8 Beam Guardrail 15 16

8-11.3(1).INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1) is supplemented with the following) 17 Must use once preceding any of the following: 18 19

8-11.3(1).OPT1.GR8 Post Selection 20 (April 5, 2010) 21 Use in all projects that specifically require wood 22 guardrail posts or specifically require steel guardrail 23 posts. 24 25

8-11.3(1)A.GR8 Erection of Posts 26 27

8-11.3(1)A.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)A is supplemented with 28 the following) 29 Must use once preceding any of the following: 30

31 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8 (Timber Blockouts for Beam Guardrail 32

Type Thrie Beam) 33 (April 6, 2015) 34 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam 35 guardrail Type Thrie Beam using timber 36 blockouts wedged between openings in existing 37 concrete baluster rails. Include with 6-38 02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-39 11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-40 16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-41 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8. 42

43 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8 (Steel Posts for Beam Guardrail Type 44

Thrie Beam) 45 (January 4, 2016) 46 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam 47 guardrail Type Thrie Beam using a steel post 48 connection to the existing concrete curb or 49 railbase. Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-50 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-11.2(9-51 16.3(2)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.2(9-52 16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8. 53


1 8-11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 2

(January 4, 2016) 3 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak 4 post thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail 5 Type WP Thrie Beam). Include with 1-6 07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-7 11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-8 11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8, 9 and 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 10

11 8-11.3(1)B.GR8 Erection of Rail 12 13

8-11.3(1)B.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)B is supplemented with the 14 following) 15 Must use once preceding any of the following: 16

17 8-11.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8 (August 6, 2007) 18

Use in projects requiring snow load washers. 19 Consult Region Operations for determination of 20 need. 21

22 8-11.3(1)B.OPT6.GB8 (Field Measuring to Existing 23

Type 3 Anchors) 24 (April 6, 2015) 25 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects when 26 existing Type 3 anchors are being salvaged for 27 reuse as part of the retrofitted guardrail system. 28

29 8-11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8 (Attaching Beam Guardrail Type 30

Thrie Beam to Timber Blockouts) 31 (April 6, 2015) 32 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam 33 guardrail Type Thrie Beam using timber 34 blockouts wedged between openings in existing 35 concrete baluster rails. Include with 6-36 02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-37 11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-38 16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-39 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8. 40

41 8-11.3(1)B.OPT8.GB8 (Thrie Beam Expansion Joint Element) 42

(April 6, 2015) 43 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects where the 44 beam guardrail elements are continuous across 45 interior bridge expansion joints. 46

47 8-11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 48

(April 6, 2015) 49 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak 50 post thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail 51 Type WP Thrie Beam). Include with 1-52 07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-53


11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-1 11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8, 2 and 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 3 4

8-11.3(1)D.GR8 Removing Guardrail 5 6

8-11.3(1)D.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)D is supplemented with the following) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 10

(April 6, 2015) 11 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak post 12 thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail Type WP 13 Thrie Beam). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-14 11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-11.2(9-15 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-16 11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8. 17

18 19

8-11.3(1)H.GR8 Guardrail Construction Exposed to Traffic 20 21

8-11.3(1)H.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)H is supplemented with the following) 22 Must use once preceding any of the following: 23

24 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 25

(April 6, 2015) 26 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak post 27 thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail Type WP 28 Thrie Beam). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-29 11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-11.2(9-30 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-31 11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 32 33


Must use once preceding any of the following: 37 38 8-11.4.OPT1.GR8 (Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Posts) 39

(March 13, 1995) 40 Must include with 8-11.3.OPT1.GR8 41 and 8-11.5.OPT6.GR8. 42 Use in projects requiring the construction of steel guardrail 43 posts on top of concrete box culverts. 44

45 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 3 and 4 Cable) 46

(August 6, 2012) 47 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT1.GR8 or 8-48 11.2.OPT2.GR8 (or both), 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-49 11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8. 50 51 52

8-11.4.OPT4.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 53


(April 2, 2018) 1 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for 2 Beam Guardrail. 3 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-4 11.3.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 5 6



8-11.5.OPT1.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 12 (April 2, 2018) 13 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for 14 Beam Guardrail. 15 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-16 11.3.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.4.OPT4.GR8. 17

18 8-11.5.OPT6.GR8 (Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Posts) 19

(August 6, 2018) 20 Must include with 8-11.3.OPT1.GR8 21 and 8-11.4.OPT1.GR8. 22 Use in projects requiring the construction of steel guardrail 23 posts on top of concrete box culverts. 24

25 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier) 26

(April 6, 2009) 27 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-28 11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8 and 8-29 11.5.OPT8.GR8. 30

31 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8 (Additional High-Tension Cable Barrier Components) 32

(April 6, 2009) 33 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-34 11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8 and 8-35 11.5.OPT7.GR8. No Federal funding participation. Must 36 be in state funds group. 37

38 8-12.GR8 Chain Link Fence and Wire Fence 39




8-12.2.OPT1.FR8 (Coated chain link fence) 46 (January 2, 2018) 47 Use in projects requiring the construction of coated chain 48 link fence. Must include 8-12.5.OPT1.GR8. 49 (1 fill-in) 50 51

8-12.2.OPT6.GB8 (Cable Fence) 52 (April 4, 2017) 53


Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-1 12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-2 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 when 3 anchoring the cable fence posts to existing concrete 4 structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when 5 painting of the galvanized fence posts is required. 6 7



12 8-12.3.OPT1.GB8 (Cable Fence) 13

Use once preceding the following: 14 15 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 (Field Measuring For Cable Fence) 16

(April 6, 2015) 17 Use in projects with cable fence when anchoring the 18 cable fence posts to existing concrete structures. 19 Include with 8-12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, 20 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include 21 with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when painting of the 22 galvanized fence posts is required. 23 24

8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8 (Cable Fence) 25 (April 6, 2015) 26 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-27 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-28 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 29 when anchoring the cable fence posts to existing 30 concrete structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 31 when painting of the galvanized fence posts is 32 required. 33 34

8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 (Cable Fence) 35 (January 2, 2018) 36 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-37 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-38 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 39 when anchoring the cable fence posts to existing 40 concrete structures. 41 42



8-12.4.OPT1.GB8 (Cable Fence) 48 (April 6, 2015) 49 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-50 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, and 8-51 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 when 52 anchoring the cable fence posts to existing concrete 53


structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when 1 painting of the galvanized fence posts is required. 2




8-12.5.OPT1.GR8 (Coated chain link fence) 9 (April 1, 2002) 10 Use in projects requiring the construction of coated chain 11 link fence. 12

13 8-12.5.OPT6.GB8 (Cable Fence) 14

(April 6, 2015) 15 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-16 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, and 8-17 12.4.OPT1.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 when 18 anchoring the cable fence posts to existing concrete 19 structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when 20 painting of the galvanized fence posts is required. 21

22 8-13.GR8 Monument Cases 23


26 8-13.1.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-13.1 is deleted and replaced by the following) 27


8-13.1.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 30 (March 13, 1995) 31 Must also use 8-13.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-13.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-32 13.4.OPT1.GR8 and 8-13.5.OPT1.GR8. 33 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 34 installed by the Contractor. 35




8-13.2.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 42 (March 13, 1995) 43 Must include with 8-13.1.OPT1.GR8. 44 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 45 installed by the Contractor. 46


49 8-13.3.INST1.GR8 (The last paragraph of Section 8-13.3 is revised to read) 50


8-13.3.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 53


(March 13, 1995) 1 Must include with 8-13.1.OPT1.GR8. 2 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 3 installed by the Contractor. 4


7 8-13.4.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-13.4 is deleted and replaced by the following) 8


8-13.4.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 11 (March 13, 1995) 12 Must include with 8-13.1.OPT1.GR8. 13 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 14 installed by the Contractor. 15

16 8-13.5.GR8 Payment 17



8-13.5.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 22 (April 28, 1997) 23 Must include with 8-13.1.OPT1.GR8. 24 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 25 installed by the Contractor. 26

27 8-14.GR8 Cement Concrete Sidewalks 28 29


8-14.1.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-14.1 is revised to read) 32 Must use once preceding any of the following: 33

34 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8 (ADA Feature work) 35

(April 3, 2017) 36 Use in all projects that require any ADA Feature work. 37 Must use with 1-05.4.OPT4.GR1, 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8, and 38 8-14.3.OPT3.GR8. 39




8-14.3.OPT1.GR8 (Pre-construction meeting for cement concrete sidewalks, 46 curb ramps or other pedestrian access routes to discuss 47 ADA issues before Work begins) 48 (April 3, 2017) 49 Use in projects where pedestrian access route Work 50 (cement concrete sidewalks, curb ramps or other 51 pedestrian access) is proposed and it is felt that a pre-52 construction meeting is needed by Region Construction 53 Office to discuss ADA compliance. 54


1 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8 (Timing Restrictions) 2

(January 7, 2019) 3 Use in all projects that require any ADA Feature work 4 where sidewalk, curb ramp, or bus stop closures are 5 required to perform the work. 6 Must use with 1-05.4.OPT4.GR8, 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8, and 7 8-14.3.OPT3.GR8. 8

9 8-14.3.OPT3.GR8 (Layout and Conformance to Grades) 10

(January 7, 2019) 11 Use in all projects that require any ADA Feature work. 12 Must use with 1-05.4.OPT4.GR8, 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8, and 13 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8. 14

15 8-15.GR8 Riprap 16




8-15.4.OPT3.GR8 (Special excavation) 23 (March 13, 1995) 24 Must also use 8-15.5.OPT8.GR8. 25 Use in projects requiring excavation outside the limits of 26 structure excavation for riprap at bridge piers located 27 within streams. 28 29

8-15.4.OPT5.GR8 (Excavation for riprap is included in cost 30 of riprap) 31 (February 5, 2001) 32 Must also use 8-15.5.OPT1.GR8. 33 Use in projects with small quantities of riprap or upon 34 recommendation of the Construction and Materials 35 Division. 36 37

8-15.5.GR8 Payment 38 39

8-15.5.INST1.GR8 (The first sentence of the second paragraph of Section 40 8-15.5 is revised to read) 41 Must use once preceding any of the following: 42

43 8-15.5.OPT1.GR8 (Excavation for riprap is included in cost 44

of riprap) 45 (March 13, 1995) 46 Must include with 8-15.4.OPT5.GR8. 47 Use in projects with small quantities of riprap or upon 48 recommendation of the Construction and Materials 49 Division. 50




8-15.5.OPT8.GR8 (Special excavation) 1 (September 30, 1996) 2 Must include with 8-15.4.OPT3.GR8. 3 Use in projects requiring excavation outside the limits of 4 structure excavation for riprap at bridge piers located 5 within streams. 6 7

8-16.GR8 Concrete Slope Protection 8 9


8-16.3(2).GR8 Placing Semi-Open Concrete Masonry Units 12 13


16 8-16.3(2).OPT1.GR8 (Requirements for semi-open precast masonry 17

units) 18 (December 19, 2005) 19 Must include with 8-16.5.OPT1.GR8. 20 Use in projects requiring semi-open concrete masonry 21 slope protection. 22

23 8-16.5.GR8 Payment 24



8-16.5.OPT1.GR8 (Semi-open Conc. Masonry Slope Protection) 29 (September 30, 1996) 30 Must include with 8-16.3(2).OPT1.GR8. 31 Use in projects requiring semi-open concrete masonry 32 slope protection. 33

34 8-20.GR8 Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation 35

Systems, and Electrical 36 37

8-20.2.GR8 Materials 38 39 8-20.2.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-20.2 is supplemented with the following) 40


8-20.2.OPT1.GB8 (Traffic Signal Shaft Foundation Shaft Casing and 43 Slurry) 44 (April 6, 2015) 45 Use in traffic signal projects with shaft foundations in weak 46 soils, with the concurrence of the Materials Laboratory 47 Geotechnical Branch. Include with 8-20.3(4).OPT1.FB8 48 and 8-20.5.OPT1.GB8. 49

50 8-20.2(9-29.1).GR8 (Conduit, Innerduct, and Outerduct) 51 52

8-20.2(9-29.1(11)).GR8 (Foam Conduit Sealant) 53


(Section 9-29.1(11) is supplemented with the 1 following) 2 Must use once preceding any of the following: 3 4

8-20.2(9-29.1(11)).OPT1.GR8 (January 7, 2019) 5 Use in projects where new conduit is installed, 6 wiring is added to existing conduit, or wiring is 7 removed from existing conduit. 8

9 8-20.2(9-29.2).GR8 (Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull Boxes) 10 11

8-20.2(9-29.2(1)A).GR8 (Standard Duty Junction Boxes) 12 (Section 9-29.2(1)A is supplemented with the 13 following) 14 Must use once preceding any of the following: 15 16

8-20.2(9-29.2(1)A).OPT1.GR8 (August 1, 2016) 17 Use in projects with Concrete Junction Boxes 18 requiring slip-resistant lids. 19

20 8-20.2(9-29.2(2)A).GR8 (Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes) 21

(Section 9-29.2(2)A is supplemented with the 22 following) 23 Must use once preceding any of the following: 24 25

8-20.2(9-29.2(2)A).OPT1.GR8 (August 1, 2016) 26 Use in projects with Standard Duty Cable Vaults 27 and Pull Boxes. 28

29 8-20.2(9-29.2(3)).GR8 (Structure Mounted Junction Box) 30


33 8-20.2(9-29.2(3)).OPT1.GR8 (Junction Box in Sidewalk Mounted on Structure) 34

(August 1, 2016) 35 Use in projects with Junction Box in sidewalk mounted on 36 structure requiring slip-resistant lids. 37

38 8-20.2(9-29.6).GR8 (Light and Signal Standards) 39


42 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT1.GR8 Light Standards With Type 1 Luminaire Arms 43

(January 7, 2019) 44 Use in projects requiring Type 1 luminaire arms and 45 the Engineer is not required to verify the H1 distances 46 shown in the Plans. 47


(January 7, 2019) 50 Use in projects requiring Type 1 luminaire arms and 51 H1 distances are not shown in the Plans or the 52 Engineer is required to verify the H1 distances shown 53 in the Plans. 54



(January 7, 2019) 3 Use in projects requiring Type 2 luminaire arms and 4 the Engineer is not required to verify the H1 distances 5 shown in the Plans. 6


(January 7, 2019) 9 Use in projects requiring Type 2 luminaire arms and 10 H1 distances are not shown in the Plans or the 11 Engineer is required to verify the H1 distances shown 12 in the Plans. 13

14 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT5.GR8 Traffic Signal Standards 15

(January 7April 1, 2019) 16 Use in projects requiring traffic signal standards, or 17 combination traffic signal/light standards with Type 1 18 luminaire arms, or both. 19

20 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT6.GR8 Traffic Signal Standards 21

(January 7April 1, 2019) 22 Use in projects requiring traffic signal standards, or 23 combination traffic signal/light standards with Type 2 24 luminaire arms, or both. 25

26 8-20.2(9-29.13).GR8 (Control Cabinet Assemblies) 27


30 8-20.2(9-29.13).OPT1.GR8 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 31

(January 2, 2018) 32 With Region Traffic Engineer approval, use in projects 33 where Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) cabinets 34 are required. Include with 8-20.3(14).OPT1.GR8. 35 36

8-20.2(9-29.15).GR8 (Flashing Beacon Control) 37 (Section 9-29.15 is supplemented with the following) 38 Must use once preceding any of the following: 39

40 8-20.2(9-29.15).OPT1.GR8 Rapid Flashing Beacons (RFB) 41

(January 7, 2019) 42 Use in projects where Rectangular Rapid Flashing 43 Beacons (RRFBs) are required. 44 45

8-20.2(9-29.19).GR8 (Pedestrian Push Buttons) 46 (Section 9-29.19 is supplemented with the following) 47 Must use once preceding any of the following: 48

49 8-20.2(9-29.19).OPT1.FR8 Accessible Pedestrian Signal (APS) Pushbuttons 50

(August 6, 2018) 51 Use in projects requiring accessible pedestrian signal 52 (APS) pushbuttons. 53

54


For the first fill-in, enter “do” or “do not” in regards to 1 including a Polara Configurator in the Contract if 2 Polara equipment is selected. 3 4 For the second fill-in, enter one of the following: 5 6 “See Contract Plans for table.” 7 8

or 9 10 Copy and paste in the following table (insert additional 11 lines as necessary): 12 13

Street (A) Street (B) Arrow Direction

QTY

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R 14 See http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Design/Traffic/APS.htm 15 for instructions for filling out the tables. 16 (2 fill-ins) 17 18

8-20.2(1).GR8 Equipment List and Drawings 19 20


23 8-20.2(1).OPT1.GR8 (Light standards when H1 dimension is 24

shown on the Plans) 25 (March 13, 1995) 26 Use in projects with illumination systems and the 27 lighting standard H1 dimension is shown in the Plans 28 and verification by the Engineer is not required prior to 29 fabrication. 30 31

8-20.2(1).OPT2.GR8 (Light standards when H1 dimension is not 32 Shown on the Plans or must be verified prior to 33 fabrication) 34 (March 13, 1995) 35 Use in projects with illumination systems and the 36 lighting standard H1 dimension is not shown in the 37 Plans or the dimension shown in the Plans must be 38 verified by the Engineer prior to fabrication. 39 40

8-20.2(1).OPT3.GR8 (Traffic signal standards, strain pole standards 41 or combination traffic signal/lighting standards) 42 (March 13, 1995) 43


Use in projects with traffic signal systems when 1 standards are to be installed. 2


8-20.3(4).GR8 Foundations 6 7


10 8-20.3(4).OPT1.FB8 (Shafts for Signal Standard Foundations) 11

(August 7, 2017) 12 Use in traffic signal projects with shaft foundations in 13 weak soils, with the concurrence of the Materials 14 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The fill-in specifies 15 the location(s) of the shaft(s) requiring construction 16 under these construction requirements. Include with 17 8-20.2.OPT1.GB8 and 8-20.5.OPT1.GB8. 18 (One fill-in). 19

20 8-20.3(8).GR8 Wiring 21



8-20.3(8).OPT1.GR8 Field Wiring Chart 26 (March 13, 1995) 27 Use in projects with traffic signal systems. 28

29 8-20.3(14).GR8 Signal Systems 30 31


34 8-20.3(14).OPT1.GR8 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 35

(January 2, 2018) 36 With Region Traffic Engineer approval use in projects 37 where Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) cabinets 38 are required. Include with 8-20.2(9-29.13).OPT1.GR8 39

40 8-20.3(14)A.GR8 Signal Controllers 41

42 8-20.3(14)A.INST1.GR8 (Supplemental Instructions) 43


8-20.3(14)A.OPT1.GR8 Testing 46 (August 2, 2010) 47 Use in projects with Contractor furnished signal 48 controllers. 49 50




8-20.5.OPT1.GB8 (Removing Traffic Signal Shaft Obstructions) 3 (April 6, 2015) 4 Use in traffic signal projects with shaft foundations in weak 5 soils, with the concurrence of the Materials Laboratory 6 Geotechnical Branch. Include with 8-20.2.OPT1.GB8 and 7 8-20.3(4).OPT1.FB8. 8

9 8-21.GR8 Permanent Signing 10

11 8-21.2.GR8 Materials 12 13

8-21.2(9-06.16).GR8 (Roadside Sign Structures) 14 (Section 9-06.16 is supplemented with the following) 15 Must use once preceding the following: 16

17 8-21.2(9-06.16).OPT1.GR8 (January 3, 2011) 18

Use in projects with perforated steel square sign posts. 19 20

8-21.2(9-28.11).GR8 (Hardware) 21 (Section 9-28.11 is supplemented with the following) 22 Must use once preceding any of the following: 23

24 8-21.2(9-28.11).OPT1.GB8 (Overhead Sign Structure Locknuts) 25

(August 3, 2015) 26 Use in all projects with overhead sign structures (sign 27 bridge, cantilever sign structure, bridge mounted sign 28 bracket). 29

30 8-21.2(9-28.14).GR8 (Sign Support Structures) 31


34 8-21.2(9-28.14).OPT1.GB8 (Shafts for Sign Structure Foundations) 35

(August 7, 2017) 36 Use in sign structure projects with shaft foundations 37 where the shaft diameter is 48 inches or greater, or 38 where the shaft depth is 15 feet or greater, or where 39 the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Branch 40 identifies the foundation soils as sufficiently weak to 41 require use of this specification. Include with 8-42 21.3(9)F.OPT2.FB8 and 8-21.5.OPT1.GB8. 43 44

8-21.2(9-28.14).OPT6.GR8 (Roadside Signing Material and Fabrication) 45 (January 3, 2011) 46 Use in all projects that have steel sign support 47 structures 48 49

8-21.2(9-28.14(2)).GR8 (Steel Structures and Posts) 50 (Section 9-28.14(2) is supplemented with the 51 following) 52 Must use once preceding any of the following: 53


1 8-21.2(9-28.14(2)).OPT1.GB8 (Monotube Sign Structures) 2

(January 2, 2018) 3 Use in projects with monotube sign bridges 4 and/or monotube cantilever sign structures. 5 Include with either 8-21.3(9)A.OPT1.GB8 or 8-6 21.3(9)A.OPT2.FB8, and 8-21.4.OPT1.FB8. 7 Include with 8-21.2(9-28.14(2)).OPT2.GB8 8 when sign structures are constructed with round 9 tube or pipe. 10

11 8-21.2(9-28.14(2)).OPT2.GB8 (Monotube Sign Structures of round 12

tube or pipe) 13 (April 6, 2015) 14 Use in projects with monotube sign bridges 15 and/or monotube cantilever sign structures, 16 constructed with round tube or pipe. Include with 17 8-21.2(9-28.14(2)).OPT1.GB8, either 8-18 21.3(9)A.OPT1.GB8 or 8-21.3(9)A.OPT2.FB8, 19 and 8-21.4.OPT1.FB8. 20


23 8-21.3(9).GR8 Sign Structures 24

25 8-21.3(9)A.GR8 Fabrication of Sign Structures 26



31 8-21.3(9)A.OPT1.GB8 (Monotube Sign Structures) 32

(January 2, 2018) 33 Use in projects with monotube sign bridges 34 and/or monotube cantilever sign structures 35 painted with the conventional gray color (Federal 36 Standard 595B No. 35247). Include with 8-37 21.2(9-28.14(2)).OPT1.GB8 and 8-38 21.4.OPT1.FB8. Include with 8-21.2(9-39 28.14(2)).OPT2.GB8 when sign structures are 40 constructed with round tube or pipe. 41

42 8-21.3(9)A.OPT2.FB8 (Monotube Sign Structures) 43

(January 5, 2015) 44 Use in projects with monotube sign bridges 45 and/or monotube cantilever sign structures 46 painted a color other than the conventionally 47 specified gray color. Include with 8-21.2(9-48 28.14(2)).OPT1.GB8 and 8-21.4.OPT1.FB8. 49 Include with 8-21.2(9-28.14(2)).OPT2.GB8 when 50 sign structures are constructed with round tube 51 or pipe. The fill-in specifies the Federal Standard 52


595B color number, or the color name if no 1 number. 2 (1 fill-in) 3

4 8-21.3(9)E.GR8 Bridge Mounted Sign Brackets 5

6 8-21.3(9)E.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-21.3(9)E is supplemented with the 7


10 8-21.3(9)E.OPT1.FB8 (Bridge Mounted Sign Brackets) 11

(April 6, 2015) 12 Use in projects with bridge mounted sign 13 brackets. The first and third fill-ins specify the 14 sign bracket number(s). The second fill-in 15 itemizes the structural carbon steel quantity for 16 each sign bracket. The fourth fill-in specifies the 17 quantity of hole drilling required for the resin 18 bonded anchors for each sign bracket. 19 (4 fill-ins) 20

21 8-21.3(9)F.GR8 Foundations 22

23 8-21.3(9)F.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-21.3(9)F is supplemented with the 24


27 8-21.3(9)F.OPT2.FB8 (Shafts for Sign Structure Foundations) 28

(August 7, 2017) 29 Use in sign structure projects with shaft 30 foundations where the shaft diameter is 48 31 inches or greater, or where the shaft depth is 15 32 feet or greater, or where the Materials Laboratory 33 Geotechnical Branch identifies the foundation 34 soils as sufficiently weak to require use of this 35 specification. The fill-in specifies the location(s) 36 of the shaft(s) requiring construction under these 37 construction requirements. Include with 8-38 21.2(9-28.14).OPT1.GB8 and 8-21.5.OPT1.GB8 39 (1 fill-in) 40




8-21.4.OPT1.FB8 (Monotube Sign Structures) 47 (April 6, 2015) 48 Use in projects with monotube sign bridges and/or 49 monotube cantilever sign structures. The first fill in 50 specifies the type of sign structure work included (sign 51 bridge or cantilever sign structure or both). The second 52 fill-in itemizes the quantities and work involved with each 53


sign structure. Include with 8-21.2(9-1 28.14(2)).OPT1.GB8, either 8-21.3(9)A.OPT1.GB8 or 8-2 21.3(9)A.OPT2.FB8. Include with 8-21.2(9-3 28.14(2)).OPT2.GB8 when sign structures are constructed 4 with round tube or pipe. 5 (2 fill-ins) 6




8-21.5.OPT1.GB8 (Shafts for Sign Structure Foundation) 13 (BSP August 4, 2008) 14 Use in sign structure projects with shaft foundations where 15 the shaft diameter is 48 inches or greater, or where the 16 shaft depth is 15 feet or greater, or where the Materials 17 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch identifies the foundation 18 soils as sufficiently weak to require use of this 19 specification. Include with 8-21.2(9-28.14).OPT1.GB8 20 and 8-21.3(9)F.OPT2.FB8. 21 22

8-24.GR8 Rock and Gravity Block Wall, and Gabion 23 Cribbing 24




8-24.2.OPT1.GR8 (Gravity Block Wall) 31 (January 7, 2002) 32 Use in projects constructing gravity block walls. Include 33 with 8-24.3(2).OPT1.GR8 34


37 8-24.3(2).GR8 Gravity Block Wall 38



8-24.3(2).OPT1.GR8 (Gravity Block Wall) 43 (January 7, 2002) 44 Use in projects constructing gravity block walls. 45 Include with 8-24.2.OPT1.GR8. 46 47

8-25.GR8 Glare Screen 48 49




1 8-25.1.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 2

Use in projects when the work zone analysis determines 3 the need for temporary barrier screening. 4 8-25.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-25.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-25.4.OPT1.GR8, 5 and 8-25.5.OPT1.GR8. 6




8-25.2.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 13 Use in projects when the work zone analysis determines 14 the need for temporary barrier screening. 15 Must use with 8-25.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-25.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-16 25.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-25.5.OPT1.GR8. 17



23 8-25.3.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 24


29 8-25.4.GR8 Measurement 30 31


34 8-25.4.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 35


40 8-25.5.GR8 Payment 41 42


45 8-25.5.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 46


51 8-29.GR8 Wire Mesh Slope Protection 52





8-29.1.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection) 5 (April 5, 2010) 6 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include 7 with 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-8 29.4.OPT1.GR8 and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 9

10 8-29.2.GR8 Materials 11 12


15 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection Materials) 16

(January 2, 2018) 17 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include 18 with 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-19 29.4.OPT1.GR8 and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 20



26 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection Construction Requirements) 27

(January 3, 2011) 28 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include 29 with 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-30 29.4.OPT1.GR8 and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 31

32 8-29.4.GR8 Measurement 33 34


37 8-29.4.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection) 38

(April 5, 2010) 39 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include 40 with 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-41 29.3.OPT1.GR8, and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 42

43 8-29.5.GR8 Payment 44



8-29.5.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection) 49 (January 3, 2011) 50 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include 51 with 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-52 29.3.OPT1.GR8, and 8-29.4.OPT1.GR8. 53


1 8-SA1.GR8 Field Office Building 2

(August 7, 2017) 3 Use in projects when a field office building is required. 4

5 8-SA2.GR8 Bollards 6

(January 2, 2018) 7 Use in projects requiring bollards. 8 Contact Headquarters Design Standard Plans Office for plan details on 9 Type 3 Bollards. 10 11

8-SA3.GR8 (Environmental Compliance) 12 (August 6, 2018) 13 For use on projects where the project has a high risk of soil erosion due 14 to soil type, slope gradiant and work in or has proximity to waters of the 15 State (Hydraulics Runoff Manual (HRM) defines projects susceptible for 16 high risk soil erosion). Also for use on projects where there is 17 extensive monitoring of environmental permit compliance. 18 The Region Construction Engineer and Region Environmental Office 19 should be consulted for use as the provision introduces an 20 Environmental Compliance Lead person that incorporates, expands 21 and replaces the duties of the ESC Lead person. 22 23


8-01.GR8 1

Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control 2 3 8-01.1.GR8 4

General 5 6 8-01.1.INST1.GR8 7 Section 8-01.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 8-01.1.OPT1.GR8 10

(April 1, 2019) 11 This Work consists of supplying and applying a Biotic Soil Amendment (BSA) in 12 accordance with these Specifications and as shown in the Plans or as designated by 13 the Engineer. 14

15 8-01.2.GR8 16

Materials 17 18 8-01.2.INST1.GR8 19 Section 8-01.2 is supplemented with the following: 20 21 8-01.2.OPT1.GR8 22

(April 1, 2019) 23 Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs), also known as biotic soil media and hydraulic growth 24 medium, shall be soil amendments engineered to improve the development of deficient 25 soils and to facilitate sustainable vegetation. BSAs shall consist of a blend of organic 26 material, nutrient sources, soil building and biostimulant components. BSAs shall 27 increase the water and nutrient holding capacity of the soil and promote the growth of 28 beneficial microorganisms. BSAs shall provide for enhanced seed germination and 29 vegetative establishment. 30 31 Biotic Soil Amendment shall be certified to be free of weed seeds and pathogens, free 32 of plastic, composed of non-toxic materials, and be a pre-mixed formulation unaltered 33 by synthetic materials. 34 35 The biotic soil amendment shall have a minimum of 90% organic matter (organic growth 36 medium) and contain other materials designed to improve seed germination, vegetation 37 establishment and overall soil health. In addition to organic growth medium BSA shall 38 include mycorrhizal fungi and a minimum of three of the following ingredients: 39 40

• Biochar 41 • Humus/Humic Acid 42 • Porous Ceramics or Water-holding Organic Polymers 43 • Seaweed Extract 44 • Beneficial Bacteria 45 • Micronutrients 46 47

The Contractor shall provide test results dated within 3 years prior to the date of 48 application from an independent, accredited laboratory that has been recognized by an 49 accrediting organization to test and evaluate products to product safety standards. The 50 independent, accredited lab shall be free from commercial, financial, and other 51


pressures that may influence the results of the testing and evaluation process. Test 1 results shall show that the product meets the following table requirements: 2 3

Table 1: Biotic Soil Amendment Requirements

BSA Properties Test Methods Requirements

Physical

Organic Matter ASTM D586 90% minimum

pH ASTM D1293 5.0 - 8.5

C:N Ratio ASTM E1508 10:1 minimum 50:1 maximum

Water-Holding Capacity1 ASTM D7367 400% minimum

Moisture Content ASTM 2974 10% minimum, 50% maximum

Environmental

Acute Toxicity EPA Method 2021.0 Non-toxic

EPA Metal Limits SW846-6020 04.06 Pass

Performance

Growth Enhancement ASTM D7322 500% minimum 1Water holding capacity of the pre-packaged material without the addition of ancillary amendments.

4 Submittal Requirements 5 At the time of delivery, the Contractor shall submit the specific biotic soil amendment 6 packing list to the Engineer for acceptance. The packing list shall include complete 7 identification including, but not limited to, the following information: 8 9

• Manufacturer name and location, 10 • Manufacturer telephone number and fax number, 11 • Manufacturer’s e-mail address and web address, and 12 • BSA name. 13 • Certification that the specific BSA meets the physical, environmental and 14

performance criteria of this specification and test results. 15 16 Acceptance 17 Acceptance of the materials shall be based on: 18 19

1. Certificate of Compliance demonstrating adherence to the Specifications, 20 2. Visual inspection ensuring the material is free of plastic. 21

22 8-01.2(9-14.4(8)).GR8 23

Compost 24 Section 9-14.4(8) is supplemented with the following: 25

26 8-01.2(9-14.4(8)).OPT1.GR8 27

(April 7, 2014) 28 The compost product may contain biosolids as a feedstock. Biosolids compost 29 production and quality shall comply with WAC 173-308. 30 31 The Compost Submittal Requirements shall include a copy of the Coverage Under 32 the General Permit for Biosolids Management issued to the manufacturer by the 33 Department of Ecology in accordance with WAC 173-308 (Biosolids Management). 34

35


8-01.3.GR8 1

Construction Requirements 2 3 8-01.3.INST1.GR8 4 Section 8-01.3 is supplemented with the following: 5 6 8-01.3.OPT1.GR8 7

(April 1, 2019) 8 Storage and Handling 9 Biotic soil amendments in accordance with the above requirements shall be furnished 10 by the manufacturer in pre-packaged, standard unopened containers with weight, name 11 of plant nutrients and manufacturer’s guaranteed statement of analysis clearly marked 12 in accordance with State and Federal laws. Field mixing of BSA components will not be 13 permitted. Containers shall be kept safe in storage protected from weather, excessive 14 temperatures, and construction operations. Products shall be handled in compliance 15 with any instructions or recommendations stated by the manufacturer. Any spills shall 16 be promptly cleaned. 17 18 Installation of Biotic Soil Amendment 19 The Contractor shall comply with the equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions 20 and recommendations. Biotic soil amendment shall be hydraulically applied at the rate 21 of 4000 pounds per acre with no more than 2500 pounds applied in any single lift. Lifts 22 shall be applied from opposing directions to soil surface for uniform coverage. If 23 recommended by the BSA manufacturer, seed, tackifier and/or fertilizer shall be added 24 to the slurry as recommended by manufacturer or BSA shall be applied within 48 hours 25 of the seeding operation. A continuous and uniform cover shall be provided to the depth 26 specified by the manufacturer. Thin areas or areas of bare soil will not be allowed, and 27 supplemental biotic soil amendment applied by the Contractor shall be at no additional 28 cost to the Contracting Agency. 29

30 8-01.3(1).GR8 31

General 32 33 8-01.3(1).INST1.GR8 34

The tenth paragraph of Section 8-01.3(1) is revised to read: 35 36 8-01.3(1).OPT1.GR8 37

(January 25, 2010) 38 Erodible Soil Eastern Washington 39 Erodible soil not being worked whether at final grade or not, shall be covered within 40 the following time period using an approved soil cover practice: 41

42 July 1 through September 30 30 days 43 October 1 through June 30 15 days 44

45 8-01.3(1).INST2.GR8 46



8-01.3(1).OPT8.FR8 1 (April 1, 2002) 2 Side Slope Treatment 3 Slopes shall be compacted within *** $$1$$ *** days of exposure of a new section 4 of cut and construction of a new portion of an embankment. 5

6 8-01.3(1)C4.GR8 7

Management of Off-Site Water 8 9 8-01.3(1)C4.INST1.GR8 10

Section 8-01.3(1)C4 is supplemented with the following: 11 12 8-01.3(1)C4.OPT1.FR8 13

(August 6, 2012) 14 Off-site Stormwater 15 Stormwater is known to enter the project site at the following locations: 16

17 *** $$1$$ *** 18

19 8-01.3(2).GR8 20

Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching 21 22 8-01.3(2)B.GR8 23

Seeding and Fertilizing 24 25 8-01.3(2)B.INST1.GR8 26

Section 8-01.3(2)B is supplemented with the following: 27 28 8-01.3(2)B.OPT1.FR8 29

(August 4, 2014) 30 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates 31 shown below on all areas requiring ***$$1$$*** seeding within the project: 32 33

Seed by Common Name Pounds Pure Live Seed 34 and (Botanical name) (PLS) Per Acre 35 36 *** $$2$$ $$ 37 38 $$ $$ 39 40 $$ $$ 41 42 Total $$ *** 43 44

The seed shall be certified in accordance with WAC 16-302 and meet the 45 following requirements: 46 47

Prohibited Weed 0% max. 48 Noxious Weed 0% max. 49 Other Weed 0.20% max. 50 Other Crop 0.40% max. 51 52


1 8-01.3(2)B.OPT2.FR8 2

(August 4, 2014) 3 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates 4 shown below on all areas requiring ***$$1$$*** seeding within the project: 5 6

Seed by Common Name, 7 (Botanical Name), and Pounds Pure Live Seed 8 “Source Identification” (PLS) Per Acre 9 10 *** $$2$$ $$ 11 12 $$ $$ 13 14 $$ $$ 15 16 Total $$ *** 17 18

Source Identified seed shall be generation four or less. Non-Source Identified 19 seed shall meet or exceed Washington State Department of Agriculture 20 Certified Seed Standards and be from within the appropriate genetic zones of 21 the *** $$3$$ *** Ecoregion(s) as defined by the US Environmental Protection 22 Agency (EPA). 23 24 The seed certification class shall be Certified (blue tag) in accordance with 25 WAC 16-302 and meet the following requirements: 26 27

Prohibited Weed 0% max. 28 Noxious Weed 0% max. 29 Other Weed 0.20% max. 30 Other Crop 0.40% max. 31

32 The Contractor shall document all Source Identified seed by providing the 33 Association of Official Seed Certifying Agents (AOSCA) yellow seed label for 34 each species in the mix. Site Identification Logs can be supplied for 35 collections where the AOSCA yellow label is not available. 36

37 8-01.3(2)B.OPT3.GR8 38

(January 3, 2006) 39 Grass seed shall be a commercially prepared mix, made up of low growing 40 species which will grow without irrigation at the project location, and approved 41 by the Engineer. The application rate shall be two pounds per 1000 square 42 feet. 43

44 8-01.3(2)B.OPT4.FR8 45

(January 3, 2006) 46 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following 47 amounts of nutrients: 48

49 Total Nitrogen as N - *** $$1$$ *** pounds per acre. 50 51 Available Phosphoric Acid as P2O5 - *** $$2$$ *** pounds per acre. 52


1 Soluble Potash as K2O - *** $$3$$ *** pounds per acre. 2

3 *** $$4$$ *** pounds of nitrogen applied per acre shall be derived from 4 isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), cyclo-di-urea (CDU), or a time release, 5 polyurethane coated source with a minimum release time of 6 months. The 6 remainder may be derived from any source. 7 8 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the 9 Engineer before use. 10

11 8-01.3(2)B.OPT5.FR8 12

(January 3, 2006) 13 First Application of Fertilizer 14 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following 15 amounts of nutrients: 16


21 Soluble Potash as K2O - *** $$3$$ *** pounds per acre. 22

23 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the 24 Engineer before use. 25

26 Second Application of Fertilizer 27 A second application of fertilizer shall be applied during the period of March 1 28 to April 15 or November 15 to December 15. In no instance shall the second 29 application of fertilizer occur less than 90 days after the first fertilizer 30 application. 31 32 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following 33 amounts of nutrients: 34


39 Soluble Potash as K20 - *** $$6$$ *** pounds per acre. 40

41 *** $$7$$ *** pounds of nitrogen applied per acre shall be derived from 42 isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), cyclo-di-urea (CDU), or a time release, 43 polyurethane coated source with a minimum release time of 6 months. The 44 remainder may be derived from any source. 45 46 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the 47 Engineer before use. 48

49 8-01.3(2)B.OPT6.GR8 50

(January 3, 2006) 51


Fertilizer shall be a commercially prepared mix of 10-20-20 and shall be 1 applied at the rate of 10 pounds per 1000 square feet. 2

3 8-01.3(2)B.OPT7.FR8 4

(January 3, 2006) 5 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following 6 amounts of nutrients: 7

8 Total Nitrogen as N – *** $$1$$ *** pounds per acre. 9 10 Sulfur – *** $$2 $$ ***pounds per acre. 11

12 *** $$3$$ *** pounds of nitrogen applied per acre shall be derived from 13 isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), cyclo-di-urea (CDU), or a time release, 14 polyurethane coated source with a minimum release time of 6 months. 15 The remainder may be derived from any source. 16

17 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the 18 Engineer before use. 19

20 8-01.3(2)B.OPT8.FR8 21

(August 4, 2014) 22 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates 23 shown below on all areas requiring *** $$1$$ *** seeding within the project: 24 25

Seed by Common Name, 26 (Botanical Name), and Pure Live Seed 27 “Source Identification” Pounds (PLS) Per Acre 28 29 *** $$2$$ $$ 30 31 $$ $$ 32 33 $$ $$ 34 35 Total $$ *** 36 37

Seed shall meet or exceed Washington State Department of Agriculture 38 Certified Seed Standards and be from within the *** $$3$$ *** Ecoregion(s) as 39 defined by the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 40 41 The seed certification class shall be Certified (blue tag) in accordance with 42 WAC 16-302 and meet the following requirements: 43 44

Prohibited Weed 0% max. 45 Noxious Weed 0% max. 46 Other Weed 0.20% max. 47 Other Crop 0.40% max. 48

49 8-01.3(2)C.GR8 50

Vacant 51 52


8-01.3(2)C.INST1.GR8 1 Section 8-01.3(2)C is supplemented with the following: 2

3 8-01.3(2)C.OPT1.FR8 4

(January 3, 2006) 5 Lime shall be applied at the rate of *** $$1$$ *** pounds per acre. 6

7 8-01.3(2)D.GR8 8

Mulching 9 10 8-01.3(2)D.INST1.GR8 11

Section 8-01.3(2)D is supplemented with the following: 12 13 8-01.3(2)D.OPT1.FR8 14

(January 5, 2015) 15 *** $$1$$ *** shall be applied at a rate of *** $$2$$ *** pounds per acre with no 16 more than *** $$3$$ *** pounds per acre applied in a single lift. 17 18

8-01.4.GR8 19

Measurement 20 21 8-01.4(4).GR8 22

Items not included with Lump Sum Erosion Control and Water Pollution 23 Prevention 24

25 8-01.4(4).INST1.GR8 26


(April 1, 2019) 30 Biotic Soil Amendment will be measured by the acre along the grade and slope of 31 the area covered immediately after application. 32

33 8-01.5.GR8 34

Measurement 35 36 8-01.5(4).GR8 37

Items not included with Lump Sum Erosion Control and Water Pollution 38 Prevention 39

40 8-01.5(4).INST1.GR8 41


(April 1, 2019) 45 “Biotic Soil Amendment”, per acre. 46 47 The unit Contract price per acre for “Biotic Soil Amendment” shall be full pay to 48 perform the Work as specified. When seed is mixed into, and applied with the 49 biotic soil amendment, payment for seed will be made under the Bid item *** $$1$$ 50 ***. 51


8-11.GR8 1

Guardrail 2 3 8-11.1.GR8 4

Description 5 6 8-11.1.INST1.GR8 7 Section 8-11.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8 10

(April 6, 2009) 11 High-Tension Cable Barrier System (3 and 4 Cable) 12 This work consists of supplying and constructing high-tension cable barrier systems 13 (cable, posts, compensating devices, fittings, and hardware), terminals, and transitions 14 in conformity with the lines and grades as staked. 15

16 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8 17

(January 7April 1, 2019) 18 This Work shall consist of applying an aesthetic treatment, either a weathering agent or 19 powder coating or reactive coloring agent, to galvanized beam guardrail, galvanized 20 guardrail posts, terminal ends and associated hardware that provides a “non-reflective” 21 and “earth” tone colored finish (dark brown) that visually blends with the natural 22 environment. 23

24 8-11.2.GR8 25

Materials 26 27 8-11.2.INST1.GR8 28 Section 8-11.2 is supplemented with the following: 29 30 8-11.2.OPT1.GR8 31

(April 6, 2009) 32 High-Tension Cable Barrier System (3 Cable) 33 Furnish high-tension 3-cable barrier system, terminals, and transitions that meet the 34 requirements of NCHRP Report 350 Test Level 3 that are designed for a minimum 35 cable tension of 3,000-pounds at an ambient air temperature of 70 degrees F, and are 36 documented as acceptable for use on the National Highway System by the Federal 37 Highway Administration. The maximum post spacing allowed shall be 17.0-feet. All 38 fittings and connecting hardware shall have a minimum breaking strength of 36,000-39 pounds. The maximum post spacing allowed shall limit vehicular dynamic deflection to 40 the value shown in the plans. Approved high tension 3-cable barrier systems are shown 41 on the Qualified Products List. 42 43 Furnish shop drawings and installation procedures to the Engineer a minimum of 10-44 days prior to the beginning of any installation work on the system. The drawings shall 45 specify all components used in the entire cable barrier system as well as the post 46 spacing required to achieve the required maximum vehicular deflections. 47 48 If a manufacturer’s product which is not on the QPL is proposed, furnish shop drawings 49 and installation procedures to the Engineer a minimum of 20-days prior to the beginning 50 of any installation work on the system. The system will be accepted based on a 51 Supplier’s Certificate of Compliance. Provide a Supplier’s Certificate of Compliance that 52


is a contract specific letter from the supplier stating the system is NCHRP 350 Test 1 Level 3 compliant. Also include a copy of the FHWA acceptance letter for this product. 2 The system will not be allowed in the project if the FHWA has not approved this system. 3

4 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8 5

(August 3, 2009) 6 High-Tension Cable Barrier System (4 Cable) 7 Furnish high-tension 4-cable barrier system, terminals, and transitions that meet the 8 requirements of NCHRP Report 350 Test Level 3 or 4 that are designed for a minimum 9 cable tension of 3,000-pounds at an ambient air temperature of 70 degrees F, and are 10 documented as acceptable for use on the National Highway System by the Federal 11 Highway Administration. The maximum post spacing allowed shall be 17.0-feet. All 12 fittings and connecting hardware shall have a minimum breaking strength of 36,000-13 pounds. The maximum post spacing allowed shall limit vehicular dynamic deflection to 14 the value shown in the plans. Approved high tension 4-cable barrier systems are shown 15 on the Qualified Products List. Only 4-cable systems with a top cable height of not less 16 than 35-inches and a bottom cable height of not more than 19-inches will be acceptable. 17 18 Furnish shop drawings and installation procedures to the Engineer a minimum of 10-19 days prior to the beginning of any installation work on the system. The drawings shall 20 specify all components used in the entire cable barrier system as well as the post 21 spacing required to achieve the required maximum vehicular deflections. 22 23 If a manufacturer’s product which is not on the QPL is proposed, furnish shop drawings 24 and installation procedures to the Engineer a minimum of 20-days prior to the beginning 25 of any installation work on the system. The system will be accepted based on a 26 Supplier’s Certificate of Compliance. Provide a Supplier’s Certificate of Compliance that 27 is a contract specific letter from the supplier stating the system is NCHRP 350 Test 28 Level 3 or 4 compliant. Also include a copy of the FHWA acceptance letter for this 29 product. The system will not be allowed in the project if the FHWA has not approved this 30 system. 31

32 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8 33

(January 2, 2018April 1, 2019) 34 Powder Coating 35 Powder coating materials for coating galvanized surfaces shall be in accordance with 36 Section 9-08.2. The color shall match SAE AMS Standard 595, color number 30045. 37 38 Weathering Reactive Coloring Agent 39 Weathering The reactive coloring agent shall consist of a stable, “non-reflective” “earth” 40 tone (dark brown) colored finish on the surface of the galvanized materials. Weathering 41 The reactive coloring agent shall only utilize oxidizers, metals, metal salts, and/or other 42 trace elements applied directly to the galvanized surfaces to obtain the desired color. 43 The chemical components of the weathering reactive coloring agent shall have no 44 adverse reactions or effects on soils, plants, or animals and shall not contain corrosive 45 by-products once the product has been applied. Only nitrate fertilizer products are 46 permitted to be present as soluble residues. 47 48 The weathering reactive coloring agent shall be provided by either the following 49 manufacturer or an accepted equal: 50 51

NATINA manufactured by Natina Products, LLC 52


1577 First Street 1 Coachella, CA 92236 2 Telephone: (877) 762-8462 3 www.natinaproducts.com 4

5 8-11.2(9-16.3).GR8 6

Beam Guardrail 7 8 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).GR8 9

Posts and Blocks 10 11 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).INST1.GR8 12

Section 9-16.3(2) is supplemented with the following: 13 14 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8 15

(April 6, 2015) 16 Shear plates and backing plates shall conform to ASTM A 36, and shall be 17 galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111. 18

19 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT2.GB8 20

(April 6, 2015) 21 Grout for post bases shall conform to Section 9-20.3(2). 22

23 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT3.GB8 24

(April 6, 2015) 25 Steel angles connecting the timber blockout to the existing steel truss 26 members shall conform to either ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 992, and shall be 27 galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 111. 28

29 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8 30

(April 6, 2015) 31 HSS steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A 500 Grade B, and shall be 32 galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111. 33 34 Steel bars, plates, and shapes shall conform to ASTM A 36, and shall be 35 galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111, except that 36 structural shapes may conform to ASTM A 992. 37 38 Galvanized sheet metal shall conform to ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 39 235. 40 41 Paving bulkheads, timber blocking, and custom cut shims shall be Douglas Fir-42 Larch No. 2 or better, and shall be treated as specified in this Section. 43 44 Rubberized asphalt shall conform to ASTM D 6690 (Type 1 for bridge locations 45 in Western Washington, and Type 2 for bridge locations in Eastern 46 Washington). 47

48 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).GB8 49

Hardware 50 Section 9-16.3(4) is supplemented with the following: 51

52


8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Resin bonded anchors shall conform to Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(18) as 3 supplemented in these Special Provisions. 4

5 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8 6

(April 6, 2015) 7 Lag screws shall conform to Section 9-06.22. 8

9 8-11.3.GR8 10

Construction Requirements 11 12 8-11.3.INST1.GR8 13 Section 8-11.3 is supplemented with the following: 14 15 8-11.3.OPT1.GR8 16

(August 6, 2018) 17 Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Post 18 The Contractor shall remove surfacing materials from the top of the box culvert and 19 shall determine the length of the posts. The Engineer will verify the dimensions before 20 the posts may be fabricated. 21 22 All surfacing material must be removed from the box culverts in an area extensive 23 enough to allow installation of the baseplate. Before the grout that conforms to Section 24 9-20.3(2) is placed, the concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil and 25 debris. 26 27 The posts shall be installed to the box culvert in accordance with Standard Plan C-28 20.41. 29 30 After the posts are installed on the box culverts, the excavated areas shall be backfilled 31 and compacted in 6-inch lifts. Compaction shall be accomplished with three passes 32 with a mechanical tamper. 33

34 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8 35

(April 6, 2009) 36 High-Tension Cable Barrier System (3 and 4 Cable) 37 A manufacturer’s representative, or an installer who has been trained and certified by 38 the unit’s manufacturer, shall supervise assembly and installation at all times. Provide a 39 copy of the installer’s certification to the Engineer prior to installation. 40 41 Assemble and install high-tension cable barrier according to the manufacturer’s 42 recommendations. This shall include the connection to guardrail and the transition and 43 terminal sections identified in the Plans. Submit any Contractor proposed modification in 44 barrier location, type, terminal or transition to the Engineer for approval a minimum of 45 10-days prior to any work in the affected section. 46 47 Unless otherwise stated in the Plans, all posts shall be a socket type assembly; with the 48 actual cable barrier post being inserted into a sleeve encased in a cast in place or 49 precast reinforced concrete post foundation and will be installed as recommended by 50 the manufacturer. On every 6th-post, install yellow retro-reflective sheeting that 51 conforms to AASHTO M268 Type 4 adhesive sheeting on both sides of the post. 52


1 Terminal Placement 2 Unless otherwise stated in the Plans, the foundations for the high tension cable barrier 3 terminals shall be cast in place or precast concrete and shall be installed in accordance 4 with manufacturer's recommendations. If a precast concrete foundation is installed, the 5 bottom of the unit shall have a full and even bearing on the surface under it. If there is a 6 need for backfilling an excavation for the concrete foundation, backfill the excavation in 7 accordance with Section 2-09.3(1) E. Delineate the anchor posts for approach traffic 8 with Type 3 lateral clearance markers (object markers) that are made with type III or 9 type IV sheeting. 10 11 Additional High-Tension Cable Barrier Components 12 Furnish and deliver one complete set of High-Tension Cable Barrier to each of the 13 Contracting Agency sites listed below: 14 15

*** $$1$$ *** 16 17 Include the following components with each complete set: 18 19

One-hundred line posts and all associated hardware including but not limited to 20 spacers, connectors, straps, caps and covers. If the system has a special post to 21 accommodate turnbuckles, then 5 of the line posts shall be these special posts. 22

23 Twenty sockets except when concrete sockets are used. 24 25 One 50 foot long section of cable used for the contract. 26 27 Three cable splices and 3 turnbuckle assemblies for a 3-cable system or 4 cable 28 splices and 4 turnbuckle assemblies for a 4-cable system (1-assembly consists of a 29 left and right hand threaded end with a turnbuckle). 30 31 One tension measuring device as recommended by the manufacturer. 32 33 One anchor post designed for use with the foundations installed. 34 35 Ten line terminal posts and all associated hardware. 36

37 Provide 48-hours notice to both the Engineer and the maintenance contact listed above 38 prior to delivery. Damaged items will not be accepted and shall be replaced at no cost to 39 the Contracting Agency. 40

41 8-11.3.OPT3.GR8 42

(August 6, 2007) 43 Beam Guardrail Type 31 NB 44 The Contractor shall furnish and install a W-beam guardrail system with a top rail height 45 of 31 inches that does not use rail element blockouts. This system shall be documented 46 as acceptable for use on the National Highway System by Federal Highway 47 Administration. In addition, the system shall meet the requirements of NCHRP Report 48 350 test level 3, and the maximum dynamic deflection shall be 3-feet 6-inches. 49 50


Assemble and install Beam Guardrail Type 31NB according to the manufacturer’s 1 recommendations. Connect the new system to existing transitions and terminal 2 sections identified in the Plans. 3 4 This system will be accepted based on a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance 5 conforming to Section 1-06.3 6

7 8-11.3.OPT4.GR8 8

(January 7April 1, 2019) 9 Aesthetic treatments to the galvanized W-beam guardrail, galvanized guardrail posts, 10 galvanized guardrail terminals, and associated galvanized hardware shall be performed 11 using either a weathering agent or a powder coating or reactive coloring agent. The 12 Contractor shall apply weathering agent or powder coating or reactive coloring agent to 13 all galvanized steel rail, posts, other galvanized steel parts, and impact head 14 components of the beam guardrail as specified in the Plans. Confirm that the 15 manufacturer of proprietary guardrail terminals allows the use of powder coatings or 16 stains reactive coloring agents prior to applying them. 17 18 Only the top 30 inches on any guardrail post length to be exposed above ground shall 19 receive aesthetic treatment. 20 21 The color of the finish coat shall be a dark brown. The Contractor shall furnish a one-22 foot minimum length test section of galvanized W-beam guardrail treated with the 23 proposed aesthetic treatment product to the Engineer for acceptance. The test section 24 shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 25 26 The Engineer will provide acceptance in writing accepting the color of the test section 27 prior to acceptance of any permanently incorporated material into the project. 28 29 Powder Coating 30 Powder coating of galvanized surfaces shall be in accordance with Section 6-07.3(11)B. 31 32 Weathering Reactive Coloring Agent 33 Application of the weathering reactive coloring agent to galvanized surfaces shall be in 34 accordance with the following: 35 36 The weathering reactive coloring agent shall be applied using the same methods used 37 for the accepted test section. The treated material shall develop full coloration within two 38 weeks of application and achieve a color consistent with the color of the authorized test 39 section. 40 41 The Contractor shall apply the weathering reactive coloring agent prior to delivering the 42 steel components to the project site. The weathering reactive coloring agent 43 manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized application contractor shall apply the 44 weathering reactive coloring agent for both the test section and production applications. 45 Application of the weathering reactive coloring agent shall fully coat the galvanized steel 46 in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and achieve the accepted 47 surface color. Once the weathering reactive coloring agent is applied, the Contractor 48 shall protect the steel pieces from abrasion that would remove the brown color. 49 50 After the various guardrail components have been installed, the Contractor shall apply 51 the weathering reactive coloring agent to any steel products that did not receive 52


adequate coloring, or where the color was removed during the shipment or the 1 construction process. This remedial action shall coat the affected area. Any weathering 2 reactive coloring agent applied in the field shall be cured according to manufacturer’s 3 specifications, and shall be applied while protecting soil, plants, and surrounding natural 4 surfaces. 5

6 8-11.3(1).GR8 7

Beam Guardrail 8 9 8-11.3(1).INST1.GR8 10


(April 5, 2010) 14 This project may contain a mixture of steel and wood posts. The bidder is advised 15 that post selection will be as detailed in the plans and these specifications. 16

17 8-11.3(1)A.GR8 18

Erection of Posts 19 20 8-11.3(1)A.INST1.GR8 21

Section 8-11.3(1)A is supplemented with the following: 22 23 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8 24

(April 6, 2015) 25 Timber Blockouts for Beam Guardrail Type Thrie Beam 26 The Contractor shall cut and trim the timber blocks as necessary to conform to 27 the shape of the existing concrete baluster rail, and to align the beam guardrail 28 element, as shown in the Plans. 29 30 When the specified timber blockout spacing places a block at an existing 31 concrete end post or intermediate post, the Contractor shall core drill holes into 32 the existing concrete as shown in the Plans and as follows. The Contractor 33 shall not shatter or damage the concrete adjacent to the holes. Location of 34 blockout assemblies may be shifted slightly within the tolerance specified in 35 the Plans in order to reduce the risk of damage to existing steel reinforcing 36 bars. However, once a blockout assembly position is established, damage to 37 existing steel reinforcing bars caused by subsequent core drilling operations at 38 that assembly location is acceptable. 39

40 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8 41

(January 4, 2016) 42 Steel Posts for Beam Guardrail Type Thrie Beam 43 The Contractor shall field measure the dimension of the existing curb above 44 the existing wearing surface at each curb line for each bridge receiving beam 45 guardrail Type Thrie Beam. The field measured dimensions, and all 46 adjustments to the field measurements required by planing and paving 47 operations included in this project, shall be included in the steel post assembly 48 shop drawings submitted in accordance with Section 8-11.3(1)G. 49

50


8-11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8 1 (January 4, 2016) 2 Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam 3 The Contractor shall field measure the depth of the existing ballast and 4 wearing course at both wheel guard lines, and shall include the dimensions at 5 both wheel guard lines in the steel post mounting bracket shop drawings 6 submitted in accordance with Section 8-11.3(1)G. 7 8 The Contractor shall remove the existing ballast and wearing course to the top 9 of existing timber deck in the vicinity of the steel post anchorage locations, and 10 shall dispose of the removed surfacing materials in accordance with Section 2-11 02.3. 12 13 As shown in the Plans, the Contractor shall place a timber block beneath the 14 timber deck at each steel post anchorage location and against the existing 15 exterior timber stringer. 16 17 The Contractor shall install the steel post anchorage assembly, including the 18 deck plate, distribution plate, bearing plate, base plate, backing plate, and HSS 19 steel tube post, as shown in the Plans. Timber deck shims shall be cut and 20 trimmed as necessary to align the top of the vertical webs of the steel post 21 anchorage 1/2 inch below the top of the surrounding wearing course surfacing, 22 in accordance with the existing timber deck transverse slope and existing 23 ballast and wearing course depth specified in the shop drawings. 24 25 The Contractor may field drill holes through the steel components in 26 accordance with Section 6-03.3(27) except as otherwise noted. The Contractor 27 shall identify all holes to be field drilled in the steel fabrication shop drawings. 28 The Contractor may field drill the holes using hand held drills provided that the 29 Contractor submits the method and equipment used to the Engineer for 30 approval, and that the Contractor receives the Engineer’s approval of the 31 submittal prior to beginning hand drilling. The Contractor shall repair all 32 galvanized steel surfaces damaged by field drilling operations by painting the 33 damaged areas with one coat of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B. 34 35 The Contractor shall replace all existing ballast and wearing course removed in 36 the vicinity of the steel post anchorage locations to the top of the surrounding 37 surfacing. The Contractor shall fill the void with an HMA surfacing material 38 approved by the Engineer. 39

40 8-11.3(1)B.GR8 41

Erection of Rail 42 43 8-11.3(1)B.INST1.GR8 44

Section 8-11.3(1)B is supplemented with the following: 45 46 8-11.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8 47

(August 6, 2007) 48 Snow load rail and post washers shall be used in construction of Type 1, Type 49 2, and Type 31 W-beam guardrail. 50

51


8-11.3(1)B.OPT6.GB8 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Field Measuring to Existing Type 3 Anchors 3 The Contractor shall field measure the dimension from the centerline of the 4 existing Type 3 anchors specified for reuse to the end of the existing concrete 5 curb and railbase or concrete baluster railing end blocks of the adjacent 6 bridge. The Contractor shall submit these dimensions to the Engineer along 7 with a Type 2 Working Drawing showing the arrangement of the thrie beam 8 guardrail elements and approach guardrail elements relative to the existing 9 Type 3 anchors and concrete curb and railbase or concrete baluster railing end 10 blocks for each bridge as applicable. 11

12 8-11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8 13

(April 6, 2015) 14 Attaching Beam Guardrail Type Thrie Beam to Timber Blockouts 15 The Contractor shall fasten the thrie beam element to the timber blockout 16 assemblies such that the steel shear plates fit snug against the surface 17 forming the opening through the concrete baluster rail. 18 19 The Contractor may field drill the holes through the thrie beam elements in 20 accordance with Section 6-03.3(27), except as otherwise noted. The 21 Contractor may field drill the holes using hand held drills. 22 23 The Contractor shall repair all galvanized steel surfaces damaged by field 24 drilling operations by painting the damaged areas with one coat of paint 25 conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B. 26

27 8-11.3(1)B.OPT8.GB8 28

(April 6, 2015) 29 Thrie Beam Expansion Joint Element 30 Where beam guardrail Type Thrie Beam crosses bridge expansion joints, the 31 Contractor shall place a thrie beam expansion section element conforming to 32 Standard Plan C-1a. 33

34 8-11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8 35

(April 6, 2015) 36 Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam 37 The Contractor may field drill the holes through the thrie beam elements in 38 accordance with Section 6-03.3(27), except as otherwise noted. The 39 Contractor may field drill the holes using hand held drills. 40 41 The Contractor shall repair all galvanized steel surfaces damaged by field 42 drilling operations by painting the damaged areas with one coat of paint 43 conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B. 44 45 After completing the beam guardrail retrofit and replacing the surfacing at the 46 steel post anchorage locations on the bridge up to the level of the surrounding 47 surfacing, the Contractor shall install the sheet metal water barrier, when the 48 water barrier is shown in the Plans. A bonding layer of rubberized asphalt shall 49 be applied to the surfacing contact area immediately prior to installing the 50 water barrier assembly. The direction of overlap of adjacent water barrier 51 segments shall be as directed by the Engineer. 52


1 8-11.3(1)D.GR8 2

Removing Guardrail and Guardrail Anchor 3 4 8-11.3(1)D.INST1.GR8 5

Section 8-11.3(1)D is supplemented with the following: 6 7 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8 8

(April 6, 2015) 9 Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam 10 The Contractor shall remove the existing bridge guardrail posts and railing, the 11 existing timber wheel guards, all associated fasteners, and the existing ballast 12 and wearing course in the vicinity of the steel post anchorage assemblies of 13 the bridges being retrofitted with beam guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam as 14 shown in the Plans 15 16 The items specified above shall be removed as follows: 17 18

1. The Contractor shall remove the existing timber wheel guards before 19 beginning the beam guardrail retrofit work. 20

21 2. The Contractor shall not remove any section of the existing bridge 22

railing system on the bridge until completing the beam guardrail 23 retrofit within that section of the bridge, except as otherwise specified. 24 The Contractor may remove portions of the existing bridge railing 25 system on the bridge which conflict with the anchorages, posts, and 26 rail elements of the retrofit, provided: 27

28 a. The Contractor installs as much of the beam guardrail retrofit as 29

possible in the section that does not conflict with the existing 30 bridge railing system elements. 31

32 b. After removing the conflicting element of the existing bridge 33

railing system, the Contractor shall immediately complete the 34 beam guardrail retrofit in the section. 35

36 c. The Contractor receives the Engineer’s approval for removing 37

the conflicting element of the existing bridge railing system 38 before proceeding. 39

40 8-11.3(1)H.GR8 41

Guardrail Construction Exposed to Traffic 42 43 8-11.3(1)H.INST1.GR8 44

Section 8-11.3(1)H is supplemented with the following: 45 46 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8 47

(April 6, 2015) 48 Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam 49 Whenever the Contractor is not actively working on the beam guardrail retrofit, 50 the Contractor shall ensure that all guardrail ends are securely fastened to the 51 rail posts and existing bridge railing system, including temporary terminal end 52


sections as required. The Contractor shall conduct retrofit operations such that 1 no gaps occur between the existing bridge railing system and the beam 2 guardrail retrofit at any time. 3 4 The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings detailing the temporary 5 connections between the existing guardrail system and the thrie beam 6 guardrail system, and the temporary terminal end sections. 7

8 8-11.4.GR8 9

Measurement 10 11 8-11.4.INST1.GR8 12 Section 8-11.4 is supplemented with the following: 13 14 8-11.4.OPT1.GR8 15

(March 13, 1995) 16 Box culvert guardrail steel posts will be measured per each, for each post installed. 17

18 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8 19

(August 6, 2012) 20 Measurement of either type of high-tension cable barrier (3 Cable or 4 Cable) will be by 21 the linear foot along the line of the completed barrier from end to end including transition 22 sections, terminals, cable barrier to guardrail terminals, foundations, sockets, concrete, 23 compensating devices, tensioning device, slip base post, sleeves, caps, and all 24 hardware. 25

26 8-11.4.OPT4.GR8 27

(April 2, 2018) 28 Measurement of Aesthetic Treatment for beam guardrail will be by the linear foot 29 measured along the line of the completed guardrail, including expansion sections and 30 the end section for F connections. 31 32 Measurement for Aesthetic Treatment for beam guardrail transition section will be per 33 each for the type of transition section installed. 34 35 Measurement for Aesthetic Treatment for beam guardrail anchor type specified will be 36 per each for the completed anchor, including the attachment of the anchor to the 37 guardrail. 38 39 Measurement of Aesthetic Treatment beam guardrail ____ terminal will be per each for 40 the completed terminal. 41 42 Measurement of Aesthetic Treatment beam guardrail Type 31 buried terminal Type 2 43 will be per linear foot for the completed terminal. 44

45 8-11.5.GR8 46

Payment 47 48 8-11.5.INST2.GR8 49 Section 8-11.5 is supplemented with the following: 50 51


8-11.5.OPT1.GR8 1 (April 2, 2018) 2 “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Type ___”, per linear foot 3 4

“Aes Tr. Beam Guardrail Type 1- ____ Ft. Long Post”, per linear foot. 5

6

“Aes Tr. Beam Guardrail Type 31- ____ Ft. Long Post”, per linear foot. 7

8 The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Type____”, “Aes Tr. 9 Beam Guardrail Type 1- ____ Ft. Long Post”, and “Aes Tr. Beam Guardrail Type 31- 10 ____ Ft. Long Post”, shall be full payment for all costs to perform the Work as specified. 11 12 “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Transition Section Type ____”, per each 13 The unit Contract price per each for “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Transition Section Type 14 ____” shall be full payment for all costs to perform the Work as described in Section 8-15 11.3. 16 17 “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Anchor Type ____”, per each. 18 19 “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail ____ Terminal”, per each. 20 21 The unit Contract price per each for “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Anchor Type ____” and 22 “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail ___ Terminal” shall be full payment for all costs to perform the 23 Work as specified. 24 25 “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Type 31 Buried Term. Type 2”, per linear foot. 26 27 The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Aes. Tr. Beam Guardrail Type 31 Buried 28 Term. Type 2” shall be full payment for all costs to perform the Work as specified. 29

30 8-11.5.OPT6.GR8 31

(August 6, 2018) 32 "Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Post Type 31", per each. 33 34 The unit contract price per each for "Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Post Type 31" shall be 35 full pay for completing the installation of the posts, including furnishing, placing and 36 compacting the backfill material. 37

38 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8 39

(April 6, 2009) 40 “High-Tension Cable Barrier System (3 Cable)”, per linear foot. 41 “High-Tension Cable Barrier System (4 Cable)”, per linear foot. 42 “Additional High-Tension Cable Barrier Components”, lump sum. 43 44 The unit contract price per linear foot for “High-Tension Cable Barrier (3 Cable or 4 45 Cable)” shall be full pay to complete the work as specified. 46

47 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8 48

(April 6, 2009) 49 The lump sum contract price for “Additional High-Tension Cable Barrier Components” 50 shall be full pay to complete the work as specified for either a 3 Cable or 4 Cable 51 system. 52


8-20.GR8 1

Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and 2

Electrical 3 4 8-20.2.GR8 5

Materials 6 7 8-20.2.INST1.GR8 8 Section 8-20.2 is supplemented with the following: 9 10 8-20.2.OPT1.GB8 11

(April 6, 2015) 12 Traffic Signal Standard Foundation Shaft Casing 13 All permanent casing shall be a smooth wall non corrugated structure of steel base 14 metal. All permanent casing shall be of ample strength to resist damage and 15 deformation from transportation and handling, installation stresses, and all pressures 16 and forces acting on the casing. The casing shall be clean prior to placement in the 17 excavation. The permanent casing may be telescoped, but the outside diameter of the 18 casing shall not be less than the specified diameter of the shaft. 19

20 8-20.2(9-29.2).GR8 21

Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull Boxes 22 23 8-20.2(9-29.2(1)A).GR8 24

Standard Duty Junction Boxes 25 Section 9-29.2(1)A is supplemented with the following: 26

27 8-20.2(9-29.2(1)A).OPT1.GR8 28

(August 1, 2016) 29 Concrete Junction Boxes 30 Both the slip-resistant lid and slip-resistant frame shall be treated with 31 Mebac#1 as manufactured by IKG industries, or SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse as 32 manufactured by W.S. Molnar Co. Where the exposed portion of the frame is 33 ½ inch wide or less the slip-resistant treatment may be omitted on that portion 34 of the frame. The slip-resistant lid shall be identified with permanent marking 35 on the underside indicating the type of surface treatment (“M1” for Mebac#1; or 36 “S3” for SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse) and the year manufactured. The permanent 37 marking shall be 1∕8 inch line thickness formed with a mild steel weld bead. 38

39 8-20.2(9-29.2(2)A).GR8 40

Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes 41 Section 9-29.2(2)A is supplemented with the following: 42

43 8-20.2(9-29.2(2)A).OPT1.GR8 44

(August 1, 2016) 45 Both the slip-resistant lid and slip-resistant frame shall be treated with 46 Mebac#1 as manufactured by IKG industries, or SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse as 47 manufactured by W.S. Molnar Co. Where the exposed portion of the frame is 48 ½ inch wide or less the slip-resistant treatment may be omitted on that portion 49 of the frame. The slip-resistant lid shall be identified with permanent marking 50 on the underside indicating the type of surface treatment (“M1” for Mebac#1; or 51


“S3” for SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse) and the year manufactured. The permanent 1 marking shall be 1∕8 inch line thickness formed with a mild steel weld bead. 2

3 8-20.2(9-29.2(3)).GR8 4

Structure Mounted Junction Box 5 Section 9-29.2(3) is supplemented with the following: 6

7 8-20.2(9-29.2(3)).OPT1.GR8 8

(August 1, 2016) 9 The slip-resistant lid shall be treated with Mebac #1 as manufactured by IKG 10 Industries, or SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse as manufactured by W.S. Molnar Co. 11 The slip-resistant lid shall be identified with the permanent marking on the 12 underside indicating the type of surface treatment (“M1” for Mebac#1, or “S3” 13 for SlipNOT Grade 3-coarse) and the year manufactured. The permanent 14 marking shall be 1∕8-inch line thickness formed with a mild steel weld bead. 15 Slip-resistant lids shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with 16 AASHTO M 111. 17

18 8-20.2(9-29.6).GR8 19

Light And Signal Standards 20 Section 9-29.6 is supplemented with the following: 21

22 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT1.GR8 23

(January 7, 2019) 24 Light Standards with Type 1 Luminaire Arms 25 Lighting standards shall be fabricated in conformance with the methods and 26 materials specified on the pre-approved Plans listed below, provided the following 27 requirements have been satisfied: 28 29

(a) Light source to pole base distance (H1) shall be as noted in the Plans. 30 Verification of H1 distances by the Engineer, prior to fabrication, is not 31

required. Fabrication tolerance shall be 6 inches. 32 33 (b) All other requirements of the Special Provisions have been satisfied. 34 35 Pre-Approved Plan Fabricator Mounting Hgt. 36 37 Drawing No. DB01164 Rev. B Valmont Ind. Inc. 30', 35’, 40' & 50' 38 Sheets 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 of 5 39 40 Drawing No. Ameron Pole 20',25’,30’,35’,40’, 41 WA15LT3721 Rev. A Prod. Div. 45’ & 50' 42 Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 43

44 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT2.GR8 45

(January 7, 2019) 46 Light Standards with Type 1 Luminaire Arms 47 Lighting standards shall be fabricated in conformance with the methods and 48 materials specified on the pre-approved plans listed below, provided the following 49 requirements have been satisfied: 50 51

(a) Mounting heights shall be as specified in the Plans. 52


1 (b) Light source to pole base distances (H1) shall be determined or verified by 2

the Engineer prior to fabrication. Fabrication tolerance shall be 6 inches. 3 4 (c) All other requirements of the Special Provisions have been satisfied. 5 6 Pre-Approved Plan Fabricator Mounting Hgt. 7 8 Drawing No. DB01164 Rev. B Valmont Ind. Inc. 30', 35’, 40' & 50' 9 Sheets 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 of 5 10 11 Drawing No. Ameron Pole 20',25’,30’,35’,40’ 12 WA15LT3721 Rev. A Prod. Div. 45’ & 50’ 13 Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 14

15 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT3.GR8 16


(a) Light source to pole base distance (H1) shall be as noted in the Plans. 23 Verification of H1 distances by the Engineer, prior to fabrication, is not 24

required. Fabrication tolerance shall be 6 inches. 25 26 (b) All other requirements of the Special Provisions have been satisfied. 27 28 Pre-Approved Plan Fabricator Mounting Hgt. 29 30 Drawing No. DB01163 Rev. B Valmont Ind. Inc. 30', 35’, 40' & 50' 31 Sheets 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 of 5 32 33 Drawing No. Ameron Pole 30’, 35’ 40' 45’ & 50' 34 WA15LT3720 Rev. A Prod. Div. 35 Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 36

37 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT4.GR8 38


(a) Mounting heights shall be as specified in the Plans. 45 46 (b) Light source to pole base distance (H1) shall be determined or verified by 47

the Engineer, prior to fabrication. Fabrication tolerance shall be 6 48 inches. 49

50 (c) All other requirements of the Special Provisions have been satisfied. 51 52


Pre-Approved Plan Fabricator Mounting Hgt. 1 2 Drawing No. DB01163 Rev. B Valmont Ind. Inc. 30',35’, 40' & 50' 3 Sheets 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 of 5 4 5 Drawing No. Ameron Pole 30’, 35’ 40' 45’ & 50' 6 WA15LT3720 Rev. A Prod. Div. 7 Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 8

9 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT5.GR8 10

(January 7April 1, 2019) 11 Traffic Signal Standards 12 Traffic signal standards shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the 13 methods and materials noted in the applicable Standard Plans, pre-approved plans, 14 or special design plans. 15 16 All welds shall comply with the latest AASHTO Standard Specifications for 17 Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals. Welding 18 inspection shall comply with Section 6-03.3(25)A Welding Inspection. 19 20 Hardened washers shall be used with all signal arm connecting bolts instead of 21 lockwashers. All signal arm ASTM F 3125 Grade A325 connecting bolts tightening 22 shall comply with Section 6-03.3(33). 23 24 Traffic signal standard types and applicable characteristics are as follows: 25 26

Type PPB Pedestrian push button posts shall conform to Standard Plan J-27 20.10 or to one of the following pre-approved plans: 28

29 Fabricator Drawing No. 30 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 31 Sheet’s 1, 2, 3 & 4 of 4 32 33 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 34 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-3 Rev. AB 35

36 Type PS Pedestrian signal standards shall conform to Standard Plan J-37

20.16 or to one of the following pre-approved plans: 38 39

Fabricator Drawing No. 40 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 41 Sht. 1, 2, 3 & 4 of 4 42 43 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 44 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 45 46

Type I Type I vehicle signal standards shall conform to Standard Plan J-47 21.15 or to one of the following pre-approved plans: 48

49 Fabricator Drawing No. 50 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 51 Sht. 1 2, 3 & 4 of 4 52


1 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 2 Prod. Div WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 3 4

Type FB Type FB flashing beacon standard shall conform to Standard 5 Plan J-21.16 or the following pre-approved plan: 6

7 Fabricator Drawing No. 8 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 9 Sht. 1 2, 3 & 4 of 4 10 11 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 12 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 13 14

Type RM Type RM ramp meter standard shall conform to Standard Plan J-15 22.15 or the following pre-approved plan: 16

17 Fabricator Drawing No. 18 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 19 Sht. 1, 2, 3 & 4 of 4 20 21 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 22 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 23 24

Type CCTV Type CCTV camera pole standards shall conform to one of the 25 following pre-approved Plans: 26

27 Fabricator Drawing No. 28 Valmont Industries, Inc. DB 01166 Rev. B 29 Sheet 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 4 30 31 Ameron Pole Product Div. WA15CCTV01 Rev. B 32 Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 33 34

Type II Characteristics: 35 36

Luminaire mounting height N.A. 37 Luminaire arms N.A. 38 Luminaire arm length N.A. 39 Signal arms One Only 40 41 Type II standards shall conform to one of the following pre-42 approved plans, provided all other requirements noted herein 43 have been satisfied. Maximum (x) (y) (z) signal arm loadings in 44 cubic feet are noted after fabricator. 45

46 Signal Arm 47 Length (max) Fabricator-(x) (y) (z) Drawing No. 48 49 65 ft. Valmont Ind. Inc.-(2894) DB01162 Rev. B, 50 Shts. 1, 2,3, 4 & 5 of 5 51 52


65 ft. Ameron Pole-(2900) WA15TR3724-1 Rev. C and 1 Prod. Div. WA15TR3724-2 Rev. D 2 Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 3 4 Type III Characteristics: 5 6

Luminaire mounting height 30 ft., 7 35 ft., 8 40 ft., 9 or 50 ft. 10 Luminaire arms One Only 11 Luminaire arm type Type 1 12 Luminaire arm length (max.) 16 ft. 13 Signal arms One Only 14 15 Type III standards shall conform to one of the following pre-16 approved plans, provided all other requirements noted herein 17 have been satisfied. Maximum (x) (y) (z) signal arm loadings in 18 cubic feet are noted after fabricator. 19 20

Signal Arm 21 Length (max) Fabricator-(x) (y) (z) Drawing No. 22 23 65 ft. Valmont Ind. Inc.-(2947) DB01162 Rev. B, 24 Shts. 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 of 5 25 and "J" luminaire arm 26 27 65 ft. Ameron Pole-(2900) WA3724-1 Rev. C and 28 Prod. Div. WA3724-2 Rev. D 29

and "J" luminaire arm 30 31 Type IV Type IV strain pole standards shall be consistent with details in 32

the plans and Standard Plan J-27.15 or one of the following pre-33 approved plans: 34

35 Fabricator Drawing No. 36 Valmont Industries, Inc. DB01167, Rev. B 37 Sheets 1 and 2 38 39 Ameron Pole WA15TR15 Rev. A 40 Prod. Div. Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 41 42

Type V Type V combination strain pole and lighting standards shall be 43 consistent with details in the plans and Standard Plan J-27.15 or 44 one of the following pre-approved plans: 45

46 Fabricator Drawing No. 47 Valmont Industries, Inc. DB01167, Rev. B 48 Sheets 1 and 2 49 50 Ameron Pole WA 15TR15 Rev. A 51 Prod. Div. Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 52


1 The luminaire arm shall be Type 1, 16 foot maximum and the 2 luminaire mounting height shall be 40 feet or 50 feet as noted in 3 the plans. 4 5

Type SD Type SD standards require special design. All special design 6 shall be based on the latest AASHTO Standard Specifications for 7 Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic 8 Signals and pre-approved plans and as follows: 9

10 1. A 115 mph wind loading shall be used. 11 12 2. The Mean Recurrence Interval shall be 1700 years. 13 14 3. Fatigue category shall be III. 15

16 Complete calculations for structural design, including anchor bolt 17 details, shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer, licensed 18 under Title 18 RCW, State of Washington, in the branch of Civil 19 or Structural Engineering or by an individual holding valid 20 registration in another state as a civil or structural Engineer. 21

22 All shop drawings and the cover page of all calculation submittals 23 shall carry the Professional Engineer's original signature, date of 24 signature, original seal, registration number, and date of 25 expiration. The cover page shall include the contract number, 26 contract title, and sequential index to calculation page numbers. 27 Two copies of the associated design calculations shall be 28 submitted for approval along with shop drawings. 29 30 Details for handholes and luminaire arm connections are 31 available from the Bridges and Structures Office. 32 33

Foundations for various types of standards shall be as follows: 34 35

Type PPB As noted on Standard Plan J-20.10 36 Type PS As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 37 Type I As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 38 Type FB As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 39 Type RM As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 40 Type CCTV As noted on Standard Plan J-29.15 41 Type II As noted in the Plans. 42 Type III As noted in the Plans. 43 Type IV As noted in the Plans and Standard Plan J-27.10 44 Type V As noted in the Plans and Standard Plan J-27.10 45 Type SD As noted in the Plans. 46

47


8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT6.GR8 1 (January 7April 1, 2019) 2 Traffic Signal Standards 3 Traffic signal standards shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the 4 methods and materials noted in the applicable Standard Plans, pre-approved plans, 5 or special design plans. 6 7 All welds shall comply with the latest AASHTO Standard Specifications for 8 Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals. Welding 9 inspection shall comply with Section 6-03.3(25)A Welding Inspection. 10 11 Hardened washers shall be used with all signal arm connecting bolts instead of 12 lockwashers. All signal arm ASTM F 3125 Grade A325 connecting bolts tightening 13 shall comply with Section 6-03.3(33). 14 15 Traffic signal standard types and applicable characteristics are as follows: 16 17

Type PPB Pedestrian push button posts shall conform to Standard Plan J-18 20.10 or to one of the following pre-approved plans: 19

20 Fabricator Drawing No. 21 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 22 Sheets 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 4 23 24 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 25 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-3 Rev. AB 26 27

Type PS Pedestrian signal standards shall conform to Standard Plan J-28 20.16 or to one of the following pre-approved plans: 29

30 Fabricator Drawing No. 31 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 32 Sheets 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 4 33 34 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 35 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 36 37

Type I Type I vehicle signal standards shall conform to Standard Plan J-38 21.15 or to one of the following pre-approved plans: 39

40 Fabricator Drawing No. 41 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 42 Sheets 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 4 43 44 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 45 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 46 47 48

Type FB Type FB flashing beacon standard shall conform to Standard 49 Plan J-21.16 or the following pre-approved plan: 50

51 Fabricator Drawing No. 52


Valmont Ind. Inc. DB011655 Rev. B 1 Sheets 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 4 2 3 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 4 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 5 6

Type RM Type RM ramp meter standard shall conform to Standard Plan J-7 22.15 or the following pre-approved plan: 8

9 Fabricator Drawing No. 10 Valmont Ind. Inc. DB01165 Rev. B 11 Sheets 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 4 12 13 Ameron Pole WA15TR10-1 Rev. B C and 14 Prod. Div. WA15TR10-2 Rev. BC 15 16

Type CCTV Type CCTV camera pole standards shall conform to one of the 17 following pre-approved Plans: 18

19 Fabricator Drawing No. 20 Valmont Industries, Inc. DB01166 Rev. C 21 Sheet 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 4 22 23 Ameron Pole Product Div. WA15CCTV01 Rev. B 24 Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 25 26

Type II Characteristics: 27 28

Luminaire mounting height N.A. 29 Luminaire arms N.A. 30 Luminaire arm length N.A. 31 Signal arms One Only 32 33 Type II standards shall conform to one of the following pre-34 approved plans, provided all other requirements noted herein 35 have been satisfied. Maximum (x) (y) (z) signal arm loadings in 36 cubic feet are noted after fabricator. 37 38

Signal Arm 39 Length (max) Fabricator-(x) (y) (z) Drawing No. 40 41 65 ft. Valmont Ind. Inc.-(2894) DB01162 Rev. B 42 Sheets 1, 2. 3, 4 & 5 of 5 43 44 65 ft. Ameron Pole-(2900) WA15TR3724-1 Rev. C and 45 WA15TR3724-2 Rev. D 46 47 Type III Characteristics: 48 49

Luminaire mounting height 30 ft., 35 ft., 50 40 ft., or 50 ft. 51 Luminaire arms One Only 52


Luminaire arm type Type 2 1 Luminaire arm length (max.) 16 ft. 2 Signal arms One Only 3 4 Type III standards shall conform to one of the following pre-5 approved plans, provided all other requirements noted herein 6 have been satisfied. Maximum (x) (y) (z) signal arm loadings in 7 cubic feet are noted after fabricator. 8 9

Signal Arm 10 Length (max) Fabricator-(x) (y) (z) Drawing No. 11 12 65 ft. Valmont Ind. Inc.-(2947) DB01162 Rev. B, 13 Sheets 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 of 5 14 and "T" luminaire arm 15 16 65 ft. Ameron Pole-(2900) WA15TR3724-1 Rev. C and 17 Prod. Div. WA15TR3724-2 Rev. D 18 and "T" luminaire arm 19 20 Type IV Type IV strain pole standards shall be consistent with details in 21

the Plans and Standard Plan J-27.15 or one of the following pre-22 approved plans: 23

24 Fabricator Drawing No. 25 Valmont Industries, Inc. DB01167, Rev. B 26 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2 27 28 Ameron Pole WA15TR15 Rev. A 29 Prod. Div. Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 30 31

Type V Type V combination strain pole and lighting standards shall be 32 consistent with details in the Plans and Standard Plan J-27.15 or 33 one of the following pre-approved plans: 34

35 Fabricator Drawing No. 36 Ameron Pole WA15TR15 Rev. A 37 Prod. Div. Sheet 1 and 2 of 2 38 39 Valmont Industries, Inc. DB01167, Rev. B 40 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2 41 42 The luminaire arm shall be Type 2, 16 foot maximum and the 43 luminaire mounting height shall be 40 feet or 50 feet as noted in 44 the Plans. 45 46

Type SD Type SD standards require special design. All special design 47 shall be based on the latest AASHTO Standard Specifications for 48 Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic 49 Signals and pre-approved plans and as follows: 50

51 1. A 115 mph wind loading shall be used. 52


1 2. The Mean Recurrence Interval shall be 1700 years. 2 3 3. Fatigue category shall be III. 4

5 Complete calculations for structural design, including anchor bolt 6 details, shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer, licensed 7 under Title 18 RCW, State of Washington, in the branch of Civil 8 or Structural Engineering or by an individual holding valid 9 registration in another state as a civil or structural Engineer. 10

11 All shop drawings and the cover page of all calculation submittals 12 shall carry the Professional Engineer's original signature, date of 13 signature, original seal, registration number, and date of 14 expiration. The cover page shall include the contract number, 15 contract title, and sequential index to calculation page numbers. 16 Two copies of the associated design calculations shall be 17 submitted for approval along with shop drawings. 18 19 Details for handholes and luminaire arm connections are 20 available from the Bridges and Structures Office. 21 22

Foundations for various types of standards shall be as follows: 23 24

Type PPB As noted on Standard Plan J-20.10 25 Type PS As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 26 Type I As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 27 Type FB As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 28 Type RM As noted on Standard Plan J-21.10 29 Type CCTV As noted on Standard Plan J-29.15 30 Type II As noted in the Plans. 31 Type III As noted in the Plans. 32 Type IV As noted in the Plans and Standard Plan J-27.10 33 Type V As noted in the Plans and Standard Plan J-27.10 34 Type SD As noted in the Plans. 35

36 8-20.2(9-29.13).GR8 37

Control Cabinet Assemblies 38 Section 9-29.13 is supplemented with the following: 39

40 8-20.2(9-29.13).OPT1.GR8 41

(January 2, 2018) 42 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 43 Each UPS System shall provide battery backup power to the cabinet to which it is 44 connected in the event of loss or failure of normal utility power. Each UPS system 45 shall be constructed for full on line configuration (line interactive type), providing 46 automatic voltage regulation and power conditioning when operating on normal 47 utility power. The transfer between utility power and battery power shall not 48 interfere with the normal operation of the connected downstream cabinet. 49 50


Each UPS System shall be capable of supplying a minimum 1000W load at 120 1 VAC for a minimum number of hours depending on the number of batteries 2 specified: 3 4

• Four batteries: Minimum 4 hours run time. 5 6 • Eight batteries: Minimum 8 hours run time. 7

8 Each UPS System shall be composed of the following equipment: 9 10

UPS Cabinet Construction 11 Each UPS Cabinet shall be constructed as follows. The equipment shall be 12 installed within the cabinet as shown in the Plans. 13 14

1. The cabinet shall be designated Type 331, consisting of Housing 1B 15 and Mounting Cage 1 as described in the CalTrans TEES. The 16 housing shall use 0.125 inch minimum thickness 5052 H32 ASTM 17 B209 alloy aluminum, with bare mill finish. The exterior shall not be 18 anodized or painted. 19

20 2. Each cabinet door shall be provided with: 21 22

a. A three point latch system. Locks shall be spring loaded 23 construction locks capable of accepting a Best 6 pin core. A 6 pin 24 construction core of the type (blue, green, or red) specified in the 25 contract shall be installed in each core lock. One core removal 26 key and two standard keys shall be included with each cabinet 27 and delivered to the Engineer. 28

29 b. A one piece, closed cell, neoprene gasket. 30 31 c. A two position doorstop assembly. The doorstops shall hold the 32

door open at both 90 degrees and 180 +/- 10 degrees. 33 34 3. Cabinet lighting shall be provided by two LED light strips. Each LED 35

light strip shall be approximately 12 inches long, have a minimum 36 output of 320 lumens, and have a color temperature of 4000K (cool 37 white) plus or minus 400K. Lighting shall not interfere with the proper 38 operation of any other ceiling or shelf mounted equipment. All lighting 39 fixtures shall energize whenever any door is opened. Each door 40 switch shall be labeled “Light”. Both light strips shall be ceiling 41 mounted - rack mounted lights are not allowed. One light strip shall 42 be installed over the front face of the rack and the second shall be 43 installed over the rear face of the rack. Each light strip shall be 44 oriented parallel to the door face, and placed such that the associated 45 face of the rack and the rack mounted equipment is illuminated. 46

47 4. Cabinet ventilation shall be as described in the TEES for a Type 332L 48

cabinet. The door vent filter shall be a 12 inch by 16 inch by 1 inch 49 thick (nominal) disposable paper filter. 50

51


5. A UPS Service Panel, installed on the left side of the cabinet as 1 viewed from the front. This service panel shall include the following, 2 positioned as shown in the Plans: 3

4 a. Two three-position terminal blocks. Each terminal block shall be 5

labeled “Power IN” or “Power OUT” as appropriate. 6 7 b. Two 120V 1P-15A circuit breakers, one each for the cabinet 8

lighting and the cabinet ventilation (fan and thermostat). 9 10 c. A Tesco TES-10B (or equivalent) Surge Suppressor. 11 12 d. A HESCORLS LF60X (or equivalent) Line Filter. 13 14 e. A neutral (AC-) bus bar, with minimum 10 connections. 15 16 f. A ground bus bar, with minimum 10 connections. 17

18 6. Three battery shelves, each 0.5U (Rack Unit) in height. Each shelf 19

shall be vented and capable of supporting three AlphaCell 240XTV 20 batteries without visibly flexing. Each shelf shall span the full width 21 and depth of the rack, and be secured to all of the rack verticals. 22

23 7. One drawer shelf, 1U in height. 24 25 8. A Generator Transfer Switch (GTS) and enclosure, meeting the 26

requirements of Section 9-29.13(8). The GTS shall be installed in 27 place of the Police Panel Switch enclosure as shown on a Type 332L 28 cabinet. The lock shall have an aluminum rain shield cover riveted to 29 the cabinet housing. 30

31 UPS System Components 32 The following UPS System Equipment shall be provided and installed within 33 the cabinet as shown in the Plans. All equipment shall be from Alpha 34 Technologies unless otherwise noted. 35

36 1. One UPS Controller, model FXM 2000 w/SNMP module operating at 37

120 VAC, Part Number (P/N) 017-232-31. The UPS Controller shall 38 include the 19” EIA rack mount kit, P/N 740-697-21, and support 39 shelf, P/N 3610030085. 40

41 2. One Universal Automatic Transfer Switch (UATS) Accessory Shelf 42

Assembly (P/N 020-168-25), consisting of a Surge Arrestor Assembly 43 (P/N 740-755-21), UATS (P/N 020-165-21), and 120V Single Duplex 44 Plate (P/N 740-748-23). 45

46 3. Four or eight AlphaCell 240XTV Batteries, as required by the 47

Contract. Where four batteries are required, they shall be installed 48 with two each on the middle and lower battery shelves. Where eight 49 batteries are required, the upper and middle battery shelves shall 50 hold three batteries each, with the remaining two installed on the 51 lower battery shelf. Batteries shall be labeled with their string ID and 52


number in the string. The first four batteries shall be labeled A1 1 through A4, and the second four batteries (when required) shall be 2 labeled B1 through B4. 3

4 4. Remote Battery Monitoring System Plus. Use P/N 03760260-002 for 5

cabinets requiring four batteries. Use P/N 03760260-003 for cabinets 6 requiring eight batteries. 7

8 5. 48V Battery Cable Kit, 10ft in length with 1/4-20 termination(s), P/N 9

740-628-27. Where eight batteries are required, a second battery 10 cable kit and a Y-Connector (P/N 870-601-21) shall also be included. 11

12 6. Battery Heater Mats, one per shelf with batteries installed, sized for 13

the number of batteries present on that shelf. Each mat shall run on 14 120VAC and be plugged into the duplex receptacle on the Accessory 15 Shelf Assembly. 16

17 Three sets of cabinet drawings and maintenance and operations manuals shall 18 be provided. Two sets shall be hard copies in paper format and placed in the 19 cabinet drawer shelf. The third shall be electronic in PDF format and provided 20 on a portable USB flash drive (stick) and placed in the cabinet drawer shelf. 21 22 Contact information for Alpha Technologies: 23 24

Alpha Technologies, Inc. 25 3767 Alpha Way 26 Bellingham, WA 98226 27 Phone: (360) 647-2360 28 E-mail: [email protected] 29 Website: www.alpha.ca 30

31 8-20.2(9-29.19).GR8 32

Pedestrian Push Buttons 33 Section 9-29.19 is supplemented with the following: 34

35 8-20.2(9-29.19).OPT1.FR8 36

(August 6, 2018) 37 Accessible Pedestrian Signal (APS) Pushbuttons 38 When required in the Contract, APS Pushbuttons shall be provided. Each 39 accessible pedestrian signal (APS) shall be a complete APS pushbutton system at 40 each pedestrian pushbutton location shown in the Plans. Equipment shall be one 41 of the following systems: 42 43

1. Campbell Company: Advisor Guide Accessible Pedestrian Station 44 (AGPS); Part Number: AGPS 915 45

46 2. Novax / Pelco Products: IntelliCross Intelligent Pedestrian System APS; 47

Part Number: SE-2901-P30 9x15 48 49 3. Polara Engineering: EZ Communicator Navigator 4-Wire (EN4); Part 50

Number: EN43TN1-G 51 52


Only one brand of equipment shall be used for the entire Contract. 1 2 Each pushbutton station shall include the following: 3 4

1. Flat dark green colored housing. 5 6 2. High contrast pushbutton arrow (dark on a light background or light on a 7

dark background). White on silver or silver on white are not acceptable as 8 high contrast. 9

10 3. Integral 9” x 15” R10-3e Sign. Braille shall not be included. Adaptor 11

plates shall be included if required to accommodate the sign. 12 13 4. Appropriate interface unit for installation in associated pedestrian display: 14 15

a. Campbell: Signal Power Interface (SPI) Unit 16 17 b. Novax/Pelco: Power Interface Module (PIM) 18 19 c. Polara: Ped Head Control Unit For 4 Wire Navigator (PHCU4W) 20

Module 21 22

5. Percussive tone / rapid tick walk indication. 23 24 6. Voice messages, as specified below, pre-installed. Voice shall be male. 25 26 7. Interconnect cable for installation between pushbutton station and 27

pedestrian display interface unit. Unless otherwise specified in the 28 Contract, cable shall be provided by the pushbutton manufacturer. Cable 29 may be standard four conductor cable meeting the requirements of 30 Standard Specification 9-29.3(2)B if it meets the pushbutton 31 manufacturers requirements. 32

33 The following shall be provided at each intersection: 34 35

1. One USB flash drive with copies of all voice message audio files for that 36 intersection, placed in the traffic signal cabinet drawer or drawing 37 envelope. A separate flash drive is required for each intersection. 38

39 2. One USB cable of the appropriate type (A to A, A to B, male/female, etc.), 40

placed in the traffic signal cabinet drawer or drawing envelope. 41 42 Any other equipment or software required by the manufacturer for setup, operation, 43 and maintenance of the pushbutton stations shall be provided. For Polara systems 44 only, *** $$1$$ *** provide one EConfigurator for the entire Contract. 45 46 Dual button adaptor brackets are required for all installations with two APS 47 pushbuttons on the same Type PPB, Type PS, or Type I Signal Standard. Where 48 dual button adaptor brackets or extension brackets are required, they shall be 49 obtained from the same manufacturer as the pushbutton station. Brackets and 50 extensions from other manufacturers shall not be used. 51 52


APS Speech Messages 1 Speech messages shall be provided in the following format: 2 3

• “Wait.” 4 • “Wait to cross ___ _(A)_____ at _____(B)_____.” 5 • “Walk sign is on to cross ___ _(A)_____.” 6

7 The following table lists the entries for (A) and (B) above, as well as quantities for 8 button and arrow orientations: 9 10

*** $$2$$ *** 11 12 Order forms shall be completed by the Contractor using the information presented 13 above. 14

15 8-20.2(1).GR8 16

Equipment List And Drawings 17 18 8-20.2(1).INST1.GR8 19


(March 13, 1995) 23 Pole base to light source distances (H1) for lighting standards with pre-approved 24 plans shall be as noted in the Plans. 25 26 Pole base to light source distances (H1) for lighting standards without pre-approved 27 plans will be furnished by the Engineer as part of the final approved shop drawings, 28 prior to fabrication. 29

30 8-20.2(1).OPT2.GR8 31

(March 13, 1995) 32 Pole base to light source distances (H1) for lighting standards with pre-approved 33 plans will be determined or verified by the Engineer at the request of the Contractor 34 prior to fabrication. 35 36 Pole base to light source distances (H1) for lighting standards without pre-approved 37 plans and for combination traffic signal and lighting standards will be furnished by 38 the Engineer as part of the final approved shop drawings prior to fabrication. 39

40 8-20.2(1).OPT3.GR8 41

(March 13, 1995) 42 If traffic signal standards, strain pole standards, or combination traffic signal and 43 lighting standards are required, final verified dimensions including pole base to 44 signal mast arm connection point, pole base to light source distances (H1), mast 45 arm length, offset distances to mast arm mounted appurtenances, and orientations 46 of pole mounted appurtenances will be furnished by the Engineer as part of the 47 final approved shop drawings prior to fabrication. 48

49 8-20.3.GR8 50

Construction Requirements 51 52


8-20.3(4).GR8 1 Foundations 2

3 8-20.3(4).INST1.GR8 4

Section 8-20.3(4) is supplemented with the following: 5 6 8-20.3(4).OPT1.FB8 7

(August 7, 2017) 8 Shafts For Signal Standard Foundations 9 Shaft foundations for the traffic signal standards at the following location(s) shall be 10 constructed in accordance with the following requirements: 11 12

*** $$1$$ *** 13 14 Shaft foundations for traffic signal standards shall be constructed in accordance 15 with Section 6-19.3, except as follows: 16

17 Quality Assurance 18 The tolerance for placing the center at the top of shaft under Section 6-19 19.3(1)A is revised for traffic signal standard foundation shafts to be within 4-20 inches of the Plan location. 21 22 Non-destructive testing of shafts under Sections 6-19.3(1)B and 6-19.3(9) and 23 associated Work under Section 6-19.3(6) does not apply. 24 25 Shaft Excavation 26 Permanent casing advanced during excavation operations is required full 27 depth for all traffic signal standard shaft foundation locations specified at the 28 beginning of this Special Provision. Excavation in advance of the casing tip 29 shall not exceed three feet. In no case shall shaft excavation and casing 30 placement extend below the bottom of shaft excavation as shown in the Plans. 31 32 When efforts to advance past the obstruction to the design shaft tip elevation 33 result in the rate of advance of the shaft drilling equipment being significantly 34 reduced relative to the rate of advance for the portion of the shaft excavation in 35 the geological unit that contains the obstruction, then the Contractor shall 36 remove, break-up, or push aside, the obstruction under the provisions of 37 Section 8-20.5 as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 38 39 Placing Concrete 40 Traffic signal standard foundation shaft concrete shall be Class 4000P. 41 42 Casing Removal 43 Tops of permanent casing for the shafts shall be removed to at least 6-inches 44 beneath the finish groundline, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. 45 46

47 8-20.3(8).GR8 48

Wiring 49 50 8-20.3(8).INST1.GR8 51



1 8-20.3(8).OPT1.GR8 2

(March 13, 1995) 3 Field Wiring Chart 4 501 AC+ Input 516-520 Railroad Pre-empt 5 502 AC- Input 5A1-5D5 Emergency Pre-empt 6 503-510 Control-Display 541-580 Coordination 7 511-515 Sign Lights 581-599 Spare 8 9 Movement Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Vehicle Head 12

Red 611 621 631 641 651 661 671 681 691 13 Yellow 612 622 632 642 652 662 672 682 692 14 Green 613 623 633 643 653 663 673 683 693 15 Spare 614 624 634 644 654 664 674 684 694 16 Spare 615 625 635 645 655 665 675 685 695 17 AC- 616 626 636 646 656 666 676 686 696 18 Red Auxiliary 617 627 637 647 657 667 677 687 697 19 Yellow Auxiliary 618 628 638 648 658 668 678 688 698 20 Green Auxiliary 619 629 639 649 659 669 679 689 699 21

Pedestrian Heads & Dets. 22 Hand 711 721 731 741 751 761 771 781 791 23 Man 712 722 732 742 752 762 772 782 792 24 AC- 713 723 733 743 753 763 773 783 793 25 Detection 714 724 734 744 754 764 774 784 794 26 Common-Detection 715 725 735 745 755 765 775 785 795 27 Spare 716 726 736 746 756 766 776 786 796 28 Spare 717 727 737 747 757 767 777 787 797 29 Spare 718 728 738 748 758 768 778 788 798 30 Spare 719 729 739 749 759 769 779 789 799 31

Detection 32 AC+ 811 821 831 841 851 861 871 881 891 33 AC- 812 822 832 842 852 862 872 882 892 34 Common-Detection 813 823 833 843 853 863 873 883 893 35 Detection A 814 824 834 844 854 864 874 884 894 36 Detection B 815 825 835 845 855 865 875 885 895 37 Loop 1 Out 816 826 836 846 856 866 876 886 896 38 Loop 1 In 817 827 837 847 857 867 877 887 897 39 Loop 2 Out 818 828 838 848 858 868 878 888 898 40 Loop 2 In 819 829 839 849 859 869 879 889 899 41

Supplemental Detection 42 Loop 3 Out 911 921 931 941 951 961 971 981 991 43 Loop 3 In 912 922 932 942 952 962 972 982 992 44 Loop 4 Out 913 923 933 943 953 963 973 983 993 45 Loop 4 In 914 924 934 944 954 964 974 984 994 46 Loop 5 Out 915 925 935 945 955 965 975 985 995 47 Loop 5 In 916 926 936 946 956 966 976 986 996 48 Loop 6 Out 917 927 937 947 957 967 977 987 997 49 Loop 6 In 918 928 938 948 958 968 978 988 998 50 Spare 919 929 939 949 959 969 979 989 999 51

52


8-20.3(14).GR8 1 Signal Systems 2

3 8-20.3(14).INST1.GR8 4


(January 2, 2018) 8 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 9 UPS Systems shall be tested before and after field installation. 10 11 Contractor Quality Control Testing 12 Prior to delivery of the UPS system to the Washington State Department of 13 Transportation Materials Laboratory (State Materials Laboratory), all components 14 and equipment, including the batteries shall be fully installed in the cabinet and the 15 UPS system operations shall be successfully tested by the Contractor’s 16 representative. A testing certification (letter or similar) shall be provided with the 17 cabinet. 18 19 After the UPS system has been successfully tested, the batteries shall be removed 20 from the cabinet and the cabinet and batteries shall be delivered, independently, to 21 the State Materials Laboratory, located in Tumwater, Washington, for pre-22 installation testing. 23 24 UPS System Laboratory Testing 25 The UPS system testing shall simulate the operations as installed in the field. The 26 tests shall check the operation of each individual component as well as the overall 27 operation of the system. 28 29 The State Materials Laboratory testing of the UPS system will consist of the 30 following four separate stages: 31 32

1. Delivery and Assembly 33 34 2. Documentation 35 36 3. Demonstration 37 38 4. Performance Test 39 40

Testing will follow in the listed order with no time gaps between stages unless 41 mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and State Materials Laboratory. 42 43 The Contractor shall designate a qualified representative for these tests. All 44 communications and actions regarding testing of all equipment submitted to the 45 State Materials Laboratory shall be made through this representative. These 46 communications and actions shall include, but not be limited to, all notifications of 47 failure or rejection, demonstration of the equipment, and the return of rejected 48 equipment. 49 50


Stage 1: Delivery and Assembly 1 The Contractor shall provide all Work necessary to assemble the UPS system 2 and make ready for demonstration at the State Materials Laboratory. Upon 3 delivery, the batteries shall be reinstalled in the cabinet and the UPS system 4 shall be made fully operational. All components for the complete UPS system, 5 including the necessary test equipment, shall be ready for testing within 14 6 calendar days of delivery to the State Materials Laboratory. 7 8 Stage 2: Documentation 9 All documentation shall be furnished with the UPS system equipment prior to 10 the start of testing. The documents to be supplied shall consist of the 11 following: 12 13

1. Serial numbers when applicable. 14 15 2. Wiring diagrams for all equipment in the required quantities and 16

formats. 17 18 3. Complete operations and maintenance manuals in the required 19

quantities and formats. 20 21 4. A description of the functions and the capabilities of individual 22

components and of the overall UPS system. 23 24

Stage 3: Demonstration 25 The Contractor shall provide the following: 26 27

1. A presentation on how to operate the system. 28 29 2. A complete and thorough demonstration to show that all components 30

of the UPS system are in good condition and operating properly. 31 32

The demonstration shall be performed by the Contractor’s representative in the 33 presence of State Materials Laboratory personnel. 34 35 Stage 4: Performance Test 36 The performance test will be conducted by State Personnel to determine if the 37 UPS system performs correctly. The performance test shall include the testing 38 of the following specifications: 39 40

1. Battery Discharge Rate 41 42 2. Battery Recharge Rate 43 44 3. Power Transfer Rate 45 46 4. Operational Duration 47 48

Test results for items 1-3 shall be within the manufacturers recommended 49 values in order for the tests to be considered successful. For item 4, the test is 50 considered successful if the system maintains the test load for the required 51 minimum duration for the battery configuration. 52


1 Equipment Failure or Rejection 2 All component or system failures shall be documented. This documentation 3 shall provide the following information: 4 5

1. A detailed description of the failure. 6 7 2. The steps undertaken to correct the failure. 8 9 3. A list of parts that were replaced, if any. 10 11

All failed or rejected equipment shall be removed from the Materials 12 Laboratory within three calendar days following notification; otherwise, the 13 failed or rejected equipment will be returned, freight collect, to the Contractor. 14 15 Following final approval by the State Materials Laboratory, all equipment shall 16 be removed from the State Materials Laboratory by the Contractor and 17 delivered to the appropriate site(s) as designated elsewhere in this Contract. 18 19

UPS System Field Testing 20 After installation, the Contractor shall field test the UPS system to ensure the 21 system operates in accordance with Plans, Specifications and manufacturer’s 22 instructions. The test shall ensure that that all components are operational within 23 manufacturer’s tolerances. The Contractor shall provide a testing procedure to the 24 Engineer for approval. The testing procedure shall provide for operational testing 25 of the following: 26 27

1. UPS Power Module 28 29 2. Surge Suppressor 30 31 3. Automatic Transfer Switch 32 33 4. Generator Power Transfer Switch 34 35

The field test shall demonstrate the loss of utility power and the switch over to 36 battery power without interference with the normal operation of the connected 37 downstream cabinet. For traffic signal systems, this this includes the traffic signal 38 controller including conflict monitor and any other peripheral devices within the 39 traffic controller assembly. 40

41 42

43 8-20.3(14)A.GR8 44

Signal Controllers 45 46 8-20.3(14)A.INST1.GR8 47

Section 8-20.3(14)A is supplemented with the following: 48 49


8-20.3(14)A.OPT1.GR8 1 (August 2, 2010) 2 Testing 3 All signal control equipment shall be tested at the Washington State 4 Department of Transportation Materials Laboratory located in Tumwater, 5 Washington, prior to final delivery. The tests shall check the operation of each 6 individual component as well as the overall operation of the system. 7 8 The Contractor shall designate a qualified representative for these tests. 9 Notification of this representative shall be submitted for approval, in writing, to 10 the State Materials Laboratory, 14 calendar days prior to any equipment 11 deliveries. The Engineer shall also receive a copy of this notification, which 12 includes the representative's name, address, and telephone number. All 13 communications and actions regarding testing of all equipment submitted to 14 the State Materials Laboratory shall be made through this representative. 15 These communications and actions shall include, but not be limited to, the 16 following: 17

18 All notifications of failure or rejection, demonstration of the equipment, and 19 the return of rejected equipment. 20

21 The State Materials Laboratory testing process will consist of the following four 22 separate stages: 23

24 a. Delivery and Assembly 25 b. Demonstration and Documentation 26 c. Performance Test 27 d. Operational Test 28

29 Testing will follow in the correct order with no time gaps between stages 30 unless mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and State Materials 31 Laboratory. 32

33 Stage 1 Delivery Assembly 34 All components for the complete traffic control systems, including the 35 necessary test equipment, shall be assembled and ready for 36 demonstration within ten working days of delivery to the Materials 37 Laboratory. The systems shall simulate the operations as installed in the 38 field. 39

40 Equipment and prerequisites necessary to complete this stage shall 41 include: 42

43 a. Detection Simulator: 44

The detection simulator shall provide at least one detector per 45 phase and variable traffic volumes. One simulator shall be 46 required for every two controllers tested. 47

48 b. Communications Network: 49

Locations, specified for coordinating communications equipment 50 and cable, shall be completely wired to provide an operational 51 communications system between all local and master controllers. 52


1 The Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, and materials necessary to 2 assemble all control equipment complete and ready for demonstration. 3 Materials and equipment used for this stage that are not required for field 4 installation shall remain the property of the Contractor. Failure to 5 complete this stage within ten working days will result in rejection of the 6 entire system. 7

8 Stage 2 Demonstration and Documentation 9 This stage shall be completed within seven working days following the 10 completion of Stage 1. Failure to do so shall result in rejection of the 11 entire shipment. 12 13 All documentation shall be furnished with the control equipment prior to 14 the start of testing. If corrections to any document are deemed necessary 15 by the State, the Contractor shall submit this updated version prior to the 16 final approval by the State Materials Laboratory. The documents to be 17 supplied shall consist of or provide the following: 18

19 a. A Complete accounting of all the control and test equipment 20

required. 21 22 b. A complete set of documents which shall include: 23

24 1. Serial numbers when applicable. 25 26 2. Written certification that equipment of the same make 27

and model has been tested according to NEMA 28 Environmental Standards and Test Procedures, and 29 has met or exceeded these standards. The certificate 30 shall include equipment model number and where, 31 when, and by whom the tests were conducted. This 32 certificate shall accompany each shipment of 33 controllers. 34

35 3. Reproducible mylar wiring diagrams and two blue-tone 36

prints for each controller and cabinet supplied. The 37 sheet size shall be 24 inches by 36 inches. 38

39 4. Wiring diagrams for all auxiliary equipment furnished. 40

One set per cabinet. 41 42 5. Complete operations and maintenance manuals 43

including complete and correct software listing and flow 44 charts. One set of operations and maintenance 45 manuals per cabinet; at least four but no more than ten. 46 Five sets of software listings and flow charts. 47

48 6. Complete operations and maintenance manuals for all 49

auxiliary equipment. One set per cabinet. 50 51


c. A description of the functions and the capabilities of individual 1 components and of the overall control system. 2

3 d. A presentation on how to operate the system. 4 5 e. A complete and thorough demonstration to show that all 6

components of the control system are in good condition and 7 operating properly, and proof that the controller and cabinet are 8 functioning correctly. 9

10 f. Detailed instructions for installing and operating the controller(s), 11

including explanations on the use of all features of the 12 controller(s). 13

14 g. The operational and maintenance manuals for each traffic signal 15

controller supplied including as a minimum, but not to be limited 16 to the following: 17 18

1. Detailed instructions for maintaining all hardware 19 components, controller, and auxiliary equipment. 20

21 2. A complete parts list detailing all manufacturer's 22

identification codes. 23 24 3. Detailed wiring diagrams and schematics indicating 25

voltage levels and pictorial description, part name, and 26 location for all hardware components, controller, and 27 auxiliary equipment. 28

29 The demonstration shall include the following: 30

31 a. Phasing per plans and all phase timing. 32 33 b. Detection including any special detector functions. 34 35 c. Conflict Monitor and Load Switches. 36 37 d. Special Coordination including communication equipment. 38

39 This demonstration shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence 40 of State Materials personnel. The Contractor shall supply any item not 41 accounted for within five working days of the accounting. Controllers and 42 cabinets that remain incomplete five working days after notification shall 43 be rejected and returned freight collect to the Contractor. 44

45 Stage 3 Unit Performance Test 46 A minimum of ten working days shall be allowed for one or two cabinet 47 assemblies and five working days for each additional assembly. 48 49 The unit performance test will be conducted by State Personnel to 50 determine if each and every controller cabinet assembly complies with 51


NEMA Environmental Standards as stated in NEMA publication No. TS 1-1 1976, Part 2. 2 3 Any unit submitted, whose failure has been corrected, shall be retested 4 from the beginning of this stage. 5

6 Stage 4 Operational Test 7 All control and auxiliary equipment shall operate without failure for a 8 minimum of ten consecutive days. If an isolated controller is specified, it 9 shall operate as an isolated controller. If a coordinated system is 10 specified, it shall operate as a total coordinated system with the master 11 and all local controllers operating in all coordinated modes. 12 13 If any failure occurs during this stage, all equipment for this stage shall be 14 restarted following completion of repairs. 15

16 Equipment Failure Or Rejection 17 Equipment failures shall be defined as set forth in NEMA Publication No. 18 TS 1-1976. Failure of load switches, detector amplifiers, and conflict 19 monitors shall not result in rejection of the controller or cabinet. However, 20 the Contractor shall stock, as replacements, approximately 30 percent 21 more than the total for these three items. All excess material shall remain 22 the property of the Contractor following completion of all tests. 23 24 If a failure occurs during Stages 3 or 4, repairs shall be made and 25 completed within ten working days following notification of the malfunction. 26 The Contractor shall have the option of making onsite repairs or repair 27 them at a site selected by the Contractor. Failure to complete repairs 28 within the allotted time shall result in rejection of the controller or cabinet 29 assembly under test. 30 31 A total of two failures will be allowed from the start of Stage 3 to the end of 32 Stage 4. If three failures occur during this time period, the equipment will 33 be rejected. New equipment of different serial numbers submitted as 34 replacement shall be received by the Materials Laboratory for testing 35 under Stage 3 within ten working days following notification of rejection. 36 Failure to meet this requirement within the allotted time will result in 37 rejection of the entire system. Software errors will be considered as 38 failures and, if not corrected within ten working days, the entire system will 39 be subject to rejection. Following rejection of any equipment, the 40 Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred. This shall include 41 but not be limited to all shipping costs. 42

43 When the traffic control program is supplied by the State, the Contractor 44 shall prove that any failures are, in fact, caused by that program and not 45 the hardware. 46 47 All component or system failures, except load switches and detector 48 amplifiers, shall be documented. This documentation shall be submitted 49 prior to commencing the test or stage in which the failure was found and 50 shall provide the following information: 51

52


a. A detailed description of the failure. 1 b. The steps undertaken to correct the failure. 2 c. A list of parts that were replaced, if any. 3

4 Upon completion of the tests, the equipment will be visually inspected. If 5 material changes are observed which adversely affect the life of the 6 equipment, the cause and conditions shall be noted. The Contractor will 7 immediately be given notice to correct these conditions. If not repaired 8 within ten working days of notification, the equipment will be subject to 9 rejection. A final accounting shall be made of all equipment prior to 10 approval. 11 12 All failed or rejected equipment shall be removed from the Materials 13 Laboratory within three working days following notification; otherwise, the 14 failed or rejected equipment will be returned, freight collect, to the 15 Contractor. 16 17 Following final approval by the State Materials Laboratory, all equipment 18 shall be removed from the State Materials Laboratory and delivered to 19 sites as designated elsewhere in this contract. 20

21 Guarantees 22 Guarantees and warranties shall be in accordance with Section 1-05.10. 23

24 8-20.5.GR8 25

Payment 26 27 8-20.5.INST1.GR8 28 Section 8-20.5 is supplemented with the following: 29 30 8-20.5.OPT1.GB8 31

(April 6, 2015) 32 “Removing Traffic Signal Shaft Obstructions”, estimated. 33 Payment for removing obstructions, as defined in Section 8-20.3(4) as supplemented in 34 these Special Provisions, will be made for the changes in shaft construction methods 35 necessary to remove the obstruction. The Contractor and the Engineer shall evaluate 36 the effort made and reach agreement on the equipment and employees utilized, and the 37 number of hours involved for each. Once these cost items and their duration have been 38 agreed upon, the payment amount will be determined using the rate and markup 39 methods specified in Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of providing a common proposal 40 for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item "Removing 41 Traffic Signal Shaft Obstructions" in the bid proposal to become a part of the total bid by 42 the Contractor. 43 44 If the shaft construction equipment is idled as a result of the obstruction removal work 45 and cannot be reasonably reassigned within the project, then standby payment for the 46 idled equipment will be added to the payment calculations. If labor is idled as a result of 47 the obstruction removal work and cannot be reasonably reassigned within the project, 48 then all labor costs resulting from Contractor labor agreements and established 49 Contractor policies will be added to the payment calculations. 50 51


The Contractor shall perform the amount of obstruction work estimated by the 1 Contracting Agency within the original time of the contract. The Engineer will consider a 2 time adjustment and additional compensation for costs related to the extended duration 3 of the shaft construction operations, provided: 4 5

1. the dollar amount estimated by the Contracting Agency has been exceeded, 6 and 7

8 2. the Contractor shows that the obstruction removal work represents a delay to 9

the completion of the project based on the current progress schedule provided 10 in accordance with Section 1-08.3. 11

12

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


DIVISION9.GR9 Materials 1 2 APPENDIX1.FR9 Appendices 3

(January 2, 2012) 4 Use when only one appendix is included in the Contract. 5 If 1-02.4.OPT1.FR1 is used, then the Summary of Geotechnical 6 Conditions Report must be an appendix as required in Section 1-7 02.4(2) of the Standard Specifications. 8 (1 fill-in) 9

10 APPENDIX2.FR9 Appendices 11

(January 2, 2012) 12 Must be used when multiple appendices are included in the Contract. 13 If 1-02.4.OPT1.FR1 is used, then the Summary of Geotechnical 14 Conditions Report is an appendix as required in Section 1-02.4(2) and 15 must be included as an appendix and is part of the fill-in. 16 (1 fill-in) 17

18 STDPLANS.GR9 Standard Plans 19

(January 7April 1, 2019) 20 Use in all projects. 21

General Special Provisions Division Standard Plans Page 1 April 1, 2019

(January 7April 1, 2019) 1

Standard Plans 2

The State of Washington Standard Plans for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction M21-3 01 transmitted under Publications Transmittal No. PT 16-048, effective August 6, 2018 is 4 made a part of this contract. 5 6 The Standard Plans are revised as follows: 7

8 A-40.10 9 Section View, PCCP to HMA Longitudinal Joint, callout, was – “Sawed Groove ~ Width 10 3/16” (IN) MIN. to 5/16” (IN) MAX. ~ Depth 1” (IN) MIN. ~ see Std. Spec. 5-04.3(12)B” is 11 revised to read; “Sawed Groove ~ Width 3/16” (IN) MIN. to 5/16” (IN) MAX. ~ Depth 1” 12 (IN) MIN. ~ see Std. Spec. Section 5-04.3(12)A2” 13 Section View, Transverse Contraction Joint, dimension, was – “D/4” is revised to read: 14 “D/3 to D/4” 15 16 A-50.10 17 Sheet 2 of 2, Plan, with Single Slope Barrier, reference C-14a is revised to C-70.10 18 19 A-50.20 20 Sheet 2 of 2, Plan, with Anchored Barrier, reference C-14a is revised to C-70.10 21 22 A-50.30 23 Sheet 2 of 2, Plan (top), reference C-14a is revised to C-70.1 24 25 B-10.60 26 DELETED 27 28 B-82.20 29 DELETED 30 31 B-90.40 32 Valve Detail - DELETED 33 34 C-1b 35 STEEL POST Detail on page 2: The upper callout is changed from “3/4” (IN) DIAM. 36 HOLE (TYP.)” to “3/4” (IN) OR 13/16” (IN) DIAM. HOLE (TYP.)” 37 38 C-2C 39 CASE 9A (typical of 2 callouts): The dimensions were “3’-0” MIN. ~ TO FACE OF 40 GUARDRAIL”. are now revised to read “5’-0” MIN ~ TO FACE OF GUARDRAIL”. 41 42 C-4b 43 DELETED 44 45 C-4e 46 DELETED 47 48 C-4f 49


Sheet 1, BULLNOSE GRADING PLAN: Slopes shall be not steeper than 10H:1V for the 1 bullnose guardrail system including slopes into the guardrail face to 1 foot behind the 2 guardrail post. 3 4 Sheet 2, POST 1R & 1L, 2R & 2L, 3R TO 8R and 3L TO 8L, 9R TO 12 R and 9L TO 5 12L elevation view details: Slopes into the guardrail face to 1 foot behind the guardrail 6 post shall not be steeper than 10H:1V. 7 8 Sheet 3, SECTION B, callout – was: “THE NUT SHALL BE ASTM A563D STEEL, AND 9 GALVANIZED ACCORDING TO STANDARD SPEC. 9-16.3(3).” Is revised to read: 10 ”THE NUT SHALL BE ASTM A307 STEEL, AND GALVANIZED ACCORDING TO 11 STANDARD SPEC. 9-16.3(3).” 12 13 C-20.10 14 STEEL POST Detail: The upper callout is changed from “1/4” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR 15 ANTI-ROTATION 16d NAIL (TYP.)” to “1/4” (IN) OR 13/16” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR 16 ANTI-ROTATION 16d NAIL (TYP.)” 17 The lower callout is changed from “3/4” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR BUTTON HEAD BOLT 18 (TYP.)” to “3/4” (IN) OR 13/16” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR BUTTON HEAD BOLT (TYP.)” 19 20 C-20.14 21 CASE 3-31: The dimension was “5’-0” MIN” from the back of guardrail to the center of 22 railroad signal support is now revised to “5’-0” MIN” from face of guardrail to the front 23 edge of the railroad signal support. 24 25 Note 3, was – “The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail 26 cannot exceed 10H : 1V when the face of the guardrail is less than 12’ – 0” from the 27 edge of the shoulder.” is revised to read: “The slope from the edge of the shoulder into 28 the face of the guardrail cannot be steeper than 10H : 1V when the face of the guardrail 29 is less than 12’ – 0” from the edge of the shoulder. The slope from the edge of the 30 shoulder into the face of the guardrail cannot be steeper than 6H : 1V when the 31 guardrail is 12’ – 0” or more from the edge of the shoulder.” 32 33 C-20.18 34 ALL CASES: The dimensions were “3’-0” MIN” from the face of guardrail to the front 35 edge of the fixed feature are now revised to “5’-0” MIN” from the face of guardrail to the 36 front edge of the fixed feature. 37 38 Note 1, was – “The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of the guardrail 39 should not exceed 10H : 1V when the guardrail is within 12’ – 0” from the edge of the 40 shoulder.” Is revised to read: “The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face of 41 the guardrail should not be steeper than 10H : 1V when the guardrail is less than 12’ – 42 0” from the edge of the shoulder. The slope from the edge of the shoulder into the face 43 of the guardrail should not be steeper than 6H : 1V when the guardrail is 12’ – 0” or 44 more from the edge of shoulder.” 45 46 C-20.41 47 BOX CULVERT POST, ELEVATION VIEW Detail: The upper callout is changed from 48 “3/4” (IN) DIAM. HOLE” to “3/4” (IN) OR 13/16” (IN) DIAM. HOLE” 49 50 C-20.45 51


STEEL POST Detail: The upper callout is changed from “1/4” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR 1 ANTI-ROTATION 16d NAIL (TYP.)” to “1/4” (IN) OR 13/16” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR 2 ANTI-ROTATION 16d NAIL (TYP.)” 3 The lower callout is changed from “3/4” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR BUTTON HEAD BOLT 4 (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL AT RIGHT” to “3/4” (IN) OR 13/16” (IN) DIAM. HOLE FOR 5 BUTTON HEAD BOLT (TYP.) ~ SEE DETAIL AT RIGHT” 6 7 C-22.14 8 DELETED 9 10 C-22.16 11 Note 3, formula, was: “Elevation G = (Elevation S – D x (0.1) + 31” is revised to read: 12 “Elevation G = (Elevation S – D x (0.1) + 31/12” 13 14 C-22.40 15 PLAN VIEW, MSKT-SP-MGS (TL-3) SHOWN: The dimension was “4’-0” MIN” from the 16 face of the terminal to the edge of the widened embankment is now revised to “4’-0” 17 MIN” from the back of the terminal post to the edge of the widened embankment. 18 19 Elevation View, MSKT-SP-MGS (TL-3), dimension, MSKT-SP-MGS (TL-3) SYSTEM 20 LENGTH = 50’ – 0” , dimension is revised to read: 46’ – 101/2” 21 22 Elevation View, SOFTSTOP (TL-3), dimension, SOFTSTOP (TL-3) SYSTEM 23 LENGTH = 50’ – 9 1/2”, dimension is revised to read: 50’ – 10 1/2” 24 25 Note 6, was – “…a maximum taper of 25.4 : 1 or flatter is allowed over the system 26 length of 50’ – 9 ½” with a maximum…” is revised to read: “…a maximum taper of 25.44 27 : 1 or flatter is allowed over the system length of 50’ – 10 ½” with a maximum…” 28 29 C-22.45 30 PLAN VIEW, MSKT-SP-MGS (TL-2) SHOWN: The dimension was “4’-0” MIN” from the 31 face of the terminal to the edge of the widened embankment is now revised to “4’-0” 32 MIN” from the back of the terminal post to the edge of the widened embankment. 33 34 35 Elevation View, MSKT-SP-MGS (TL-2), dimension, MSKT-SP-MGS (TL-2) SYSTEM 36 LENGTH = 25’ – 0”, dimension is revised to read 34’ – 4 1/2” 37 38 Elevation View, SOFTSTOP (TL-2), dimension, SOFTSTOP (TL-2) SYSTEM 39 LENGTH = 38’ – 3 1/2”, dimension is revised to read 38’ – 4 1/2” 40 41 Note 6, was – “…flare of 38.29 : 1 or flatter is allowed over the system length of 38’ – 3 42 ½” with a maximum…” is revised to read: “…flare of 38.38 : 1 or flatter is allowed over 43 the system length of 38’ – 4 ½” with a maximum…” 44 45 C-25.26 46 Elevation View, TYPE 23: The guardrail height dimension was 2’-8” from the top of the 47 thrie beam to the top of the bridge curb is now revised to 2’-8” from the top of the thrie 48 beam to the top of the ground line. 49 50 C-25.80 51


Plan View, callout, was – “12” (IN) BLOCKOUT” is revised to read; “12” (IN) or 8” (IN) 1 BLOCKOUT (12” (IN) SHOWN)” 2 Elevation View, add labels to posts (below view); beginning at left side of view – Label 3 Posts as follows; POST 1, POST 2 through POST 6”. 4 General Notes, add Note 6. Note reads as follows; “6. Post 1 shall use an 8 inch 5 blockout, and posts 2 through post 6 shall use 12 inch or 8 inch blockouts.” 6 7 C-40.14 8 DELETED 9 10 C-90.10 11 DELETED 12 13 D-10.10 14 Wall Type 1 may be used if no traffic barrier is attached on top of the wall. Walls with 15 traffic barriers attached on top of the wall are considered non-standard and shall be 16 designed in accordance with the current WSDOT Bridge Design Manual (BDM) and the 17 revisions stated in the 11/3/15 Bridge Design memorandum. 18 19 D-10.15 20 Wall Type 2 may be used if no traffic barrier is attached on top of the wall. Walls with 21 traffic barriers attached on top of the wall are considered non-standard and shall be 22 designed in accordance with the current WSDOT BDM and the revisions stated in the 23 11/3/15 Bridge Design memorandum. 24 25 D-10.20 26 Wall Type 3 may be used in all cases. The last sentence of Note 6 on Wall Type 3 shall 27 be revised to read: The seismic design of these walls has been completed using a site 28 adjusted (effective) peak ground acceleration of 0.32g. 29 30 D-10.25 31 Wall Type 4 may be used in all cases. The last sentence of Note 6 on Wall Type 4 shall 32 be revised to read: The seismic design of these walls has been completed using a site 33 adjusted (effective) peak ground acceleration of 0.32g. 34 35 D-10.30 36 Wall Type 5 may be used in all cases. 37 38 D-10.35 39 Wall Type 6 may be used in all cases. 40 41 D-10.40 42 Wall Type 7 may be used if no traffic barrier is attached on top of the wall. Walls with 43 traffic barriers attached on top of the wall are considered non-standard and shall be 44 designed in accordance with the current WSDOT BDM and the revisions stated in the 45 11/3/15 Bridge Design memorandum. 46 47 D-10.45 48 Wall Type 8 may be used if no traffic barrier is attached on top of the wall. Walls with 49 traffic barriers attached on top of the wall are considered non-standard and shall be 50 designed in accordance with the current WSDOT BDM and the revisions stated in the 51 revisions stated in the 11/3/15 Bridge Design memorandum. 52


1 D-15.10 2 STD Plans D-15 series “Traffic Barrier Details for Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls” 3 are withdrawn. Special designs in accordance with the current WSDOT BDM are 4 required in place of these STD Plans. 5 6 D-15.20 7 STD Plans D-15 series “Traffic Barrier Details for Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls” 8 are withdrawn. Special designs in accordance with the current WSDOT BDM are 9 required in place of these STD Plans. 10 11 D-15.30 12 STD Plans D-15 series “Traffic Barrier Details for Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls” 13 are withdrawn. Special designs in accordance with the current WSDOT BDM are 14 required in place of these STD Plans. 15 16 F-10.12 17 Section Title, was – “Depressed Curb Section” is revised to read: “Depressed Curb and 18 Gutter Section” 19 20 F-10.40 21 “EXTRUDED CURB AT CUT SLOPE”, Section detail - Deleted 22 23 F-10.42 24 DELETE – “Extruded Curb at Cut Slope” View 25 26 H-70.20 27 Sheet 2, Spacing Detail, Mailbox Support Type 1, reference to Standard Plan I-70.10 is 28 revised to H-70.10 29 30 I-30.30 31 8” Diameter Wattle Spacing Table, lower left corner, was –“Slope:1H : 1V, Maximum 32 Spacing:10’ – 0”” is revised to read: “Slope:1H : 1V, Maximum Spacing:8’ – 0””. 33 34 J-10.21 35 Note 18, was – “When service cabinet is installed within right of way fence, see 36 Standard Plan J-10.22 for details.” Is revised to read; “When service cabinet is installed 37 within right of way fence, or the meter base is mounted on the exterior of the cabinet, 38 see Standard Plan J-10.22 for details.” 39 40 J-10.22 41 Key Note 1, was – “Meter base per serving utility requirements~ as a minimum, the 42 meter base shall be safety socket box with factory-installed test bypass facility that 43 meets the requirements of EUSERC drawing 305.” Is revised to read; “Meter base per 44 serving utility requirements~ as a minimum, the meter base shall be safety socket box 45 with factory-installed test bypass facility that meets the requirements of EUSERC 46 drawing 305. When the utility requires meter base to be mounted on the side or back of 47 the service cabinet, the meter base enclosure shall be fabricated from type 304 48 stainless steel.” 49 Key Note 4, “Test with (SPDT Snap Action, Positive close 15 Amp – 120/277 volt “T” 50 rated). Is revised to read: “Test Switch (SPDT snap action, positive close 15 amp – 51 120/277 volt “T” rated).” 52


Key Note 14, was – “Hinged dead front with ¼ turn fasteners or slide latch.” Is revised to 1 read; “Hinged dead front with ¼ turn fasteners or slide latch. ~ Dead front panel bolts 2 shall not extend into the vertical limits of the breaker array(s).” 3 Key Note 15, was – “Cabinet Main Bonding Jumper. Buss shall be 4 lug tinned copper. 4 See Cabinet Main bonding Jumper detail, Standard Plan J-3b.“ is revised to read; 5 “Cabinet Main Bonding Jumper Assembly ~ Buss shall be 4 lug tinned copper ~ See 6 Standard Plan J-10.20 for Cabinet Main Bonding Jumper Assembly details.” 7 Note 1, was – “…socket box mounting detail, see Standard Plan J-3b.” is revised to 8 read to read: “…socket box mounting detail, see Standard Plan J-10.20.” 9 Note 6, was – “…See door hinge detail, Standard Plan J-3b.” is revised to read: “…See 10 door hinge detail, Standard Plan J-10.20.” 11 12 J-20.10 13 Add Note 5, “5. One accessible pedestrian signal assembly per pedestrian pushbutton 14 post.” 15 16 J-20.11 17 Sheet 2, Foundation Detail, Elevation, callout – “Type 1 Signal Pole” is revised to read: 18 “Type PS or Type 1 Signal Pole” 19 Sheet 2, Foundation Detail, Elevation, add note below Title, “(Type 1 Signal Pole 20 Shown)” 21 Add Note 6, “6. One accessible pedestrian signal assembly per pedestrian pushbutton 22 post.” 23 24 J-20.26 25 Add Note 1, “1. One accessible pedestrian pushbutton station per pedestrian 26 pushbutton post.” 27 28 J-20.16 29 View A, callout, was – LOCK NIPPLE, is revised to read; CHASE NIPPLE 30 31 J-21.10 32 Sheet 1, Elevation View, Round Concrete Foundation Detail, callout – “ANCHOR 33 BOLTS ~ ¾” (IN) x 30” (IN) FULL THREAD ~ THREE REQ’D. PER ASSEMBLY” IS 34 REVISED TO READ: “ANCHOR BOLTS ~ ¾” (IN) x 30” (IN) FULL THREAD ~ FOUR 35 REQ’D. PER ASSEMBLY” 36 Sheet 1 of 2, Elevation view (Round), add dimension depicting the distance from the top 37 of the foundation to find 2 #4 reinforcing bar shown, to read; 3” CLR.. Delete “(TYP.)” 38 from the 2 ½” CLR. dimension, depicting the distance from the bottom of the foundation 39 to find 2 # 4 reinf. Bar. 40 Sheet 1 of 2, Elevation view (Square), add dimension depicting the distance from the 41 top of the foundation to find 1 #4 reinforcing bar shown, to read; 3” CLR. Delete “(TYP.)” 42 from the 2 ½” CLR. dimension, depicting the distance from the bottom of the foundation 43 to find 1 # 4 reinf. Bar. 44 Sheet 2 of 2, Elevation view (Round), add dimension depicting the distance from the top 45 of the foundation to find 2 #4 reinforcing bar shown, to read; 3” CLR. Delete “(TYP.)” 46 from the 2 ½” CLR. dimension, depicting the distance from the bottom of the foundation 47 to find 2 # 4 reinf. Bar. 48 Sheet 2 of 2, Elevation view (Square), add dimension depicting the distance from the 49 top of the foundation to find 1 #4 reinforcing bar shown, to read; 3” CLR. Delete “(TYP.)” 50 from the 2 ½” CLR. dimension, depicting the distance from the bottom of the foundation 51 to find 1 # 4 reinf. Bar. 52


Detail F, callout, “Heavy Hex Clamping Bolt (TYP.) ~ 3/4” (IN) Diam. Torque Clamping 1 Bolts (see Note 3)” is revised to read; “Heavy Hex Clamping Bolt (TYP.) ~ 3/4” (IN) 2 Diam. Torque Clamping Bolts (see Note 1)” 3 Detail F, callout, “3/4” (IN) x 2’ – 6” Anchor Bolt (TYP.) ~ Four Required (See Note 4)” 4 is revised to read; “3/4” (IN) x 2’ – 6” Anchor Bolt (TYP.) ~ Three Required (See Note 5 2)” 6 7 J-21.15 8 Partial View, callout, was – LOCK NIPPLE ~ 1 ½” DIAM., is revised to read; CHASE 9 NIPPLE ~ 1 ½” (IN) DIAM. 10 11 J-21.16 12 Detail A, callout, was – LOCKNIPPLE, is revised to read; CHASE NIPPLE 13 14 J-22.15 15 Ramp Meter Signal Standard, elevation, dimension 4’ - 6” is revised to read; 6’-0” 16 (2x) Detail A, callout, was – LOCK NIPPLE ~ 1 ½” DIAM. is revised to read; CHASE 17 NIPPLE ~ 1 ½” (IN) DIAM. 18 19 J-40.10 20 Sheet 2 of 2, Detail F, callout, “12 – 13 x 1 ½” S.S. PENTA HEAD BOLT AND 12” S. S. 21 FLAT WASHER” is revised to read; “12 – 13 x 1 ½” S.S. PENTA HEAD BOLT AND 1/2” 22 (IN) S. S. FLAT WASHER” 23 24 J-60.14 25 All references to J-16b (6x) are revised to read; J-60.11 26 27 K-80.30 28 In the NARROW BASE, END view, the reference to Std. Plan C-8e is revised to Std. 29 Plan K-80.35 30 Plan Title, was “ALTERNATIVE TEMPORARY CONC. BARRIER (F-SHAPE)” is revised 31 to read: “CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE F” 32 33 The following are the Standard Plan numbers applicable at the time this project was 34 advertised. The date shown with each plan number is the publication approval date 35 shown in the lower right-hand corner of that plan. Standard Plans showing different 36 dates shall not be used in this contract. 37

38 A-10.10-00........8/7/07 A-40.00-00.........8/11/09 A-50.30-00…....11/17/08 A-10.20-00......10/5/07 A-40.10-03.........12/23/14 A-50.40-00…....11/17/08 A-10.30-00......10/5/07 A-40.15-00.........8/11/09 A-60.10-03........12/23/14 A-20.10-00......8/31/07 A-40.20-04.........1/18/17 A-60.20-03.........12/23/14 A-30.10-00......11/8/07 A-40.50-02.........12/23/14 A-60.30-01..........6/28/18 A-30.30-01......6/16/11 A-50.10-00…....11/17/08 A-60.40-00..........8/31/07 A-30.35-00.......10/12/07 A-50.20-01…......9/22/09 39 B-5.20-02........1/26/17 B-30.50-03.........2/27/18 B-75.20-02..........2/27/18 B-5.40-02.........1/26/17 B-30.70-04.........2/27/18 B-75.50-01..........6/10/08 B-5.60-02.........1/26/17 B-30.80-01..........2/27/18 B-75.60-00............6/8/06 B-10.20-02........3/2/18 B-30.90-02........1/26/17 B-80.20-00.........6/8/06 B-10.40-01........1/26/17 B-35.20-00..........6/8/06 B-80.40-00.........6/1/06 B-10.70-00……1/26/17 B-35.40-00..........6/8/06 B-85.10-01.........6/10/08


B-15.20-01........2/7/12 B-40.20-00..........6/1/06 B-85.20-00..........6/1/06 B-15.40-01........2/7/12 B-40.40-02........1/26/17 B-85.30-00..........6/1/06 B-15.60-02........1/26/17 B-45.20-01..........7/11/17 B-85.40-00..........6/8/06 B-20.20-02.......3/16/12 B-45.40-01..........7/21/17 B-85.50-01.........6/10/08 B-20.40-04.......2/27/18 B-50.20-00..........6/1/06 B-90.10-00….......6/8/06 B-20.60-03.......3/15/12 B-55.20-02..........2/27/18 B-90.20-00..........6/8/06 B-25.20-02........2/27/18 B-60.20-01..........6/28/18 B-90.30-00..........6/8/06 B-25.60-02.........2/27/18 B-60.40-01..........2/27/18 B-90.40-01..........1/26/17 B-30.10-03.........2/27/18 B-65.20-01..........4/26/12 B-90.50-00..........6/8/06 B-30.15-00……..2/27/18 B-65.40-00..........6/1/06 B-95.20-01..........2/3/09 B-30.20-04.........2/27/18 B-70.20-00..........6/1/06 B-95.40-01..........6/28/18 B-30.30-03.........2/27/18 B-70.60-01..........1/26/17 B-30.40-03..........2/27/18

1 C-1....................6/28/18 C-20.15-02..........6/11/14 C-40.18-03........7/21/17 C-1a.................7/14/15 C-20.18-02..........6/11/14 C-70.10-01........6/17/14 C-1b...................7/14/15 C-20.19-02..........6/11/14 C-75.10-01........6/11/14 C-1d................10/31/03 C-20.40-06..........7/21/17 C-75.20-01........6/11/14 C-2c..................6/21/06 C-20.41-01..........7/14/15 C-75.30-01........6/11/14 C-4f...................7/2/12 C-20.42-05..........7/14/15 C-80.10-01........6/11/14 C-6a................10/14/09 C-20.45.01...........7/2/12 C-80.20-01........6/11/14 C-7.....................6/16/11 C-22.16-06........7/21/17 C-80.30-01........6/11/14 C-7a...................6/16/11 C-22.40-06........7/21/17 C-80.40-01........6/11/14 C-8.....................2/10/09 C-22.45-03........7/21/17 C-80.50-00........4/8/12 C-8a...................7/25/97 C-23.60-04........7/21/17 C-85.10-00........4/8/12 C-8b....................2/29/16 C.24.10-01........6/11/14 C-85.11-00........4/8/12 C-8e....................2/21/07 C-25.20-06........7/14/15 C-85.14-01........6/11/14 C-8f.....................6/30/04 C-25.22-05........7/14/15 C-85.15-01........6/30/14 C-16a.................7/21/17 C-25.26-03........7/14/15 C-85.16-01........6/17/14 C-20.10-04.........7/21/17 C-25.30-00…….6/28/18 C-85-18-01........6/11/14 C-20.11-00……..7/21/17 C-25.80-04........7/15/16 C-85.20-01........6/11/14 C-20.14-03..........6/11/14 C-40.16-02........7/2/12

2 D-2.04-00........11/10/05 D-2.48-00........11/10/05 D-3.17-02……5/9/16 D-2.06-01........1/6/09 D-2.64-01........1/6/09 D-4.................12/11/98 D-2.08-00........11/10/05 D-2.66-00........11/10/05 D-6...................6/19/98 D-2.14-00........11/10/05 D-2.68-00........11/10/05 D-10.10-01......12/2/08 D-2.16-00........11/10/05 D-2.80-00........11/10/05 D-10.15-01......12/2/08 D-2.18-00........11/10/05 D-2.82-00........11/10/05 D-10.20-00.........7/8/08 D-2.20-00........11/10/05 D-2.84-00........11/10/05 D-10.25-00.........7/8/08 D-2.32-00........11/10/05 D-2.86-00........11/10/05 D-10.30-00.........7/8/08 D-2.34-01........1/6/09 D-2.88-00........11/10/05 D-10.35-00.........7/8/08 D-2.36-03........6/11/14 D-2.92-00........11/10/05 D-10.40-01......12/2/08 D-2.42-00........11/10/05 D-3.09-00........5/17/12 D-10.45-01......12/2/08 D-2.44-00........11/10/05 D-3.10-01……5/29/13 D-15.10-01......12/2/08 D-2.60-00........11/10/05 D-3.11-03……6/11/14 D-15.20-03........5/9/16 D-2.62-00........11/10/05 D-3.15-02……6/10/13 D-15.30-01......12/02/08 D-2.46-01........6/11/14 D-3.16-02……5/29/13

3 E-1....................2/21/07 E-4....................8/27/03 E-2....................5/29/98 E-4a..................8/27/03

4


F-10.12-03.......6/11/14 F-10.62-02........4/22/14 F-40.15-03........6/29/16 F-10.16-00.......12/20/06 F-10.64-03........4/22/14 F-40.16-03........6/29/16 F-10.18-01.........7/11/17 F-30.10-03........6/11/14 F-45.10-02........7/15/16 F-10.40-03...........6/29/16 F-40.12-03........6/29/16 F-80.10-04........7/15/16 F-10.42-00.........1/23/07 F-40.14-03........6/29/16

1 G-10.10-00........9/20/07 G-25.10-04.......6/10/13 G-90.10-03……7/11/17 G-20.10-02........6/23/15 G-30.10-04.......6/23/15 G-90.11-00……4/28/16 G-22.10-04..........6/28/18 G-50.10-03.......6/28/18 G-90.20-05……7/11/17 G-24.10-00......11/8/07 G-60.10-04.......6/28/18 G-90.30-04……7/11/17 G-24.20-01......2/7/12 G-60.20-02.......6/18/15 G-90.40-02……4/28/16 G-24.30-02......6/28/18 G-60.30-02.......6/18/15 G-95.10-02........6/28/18 G-24.40-07.....6/28/18 G-70.10-03.......6/18/15 G-95.20-03........6/28/18 G-24.50-04.....7/11/17 G-70.20-04.......7/21/17 G-95.30-03........6/28/18 G-24.60-05.....6/28/18 G-70.30-04.......7/21/17

2 H-10.10-00..........7/3/08 H-32.10-00.......9/20/07 H-70.10-01......2/7/12 H-10.15-00..........7/3/08 H-60.10-01.........7/3/08 H-70.20-01......2/16/12 H-30.10-00......10/12/07 H-60.20-01.........7/3/08 H-70.30-02......2/7/12

3 I-10.10-01.........8/11/09 I-30.20-00.........9/20/07 I-40.20-00.........9/20/07 I-30.10-02.........3/22/13 I-30.30-01.........6/10/13 I-50.20-01..........6/10/13 I-30.15-02.........3/22/13 I-30.40-01.......6/10/13 I-60.10-01..........6/10/13 I-30.16-00.........3/22/13 I-30.60-01.........3/7/18 I-60.20-01..........6/10/13 I-30.17-00.........3/22/13 I-40.10-00.........9/20/07 I-80.10-02..........7/15/16

4 J-10..................7/18/97 J-28.22-00.......8/07/07 J-50.25-00…….6/3/11 J-10.10-03……6/3/15 J-28.24-01.......6/3/15 J-50.30-00…….6/3/11 J-10.15-01........6/11/14 J-28.26-01......12/02/08 J-60.05-01…….7/21/16 J-10.16-00……6/3/15 J-28.30-03......6/11/14 J-60.11-00…....5/20/13 J-10.17-00……6/3/15 J-28.40-02......6/11/14 J-60.12-00…....5/20/13 J-10.18-00……6/3/15 J-28.42-01.......6/11/14 J-60.13-00…....6/16/10 J-10.20-01……6/1/16 J-28.43-01.......6/28/18 J-60.14-00……6/16/10 J-10.21-00……6/3/15 J-28.45-03.......7/21/16 J-75.10-02……7/10/15 J-10.22-00........5/29/13 J-28.50-03.......7/21/16 J-75.20-01……7/10/15 J-10.25-00……7/11/17 J-28.60-02.......7/21/16 J-75.30-02…….7/10/15 J-12.15-00……6/28/18 J-28.70-03.......7/21/17 J-75.40-02……6/1/16 J-12.16-00……6/28/18 J-29.10-01.......7/21/16 J-75.41-01……6/29/16 J-15.10-01........6/11/14 J-29.15-01.......7/21/16 J-75.45-02……6/1/16 J-15.15-02……7/10/15 J-29.16-02.......7/21/16 J-80.10-00……6/28/18 J-20.10-03........6/30/14 J-30.10-00…...6/18/15 J-80.15-00……6/28/18 J-20.11-02........6/30/14 J-40.05-00……7/21/16 J-81.10-00……6/28/18 J-20.15-03........6/30/14 J-40.10-04…...4/28/16 J-86.10-00……6/28/18 J-20.16-02........6/30/14 J-40.20-03…...4/28/16 J-90.10-03…….6/28/18 J-20.20-02........5/20/13 J-40.30-04……4/28/16 J-90.20-03…….6/28/18 J-20.26-01........7/12/12 J-40.35-01……5/29/13 J-90.21-02……6/28/18 J-21.10-04......6/30/14 J-40.36-02……7/21/17 J-90.50-00……6/28/18 J-21.15-01......6/10/13 J-40.37-02……7/21/17 J-21.16-01......6/10/13 J-40.38-01.......5/20/13 J-21.17-01......6/10/13 J-40.39-00……5/20/13 J-21.20-01......6/10/13 J-40.40-01……4/28/16 J-22.15-02......7/10/15 J-45.36-00……7/21/17


J-22.16-03......7/10/15 J-50.05-00……7/21/17 J-26.10-03…..7/21/16 J-50.10-00…….6/3/11 J-26.15-01…..5/17/12 J-50.11-01…….7/21/17 J-26.20-01…..6/28/18 J-50.12-01…….7/21/17 J-27.10-01…..7/21/16 J-50.15-01…….7/21/17 J-27.15-00…..3/15/12 J-50.16-01…….3/22/13 J-28.10-01......5/11/11 J-50.20-00…….6/3/11

1 K-70.20-01.......6/1/16 K-80.10-01.......6/1/16 K-80.20-00.....12/20/06 K-80.30-00.......2/21/07 K-80.35-00.......2/21/07 K-80.37-00.......2/21/07

2 L-10.10-02........6/21/12 L-40.10-02........6/21/12 L-70.10-01.......5/21/08 L-20.10-03........7/14/15 L-40.15-01........6/16/11 L-70.20-01.......5/21/08 L-30.10-02........6/11/14 L-40.20-02........6/21/12

3 M-1.20-03.........6/24/14 M-12.10-01……6/28/18 M-40.10-03......6/24/14 M-1.40-02.........6/3/11 M-15.10-01........2/6/07 M-40.20-00...10/12/07 M-1.60-02.........6/3/11 M-17.10-02........7/3/08 M-40.30-01......7/11/17 M-1.80-03.........6/3/11 M-20.10-02........6/3/11 M-40.40-00......9/20/07 M-2.20-03.........7/10/15 M-20.20-02........4/20/15 M-40.50-00......9/20/07 M-2.21-00……7/10/15 M-20.30-04........2/29/16 M-40.60-00......9/20/07 M-3.10-03.........6/3/11 M-20.40-03........6/24/14 M-60.10-01......6/3/11 M-3.20-02.........6/3/11 M-20.50-02........6/3/11 M-60.20-02......6/27/11 M-3.30-03.........6/3/11 M-24.20-02.......4/20/15 M-65.10-02......5/11/11 M-3.40-03.........6/3/11 M-24.40-02.......4/20/15 M-80.10-01......6/3/11 M-3.50-02.........6/3/11 M-24.50-00.......6/16/11 M-80.20-00......6/10/08 M-5.10-02.........6/3/11 M-24.60-04.......6/24/14 M-80.30-00......6/10/08 M-7.50-01.........1/30/07 M-24.65-00……7/11/17 M-9.50-02.........6/24/14 M-24.66-00……7/11/17 M-9.60-00……..2/10/09

M-11.10-02........7/11/17 4

April 1, 2019 Amendment/GSP Update Package · April 1, 2019 Amendment and GSP Official Update...

Documents

Transcript of April 1, 2019 Amendment/GSP Update Package · April 1, 2019 Amendment and GSP Official Update...